nanoCAD Mechanica

Version 6

User Guide

CSoft Marketing Pvt. Ltd.

©2017
nanoCAD Mechanica

Trademarks ........................................................................................................................................................32
General information ........................................................................................................................................33
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................... 33
System requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Program installation......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Launch of nanoCAD ........................................................................................................................................................... 34
Help system............................................................................................................................................................................ 35
Exit from nanoCAD.............................................................................................................................................................35
nanoCAD user interface ..................................................................................................................................37
Menu bar ................................................................................................................................................................................ 37
Toolbars .................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Drawing Window................................................................................................................................................................39
Context menu........................................................................................................................................................................ 41
Properties bar ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Command line ...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Input of commands, aliases and shortcuts ........................................................................................................ 43
Text window ................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Command Line prompt .............................................................................................................................................. 44
Format of input data .................................................................................................................................................. 45
Mathematical processor............................................................................................................................................ 45
Auto hide mode in the command line .................................................................................................................. 47
Working with commands ................................................................................................................................................ 48
Transparent commands ............................................................................................................................................ 49
Command recall............................................................................................................................................................49
Cancellation of commands ....................................................................................................................................... 49
Undo ............................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Redo 50
Settings of the right button...................................................................................................................................... 50
Status bar ............................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Managing elements of the Status bar.................................................................................................................. 52
Managing interface elements ........................................................................................................................................ 53
Color schemes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Working with documents ..............................................................................................................................55
Creation of new document .............................................................................................................................................. 55
Template usage .............................................................................................................................................................56
Opening a document.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
nanoCAD Mechanica

Replacement of missing font in the document................................................................................................. 59

Documents protection when sharing .................................................................................................................. 59
Working with document tabs ................................................................................................................................. 60
Drawing properties............................................................................................................................................................62
Closing a document............................................................................................................................................................63
Saving a document .............................................................................................................................................................64
Saving a document with another name ............................................................................................................. 65
Saving a Document or Its Part Using the WBLOCK Command................................................................. 67
AutoSaving and Backup ............................................................................................................................................ 67
AutoSaving ................................................................................................................................................................67
Backup ........................................................................................................................................................................ 69
Import ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Export ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Export of All Data......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Export of Selected Data ............................................................................................................................................. 71
Create Transmit Package................................................................................................................................................ 72
Utilities .................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Document Audit ............................................................................................................................................................74
Recovery of Document ............................................................................................................................................... 75
Audit Geometry .............................................................................................................................................................75
Purging of Document.................................................................................................................................................. 76
Convert to 2D ................................................................................................................................................................. 78
File Explorer.......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Actions .............................................................................................................................................................................. 79
File Explorer Toolbar ................................................................................................................................................. 81
Tuning nanoCAD ...............................................................................................................................................82
Mirgation of settings from previous versions ......................................................................................................... 82
Tuning program parameters......................................................................................................................................... 82
Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................................... 84

Cursor................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Select ...................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Grips...................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Color settings..................................................................................................................................................... 85
Snap settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 85
Mouse settings.................................................................................................................................................... 86

3
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line .................................................................................................................................................... 87

Graphic settings............................................................................................................................................... 88
AutoSave and Backup ..................................................................................................................................... 89
Standard directories .................................................................................................................................... 90
Template Usage................................................................................................................................................ 90
Papers ................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Raster File Formats ........................................................................................................................................ 91
Text ......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
API.......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Start Screen ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
ETransmit ........................................................................................................................................................... 92
Default raster properties ..............................................................................................................................92
Graphic subsystem settings ............................................................................................................................................ 93
Graphics hardware acceleration settings.......................................................................................................... 93
Automatic adjustment of graphic hardware acceleration................................................................... 94
OpenGL manual adjustment ..............................................................................................................................96
DirectX manual adjustment...............................................................................................................................96
Graphic subsystem common settings................................................................................................................... 97
Improved compatibility mode .......................................................................................................................... 98
Tuning the Interface.......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Toolbars tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Commands tab............................................................................................................................................................ 102
Keyboard tab............................................................................................................................................................... 105
Options tab................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Profiles tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Profile quick setting ................................................................................................................................................. 111
Design settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 111
Settings of Layers profiles ..................................................................................................................................... 113
Saving and transferring settings to another computer ............................................................................ 119
Drawing units.................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Symbol scale and measurement scale..................................................................................................................... 122
Specifying scale .......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Symbol scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 123
Measurement scale ................................................................................................................................................... 125
Coordinate systems....................................................................................................................................... 128

5
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specifying coordinates................................................................................................................................................... 128

Cartesian coordinates ............................................................................................................................................. 128
Polar coordinates ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
Specifying points with “direction – distance”................................................................................................ 130
User coordinate system ................................................................................................................................................. 131
Changing UCS position............................................................................................................................................ 131
World coordinate system ................................................................................................................................. 131
Changing the UCS position from the command line............................................................................. 132
Aligning UCS to an object ................................................................................................................................ 133
New origin for coordinates ............................................................................................................................. 134
New origin for coordinates and rotation angle ..................................................................................... 134
UCS icon......................................................................................................................................................................... 135
Named UCS................................................................................................................................................................... 135
Named UCS tab..................................................................................................................................................... 136
Orthographic UCS tab ....................................................................................................................................... 137
Settings tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
UCS for viewports ...................................................................................................................................................... 140
Precision tools ................................................................................................................................................ 141
Precision modes ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
Snap and Grid mode ................................................................................................................................................. 142
Drawing limits ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
Polar Tracking mode ............................................................................................................................................... 145
Object snap mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 147
Snap to raster objects.............................................................................................................................................. 154
Settings of raster snap ...................................................................................................................................... 154
Object Snap tracking mode ................................................................................................................................... 156
Display of snap elements........................................................................................................................................ 158
ORTHO mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 159
Navigation in the document ....................................................................................................................... 161
Display modes.................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Pan command ............................................................................................................................................................. 161
Zoom ............................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Zoom 1:1.................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Zoom All .................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Zoom Selected ....................................................................................................................................................... 164
Zoom Window....................................................................................................................................................... 164

6
nanoCAD Mechanica

Zoom In .................................................................................................................................................................... 164

Zoom Out................................................................................................................................................................. 164
3D navigation ............................................................................................................................................................. 164
3D Orbit ................................................................................................................................................................... 164
Free Orbit................................................................................................................................................................ 165
3D-Fly ....................................................................................................................................................................... 166
3D-Walk .................................................................................................................................................................. 167
Plan 168
Managing display of line weight on the screen................................................................................................... 168
Lineweight Settings Dialog ................................................................................................................................... 168
Managing named views ................................................................................................................................................ 169
Order of objects................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Bring to Front ............................................................................................................................................................. 173
Send to Back ................................................................................................................................................................ 173
Bring Forward ............................................................................................................................................................ 173
Send Backward .......................................................................................................................................................... 174
Bring Texts to the Front ......................................................................................................................................... 174
Bring Dimensions to the Front ............................................................................................................................ 174
Bring Texts and Dimensions to the Front ....................................................................................................... 174
Send Hatches to the Back ...................................................................................................................................... 175
Control the Display of Objects .................................................................................................................................... 175
Isolate Objects............................................................................................................................................................. 176
Hide Objects ................................................................................................................................................................. 176
Unisolate Objects ....................................................................................................................................................... 176
Viewports of Model Space ............................................................................................................................................ 176
1 Viewport .................................................................................................................................................................... 177
2 Viewports Vertical................................................................................................................................................. 177
2 Viewports Horizontal........................................................................................................................................... 177
3 Viewports .................................................................................................................................................................. 177
4 Viewports .................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Named viewports ...................................................................................................................................................... 178
Managing viewports from the command line ............................................................................................... 181
Image regeneration ........................................................................................................................................................ 183
Regeneration............................................................................................................................................................... 183
Redrawing .................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Objects’ properties ........................................................................................................................................ 184

7
nanoCAD Mechanica

“Properties” bar................................................................................................................................................................ 184

Creation of custom properties fields ................................................................................................................. 186
Drawing Explorer ............................................................................................................................................................ 189
Select Color Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................. 192
Index Color tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 193
True Color tab............................................................................................................................................................. 194
Distributing objects by layers ..................................................................................................................................... 196
Layers.................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Editing of a layer’s parameters ........................................................................................................................... 200
To select layers in the dialog box ................................................................................................................. 200
To sort layers by property ............................................................................................................................... 200
Specifying the color, type and width of lines in the layer................................................................... 200
Creation of a new layer..................................................................................................................................... 200
Renaming a layer ................................................................................................................................................ 201
Removing a layer................................................................................................................................................. 201
Removing of used layers ................................................................................................................................... 201
Making a layer active ........................................................................................................................................ 202
Controlling layer visibility ............................................................................................................................... 202
Freezing a layer ................................................................................................................................................... 202
Freezing layers in the viewports of a layout............................................................................................ 203
Redefinition of layer’s properties in viewports....................................................................................... 203
Lock a layer............................................................................................................................................................ 204
Controlling layer printability ......................................................................................................................... 205
View mode of selected layers................................................................................................................................ 205
Creating and editing group of layers................................................................................................................ 206
Creation of a new group of layers ................................................................................................................ 206
Editing a group of layers.................................................................................................................................. 207
Creating and editing filters ................................................................................................................................... 207
Creation of a new filter ..................................................................................................................................... 208
Editing layers filter............................................................................................................................................. 209
“All used layers” filter ........................................................................................................................................ 210
“Invert layers” checkbox................................................................................................................................... 210
Configurations of layers ......................................................................................................................................... 210
Tools for working with layers .............................................................................................................................. 211
Make Object’s layer current ............................................................................................................................ 212

8
nanoCAD Mechanica

Layer walk.............................................................................................................................................................. 212

9
nanoCAD Mechanica

Match layer ............................................................................................................................................................ 213

Change to current layer.................................................................................................................................... 215
Copy objects to new layer ................................................................................................................................ 215
Isolate....................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Layer off .................................................................................................................................................................. 217
Turn on all layers ................................................................................................................................................ 218
Layer freeze ........................................................................................................................................................... 219
Thaw all layers ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
Layer lock ............................................................................................................................................................... 220
Layer unlock .......................................................................................................................................................... 220
Merge layer ............................................................................................................................................................ 221
Delete layer ............................................................................................................................................................ 221
Line Types ........................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Linetype Editor........................................................................................................................................................... 225
Creation of a new line type.................................................................................................................................... 228
Managing the transparency of objects ................................................................................................................... 228
Geometric objects .......................................................................................................................................... 230
Construction and reference geometry .................................................................................................................... 230
Point................................................................................................................................................................................ 230
Size and style of points ...................................................................................................................................... 231
Infinite Lines................................................................................................................................................................ 232
Ray 232
Construction Line ................................................................................................................................................ 232
Linear objects .................................................................................................................................................................... 234
Line by two points ..................................................................................................................................................... 234
Polyline .......................................................................................................................................................................... 235
Multiline ........................................................................................................................................................................ 237
Multiline Styles ..................................................................................................................................................... 238
Polygon .......................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Rectangle ...................................................................................................................................................................... 242
Rectangle by two points ................................................................................................................................... 243
Rectangle by three points ................................................................................................................................ 244
Helix 244
Curved objects ................................................................................................................................................................... 245
Arc 245
Arc by three points.............................................................................................................................................. 245
9
nanoCAD Mechanica

Arc by center, start and end............................................................................................................................ 246

Arc by continue .................................................................................................................................................... 246
Arc by start, center and end............................................................................................................................ 247
Arc by start, center and angle........................................................................................................................ 247
Arc by start, center and chord length......................................................................................................... 247
Arc by start, end and angle ............................................................................................................................. 248
Arc by start, end and direction ...................................................................................................................... 248
Arc by start, end and radius............................................................................................................................ 249
Arc by center, start and chord length......................................................................................................... 249
Arc by center, start and angle........................................................................................................................ 249
Arc by center, angles and radius .................................................................................................................. 250
Circle ............................................................................................................................................................................... 251
Circle by center and radius ............................................................................................................................. 251
Circle by two tangents and radius ............................................................................................................... 251
Circle by center and diameter........................................................................................................................ 252
Circle by diameter ............................................................................................................................................... 252
Circle by three points ......................................................................................................................................... 253
Donut .............................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Spline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 254
Ellipse ............................................................................................................................................................................. 255
Ellipse by center and radiuses ....................................................................................................................... 255
Ellipse by diameter and radius...................................................................................................................... 255
Elliptic Arc .............................................................................................................................................................. 256
Creation of ellipses and elliptic arcs with one command................................................................... 257
Add selected ................................................................................................................................................................. 258
Editing objects ................................................................................................................................................ 259
Selection of objects .......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Selection of objects using the command line................................................................................................. 261
Selection of all objects ............................................................................................................................................. 263
Remove from Selection ........................................................................................................................................... 263
Leave in Selection...................................................................................................................................................... 263
Invert Selection .......................................................................................................................................................... 263
Selection of superimposed objects ..................................................................................................................... 264
Selection of objects using the Properties bar ................................................................................................ 265
Mode and commands to select objects ....................................................................................................... 265
To exclude objects from a selection set ...................................................................................................... 267
10
nanoCAD Mechanica

To leave objects in a selection set................................................................................................................. 267

Quick selection of objects ....................................................................................................................................... 268
“Quick select” functional bar .......................................................................................................................... 273
Ways to edit objects ........................................................................................................................................................ 274
Copy of objects properties ..................................................................................................................................... 274
Copying and insertion of objects using clipboard ....................................................................................... 276
Cut 276
Copy 276
Copy With Base Point ........................................................................................................................................ 277
Paste ......................................................................................................................................................................... 277
Paste as block........................................................................................................................................................ 278
Paste as raster ...................................................................................................................................................... 278
Paste to Original Coordinates ........................................................................................................................ 279
Editing objects using ordinary grips................................................................................................................. 279
Editing objects using multifunctional grips................................................................................................... 281
Segment editing ................................................................................................................................................... 281
Arc editing .............................................................................................................................................................. 282
Spline editing ........................................................................................................................................................ 282
Polyline editing..................................................................................................................................................... 283
Editing viewports of paper space ................................................................................................................. 285
Editing hatch and fill ......................................................................................................................................... 285
Commands to edit geometric objects ...................................................................................................................... 288
Lengthen objects........................................................................................................................................................ 288
Trim vectors ................................................................................................................................................................ 289
Smart trim.................................................................................................................................................................... 291
Extend vectors ............................................................................................................................................................ 292
Break vectors .............................................................................................................................................................. 294
Break of object in two points ......................................................................................................................... 294
Break of object in one point ............................................................................................................................ 295
Break vectors at point ............................................................................................................................................. 295
Break All Vectors at Point ..................................................................................................................................... 296
Reverse........................................................................................................................................................................... 296
Join objects ................................................................................................................................................................... 296
Editing a polyline ...................................................................................................................................................... 297
Editing a spline........................................................................................................................................................... 299
Commands to edit objects ............................................................................................................................................ 301
11
nanoCAD Mechanica

Erase ............................................................................................................................................................................... 301

Copy 302
Mirror ............................................................................................................................................................................. 303
Offset ............................................................................................................................................................................... 304
Array............................................................................................................................................................................... 305
Rectangular array .............................................................................................................................................. 306
Polar array............................................................................................................................................................. 307
Move................................................................................................................................................................................ 309
Rotate ............................................................................................................................................................................. 310
Scale311
Stretch............................................................................................................................................................................ 312
Align ................................................................................................................................................................................ 313
Distributing copies.................................................................................................................................................... 314
Divide........................................................................................................................................................................ 314
Measure ................................................................................................................................................................... 315
Chamfer ......................................................................................................................................................................... 316
Fillet319
Explode .......................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Explode all objects .................................................................................................................................................... 322
Creating and editing complex objects .................................................................................................... 323
Groups of objects .............................................................................................................................................................. 323
Blocks .................................................................................................................................................................................... 328
Creation of a block.................................................................................................................................................... 329
Block attributes ......................................................................................................................................................... 331
To create an attribute ....................................................................................................................................... 331
Managing visibility of block’s all attributes in the document .......................................................... 334
Extracting data from attributes ......................................................................................................................... 335
Block Insertion ........................................................................................................................................................... 336
Redefinition of a block ............................................................................................................................................ 338
Redefinition of block’s attributes ................................................................................................................. 338
Managing blocks in a current drawing ........................................................................................................... 339
Block editor.................................................................................................................................................................. 340
Exploding block insertion ...................................................................................................................................... 341
Saving a block in a separate file ......................................................................................................................... 341
Insert External Reference............................................................................................................................................. 343
Edit references .................................................................................................................................................................. 347
12
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add objects to the working set ............................................................................................................................ 349

Remove objects from the working set .............................................................................................................. 349
Save external reference changes ........................................................................................................................ 350
Discard external reference changes .................................................................................................................. 350
External references control ......................................................................................................................................... 350
Change of the external reference to the raster image............................................................................... 354
Bind external references ........................................................................................................................................ 356
Bind named objects of external references .................................................................................................... 356
Working with raster images ....................................................................................................................................... 359
Insert raster image ................................................................................................................................................... 360
Create new image and rasterize objects ......................................................................................................... 362
New Image from Selection .............................................................................................................................. 362
Save as raster ........................................................................................................................................................ 366
Create New Raster Image ................................................................................................................................ 367
Merge data on raster images ......................................................................................................................... 368
Displaying quality of raster images .................................................................................................................. 369
Image Adjust ......................................................................................................................................................... 369
Quality of raster images ................................................................................................................................... 371
Separate Raster Image ........................................................................................................................................... 371
Embed Raster Image................................................................................................................................................ 372
Editing of Raster Images........................................................................................................................................ 373
Cropping of raster images ............................................................................................................................... 373
Correction by four points ................................................................................................................................. 375
Mirroring ................................................................................................................................................................ 378
Rotation................................................................................................................................................................... 378
Deskewing .............................................................................................................................................................. 379
Pixel drawing ........................................................................................................................................................ 380
Floodfilling ............................................................................................................................................................. 381
Image settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 381
TIFF saving options ............................................................................................................................................ 382
JPG and JPEG saving options .......................................................................................................................... 385
Underlays ............................................................................................................................................................................ 385
Insert Underlay .......................................................................................................................................................... 386
Show boundary ................................................................................................................................................................. 388
Setting of the show boundary for the block or external reference ...................................................... 388
Setting of the show boundary for a raster image........................................................................................ 392
13
nanoCAD Mechanica

Hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................................................... 394

Add hyperlinks to the document ......................................................................................................................... 395
The “Existing file or Web Page” tab ............................................................................................................ 395
The “View of This Drawing” tab.................................................................................................................... 396
The “E-mail Address” tab ................................................................................................................................. 397
Edit hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................................... 398
Execution of Drawings commands........................................................................................................... 400
The Filling and Hatch commands ............................................................................................................................. 400
Gradient fill .................................................................................................................................................................. 408
Fast Hatch .................................................................................................................................................................... 410
Fast Gradient............................................................................................................................................................... 410
Modify Hatched Areas ............................................................................................................................................. 410
Shape..................................................................................................................................................................................... 411
FillShapes ............................................................................................................................................................................ 412
Boundary ............................................................................................................................................................................. 414
Solid 415
Wipeout................................................................................................................................................................................ 416
Revision Cloud ................................................................................................................................................................... 417
Work with text .................................................................................................................................................................. 418
Text 418
Multiline text ............................................................................................................................................................... 420
Background Mask ............................................................................................................................................... 423
Editing Text ................................................................................................................................................................. 424
Justification of the text objects ...................................................................................................................... 425
Editing the content of the text objects ....................................................................................................... 428
Creating a text style ................................................................................................................................................. 432
Spellchecker................................................................................................................................................................. 435
Find and Replace Text ............................................................................................................................................. 437
Convert Text to Multiline Text ............................................................................................................................. 441
Change Text Case ...................................................................................................................................................... 442
Quick Text mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 443
Fields............................................................................................................................................................................... 443
“Field” dialog box ................................................................................................................................................ 444
Update Field .......................................................................................................................................................... 446
Edit Field ................................................................................................................................................................. 446
Convert Field to Text.......................................................................................................................................... 447
14
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensioning..................................................................................................................................................................... 447
Some features of nanoCAD’s dimensioning.................................................................................................... 448
Set the Scale for Dimensions........................................................................................................................... 448
Dimensioning with a single command ....................................................................................................... 449
Linear dimensions..................................................................................................................................................... 451
Horizontal, vertical and aligned dimensioning...................................................................................... 451
Ordinate dimensioning ..................................................................................................................................... 455
Group dimensioning ........................................................................................................................................... 458
Base dimensioning .............................................................................................................................................. 460
Chain dimensioning............................................................................................................................................ 461
Radial dimensions..................................................................................................................................................... 462
Diameter dimensioning .................................................................................................................................... 462
Radial dimensioning .......................................................................................................................................... 464
Big radius dimensioning .................................................................................................................................. 465
Angular dimensions ................................................................................................................................................. 466
Arc length ..................................................................................................................................................................... 468
Dimensions editing.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
Break and Restore dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 474
Dimension Break ................................................................................................................................................. 474
Dimension Restore .............................................................................................................................................. 475
Explode dimensions .................................................................................................................................................. 475
Dimension styles............................................................................................................................................................... 475
Modify a dimension style........................................................................................................................................ 479
The “Lines” tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 480
The “Symbols and arrows” tab ...................................................................................................................... 482
The “Text” tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 484
The “Fit” tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 487
The “Primary units” tab.................................................................................................................................... 488
The “Alternate units” tab ................................................................................................................................. 491
The “Tolerances” tab ......................................................................................................................................... 493
Notes...................................................................................................................................................................................... 496
Mechanical note......................................................................................................................................................... 496
Construction note...................................................................................................................................................... 498
Comb leader note ...................................................................................................................................................... 500
Section note ................................................................................................................................................................. 502
Note for multilayered constructions ................................................................................................................. 503
15
nanoCAD Mechanica

Node note...................................................................................................................................................................... 505

Linear aligned note .................................................................................................................................................. 507
Chain note .................................................................................................................................................................... 509
Editing the leaders.................................................................................................................................................... 511
Detach leader ........................................................................................................................................................ 512
Append leader....................................................................................................................................................... 512
Edit leader .............................................................................................................................................................. 513
Advanced grips for design elements.................................................................................................................. 513
Mechanical note................................................................................................................................................... 514
Construction note................................................................................................................................................ 515
Comb leader note ................................................................................................................................................ 515
Section note ........................................................................................................................................................... 516
Note for multilayered constructions ........................................................................................................... 517
Node note................................................................................................................................................................ 518
Linear aligned note ............................................................................................................................................ 518
Chain note .............................................................................................................................................................. 519
Table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 520
Tables.................................................................................................................................................................................... 520
Editing Tables on the Drawing............................................................................................................................ 527
Interface of the Table Editor Dialog ................................................................................................................. 530
Basic Tools.............................................................................................................................................................. 535
Editing the Size of Rows and Columns ....................................................................................................... 540
Import, Export from MS Excel........................................................................................................................ 541
Page Division......................................................................................................................................................... 541
Convert table ......................................................................................................................................................... 546
Cell Properties ...................................................................................................................................................... 547
Expression builder interface........................................................................................................................... 559
Report creation .................................................................................................................................................... 564
Insert material ........................................................................................................................................................... 577
Getting inquiry .................................................................................................................................................................. 577
Distance......................................................................................................................................................................... 577
Point coordinates ...................................................................................................................................................... 578
Common Length......................................................................................................................................................... 578
Common Area ............................................................................................................................................................. 578
Inquiry............................................................................................................................................................................ 579
Set Variable.................................................................................................................................................................. 581
16
nanoCAD Mechanica

Calculator............................................................................................................................................................................ 582
Notepad................................................................................................................................................................................ 583
Features of the design elements ................................................................................................................................ 587
Commands for editing nanoCAD’s objects...................................................................................................... 587
The Edit command.............................................................................................................................................. 587
The DDEdit command ....................................................................................................................................... 588
The Fedit command............................................................................................................................................ 588
The In Place Edit command .................................................................................................................................. 588
Parameters redefinition ......................................................................................................................................... 589
Regenerate ................................................................................................................................................................... 591
Create 3D objects ........................................................................................................................................... 592
Surfaces................................................................................................................................................................................ 592
Box 592
Wedge ............................................................................................................................................................................ 593
Cone 593
Sphere ............................................................................................................................................................................ 594
Torus............................................................................................................................................................................... 595
Pyramid ......................................................................................................................................................................... 595
Dish 597
Dome............................................................................................................................................................................... 598
Mesh598
3D Mesh ......................................................................................................................................................................... 599
3D Face .......................................................................................................................................................................... 600
Setting of the orthographic and isometric views ............................................................................................... 601
Orthographic views .................................................................................................................................................. 601
Set Top ..................................................................................................................................................................... 601
Set Bottom .............................................................................................................................................................. 601
Set Left ..................................................................................................................................................................... 601
Set Right .................................................................................................................................................................. 601
Set Front.................................................................................................................................................................. 601
Set Back ................................................................................................................................................................... 602
Isometric views........................................................................................................................................................... 602
SW Isometric ......................................................................................................................................................... 602
SE Isometric ........................................................................................................................................................... 602
NE Isometric .......................................................................................................................................................... 602
NW Isometric ........................................................................................................................................................ 602
17
nanoCAD Mechanica

Visual styles ........................................................................................................................................................................ 602

2D Wireframe ............................................................................................................................................................. 603
3D Wireframe ............................................................................................................................................................. 604
3D Hidden ..................................................................................................................................................................... 604
Flat Shaded .................................................................................................................................................................. 604
Gouraud Shaded ........................................................................................................................................................ 604
Flat Shaded with Edges .......................................................................................................................................... 604
Gouraud Shaded with Edges ................................................................................................................................ 605
Point Clouds ..................................................................................................................................................... 606
Import Point Clouds........................................................................................................................................................ 606
Display Point Clouds Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 608
Display Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 608
Point Cloud Display Style ....................................................................................................................................... 609
Clip Point Clouds........................................................................................................................................................ 615
Clip point clouds by 2 points of rectangle ................................................................................................. 615
Clip point clouds by 3 points of rectangle ................................................................................................. 616
Clip point clouds by polygon........................................................................................................................... 616
Clip undo ................................................................................................................................................................. 616
Reset all ................................................................................................................................................................... 617
Point clouds section.................................................................................................................................................. 617
Point clouds vertical section........................................................................................................................... 617
Point cloud horizontal section....................................................................................................................... 618
Point cloud cut section ...................................................................................................................................... 618
Information ........................................................................................................................................................................ 619
Point cloud info .......................................................................................................................................................... 619
Tree statistics ........................................................................................................................................................ 619
Meta data statistics ............................................................................................................................................ 622
Point info....................................................................................................................................................................... 622
The component layout and plot drawing .............................................................................................. 624
Model space and paper space ..................................................................................................................................... 624
Work with Layouts .......................................................................................................................................................... 626
To create a new layout ........................................................................................................................................... 626
To create a layout from a template................................................................................................................... 627
Copy layout ............................................................................................................................................................ 628
Copy layout without viewport ....................................................................................................................... 628
Save a Layout as a template ................................................................................................................................. 629
18
nanoCAD Mechanica

Delete Layout .............................................................................................................................................................. 630

Rename Layout .......................................................................................................................................................... 630
Layouts Manager ...................................................................................................................................................... 631
Managing layouts from the command line .................................................................................................... 632
Viewports ............................................................................................................................................................................ 633
Create Layout Viewports ....................................................................................................................................... 633
Create a rectangular viewport ...................................................................................................................... 633
Create a polygonal viewport .......................................................................................................................... 634
Create a viewport by object ............................................................................................................................ 636
Edit Layout Viewports............................................................................................................................................. 637
Set show boundary for a viewport ............................................................................................................... 639
Document plot................................................................................................................................................................... 640
Page Setup Manager................................................................................................................................................ 640
Page Setup.............................................................................................................................................................. 643
Set and add the custom paper formats ...................................................................................................... 648
Plot Style Editor ......................................................................................................................................................... 649
Plot Preview................................................................................................................................................................. 652
Plot 653
Batch Plot ..................................................................................................................................................................... 657
Features of the batch plot from the model space .................................................................................. 661
Internal PDF-plotter ................................................................................................................................................ 662
Software Extensions ..................................................................................................................................... 666
NRX and LISP file loading ............................................................................................................................................ 666
.NET application loading.............................................................................................................................................. 667
JScript loading................................................................................................................................................................... 668
VBScript loading .............................................................................................................................................................. 668
NSF files loading............................................................................................................................................................... 668
Work with LISP-applications...................................................................................................................................... 668
Basic knowledge ........................................................................................................................................................ 669
Workspace.................................................................................................................................................................... 669
Menu ......................................................................................................................................................................... 669
User interface........................................................................................................................................................ 669
Help System............................................................................................................................................................ 670
Jobs in the current scale ................................................................................................................................... 670
Variants of registration projections............................................................................................................ 672
Features insert frame..................................................................................................................................................... 673
19
nanoCAD Mechanica

Features design drawings ............................................................................................................................................ 673

Especially when printing .............................................................................................................................................. 674
Features insert formats................................................................................................................................................. 674
Particulars of ..................................................................................................................................................................... 674
Especially when printing .............................................................................................................................................. 675
Particulars of ..................................................................................................................................................................... 676
Especially when printing .............................................................................................................................................. 676
Controls features ....................................................................................................................................................... 679
Smart Grip design elements ............................................................................................................................ 679
Special characters and fonts .......................................................................................................................... 688
Compatibility............................................................................................................................................................... 689
Selecting the direction of drawing..................................................................................................................... 689
Special keys .................................................................................................................................................................. 690
Key SHIFT ............................................................................................................................................................... 690
Key Alt ...................................................................................................................................................................... 690
Key Ctrl .................................................................................................................................................................... 690
Geometric constructions ........................................................................................................................................ 690
Object-dependent parts .......................................................................................................................................... 691
Context menu entry fields ...................................................................................................................................... 691
Settings .......................................................................................................................................................................... 693
Main menu ............................................................................................................................................................. 694
Workspace.............................................................................................................................................................. 694
Main options................................................................................................................................................................ 695
Common settings ................................................................................................................................................. 695
Line Types............................................................................................................................................................... 697
Edit 698
Design....................................................................................................................................................................... 700
Notifications .......................................................................................................................................................... 701
Hot keys ................................................................................................................................................................... 701
Databases access ................................................................................................................................................. 701
Standard elements.................................................................................................................................................... 702
Standard ................................................................................................................................................................. 703
Beam calculations............................................................................................................................................... 704
Edit shaft ................................................................................................................................................................. 705
Pipes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 705
Symbols.......................................................................................................................................................................... 706
20
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................. 707

Notes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 709
Views, sections ...................................................................................................................................................... 711
Sort kinds of cuts ... ............................................................................................................................................. 712
Hole tables.............................................................................................................................................................. 712
Holes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 713
Marking and branding...................................................................................................................................... 713
Surface texture ..................................................................................................................................................... 713
Tolerances .............................................................................................................................................................. 713
Construction lines ............................................................................................................................................... 714
Line of break.......................................................................................................................................................... 714
Fixed Joints ............................................................................................................................................................. 714
Gradient................................................................................................................................................................... 715
Dimension marker .............................................................................................................................................. 715
Specification leader............................................................................................................................................ 715
Welds ........................................................................................................................................................................ 716
Position .................................................................................................................................................................... 716
Forms.............................................................................................................................................................................. 717
Table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 717
Drawing borders.................................................................................................................................................. 719
Specification .......................................................................................................................................................... 719
Technical conditions .......................................................................................................................................... 719
Notepad ................................................................................................................................................................... 721
Special settings........................................................................................................................................................... 721
Cutting surface ..................................................................................................................................................... 722
IDF Convert ............................................................................................................................................................ 723
Database connection ......................................................................................................................................... 723
Setting lists............................................................................................................................................................. 724
Configuration Utility.......................................................................................................................................... 725
Configuration Utility (system data) ............................................................................................................ 728
Layers and profiles ................................................................................................................................................... 729
Overriding styles........................................................................................................................................................ 730
Parameters Redefinitions ...................................................................................................................................... 730
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 730
The basic rules ...................................................................................................................................................... 731
Command Options............................................................................................................................................... 732
21
nanoCAD Mechanica

Action sequence ................................................................................................................................................... 732

Checking the settings of design elements.................................................................................................. 732
Quick options............................................................................................................................................................... 733
Working with Database Objects ......................................................................................................................... 734
The basic tools for working with database objects .............................................................................. 734
Object Manager.......................................................................................................................................................... 735
Tab "Library" ........................................................................................................................................................ 735
Tab "Objects"......................................................................................................................................................... 738
Standard ....................................................................................................................................................................... 739
The table settings ................................................................................................................................................ 742
Properties ............................................................................................................................................................... 743
Dependences.......................................................................................................................................................... 745
Calculations ........................................................................................................................................................... 745
Reinsert object ............................................................................................................................................................ 745
Threaded Fastening ................................................................................................................................................. 745
Rivet joint ..................................................................................................................................................................... 751
User Groups............................................................................................................................................................ 756
Create a Group ........................................................................................................................................................... 756
Insert group ................................................................................................................................................................. 758
Editing a Group .......................................................................................................................................................... 759
Group dependencies ................................................................................................................................................. 759
Creating a marker............................................................................................................................................... 765
Template Wizard................................................................................................................................................. 771
Control overlapping objects ................................................................................................................................. 776
Move up ................................................................................................................................................................... 777
Move down ............................................................................................................................................................. 778
Change hidden mode ......................................................................................................................................... 778
Update overlap ..................................................................................................................................................... 778
Part trim ....................................................................................................................................................................... 779
Part trim ................................................................................................................................................................. 783
Cropping rectangle outline. ............................................................................................................................ 784
Add part trim. ....................................................................................................................................................... 784
Remove part trim ................................................................................................................................................ 784
Add part trim ........................................................................................................................................................ 785
Operation................................................................................................................................................................ 786
Remove part trim ................................................................................................................................................ 786
22
nanoCAD Mechanica

Operation................................................................................................................................................................ 786
Add View ....................................................................................................................................................................... 788
Simplified / Full View .............................................................................................................................................. 788
Mirror Part................................................................................................................................................................... 789
Regenerate STD parts ............................................................................................................................................. 789
User defined object ................................................................................................................................................... 789
Managing Dependencies ........................................................................................................................................ 790
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 790
Compound objects..................................................................................................................................................... 793
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 793
Recognition graphics drawings .......................................................................................................................... 794
Call Team ................................................................................................................................................................ 794
Automatic recognition ...................................................................................................................................... 794
Recognition forms specifications.................................................................................................................. 795
Design fasteners......................................................................................................................................................... 795
Threaded fastening ............................................................................................................................................ 795
Riveted joint........................................................................................................................................................... 800
Remove fasteners ................................................................................................................................................ 803
Details of rotation ..................................................................................................................................................... 805
Design details of rotation ................................................................................................................................ 805
Placing snap ring groove ................................................................................................................................. 813
Placement of the retaining ring .................................................................................................................... 813
Accommodation details "cover".................................................................................................................... 814
Accommodation details "Glass" .................................................................................................................... 815
Templates bearings ............................................................................................................................................ 818
Design pinion shafts ........................................................................................................................................... 819
Design of pipelines for internal and external cone ..................................................................................... 820
Call team ................................................................................................................................................................. 820
Two ways to build a pipe path....................................................................................................................... 820
Sequence of piping design ............................................................................................................................... 821
Fitting incut for connections on external cone....................................................................................... 831
Import PCB format IDF........................................................................................................................................... 832
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 832
Calculation Manager ............................................................................................................................................... 834
Command Call....................................................................................................................................................... 834
Basic Rules.............................................................................................................................................................. 834
23
nanoCAD Mechanica

Static Shaft Calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 835

Command Call....................................................................................................................................................... 835
Basic Rules.............................................................................................................................................................. 836
Setting the Load................................................................................................................................................... 836
Placing the Supports .......................................................................................................................................... 837
Calculation ............................................................................................................................................................. 838
Calculation Result Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 840
Parameters Value................................................................................................................................................ 842
Calculation Conditions ...................................................................................................................................... 842
Report....................................................................................................................................................................... 842
Calculating Gearings ............................................................................................................................................... 843
The Approach to Gearing Analysis............................................................................................................... 843
Strength Check ..................................................................................................................................................... 844
Editing the Material Library .......................................................................................................................... 847
Analysis Result...................................................................................................................................................... 851
Creating Custom Reports ................................................................................................................................. 855
Testing the Strength of a Spur Gear ............................................................................................................ 856
Setting the Insertion Point of a Gear .......................................................................................................... 861
Methods Used to Create a Gear ........................................................................................................................... 862
Drawing a Gear (Pinion) without an Analysis ........................................................................................ 862
Drawing the Transmission after Completing the Analysis ................................................................ 863
Calculating the Strength of a Bevel Gear .................................................................................................. 864
Springs Calculation .................................................................................................................................................. 866
The general calculation order ....................................................................................................................... 866
The Detailed Drawing of Spring Creation ................................................................................................ 869
The Geometric Section Characteristics Calculation ................................................................................... 871
Command Call....................................................................................................................................................... 871
Static beam calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 873
Command Call....................................................................................................................................................... 873
Set section............................................................................................................................................................... 873
Set loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 875
Calculation ............................................................................................................................................................. 877
Specification ................................................................................................................................................................ 878
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 878
Setting Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 879
Relocating the entry between partitions .................................................................................................. 885
24
nanoCAD Mechanica

Sort products......................................................................................................................................................... 886

Setting the numbering ...................................................................................................................................... 886
Adding assortment (material)....................................................................................................................... 887
Recognition specifications............................................................................................................................... 888
Balloons ......................................................................................................................................................................... 888
Command................................................................................................................................................................ 888
Fundamental rules.............................................................................................................................................. 888
Notation of the position of the standard item ........................................................................................ 888
Creating a Balloon .............................................................................................................................................. 889
Going into the editor specifications............................................................................................................. 890
Blocked Ballon Insertion on the drawing ................................................................................................. 891
Creating performance and item positions , before inserting into the drawing ........................ 891
Adding Construction Indicators to Standard Parts .............................................................................. 891
Creating a dynamic connection with the DWG-file .............................................................................. 892
Position Align ........................................................................................................................................................ 892
Custom specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 893
Setting up a custom type specification ...................................................................................................... 893
Create a table for a custom specification ................................................................................................. 897
Working with standard formats ................................................................................................................... 898
Creating custom formats and stamps ........................................................................................................ 901
Tables ....................................................................................................................................................................... 908
Editing a table in the drawing....................................................................................................................... 913
Import, export from Excel................................................................................................................................ 915
Table editor ........................................................................................................................................................... 916
Functions:............................................................................................................................................................................ 945
Reserved variables: ......................................................................................................................................................... 947
Merging ................................................................................................................................................................... 954
Grouping ................................................................................................................................................................. 957
Table recognition ................................................................................................................................................ 958
Convert AutoCAD tables ................................................................................................................................... 959
Dimension styles... ............................................................................................................................................... 959
Dimansion lines.......................................................................................................................................................... 963
Extension lines ............................................................................................................................................................ 963
Arrowheads ................................................................................................................................................................. 964
Center marks ............................................................................................................................................................... 964
Arc length symbol ..................................................................................................................................................... 965
25
nanoCAD Mechanica

Ragius dimension jog............................................................................................................................................... 965

Text appearance ........................................................................................................................................................ 965
Text placement ........................................................................................................................................................... 966
Text alignment ........................................................................................................................................................... 966
Fit options..................................................................................................................................................................... 967
Text placement ........................................................................................................................................................... 967
Scale dimension features ....................................................................................................................................... 968
Fine tuning ................................................................................................................................................................... 968
Linear dimensions..................................................................................................................................................... 968
Measurement scale ............................................................................................................................................. 969
Zero suppression.................................................................................................................................................. 969
Angular dimensions ................................................................................................................................................. 969
Zero suppression.................................................................................................................................................. 969
Alternate units............................................................................................................................................................ 970
Zero suppression........................................................................................................................................................ 970
Placement ..................................................................................................................................................................... 971
Tolerance format ...................................................................................................................................................... 971
Zero suppression.................................................................................................................................................. 972
Alternate units tolerance ....................................................................................................................................... 972
Zero suppression.................................................................................................................................................. 972
Dimension ............................................................................................................................................................... 973
Linear dimensions ............................................................................................................................................... 975
Radius....................................................................................................................................................................... 976
Diameter ................................................................................................................................................................. 976
Big radius................................................................................................................................................................ 977
ARC 978
Fill angle.................................................................................................................................................................. 979
Ordinate dimension ............................................................................................................................................ 980
Dimensions Chain................................................................................................................................................ 981
Base Dimension .................................................................................................................................................... 982
Edit dimension...................................................................................................................................................... 983
Group dimension.................................................................................................................................................. 986
Supporting characters cursor........................................................................................................................ 986
Breack and restore dimension ....................................................................................................................... 987
Arrange dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 988
Fits list...................................................................................................................................................................... 989
26
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensions of pipe sections ............................................................................................................................ 991

Designation of surface roughness ................................................................................................................ 991
Tolerances of feature control frame ........................................................................................................... 993
Datum identifier .................................................................................................................................................. 994
Type: two rods overlap joints.......................................................................................................................1004
Type: T-connection between two rods.. ...................................................................................................1004
Type: two plates overlap joints. ..................................................................................................................1005
Type: Butt joint of two plates. ......................................................................................................................1005
Type: Angular connection of two plates. .................................................................................................1005
Sign marking and branding..........................................................................................................................1008
Designation slope ..............................................................................................................................................1015
Position ..................................................................................................................................................................1016
Hole group............................................................................................................................................................1018
Hole chart .............................................................................................................................................................1021
Universal marker...............................................................................................................................................1026
Context menu entry fields ..............................................................................................................................1027
Legend sizes and surfaces..............................................................................................................................1029
Dimension Mark size........................................................................................................................................1029
Terms and conditions ......................................................................................................................................1029
Mark Sort ..............................................................................................................................................................1029
Command Surface mark.................................................................................................................................1030
Command Refresh marker ............................................................................................................................1031
Technical condition ..........................................................................................................................................1031
Technical characteristics ...............................................................................................................................1033
Creating a hatch ......................................................................................................................................................1035
Call 1035
Measurements ..........................................................................................................................................................1037
Fragment Copy .........................................................................................................................................................1038
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1038
Plate Array .................................................................................................................................................................1038
Creating an array of objects ...............................................................................................................................1040
Arrays .....................................................................................................................................................................1040
Arrays along an arbitrary path(Trajectory) .........................................................................................1044
Arrays for arc trajectory ................................................................................................................................1046
Rectangular array ............................................................................................................................................1047
Steps of an array................................................................................................................................................1048
27
nanoCAD Mechanica

Array preview .....................................................................................................................................................1049

Array area ..................................................................................................................................................................1049
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1049
Drawing axis .............................................................................................................................................................1051
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1051
Fillet1053
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1053
Command Options.............................................................................................................................................1053
Features of the Command..............................................................................................................................1054
Chamfer .......................................................................................................................................................................1057
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1057
Command Options.............................................................................................................................................1057
Features of the command ..............................................................................................................................1059
Breaks ..........................................................................................................................................................................1061
Construction lines ...................................................................................................................................................1062
Calculator ...................................................................................................................................................................1067
Notebook.....................................................................................................................................................................1068
Magnet .........................................................................................................................................................................1070
Text editing ................................................................................................................................................................1072
Template .....................................................................................................................................................................1072
Editing..........................................................................................................................................................................1075
Edit in-place ..............................................................................................................................................................1076
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1076
Group Edit ..................................................................................................................................................................1077
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1077
Regenerate .................................................................................................................................................................1078
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1078
Explode all ..................................................................................................................................................................1078
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1078
Explode all primitives ............................................................................................................................................1078
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1078
Export drawing file.................................................................................................................................................1080
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1080
Overrides .....................................................................................................................................................................1080
Find and Replace .....................................................................................................................................................1081
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1081
28
nanoCAD Mechanica

Quick selection..........................................................................................................................................................1084
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1084
Scale1088
The current scale ...............................................................................................................................................1088
Scale measurements ........................................................................................................................................1089
Viewport context toolbar.....................................................................................................................................1090
MechWizard ..............................................................................................................................................................1091
Call team ...............................................................................................................................................................1091
Object Wizard. Description .................................................................................................................................1092
Menu .......................................................................................................................................................................1092
Object tree ............................................................................................................................................................1093
The menu bar ......................................................................................................................................................1097
Basic properties .......................................................................................................................................... 1104
Object description..........................................................................................................................................................1104
Object Name.....................................................................................................................................................................1104
Object type ........................................................................................................................................................................1104
Object subtype .................................................................................................................................................................1104
Specification.....................................................................................................................................................................1104
Parameter Properties ............................................................................................................................... 1105
Not used .............................................................................................................................................................................1105
Protected (used internally) .......................................................................................................................................1105
Public (visible).................................................................................................................................................................1105
Changeable (available for editing) ........................................................................................................................1105
Calculation of parameters ....................................................................................................................... 1106
Set parameter in the dialogue..................................................................................................................................1106
Dynamic selection..........................................................................................................................................................1106
Calculate after dialouge is shown using dynamic selection by expression ...........................................1106
Dont calculate parameter ..........................................................................................................................................1106
Minimum value ...............................................................................................................................................................1106
Maximum...........................................................................................................................................................................1107
Conditions rendering ................................................................................................................................ 1107
Working planes ........................................................................................................................................... 1108
Show / Hide parameters .......................................................................................................................... 1109
Display conditions ...................................................................................................................................... 1110
Check boxes .................................................................................................................................................. 1110
Current script ............................................................................................................................................... 1111
29
nanoCAD Mechanica

Object tree ............................................................................................................................................................1114

File 1121
Correction.............................................................................................................................................................1121
View 1121
Inset 1122
Symmetry axis ..........................................................................................................................................................1135
Select the command .........................................................................................................................................1135
Set Parameter ...........................................................................................................................................................1136
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1136
Enter additional values ..................................................................................................................................1137
Insert point.................................................................................................................................................................1138
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1138
Suppression contour ..............................................................................................................................................1138
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1138
Hatch contour...........................................................................................................................................................1139
Command..............................................................................................................................................................1139
Array.............................................................................................................................................................................1140
Select the Command.........................................................................................................................................1140
Test Model ..................................................................................................................................................................1141
Model Verification.............................................................................................................................................1141
Testing and join three-dimensional model ..................................................................................................1141
Construction geometry ...................................................................................................................................1141
Naming predefined working planes for virtual dependency model nanoCAD Mechanics 61142
Naming options..................................................................................................................................................1144
Management of 3D models ...........................................................................................................................1144
Example of creating a database object....................................................................................................1145
Example of creating pens...............................................................................................................................1151
Creating a template layout tiles .................................................................................................................1162
Functions of the standard objects ..............................................................................................................1163
Requirements of the standard details ......................................................................................................1166
Abstract model of the detail .........................................................................................................................1167
Object's graphic .................................................................................................................................................1168
Three-dimensional graphics object ...........................................................................................................1172
Details in the database. Dependences ......................................................................................................1172
Eventive Object's model..................................................................................................................................1174
Localization mechanism ................................................................................................................................1176

30
nanoCAD Mechanica

Requirements of the objects. List of the requirements. Graphic and script creation of the
objects from the database using MechWizard...........................................................................1177
Graphics.................................................................................................................................................................1181
Making 3D models Inventor .........................................................................................................................1184
Syntax scripting language...................................................................................................................................1185
Identifiers..............................................................................................................................................................1185
Keywords ..............................................................................................................................................................1185
Data Types............................................................................................................................................................1185
Comments .............................................................................................................................................................1186
Operators ....................................................................................................................................................................1187
Empty operator ..................................................................................................................................................1187
Composite operator..........................................................................................................................................1187
The assignment operator...............................................................................................................................1187
Operator access to internal members of the complex data types ................................................1187
Arithmetic and logical operators ...............................................................................................................1187
The conditional operator ...............................................................................................................................1188
Cycle Operator ....................................................................................................................................................1189
Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................1189
Specifying the object plane ...........................................................................................................................1189
Worksheet ............................................................................................................................................................1191
Dialog object. Making function UniDialog .............................................................................................1192
Connecting UserForm......................................................................................................................................1192
Set dependencies................................................................................................................................................1193
Function ShowValue ........................................................................................................................................1194
Appendix 1. A list of keywords and reserved variables .....................................................................1194
Object - centre holes GOST 14034-74 .......................................................................................................1214
Blind GOST 16076-70 ......................................................................................................................................1224
Steel welded neck GOST 12821-80.............................................................................................................1226
I-profiles GOST 19425 .....................................................................................................................................1228
Panel HB................................................................................................................................................................1234
Index................................................................................................................................................................ 1237

31
nanoCAD Mechanica

TRADEMARKS
nanoCAD is registered trademark of ZAO Nanosoft.
Autodesk, AutoCAD are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
DWG is the native file format for Autodesk’s AutoCAD® software.
ActiveX, Direct3D, Excel, Access, Internet Explorer, JScript, Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType,
Outlook, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C#, Visual Studio, Windows, Windows Server, Windows
Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc.
Teigha – is a trademark of Open Design Alliance (ODA).
Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader – are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Intel, MMX, Celeron, Core, i386, i486, Pentium, Xeon, Atom – are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation.
AMD, AMD Athlon, AMD Duron, AMD Opteron, AMD-K6 – are trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices, Inc.
ANTLR 3 License [The BSD License] Copyright (c) 2010 Terence Parr. All rights reserved.
HTMLayout © Terra Informatica Software, Inc. (http://terrainformatica.com)
Boehm-Demers-Weiser Garbage Collector © 1988, 1989 Hans-J. Boehm, Alan J. Demers, ...,
1999-2011 by Hewlett-Packard Development Company (http://www.hboehm.info/gc/license.txt)
Spatial Corp. © 1986 – 2015.
LGS 2D © Bricsys NV, 2013

32
nanoCAD Mechanica

GENERAL INFORMATION

Introduction
nanoCAD – is a compact, robust and comprehensive CAD, perfect for 2D design and drafting.
A friendly and usable traditional interface and the capability to use traditional working methods
makes nanoCAD a universal tool, almost every designer can work with it.
nanoCAD is used for the creation and editing of vector primitives (graphic elements) and more
complex objects (blocks, dimensions and etc.). You can insert and use a raster image as a
background file. nanoCAD contains built-in display tools to view different 3D geometry from
*.dwg files. nanoCAD has the functionality to create 3D frame and Polyface Mesh models. The
user can design working documentation according to the drawings and projects of 3D models
created in different 3D CAD software.
nanoCAD can be used by an individual user and also by project teams, which use the
functionality of external references and of integration to the engineering document workflow,
including PDM/PLM systems.
nanoCAD allows the user to:
Create and edit different 2D and 3D vector primitives, texts, objects of drawing
preparation, settings of graphic display and printing of technical documentation.
Create and use any type of tables and specify drawing elements by block attributes and
objects of drawing preparation.
Adjust the working environment to prepare working documentation to different
standards.

Work in 3D model space and 2D paper space using viewports.

Display, create and edit 3D meshes. Create a User Coordinate System to edit geometric
snap-to 3D objects and point clouds.
Import point clouds and its parts from laser scan files. Set point clouds displaying, style
by attributes, create section and cut clouds.

Cooperate and collaborate with your colleagues who create drawings in other popular
CADs by using the common file format - *.dwg.

Use any technical documentation created previously and stored in raster file format
(scanned drawings, texts, tables, photos).
Print technical documents using any installed plot devices in the operational system.
nanoCAD uses Teigha core, consisting of a set of Teigha program libraries, developed by Open
Design Alliance (ODA) international consortium. They allow reading and writing to *.dwg format
files used by many CADs. Teigha program libraries support all current versions of the *.dwg
format.
nanoCAD supports the import and export of vector data of *.dxf format. Using the *.dwg file
format allows integrating solutions on the nanoCAD base with almost any CAD. Structurally, the
program consists of functionally linked parts:

Universal vector editor – has the same functionality as most popular CAD packages
have.

Universal table editor – has the technology to translate the graphic, attribute data of
objects into table form, with the ability to perform any mathematical calculations in
tables; has the tools for the import/export of table data.
Plot master – creates and edits plot settings from model space and paper space.

33
nanoCAD Mechanica

Functionality of developer tools – available only for registered developers.

System requirements
Operating system Microsoft Windows 8 (32- or 64-bit) Enterprise, Pro or Core edition.
Microsoft Windows 7 (32- or 64-bit) Enterprise, Ultimate, Professional
or Home Premium edition.
Microsoft Windows Vista (32- or 64-bit) (SP1 or later) Enterprise,
Business, Ultimate or Home Premium edition.
Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Home edition (32- or 64-bit) (SP2
or later).NOTE! Install 32-bit version of nanoCAD if you have Windows
XP 64-bit.

Processor Intel Pentium 4/AMD Athlon or higher.

RAM From 512 Mb. 2 Gb is recommended if you have big projects.
Hard disk free space About 300 Mb is required for full program installation.
About 1-3 Gb is required for working (according to the difficulty of
projects).
Monitor Required resolution: 1024×768.
Recommended resolution: 1280×1024 or higher.
Graphics Video adapter with OpenGL/DirectX 9-compatible hardware 3D
acceleration. Discrete video card is recommended.
Additional hardware DVD-ROM (if the program is installed from the corresponding device).
Internet access (if the program is installed on-line).
Mouse or other devices.

Program installation
You must have administrator rights to install the program and to launch it for the first time.
You do not need to be an administrator to work with the program; it can be launched by a user
with reduced authority.
Install 32-bit version of nanoCAD if you have Windows XP 64-bit.

Launch of nanoCAD
To launch the program:
Double click nanoCAD shortcut on the Windows desktop
or

On the taskbar select Start > All Programs > Nanosoft > nanoCAD Plus en 7.0 >
nanoCAD Plus en 7.0
On the first start after installation, if any previous versions were installed, nanoCAD will prompts
to copy settings from these versions. In Migration of settings dialog all available profiles will
be shows:

34
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select desired profile or click Skip to skip migration.

Fore more detailed information see “Mirgation of settings from previous versions” section.

Help system
Menu: Help – About…

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: HELP, HELPCONTENTS

There are buttons in the dialog boxes to open the Help file.
The License agreement command shows the license agreement of using nanoCAD in PDF file
format.
The About command opens the About nanoCAD Plus 7.0 dialog with information about the
version and build of the installed program and copyright.

The Help dialog box shows the license number, who registered the program, a link to the
developer’s website – www.nanocad.com and an email link for technical support –
support@nanocad.com
The Help menu also contains links to the nanoCAD support forum, learning videos on YouTube
and the official site of Nanosoft for additional information.
If you have an internet connection, you can load the links from nanoCAD.
User Guide is available in Start > All Programs > Nanosoft > nanoCAD Plus en 7.0 > User
Guide.

Exit from nanoCAD

Menu: File – Exit

Hotkeys: CTRL+Q Command

line: EXIT, QUIT

35
nanoCAD Mechanica

nanoCAD can be closed by clicking on the icon in the top right corner of the program.
If all changes in opened documents were saved, no additional messages are shown.
If changes were not saved, nanoCAD shows a warning message:

,
where a user can save changes, decline to save changes or select the Cancel button and
continue to work in the program.

36
nanoCAD Mechanica

NANOCAD USER INTERFACE

With nanoCAD you can organize user workspace according to the user’s needs and tasks. The
standard set of tools is usually used:

The nanoCAD workspace consists of the following interface elements:

menu bar (1);

toolbars (2);

drawing window (drawing area) (3);

documents’tabs (4);

document layouts’tabs (5);

Properties bar (6);

command line (7);

status bar (8).

Most interface elements can be moved to other places; they can be fixed or floating. Some
elements can be auto hidden.

Menu bar
The Menu bar (1) is placed at the top of the nanoCAD window and consists of drop-down menus
containing all the basic commands.
Commands from the drop-down menus are grouped by functionality:

37
nanoCAD Mechanica

Menu Description

File Commands to work with files and documents: create, open, save, export and
import files, print and print settings. There are also some useful utilities:
audit, recover, purge and convert to 2D.
Edit Undo and redo commands, exchange buffer commands, select commands,
find and replace command.
View Zoom commands, creation of named views and viewports, views and visual
styles, display of scroll bars, status bar and toolbars.
Insert Insert blocks and external references, also insert raster images, commands
to work with layouts (create, save, delete and rename).
Format Commands to work with layers, line types, text and dimension styles, point
styles, units and drawing limits.
Tools Display order commands, edit blocks and external references, drafting
settings and program options.
Draw Commands to draw objects.
Dimensions Commands to set dimensions and manage dimension styles.
Modify Commands to edit drawing objects.
Raster Commands to edit raster images.
Point clouds Commands to import point clouds, display it, create sections, get information
and statistic data.
Help Help and useful links.

The graphic interface of the drop-down menus contains a set of symbols to make work with the
menus easier:

commands from each functional group are separated by lines in the drop-down menu:

a small black triangle in the left part of the menu means that selection of the item
opens a cascade menu:

three dots at the end of the menu item means that the item opens a dialog box:

38
nanoCAD Mechanica

there are hotkeys to the right of the most used commands:

Toolbars
Buttons on the toolbars (2) are used to start the commands. When you move the cursor over
the button the tooltip is shown:

On some toolbars the commands are grouped and you can see only one button of command from
each group.
The buttons from the command groups are marked with small arrows in the bottom right corner:

.
When clicking such a button, a toolbar opens showing the tools of the specified group. To select
the required tool from the group, move the cursor to the button on the bar and select it.

Show or hide toolbars by selecting View – Toolbars > nanoCAD toolbars; or from the context
menu of any toolbar.
Toolbars can be moved to any part of the program window.
A toolbar in the document area is called floating. You can change its shape and location. To make
it fixed, move it out of the document area. This toolbar is called fixed.

Drawing Window
There are drawing windows (3) in the nanoCAD. Each document is opened in a separate
window. If several documents are opened in the program, use the tabs (4) to select the required
document.
User coordinate system icon (UCS)

39
nanoCAD Mechanica

is placed in the default coordinates: X=0; Y=0; Z=0 (in the bottom left corner). To show/hide
the icon, select the View menu – Display > UCS icon.
Cursor – the main instrument for selection and specifying in the drawing area. The cursor has a
crosshair shape with a square sight at the intersection point:

The shape and size of the cursor can be adjusted in the Cursor section of the Options dialog
box (Tools menu – Options).

ATTENTION! To change the cursor’s color, deselect the Use default color box in the Category Name
and Color dialog box

Outside the graphic area, the cursor has an arrow shape: .

40
nanoCAD Mechanica

The document layouts’ tabs (5) in the bottom part of the window are used to switch between
layouts and to switch from model space to paper space and back. It can be more useful to use
the button located at the end of tabs row. The button allows switching between layouts and
named views in the document (for more information see the “Model space and Paper space”
section). Scroll bars in the bottom and left parts of the graphic area are additional tools for
panning. The Scroll bars command from the View menu shows/hides the vertical scroll bar. The
horizontal scroll bar is always shown.

Context menu
In nanoCAD, as in many other Windows applications, the context menu appears when you click
the right button. The content of the context menu depends on the current context – object type,
location of the cursor and what command is being run at the moment.

Examples of the context menu

NOTE: Right button clicking with SHIFT or CTRL pressed during the execution of a command for
creating or editing objects opens the context menu of the Object snap:

41
nanoCAD Mechanica

Properties bar
The Properties bar (6) is used to display information about selected objects, to change objects’
properties, to set selection mode and to launch selection commands.

The Properties bar by default is combined with the Quick Select bar. Also you can add the
Drawing Explorer toolbar.
Quick Select bar is convenient alternative for QSELECT command starting Qiuck Selection
dialog.
You can switch between Quick Select and Properties bars using tabs in the bottom part.

42
nanoCAD Mechanica

Bars can be shown/hidden from View – Toolbars > Functional toolbars menu or from right-
button menu in toolbars area.

Command line
The command line (7) is used to enter commands from the keyboard, to show tooltips and
nanoCAD messages, to select the options of the selected command:

The default command line height is set to display 5 lines of command history. To move from one
line to another, use the scroll bar in the right part of the command line window. The height of the
command line can be changed by dragging the top edge and dropping it in the required place.
In the Command line section of the Options dialog you can change the text and background
color of the command line, switch on/off Use Autocomplete and Use alternate font options:

If the command line was closed it can be opened by clicking in the document window.

Input of commands, aliases and shortcuts

To enter a command from the keyboard, type the full command name in the command line and
press ENTER or SPACEBAR to execute it
Instead of the full name of the command you can use a command abbreviation, the so-called
alias of command. For example, instead of typing CIRCLE, you can just type C.
Several aliases can be assigned to one command. However, a particular alias can only be
assigned to one command. Aliases are specified in nCAD.pgp file.
Shortcuts are similar to aliases, but launch a set of commands grouped by a certain criterion.

NOTE: It does not matter what case is used when typing in the command line.

43
nanoCAD Mechanica

With the Use Autocomplete mode (Command line section of the Options dialog box) you can
choose a command from the list displayed in the command line after you have entered several
letters:

To select a command from the list use TAB, ARROW UP, ARROW DOWN buttons and the
ENTER button to confirm a selection.
You can see a full list of registered commands, aliases and shortcuts in the command line by
entering an apostrophe.

Text window
To display the command history, press F2 to open the text window:

You can close and open the window at any time.

The window is opened at the same location and size as set previously.

Command Line prompt

The default command line prompt looks like:
Command:
but it varies depending on the current command or program state.
The command prompt can include descriptive messages that are displayed in the status bar
when the command is running. For example, the prompt during a creation of a circle is:
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/TTR]:

44
nanoCAD Mechanica

It can also include interactive keywords in square brackets separated by a slash, highlighted in a
blue color and underlined.

NOTE: To prevent confusion with hyperlinks, interactive keywords in prompts are shown in a red color
and bold font.

You can type any keyword manually or just click on it. A keyword specified in triangular brackets
is a keyword “by default”.
For example:
Enter number of sides <4>:
or
Extend <Inscribed> or [Inscribed/Circumscribed]:
To choose it press the ENTER key.
As an answer to the prompt, type the keyword, or you can just type the capital letter of the
word:
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]:
For example, to select the Close keyword, type C and to select Undo type U.

NOTE: The capital letter can be in the middle of the key word.

Format of input data

You can enter different formats of data, text, digital values, coordinates, in the command line.
To use coordinate values to specify a point, enter an X value and a Y value separated by a
comma <X,Y>:
23.45,-6.98
If the angle units are degrees/minutes/seconds, the following syntax is used:
32d20m10s or 32-20-10

Mathematical processor
The command line allows for the input not only of commands, numbers and points, but also
mathematical expressions. It is convenient when the coordinate or number is not known
beforehand but should be calculated from some conditions.
For example, instead of calculating the coordinate of a point using the SQRT (349.56-275.90)*2
formula and only then typing it in the command line, like here:
Command: L,LINE – Line by points
First point: -12.45,17.17
You can use a mathematical expression instead of coordinates in the command line:
Command: L,LINE – Line by points
First point: -12.45,SQRT(349.56-275.90)*2
To calculate a mathematical expression at any time type the ? sign before this expression. In the
following example, a multiplication operation is performed during the line creation process.

45
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command: ?25.7*5
After pressing ENTER the result is shown in the command line:
?25.7*5 = 128.5
Mathematical expressions can be calculated during the execution of some commands. The
following example shows a multiplication expression calculation during drawing a line:
Command: L,LINE – Line by points
First point: 25.7,41.32
Next point: 25.7*5,93.77
After you press ENTER, the line with first point coordinates (25.7, 41.32) and end point
coordinates (128.5, 93.77) will be drawn.
The complete list of registered operations, functions and constants can be viewed in the
Command Line window by entering the ? sign and press the ENTER .
The Mathematical processor supports the following arithmetical operations, constants and
functions:
Constants:

E The constant e, the base of natural logarithms.

PI The constant pi. It represents the ratio of the circumference of a circle to
its diameter.

Arithmetic operations:

() Groups expressions.
+ Adds.
- Subtracts.
* Multiplies.
/ Divides.
% Remainder.
** Power.

Functions:

COS Returns the cosine of a number.

SIN Returns the sine of a number.
TAN Returns the tangent of a number.
ACOS Returns the arccosine of a number.
ASIN Returns the arcsine of a number.
ATAN Returns the arctangent of a number.
ABS Returns the absolute value of a number.
EXP Returns e (the base of natural logarithms) rose to a power.
LN Returns the natural logarithm of a number.
LOG Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.
SQRT Returns the square root of a number. The number must be non-negative.
FLOOR Returns the largest integer less than or equal to the given numeric
expression.

46
nanoCAD Mechanica

CEIL Returns the smallest integer greater than or equal to the given numeric
expression.
FRAC Returns a locale-specific count of the number of digits to display to the
right of any decimal point.
TRUNC Returns the integral digits of the specified number. Any fractional digits
are discarded.
ROUND Returns a number rounded to a specified number of decimal places
(x,precision) (precision). Precision value indicating how many places to the right of the
decimal are included in the rounding.
NEG Returns the negative value of a number.
SGN Returns an integer indicating the sign of a number: 1 - Greater than zero;
0 - Equal to zero; -1 - Less than zero.

The user defined variables can be used in calculation expressions. The variable is created using
the following syntax:
?<variable>=<value>
For example:
?base=100
Command: L,LINE – Line by points
Specify first point: base+11.56,base-5
Specify next point: base+27,base+35
A segment with the first point coordinates (111,95) and the end point coordinates (127,135) is
built.

Auto hide mode in the command line

The command line can be placed in Auto Hide mode to enlarge the working area. In this mode
the command line is reduced to a tab. In the tab name you can always see the command line’s
message and entered values.
To Auto Hide the command line select the pin icon:

Or select from the context menu the Auto hide command:

In the Auto hide mode the command line folds into a tab.

47
nanoCAD Mechanica

The value you enter and the command line prompt are always displayed in the tab’s name:

When moving the cursor over the tab, the command line expands to its full size, and when
moving the cursor away it folds again:

The entry of commands and required values is performed without showing the command line.

Working with commands

Commands are used to create and edit objects, open dialog and start any other operations.
Commands can be launched:
from the menu bar;

48
nanoCAD Mechanica

on the toolbars;

from the context menu;

in the command line;

using hotkeys;
For example, to open the Options dialog box:

from the menu bar: Tools – Options;

on the Settings toolbar: the Options button;

in the command line: PREF command;

using hotkeys: CTRL+9.

Transparent commands
Some commands can be launched while other commands are executed. Such commands are
called transparent. Most of these commands are settings commands for display and document.

Command recall
The last launched command can be started by pressing the ENTER or SPACEBAR buttons.
The last nine launched commands are available from the context menu (Last commands):

Last commands are shown in the command line.

Use ARROW DOWN and ARROW UP buttons to select one of the last commands and press
ENTER to launch it.

Cancellation of commands
nanoCAD creates protocols for all used commands and changes in the drawing, one or several
commands can be undone to get to the previous step. Undone command can be launched again.
Cancellation and recall of commands can be made using the Undo and Redo commands.

Undo
Menu: Edit – Undo

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+Z

Command line: UNDO, U, EDITUNDO

49
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command cancels all previous commands and operations.

Redo
Menu: Edit – Redo

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+Y

Command line: REDO

The command recovers all cancelled commands and operations. It becomes available after the
Undo command is used.

Settings of the right button

The settings of the right button are specified in the Right Button Usage section of the Options
dialog:

Parameters:

Always shows Popup Menu Switches on the only context menu launch.

Override for different modes: Switches on the redefining of right button functions for different
working modes in the document window.

Edit Mode: The sections redefine the right button functions when it is
pressed in the editing mode, i.e. there are no running
commands.

Shows Popup menu Switches on the only context menu launch.

Repeat last command Switches on the ENTER key imitation function, when clicking
the right button again starts the last command if objects were
selected.

Repeat last command when Switches on the ENTER key imitation function, when clicking
nothing is selected the right button again starts the last command if no objects
were selected.

50
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command mode: The sections redefine the right button functions when it is
pressed in the mode of any running command.

Shows Popup menu Switches on the only context menu launch.

Sends (ENTER) Switches on the ENTER key imitation function.

Shows Popup menu after Switches on the mode which considers the duration of right
delay: button holding:
short clicking – repetition of command or ENTER according to
the mode,
long holding – opens the context menu.

Delay <250> ms Specifies, in milliseconds, the duration of right button holding to

open the context menu. By default the value is 250 ms.
To change the duration of button holding:
click twice on the delay value,
enter a new delay value.

Always show Popup menu Switches on/off the mode, where the context menu launches
when objects selected every time the right button is clicked during selection of objects.

Status bar
There are interface elements in the status bar (8):
Current coordinates of the cursor:

Display modes:
dynamic display of cursor absolute coordinates when
the cursor is moving,

display of relative distance (distance<angle) when

the cursor is moving. Switching to the relative
distance mode is made automatically when
specifying two or more points is required.

Buttons to switch on/off modes:

Snap (F9).

Grid (F7).

Object snap (F3).

Object tracking (F11).

Polar tracking (F10).

Ortho mode (F8).

Show Linewidth.

Show Hatch.

51
nanoCAD Mechanica

Buttons to manage the drawing area:

Shows selection preview state.

Shows isolation state.

Enable|disable selection for objects on locked layers.

Button to switch to viewport. It is not used in Model space.

Button to switch to Layout from Model space or viewport.

In active viewport:

Set lock viewport:

o Unlocked;
o Locked;
o No selected viewports;
Set the viewport scale;
Back to the paperspace.
Button to set scale of objects.

Pan.

Zoom.

Zoom all.

Zoom window.

Button to start regeneration.

Button to switch on/off full screen mode.

To switch the status bar on/off, use the Status bar command from the View menu.

Managing elements of the Status bar

Use the Status Bar Configuration menu to set elements of the Status bar:

52
nanoCAD Mechanica

To open the context menu:

1. Right button click on the Status bar.
2. Select/deselect the required elements in the context menu.

Managing interface elements

To change the location of interface elements, drag their titles.
To change location:
1. Click on an element’s title and drag it to an area of the window where you want to
attach the element. The icon appears in the center of the window, showing the place of
attachment in the window.
2. Holding the left button, place the cursor over one of the pictograms.

The central pictogram is used to attach the object as a tab, others attach to the sides of the
window.
The new location of the element is highlighted blue.

53
nanoCAD Mechanica

If you are satisfied with the new location, release the button.
The attached element can be made into a pop-up tab. Select the pin in the element’s title:

For some elements, the context menu is available with various ways of attachment:

Color schemes
Besides full reorganization of the working area for user needs, nanoCAD has a set of color
schemes for the interface. You can change the color scheme in the Options tab of the Interface
dialog box (Tools – Customize – Interface):

54
nanoCAD Mechanica

WORKING WITH DOCUMENTS

nanoCAD allows documents to be saved with *.dwg (drawing format), *.dwt (template format)
and *.dxf (graphic data exchange format) extensions. There is support of file formats created in
the following AutoCAD versions:

AutoCAD 2013-2015/LT2013-2015

AutoCAD 2010-2012/LT2010-2012

AutoCAD 2007-2009/LT2007-2009

AutoCAD 2004-2006/LT2004-2006

AutoCAD 2000-2002/LT2000-2002

AutoCAD R14/LT98/ LT97

AutoCAD R13/LT95

AutoCAD R11
Commands to work with documents are in the File menu:

and on the Main toolbar:

Creation of new document

Menu: File – New Document

Toolbar: Main –

55
nanoCAD Mechanica

Hotkeys: CTRL+N

Command line: NEW, NEWDOCUMENT

A new document, created at the first launch, has the name Untitled0. All subsequent documents
have the names Untitled1, Untitled2 etc. Documents which have been modified and not saved
have a star symbol (*):

Template usage
To create a new document you can use a template (files with *.dwt extension). The template is
a drawing used for the creation of new drawings and contains some base settings (type and
accuracy of units, drawing limits, settings of SNAP and GRID modes; managing of layers;
dimension and text styles; types and weights of lines etc.) and graphic objects (main titles,
borders and logos).
Changes in a drawing created using a template are not applied to the template.

NOTE: You can create a template not only for new documents but also for imported documents.

Templates are managed in the Template Usage section of the Options dialog:

In the For new documents subsection you can select:

None Prevents the use of a template for new documents.

Use default Uses the file specified in Default Template File Name parameter.

Ask for file Opens the dialog box Open Document Template File.

Choose from list Opens the Choose Template dialog box.

Default Template Sets the Default Template File Name.

File Name

Templates Names Specifies a list of templates if the Choose from list parameter is
List selected.

To specify list of templates:

1. Click twice on the Templates Names List.

2. Click the button.

56
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. In the Open dialog box select template files.

4. Click Open.

NOTE: You can specify a list of templates from different folders. Select manually or using the clipbook
paths to templates and templates’ names, separating them with semicolon. Spaces after semicolon are not
allowed. Semicolon should be also placed at the end of the list.

Opening a document
Menu: File – Open…

Toolbar: Main–

Hotkeys: CTRL+O

Command line: OPEN, OPENDOCUMENT

Command opens the dialog to find and open the desired file.

Note! Navigation pane in nanoCAD Plus list displays only those folders that are specified in
Standard directories section of Options dialog:

57
nanoCAD Mechanica

To open a document you can drag it into the working area of nanoCAD.
It is available to open document for reading or open as copy:

Open as read-only – Open the document for reading without editing.

Open as copy – Open the copy of document. Prefix Copy (N) added to the file name. N is
number of copy.

NOTE: Assign new name for copied and read-only files to save changes.

There are two lists to quick access to the last opened files and folders in the File menu:

58
nanoCAD Mechanica

Replacement of missing font in the document

If a document contains a font, which is not included in the program, when you open the
document it is automatically replaced with an alternative font. There is a message in the
command line like:

nanoCAD uses by default txt.shx font for replacement. You can change it in the Options dialog.

Documents protection when sharing

nanoCAD has mechanism protecting file against losing information when the file is opened by
several users.
A message appears when user opens file that is open by another user or when file is read-only:

or

59
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the document is read-only, inscription Read Only appears in the document tab:

Only user who opened the file first can save the under the same name. Others receive message
even if the first user closes the file:

Other users can save the file after reopen.

Working with document tabs

When many documents are opened, every document is opened in a separate window with a tab
in the top part of the working area. To switch between them, select the tab or click the
Active files button in the top right corner of the document window:

If you place the cursor over the document tab, a tooltip with the information about file location is
shown:

The context menu permits the selection of display options for the documents:

60
nanoCAD Mechanica

Commands of the context menu:

Open Doc From File Opens file location folder.

Location

Open File Location Opens file locaton folder in Windows explorer.

Copy Full File Path Copies full path of file to clipboard.

Save Saves a document.

Save As… Saves a document with a new name.

Save All documents Saves all opened documents.

Close Closes a document.

Close All documents Closes all opened documents.

Close All But This Closes all opened documents except the current.

Plot Prints a document.

1 Viewport Shows a document in one Viewport

2 Viewports Vertical Splits document to 2 vertical Viewports.

2 Viewports Horizontal In Model space: Splits document to 2 horizontal viewports.

In Paperspace: Creates 2 similar horizontal viewports
inscribed to print area.

3 Viewports Splits document to 3 Viewports.

4 Viewports Splits document to 4 Viewports.

61
nanoCAD Mechanica

New Horizontal Tab Horizontal display of a tab in the working area.

Group

New Vertical Tab Group Vertical display of a tab in the working area.

You can change the location of tabs by dragging them in one document window or into other
windows.
If you release the left button when dragging a tab over a document working area, the context
menu with tab display options will be shown:

Drawing properties
Create and save general information, key words, custom properties for every drawing.

Menu: File – Drawing properties

Command line: DWGPROPS

Command allows you to take drawing info and enter identical data. Dialog box displays general
info: Title, Dates, Size, etc.:

62
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set info on the Summary tab:

Title Document title. Used in searching for this drawing. Ttitle can be
different from the drawing file name.
Subject Document subject can be used to group drawings that have the
same subject.
Author Author of drawing. To change the author, delete the existing name
and enter a new one.
Keywords Keywords used for drawing location.
Comments Field used to add comments to the drawing.
Hyperlink base The base address for all relative links inserted within the drawing.
It can be internet-address or path to a folder on a network drive.

Closing a document
Menu: File – Close

button on the document’s window

Hotkeys: CTRL+F4

Command line: CLOSE

63
nanoCAD Mechanica

When closing an existing document you should save the changes to it; the document is saved
with its name.
When closing a new document, the program offers to save changes and opens the Save
Document File dialog box.

Saving a document
Documents can be saved in the *.dwg drawing format, in the *.dxf graphic data exchange
format and in the *.dwt template format. Save, Save As and WBLOCK commands are used.
Saving of an existing document

Menu: File – Save

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+S

Command line: SAVE, BS, SAVEDOCUMENT

The command saves a document with its name.
Saving a new document
The Save command opens the Save Document File dialog box, where you can specify a path
for a document and change the default file name:

NOTE: Navigation pane in nanoCAD Plus list displays only those folders that are specified in Common
files location section of the Options dialog:

64
nanoCAD Mechanica

To save a document:
1. Specify the path to the file in the Folder drop-down list;
2. Type the name in the File name field;
3. Select the format in the File type field;
4. Select the Save button.
Saving the file will be done without specifying the path and file name in the future.

NOTE: Format, specified in the File type field, is also used as default to save all documents with Save,
Save As and WBLOCK commands.

Saving a document with another name

Menu: File – Save As

Hotkeys: CTRL+SHIFT+S

Command line: SAVEAS, SAVEASDOCUMENT

Every time you select the Save As command, nanoCAD will offer to specify a path to the file
and/or change the file name in the Save Document File dialog. The selected path and entered
file name are set by default, and when the Save command is used, the file will be saved with the
path and name specified earlier.

65
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: Navigation pane in the nanoCAD Plus list displays only those folders that are specified in
Common files location section of the Options dialog

To save the document with another name:

1. Select folder to save the file.
2. Change the name in File name field.
3. Select the desired file format in Save as type list.
4. Click the Save button.

66
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Save As command can be used to change the format of a file, specified to save all
documents using Save, Save As and WBLOCK.

Saving a Document or Its Part Using the WBLOCK

Command
Command line: WBLOCK, W, ACADWBLOCKDIALOG
The WBLOCK command is started from the command line and allows saving of an entire
document and also part of a drawing using the Write Block dialog:

The Write Block dialog box complements and extends the capabilities of the Save and Save As
commands, allowing the saving of an entire document (Entire drawing parameter) and also
part of a drawing (Block and Objects parameters).

AutoSaving and Backup

To minimize losses caused by software or hardware failures and any other consequences,
nanoCAD has auto saving and backup functions.

AutoSaving
If Autosaving mode is switched on, the data is saved at the specified intervals.

ATTENTION! Autosaving mode is automatically disabled while the REFEDIT mode is on. After you exit
REFEDIT mode autosaving automatically resumed.

The time and date of the auto saving is added in round brackets to a file name with *.autosave
extension, for example: <file name>.dwg(20-29-44_15.08.2010).autosave.

67
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: The time of autosaving is the time of the first autosaving and it is not updated further.

NOTE: If the program is closed normally, autosaved documents are removed. If there is software or
hardware failure and any other consequences, autosaved files are not removed.

NOTE: You can restore the previous session of a document from the auto saved file. Do not close the
program and file, copy it to another folder and rename as described below.

A default folder for auto saved files

C:\Users\User Name\AppData\Local\Temp.

ATTENTION! If you specify another folder for autosaving, the current (open) document is autosaved into
the previous folder. The document is saved into the specified folder only after it is opened again.

To open and work with an auto saved file, change its extension to *.dwg (delete the additional
information in round brackets and the *.autosave extension).
The auto saving parameters are specified in the AutoSave and Backup section of the Options
dialog box (Tools menu > Options):

Parameters:

Autosaving every <XX> Time interval between savings. To switch off auto saving, set 0 for
min this parameter.

Auto saving folder Folder to save files.

The first launch of nanoCAD after a failure starts from the Recover documents dialog box,
containing information about the original file (name, path and creation time) and last autosave
time.

68
nanoCAD Mechanica

To recover document data, click on the file name and select one of the following in the context
menu:

Recover from Opens the autosaved file with all changes made when the document was
autosaved document autosaved last time.

Open original file Ignores the automatically saved version and opens the original document
(if it exists).

Delete autosaved file Deletes the automatically saved versions.

Open both files Opens both documents.

Backup
nanoCAD creates two backup copies of the file with the same name, but with different
extensions.
Original backup copy (file with *.original extension) saves document data as it was when the file
was opened for editing (original backup is created at the beginning of the session of file
editing);
Backup copy (file with *.bak extension) is often updated during the document editing process
(at every saving by the user). Different contingencies can occur with a document during the
working process, for example, malfunctions of hardware, failure of the software or improper
actions of a user. Backup copy allows the user to recover information and minimize losses of
information by means of periodic savings (for example, every 15-20 minutes) of the file by the
user.
Backup copies are saved in the folder where the document file is saved.
Backup parameters are specified in the AutoSave and Backup section of the Options dialog
box (Tools menu > Options):
Parameters:

Create backup copy Switches backup mode on/off.

Backup original Switches original backup mode on/off.

Backup folder Location to save backup copies.

69
nanoCAD Mechanica

To recover data from a backup copy, change the file extension to *.dwg.

Import
Menu: File– Import…

Command line: IMPORT

You can import data in AutoCAD format (*.dwg) and data exchange format (*.dxf) into nanoCAD
documents.
To import data:
1. Start the File – Import command;
2. In the Open Vector File dialog box select a format and specify a file name:

3. Select Open.
The ways to use templates for imported documents are set in the Options: Template Usage >
For imported documents. For conditions of template usage see in the “Template usage”
section.

Export
Menu: File – Export…

70
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: EXPORT

A nanoCAD document can be exported to AutoCAD format (*.dwg) and data exchange format
(*.dxf). Either the entire document or a part of it can be exported.

Export of All Data

In the Save Document File dialog box:

1. Specify the path for the exported file in the Folder drop-down list,
2. Type a name in the File name field,
3. Select a format in the File type field,
4. Select the Save button.

Export of Selected Data

The export procedure for selected data is the same as the export procedure for all the data,
except that the Selection Only checkbox is selected in the Save Document File dialog box:

71
nanoCAD Mechanica

ATTENTION! If no objects were selected before saving, the Selection Only checkbox is unavailable.

Create Transmit Package

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: File – ETransmit…

Command line: ETRANSMIT

This function forms packages of files for transmitting to other computer or transmission by
internet. Transmittal package includes all drawing-related files such as xrefs and font files.
Create transmittal dialog box displays table with all drawing-related files (xrefs, fonts etc.).
The dialog shows information about every file in transmittal: Name, Size, Type, Date, Saved
path.

72
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click button to display files in a tree structure.

Files marked with and are included in transmittal package.

To create transmittal package:
1. Run ETransmit command.
2. To include additional files click the Add file… button in the Create Transmittal dialog
box, then select files in standard dialog Open.
3. Clear check boxes for unnecessary files to exclude them from packge.
4. Click OK. Specify a file name and locate the folder where you want to create the
transmittal package in Save as dialog box. Transmittal package saves in a self-
extracting ZIP-file.
You can set up ETransmit settings in the ETransmit section of the Options dialog (menu Tools
– Options).

73
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Include fonts Include associated font files (TTF and SHX) to transmittal package.
Path options Select options for files and folders included in package:
Use organized folder structure;
Place all files in one folder;
Keep files and folder as is.

Utilities
Errors and damage can occur in document files due to disruptions in power supply, malfunctions
of computer hardware, program crashes, transfer of documents on electronic media and
transferring over the network etc.
Utilities find and correct errors and damage in problem files as far as possible. Full recovery of
data is not guaranteed.
Purging of a document allows deletion of unused elements from the finished document to reduce
document size.

Document Audit
Menu: File – Drawing Utilities > Audit

Command line: AUDIT

The command allows auditing of an opened document in nanoCAD for errors and correcting some
of them. If a document cannot be opened due to damage, use the Recover command.
Correction of all errors is not guaranteed.
After starting the command, in the inquiry Do you want to fix errors? or [Yes/No]: select
Yes.
Audit report is shown in the command line and looks like:

AcDbLine(117689). Error:: Inactive XData handle (1157FE) was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to Null.

AcDbArc(11768A). Error:: Inactive XData handle (1157FE) was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to Null.

AcDbCircle(119E1F). Error:: Inactive Z coordinate - 1e+100 was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to 0.

74
nanoCAD Mechanica

To see the report press F2.

Recovery of Document
Menu: File – Drawing Utilities > Recover

Command line: RECOVER

The command allows recover a document that cannot be opened.
Full recovery and correction of all errors are not guaranteed.
After command launch, a standard dialog box to open a file appears, you have to select the
folder and the name of the damaged file and after that click the Open button.
The report is shown in the command line and is similar to the report of the Audit command:

AcDbLine(117689). Error:: Inactive XData handle (1157FE) was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to Null.

AcDbArc(11768A). Error:: Inactive XData handle (1157FE) was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to Null.

AcDbCircle(119E1F). Error:: Inactive Z coordinate - 1e+100 was found.

Audit: Invalid.
Fixed:: Replaced: Set to 0.

To see the report press F2.

Audit Geometry
Menu: File – Drawing Utilities – Audit Geometry

Command line: AUDITGEOMETRY

Command detects nonzero Z coordinates of drawing objects and brings them to zero. Also
command fixes incorrect displaying of hatches.
Parametres:

Audit _Z_coordinates Check all objects’ coordinates on Z-axis.

Audit_hatches Check if hatches are displayed correctly in boundaries of contours.

Audit Z coordinates:

Select audit type Select Audit _Z_coordinates.

[audit_Z_coordinates/Audit_hatches/
]
Do you want to fix errors? Select Yes to bring to zero Z-coordinates.
[Yes/No]:

75
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select Z-tolerance? <1E+20>: Press ENTER or specify new value of tolerance in

scientific (exponential) format.

Audit hatches:

Select audit type Select Audit_hatches.

[audit_Z_coordinates/Audit_hatches/
]
Select coordinate tolerance? Press ENTER or specify new value of tolerance in
<1E+6>: sciencific (exponential) format.

Verification report displays in command line.

Purging of Document
Menu: File – Drawing Utilities > Purge …

Command line: PURGE, PU

This command is used to purge unused named elements from a document: block descriptions,
dimension styles, layers, text styles and line types.
Using this procedure you can reduce file size after finishing your project.

ATTENTION! Deleted elements cannot be recovered.

The Purge dialog box appears after the command is launched. There is a list of elements which
available for deletion, and a list of elements which are not available for deletion. The list is
organized as a tree: to open a list of elements of one type, click twice on the elements name or
select the sign to the left of the name. If there is no sign, it means that there are no
elements of this type to delete (or which cannot be deleted).

76
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

View elements Switches on the mode for viewing elements which can be deleted from a
you can purge document.

View elements Switches on the mode for viewing elements which cannot be deleted
you cannot from a document. Elements, used in a document or standard items
purge which cannot be deleted.

Buttons:

Purges the selected elements.

Purges all elements from the list.

To delete elements with confirmation:

1. Switch on the Confirm each item to be purged mode.

2. Select the or button.

3. In the opened dialog box confirm purging of the elements:

Buttons:

Confirmation for every selected element.

77
nanoCAD Mechanica

Confirmation for all elements.

Refuse to delete the selected element.

Cancels the purge command.

Convert to 2D
Menu: File – Drawing Utilities > Convert to 2D

Command line: FLATTEN

Convert selected objects with nonzero coordinates to the current view plane.

NOTE: Conversation of 3D-object is not available in the current version of nanoCAD.

Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Flatten options:

Select options or [?]: Select objects to convert to 2D.

Select options or [?]: Press ENTER to finish.

File Explorer
Menu: Tools – File Explorer

Menu: View – Toolbars – Functional – FileExplorer

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: FILEEXPLORER

File Explorer is association of Windows explorer and drawing definition table. Drawing definition
table is tables of layers, layouts, external references, block definitions, linetypes, text styles, and
dimension styles.
File explorer displays only the following files:

drawing files – dwg, dxf, dwt;

underlay files – dwf, dwfx, pdf;

raster image files – jpg, jpeg, png, bmp, pcx, tiff.
File explorer not display files with other types.

NOTE: File explorer need more horizontal area than other functional toolbars.

78
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dialog box divided into two parts. Left part (Folders) displays folders tree of current user. Right
part displays content of selected tree node. Right part divided into three parts: full list of
elements, description of selected element and image of selected element. Every element type
has own icon.
Right part of dialog box shows the following elements: Folder, Drawing file, Underlay file, Raster
image file, definitions table (Layers, Blocks, Text styles, Linetypes, Dimstyles, Layouts, XRefs),
named object (Layer, Block definition, Text style, Linetype, Dimstyle, Layout, XRef).

Actions
Actions on elements from the right part of File Explorer: Drag&drop, double click, right click.
Sometimes multiple preselection is available (with SHIFT and CTRL).
Drag and drop is used for the following elements:

Type of Effect
element
Layers ( ) Copy layer to the current drawing. Multiple selection is available. Does not
copy if layer with the same name exists in current drawing.

Blocks ( ) Copy block definition to the current drawing. Multiple selection is available.
Does not copy if block with the same name exists in current drawing.

Textstyles ( Copy text style to the current drawing. Multiple selection of styles is available.
) Does not copy if text style with the same name exists in current drawing.

Linetypes ( ) Copy line type to the current drawing. Multiple selection is available. Does not
copy if line type with the same name exists in current drawing.
Dimstyles ( Copy dimension style to the current drawing. Multiple selection is available.

79
nanoCAD Mechanica

) Does not copy if dimstyle with the same name exists in current drawing.

Double click is used for the following elements:

Type of Effect
element
Folder ( ) Transition into the folder.
Drawing file ( Open list of named objects definitions.
)

Raster ( ) Open Insert Raster image dialog box.

Named Open content of named objects definition.

objects
definition ( ,
, , ,
, , )
Layers ( ) Copy layer to the current drawing. Does not copy if layer with the same name
exists in current drawing.

Block ( ) Copy block definition to the current drawing. Does not copy if block with the
same name exists in current drawing.

Textstyles ( Copy text style to the current drawing. Does not copy if text style with the
) same name exists in current drawing.

Linetypes ( ) Copy line type to the current drawing. Does not copy if line type with the same
name exists in current drawing.
Dimstyles ( Copy dimension style to the current drawing. Does not copy if dimstyle with
) the same name exists in current drawing.

Layout ( ) Copy layout to the current drawing. Correct the layout if list with the same
name exists in current drawing.

XRefs ( ) Open Insert External reference dialog box.

Following elements contain context menu:

Element Context menu commands

type
Folder ( ) Explore – transition into the folder;
Set as Home – selected folder becomes a Home (main) folder.
Drawing file ( Explore – transition into list of named objects definitions;
) Attach as XRef… – open Insert External reference dialog box;
Open… – open selected file;
Insert as Block… – open Insert Block dialog box;
Set as Home – selected file becomes a home (main) folder.

Underlay ( ) Insert underlay…– open Insert Underlay dialog box.

Raster Image Attach raster … – open Insert Raster Image dialog box.
( )
Named Explore – open content of named objects definition.
objects
definition ( ,

80
nanoCAD Mechanica

, , ,
, , )
Layers ( ) Add layer(s) – copy layer to the current drawing. Does not copy if layer with
the same name exists in current drawing.

Blocks ( ) Insert Block(s) – open Insert Block dialog box.

Textstyles ( Add Textstyle(s) – copy text style to the current drawing. Does not copy if
) text style with the same name exists in current drawing.

Linetypes ( ) Add Linetype(s) – copy line type to the current drawing. Does not copy if line
type with the same name exists in current drawing.
Dimstyles ( Add Dimstyle(s) – copy dimension style to the current drawing. Does not
) copy if dimstyle with the same name exists in current drawing.

Layouts ( ) Add Layout(s) – copy layout to the current drawing. Correct the layout if list
with the same name exists in current drawing.

XRefs ( ) Attach … – open Insert External reference dialog box

File Explorer Toolbar

File Explorer dialog box contains toolbar placed under window title.
Toolbar buttons:

Button Command
Select file in a tree with Open dialog box.

Returns to the most recent location.

Returns to the next later location.

Returns to your home (main) folder.

Returns to one level above the current folder.

Select display formats for the content that is loaded in the right area (Large icons,
Small icons, List, Details).

Toolbar contains context menu that is identical to View > Toolbars:

Item Context menu command

Open Customize dialog box.
Customize…
nanoCAD Show/hide nanoCAD toolbars.
Toolbars
Functional Show/hide functional toolbars.

81
nanoCAD Mechanica

TUNING NANOCAD
User can change different parameters of nanoCAD.

Mirgation of settings from previous versions

Settings from installed previous versions of nanoCAD can be copied to new version.
On the first start nanoCAD will display Migration of settings dialog with list of all previously
installed nanoCAD versions:

Select desired version or click Skip button to skip migration.

NOTE: Only nanoCAD settings from the Options dialog will be copied. Toolbars and menu
customization will be skipped.

To restore default program settings use Reset All command in the Profiles dialog (menu Tools
– Customize > Profiles).

Tuning program parameters

Menu: Tools – Options…

Hotkeys: CTRL+9

Command line: OPTIONS, PREF

You can launch the command from the right-bottom menu of the command line:

82
nanoCAD Mechanica

Tuning program parameters is performed in the Options dialog box:

There is a tree of options, grouped by sections, in the left part of the dialog box.
To see the parameters of the group, click twice on the name of the section or select the icon to
the left of the section name. If you click the icon, the section (subsection) will be closed.
The Add, Modify and Delete buttons of the Action section become available; this means that
the selected parameter from the tree can be edited.

Add new option to the selected subfolder.

Modify the selected option.

Delete the selected option.

Move the selected option up .

83
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move the selected option down.

To change a value of a parameter:

Select/deselect the checkbox to the left of the parameter
or

Click twice on the parameter

or
Select the parameter and select the Modify button.

Parameters

Cursor
The section of graphic cursor setting.

Crosshair size<5%> Sets the size of the crosshair as a percentage

of the display size.

Pickbox The pickbox size.

PickBox size <4> pickbox size in pixels.

3D style colors 3D color style for the crosshair and pickbox.

Cursor color Cursor color.

Show Object and Snap Tooltips Switches object tooltips on/off.

Select
Parameters of frames to select objects.

Color frame Color frame.

Color fence Color fence.

Transparency <70> Transparency of frame and fence.

Selection preview Selections preview settings.

Selection preview max objects Max count of selected objects in preview.

count <100>
Window selection method Sets the method of selection.
Click and Click Specify two points of fence or frame by two
clicks.
Press and drag Press cursor and drag it.

84
nanoCAD Mechanica

Both – Automatic detediton Use both methods.

Keep pre-selection after On/Off keep pre-selection after modify
modification commands: Move, Rotate and Scale.

Grips
Parameters of the grips of the selected objects.

Grip size <10> Grip size in pixels.

Grip max objects count <100> Limits of grips shown for selected objects.

Grips color Grips color.

Hovered grips color Grips color under cursor.

Selected grips color Selected grips color.

Dynamic block grips color Color of grips of dynamic blocks.

Color settings
Colors of the program components.

Modelspace Color The color of background in model space.

Paperspace Color The color of layout in paperspace.
Layout Backbround Color The color of background in paperspace.
Grid Color The color of Grid points.
Print Area Color The frame color that indicates a print area.
Print Margins Color The frame color that indicates the paper
format edges.
Block Editor Background Block Editor background color.

Snap settings
Defines the Snap settings.

Hold Aperture Size <10> The size of a cursor frame in snap mode.
Show Aperture Box Switches the aperture box on/off in the snap
mode.
Snap Marker size <5> Snap marker size.

Show Tooltips Turns on the display of a snap name.

Vector Marker Color The color of the snap marker when snapping
to a vector object.
Snap For Objects Sets snap for different objects.

85
nanoCAD Mechanica

Snap For Dimensions Indicates whether the dimensions considered

in the calculation of the intersection points.
Snap For Layouts Indicates wherer the layout borders
considered in the calculation of the
intersection points.

Mouse settings
3D Orbit settings
SHIFT+mouse wheel to rotate Enable\disable rotation of 3D orbit when
3D orbit using SHIFT+mouse wheel.

Orbit center Locate rotation center of 3D Orbit.

View center Places rotation center to the center of

drawing graphic area.
Visible objects Places rotation center to the center of objects
you’re viewing.
Visible parts of objects Places rotation center to the center of objects
parts you’re viewing.

Mouse Wheel scale factor <1.5> Scale factor used to scale with the Mouse
Wheel.

Right button usage

The section redefines functions of the right button.

Always shows Popup Menu Switches on the context only menu launch.

Override for different Switches on the redefining of right button

modes: functions for different working modes in the
document window.

Edit Mode: This section redefines the right button

functions when it is pressed in the editing
mode, i.e. there are no running commands.
Shows Popup menu Switches on the context-only menu launch.
Repeat last command Switches on the ENTER key imitation
function, where clicking the right button
again starts the last command if objects were
selected.
Repeat last command when Switches on the ENTER key imitation
nothing is selected function, where clicking the right button
again starts the last command if no objects
were selected.

Command mode: This section redefines the right button

functions when it is pressed during a running
command.

86
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shows Popup menu Switches on the context-only menu launch.

Sends (ENTER) Switches on the ENTER key imitation
function.
Shows Popup menu after delay: Switches on the mode which considers the
duration of right button holding:
short clicking – repetition of command or
ENTER according to the mode,
long holding – opens the context menu.
Delay <250> ms Specifies in milliseconds, the duration of right
button holding to open the context menu. By
default the value is 250 ms.
To change the duration of button holding:
1. click twice on the delay value,
2. enter a new delay value.

Always show Popup menu when Switches on/off the mode where the context
objects selected menu launches every time the right button is
clicked during selection of objects.

Command line
The section sets the parameters of the command line.

Use Autocomplete Switches on/off the auto complete mode,

when after entering one or several first
letters of the command, the command is auto
completed in the command line.

Autoselect mode Advanced options of autocomplete.

Don’t select Manual selection.

Select on prefix When fuzzy complete disable: first

item will be selected only if it has
common prefix with command line.
When fuzzy complete enable: item
will be selected if it has common
characters with command line. For
example, zll selects ZoomAll
command.
Always select First item will be selected always.

Complection content Complection of autocomplete list.

Complete system variables Show system variables in autocompletion list.

Complete blocks Show block names in Autocompletion list.

Additional options Additional options of autocomplete.

Autocomplete during delay Selection of the most probable command

before autocomplete list is.

87
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fuzzy complete Automatic correction of errors while typing.

Command line background color
Command line text color
Use alternate font
Font Height <12>
Sets the background color of the command
line.
Sets the text color of the command line.
Switches on/off the using of alternative font
in the command line.
Specifies font height in the command line.

Graphic settings
Video subsystem and graphic displaying settings.

Vectorizer Type Specifies graphic hardware acceleration

library to use by program.
This setting will be applied after restart of
thenanoCAD.
OpenGL

DirectX

Use anti-aliasing Smoothe line displaying. Setting will be

applied for new opened or created document.

Rendering optimization Rendering optimization settings.

Optimize meshes rendering
Optimize rendering objects with
lwd
Optimize text rendering
Optimize small details rendering
Simplify text less than <8>
pixels
Disable solid filling for Texts and Hatches in
navigation mode – Zoom, Pan, etc.
Disable linewidth in navigation mode – Zoom,
Pan, etc.
Disable linewidth for Text bound in navigation
mode – Zoom, Pan, etc .Text bound is
displaying instead of Text in QTEXT mode or
if option Simplify text less then <4>
pixels is selected.
Disable points and other graphic with the
same size in navigation mode – Zoom, Pan,
etc.
All text smaller than specified value will be
shown in a drawing as empty bounding
boxes. Regeneration is required.

OpenGL settings OpenGL settings.

Graphics hardware acceleration
settings
Setting 1 (OpenGL)
Settings for the automatic and manual setup
of OpenGL graphics hardware accelerator.
It is recommended to close all opened
documents before switching these settings.
All changes will be applied only to a newly
created and opened documents.
A set of OpenGl settings #1.

88
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting 2 (OpenGL) A set of OpenGl settings #2.

Setting 3 (OpenGL) A set of OpenGl settings #3.

Improved compatibility mode Uses the improved compatibility mode for

graphics displaying (can slow down the
process of screen redrawing).

DirectX settings DirectX settings.

Sets threshold texture size for Use video-memory to speed up displaying of

texture cache <0.5>
Force using 3D graphics and
spatial index
raster images. Images with any bitmap
dimension (horizontal or vertical) multiplayed
with this threshold should be less then
maximum gradient size – special value,
calculated for current PC video-memory.
Threshold should be from 0.1 to 0.5.
Enable/disable auto regen in 3D graphics.

Print preview mode settings Section is used to control platform

components, used for creation of preview if
printing is in metafile format (WMF) or raster
image (BMP).
Metafile (WMF)

Bitmap (BMP)

Separate display cache for Model
Space views
Separate display cache for Paper
Space views
Creates separate display cache for every
viewport of Model Space for correct
displaying of the graphical elements, which
are located far than 3000000 units away from
the drawing origin.
Creates separate display cache for every
viewport of Paper Space for correct displaying
of the graphical elements, which are located
far than 3000000 units away from the
drawing origin.

AutoSave and Backup

The section sets auto saving and backup parameters.

Autosaving every <5> min Saving interval for the current document.
Zero value switches off auto saving.
Autosave folder < > Folder for auto saved files.
Default folder is ТEMP.
Create backup copy Switches backup copy mode on/off.
Backup original Switches original backup copy mode on/off.
Backup folder < > Folder to save backup files. By default,
backup files are saved in the same folder as
the original file.

89
nanoCAD Mechanica

Standard directories
The section sets folders where miscellaneous system files are stored –fonts, line types, hatch
patterns, multiline styles, plot styles and configuration files, templates, etc. .
nanoCAD searches files in Common files location folders, then in subfolder downwards. First
found file will be used and search will be stopped.
You can change search order using Up and Down buttons. Add, Modify, Delete buttons
permits to add, modify or delete folders including default ones. Note that PlotConfigs and
PlotSyles sections can only be modified, not deleted or added new paths.
To restore default standard directories use Reset All button in Profiles dialog (menu Tools –
Customize > Interface).

ATTENTION! All custom user settings will be lost!

Common All files placed in this folder will be used primarily for all types files in
files Standard folders.
location
SHX files Path to folders with text fonts, linetypes, hatches, multiline styles.
location Default value:
<C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\shx>
Templates Path to folders with nanoCAD template files.
files Default value::
location <C:\Users\%User name%\AppData\Roaming\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus
Int 7.0\Templates>
PlotConfigs Path to folders with Plot Configuration files.
files Default
location value:<C:\Users\%User name%\AppData\Roaming\Nanosoft\nanoCAD
Plus Int 7.0\PlotConfigs>
PlotStyles Path to folders with Plot Styles files.
files Default
location value:<C:\Users\%User name%\AppData\Roaming\Nanosoft\nanoCAD
Plus Int 7.0\PlotStyles>
Pat files Path to folders with PAT files.
location Default value:
<C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\shx>

Template Usage
Section to specify templates for new documents and for import and export of documents.

For new documents Actions on the File > New command.

None No action taken.

Use default Opens the file specified in the Default

Template File Name.
Ask for file Opens the File > Open dialog box.

90
nanoCAD Mechanica

Choose from list Opens the Choose Template dialog box.

Default Template File Name Shows and allows changing of the Default
<Default.dwt> Template File Name.

Templates Names List List for Choose Templates.

For imported documents Actions for imported documents.

None No action taken.

Use default Opens the file specified in the Default

Template File Name.
Ask for file Opens the File > Open dialog box.

Choose from list Opens the Choose Template dialog box.

Default Template File Name Shows and allows changing of the Default
<Default.dwt> Template File Name.
Templates Names List List for Choose Templates.

For Export to File Actions for exported documents.

None No action taken.

Use default Opens the file specified in the Default

Template File Name.
Ask for file Opens the File > Open dialog box.

Choose from list Opens the Choose Template dialog box.

Default Template File Name Shows and allows changing of the Default
<Default.dwt> Template File Name.
Templates Names List List for the Choose Templates.

Papers
Contains standard paper formats. Allows the modification of an existing format or addition of a
new one.
Formats from this section are used for printing.

Raster File Formats

Raster file formats which can be inserted with Image from File command (Insert menu.
Available formats:

TIF,

TIFF,
BMP (Windows Bitmap),

JPG,
JPEG,

91
nanoCAD Mechanica

PNG (Portable Network Graphics),

PCX (ZSoft).

Text
Section to specify a file with font for replacing.

Alternative font name <txt.shx> Name of font file to replace a missing font in
an opened document.

API
Options for nanoCAD applications developers.

Start Screen

Disable Start Screen Enable/disable Start Screen on nanoCAD start.

ETransmit
Create package with all necessary files – external links, raster images, fonts.

Include fonts Include to packet used in document TTF and SHX

fonts.

Path options Settings for packet structure.

Use Orgaized Structure
Place all files in one folder
Keep files and folders as is
Puts fonts to FONTS folder, drawings and raster
images – to root.
Place all files, including drawings, images and
fonts to the same folder.
Create folders structure as in the original
document

Default raster properties

DPI <300> Default resolution for images doesn’t contains

resolution.
Transparency Enable/disable transparency mode for
monochrome images.

92
nanoCAD Mechanica

Graphic subsystem settings

nanoCAD provides a wide variety of settings to adjust graphic subsystem, from selecting the
video adapter graphics library, to configure different cases of graphic displaying in the drawing.
You can set up graphics settings in the Graphics settings section of the Options dialog.

All graphic subsystem settings could be divided on two logical parts:

Graphics hardware acceleration settings;

Graphics settings, actual for any hardware acceleration mode.

Graphics hardware acceleration settings

For correct and fast graphics displaying in a workspace, you can specify the way of nanoCAD
interaction with PC’s graphics hardware accelerator: using OpenGL, using DirectX or using
OpenGL software emulation mode.

93
nanoCAD Mechanica

There are special settings for every mode of interaction. OpenGL graphics library is set by
default. This mode provides 3 OpenGL settings sets, which should be switched depending on the
PC’s video adapter performance.
For the first time you should use autocheck of system performance of graphic system.

Automatic adjustment of graphic hardware acceleration

The program graphic subsystem might work slowly or become unstable with some video adapters
and driver versions. For example, the cursor in the empty drawing moves unevenly or isn’t
shown. In this case it is worth to estimate performance of PC video subsystem with automatic
determination of the optimal set of graphics settings.

-Menu: Help – Video Subsystem performance check

Command line: VPERFTEST

NOTE: It is better to close all running programs to get correct test results.

When the test is finished, the dialog with the results is shown:

94
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Report button is used to save the results of testing in a separate file.

Apply button enacts Graphics hardware acceleration settings that were recommended after
automatic testing, and shows situable message:

Click OK and restart nanoCAD to make the settings work.

The command can change only the following Graphics hardware acceleration settings:

95
nanoCAD Mechanica

Other options will not be changed. You should change them in Option dialog manually.

OpenGL manual adjustment

These settings can be changed manually in the Graphic settings section – OpenGL settings -
Graphics hardware acceleration settings of the Options dialog:

For manual OpenGL adjustment, do the following:

1. Save all changes, close all drawings that you are editing.
2. Open the Options dialog box (menu Tools – Options).
3. In the dialog box that appears, open the Graphic settings – Graphics hardware
acceleration settings section.
4. Try switching between settings Setting 1 (OpenGL), Setting 2 (OpenGL) and
Setting 3 (OpenGL).
5. After every attempt, press OK in the dialog box, then open a new document and check
the cursor speed.
6. Switch to the most appropriate OpenGL setting set.

DirectX manual adjustment

You can use DirectX instead of OpenGL graphics library.
Switch to DirectX in the Graphic settings - OpenGL/DirectX section of the Options dialog.

96
nanoCAD Mechanica

Sets threshold texture size for texture cache <…>

Displaying of small raster images is more quick when the image is saved in computer graphic
memory. This coefficient limits the size of raster images that will be saved in graphic memory.
The image is suitable if its largest size (vertically and horizontally) is less than the following
value: the size of graphic memory multipled by this coefficient. The coefficient is fractional
number between 0.1 and 0.5.

Graphic subsystem common settings

After you have configured hardware interaction settings, you can configure other parameters of
graphic subsystem. Discussed in this section, graphic subsystem settings are relevant for any
type of hardware interaction – OpenGL / DirectX / OpenGL software emulation mode.
Antialiasing
Enable Use anti-aliasing check-box to smooth lines on the drawing:

Anti-aliasing does not work when Improved compatibility mode is enable.

Rendering optimization
Optimize meshs rendering
Turn off displaying of solid text and hatch during document navigation (zoom, pan etc.).
Optimize rendering objects with lwd
Turn off displaying of line weight during document navigation (zoom, pan etc.).

97
nanoCAD Mechanica

Optimize text rendering

Turn off displaying of weight of bounding rectangles for the text during document navigation
(zoom, pan etc.). Bounding rectangles are shown when Quick text (QTEXT) mode or Simplify
text less than <…> pixels option is turned on.
Optimize small details rendering
Disable points and other graphic with the same size in navigation mode – Zoom, Pan, etc.
Simplify text less than <…> pixels
You can set the height of the text displaying in pixels. If the height of text object is less than this
value, then it displays as the bounding rectangle of the text object.

Simplify text mode is disabled Simplify text mode is enabled

Renew the drawing to changes take effect.

Graphics displaying for very large drawings

If a drawing has a large size (the values of the cursor’s coordinates are 3000000 or higher),
perhaps youneed to switch on the following parameters to correct the graphics displaying:

Improved compatibility mode

If none of OpenGL and DirectX settings does not give an acceptable displaying quality, you can
try to enable the improved compatibility mode.
The Improved compatibility mode emulates OpenGL with built-in Windows software tools and
allows not taking into account PC's hardware video accelerator.

98
nanoCAD Mechanica

To enable this mode set OpenGL mode and enable Improved compatibility mode checkbox.

ATTENTION! Usage of the Improved compatibility mode can significantly slow down the process of
graphics redrawing on the screen.

Tuning the Interface

Menu: Tools – Customize > Interface…

Command line: CUSTOMIZE

In the Customize dialog box you can change the settings of the working environment, create
new menus and toolbars, add or delete commands to menus or toolbars, save all settings in one
profile and manage profiles.
The Customize dialog contains 5 tabs:

Toolbars;
Commands;

Keyboard;

Options;
Profiles.

Toolbars tab
The toolbar contains a list of instruments, used in nanoCAD.

99
nanoCAD Mechanica

The checkbox to the left of the toolbars manages toolbar display.

The Show text labels checkbox switches on/off the display of text labels on the buttons of the
selected toolbar. The Layout toolbar view:

Show text labels is switched off Show text labels is switched on

The Toolbar tab allows the creation of custom toolbars and placing any button there, and adding
buttons to standard toolbars.
The Reset button resets the menu bar.
The Reset All resets all menus and toolbars.
To create a new toolbar:
1. Select the New button.
2. In the Toolbar Name dialog specify a name and select OK:

100
nanoCAD Mechanica

The checkbox for the created toolbar is selected automatically.

3. Select the Close to close the Customize dialog box.
To place a button onto a new toolbar:
1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Switch to the Commands tab.
3. In the Categories section select All Commands.
4. In the Commands section select the required command and drag it to the new toolbar.
5. Select the Close button.
You can move and copy buttons from the existing toolbars to a new toolbar.
The toolbar from which you want to take a button must be displayed.
To copy a button drag it with CTRL pressed.
To create a new group of commands on a toolbar:
1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Place the cursor over the button which will start a group.
3. Press the right button and from the context menu select the Begin Group command:

4. There is a separation line to the left of the button:

To delete a button from a toolbar:

1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Place the cursor over the button, which you want to delete.
3. Drag the button off the toolbar or from the context menu select the Delete command:

101
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select the Close button.

To rename a toolbar:
1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Select the toolbar from the list.
3. Select the Rename button.
4. In the Toolbar Name dialog box specify the new name and select OK:

5. Select the Close button.

NOTE: You can only rename custom toolbars.

To delete a toolbar:
1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Select the toolbar from the list.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the Close button.

NOTE: You can only delete custom toolbars.

Commands tab
This tab allows nanoCAD commands to be added to menus and toolbars.

102
nanoCAD Mechanica

There are two sections (Categories and Commands) in the Commands tab.
The titles of the main menus are in the Categories section.
All nanoCAD commands are in the All commands category of the Commands section.
There is a short description of the selected command in the Description field.
nanoCAD commands can be dragged into the opened menus and toolbars from the dialog box.
To add new commands to a menu:
1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Select the New Menu in the Categories section.
3. Open the menu to which you want to add new commands.
4. From the Commands section drag the New Menu element to the menu bar.
5. To rename the inserted menu bar, place the cursor over the New Menu and press the
right button. From the context menu select the Button Appearance:

103
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. In the opened Button Appearance dialog box type the new name in the Text field and
select ОК.
7. To add a command to a new submenu, click on the inserted menu.
8. Select the All commands category of the Categories section.
9. From the Commands drag the required commands to the new menu item:

10. Close the Customize dialog box.

A new menu will be created with the commands added

ATTENTION! : Elements of the Commands section (All commands category) with special icons are
used to create menus:

104
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using these elements you can create a cascading menu:

To delete a custom menu item:

1. Open the Customize dialog box.
2. Open the menu where you want to delete the item.
3. Drag the item outside the menu.

NOTE: You can delete a menu item and all its submenus.

Keyboard tab
The Keyboard tab allows hotkeys to be defines for nanoCAD commands.
Hotkeys are a combination of symbol and command keys: CTRL, SHIFT and/or ALT. For
example, CTRL+ O is the same as File > Open, and opens the Open File dialog box; CTRL+ S
– saves a document etc. Hotkey combinations used are shown in the right part of context menus
and in the tooltips of toolbar buttons.

105
nanoCAD Mechanica

To assign hotkeys:
1. Select a menu title to display the required list of commands in the Command section.
The All commands category opens a list of all commands in the Commands section.
2. Choose a command from the Commands list. The Description field shows the
description of the chosen command.
3. Place the cursor in the Press new acceleration key field and press the hotkeys for this
command on the keyboard. The pressed combination is shown in the field.
4. Select the Assign button.
If a combination is set for the first time, in the Assigned to section Unassigned is shown.
If hotkeys are already set for the selected command, they will be shown in the Current keys
section.
You can assign several combinations for one command and remove unnecessary combinations by
selecting them in the Current keys section and selecting the Remove button.
If a chosen combination of keys for the selected command is already used for another command,
the command having this hotkey combination is shown in the Assigned to section and the
Assign button is blocked:

106
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Reset All button removes all custom hotkeys and restores their original state.

Options tab
The tab is used to change the view of the application and toolbars.

107
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:
Application look

Visual Style: Selection of program style.

Available styles:

Windows default

Smart 1

Smart 2

Smart 3

Luna Blue

Obsidian Black

Aqua

Silver

The button to apply a selected visual style.

Toolbars

Show tooltips Switches tooltips on/off when moving the cursor over a button on a
toolbar.

Show shortcut in Switches on/off shortcuts in tooltips.

tooltips

Toolbar button Use the slider to specify the button size on toolbars.
108
nanoCAD Mechanica

size

Profiles tab
The tab is used to create profiles.
A Profile is a set of custom settings with a unique name for working environment parameters. By
default, nanoCAD saves all current settings in <<Unnamed>> profile.
If several users, using one account to enter the system, work with the program, each of them
can create a profile and load it for working. Another example of profile usage is for quickly
switching between settings when working with different documents in the current session.
Only one profile can be current. When changing interface settings the current profile is changed
automatically.
To use the custom settings of the working environment on other computers, a profile can be
saved in a file with a *.wip extension. A WIP-file loaded on the other computer changes only
the setting of the current profile, which were saved in this file. Other settings remain unchanged.

The list of all profiles is shown in the Profiles section.

The name of the current profile is shown in the Current profile field.
A new profile inherits the properties of the current profile.
To set a selected profile as the current one, select the Set Current button.
To delete a selected profile from the list select the Remove button.
The Reset All button deletes all profiles and recovers the standard nanoCAD profile.

ATTENTION! Before applying the Reset All button, save user profiles or they will be deleted.

109
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a new profile:

1. In the Customize dialog box, specify the required settings.
2. In the Profile tab select the Add button.
3. In the Profile dialog box specify a name for the new profile and select the required
check boxes:

4. Select OK. The name of the created profile will be shown in the list of profiles.
5. Select the Close button to close the dialog box.
To save a profile:
1. Select the profile to save.
2. Select the Save button.
3. In the Profile dialog box specify a name for the new profile and select the required
check boxes.
4. Select OK.
5. In the Save As dialog box specify the name and the folder location to save the profile,
after that select the Save button.
6. Select the Close button to close the dialog box.
To load a profile from other computer:
1. Select the Load button.
2. In the Open dialog box select the nanoCAD profile.
3. Select the Open button. The file will be added to the profiles list and set as the current
one.
4. Select the Close button to close the dialog box.

ATTENTION! You can replace the profile only among one nanoCAD version. When you replace the
profile from one program version into another version troubles with interface might occur.

NOTE: You can open the profile editor from the Tools menu: Customize>Profile Manager:

110
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Profiles dialog box is identical to Profiles tab of the Customize dialog box.

Profile quick setting

Menu: Tools – Customize > Switch profile

Command line: QUICKPROFILE

The command opens the dialog for quick access to profile settings. Using this command you can
set a current profile or create a new profile.

The Switch to Profile dialog contains a list of profiles, created or loaded in the current program
session.
To set a profile current select a button with its name.
The Add button opens the Add profile dialog to create a new profile.

Design settings
Menu: Tools – Settings Parameters…

Command line: PARAMS

Interface and parameters of annotations are set in the Settings dialog box in nanoCAD:

111
nanoCAD Mechanica

The path to the settings file is shown in the top part of the dialog box.
The Open button opens a standard dialog box for the selection and loading of a new settings file.
The main window of the dialog contains the following tabs: Main, Standard elements,
Symbols, Forms.
The parameters of the settings are shown in a tree form.
There is a graphic illustration of the adjusted parameters in the right part of the dialog box:

Select a parameter from the drop-down list:

or in the dialog box by pressing the button:

112
nanoCAD Mechanica

The values of some parameters are entered from the keyboard:

The drop-down list in the Standard section is used to change the standard:

It is strongly recommended to match a *.dwt working template with nanoCAD settings.

What can be unified:
Dimension and text styles. It is recommended to adjust nanoCAD according to *.dwt
template settings.

The global scale of linetypes.

Layers names and properties. By default many nanoCAD objects use a “current” layer
for insertion. It is recommended to set layers’ names from a *.dwt template.

Layouts names and their settings.

Plot styles of objects, if a *.dwt template with named plot styles is used.

Settings of Layers profiles

Layers profiles are used to organize different divisions of the design work within one drawing file.
Every user works with their own group of layers.
For example, you have to annotate a drawing with leaders set separately by the compliance
supervisor and the technologist.
Do:
1. Switch to the Symbols tab in the Settings dialog, select the Leader note in the Notes
section, in the Layer field select the <Table of layers>:

113
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: The button opens the Table of layers dialog too.

2. Select the New layer button to create a new layer. By default a new layer will have
a LayerN name, where N – layer’s number.
3. Click on the created layer’s name to rename it. Type a new name – Notes:

114
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select ОК.
5. Select ОК to close the Settings dialog box.
6. In the Save changes? dialog box select the Save to config file and current
document parameter and select OK:

NOTE: When saving settings in a configuration file (not in a current document), all notes will be created
on the Notes layer by default. It does not matter whether this layer is in the document. If a layer does not
exist, it will be created with the parameters specified in the Table of layers dialog box.

To separate the work of the compliance supervisor and the technologist, create layers profiles.
7. In the Settings dialog switch to the Main options tab and in the Common settings
section in the Current profile select the to open the Table of profiles dialog:

115
nanoCAD Mechanica

8. Select the New profile button to create the new profile’s prefix. By default a new
profile’s prefix will have a Profile1 name.
9. Click on the created profile’s prefix name to rename it. Type a new name – T_.
10. In the Full profile name column rename Profile1 to Technologist:

Using the same method to create the CS_ profile’s prefix:

11. Select ОК to close the Table of profiles dialog box.

12. Select ОК in the Settings dialog box.
13. In the Save changes? dialog box select the Save to config file and current
document parameter and select OK.

116
nanoCAD Mechanica

As a result of the settings, according to which profile is set as current, you can create:

Technologist’s annotation on the T_Notes;

Compliance supervisor’s annotation on the CS_Notes;

Leader note on the Notes layer.

To create technologist’s annotation:
1. Select CTRL + SHIFT + Q hotkeys to open the Quick Options dialog box:

2. Select the T_ profile from the drop-down list:

3. Select ОК.
4. Create an annotation using the Notes>Universal notes command from the Draw
menu. When the first annotation is being created, a new T_Notes layer is created on
the Notes layer base:

To create the compliance supervisor’s annotation:

1. Select CTRL + SHIFT + Q hotkeys to open the Quick Options dialog box.

117
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the CS_ profile from the drop-down list.

3. Select ОК.
4. Create an annotation using the Notes>Universal notes command from the Draw
menu. When the first annotation is being created, a new CS_Notes layer is created on
the Notes layer base:

To create a universal note:

1. Open the Settings dialog box.
2. Open the Table of profiles dialog box.
3. Select NO PROFILE.
4. Twice select OK to close the dialog boxes.
5. Create a universal note. When the first annotation is being created, a new Notes layer is
created:

To enhance visualisation, you can set different colors for the Notes, CS_Notes and T_Notes
layers.
Do:
1. Switch to the Symbols tab in the Settings dialog box and in the Notes – Universal
note section select By layer in the Color and Text color fields.
2. Select OK in the Settings dialog box.

118
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. In the Save changes? dialog box select the Save to config file and current
document parameter and select OK.
4. In the Layers dialog specify the colors for the layers.

NOTE: Hotkeys for the Quick options dialog box are specified in the Hotkeys section in the Main
options tab of the Settings dialog box:

Saving and transferring settings to another computer

There are three types of settings in nanoCAD – symbols, interface settings (highlighted yellow)
and organization settings:

Interface settings are set by the user and influence the application’s work.
Design elements settings are written in a separate file. These settings are read when a new
document is created and they define how the drawing created with nanoCAD tools will look.
If the design elements settings are changed, the following dialog box is shown after selecting the
OK button:

119
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Save to current Saves the design element settings in the current document.
document When a new document is created, the settings will be the same as the settings
set in a configuration file; the setting will only be applied to the current
document.

Save to config The new design element settings will be applied to all new documents by default
file and current and to the newly created design elements in the current document.
document To save settings in this file you must have the rights to write to the settings
folder.

Don’t save Refuse to save the changes to the design element settings.

This separate saving of design element settings helps to standardize the drawing preparations
procedures in an organisation: you just have to set a common settings file on a network.
Defining who has rights to write to the common file can be done using the operating system
tools.
Settings files for users
spot.icf - nanoCAD interface settings file
ObjSettings_spot.cfg – settings file for nanoCAD design elements
are stored in the folder C:\Users\%User_name%\AppData\Roaming\Nanosoft\nanoCAD
Plus Int 7.0.
To transfer settings to another computer, you should copy them into the corresponding folders
and specify the path to them in the Settings dialog.

Drawing units
Menu: Format – Units…

Command line: UNITS, UN

The command opens the Drawing Units dialog box, where you can define the format and
accuracy of the linear and angle units.
By default, the base direction to measure angles is to the right of the initial point (East). Angles
should be measured in a counter clockwise direction to give positive numbers.

120
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:
Linear

Type: Current format of linear units.

Available formats in the drop-down list:

Architectural

Decimal

Engineering

Fractional

Scientific

Precision: Accuracy of current linear units.

Angle

Type: Current format of angle units.

Available formats in the drop-down list:

Deg/Min/SEC

Grads

Decimal degrees

Radians

Surveyor’s units

121
nanoCAD Mechanica

Precision: Accuracy of current angle units.

122
nanoCAD Mechanica

Base Direction of base angle.

Angle: Available formats in the drop-down list:

East

North

West

South
Pick angle – by specifying two points in the graphic area.

Clockwise To change positive direction to measure angles to clockwise.

Insertion scale

Units to Units to measure blocks and external references, inserted in a document. If a

scale block or inserted document was created with units which do not coincide with
inserted the units set in this section, the block or inserted document will be scaled to
content: the specified units. Scale is defined by the ratio of units in an inserted
document and a current document.
If the Undefined option is selected, the insertion is performed without
scaling.

Sample Preview of current linear and angle units set in the dialog box.
output

Symbol scale and measurement scale

There are two types of scale: symbol scale and measurement scale. The values for any of these
scales can be set for any object, group of objects or document. IDT_LinearScale New objects
inherit the scale values from the document.

Specifying scale
To set scale, use the scale button on the status bar.

This button displays the scale of the selected objects. If objects are
selected, an asterisk symbol is displayed before the scale value (scale
1:1 means that 1mm of object equals 1 unit of drawing).

If there are no objects selected, the button displays the document scale
but the asterisk is absent.
If the symbol scale value is displayed, the m character is in lower case.
If the measurement scale value is displayed, the M character is in upper
case.

If the selected object does not support the selected scale, or selected
objects have different scales, the scale value is not displayed.

To specify scale:
1. Select objects. To change the scale of all objects in the drawing, select all objects. If no
objects are selected, a new scale will be set only for new objects that are created.
2. Select the scale button in the status bar.
3. Select the scale type in the menu (Symbol scale or Measurement scale) and specify

123
nanoCAD Mechanica
the scale value from the list.

124
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can set the scale for the selected objects or take the scale value from the selected object.
To apply the scale to the selected objects or to take the scale from the selected
object:
1. Select the scale button.
2. In the menu that opens, select the scale type (Symbol scale or Measurement
scale).
3. Select Set to selection.

4. Select the objects on the drawing whose scale you want to change.
To copy the scale from a selected object:
1. Select scale button.
2. In the menu that opens, select the scale type (Symbol scale or Measurement scale).
3. Select Take from selection.
4. Select the object in the drawing whose scale you want to copy.

Symbol scale
Symbol scale is a settings parameter which decreases or increases the annotation objects in the
drawing. This scale type is used for adjusting the display of annotation if it is too small or too
big; for example, to change the size of an object’s arrows and text. This scale has no influence
on the size of other objects.
Symbol scale affects:

Annotation objects.

Linetypes with gaps and text.

Dimensions and special text.

125
nanoCAD Mechanica

Symbol scale for objects is 1:1 Symbol scale for objects is 1:2

To set symbol scale:

To set and change scales, use the scale button in the status bar. If the value is set to symbol

scale, the m character is in lower case:

126
nanoCAD Mechanica

Example of changing the symbol scale of a dimension object:

Measurement scale
This scale influences objects, but the size of the annotation of the objects stays unchanged.
Linear dimensions are also scaled.
Measurement scale can be set for the following objects:

Dimension objects; measurement scale influences the dimension text.

Special object from vertical applications can have influences on the measurement
scale of an object size in the drawing.

125
nanoCAD Mechanica

Measurement scale for

Measurement scale for all Measurement scale for all
dimension objects is 1:2
objects is 1:1 objects is 1: 2
and for object is 1:1

Use this scale if the drawing has a scale that differs from 1:1 scale.
To set measurement scale:
To set and change scales, use the scale button in the status bar. If the measurement scale value

is set, the M character is in upper case:

126
nanoCAD Mechanica

Example of changing the measurement scale:

1000:1
500:1
200:1
[ ext 100:1
Fit 50:1
Dim ln
i e forced Off -t. Pr
- ......................... , (j.:,"/Jl :, "-t } 1.;.>1 .. ...................... 20:1
Dim ln
i einside Off 10:1
..
Dim scale overall 1.0000 5:1
Fit Bestfit 2:1
Textinside Off
1:1
Text movement Keep dim ln
i e wit.,,

units a " 1:2

1:

1:10
1:20
1:50
1:100
1:200
1:500
1:1000

Take from selection

Set to selection

Symbol scale

I Measurement scale

127
nanoCAD Mechanica

COORDINATE SYSTEMS
The position of every drawing point is defined by its coordinates. In the command prompt for a
point position you can specify it on the screen or type the coordinates in the command line.

Specifying coordinates
Coordinates can be specified in the Cartesian coordinate system and Polar coordinate
system.
Cartesian and Polar coordinates can be relative and absolute.

Cartesian coordinates
Cartesian coordinate system is defined by three perpendicular axes: X, Y and Z.
The origin of the coordinate system is the point of intersection of the three axes and has the
coordinates: (0,0,0).
If you work in the plane, the Z coordinate is always 0, you have to specify X and Y. The X value
is specified horizontally and Y value vertically. Positive coordinates are set to the right and above
the origin, and negative to the left and below.
When working in three dimensions, you have to set the Z coordinates. By default, the Z axis is
set perpendicular to the XY plane from the viewpoint of the observer. The positive coordinates
are set above the plane and negative below.
For example, the coordinates (30,20) specify the point set 30 units in on the X axis and 20 units
in on the Y axis.

Absolute coordinates are specified from the origin of the coordinate system. Absolute are used
if the precise X and Y coordinates are known values.
Example:
The point with coordinates X=10 and Y=20 is the start and the point with coordinates X=30,
Y=40 is the end of the line. To create the line, enter in the command line:

Command: Line
Specify 10,20
first
point:
Specify 30,40
next

128
nanoCAD Mechanica

point:

Relative coordinates are used when the distance from the previous point is a known value.
To specify relative coordinates, enter the @ symbol before their values. Values specified after the
@ symbol are distances along the X and Y axes from the previous point.
To create a line from the previous example using the relative coordinates enter in the command
line:

Command: LINE
Specify 10,20
first
point:
Specify @20,20
next
point:

Polar coordinates
In the Polar coordinate system, the absolute coordinates of a point are set by the distance from
the origin and an angle between the polar axis and a line lying through the point and origin. The
angle is set in degrees counter clockwise.
For example, the coordinates 40<30 specify a point on the plane, setting the distance as 40 units
from the origin and with a 30 degrees angle from the X axis.

Example: The start point of the line is set as 20 units from the origin and at a 45 degree angle
from the X axis; the end point is set as 50 units from the origin and 30 degrees from the X axis.
Enter in the command line:

Command: LINE

129
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify 20<45
first
point:
Specify 50<30
next
point:

In the relative polar coordinates the distance to the point is set not from the origin, but from
the previous point. The angle is specified from the polar axis to the line connecting the previous
point and the defining point.
The @ symbol is used to specify relative coordinates.
Example:
The start point of a line is set as 20 units from the origin and at a 45 degree angle from the X
axis; the end point is set as 40 units from the previous point and 30 degrees from the polar axis.
Enter in the command line:

Command: Line
Specify 20<45
first
point:
Specify @40<30
next
point:

Specifying points with “direction – distance”

The direct distance is set instead of entering coordinates; it is very useful for quickly entering the
lengths of lines.

130
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using direct distance specifying, move the cursor in the desired direction and enter the length
value in the command line at the command prompt: Specify next point:. If ortho mode is
switched on, it is very useful for drawing perpendicular lines.
This method can be used in all commands, except commands where just a value is needed, for
example Array, Divide etc.

User coordinate system

nanoCAD uses two coordinate systems: world coordinate system and user coordinate
system.
Only one coordinate system is active at any time; it is called current.
World coordinate system is a base coordinate system and cannot be redefined (X axis is set
horizontally, Y axis vertically and Z is perpendicular to XY plane). The main difference of the
world coordinate system from the user coordinate system is its rigidity and that it can be the
only one (for every model space and layout).
The usage of the user coordinate system has almost no restrictions; it can be placed at any
point of the space and with any angle to the world coordinate system. UCS can be moved and
rotated to specify points on the three dimensional and rotated views. Node points and base
directions, defined by the SNAP, GRID and ORTHO modes are rotated with UCS.

Changing UCS position

Commands for changing the UCS position set a new coordinate system, the so-called current
coordinate system.
The current coordinate system inherits the parameters of the previous coordinate system, only
the required values are changed.

World coordinate system

Menu: Tools – Coordinate system > World UCS
The command sets the parameters of the world coordinate system for the current user
coordinate system.
To set a World coordinate system quickly:
1. Click in the UCS name field on the Properties panel.
2. Open the drop-down list and select World:

131
nanoCAD Mechanica

Changing the UCS position from the command line

Command line: UCS
Command options:

Named Saves and restores frequently used UCS orientations by name.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter an option [Restore/Save/Delete/?]
Options: Restore - Replaces the current UCS with a new from the list of
named UCS. Save - Saves the current UCS with the specified name.
Delete - Deletes UCS from the list of named UCS. ? - Shows a list of named
UCS.

Restore Replaces the current UCS with one from the list of named UCSs.

Save Saves the current UCS with a specified name.

Delete Deletes the UCS from the list of named UCS.

? Shows the list of named UCS.

Object Sets the origin and the direction of the UCS axes according to the geometry of
the existing object.

View Specifies a new coordinate system within the XY plane, set perpendicular to the
direction of sight and parallel to the viewport’s plane. The position of the origin is
not changed. The X axis is set horizontally and the Y axis is set vertically.

World Matches the current UCS to the World coordinate system (restores the World
coordinate system).

X/Y/Z Rotates the current UCS around the selected axis.

ZAxis Specifies the UCS using the positive direction of the Z axis: the origin is placed at
the first specified point; the positive direction of the Z axis is set through the
second specified point.
Command prompts:

132
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify origin of UCS or

[Named/Object/View/World/X/Y/Z/ZAxis]
<World>: Select start point of UCS.

Specify point on X-axis or <Accept>: Specify a point on the positive ray of the X axis.

Specify point on XY plane or Specify a point on the positive ray of the Y axis in
<Accept>: the XY plane.

Aligning UCS to an object

Menu: Tools – Coordinate system > Object

Command line: SETUCSBYOBJECT

The command specifies the new position of the coordinate system origin for the current UCS; the
direction of the axes is specified according to the geometry of the current object. The extrusion
direction of the selected object specifies the positive direction of the Z axis for the new UCS.
Rules to create UCS, aligned to an object:

Line The origin of the new UCS is set at the line

end which is closest to the selection point.
The X axis is used to place the line in the XZ
plane. The Y coordinate of the second end of
the line is zero in the new UCS.

Arc The origin of the new UCS is the center of

the arc. The X axis is set at the end of the
arc which is closest to the selection point.

Circle The origin of the new UCS is the center of

the circle. The X axis is set at the selection
point.

Point The origin of the new UCS is the selection

point.

133
nanoCAD Mechanica

Polyline The origin of the new UCS is the start point

of the polyline. The X axis is set at the start
point and the nearest polyline vertex.

Dimension The origin of the new UCS is in the middle of

the dimension text. The new X axis is set
parallel to the X axis of the UCS used to
specify the dimension.

Text block The origin of the new UCS is the insertion

insertion, point of the object and the direction of the X
attribute axis is set by the angle of object rotation
definition around the direction of extrusion. The object
used to set the new UCS has a zero rotation
angle in this UCS.

Command prompt:

Select object to align Select an object.

UCS:

New origin for coordinates

Menu: Tools – Coordinate system > Point

Command line: SETUCSBYPOINT

The command specifies the new origin for the current UCS at the specified point.
Command prompt:

Specify origin of UCS [] Enter the coordinates for the UCS origin or specify them on
<World>: the screen.

New origin for coordinates and rotation angle

Menu: Tools – Coordinate system > Point and angle

Command line: SETUCSBYPOINTANGLE

The command specifies a new origin for the current UCS and the rotation angle of its axes.
Command prompt:

134
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify origin of UCS [] Enter the coordinates for the UCS origin or specify them on
<World>: the screen.

Specify point on X axis or Specify the rotation angle on the screen by specifying a
<Accept>: point, through which the X positive axis is coming or enter
in the command line? For example, 100<30.

UCS icon
Menu: View – Display > UCS icon

Command line: UCSICON

Manages the visibility and position of the UCS icon.
There are On, Off and Origin commands available in the View – Display > UCS icon.
To manage the visibility of the UCS icon use the Properties panel:

The full list of options available to manage the UCS icon is available in the command line.
Command options:

ON Shows the UCS icon.

OFF Hides the UCS icon.

All Parameters of visibility for all viewports. If this option is not used, the
parameters of the UCS icon are specified only for the current viewport.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Entry an option or [ON/OFF/Noorigin/Origin/] <ON>:
If the option is not used, parameters of UCS icon are set only for the
current viewport.

Noorigin Shows the UCS icon in the left corner of the screen regardless of UCS
origin.

Origin Shows the UCS icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current UCS. If the origin
of the UCS is outside the visible part of a drawing, the icon is shown in
the left corner of the screen.

Command prompt:

Entry an option or [On/Off/All/Noorigin/Origin] <"On">: Select the required option.

Named UCS
Menu: Tools – Named UCS…

135
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: UCSMAN, UC

The command opens the UCS dialog box, where you can select from the specified UCS, the
parameters and UCS icon modes for viewports.
The UCS dialog box can be opened from the Properties panel:

Named UCS tab

This tab contains the list of coordinate systems specified in the current drawing.
If the UCS is not saved or named, it is shown as Unnamed in the list.
The current UCS is marked with sign.

To set a UCS as current:

1. Select the UCS from the list.
2. Select the Set Current button.
You can set the UCS as current by double clicking on the UCS name or select Set Current from
the context menu:

136
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Details button (or command from the context menu) opens the UCS Details dialog box
with information about the coordinates of the selected UCS:

To delete a UCS:
1. Select the UCS from the list,
2. Open the context menu,
3. Select Delete.
To rename a UCS:
1. Select the UCS from the list,
2. Open the context menu,
3. Select Rename,
4. Enter the new name.

Orthographic UCS tab

This tab contains six orthogonal coordinate systems which can be set for a UCS selected in the
Relative to drop-down list. All named UCS existing in the current drawing are shown in the
Relative to drop-down list.

137
nanoCAD Mechanica

To set an orthogonal UCS:

1. Select the UCS from the list,
2. Select the Set Current button.
You can set an orthogonal UCS by double clicking on the UCS name or select Set Current from
the context menu:

Options of the context menu:

Set Sets the orthogonal UCS as current one.

Current

Reset Restores the origin of the selected orthogonal coordinate system (the origin has
(0,0,0) coordinates of the base coordinate system).

138
nanoCAD Mechanica

Depth Sets the direction between the XY plane of the orthogonal UCS and the parallel plane,
set through the origin of the base coordinate system.
The parallel plane can coincide with XY, YZ or XZ planes of the base coordinate
system.

Details Opens the UCS Details dialog box with information about the coordinates of the
selected orthogonal UCS.

To set an orthogonal UCS:

1. Click in the UCS name field on the Properties panel.
2. Open the drop-down list and select appropriate orthogonal UCS:

Settings tab
The tab is used to show and change the UCS icon modes and the UCS modes saved with the
viewport:

Parameters:
UCS icon setting

On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport.

139
nanoCAD Mechanica

Display at Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport at the origin. If the UCS origin
UCS origin is outside the viewport and the parameter is switched off, the UCS icon is
point specified in the left corner of the viewport.

Apply for all Applies the UCS icon modes to all the active viewports of the current
active drawing.
viewports

UCS settings

Save UCS Saves the UCS mode with the viewport. If the parameter is switched off, the
with UCS of the current viewport is used for the specified viewport.
viewport

Update Restores the view in plan when the coordinate system is changed in the
view to Plan current viewport.
when UCS is
changed

UCS for viewports

Different model views can be shown for different viewports. For example, a configuration of three
viewports can have the top view in one viewport, the front view in another and the right side
view in the third viewport. You can set and save the UCS for every viewport.
If the Yes parameter is set in the UCS per viewport field on the Properties panel, the UCS of
the viewport is saved before switching to another viewport. When you switch back to the
viewport, the saved UCS restores.
If the No parameter is set, the UCS of the viewport always coincides with the UCS of the current
active viewport.
Manage saving of the UCS for every viewport on the Properties panel:

140
nanoCAD Mechanica

PRECISION TOOLS
nanoCAD, as with other CAD systems, allows precise geometric creations (up to 14 decimals).
Using precision tools allows:

quick implementations during the project,

elimination of errors and inaccuracies in the dimensioning,

elimination of errors in the measurements of angles, length and distances, which were
not dimensioned in the drawing,

avoiding problems occurring with hatch, due to open contour,

reducing time spent on the control programs for NC machines (because it is not
necessary to edit inaccurate geometry of the parts) etc.
nanoCAD provides precise geometric creations in two ways:

precise coordinates of object points and

using precision modes.

Precision modes allow:

place points on the rectangular grid (SNAP, GRID modes);

use object snaps to snap to characteristic points on the vector and raster objects, for
example to the endpoints of a line or to circle center (OSNAP mode);

the use of tracking lines to place a created object in relation to other objects (OTRACK
mode);

snap to specified angles and define distances using polar tracking (POLAR mode);

create and replace objects parallel or perpendicular to coordinate axes (ORTHO mode).

Precision modes
Precise tools are controlled in the context menu by the buttons and in the Drafting Settings
dialog box (Tools> Drafting settings).
Buttons to switch between precise modes are in the status bar.

The orange color of a button shows that the mode is switched on.
All or several modes can be switched on at once.
Three ways to switch on/off the modes:

Click on the button.

From the context menu of the button select On or Off.

In the Drafting Settings dialog box (Tools> Drafting settings) select or deselect the
check boxes: Snap on (F9), Grid on (F7), Polar Tracking on (F10), Object Snap
on (F3), Object Snap Tracking on (F11).
To open the context menu with the commands to control modes:
1. Place the cursor in the status bar,
2. Press the right button,
3. Select/deselect the required mode.
141
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: To cancel the context menu of the OSNAP select the Exit Menu command (other context menus
are closed after the parameter is selected).

The Drafting Settings dialog box consists of three tabs:

Snap and Grid,

Polar Tracking,

Object Snap.

Snap and Grid mode

Menu: Tools – Drafting settings… > Snap and Grid tab

Status bar: and

Hotkeys: F9 and F7

Command line: DDRMODES, DSETTINGS, SE

Grid is an ordered sequence of points, which with SNAP mode allows specifying restrictions of
the cursor movement to define accurate coordinates. You can switch the grid on/off at any time
when you are working with a drawing. Changing grid spacing does not affect any drawing
objects.
Grid is not printable.

142
nanoCAD Mechanica

If SNAP mode is switched on, the cursor jumps from node to node with the specified snap
spacing. Snap spacing and grid spacing can be different but very often their values are the same.
Grid can have high spacing and snap spacing can be small to give a user the capability to specify
points of high precision. For example, you can set grid spacing to 10 units, and snap spacing to 1
unit. Grid and snap spacing can be different along the X and Y axes.
Major line – additional lines are also highlighted:

Adaptive grid – grid display depends on the drawing scale. When zooming in, additional grid
lines appear; when zooming out, they disappear. The frequency of these lines is determined by
the frequency of the main grid lines.
A grid showing drawing limits, allows visualisation of the drawing dimensions to place base
elements on the initial stages.
The parameters of the SNAP and GRID modes are specified in the Snap and Grid tab of the
Drafting settings dialog box or in the context menus.

Tab parameters:

Snap On (F9) Switches snap mode on/off.

143
nanoCAD Mechanica

Snap spacing

Snap Х Specifies the X spacing.

spacing:

Snap Y spacing: Specifies the Y spacing.

Equal X and Y Sets equal spacing between X and Y.

spacing

Grid spacing

Grid On (F7) Switches display of the grid on/off.

Grid Х spacing: Specifies the X grid spacing.

Grid Y spacing: Specifies the Y grid spacing.

Major line Specifies the number of cells between major lines.

every:

Grid behaviour

Adaptive grid Switches adaptive grid mode on/off.

Allow Switches division of the grid spacing on/off.

subdivision
below grid
spacing

Display grid Switches display of the grid beyond specified limits on/off.
beyond limits

The context menu of the SNAP button:

Parameters:

Set snap steps Specifies the X and Y spacings in the command line.

Setup… Opens the Drafting settings dialog box.

On/Off Switches snap mode on/off.

The context menu of the GRID button:

144
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Set grid steps Specifies the X and Y spacing in the command line.

Set grid limits Specifies the limits of the grid display.

Infinite grid Switches off restrictions for the grid display.

Adaptive grid Switches adaptive grid mode on/off.

Setup… Opens the Drafting settings dialog box.

On/Off Switches display of the grid on/off.

Drawing limits
Menu: Format – Drawing limits

Status bar: Context menu of – Set grid limits

Command line: LIMITS

The command sets the limits for the current drawing in Model Space and in Paper Space.
Drawing limits are specified by the coordinates of two opposite corners of the rectangular area –
bottom left corner and top right corner.
Command prompts:

Specify lower left corner Specify coordinates of lower left corner or pick a point on
<0.0000,0.0000>: the screen.
Specify upper right corner Specify coordinates of upper right corner or pick a point
<841.0000,594.0000>: on the screen.

Polar Tracking mode

Menu: Tools – Drafting settings… > Polar tracking tab

Status bar: the button

Hotkeys: F10

Command line: DDRMODES, DSETTINGS, SE

Polar tracking mode helps to specify a point, set at a specified distance and angle from the last
selected point. The dotted tracking line with a tooltip shows the distance from the last specified
point and current angle value.

145
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using polar tracking mode you can create geometric creations with any specified interval. For
example, if an angle of 30 was selected, tracking lines will be displayed when the direction from
this point to the cursor’s pick box is a multiple 30 (e.g. 60 , 90 , 120 and so on).
Specify the increment of the polar angle in the Polar tracking tab of the Drafting Setting
dialog box or from the context menu of the POLAR button.

Parameters:

Polar tracking on Switches polar tracking mode on/off.

(F10)

Polar Angle Settings

Increment angle: Specifies the increment angles used for polar tracking lines.

Additional angles Switches on/off the mode for specifying any additional angles (which
do not depend on the increment angle)

Object Snap Tracking Settings

Track orthogonal In OSNAP mode tracking lines are only drawn horizontally and
only vertically.

Track using all Switches on the mode for applying the parameters of polar tracking
polar angle to object tracking. In this mode the cursor is moved from the point
settings of object snap using aligning angles.

146
nanoCAD Mechanica

Do not track Polar Switches off the polar angles tracking mode.
To specify additional angles:
1. Enter an angle value,
2. Select the Add button.
To delete an additional angle:
1. Select the angle in the section,
2. Select the Delete button.
The context menu of the POLAR button contains the available increment angles:

Parameters:

Set custom angle Specifies a new angle of polar snap direction in the command line.

On/Off Switches the polar angles tracking mode on/off.

Object snap mode

Menu: Tools – Drafting settings… Object snap tab

Status bar: the button

Hotkeys: F3

Command line: DDRMODES, DSETTINGS, SE

Object snap is the main and the quickest way to specify an object’s characteristic points
without knowing their coordinates.
Characteristic points include:
End points and the middle of a line,

Center of a circle and its intersection points with center lines (quadrant),

Endpoints, center and middle of an arc,

Insertion point of block or text

The mechanism of object snap allows one of the characteristic points of the existing object to be
specified as the coordinates for the point of a new object.
Object snap can be used when you need to set a point in the command line.
To use object snap:
147
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Switch on permanent object snap in the Drafting Settings dialog box, select the
Object Snap On check box and select the required mode:

2. Switch on permanent object snap, open the context menu of the OSNAP button in the
status bar and select the required mode:

148
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Switch on one-time object snap during one of the creation or modifying commands,
open the context menu of one-time object snap with CTRL (or SHIFT) button pressed
and select the required mode:

You can switch on one or several modes of object snap (except the context menu of one-time
object snap, only one mode can be selected there).
The Select All and Deselect All are applied to all parameters of the snap.
One-time object snap is used to replace permanent object snap and stays active until the
current snapping is finished. When a snap point is selected, one-time object snap switches off.

149
nanoCAD Mechanica

For example, when creating geometric objects consisting of lines, as a temporary snap you can
specify Endpoint, Midpoint, Perpendicular and Intersection. If you want to snap one of the
lines to a circle, specify one-time object snap, Center, Quadrant or Tangent.
The context menu of one-time object snap has an additional option – None, which switches off
all modes of object snap before finishing the point selection operation. None is used for one time
application (during one operation), that is why it is absent in the Object Snap tab in the
Drafting Setting and in the context menu of OSNAP button.
None is used when you cannot select a point in the drawing due to temporary snap modes being
used. After the point is specified, the temporary snap mode starts again.
You can switch the object snap mode on/off in the Snap toolbar:

To display the Snap toolbar, select the Snap check box in the Customize dialog box (Tools
menu – Customize > Interface):

To open the Snap toolbar select the Snap option in the context menu of the OSNAP button:

If an object snap mode is switched on, the marker and a tooltip about the available object snap
types for the object are shown when moving the cursor over the object.
If several or all types of object snap are switched on as a permanent snap, and if a snap to some
characteristic point is available in the cursor’s current position (for example, if some objects are
placed close to each other), the highest priority snap is used.
The priority of snaps is specified in the Object Snap tab in the Drafting Setting, the highest
priority has Endpoint, the lowest – Parallel. Any one-time snap has a higher priority than any
permanent snap has.
Object Snap types:

Endpoint Snap to the object’s endpoints (lines, arcs etc.).

150
nanoCAD Mechanica

Midpoint Snap to the middle of objects (lines, arcs etc.).

Center Snap to the center of an circle, arc or ellipse.

To perform snap:

Place the cursor over the object. The “+” marker appears
in the center of the object.

Place the cursor in the center of the object.

When the marker is snapped, click.

Node Snap to a Point of the object, specifying point of dimension or start

point of dimension text.

Quadrant Snap to the nearest quadrant (the point located at an angle of 0, 90,
180 or 270 degrees from center) of arc, circle or ellipse.

151
nanoCAD Mechanica

Intersection
Snap to the intersections of objects (lines, circles, arcs etc).

Insertion Snap to an insertion point of text, block, shape or attribute.

Perpendicular Snap to the point of the object lying perpendicular to another object or
to its imaginary extension.

Tangent Snap to the point on an arc or circle belonging to the tangent of

another object.

152
nanoCAD Mechanica

Nearest Snap to the point of the object located closest to the cursor position.

Parallel Snap to an existing linear segment for the creation of a parallel linear
segment of another object.
After specifying the first point of a linear segment, you need to place
the cursor’s over a linear segment of the existing object and slowly
move the cursor to the expected position of a parallel segment of a
new object. The symbol of a parallel snap on the existing object and
parallel rubber line to this object means that you can specify the
second point of the linear segment at any required place in the rubber
line.

Extension Creates a temporary auxiliary line which is an extension of an object

and the cursor goes over its end point.

Offset from Snap to point which offset by a specified distance from temporary
control point.
1. Specify temporary control point.
2. Specify the offset by relative point or by direct-distance method.

153
nanoCAD Mechanica

Middle point Snap to middle point between two specified points.

Snap to raster objects

There is a snap to characteristic points of object of monochrome raster image.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

To perform a snap:

Insert raster image into a document.

Specify settings of a raster snap.

Switch on the Raster object snap in the Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings
dialog or from the context menu of the OSNAP button in the status bar.

Select required types of object snap in the Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings
dialog.
The program recognizes a type of raster object, highlights it and snaps to its characteristic points
according to selected modes of object snap:

Settings of raster snap

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools – Drafting Settings > Object snap tab > button

Status bar: context menu of > Setup raster snap

Command line: R2VSNAPSETUP

Raster snap have to be setup to help program to recognize types of raster objects (lines, arcs,
circles) correctly.
Snap operations are based on recognizing algorithms for raster objects. The program calculates a
vector object, ideally approximating raster lines, which are close to mouse pickbox and offers to
snap to characteristic points of the object. The efficiency of raster snap highly depends on
parameters, specified in the Raster Snap Settings.
To specify settings for a raster snap:

1. Open Raster Snap dialog from context menu or by button near Raster on Object
Snap tab from Drafting Settings dialog.
2. Set raster snap settings in accordance with your raster image characteristics:

154
nanoCAD Mechanica

Settings:

Min Length: This parameter defines the minimum size of a raster object that can be
recognized.
To set Min Length:

• Click button and specify distanse (2 poins on raster line) that

should be recognized as line.
or
• Enter value to the field.

Max Width: This parameter defines the maximum width of raster lines that can be
approximated by lines, arcs, circles, and polylines.
If the width of a raster line exceeds Max Width value, then the only
possible recognition mode is Auto tracing and approximating with an
outline object.
To set Max Width:

• Click button and specify by 2 points maximum width of

raster.
or
• Enter value to the field.
It’s better to set this value a little more than maximum width of the
thickest line in the image.

155
nanoCAD Mechanica

Max Break: Sets the length of the maximum ignored breaking raster lines.
If a raster line is broken into parts it should be traced as an entire object,
then the value of Max Break should be set to the largest gap between the
raster line parts. The program will ignore the breaks and create single
vector object, approximating the whole raster line. By setting a
comparatively large value of the parameter, users can, for example, trace
dash-dotted raster lines, and arcs as single entities.
To set Max Break:

• Click button and specify by 2 points the largest gap between

the raster line parts.
or
• Enter value to the field.

Accuracy This parameter determines the accuracy of approximation of the original

raster object with a vector one. If the original image is distorted (for
example, circles have the form of ellipses), then reduce the value of the
Approximation Accuracy parameter. However, this leads to inaccuracies
in recognition, for example the program might take a short arc for a line.
When the quality of a raster image is high, increase the value of the
Approximation Accuracy parameter.
Sometimes before tracing the quality of the raster image can be improved
by application of a smoothing filter.
To set Approximation Accuracy:
• Move slider.

3. When ready – click OK button.

Object Snap tracking mode

Menu: Tools – Drafting settings… Object snap tab

Status bar: the button

Hotkeys: F11

Command line: DDRMODES, DSETTINGS, SE

The object snap tracking mode allows the placing of created objects in specific relation to other
created objects. When object snap tracking mode is switched on, nanoCAD temporarily displays
dotted trajectories of different types (tracking lines) for accurate positioning of objects.
Object tracking modes are used together with object snap and works when the cursor’s pickbox
is near a probable point of object snap (the pickbox size determines the zone of tracking lines
activation). Object tracking expands and adds to the capabilities of object snap.
The parameters of object tracking are specified in the Object Snap tab in the Drafting Setting
dialog box (Tools menu – Drafting Settings) or in the context menu of the OTRACK button.

156
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Object Snap Switches object snap tracking mode on/off.

Tracking On (F11)

Object Snap Tracking modes

Track to alignment Switches on/off the display of tracking lines to an object’s

point characteristic points.

Clear track points Switches on/off the erasing mode of the snap point marker on a
on “shift + mouse tracking line using SHIFT and the mouse wheel.
wheel”

The context menu of the OTRACK button:

Parameters:

Track using polar Switches using object tracking together with polar tracking mode on/off.
angles In this case, the tracking lines for all angles specified in the Polar
Tracking tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box are displayed.

157
nanoCAD Mechanica

Track ortho only Switches the display of tracking lines only in ortho directions on/off.

Don’t track polar Switches off polar tracking mode.

Track to any Switches on/off the display of tracking lines to specific points.
alignment point

Clear track points on Switches on/off the erasing mode for the snap point marker on a tracking
SHIFT + mouse line.
wheel

On/Off Switches object tracking mode on/off.

To use object tracking mode:

1. Switch on the OTRACK and OSNAP modes in the status bar.
2. Use the cursor to capture the required characteristic objects’ points to set tracking
lines. Place the cursor near a point to capture it. A captured point is marked with +
symbol. To deactivate a point already captured, move the cursor over it again.
3. Dotted tracking lines, going through one or several captured points and the cursor’s pick
box, will appear when you move the cursor within the drawing. You can snap to points
on those lines or to the intersection points. The more types of object snap that are
switched on, the more points will be available for capture.
To zoom and pan, the + marker is removed from captured points.
Example: Circle in the center of a rectangle.
1. Defining the center of rectangle:

2. Specifying the circle center:

3. Specifying the circle radius:

Display of snap elements

Menu: Tools – Options…

158
nanoCAD Mechanica

The cursor’s pick box is enlarged automatically in nanoCAD snap modes, when you need to snap
to characteristic points of objects (creation and editing of primitives, dimensioning etc):

Common cursor’s pickbox size Enlarged cursor’s pickbox size

The common cursor’s pick box size is specified in the Cursor – PickBox – PickBox size section
of the Options dialog box (Tools menu – Options):

Parameters:

Crosshair size Sets the size of the сrosshair as a percentage of the display size.

PickBox size Pick box size in pixels.

The enlarged cursor’s pick box is specified in the Options dialog in the Snap settings – Hold
Aperture Size:

Parameters:

Hold Aperture Size The size of the cursor frame in snap mode.
<10>

Show Aperture Box Switches the aperture box on/off in the snap mode.

Snap Marker size Snap marker size.

<5>

Show Tooltips Turns on the display of the snap name.

Vector Marker Color The color of the snap marker when snapping to a vector object.

ORTHO mode
Status bar: the button

Hot key: F8

Command line: ORTO

With orthogonalisation mode set on, vector lines and rubber lines for editing can only be drawn
in directions parallel to the coordinate axis.

159
nanoCAD Mechanica

If an angle of a coordinate system is changed, the corresponding ortho mode angle is also
changed.
The ORTHO mode has higher priority than the polar tracking mode.

NOTE: You can temporarily switch off the ORTHO mode by pressing and holding the SHIFT button
when the command of creation or object editing is running.

160
nanoCAD Mechanica

NAVIGATION IN THE DOCUMENT

View is a combination of the size, position and orientation of a drawing fragment on the screen.
There are different tools and methods allowing you to orient in the document when you edit it.
You can zoom or pan the working area for visual control of changes in the document; you can
save a selected view for further display or printing; you can separate the working area of a
document into several non-overlapping viewports to display different drawing fragments at the
same time.

Display modes
The main methods to change the document display on the screen are zooming and panning.
Zoom command enlarges the view of a drawing segment for better detailing or decreases it to
display more of the drawing. Absolute sizes are not changed during zooming.
Pan command allows you to pan the drawing without decreasing or enlarging it.
Zoom and Pan commands are available in the View – Zoom menu or on the Zoom toolbar. For
your convenience, most frequently used commands are on the Main toolbar and in the status
bar.

NOTE: You can zoom using the mouse wheel. Moving the mouse with the wheel pressed and held allows
panning.

Pan command
Menu: View – Zoom > Pan

Toolbar: Main –

Status bar –

Command line: PAN, VIEWPAN

The mode to pan the image, occurs when you move the cursor with pressed left button, the
image is moved dynamically to horizontal, vertical and diagonal directions. The scale of the
document is not changed.

After starting the command, the cursor has the shape.

With the left button pressed, the cursor has the shape.
To exit from pan mode, press the ESC or ENTER buttons.

Zoom
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom Dynamic

Toolbar: Main –

161
nanoCAD Mechanica

Status bar –

Command line: ZOOMD, VIEWZOOMDYNAMIC

Turns on the mode in which you can increase an object’s size on the screen by moving the
mouse up and decrease it by moving it down.

After starting the command from the View menu or Main toolbar, the cursor has the
.shape.
When you release the button the zoom stops; you can move the cursor to another position and
press the button again to continue zooming in a new position.
To exit from the zoom mode, press the ESC or ENTER buttons.

If you start the command in the status bar (button ), the following options are available:
Specify corner of window or
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents /Scale/RScale/Window/Object] <real time>:
Command options:

All Displays the entire document, even if some objects are outside the specified
limits. Not only drawing limits, but also document limits are taken into
account in this mode:

Center Places the image in the center of the screen. Scale of the document is not
changed, only the image is panned.
Dynamic Changes scale of the image on the screen in real time.
The cursor’s movement enlarges the image on the screen, if the left button of
mouse is pressed and the cursor goes. The image decreases on the screen, if
the left button of the mouse is pressed and the cursor goes down.
Extents Displays the entire document inside its borders. Borders of the specified
document limits are not taken into account (in comparison with All):

162
nanoCAD Mechanica

Scale Changes the scale of the document using the precise scale factor.
The image on the screen is decreased or increased according to the specified
document limits and the value.
RScale Changes the document scale using the precise scale factor.
The image on the screen is decreased or increased relative to the limits of
the current document view and according to the specified value.
Window Specifies display area of the document using two opposite corners of a
rectangular frame.
Object Displays selected objects of the document on the screen. Select one or
several objects on the screen after you select the Object option. The image
is displayed after all objects are selected and the ENTER button is pressed.
If objects were selected beforehand – the display of image is reconstructed
after the Object option is selected.

Zoom 1:1
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom 1:1

Command line: ZOOM1, VIEWZOOM1X1

An image is scaled so that one pixel on the screen corresponds to one image point according to
the specified DPI value.

Zoom All
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom All

Toolbar: Main –

Status bar:

Hotkeys: ALT+0

Command line: ZOOMALL, VIEWZOOMALL

Displays the whole document, even if some objects are outside the specified limits.

163
nanoCAD Mechanica

Zoom Selected
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom Selected

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: FITSEL, FITSELECTED

Displays the selected objects.

Zoom Window
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom Window

Toolbar: Main –

Status bar –

Command line: ZOOMW

Selects an area on the screen, the area is specified with two opposite corners of the rectangular
frame.

Zoom In
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom In

Command line: ZOOMIN

Doubles the scale.

Zoom Out
Menu: View – Zoom > Zoom Out

Command line: ZOOMOUT

Decreases the scale by half.

3D navigation

3D Orbit
Menu: View – Orbit > 3D Orbit

Toolbar: View –

Command Line: 3DORBIT

hold down the mouse wheel + SHIFT

Rotate view in 3D when camera moves on horizontal and vertical orbites.

164
nanoCAD Mechanica

Cursor will be changed to: .

The target of the view stays stationary while the camera location, or point of view, moves by
mouse movements.
If you are moving cursor horizontally – camera is moving in XY plane of the WCS. If you are
moving cursor vertically – camera is moving along Z-axis.
You can set orbit options in Mouse settings – 3D Orbit settings – Orbit center in Options
dialog box.

Set one of three center point location:

Parameters:

View center Center of drawing graphic area is the center of orbit.

Visible objects Center of the objects you’re viewing is the center of orbit. Thus if you see
the part of circle, center of this circle is orbit center.

Visible parts of Center of the objects parts you’re viewing is the center of orbit. Thus if you
objects see the part of circle, center of this part is orbit center.

Free Orbit
Menu: View – Orbit > Free Orbit

Toolbar: View –

Command Line: 3DFORBIT

Orbits in any direction without reference to the planes.

Cursor will be changed to: .

165
nanoCAD Mechanica

View with Free Orbit command running is marked with circle divided to quadrants. The center of
the viewport, not the center of the objects you’re viewing, is the target point.

3D-Fly
Menu: View – Walk and fly > Fly

Toolbar: View toolbar –

Command line: 3DFLY

Navigate 3D model in the perspective projection. You can change direction and height of moving.

Cursor color changes to green. Top left corner displays current fly settings: walk step,
coordinates of camera, coordinates of target. Command line displays inquire:

166
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fly or [waLk/eXit]:
Walk option changes navigation to Walk mode (3DWALK command). Exit option and ESC button
finish the command.
Main direction of move in 3DFLY command is forward to the target. Other available moves are
relative to the forward: left, right, back, up, down.
To move, press and hold the following buttons:
Used buttons:

UP (on the main and numerical keyboard), W Move up

LEFT (on the main and numerical keyboard), A Move left
RIGHT (on the main and numerical keyboard), D Move right
DOWN (on the main and numerical keyboard), S Move down
PAGE UP, Q Move up
PAGE DOWN, E Move down
+ (on the main and numerical keyboard) Increase step
– (on the main and numerical keyboard) Decrease step

Maximum step value is 1mm, minimum – 0.0001mm. Step value is saved with drawing. Press
two buttons at the same time. For example, UP and LEFT to move in left-up direction.
To change the height, use Up and Down moving. To move camera without target, move mouse.

NOTE: Mouse wheel doesn’t work as zoom.

3D-Walk
Menu: View – Walk and Fly > Walk

Toolbar: View toolbar –

Command line: 3DWALK

Command is similar to 3DFLY.
Navigate 3D model in the perspective projection parallel to z=0 plane in UCS. You can change
direction of moving. You can change the height of moving for the following move on new height.
Started 3DWALK command sets perspective projection. Walk mode is similar to Fly mode, but
step value is Walk step. Steps for Walk and Fly are the same.
Command line displays inquire:
Walk or [fLy/eXit]:
Fly option changes navigation to Fly mode (3DFLY command). ). Exit option and ESC button
finish the command.
Working with 3DWALK command is similar to working with 3DFLY command in the current
UCS.

167
nanoCAD Mechanica

Plan
A plan view is a view aimed toward the origin (0,0,0) from a point on the positive Z axis in UCS
or WCS. This results in a view of the XY plane. This results in a view of the XY plane.

Command Line: PLAN

You can select current UCS, named UCS or WCS
Options:

Current UCS Change the view to XY plane in current UCS. Used by default
UCS Change the view to XY plane in saved UCS. You will be asked for the name of
the saved UCS.
WCS Change the view to XY plane in the WCS.

The Plan command changes view, but doesn’t change current UCS.

Managing display of line weight on the screen

Line weight (width) is a width assigned to graphic primitives. Line weight allows to get thin and
thick lines when creating a drawing.
Line weight is differently displayed in paper space and in model space.
Displaying in model space:
Line of a 1 pixel width corresponds to 0 line weight in model space. Display widths in pixels of
other line weights are set proportionally to their values and do not depend on zooming in or out
on the screen. For example, if a line weight is 4 pixels, primitives having such line weight are
displayed with 4 pixel width on the screen, even though they are zoomed in.
Displaying in paper space:
Displayed in paper space line width of primitives is always the same as their line weights. That is
why when a paper space list is zoomed, displayed width of primitives is changed.

To turn on/off display of line weights on the screen use the SW in the status bar.
Primitives having a width more than one pixel increase a regeneration time of drawing;
productivity of program decreases if display of line weights is on. It is recommended to switch off
the display of line weights. It does not affect displaying line weights (widths) when you print a
drawing.
You can change a scale of line weights display for primitives in model space.

Lineweight Settings Dialog

Menu: Format – Line weight…

Status bar: Context menu of the SW button – Settings…

Command Line: LINEWEIGHT

168
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Current List of standard lineweights.

Lineweight Select from list of standard lineweights or special values By Layer, By
Block or By Default. By Default value is defined by LWDEFAULT
system variable. For all new layers lineweight is set By Default.

Units:

Millimiters (mm) Set lineweight units to millimiters.

Inches (in) Set lineweight units to inches.

Display Switch On/Off displaing lines according their linewegnts.

Lineweight

By Default Set By Default value for new layers (LWDEFAULT system variable).

Adjust Display Set lineweight display scale in Model space (LWDISPLAY system
Scale variable). LWDISPLAY = 0 switch off show lineweight and
LWDISPLAY = 1 is real–unit value .

NOTE: Using lineweight width that is more than one pixel may slow down performance on display
regeneration. To speedup work in Model space you can decrease Adjust Display Scale setting or switch
off Display Lineweight. Lineweights are always plotted at their real value whether their display is
turned on or off.

Managing named views

When you perform a project, you often have to work with different fragments of a document.
Navigation commands in the document (zooming and panning) and tools used to switch from
model space to paper space and back are often used. You can save fragments of the document
which are frequently used as named view. Named views allow you to switch between one part of
the document to another.

Menu: View – Named Views

169
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: VIEW, -VIEW

The command allows creating, restoring and deleting named views from the model space and
paper space.
After the command is started, the prompt of available options is shown in the command line:
Enter an option [?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Save/Settings/Window]:
Command options:

? Displays named views in the document.

Option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter view name(s) to list <*>:
Asterisk symbol (*) is set in the angle brackets by default, it means that
when you press the ENTER a full list of named views is displayed in the
command line:
Saved views:
View name Space
View 1 M
View 2 M
View 3 M
View 4 L
View 5 L
The M letter means that named view is in the model space and L letter in
paper space.
Delete Deleted named view.
Orthographic Selects standard orthogonal view.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/Back/Left/Right] <Top>:
Options:
Top - Sets top view.
Bottom - Sets bottom view.
Front - Sets front view.
Back - Sets back view.
Left - Sets left view.
Right - Sets right view.
Restore Restores the view (selected view is displayed on the screen).
Save Sets a name to the current view, displayed on the screen.
Settings Specifies the display properties of restored named view.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter an option [BackGround/Categorize/Layer Snapshot/Live
Section/UCS/Visual style]:
Options:
BackGround – Redefines background for view of model space, which
does not have “2D Frame” value of visual style.
Categorize – Displays view category, specified in the drawing (for the
views of model and layouts).
Layer Snapshot – Defines switch on/off parameters of the current view
to be saved or not, with the named view (for the views of model and

170
nanoCAD Mechanica

layouts).
Live Section – Displays live section used when the view is restored
(only for model views)
UCS - Defines UCS to be saved or not, with the named view (for the
views of model and layouts).
Visual style – Defines a visual style to be saved with view (only for
model views)
Window Creates a new named view by specifying opposite corners of the
rectangular area on the screen.
To save a current view:
Command prompts:

Enter an option Select option Save.

[?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Save/Settings/Win
dow]:
Enter view name to save: Enter a view name and
press ENTER.
To save several views at once:
Command prompts:

Enter an option Select option Window.

[?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Sav
e/
Settings/Window]:
Specify first corner: Specify first corner of the rectangular area
of the first view.

Specify opposite corner: Specify opposite corner of the rectangular

area of the first view.

Enter view name to save: Enter a name of the first view and press
ENTER.

Specify first corner: Specify first corner of the rectangular area

of the second view.

Specify opposite corner: Specify opposite corner of the rectangular

area of the second view.

Enter view name to save: Enter a name of the second view and press
ENTER.

Specify first corner: Specify first corner of the rectangular area

of the following view or press ESC to finish
the command.

NOTE: After the view name is specified the image is autopanned to display a created named view on the
screen.

To restore (display on the screen) a named view:

Command prompts:
Enter an option Select an option Restore.
[?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Save/Settings/Win

171
nanoCAD Mechanica

dow]:
Enter view name to restore: Enter a name of the view.

To switch quickly between the view use the button at the end of the layouts tab bar. Click on
it and the context menu displaying all existing layouts tabs and named views in the document is
shown:

There are named views in the top part of the menu and layout tabs in the bottom part. Named
views of the model are marked with Model: prefix, named views of the layout are marked with a
prefix of the corresponding layout’s name (Layout1:, Layout2:, A4: etc). The current tab is

marked with sign. Click on the corresponding menu item to switch to the required named
view.
To delete a named view:
Command prompts:

Enter an option Select an option Delete.

[?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Save/Settings/Win
dow]:
Enter view name(s) to delete or [view1/view 2/ Select a view name to be
view 3/view 4]: deleted.
The selected view name is
deleted from the list of
named views just after
you click.

Enter view name(s) to delete or [view1/view Select the name of the

2/view 4]: following view to be
deleted or press ESC to
finish the command.

Order of objects
When editing a document, the objects are shown in the order that they were created. Some
objects can be overlapped or obscure each other. To correct the situation, the order of the
objects (their display on the screen) can be changed, one object can be placed in front of
another.

172
nanoCAD Mechanica

Commands to change the order of objects are shown in the Tools – Display Order and on the
Display Order toolbar:

Bring to Front;

Send to Back;

Bring Forward;
Send Backward.

In addition to Display order command the Objectorder command can change draw order for
such objects as text, dimensions and hatches.

ATTENTION! The Objectorder command does not work with text objects, dimension objects and
hatches that are included in blocks and external references. Work with the leader text and the table text is
also not supported by this command.

Commands to change the order of text, dimension and hatch objects are shown in the Tools –
Display Order and on the Display Order toolbar:

Texts to front;

Dimensions to front;

Texts and dimensions to front;

Hatches to back.

Bring to Front
Menu: Tools – Display Order > Bring to Front

Toolbar Display Order –

Command line: DRAWORDER1

Forces the selected object to be displayed in front of all other objects.

Send to Back
Menu: Tools – Display Order > Send to Back

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command line: DRAWORDER2

Forces the selected object to be displayed behind all other objects.

Bring Forward
Menu: Tools – Display Order > Bring Forward

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command line: DRAWORDER3

173
nanoCAD Mechanica

Forces the selected object to be displayed in front of the object located in front of it.

Send Backward
Menu: Tools – Display Order > Send Backward

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command line: DRAWORDER4

Forces the selected object to be displayed behind the object located beneath.

Bring Texts to the Front

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools – Display Order > Bring to Front Only Texts

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command Line: OBJECTORDER

Change draw order for all texts in the drawing or all texts from selection to the Front.

Bring Dimensions to the Front

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools–Display Order > Bring to Front Only > Dimensions

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command Line: OBJECTORDER

Change draw order for all dimensions in the drawing or all dimensions from selection to the
Front.

Bring Texts and Dimensions to the Front

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools– Display Order > Bring to Front Only > Text and Dimensions

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command Line: OBJECTORDER

Change draw order for all dimensions and texts in the drawing or all dimensions and texts from
selection to the Front.

174
nanoCAD Mechanica

Send Hatches to the Back

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools– Display Order > Hatches to the Back

Toolbar: Display Order –

Command Line: OBJECTORDER

Change draw order for all hatches and fills in the drawing or all hatches and fills from selection to
the Back.

Control the Display of Objects

Control the display of objects by isolating or hiding a selection set. Use ISOLATEOBJECTS and
HIDEOBJECTS to create a temporary drawing view with selected objects isolated or hidden.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Commands for control the display of objects are located in context menu and Tools – Isolate
Objects menu:

Isolate Objects

Hide Objects

Unisolate objects

Control the display of objects placed in the menu of Toggle Isolate button in status bar.
Isolate objects mode:

Persistent isolation Selected objects stay hidden or isolaled after save, close and
reopen of drawing.

Temporary isolation Selected objects are isolated or hidden in the current program
session.

Button form and menu composition depends on the presence of hidden and isolated objects:

- there are no hidden and

isolated objects in the
drawing.
Available functions:
Isolate objects
Hide objects

175
nanoCAD Mechanica

- there are hidden and

isolated objects in the
drawing.
Available functions:
Isolate more objects
Hide more objects
Unisolate objects

Isolate Objects
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools – Isolate Objects > Isolate Objects

Command Line: ISOLATEOBJECTS

If you isolate objects, only the isolated objects appear in the view.

Hide Objects
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools – Isolate Objects > Hide Objects

Command Line: HIDEOBJECTS

Hide selected objects.

Unisolate Objects
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Tools – Isolate Objects > Unisolate Objects

Command Line: UNISOLATEOBJECTS

Command to redisplay the hidden objects.

Viewports of Model Space

Model space can be separated into several rectangular non-overlapping areas called viewports.
Non-overlapping areas fill in model space and cannot be placed over each other. When starting
a project, usually one viewport, filling in all the model space is used. This viewport can be
separated into several viewports and different fragments of the drawing, or model views can be
displayed on every viewport at the same time. The changes made in one viewport are also shown
in the whole drawing (in other viewports). You can switch between viewports at any time, even
whilst a command is being performed. To switch to another viewport, click at any point on the

176
nanoCAD Mechanica

screen. The cursor is displayed in the current viewport – the common arrowhead is displayed in
all the other viewports.
For every viewport you can specify the display scale, pan the viewport image independently of
the other viewports, specify UCS and display the modes of grid and snap usage. You can save
the setting parameters of any viewports to use them again and restore an image of any
viewport.
Only one non-overlapping viewport can be printed.
Configuration of non-overlapping viewports can be different:

1 Viewport
Menu: View – ViewPort > 1 Viewport

Toolbar: ViewPorts >

Command line: VIEWPORT_SINGLE

In Model Space: restores the configuration to one viewport (the view is taken from the last active
window).
In Paper Space: creates one viewport.

2 Viewports Vertical
Menu: View – ViewPort > 2 Viewports Vertical

Toolbar: ViewPorts >

Command line: SPLITVIEWPORT_VERTICAL

Creates a configuration of two vertical viewports.

2 Viewports Horizontal
Menu: View – ViewPort > 2 Viewports Horizontal

Toolbar: ViewPorts >

Command line: SPLITVIEWPORT_HORIZONTAL

Creates a configuration of two horizontal viewports.

3 Viewports
Menu: View – ViewPort > 3 Viewports

Toolbar: ViewPorts > Command line: SPLITVIEWPORT_3

Creates a configuration of three viewports.
After starting the command, there is a prompt in the command line:

177
nanoCAD Mechanica

Enter an option [Horizontal/Vertical/Left/Right/Top/Bottom]<Right>

Command options:

Horizontal Creates a configuration of three horizontally placed viewports.

Vertical Creates a configuration of three vertically placed viewports.
Left Creates a configuration of three viewports, one of which is placed to the
left and the others – to the right.
Right Creates a configuration of three viewports, one of which is placed to the
right and the others – to the left.
Top Creates a configuration of three viewports, one of which is placed at the
top and the others – at the bottom.
Bottom Creates a configuration of three viewports, one of which is placed at the
bottom and the others – at the top.

4 Viewports
Menu: View – ViewPort > 4 Viewports

Toolbar: ViewPorts >

Command line: SPLITVIEWPORT_4

Creates a configuration of four similar viewports.

Named viewports
Menu: View – ViewPort > Named views

Command line: VPORTS

The command opens the Viewports dialog box.
On the New Viewports tab you can create the required configuration of viewports on the
standard base and save it for further usage:

178
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

New name: Name of the saved configuration of viewports.

Standard List of standard configurations of viewports.

viewports:

Apply to:

Display Applies the selected configuration of viewports to the whole Model

Space.

Current Applies the selected configuration of viewports to the current viewport.

viewport

Setup:

2D Sets the selected configuration as the current viewport for all viewports.

3D Sets the selected configuration of standard model views for all

viewports.

Preview Preview of the selected configuration of viewports.

The current viewport is shown with a double frame.

Change view Changes the view of the common viewport.

to: There are existing named views of the drawing in the drop-down list
(there are additional standard model views for 3D mode).

179
nanoCAD Mechanica

Visual style: Changes the visual style of the selected viewport.

The available styles in the drop-down list are:

*Current*

2D Wireframe

3D Hidden

3D Hidden

Conceptual

Realistic

To change a view or a visual style for a viewport:

1. Double click to select the viewport in the Preview window (selected object is shown
with double frame).
2. Select the required view or visual style from the drop-down list.
If a name was specified during the creation of the configuration of the viewports, the
configuration will be saved as a named configuration. A named configuration of viewports
can be used without preset.
The list of created and saved configurations are shown on the Named Viewports tab:

To create a configurations of viewports:

1. Select a standard configuration in the New Viewports tab.
2. In the New name enter a configuration name.
3. Select ОК.

180
nanoCAD Mechanica

The name of the created configuration is shown in the Named viewports section of the Named
Viewports tab when the Viewports dialog is opened next time.
The Save Configuration command from the View>Viewports menu allows a name to be
specified in the command line for the current configuration of viewports.
To restore a configuration of viewports:
1. Select the required configuration in the Named viewports list (after selection, a list of
viewports will be selected in the Preview window).
2. Select ОК.
Or:
1. Start the Restore Configuration command (the View>Viewports).
2. In the command line, type the configuration name as an answer to the prompt Enter
viewport configuration name: (the list of available configurations is shown in the
command line’s protocol).
3. Press ENTER to finish the command.
To rename a configuration of viewports:
1. Select the required configuration in the Named viewports list (after selection, a list of
viewports will be selected in the Preview window).
2. Select the Rename option from the context menu.
3. Enter a new configuration name.
4. Press ENTER or click on any place of the section except the renaming field to finish the
command.
5. Select ОК.
To delete a configuration of viewports:
1. Select the required configuration in the Named viewports list (after selection, a list of
viewports will be selected in the Preview window).
2. Select the Delete option from the context menu.
3. Select ОК.
Or:
1. Start the Delete Configuration command (the View>Viewports).
2. In the command line, type the configuration name as an answer to the prompt Enter
viewport configuration name: (the list of available configurations is shown in the
command line’s protocol).
3. Press ENTER to finish the command.

Managing viewports from the command line

Command line: VPORTSCMD
The command allows managing viewports both in model space and paper space.
The prompt with available options is displayed in the command line, after the command is
launched:
Enter viewport option
[Save/Restore/Delete/1/2/3/4/Object/Polygonal/REctangular/
Fit/ON(off)/Lock(unlock)/Clip]<1>:

181
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command options:

Save Saves a current configuration of viewports in model space.

When the option is selected, model space is switched to paper space.
Restore Restores previously saved configuration of viewports (selected
configuration is shown on the screen).
When a configuration is selected in paper space it is offered to create a
configuration of viewports the same as a current configuration of
viewports in model space.
You can perform the operation with Restore configuration command.
Delete Deletes a previously saved configuration of viewports in model space.
You can perform the operation with the Delete configuration
command.
1 Restores a configuration with one viewport (view is taken from the last
viewport) in model space.
Creates one viewport in paper space.
2 Creates a configuration with horizontal or vertical arrangement of
viewports. An arrangement is specified with an option from the command
line:
Enter an option [Horizontal/Vertical]<Vertical>:
3 Creates a configuration of three viewports. An arrangement is specified
with an option from the command line:
Enter an option
[Horizontal/Vertical/Left/Right/Top/Bottom]<Right>:
4 Creates a configuration of four viewports.
Object Transforms previously created closed objects (circles, ellipses, closed
polylines and splines) into viewports in paper space (for more
information see “Create a viewport by object” section).
Polygonal Creates a polygonal viewport in paper space.
Option is available in a current layout, where you want to place a
viewport, and also is available in model space (for more information see
“Create a polygonal viewport” section).
REctangular Creates a rectangular viewport in paper space.
Option is available in a current layout, where you want to place a
viewport, and also is available in model space (for more information see
“Create a rectangular viewport” section).
Fit The option allows creating an inscribed viewport in a current layout,
where all objects from model space are inscribed.
ON(off) Switches on/off display of viewport content.
Lock(unlock) Locks/unlocks a viewport.
You can lock a viewport to make earlier specified scale unchanged
(zooming inside a viewport does not change a scale of viewport).
Clip Clips borders of viewports (for more information see “Set show boundary
for a viewport” section).

182
nanoCAD Mechanica

Image regeneration
Sometimes, when you are working with a document after the command is finished, some visual
elements stay on the drawing; for example, markers of characteristic points. To delete such
visual elements, use forced regeneration (specified manually) or redrawing of a drawing.
Two commands in nanoCAD are used for it: Regen and Redraw (View menu).
Redrawing a drawing is faster than regeneration because all the drawing objects’ coordinates
are recalculated (converting values with floating points from the drawing database to integer
display coordinates) during regeneration.

Regeneration
Menu: View – Regen

Status bar:

Command line: RE, REGEN

The Regen command is used for a forced update of a current drawing.

Redrawing
Menu: View – Redraw

Command line: Redraw

The Redraw command is used for a forced update of a display.

183
nanoCAD Mechanica

OBJECTS’ PROPERTIES
In nanoCAD, graphic drawing objects have properties, such as color, type and weight (width)
of lines, transparency and plot style, which can be changed.
When placing the cursor over any object on the screen, a tooltip with the object’s name, name or
number of its color and layer where the object is placed, appears:

The display of a tooltip can be switched off in the Cursor section of the Options dialog box
(Tools – Options):

Set different properties for objects for the document’s clarity. When creating new objects, their
properties are inherited from the description of the layer where they were created.

“Properties” bar
Menu: Tools – Properties

Menu: Modify – Properties

Menu: View – Toolbars > Functional > Properties

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+1

Command line: INSP, INSPECTOR, PROPERTIES

The Properties bar is used to display information about selected objects, to change objects’
properties, to specify a selection mode and call up selection commands.
The list of properties is separated into groups. Manage the visibility of properties of any group by
using the and buttons in the group name. The button shows the properties for the hidden
group. When this button is selected the properties list of the group is shown and the button
switches to the button.

184
nanoCAD Mechanica

The different properties of objects are displayed in the left

column in the Properties bar; their values are shown in
the right column.
Information in the Properties bar depends on the current
command and different parameters of the selected objects
are shown.
If no object is selected, No selection is shown in the
Object type field:

Current setting parameters for the properties of created objects of the document are shown in
the General group. For example, the Line Weight has a «1.00» value, so new lines, arcs and
circles will be created with this weight.

If several objects of one type are selected, their type and

number (in brackets) are displayed in the left column:

If several objects of different types are selected, All (2) is

displayed in the Objects type field:

The General group contains information about an

object’s properties: color, layer, line type etc.
The Geometry group displays information about the
geometric parameters of an object and its position in the
document.
Properties that can be changed are shown in black in the
left column.
You can specify new values for these properties in the
corresponding fields. Values outside of the limits are not
used automatically.
The grey color is used to display information about
properties which cannot be changed and for properties
depending on other properties.
If several objects are selected, only properties common
to all the objects are displayed.

185
nanoCAD Mechanica

If any property does not have a value (the field in the column is empty); two or more objects
having the property among selected objects, but the values of the property are different, for
example center coordinates for two non-concentric circles:

The value, entered in such a field, is one for this property for all objects selected, if it can be
applied.
Some properties of objects, such as, color, line type, and line weight can be selected from the
drop-down list:

To change the properties of objects in the Properties bar:

1. Select one or several objects.
2. Click in the left column of the property that you want to change.
3. Select the required value in the drop-down list to the right of the column or type a new
value.
4. To apply a typed property value to the objects, press ENTER. Values, selected from a
list, are applied to the selected objects immediately without pressing the ENTER button.
5. To deselect objects, click in the drawing area or press ESC.
There are mode and selection command buttons in the top part of the Properties bar:

Description of modes and selection commands, ways of selection for object see in the “Selection
of objects using the Properties bar” section.

Creation of custom properties fields

The fields in the Properties panel display information about selected objects which can be
dragged onto an existing or created toolbar, creating a custom properties field:

186
nanoCAD Mechanica

After dragging, only the right column with the values from the Properties panel is shown in the
toolbar. Name of the property (left column is not displayed).
The value of a property is shown in the custom properties field after selection of the object,
which property is shown in the field. The field remains empty if an object is not selected or if the
selected object does not have properties contained in the field. If several objects are selected,
the field is empty unless similar objects are selected, for example circles of one diameter.
One user properties field can contain several fields from the Properties panel.
If the user window contains several properties of one properties group or several properties of
one object type, only one property (the top property in the Properties Setup) is shown when
the object is selected:

In this case, when a circle is selected the radius value will be shown; if a line is selected, its
length value will be shown; if a single line of text is selected, its height will be shown.

The and buttons are used to move the selected property in the list.

To display the Geometry.Diameter property when a circle is selected, use the to move this
property above the Geometry.Radius property:

The button deletes the selected property from the list.

To display two or more properties from one group or one object type, create several fields on the
toolbar.
As an example, we will show how to create a toolbar with 3 custom properties fields, the first
displays the circle diameter and text height, the second – circumference and text rotation and
the third – circle area and text oblique.
To create custom properties’ fields:
1. Create a new toolbar (for more information how to create a new toolbar see in the
Toolbars tab section (Tuning nanoCAD – Tuning the interface)):

187
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select a created circle.

3. Place the cursor over the Diameter field in the Properties panel.
4. Drag the Diameter field, using the left mouse button and ALT button, onto the created
toolbar:

5. Drag the Circumference field to the right of the first field on the toolbar in the same
way:

6. Drag the Area field to the right of the second field on the toolbar:

7. Press ESC to deselect the circle.

8. From the context menu of the first field select Setup:

9. In the drop down list of the dialog box that appears, select the Text.Text height
property:

10. Select OK to close the dialog.

11. From the context menu of the second field select Text.Rotation.
12. Select OK to close the dialog.
13. For the third field select the Text.Obliquing.
14. Select OK to close the dialog.
15. After selecting any circle on the drawing, the values for its diameter, circumference and
area are shown:

188
nanoCAD Mechanica

16. After selecting any single line text on the drawing, the values of its height, rotation and
obliquing are shown:

To delete a field from a new toolbar:

1. Place the cursor over the field:

2. When the field is selected, press ALT and drag the field into the drawing area:

NOTE: The Disable All switches off the display of properties’ values not only in the user ашудвы, but in
the fields of Properties and Styles standard toolbars.

Drawing Explorer
Menu: Modify – Drawing Explorer

Menu: View – Toolbars > Functional > Drawing Explorer

Toolbar: Properties –

Command line: DRAWINGEXPLORER

Drawing Explorer provides full information about all objects in drawing:

graphic objects;

block references, external references, raster images;

parameters of drawing settings.

All changes in drawing reflect in Drawing Explorer immediately. You can separately get the
information in Explorer (and also in a drawing area) about new objects and about objects
changed since last saving.
189
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can open dialogs for editing parameters and properties of objects directly from Drawing
Explorer.

The name of current document is a root section in hierarchical tree. First subsection displays the
current drawing space (Model or Layout), then subsections of objects in this space are following.
Objects are grouped by types. To expand any section click the sign to the left of the section
name.
Tools for control of displaying information

Refresh tree Renew information. All opened sections will be closed.

Filters:
Show created objects Displays information about new objects in the current
session of the drawing.
Show modified objects Displays information about objects changed in the current
session of the drawing.
Show resident objects Displays information about unchanged objects of the
drawing.
Variants of displaying on the screen

Enable selection Objects selected in Explorer tree marks with grips in a

drawing area.
Objects selected in Explorer tree marks with grips and places
Enable zoom and
selection in the center of drawing area.
Displays objects in a drawing area according to status of
Syncronize filters with
drawings filters ( ).

190
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: To restore the visibility of obje cts after using Synchronize filters with drawings, switch on
necessary filters and click the butt on again, or use the Unisolate objects in current layout
command from context menu of the statusbar button.

Context menu of drawing objects selected in Explorer contains commands to operate with.
Commands depends on the type of selected object and its hierarchy in Explorer tree:

Drawing Settings Section

The Drawing settings section displays information about main drawing settings.

The Edit command in context menu opens a dialog for editing parameters of selected section:

191
nanoCAD Mechanica

Layouts Section
The Layouts section contains a list of all drawing layouts. The Activate context menu command
opens selected paper space and displays an information about its objects and settings in Drawing
Explorer.

Select Color Dialog Box

Command line: COLOUR, COLOR, COL
Select Color dialog box allows you to set the desired color for editing element: drawing object,
dimension style, layer etc.
The dialog opens also when editing the color of layer or object by clicking More Colors… in drop-
down list of colors:

192
nanoCAD Mechanica

The dialog box contains two tabs: Index Color and True Color.

Index Color tab

The Index Color tab allows you to select the color from nanoCAD color index palette.

When you hover over a color, the Index Color indicates the color number (index), while the
RGB indicates the RGB (red, green, blue) color value. Click a color to select it, or enter the color
number or name in the Color box. Selected color will be displayed in the New Color swatch (big
square).

193
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parametres:

Color Index palette Displays colors 10 through 249 selectable.

Named colors palette Displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as well
as numbers.
Grayscale palette Displays colors 250 (black) through 255 (white); these colors
are shades of gray.

Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the

layer on which you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the
color of the current layer is displayed in the Old and New color
swatches.

Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black,
depending on your background color) until you group the
objects into a block and insert the block. When you insert the
block into a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current
Color setting.

Color field Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an Color

Index number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows
the most recently selected color.

Old Color and New Color Displays the previously selected color in a small square and the
Swatch currently in a big square.

True Color tab

True Color tab allows to select the color using true color palette, over sixteen million colors are
available.
Color model drop-down list determines the contents of the entire tab and allows to select the
color in RGB or HSL color scheme.
RGB color model
Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The values specified for
each component represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue components. The
combination of these values can be manipulated to create a wide range of colors. Adjust the
slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 for every component.

194
nanoCAD Mechanica

HSL color model

HSL color model allows to compose the color from hue, saturation and luminance components.

Hue specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light within the visible
spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue box. Adjusting
this value affects the RGB value. Valid hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees.
Saturation specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while
low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation, use the color
spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value.
Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%.
Luminance specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color slider or
specify a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values are from 0 to 100%. A value of 0%

195
nanoCAD Mechanica

represents the color black, 100% represents white, and 50% represents the optimal brightness
for the color. Adjusting this value also affects the RGB value.

Distributing objects by layers

The main advantage of CAD is organising a document by layers. Layers are used to separate,
sort and edit drawing objects.
To explain the function of layers we will use an example with tracing paper. Layers in the
drawing are like transparent tracing papers. One tracing paper (or layer) contains the floor plan,
the second – water supply system, the third – heating, the fourth – electric power supply etc.
By combining different layers (tracing papers), you can create the required sets of design
documentation.
Placing different groups of objects on separate layers helps to order and simplify many of the
operations of drawing management. For better organisation and operation of data, drawing
elements of one type are placed on the same layer. For example, auxiliary lines are placed on a
separate layer to facilitate and accelerate their removal. Dimensions, text objects, hatches etc.
can be placed on separate layers.
Every newly created object contains by default the 0 layer, which cannot be deleted or renamed.
The drawing must contain at least one layer because any graphic object must be placed on a
layer (it is often said that an object belongs to a layer).
It is not recommended to create all drawing objects on the 0 layer. It is recommended to create
a new layer for the correct organisation of graphic objects.
When the first dimension is set, the Defpoints utility layer is created; this is where the control
points of dimensions are set. The display view of these points is not changed with the DDPTYPE
command. The Defpoints layer is never printable.
When an object is created, its properties are taken from the layer where it is placed (if By layer
is selected).
If you specify a particular color, type and line weight instead of the Bylayer parameter in the
Color, Linetype and Line Weight drop down lists on the Properties panel, these values will be
applied to all newly created objects on the layer.
To create a new object you do not need to specify its properties every time. You switch to the
required layer and create the object.
Distributing objects by layers helps to edit objects’ properties separately. By blocking separate
layers you can prevent editing of objects placed on these layers if you do not want accidental
changes. Layers can be switched on/off, visible/invisible. Every layer can be made printable or
unprintable.
An active layer, selected for working with, is called current. By default, newly created objects
are placed on the current layer.
Some frequently used parameters for managing layers and their properties are placed on the
Properties toolbar:

And in the General section of the Properties bar:

196
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Layer drop down list allows reassigning of the current layer, and also switch on/off,
freeze/unfreeze and block/unblock a layer:

Color, Line type and Line weight drop down lists are used to change the properties of a
selected layer quickly:

The Layers button on the Properties toolbar opens the Layers dialog box where you can
create, delete, rename and do other operations with layers.

Layers
Menu: Format – Layers…

Toolbar: Properties –

197
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: LAYER, LAYERS, LO

The Layers dialog box is used to manage layers and their properties:

There is a window in the left part of the dialog box with a category tree. In general, a
category tree consists of the following elements:

All

All Used Layers

External reference

Filters

Groups

Configurations
The right part of the dialog box shows the list of layers for the selected element in the category
tree.
Below the dialog box title:

– the selected element in the category tree is shown,

– the current layer is shown.

Parameters:
Tree categories window

Add group The button adds groups of layers.

Add filter The button adds a filter.

Add
configuration The button adds configurations of layers.

Delete The button deletes the tree’s elements.

Close/Open The button folds/unfolds windows of the categories

tree tree.

198
nanoCAD Mechanica

Remark: Short description of the layer’s configuration. The

parameter is displayed above the Invert filter when
you select the layer’s configuration in the tree.

Invert filter The Inversion mode for the display of layers in the
layer’s list.

List of edited layers

Buttons

Add The button adds a new layer.

Delete The button deletes a selected laye.r

Show all layers

(for group) The button edits selected group.

Edit property The button edits selected filter.

Refresh Button of regeneration.

Layer walk The button turns the single layer mode on.

Columns

Column displays the current layer.

Column displays the layer’s name.

Column displays the icon for visibility of layers.

Column displays the icon for freezing of layers.

Column displays the icon for locking a layer.

Column displays an icon for the layer’s color.

Column displays the layer’s line type.

Column displays the layer’s line weight.

Column displays the layer’s plot style.

Column displays the icon permitting printing.

Column displays frozen layers in the current viewport.

Short information about the layer.

199
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing of a layer’s parameters

To select layers in the dialog box

Click on a layer to select it.
You can edit the parameters of several selected layers at once.
With SHIFT pressed, select the first and the last layer in the list. These layers and any layers
between them will be selected.
With CTRL pressed, you can select individual layers from the list.

To sort layers by property

A list of layers can be sorted by any parameter. To sort a list of layers, click on the parameter
column title.
For example, click on the Color title and all layers in the list are sorted by color. Clicking on the
title again reverses the order of the sorted layers:

Specifying the color, type and width of lines in the layer

In Layers dialog it is possible to specify all the properties that can be inherited by the objects
created on it. Ensure the By layer value is set in the corresponding boxes of the object
properties.
Color, type and weight of lines can be specified for several layers at once:
1. Select a layer or several layers to change the properties.
2. Click on the required parameter in the column.
3. Select the value from the list.

Creation of a new layer

A newly created layer has default properties. After a new layer is created, you can change its
properties.
To create a layer:

1. Click button Add.

A new layer with the name New Layer (N) appears in the list. The default name for the new
layer can be changed.

200
nanoCAD Mechanica

Renaming a layer
To rename a layer:
1. Select layer in the dialog box.
2. Click name of the layer.
3. Enter the new name.
4. Press ENTER.

Removing a layer
Only layers not used in the document can be deleted. The current layer, even if it is not used
cannot be deleted.
To delete a layer:
1. Select layer in the dialog box.

2. Click the Delete button.

3. You can delete several unused layers at once.
To delete several layers:
1. Select All Used Layers in the categories tree.

2. Switch on the Invert filter parameter.

Select all sorted unused layers and select the Delete button or Delete command from the
context menu.

Removing of used layers

1. Select layer(s) in layer list.

2. Click the Delete button.

Delete used layers dialog box appears when you delete used layers:

Delete layers and: Select the action with objects from deleted layer.
Delete objects Delete selected layer with all objects.

201
nanoCAD Mechanica

Change objects layer to: Move objects of deleted layer. Objects may be moved to
new Layer№ or existing layer from the list.
Copy ByLayer property values from Set ByLayer properties for moved objects.
layer

Authorize the removal of used layers: Permit to delete Turned off, Frozen, Locked layers. Brackets
show the number of selected layers with property.

3. Click Delete.

Making a layer active

To make a layer active:
1. Select a layer in the Layers dialog box.

2. Click in the column icon of the selected layer. The icon means that a layer is current.

Controlling layer visibility

Objects with visibility switched off are not displayed on layers and are unprintable, but are used
in regeneration of a drawing. When layers are switched on/off, regeneration is not performed. It
is recommended to switch on/off layers when you need to do it frequently and not for a long
time. In other cases it is better to freeze them.

Visible layers are marked with icon. The icon means that visibility of the layer is switched
off. Visibility can be switched off for several layers at once. Visibility of the current layer cannot
be switched off.
To switch on/off visibility of a layer:
1. Select one or several layers in the list.

2. Click the icon of any selected layer to switch them off.

Freezing a layer
Objects placed on frozen layers are not displayed on the screen and are unprintable and not used
in regeneration of the drawing. You can freeze unused layers to make display and regeneration
operations faster. But freezing a layer causes regeneration of the drawing, which takes time.
Freeze layers if you only do it occasionally or you want to freeze the layers for a long time. In
other cases it is better to switch them off.

Frozen layers are marked with icon, while unfrozen layers are marked with .

You can freeze and unfreeze several layers at once. The current ( ) layer cannot be frozen.
Freezing or unfreezing a layer to edit it:
1. Select one or several layers in the list.

2. Click the icon of any selected layer to freeze them all.

202
nanoCAD Mechanica

Freezing layers in the viewports of a layout

Layers can be frozen in separate viewports of a layout. You can get different displays of the same
objects in different viewports without creating additional geometry. For example, you create two
layout viewports for the same object and freeze the layer with design elements in the second
viewport:

Frozen layers from the current viewport are marked with icon.
When the viewport is active, then icon is added to the Properties toolbar.

Viewport with unfrozen layers Viewport with frozen layer of design elements

To freeze layers in a layout viewport:

1. Switch to layout with required viewport.
2. Double click this viewport to make it active.
3. Open the Layers dialog box and select all layers that should be frozen.

4. Click the icon of any selected layer to freeze the selected layers.
5. Close the Layers dialog box.
The layer will be frozen in the current viewport, but will remain unfrozen in all other layout
viewports. It will not be printed only in this viewport.

Redefinition of layer’s properties in viewports

Redefinition of layer’s properties is a way to display objects in different viewports of layout with
different properties (color, type and line weight) without changing properties with “ByLayer” or
“ByBlock” values.

203
nanoCAD Mechanica

A color of axes lines is changed in the right viewport.

To redefine properties of a current viewport of a layout:
1. Double click this viewport to make it active.
2. Open the Layers dialog.
3. Select a layer from a list and change its parameters.
4. Close the Layers dialog.
Parameters are changed only in the viewport of a layout. Other paper space viewports and the
model space parameters are unchanged.

Lock a layer
If a layer is ulocked, you can create a new object on it. Objects created before locking are visible
and they can be selected to view their properties, but they cannot be edited. You can snap to the
object on a locked layer with an object snap. You can change the color, line type, weight type,
make printable or unprintable on a locked layer.

Locked layers are marked with icon.

You can lock or ublock several layers at once.
To block/unblock layer:
1. Select one or several layers in the list.
2. Click on the lock column of the selected layer.
To select objects from locked layers:

In status bar click the Selection from locked layers button.

204
nanoCAD Mechanica

Controlling layer printability

The icon means that objects on the layer can be printed. Objects on the layers with icon
will not be printed.
You can make several layers printable or unprintable at once.
To make layers printable or unprintable:
1. Select one or several layers in the list.
2. Click on the printability column of the selected layer.

View mode of selected layers

There is a mode to view only the selected layers in nanoCAD. Visibility of all layers in this mode,
except the selected, are switched off automatically; visibility is restored when you close this
mode. This mode is a quick alternative to switching off the visibility of all layers to display the
content of one layer; it is very convenient if there are a lot of layers in the drawing.

All layer view mode Single layer view mode

To switch on single layer or several layers view mode:

1. Click a layer to view in the dialog.

2. Select the Layer walk button, visibility of all layers, except the one selected, are

temporarily turned off. Near the selected layer in the column the icon is
displayed. It means that this layer is visible.

3. Click other layers to view. Near the selected layers in the column the icon is
displayed. It means that this layers are visible. Visibility of all layers, except the
selected, is temporarily switched off.

4. Click on a visible layer (which marked with the icon) turns off its visibility.

205
nanoCAD Mechanica

With the Layers dialog box opened you can zoom and pan the drawing using the corresponding
commands.

To restore visibility of all the layers, switch off the Layer walk button or close the Layers
dialog box.
This mode is a quick alternative to switching off the visibility of all layers to edit the content of
one layer. After selecting the mode, select any command and the Layers dialog box closes and
the selected layer will be displayed. To restore the visibility of all layers after editing, open the
Layers dialog box and the visibility of all layers is restored automatically.

Creating and editing group of layers

The Layers dialog box allows merging of layers into groups. Grouping of layers is recommended
when a document contains a lot of layers and you often need to change the settings of several
layers; for example, to quickly block/unblock them or to control their printability.
One layer can belong to different groups.

Creation of a new group of layers

To create a group of layers for the entire document:
1. Select All in the categories tree.

2. Select the button Add group and the button Show all layers (for group). To

the left of the current layer icon column, the column for selecting layers for the
groups is shown.
3. Enter a group name (the default name is Group…N, where N – is the number of the
created group).
4. Select layers to make a group.

5. Select the button Show all layers (for group) to create the group.
If a group is selected in the categories tree instead of All, a subgroup of layers will be created:

206
nanoCAD Mechanica

When adding new layers to a subgroup they are automatically added to all parent groups.
You cannot create a subgroup of layers for a filter.

Editing a group of layers

To add or exclude layers from a group:
1. Select the group in the categories tree.

2. Select the Show all layers (for group) button.

3. In the column for selecting layers for groups, select the layers to form the group
(the icon changes its shape to the when a layer is added to a group). Layers of
the parent group are always selected.

Creating and editing filters

A filter forms a list of layers that satisfy certain selection criteria. Selection in the filter is
performed by one or several parameters of the layers; for example, selection of layers having a
green color and line weight 0.50 which can be printed.

207
nanoCAD Mechanica

Creation of a new filter

To create a layers filter for the whole document:
1. Select All in the categories tree.

2. Select the Add filter button. The Edit property button is

automatically selected.
3. Enter a filter name (a filter has a default name FilterN, where N is the number of the
created filter).
4. In the Editing of properties of the filter window, specify the selection criteria for the
layers in the filter.
5. Criteria, specified in one row are linked with the logical “AND”.
6. Criteria, specified in different rows are linked with the logical “OR”.

7. The Add and Delete buttons are used to add or delete rows of selection
criteria.

8. Select the Edit property button to finish filter creation.

A layer’s name is often used as a selection criterion. Names can be specified as templates.
It is possible to use the following symbols in the template of a layer’s name:

Symbol in a template Corresponding symbols in a layer’s name

* Asterisk Any sequence of symbols.

? Question mark Any symbol.

# Hash Any figure.

@ At sign Any letter.

208
nanoCAD Mechanica

. Point Any symbol except a letter or figure.

~ Tilde Any sequence of symbols except the sequence after the tilde.

[ ] Square brackets Any symbol except the symbols in brackets.

[~] Tilde in square Any symbol except the symbols in brackets.

brackets

[-] Dash in square Any symbol from the range starting with the symbol to the left of the
brackets dash and ending with the symbol to the right of the dash.

` Backtick Backtick character shows that the following symbol is an ordinary

character symbol and not special.

If you select a group instead of the All element, a filter is created for the group.

Editing layers filter

To add to or exclude layers from a filter:
1. Select the All in the categories tree (to create a filter for all layers in the document) or a
group (to create a filter only for the group).

2. Select the Edit property button.

3. In the Editing of properties of the filter window specify the selection criteria for
layers in the filter.
4. Criteria, specified in one row are linked with the logical “AND”.
5. Criteria, specified in different rows are linked with the logical “OR”.

6. The Add and Delete buttons are used to add or delete rows of selection
criteria.

7. Select the Edit property button to finish filter creation.

Criteria symbols to select layers for a filter:

Visible layer.

Invisible layer.

Frozen layer.

Unfrozen layer.

Locked layer.

Unlocked layer.

Layer available for printing.

Layer unavailable for printing.

Layer becomes unfrozen in new

209
nanoCAD Mechanica

viewports.

Layer becomes frozen in new viewports.

Used layer.

Unused layer.

“All used layers” filter

By default, all nanoCAD documents contain a layers filter All used layers:

The filter shows all layers used in the current document. A filter does not show unused layers in
a document. You cannot delete this filter.

“Invert layers” checkbox

The Invert filter parameter below the categories tree can be used to display all the layers,
which are not in the group, filter, external reference or configuration.
For example, to display all unused layers in a document, select the All used layers and select
the Invert filter.

.
When you deselect the Invert filter the list of layers recovers.
It is often needed to display layers of a particular category.
You can use the Invert filter for this:
1. Select a group or a filter in the categories tree.
2. Select the Invert filter.
3. Select all layers in the list and make them invisible.

Configurations of layers
Configurations of layers are backup copies of layers’ parameters.
Configurations are placed in the separate Configurations folder in the categories tree.
A configuration is created for all layers in the document.

To create a configuration, select the Add configuration button. A new configuration has a
default name – Configuration N, where N is the number of created configurations.
A created configuration can be edited, e.g. to change the parameters of its layers.
Configurations can be restored, renamed and deleted.
A recovery of a configuration places a copy of the parameters of the layer with the same name
into the document; it means recovering the parameters of the layers and returning them to the
moment the configuration was created. To recover a configuration, select Restore from the
context menu of the configuration:

210
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can call Layers state dialog with the following commands:

Menu: Format – Layers state…

Command line: LAYERSTATE

Toolbar: Layers 2 –
Toolbar contains the selection dialog for configurations recover.

A configuration can be exported to a LAS-file and imported from a LAS-file or *.dwg file (Import
and Export commands of the context menu).

Tools for working with layers

There are set of tools for quick organization of layers in nanoCAD.
You can find these commands in the menu Format – Layer tools:

Make Object’slayer current

Layer walk

Match layer

Change to current layer

211
nanoCAD Mechanica

Copy objects to new layer

Isolate

Layer off

Turn on all layers

Layer freeze

Thaw all layers

Layer lock

Layer unlock

Merge layer

Delete layer
Some of these commands are on the Layers 2 toolbar:

For your convenience the Make Object’s layer current and Layer walk are on the Properties
toolbar:

Make Object’s layer current

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Make Object’s layer current

Toolbar: Properties –

Command line: LAYMCUR

A layer of a selected object becomes current. You can select one or several objects belonging to
one layer.
Command option:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select object whose layer will become current Select an object or objects
or [?]: belonging to one layer.

Layer walk
Menu: Format – Layer tools > Layer walk

212
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Properties –

Command line: LAYWALK

The Layer walk mode displays objects only on selected layers and hides objects on any other
layers. Objects can be previously selected.
To display only a current layer:

1. Select the Layer walk button from the Properties toolbar. Visibility of all layers,

except the one selected, are temporarily switched off. Near a current layer in the

column the icon is displayed. It means that this layer is visible.

To display only selected layer:
You can do without the Layer walk command to display only one layer:
1. With the CTRL button pressed select a layer from a layers list on the Properties toolbar
or Properties window.
A selected layer becomes visible and current, visibility of all layers, except the one selected, is
temporarily switched off.
To display several selected layers:

1. Select the Layer walk button from the Properties toolbar. Visibility of all layers,
except the one selected, is temporarily switched off.
2. Click in the drop-down list of the Properties toolbar or Properties window and select

other layers to display. Near selected layers in the column the icon is
displayed. It means that these layers are visible.

3. Click on a visible layer (which has marked with the icon) switches off its visibility.
To exit from display mode of several layers:

Switching the Layer walk button off on the Properties toolbar restores visibility of all
layers.

1. Switch the Layer walk button off on the Properties toolbar.

The visibility of all layers is restored.

Match layer
Menu: Format – Layer tools > Match layer

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYMCH

The command moves selected objects to another layer. It is possible to select objects
beforehand.
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Name Opens the Change to Layer dialog for selection of destination layer from the list.

213
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Select an object to change its layer or Select objects.

[?]:
Select object on destination layer or Select objects on a layer, where
[?/Name]: you want to move objects to.
Select object on destination layer or Select the Name option to specify a
[?/Name]: destination layer in the Change to
Layer dialog.
Selection of commands to work with layers in the dialogs
The dialogs open when you select the Name option and shows list of layers, which you can select
as a destination layer or layers for merging or removal.
1. In the command prompt Select object on destination layer or [?/Name]: select
Name.
2. Select a layer from the list in the dialog.
3. Press ОК.
To create a new layer:
1. Enter a layer’s name in the dialog field.
2. Press ОК.
3. Accept a layer’s creation.

Multiple selections are acceptable when you merge or delete layers in the dialogs.
With the SHIFT button pressed all layers are selected from the first to the last click.
With the CTRL button pressed you can add any layer from a list to a selection.

214
nanoCAD Mechanica

Change to current layer

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Change to current layer

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYCUR

Replaces selected objects on a current layer. Objects can be previously selected.
Command option:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select objects to be changed to the current Select objects.

layer or [?]:
Select objects to be changed to the current Press ENTER to finish the
layer or [?]: command.

Copy objects to new layer

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Copy objects to new layer

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: COPYTOLAYER

Creation of selected objects copies on the specified layer. For objects’ copies you can specify
another location. It is possible to select objects beforehand.

215
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Name Starts the Copy to Layer dialog to specify a layer where objects’ copies are
placed.
Displacement A value of displacement of objects’ copies by specifying a relative distance by
entering coordinates. Coordinates specify a displacement value of objects’
copies not a point location.
Exit Finishes the command without objects’ replacement.

Command prompts when specifying a base point

Select an object to change its layer or Select objects.

[?]:
Select object on destination layer or Select an object on a layer to place
[?/Name]: copies.
Select object on destination layer or Select Name option to specify a
[?/Name]: layer in the Copy to Layer dialog.
Specify base point or [Displacement/Exit] Specify a base point to replace the
copied objects.
Specify second point or displacement <use Specify a second point for
first point as displacement> replacement.
Command prompts when you replace copies:

Specify base point or [Displacement/Exit] Select Displacement.

Specify displacement: Enter coordinates values, which
specify relative distance and
direction.

Isolate
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Isolate

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYISO

Switches all layers off, except layers of selected objects. Layers of selected objects remain visible
and are called isolated.
The command allows freezing all layers except selected only in a current viewport (with the
specified parameter Viewports = Vpfreeze).
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Settings Switches to a selection mode of parameters’ type. Selected parameters are saved
for following program sessions.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] <Vpfreeze>:
Options:

216
nanoCAD Mechanica

Vpfreeze - Freezes all layers except layers of selected objects only in a

current viewport.
When objects are selected in model or paper space, layers are turned off in all
spaces (in model, in layout and in viewports) , except layers of selected
objects.
Off - Freezes all layers in all spaces (in model, in layout and in a
current viewport), except layers of selected objects only in a current viewport.

Command prompts when isolating layers:

Select objects on the layer(s) to be Select objects of the layers, which

isolated or [?/Settings]: need to be isolated in the drawing.
Select objects on the layer(s) to be Press ENTER to finish the
isolated or [?/Settings]: command.

Command prompts when isolating layers in a current viewport:

Select objects on the layer(s) to be Select Settings option.

isolated or [?/Settings]:
In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] Select Vpfreeze option.
<Vpfreeze>:
Select objects on the layer(s) to be Select objects of the layers, which
isolated or [?/Settings]: need to be isolated.
In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] Select Off option to isolate layers
<Vpfreeze>: in all spaces from a current
viewport.
Select objects on the layer(s) to be Select objects of the layers, which
isolated or [?/Settings]: need to be isolated in all spaces.
Select objects on the layer(s) to be Press ENTER to finish the
isolated or [?/Settings]: command.

Layer off
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Layer off

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYOFF

Turning the layers of selected objects off. It makes these objects invisible both in model and
paper spaces.
The commands allows to freeze layers of selected objects only in a current viewport (if
Viewports = Vpfreeze parameter is selected).
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Settings Switches to the selection parameters mode. Selected parameters are saved for
the next session.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:

217
nanoCAD Mechanica

Enter setting type for [Viewports]:

Options:
Viewports - Switches to the selection parameters mode for a
current viewport. The option starts the following prompt in the command
line:
In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] <Vpfreeze>:
Options:
Vpfreeze - Freezes layers of selected objects only in a current
viewport.
If objects are selected in paper or model spaces, their layers are turned
off in all spaces (model, paper, and viewports).
Off - turns layers of selected objects off. Layers are turned
off in all spaces and it does not matter where objects of these layers are
selected (model or paper spaces, in a current viewport).

Undone Cancels selection of previous layer to be turned off (or frozen in a current
viewport).

Command prompts when layers are turned off:

Select an object on the layer to be turned
off or [?/Settings]:
Select an object on the layer to be turned
off or [?/Settings/Undone]:
Select an object on the layer to be turned
off or [?/Settings/Undone]:
Select objects of the layers which is
needed to be turned off.
Select Undone option to cancel
turning the previous layer off.
Press ENTER or ESC to finish the
command.

NOTE: Command prompts are shown for Off option of Viewports parameter.

Command prompts when layers are turned off in a current viewport:

Select an object on the layer to be turned Select Settings option.

off or [?/Settings]:
Enter setting type for [Viewports]: Select Viewports option.
In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] Select Vpfreeze option.
<Vpfreeze>:
Select an object on the layer to be turned In a viewport select objects of the
off or [?/Settings]: layers which are needed to be
turned off.
Select an object on the layer to be turned Select Undone option to cancel
off or [?/Settings/Undone]: turning the previous layer off.
Select an object on the layer to be turned Press ENTER or ESC to finish the
off or [?/Settings/Undone]: command.

NOTE: Command prompts are shown for Off option of Viewports parameter.

Turn on all layers

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Turn on all layers

Command line: LAYON

218
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command turns on all previously turned off layers. Objects created on these layers become
visible if layers were not frozen.

Layer freeze
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Layer freeze

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYFRZ

Freezing the layers of selected objects. It makes these objects frozen both in model and paper
spaces.
The commands freeze layers of selected objects only in a current viewport (if
Viewports=Vpfreeze parameter is selected).
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Settings Switches to the selection parameters mode. Selected parameters are saved for
the next session.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter setting type for [Viewports]:
Options:
Viewports - Switches to the selection parameters mode for a
current viewport. The option starts the following prompt in the command
line:
In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] <Vpfreeze>:
Options:
Freeze - Freezes layers of selected objects. Layers are
frozen in all spaces and it does not matter where objects of these layers
are selected (model or paper spaces, in a current viewport).
Vpfreeze - Freezes layers of selected objects only in a current
viewport.
If objects are selected in paper or model spaces, their layers are frozen in
all spaces (model, paper, in viewports).

Undone Cancels selection of previous layer to be frozen.

Command prompts when layers are frozen:

Select an object on the layer to be frozen Select objects of the layers which is
or [?/Settings]: needed to be frozen.
Select an object on the layer to be frozen Select Undone option to cancel
or [?/Settings/Undone]: freezing the previous layer.
Select an object on the layer to be frozen Press ENTER or ESC to finish the
or [?/Settings/Undone]: command.

NOTE: Command prompts are shown for Freeze option of Viewports parameter.

219
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts when layers are frozen in a current viewport

Select an object on the layer to be frozen Select Settings option

or [?/Settings]:
Enter setting type for [Viewports]: Select Viewports option.
In paper space viewport use Select Vpfreeze option.
[Freeze/Vpfreeze] <Vpfreeze>:
Select an object on the layer to be frozen In a viewport select objects of the
or [?/Settings]: layers which should be frozen.
Select an object on the layer to be frozen Select Undone option to cancel
or [?/Settings/Undone]: freezing the previous layer.
Select an object on the layer to be frozen Press ENTER or ESC to finish the
or [?/Settings/Undone]: command.

NOTE: Command prompts are shown for Freeze option of Viewports parameter.

Thaw all layers

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Thaw all layers

Command line: LAYTHW

The command unfreezes all previously frozen layers. Objects created on those layers become
visible if layers are not also turned off or were not frozen in separate viewports. Layers frozen in
separate layout viewports should be unfrozen one by one.

Layer lock
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Layer lock

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYLCK

Locks layers of selected objects. The command allows forbidding accidental changing of any layer
objects. Objects or an object can be previously selected.
Command option:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select an object on the layer to be locked Select an object.

or [?]:

Layer unlock
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Format – Layer tools > Layer unlock

220
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Layers 2 -

Command line: LAYULK

Unlocks layers of selected objects. Objects or an object can be previously selected.
Command option:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select an object on the layer to be Select an object.

unlocked or [?]:

Merge layer
Menu: Format – Layer tools > Merge layer

Command line: LAYMRG

Merges selected layers into a specified layer. Objects on merged layers are moved to the
specified layer and the initial layers are purged.
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

Name Opens the Merge layers dialog to specify objects or layers to merge.

Command prompts:

Select object on layer to merge or Select objects on merged layers.

[?/Name]:
Select object on layer to merge or
[?/Name]:
Select object on layer to merge or
[?/Name]:
Select object on target layer or [?/Name]:
Select object on target layer or [?/Name]:
Select Name option for selection of
layers in the list of the Merge
layers dialog.
Press ENTER to finish selection.
Select object on a layer where
objects of merged layers are
replaced.
Select Name option for selection of
target layer in the list of the Merge
to Layer dialog.

Delete layer
Menu: Format – Layer tools > Delete layer

Command line: LAYDEL

Removal of layers. Objects can be previously selected.
Command options:

? Starts other options to select objects.

221
nanoCAD Mechanica

Name Opens the Delete Layers dialog to specify layers to be deleted.

Command prompts:

Select object on layer to delete or Select objects of layers to be

[?/Name]: deleted.
Select object on layer to delete or Select Name option for selection of
[?/Name]: layers to be deleted in the list of
the Delete layers dialog.
Select object on layer to delete or Press ENTER to finish the
[?/Name]: command.

Line Types
Menu: Format – Styles…

Command line: LINETYPE

Different line types have different purposes; for example, to create axes you use one type of
line, another to create invisible lines etc. Using different line types to create different objects
improves visual perception of graphic data and makes working with drawings more efficient.
Line type is a repeated sequence of lines, dots and spaces along a line or curve. Complex types
of lines can contain built-in shapes which are stored in the (*.SHP) shape file. Line types are
stored in files with a *.LIN extension. Every type has its own name; sequence of dashes, points,
relative lengths of dashes and spaces and other characteristics are specified in a line’s
description. One LIN-file can contain many line types.

nanoCAD supports line types created for AutoCAD.

Users can create their own line types by adding their descriptions to an existing LIN-file or
creating their own new files. Edit an existing file or create a new file in any text editor or text
processor.
User line types (*.LIN) and shape files (*.SHP), which are used in line types are stored in
C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\SHX folder.
There is a built in Line type editor to create user line types and edit existing ones.
Before using a line type, you have to load it into the drawing. Loaded line types can be renamed
when you are working with the drawing. Renaming a line type only changes its description in the
current drawing; the name of the line type stays the same in the LIN-file.
Unused line types can be deleted in the Linetype Manger with the Purge command (File menu
– Drawing Utilities).

NOTE: By layer, By block and Solid line types cannot be renamed or deleted.

All newly created objects inherit the line type currently set in the Linetype row of the
Properties bar.

NOTE: The Linetype drop-down list of the Properties -bar only contains loaded line types, shown in
the Linetype Manager.

If a current line type is specified By layer, new objects will have the line types defined for this
layer.

222
nanoCAD Mechanica

Line types can be assigned not only to layers, but also to objects. To change an object’s line
type, replace it on the layer with another line type, change the line type of the layer where it is
placed or specify another line type especially for the object.
Line types are saved with the document in the *.dwg file. They can be saved in a (*.dwt) file
template to transfer to another computer.
Information about all line types in the document is shown in the Linetype Manger. Linetype
Manager allows loading, deleting and renaming of line types. There is a button to open the
built-in Linetype Editor dialog box, which allows you to create own line types or edit existing
line types.

Parameters:

Line types Shows the list of line types loaded in the current document.

Status Display and set the current line type.

Name Display and edit the name of selected line type.
Desctiption Display and edit the face and text description of selected
line type.

Buttons

Add Creation of a new style of line type using a selected type from the list
linetype as a base.

Delete
linetype Removal of the selected line type from the current document.

Edit
linetype Opens the Linetype Editor.

Open
linetype Imports line types into the current document.

223
nanoCAD Mechanica

Save
linetype Saves the selected line types into a file with *.LIN extension.

Details

Use paper space Sets the same scale of line types for paper space and model space.
units for scaling This option is useful if you use several viewports at once.

Global scale Sets a global scale factor for all line types.
factor:

Current object Sets the scale factor for line types for newly created objects. The scale
scale: is a multiplication of the global scale and the current scale.

NOTE: There is a context menu in the Linetype Manger:

To set a line type as current:

1. Select the required line type in the dialog box.

2. Click in the left field of the selected line type. The tag appears, the line type is set as
current.
To import line types:

1. Click the Load line type.

2. In the Open Line Type Import dialog box, specify the path to load the line type file
(*.LIN), containing the descriptions of the line types.
3. In the Load/Reset Line Types dialog box, select the line types for import. To select
several line types, use the SHIFT or CTRL buttons.
4. Click ОК to start loading the selected line types.
5. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.
To export line types:
1. In the dialog box, select one or several line types to export (you can use SHIFT and
CTRL buttons).

2. Click the Save linetype button.

3. In the Save Line Type Import dialog select the folder and specify a name.
4. Click the Save button.
5. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.

224
nanoCAD Mechanica

To delete a line type:

1. In the dialog box, select one or several line types to delete (you can use SHIFT and
CTRL buttons).

2. Click the Delete button.

3. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.

Linetype Editor
In the Linetype Manager you can edit the selected line type or create a new one using the
built-in Linetype Editor:

Parameters:

Description of Description of line types is shown.

line types

Buttons

Add dash Adds a new element to a line.

Delete dash Deletes an element from a line.

Move dash
up Moves one element up.

Move dash
down Moves one element down.

225
nanoCAD Mechanica

Elements are selected in the Common section.

There are the following options in the drop-down list:

Dash

Text

Shape

An element’s value is shown in the Geometry section.

To edit a line type:

1. Select a line type in the Linetype Manager.

2. Click the Edit linetype button to start the built-in Linetype Editor. There is a
description of the selected line type in the Dashes field:

3. Select an element and enter its new value in the Length field of the Geometry section.

NOTE: When you specify a positive value, a dash is drawn, when you specify a negative value, a space is
drawn, when a value is zero a point is drawn.

NOTE: The length of the first element must be greater than or equal to zero, i.e. the dash or point must be
drawn first.

4. To display a new value, press ENTER or just click.

5. To add a new element, click the Add dash button. A new element is added to the
end of the list and a zero value is assigned to it by default.
6. Specify a new value for an added element in the Length field of the Geometry section.
To display a new value press ENTER.
7. Click ОК to close the Edit Linetype dialog box.
8. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.
To add text to a description of a line type:
1. In the Type field select the Text option:

226
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. In the Style field of the Text section, select a text style from the drop-down list. In the
Text field enter symbols, specify parameters in the Geometry section:

3. Click ОК to close the Edit Linetype dialog box.

4. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.
To add a shape to a description of a line type:
1. In the Type field select the Shape option:

2. Select a shape name from the drop-down list in the Name field and a shape file in the
File field of the Shape section. Specify required parameters in the Geometry section:

227
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Click ОК to close the Edit Linetype dialog box.

4. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manger dialog box.

Creation of a new line type

A new line type is created on the base of an existing one:
1. In the Linetype Manager select a line type.

2. Click the New linetype button. The new row has a default name – Linetype1
appears.
3. Click Linetype1 and enter a new name.
4. In the Description field enter information about the line type.

5. Click the Edit linetype button.

6. Change the parameters in the Edit Linetype dialog box.
7. Click ОК to close the Edit Linetype dialog box.
8. Click ОК to close the Linetype Manager dialog box.

Managing the transparency of objects

Objects in nanoCAD have transparency properties. The transparency is used to reduce the
visibility of objects or drawing fragments on the screen to increase the readability of the drawing.
The Transparency parameter is displayed in the Properties panel (General section) when one
or several objects are selected and can have values from 0 to 100:

228
nanoCAD Mechanica

If a value is 100, the selected object becomes invisible. Totally opaque objects have values of 0.
The transparency of objects is not shown when printing or previewing the document.
To set the transparency for an object:
1. Select an object.
2. In the Transparency field of the General section in the Properties bar, specify the
required value.

229
nanoCAD Mechanica

GEOMETRIC OBJECTS
Base elements to create a drawing are graphic primitives – nanoCAD objects, which are whole
objects and cannot be separated with the Explode command (Modify menu).

Construction and reference geometry

Point
Menu: Draw – Point > Single Point

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+N
Command line: PO, POINT
The command allows the creation of point objects which can be shown as a common point or a
special symbol. Points are used, for example, for measure (the Divide and Measure commands)
and as reference points for object snap. A point is shown as a special symbol because a point
object of the default style is hard to see on the screen. A size of Point objects can be specified
according to the screen or in absolute units.
The Point Styles dialog box (Format menu) allows changing of the size of a point object and its
style.

NOTE: Changing the size and/or style of point objects affect not only new objects, but also created
objects.

The system variable - PDMODE controls shape and display of Point object on the screen. Special
symbols and their values to display point in the screen:

When a value of PDMODE=1 point is invisible on the screen.

230
nanoCAD Mechanica

System variable PDSIZE controls a size of special symbols (for values of PDMODE, different
from 0 and 1).
Default value of PDSIZE=0 specifies the size of symbols, which equals 5% of graphic area
height.
The values of PDSIZE>0 specify absolute value of point display.
The values of PDSIZE<0 specify point size in percentage of graphic area height.
Command prompts:

Specify Specify the point coordinates or click on the drawing.

point:
Specify Specify the next point or press ESC to finish the command.
point:

Size and style of points

Menu: Format – Points Styles…

Command line: DDPTYPE

The Point Style dialog box is used to display and change the current style and size of a point.
The current display style of the point is highlighted. Click on any symbol to change display style.

Parameters:

Point Size: Specify point symbol size. Entered value can specify a size in percentage of screen
size or in absolute document units.

231
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set Size Shows point symbol size as a percentage of the screen size (the point size is not
Relative to changed if the screen is zoomed).
Screen

Set Size in The point symbol size is changed if the screen is zoomed (increases or decreases).
Absolute
units

To change the current size and style of a point:

1. Select the style.
2. Enter the point size in the Point Size dialog.
3. Turn the required display size of point symbol on.

Infinite Lines
Lines, infinite in one or both directions, are called rays and lines. These lines can be used as
auxiliary lines to create objects. It is recommended to create auxiliary on a separate layer, which
can be frozen or made unprintable. Auxiliary lines can be edited; copied, replaced, and rotated.

Ray
Menu: Draw – Ray

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: RAY

This command creates a ray – starting in a point and a semi-infinite construction line. The
direction of ray is specified by the second point. The command prompt Specify through point:
repeats to create several rays. Origin point is the same for all created rays.
Command prompts:

Specify start Specify start point.

point:
Specify through Specify second point.
point:
Specify through Specify second point of the next rayor press ENTER to finish the
point: command.

Construction Line
Menu: Draw – Construction Line

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: XL, XLINE

This command creates an infinite construction line. The direction of construction line is specified
by the second point (origin point is the same for all created lines). The command prompt
Specify through point: repeats to create several lines.

232
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command options:

Hor Creation of an infinite line through the specified point and parallel X axis.

Ver Creation of an infinite line through the specified point and parallel Y axis.

Ang Creation of an infinite line through the specified point with specified angle to X-axis or
selected linear object.
Command prompts:
Enter angle of xline (0) or [Reference]:
Options:
Angle - Enter angle value
Reference - select linear object. Angle will be calculated related to this object
countclockwise.

Bisect Creation of an infinite bisector line through vertex of an angle.

Offset Creation of an infinite line parallel selected object with specified offset.
Command prompts:
Specify offset distance [Through/]
Options:
Offset distance – distance between xline and selected object
Through – drawing xline through specified point and parallel selected linear object.

Command prompts for drawing xline through point:

Specify start point or Specify start point.

[Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset/]:
Specify through point: Specify second point.
Specify through point: Specify next point or press ESC to finish the
command.
Command prompts for drawing xline
parallel axis:
Specify start point or Select Hor or Ver.
[Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset/]:
Specify through point: Specify point.
Specify through point: Specify next point or press ESC to finish the
command.

Command prompts for drawing xline with

specified angle:
Specify start point or Select Ang.
[Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset/]:
Enter angle of xline (0) or Enter angle value, press ENTER
[Reference]:
Specify through point:
Specify point.

If you selected Reference option:

Select line.
Select a line object or [?/]:
Enter angle of xline (0) or

233
nanoCAD Mechanica

[Reference]: Enter angle value, press ENTER

Specify through point: Specify point.

Command prompts for drawing bisector

xline:
Specify start point or Select Bisect.
[Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset/]:
Specify angle vertex point: Specify angle vertex point.
Specify angle start point:
Specify angle start point.
Specify angle end point:
Specify angle end point, press ENTER.

Command prompts for xline parallel

linear object:
Specify start point or
Select Offset.
[Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset/]:

Specify offset distance [Through/]

<Through> Specify offset distance for xline.
Select a line object or [?/]:
Select line.
Specify side to offset: Specify side to offset.

If Through option is selected:

Select a line object or [?/]: Select line.
Specify through point: Specify point for xline, press ENTER.

Linear objects
Line by two points
Menu: Draw – Two points

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+L

Command line: L, LINE

The two point segment is one of the base primitives and is often used for drawing. Segments can
be drawn separately and as a set of several segments, merged into zigzag lines. Each segment
closed or unclosed line is a separate segment, which is edited separately.
Command options:

Undo Deletes the last created segment of a created set of segments in an inverse order.

234
nanoCAD Mechanica

Close Creates the segment, connecting the last point of the last segment with the start point of
the first segment. This option is available after the creation of the second segment.

Command prompts:

Specify first point: Specify point 1.

Specify next point: Specify point 2.
Specify next point [Undo]: Specify next point or select Undo to cancel previous action.
Specify next point [Undo/Close]: Specify next point or press ENTER to finish the command.

Polyline
Menu: Draw – Polyline

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+P

Command line: PL, PLINE, SIMPLEPOLYLINE

A polyline can contain linear and arc segments and their combinations. It is a graphic primitive.
Arc segments of a polyline are created by two points, or by angle, center and tangent or arc
radius. When creating arc segments by two points, each next segment is tangent to a previous.
Polylines can have different width, which is specified by Width, Halfwidth. Every segment of
polyline can have its width value, and it can expand and contract, if widths in a start and end
points are different. Start and end points of segments with widths lay on an axis line.
Polylines can be created not only with the PLINE command but also with the RECTANGLE (by
two points), FRAME (by three points), POLYGON BOUNDARY, and REVCLOUD.
Created polyline can be edited with the PEDIT command and with ordinary and multipurpose
grips. The Explode command (from the Modify menu) transforms a polyline into separate
segments and arcs.
Command options of linear segments:

Arc Arc segment mode.

Close Closes a polyline by linear segment.

The option is available when the second point is specified. When the second point is
specified the option finishes the command and creates a polyline of one segment.

Halfwidth Halfwidth (distance from axis line to any of ends) of polyline.

When initial halfwidth is specified of polyline segment, this value becomes default
value for end halfwidth of a segment. Value of end halfwidth of a segment is the same
for next polyline segments, until this value is changed.

235
nanoCAD Mechanica

Length Length of segment, created as continuation of the previous segment and in the same
direction. For previous arc segment a new line segment is created tangent.

Undo Deletes the last created segment.

Width Width of following line segment.

When initial width is specified of polyline segment, this value becomes default value for
end width of a segment. Value of end width of a segment is the same for next polyline
segments, until this value is changed.
Command options of arc segments:

Angle Center angle of arc segment starting from start arc point (positive value of angle –
arc is created counterclockwise; negative value – arc is created clockwise).
When Angle option is selected, the command prompt is shown in the command line
after specifying the center angle:
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]:
Options:
Center - Specifies center of arc segment.
Radius - Specifies radius of arc segment.

Center Center of arc segment.

When Center option is selected, the command prompt is shown in the command line
after specifying the center of arc:
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]:
Options:
Angle - Specifies center angle of arc segment from start point.
Length - Specifies a length of chord of arc segment. If a previous segment is
arc, a next segment is created tangent to it.

Close Closes a polyline with an arc segment.

Direction Direction of tangent in start point of arc segment.

Halfwidth Halfwidth (distance from axis line to any of ends) of polyline segment.
When initial halfwidth is specified of polyline segment, this value becomes default
value for end halfwidth of a segment. Value of end halfwidth of a segment is the same
for next polyline segments, until this value is changed.

Line Linear segment mode.

Radius Radius of arc segment.

When Radius option is selected, the command prompt is shown in the command line
after specifying the arc radius:
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]:
Option:
Angle - Specifies center angle of arc segment.

Second pt Second point of arc in three point creation.

Undo Deletes the last added arc segment.

236
nanoCAD Mechanica

Width Width of following arc segments.

When initial width is specified of polyline segment, this value becomes default value
for end width of a segment. Value of end width of a segment is the same for next
polyline segments, until this value is changed.

Command prompts:

Specify start point: Specify point 1.

Specify next point or
[Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Widt
h]: Specify point 2.
Specify next point or
[Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Und Select Arc to create an arc segment.
o/Width]:
Specify endpoint of arc or Specify endpoint 3 of arc. Press ENTER to finish
[Angle/Center/Close/Direction/H command.
alfwidth/Line/Radius/Second
pt/Undo/Width]:

Multiline
Menu: Draw – Multiline

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: MLINE

Multiline contains parallel lines (items). You can select style, scale and justification.
By default STANDARD style is using.
Justification defines which side or center line will be used.
Scale is using to calculate multiline width on the base of mline style.
Command options:

Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Options:
Top - Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with
the most positive offset is at the specified points.
Zero - Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor,
so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified
points.
Bottom - Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with
the most negative offset is at the specified points.

Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline. The scale factor is based on the
width established in the multiline style definition.

237
nanoCAD Mechanica

sTyle Select the multiline style.

Options:
? - list of available styles.

Undo Cancels last entered point.

Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.

Command prompts:

Specify next point or Specify first point.

[Justification/Scale/sTyle]:
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify second point.
Specify next point or [Undo/Close]: Specify next points.
Press ENTER to finish the
command.

Multiline Styles
Menu: Format – Mline Styles

Command line: MLSTYLE

In Multiline Styles dialog you can create, edit, save and load styles.
Multiline style defines number of elements and their properties. To create multiline style you
should create items and define their properties.

In the bottom part of the dialog there are preview area and buttons to zoom in and zoom out.
Also, you can use mouse wheel to zoom:

238
nanoCAD Mechanica

Zoom in;

Zoom out;

Zoom 1:1.
Options:

List of available styles loaded to the document.

State Set current style.

Name Name of multiline style.
Description Text description.

Buttons

New Create new multiline style based on selected.

Delete Remove selected style from the current document.

Edit Show multiline style editor dialog.

Load Load multiline styles from file to the current document.

Save Save selected styles to *.mln file.

To create multiline style:

Multiline syle contains these parameters:

number of elements and their position;

offset from center line for each element;

linetype and color for each element;

joints for each multiline vertex;

type of used end caps;

color for multiline filling.

Elements with positive offsets are plased on the one side from center line, elements with
negative offsets - on the other side.
1. Start Mline Styles command.

2. In Multiline Styles select desired style and click button New. New style with
default name MlineSyleN, where N – ordinal number starting from 1. will appear. All
settings will be based on selected style.

3. Click button Edit to start editing created style.

239
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Set desired parameters and click ОК.

Options:

Description Text description.

Ends The type of end caps.

Start Set the type of end caps for start and end of the multiline.
End
Line Displays a line segment across each end of the multiline.
Outer Arc Displays an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.
Inner Arc Displays an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there's an odd
number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example,
if there are six elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and
elements 3 and 4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect
elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left
unconnected.

Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps.

Show Controls the background fill of the multiline

Fill with Color Sets the background fill color of the multiline. When you choose
Select Color, the Select Color dialog box is displayed.

240
nanoCAD Mechanica

Joints Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline
segment.

Items Sets element properties, such as the offset, color, and linetype, of
new and existing multiline elements.
Offset Specify offset from the middle of the multiline. Elements are
displayed in descending order of their offsets.
Color Specify color.
Linetype Specify linetype for element.

Add Item Add new element.

Delete Item Remove selected element.

Save Multiline Styles

Multiline Styles can be saved to *.mln file.

1. In the Multiline Styles dialog click Save button.

2. In Save Multiline Styles dialog select styles. Click ОК.

3. Specify the file name and path.

Load Multiline Styles

1. In the Multiline Styles dialog click Load button.
2. Specify the file name and path.
3. In Load multiline style dialog select styles to load in the current document. Click ОК.

Polygon
Menu: Draw – Closed Polygon

241
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: POL, POLYGON

The command creates polygons with similar sides from closed polylines. A special case of
equilateral polygon is a square.
The Explode command (from the Modify menu) allows transferring a polyline which polygon
consists of, into segments.
Command options:

Edge Create a polygon by its edge length. Edge length is specified by its endpoints.

Inscribed Createan inscribed polygon by specifying a radius of circle, where polygon

endpoints lie. If you specify a radius by mouse in graphic area (point 2), at the
same time a rotation angle of polygon is specified.

Circumscribed Create a circumscribed polygon by specifying a radius of circle, where middles of

polygon’s edges lie. If you specify a radius by mouse in graphic area (point 2), at
the same time a rotation angle of polygon is specified.

Side Inscribed Circumscribed

Command prompts when creating a polygon by side:

Enter number of sides <6>: Enter number of sides for polygon.

Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: Select Edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify point 1.
Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify point 2.
Command prompts when creating a polygon by radius:

Enter number of sides <6>: Enter number of polygon’s sides.

Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: Specify center point 1.
Extend <"Inscribed"> or Select option.
[Inscribed/Circumscribed]:
Specify radius of circle: Specify radius (point 2).

Rectangle
Rectangle is a special case of a closed polyline. The Explode command transforms polyline which
rectangle consists of, into segments.
There are two ways to create a rectangle: by two and by three points.

242
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rectangle by two points

Menu: Draw – Rectangle by > Two points

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+R

Command line: REC,RECT,RECTANG,RECTANGLE

The command allows creating a rectangle from two opposite points.
Parameters of rectangle (length, width, area, rotation angle) can be specified and types of angles
(right angle, with chamfer or rounded by radius) can be edited with this command.
Command options when a first angle is specified:

Chamfer Chamfer sizes for rectangle’s corner.

Elevation Current elevation.

Fillet Fillet of rectangle’s corners.

Thickness Current three-dimensional height.

Width Width of polyline to create a rectangle.

Command options when a second angle is specified:

Area Area of rectangle when it is created by area and length or by area and width
After a value of area is specified a prompt is shown in a command line:
Calculate rectangle dimensions based on [Length/Width]<Length>:
Options:
Length - Specifies length of rectangle.
Width - Specifies width of rectangle.

Dimension Height and length of rectangle.

Rotation Rotation angle of rectangle by entering its value in the command line or specifying on
the screen. The Pick Points option allows specifying a rotation angle by specifying two
points on the screen.

Command prompts:

Specify first corner point or Specify first corner (point 1).

[Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]:
Specify other corner point or Specify second corner (point 2).
[Area/Dimensions/Rotation]:

243
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rectangle by three points

Menu: Draw – Rectangle by > Three points

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: FRAME

The command creates a rectangle by angle and two sides.

Command prompts:

Specify first point of Specify rectangle’s angle (point 1).

rectangle:
Specify second point of Specify length of first side (point 2).
rectangle:
Specify third point of Specify length of second side (point 3).
rectangle:

Helix
Command creates 2D spiral or 3D spring. Helix is used to create springs, carvings, rounded
stairs.

Menu: Draw – Helix

Command line: HELIX

Options:

Base radius Radius of helix base.

Top radius Radius of helix top.
Axis endpoint Endpoint location of the helix axis. The axis endpoint can be located
anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines helix length and
orientation.
Turns Number of turns for helix.
Turn height Height of one complete turn within the helix.
The number of turns will automatically update accordingly when a turn
height value is specified. If the number of turns for the helix has been
specified, you cannot enter a value for the turn height.
Twist Direction of helix twist: clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
CCW is default twist.

244
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify center point of base: Specify center (1) point.

Specify base radius or [Diameter]:
Specify top radius or [Diameter]:
Specify helix height or
[Axis_endpoint/Turns/turn_Height/tWist]
Specify base radius (2). Click Diameter
to specify base diameter.
Specify top radius. Click Diameter to
specify top diameter.
Specify the height of helix (4).

Curved objects
Arc
An arc can be created with different methods. There are 12 ways to create an arc in nanoCAD.

Arc by three points

Menu: Draw – Arc > 3 points

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+A

Command line: A, ARC

Command options:

Center Arc center.

Angle Arc angle.

chordLength Chord length.

End End point of arc.

Angle Arc angle.

Direction Direction of tangent from the start point of the arc.

Radius Radius.

245
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc or Specify start point 1.

[Center]:
Specify second point of arc or Specify second point 2.
[Center/End]:
Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 3.

Arc by center, start and end

Menu: Draw – Arc > 3 points

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYCENTERSTARTEND

Command prompts:

Specify center point of arc: Specify arc center (point 1).

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 2.
Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 3.

Arc by continue
Creates an arc tangent to the last created arc, line, or polyline object.

Menu: Draw – Arc > Continue

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYCONTINUE

Command prompts:

Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 1.

246
nanoCAD Mechanica

Arc by start, center and end

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, Center, End

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTCENTEREND

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1.

Specify center point of arc: Specify arc center (point 2).
Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 3.

Arc by start, center and angle

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, Center, Angle

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTCENTERANGLE

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1. Specify

center point of arc: Specify arc center (point 2).
Specify included angle: Specify center angle (point 3).

Arc by start, center and chord length

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, Center, Length

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTCENTERLENGTH

247
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1. Specify

center point of arc: Specify arc center (point 2).
Specify length of chord: Specify chord length (point 3).

Arc by start, end and angle

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, End, Angle

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTENDANGLE

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1.

Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 2.
Specify included angle: Specify center angle (point 3).

Arc by start, end and direction

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, End, Direction

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTENDDIRECTION

Command prompts:

248
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1.

Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 2.
Specify tangent direction for the start Specify tangent direction (point 3).
point of arc:

Arc by start, end and radius

Menu: Draw – Arc > Start, End, Radius

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYSTARTENDRADIUS

Command prompts:

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 1.

Specify end point of arc: Specify end point 2.
Specify radius of arc: Specify arc radius (point 3).

Arc by center, start and chord length

Menu: Draw – Arc > Center, Start, Length

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARCBYCENTERSTARTLENGTH

Command prompts:

Specify center point of arc: Specify arc center (point 1).

Specify start point of arc: Specify start point 2.
Specify length of chord: Specify chord length (point 3).

Arc by center, start and angle

Menu: Draw – Arc > Center, Start, Angle

249
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARC2, ARCBYCENTERSTARTANGLE

Command prompts:

Specify center Specify arc center (point 1).

point of arc:
Specify start point Specify start point 2.
of arc:
Specify included Specify angle (point 3).
angle:

Arc by center, angles and radius

Menu: Draw – Arc > Center, Angles, Radius

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ARC3, ARCBYCENTERANGLESRADIUS

Command prompts:

Specify center Specify center of arc (point 1).

point of arc:
Specify start angle Specify start angle (point 2).
of arc:
Specify end angle Specify end angle (point 3).
of arc:
Specify radius of Specify radius (point 4).
arc:

250
nanoCAD Mechanica

Circle

Circle by center and radius

Menu: Draw – Circle > Center, radius

Toolbar: Draw –

Hotkeys: CTRL+ALT+C
Command line: C, CIRCLE
Command options:

3P Circle by three points.

2P Circle by diameter.

TTR Circle by two tangents and radius.

Diameter Circle by center and diameter.

Command prompts:

Specify center point of Specify center (point 1).

circle or [3P/2P/TTR]:
Specify radius: Specify radius of circle (point 2).

Circle by two tangents and radius

Menu: Draw – Circle > Two Tangents, Radius

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: CIRCLEBYTTR

251
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify a point on first tangent

object: Select a first tangent object (point 1).

Specify a point on second tangent

object: Select a second tangent object (point 2).

Specify radius: Specify radius of circle.

Circle by center and diameter

Menu: Draw – Circle > Center, Diameter

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: CIRCLEBYDIAMETER2

Command prompts:

Specify center point of Specify center (point 1).

circle:
Specify diameter: Specify diameter (point 2).

Circle by diameter
Menu: Draw – Circle > Diameter

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: CIRCLEBYDIAMETER, CIRCLE2

252
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify first end point for Specify first point 1 for circle diameter
circle’s diameter:

Specify second end point for Specify end point 2 for circle diameter
circle’s diameter:

Circle by three points

Menu: Draw – Circle > 3 points

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: CIRCLEBY3POINTS, CIRCLE3

Command prompts:

Specify first point on Specify first point.

circle:

Specify second point Specify second point.

on circle:

Specify third point on Specify third point.

circle:

Donut
Menu: Draw – Donut

Command line: DONUT

The command allows you to draw a number of donuts with the same diameter value but different
center point.

253
nanoCAD Mechanica

A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The
width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. If you specify
an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle.

Command options:

Specify inside diameter of Specify diameter 1.

donut <current>:
Specify outside diameter of Specify diameter 2.
donut <current>:
Specify center of donut Specify the location of the donut based on its center
or <exit>: point (point 3). A donut is drawn at each point
specified until you press ENTER to end the command.

Spline
Menu: Draw – Spline

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: SPL, SPLINE

A spline is a smooth curve passing through a given set of points. Example of spline usage: line
breaks of objects, horizontals in GIS.
Command options:

Object Converts a polyline, smoothed by the Spline and Smooth commands, to an

equivalent spline.

Close Closes a spline.

Fit The maximum distance from a spline curve to any points defining it.
tolerance

Command prompts:

254
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify first point or [Object]: Specify a start point 1.

Specify second point: Specify second point 2.

Specify next point or[Close/Fit Specify 3, 4, 5 etc. points.

tolerance] <start tangent>

Specify next point or[Close/Fit Press ENTER to finish specifying points.

tolerance] <start tangent>

Specify start tangent: Specify a tangent 6 for the start spline point.

Specify end tangent: Specify a tangent 7 for the end spline point.

Ellipse

Ellipse by center and radiuses

Menu: Draw – Ellipse By > Center and Radiuses

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ELLIPSE1

The command creates an ellipse by center and radiuses.
Command options:

Rotation Relation between ellipse axes by rotation around first axis.

Command prompts:

Specify center point of ellipse: Specify center point for ellipse (point 1).

Specify endpoint of axis: Specify first radius (point 2).

Specify distance to other axis or Specify second radius (point 3).

[Rotation]:

Ellipse by diameter and radius

Menu: Draw – Ellipse By > Diameter and Radius

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ELLIPSE2, ELLIPSEBYDIAMETER

255
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command creates an ellipse by diameter and radius.

Command options:

Rotation Relation between ellipse axes by rotation around first axis.

Command prompts:

Specify axis endpoint of Specify point 1.

ellipse:

Specify other axis endpoint of Specify diameter of ellipse (point 2).

ellipse:

Specify distance to other axis Specify radius of ellipse (point 3).

or [Rotation]:

Elliptic Arc
Menu: Draw – Ellipse By > Elliptic Arc

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ELLIPTICARC

Command options:

Center Center of elliptic arc.

Rotation Relation between ellipse axes by rotation around the first axis

Parameter Select Parameter when specifying the start and end points of the elliptic arc to
create an elliptic arc according to the parameter vector:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u), where
с – ellipse center;
а – major axis;
b - minor axis.

Inner Inner angle of the elliptic arc; specified relative to the origin angle.
angle

Angle Switch to the arc creation mode by specified angles.

256
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify axis endpoint of elliptical Specify point 1.

arc or [Center]:

Specify other axis endpoint of Specify length of ellipse axis (point

elliptical arc: 2).

Specify distance to other axis or Specify length of another axis (point

[Rotation]: 3).

Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify start angle (point 4).

Specify end angle or [Parameter/Inner Specify end angle (point 5).

angle]:

Creation of ellipses and elliptic arcs with one command

Command line: ELLIPSE
Universal command allows you to create ellipses by center, minor and major axes, and create
elliptic arcs.
Command options:

Arc Switches to the mode of elliptic arc creation.

Center Center of ellipse.

Rotation Creation of ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis.

Command options of the creation of elliptic arc mode:

Center Center of elliptic arc.

Rotation Relation between ellipse axes by rotation around the first axis.

Parameter Select Parameter when specifying the start and end points of the
elliptic arc to create an elliptic arc according to the parameter vector:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u), where
с – ellipse center;
а – major axis;
b – minor axis.

Inner angle Inner angle of the elliptic arc; specified relative to the origin angle.

Angle Switch to the arc creation mode by specified angles.

257
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add selected
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Toolbar: Draw – Add Selected

Command line: ADDSELECTED

The command creates a new object using type and properties of a selected object.
A new object of the type and properties (color, layer, line type and etc.) of selected object is
created, but the command prompt to specify its geometric properties (length, radius, center
point of circle and etc.) is shown.
To create an object using a selected object:
1. Select an object.
2. Start the Add selected command.
3. Create an object according to the command prompts.
Prompts in the command line depend on selected object type.

258
nanoCAD Mechanica

EDITING OBJECTS
To edit objects and their parameters you have to select them on the drawing. It is possible to
edit them using grips and their properties in the Properties panel.
By double clicking on objects, the editing command starts or the Properties panel appears.
According to the object’s type, the editing command opens an editing dialog box (dimensions,
notes) or offers to edit parameters in the command line (polylines, spline).

Selection of objects
To edit objects you have to select them.
There are different ways to select objects in nanoCAD.
One of the main ways to select objects is by using the cursor. Objects can be selected separately
or in groups:

Selection of separate objects is performed with the pickbox.

Selection of a group of objects is performed using a rectangular selection area.
The order in which the corners of the area are specified is important when you select a group:

If the corners of the area are specified from left to right (selection with window), only
objects that are entirely inside the window are selected.

If the corners of the area are specified from right to left (selection with crossing
window), objects are selected that are entirely inside the window and also those that
are crossed by the window.
For better visual perception a window is displayed with a solid line and the area inside it is
highlighted in light blue; a crossing window is displayed with a dotted line and the area inside it
is highlighted in light green.

Selection with Selection with

window Result crossing window Result

Set selection patameters in Select section of Options dialog:

259
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Color frame
Color fence Frame and fense displaying options.

Transparency

Selection preview method Set the method of frame/fence creation.

Click and click Set the frame by two clicks: first click starts selection,
second click completes it.
Press and drag Set the frame by mouse drag: press to specify the first
point, then drag cursor and release the mouse button.
Both – Automatic detection Automatic detection of selected method.

Keep pre-selection after modification

Keep objects in selection after modify commands: Move, Rotate, Scale.
Preview of selected objects
To preview objects of the selection or selection set, there is a mode of dynamic highlighting.
Placed under cursor or pixbox objects or objects from set of selection objects are highlighted the
same color, which they have.

Control of preview of selected objects mode implemented by ToggleSelectionPreview

button in the status bar:

In command mode Objects are highlighted only when any command is run
(when command asks to select objects)
In non-command mode Objects are highlighted in non-command selection mode
(are not highlited when a command is run).
In all modes Dynamic highlighting is active in all modes.
Never Preview of selection is off.

Selection filter Opens Selection Preview Filter dialog. Check the box to
exclude objects from selection preview.

260
nanoCAD Mechanica

Maximum possible number of dynamically highlighted objects in preview is specified in Select >
Selection preview > Selection preview max objects count of the Options dialog (Tools
menu – Options). The 0 specified value turns off the dynamic highlighting mode.
It is important which selection mode is selected in the Properties panel when you select
objects:

If the multiple selection mode is switched on (the button ), all newly selected objects
are added to the set. Objects selected in this mode are excluded from the set if you
press SHIFT.

If single selection mode is switched on (the button ), only newly selected objects are
added to the set. New objects selected in this mode are added to the set if you press
SHIFT and already selected are excluded from the set.

Selection of objects using the command line

For many editing commands, you can launch additional options for object selection in the
command line.
1. Start the Select editing command from the command line
or

2. Start any editing command.

3. To the command prompt about object selection Select objects or [?]: enter?
(question mark) or select from the context menu.
4. The following prompt is displayed in the command line: Select an option or
[Window/Last/Crossing/Box/All/Fence/Wpolygon/Cpolygon/Group/Add/Remove/AUt
o]:
5. Select the required option.
Command options:

261
nanoCAD Mechanica

Window Selection of objects that are entirely inside the rectangular area, specified by two
points from left to right.

Last Selection of the last created object.

Objects cannot be on a frozen layer.

Crossing Selection of objects, crossed by the rectangular area or inside the rectangular
area, specified by two points from right to left.

Box Selection option, with choice of Window or Crossing options.

If points in the rectangular area are specified from right to left, the selection of
objects is equal to the Crossing option.
If points in the rectangular area are specified from left to right, the selection of
objects is equal to the Window option.

All All objects are selected, excluding objects belonging to locked or frozen layers.

Fence Selection of objects crossed by the selection line.

WPolygon Selection of objects which are entirely inside the polygonal area.
A polygon can have any shape, but there must not be any self-intersections.
The segment of a polygon created last is the closing segment.

CPolygon Selection of objects which are entirely inside the polygonal area or are crossed by
this area.
A polygon can have any shape, but there must not be any self-intersections.
The segment of a polygon created last is the closing segment.

Group Selection of objects in the specified group.

Add Adds objects to the current set using any selection method. Automatic mode and
adding mode are used by default (Auto and Add modes).

Remove Deletes objects in the current set using any selection method.
You can exclude objects by pressing the SHIFT button in the adding mode (Add
mode) or automatic mode (Auto mode).

AUto Selection of objects with pickbox.

When an empty area is selected by the pickbox, the Box option is switched on and
the first point of the window or crossing window is specified.
Automatic mode and adding mode are used by default (Auto and Add modes).

Additional options of object selection are on a Selection toolbar:

262
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selection of all objects

Menu: Edit – Select all

Hotkeys: CTRL+A

Command line: SELECTALL

The command allows the selection of all objects in the current drawing, except objects on frozen
layers.
The command is available from the context menu.
To cancel the selection, press ESC.

Remove from Selection

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Edit - Remove from Selection

Command line: SELREMOVE

Command removes objects of the specified type from selection set.
1. If you have a set of selected objects, start Remove from Selection command.
2. Specify the object to remove.
All objects of this type will be removed from selection.

Leave in Selection
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Edit - Leave in Selection

Command line: SELLEAVE

Command leaves objects of specified type in a selection set.
1. If you have a set of selected objects, start Leave in Selection command.
2. Specify the object to leave.
Only objects of this type will be left in selection.

Invert Selection
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Edit - Invert Selection

Command line: SELINVERT

Command cancels the current selection and selects all other objects.

263
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selection of superimposed objects

Selection of objects which are very close to each other is not difficult in nanoCAD.
If several objects are in the cursor’s pickbox:

the dialog box automatically opens showing the list:

Parameters:

All Selection of all the objects in the dialog box list.

Nothing No objects in the dialog box list are selected.

Pressing ESC also cancels the selection and closes the dialog box.

Place the cursor over any object in the list highlights it on the screen. Click on any object in the
dialog box to select it. The dialog box closes after an object is selected.
Examples of different object selection:

264
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selection of circle Selection of arc Selection of diameter

size

The Show selection dialog command from the View menu switches on/off display of the
Selection dialog box.

Selection of objects using the Properties bar

Menu: Modify – Properties...

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+1

Command line: INSP, INSPECTOR, PROPERTIES

There are buttons of object selection modes and commands right below the Properties bar
caption:

Mode and commands to select objects

Modes of object selection

Mode of multiple object selection; all selected objects are added to the
Multiple
selection previous selection set.
ESC cancels the selection.
Objects selected in this mode are excluded from the set if you press
SHIFT.

Mode of single object selection; all newly selected objects are added to the
Single selection set.
selection
Previously selected objects are removed from the set.
New objects selected in this mode are added to the set if you press SHIFT

265
nanoCAD Mechanica

and already selected are excluded from the set.

Commands of object selection

Select Selection of objects using the cursor.

Select Only objects, whose properties correspond to the specified template object
similar are selected. In the Property Settings dialog box you can specify the
objects properties for object selection. The dialog box opens if you select Settings
in the command prompt:
Select patterns or [Settings/Region]:

If no property is selected, objects of the same type as the template object

will be selected.
If one property is selected (for example Color), objects of the same type
and color as the template object will be selected.
If several properties are selected (for example, Color, Layer and
Lineweight) objects are selected:

objects of the same type and color as the template object,

objects of the same type and layer as the template object,

objects of the same type and lineweight as the template
object,
The command line Region option selects similar objects in a specified
rectangular area on the screen.

Quick select Set filter conditions and ways to create a selection set based on these
conditions.

Remove
from
selection Excludes the specified objects from the selection set.

Leave in
selection Leaves only the specified objects in the selection set.

Select All Selection of all objects in the drawing.

Objects

Unselect All Cancels selection.

266
nanoCAD Mechanica

To exclude objects from a selection set

To exclude objects from a selection set:
1. Choose the Select all in the context menu or from the Edit menu:

All objects in the drawing will be selected.

2. Choose the object type that you want to exclude from the set in the drop down list in
the Object type of the Properties bar:

3. Click the Remove from selection. All objects of the specified type will be deleted
from the selection set.
4. Select another type of object in the drop-down list.

5. Click the Remove from selection.

6. Selection and removal of objects can be repeated until only the required objects remain.

To leave objects in a selection set

To leave only specified objects in a selection set:
1. Choose Select all in the context menu or from the Edit menu. All the objects in the
drawing will be selected.
2. Choose the object type which you want to exclude from the set in the drop down list in
the Object type of the Properties bar.

3. Click the Leave in selection. All objects, except the specified type, will be deleted
from the selection set.

267
nanoCAD Mechanica

Quick selection of objects

Using the Quick select command you can select objects using specified conditions.

Menu: Edit – Quick Select…

Command line: QS
The Quick Select command can be launched from the context menu:

In the Quick Selection dialog box you can adjust the search conditions:

Parameters:

Search There are selection areas in the the status bar:

Available options:

In whole document – search in the whole document.

In current space – search in the current space.

In bounding box – search in the selected rectangular area in the

drawing.

In current selection – search among selected objects in the

drawing.
If In bounding box or In current selection is selected, the Quick
Selection dialog box temporarily closes to allow the rectangular area to
be specified on the screen or for objects to be selected . The Set
selection button becomes available after the area is specified or the
objects are selected; using this button you can select a new rectangular
area or change the current set of objects.

The following methods are available:

268
nanoCAD Mechanica

Result set to new selection – Objects corresponding to the

specified search conditions are selected in the drawing, other objects are
deselected.

Result add to selection – Found objects will be added to the

selected objects on the drawing.

Result subtract from selection – If objects were selected, they

become deselected.

Filter
templates: Load preset

Remove preset
Using a set of tools you can select objects using set and saved conditions.

QS parameters
Switches on/off selection at frozen and invisible layers.

To add a condition for object search:

1. Click in the <Select object type> field and choose the required object type from the
list:

To reject the selection, click on None.

2. There is a list of parameters of all objects belonging to this type and to the specified
selection area:

269
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Select the value of the required search parameter in the Value column:

270
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select a logic search condition in the ExprType column:

271
nanoCAD Mechanica

Available logic conditions for search:

= equals

!= does not equal

< less

> more

>= not less

<= not more

Like Search of substring.

Searches for objects whose parameter value contains the substring
specified in the ExprType column.

Unlike Search of substring.

Searches for objects whose parameter value does not contain the substring
specified in the ExprType column.

NOTE: For every object type you can set numerous search conditions using one or several parameters.

5. To add another type of object, click on the <Select object type>bottom field:

272
nanoCAD Mechanica

The number of objects satisfying the search conditions is displayed in the bottom part of the
dialog box: Object found: 9.

“Quick select” functional bar

Quick select functional bar is implemented for more convenient work.

Menu: View – Toolbars > Functional > Quick select

Quick select bar functions like Quick selection dialog box.

273
nanoCAD Mechanica

Ways to edit objects

You can edit objects (change their properties) in different ways:
Editing with the Styles toolbar; when a text or dimension style for the selected objects
is changed.
Using the Main toolbar; when a layer, color, type or lineweight for previously selected
objects are changed.

Using the Properties bar (for more information see the “Properties bar” section).

Editing of text objects (search and replace) using the Search and Replace (for more
information see the “Find and replace text” section).

Using the Copy object properties command.

Using the Windows clipboard.

Editing with grips; the selected objects are highlighted (object lines become dotted)
and marked with special markers, small blue rectangles, placed at the characteristic
points of the objects. The markers of grips can be triangles, circles, rhombs etc. The
color of markers can be light blue or green.
Editing using editing commands; the editing command starts (for example, Copy from
the Edit menu) and objects are selected. For many commands you can first select
objects and then start the editing command.

Editing by double clicking on an object and an editing command relevant to the object’s
type starts. It can be the Properties bar, if it was closed. The editing command can
open a dialog box to edit the object’s properties (dimensions, notes, tables etc.) or offer
to edit in the command line (for example, polylines and splines).

Copy of objects properties

Menu: Modify – Copy object properties

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: MATCHPROP, COPYOBJECTPROPS

This command is used to copy a part of the selected object properties or all of them and assign
them to one or several objects.
You can copy color, layer, linetype, lineweight and other properties.
Command options:

? Opens additional options to select objects.

Settings Opens the Property Settings dialog.

Command prompts:

Select source objects or [?]: Select a source object.

Select destination object(s) or Select object(s) to assign the copied properties

[?/Settings]: to or select the Settings.

Select destination object(s) or Select object(s) or pres ENTER to finish the

[?/Settings]: command.

274
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Settings option opens the Property Settings dialog box where you can specify the copied
properties from the source object:

Parameters:
Basic properties

Color Switches on/off the color copying mode.

Layer Switches on/off the layer copying mode.

Linetype Switches on/off the linetype copying mode.

Linetype Switches on/off the linetype scale copying mode.

Scale

Lineweight Switches on/off the lineweight copying mode.

Thickness Switches on/off the thickness copying mode.

Special properties

Dimension Switches on/off the dimension style copying mode.

Polyline Switches on/off the width and type of polyline copying mode.

Material Switches on/off the material copying mode.

Text Switches on/off the text style copying mode.

Viewport Switches on/off the viewport properties copying mode.

275
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shadow Switches on/off the shadow display copying mode.

display

Hatch Switches on/off the hatch properties copying mode.

Table Switches on/off the table style copying mode.

Multileader Switches on/off the leader note style copying mode.

Copying and insertion of objects using clipboard

The clipboard can be used to copy a drawing or part of it from one document to another. Data
copied to the clipboard can be inserted into other applications, for example into open documents
in MS Office.
nanoCAD commands used the clipboard are in the Edit menu.

Cut
Menu: Edit – Cut

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+X

Command line: CUT, CUTCLIP

This command deletes the selected objects from the document and places them on the clipboard.
Command option:

? Starts additional options for objects selection.

Command prompt:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects, press ENTER to finish selection.

Copy
Menu: Edit – Copy

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+C

Command line: COPYCLIP

This command copies the selected objects and places a copy of them on the clipboard.
Command option:

? Starts additional options for objects selection.

276
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompt:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects, press ENTER to finish selection.

Copy With Base Point

Menu: Edit – Copy With Base Point

Hotkeys: CTRL+SHIFT+C

Command line: COPYBASE

This command copies the selected objects and places a copy of them on the clipboard. When
copying, a base point is specified and it is used to insert a copy of the objects into the document.
Command option:

? Starts additional options for objects selection.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects, press ENTER to finish selection.

Specify base point: Specify a point.

Paste
Menu: Edit – Paste

Toolbar: Main –

Hotkeys: CTRL+V

Command line: PASTE, PASTECLIP

This command inserts the contents of the clipboard into the document.
Command options:

Mode Selection of insertion mode.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter paste mode [Single/Multiple]<Single>:
Options:
Single - Mode of single insertion.
Multiple - Mode of multiple insertions.

Command prompts:

Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Select Mode option. Enter

paste mode [Single/Multiple]<Single>: Select Multiple option.
Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Specify an insertion point.
Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Specify an insertion point.
Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Press ESC to finish the
command.

277
nanoCAD Mechanica

Paste as block
Menu: Edit – Paste As > As Block

Hotkeys: CTRL+SHIFT+V

Command line: PASTEBLOCK

This command inserts the contents of the clipboard as a block into the document.
Command options:

Mode Selection of block insertion mode.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter paste mode [Single/Multiple]<Single>:
Options:
Single - Mode of single insertion.
Multiple - Mode of multiple insertions.
Name Specifies a block’s name for insertion.

Command prompts:

Specify insertion point or [Mode/Name]: Select Mode option.

Enter paste mode [Single/Multiple]<Single>: Select Multiple option.
Specify insertion point or [Mode/Name]: Select Name option.
Enter block name <Clipboard20212>: Enter a block’s name or press
ENTER.
Specify insertion point or [Mode/Name]: Specify an insertion point.
Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Specify an insertion point.
Specify insertion point or [Mode]: Press ESC to finish the
command.

Paste as raster
Menu: Edit – Paste As > As Raster

Command line: PASTEASRASTER

Command inserts raster image from clipboard to current document. Can be usefull for inserting
scanned drawings as backgrounds or for future editing using commands from Raster menu.
Raster image will be inserted as external reference with default name Clipboard_N, where N –
order nubmer of inserted raster image. Link will have Not Found status. On the next document
save operation Save Image File dialog will be displayed. In this dialog you can specify path,
raster image file name and format. If more than one raster images were inserted - Save Image
File dialog will be displayed for each image.
After saving status will be changed to Loaded, and in External References dialog (menu
Insert – External references) raster image parameters will be displayed.
From this dialog it’s possible to save the raster image without saving the document. Save button
will open the same Save Image File dialog.
Note: Options button in Save Image File dialog allows to specify more options for some raster
formats (for deatiled information see ”Image settings” section).

278
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command options:

Specify insertion point: Specify point of raster image

insertion.

Paste to Original Coordinates

Menu: Edit – Paste to original coordinates

Command line: PASTEORIGIN

This command inserts objects from the clipboard into the document with the same coordinates
that they had in the initial document.

Editing objects using ordinary grips

Editing commands can be applied to objects previously selected and marked with grips. Available
parameters can be changed on the Properties panel. Sometimes, editing with grips without
using commands from the Edit menu is the quickest and most effective method to change the
shape and location of objects because actions with grips are performed with the cursor, so you
do not need to use menus and toolbars.
There are two ways to edit objects using grips in nanoCAD:

Editing objects using ordinary grips.

Editing objects using multifunctional grips (for more information see the “Editing
objects using multifunctional grips” section).
You can use ordinary grips to move, copy, stretch or scale objects.
The number and location of grips depends on the selected object’s type; for example, a line
segment has 3 grips. Two of them located at the endpoints and one in the middle, 5 grips are
displayed for circle, four of them are located in the quadrants and one in the center etc.:

Line Polyline Polygon Rectangle Arc Circle

Spline Ellipse Block Note Text Dimension

ATTENTION! Grips are not displayed for objects on locked layers.

By default the “Stretch” (GRIP_STRETCH) mode is set to edit objects with grips.

To switch to the editing mode with ordinary grips, click on any grip after an object is selected.
The selected grip becomes active and changes its color to red. This grip is used to perform
editing operations and is called the base. According to grip selected as the base, the object can
be stretched or moved, by moving the cursor (for example, if a middle grip of object is selected,
the object is moved, if any of end grips of object is selected, the object is stretched). The

279
nanoCAD Mechanica

selected base grip is snapped to the cursor’s crosshair and moved with it until you click to specify
a new grip position.
Any grip in the drawing can be specified as the base if you select the Base option in the
command line after the base point is selected:
Specify stretch point or [Base/Copy/Undo/eXit]:
Options available in the command line for editing with grips:

Base Specify a point as the base.

Copy Switch to copying mode.

Undo Cancels the last operation.

eXit Exits from the editing with grips mode. The display mode of the selected objects
is not cancelled.

You can make several grips of object active if the SHIFT button is pressed during grips
selection. Shape of object between active (selected) grips does not change. Editing mode is
switched on after one of these grips is selected as the base (select it without SHIFT button).
When several objects are selected, shape and position of objects with no active grips do not
change.
To stretch several objects using grips:
1. Select objects.
2. With the SHIFT button pressed select the required grips on the objects (highlighted
with red).
3. Release the SHIFT button.
4. Select a base grip.
5. Specify a new position of base point.
Besides the ”Stretch” mode, there are additional modes to work with grips: “Movement”
(GRIP_MOVE), “Rotation” (GRIP_ROTATE), “Scale” (GRIP_SCALE) and “Mirror”
(GRIP_MIRROR). You have to press the ENTER button or the spacebar for round robin of
additional modes.
In “Rotation” and “Scale” modes there is a Reference option in the command line prompt:
Specify scale factor or [Base point/Copy/Undo/Reference/eXit]:
Specify rotation angle or [Base point/Copy/Undo/Reference/eXit]:
The option allows specifying a reference angle when rotating or referencing segment when
scaling.
To edit several objects using grips:
1. Select objects.
2. Select a base grip.
3. You have to press the ENTER button or the spacebar for round robin of additional
modes (movement, rotation, scale, mirror, stretching).
4. Move the cursor to dynamically display changes of the object.
5. Click to finish changes.
You can change grips in the Grips section of the Options dialog (Tools menu– Options):

280
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Grip max objects count limits a number of objects with displayed grips. It is required to
increase productivity, because it takes a lot of time to select objects in drawings with a great
number of objects with a great number of grips (hatches, polylines). Default value is 100 (a
value is stored in a system variable - GRIPOBJLIMIT).

Editing objects using multifunctional grips

Grips that can change editing mode by round robin in rotation are called multifunctional.
Rotation of editing modes is carried out for the active (selected) grip using the CTRL button.
Objects which have multifunctional grips:
line segment,

arc,

spline,

polyline,

hatch,
viewport.
To edit objects with multifunctional grips:
1. Select an object.
2. Activate the multifunctional grip.
3. Press CTRL to select the editing variant.
4. Move the cursor for dynamic display of an object’s properties.
5. Click to confirm the change.

Segment editing
A line segment has multifunctional grips at the endpoint. Two editing modes are available:

Normal mode: the length of the segment changes when you move the grip. In general,
not only the segment length is changed, but also its orientation.

Change of length: only the length of the segment changes when you move the grip. A
new position for the endpoint is provided by the projection of the specified point along
the segment’s imaginary extension. Segment orientation is not changed.

281
nanoCAD Mechanica

Normal mode Change of length

Arc editing
Multifunctional grips are at the endpoints and in the middle of the arc. Three editing modes are
available:

Normal mode: when you hold and move a grip on the end or middle point, the length
and radius are changed:

Change of arc length: when you hold and move a grip on the end point, only the
length is changed:

Change of arc radius and length, when you hold and move the grip on the middle
point, an arc is created similar to the source arc:

Spline editing
Spline has two editing modes with grips:

Editing of characteristic points (rectangular grips): permits to change the shape of a

small part of the spline

Editing of control vertexes (round grips): permits to change the general shape of a
spine.
To switch between modes, click on a round grip located near the spline and having a bigger
diameter than the grips of the control vertexes.

282
nanoCAD Mechanica

Grips of characteristic points Grips of control vertexes

Polyline editing
Polyline has multifunctional grips at the end of the segments and in the middle of the segments.
Rotational editing modes, accessed with the CTRL button, depend on the location of the grips
(end point or middle point) and segment type (linear or arc).
For improved functionality, additional symbols are displayed beside the polyline shape and near
the cursor. Which symbols are shown depends on the editing mode selected:

Adds a vertex

Deletes a vertex.

Transforms a linear segment to an arc.

Transforms an arc segment to linear.

Absence of a symbol means that the normal editing mode is current - stretching by moving a
segment or stretching a vertex (depends on selected grip).

283
nanoCAD Mechanica

Variants of polyline editing with grips in vertexes

Add vertex Delete vertex Stretch with vertex

Variants of polyline editing with grips in the middle of a linear segment:

Add vertex Transform to arc segment Stretch

Variants of polyline editing with grips in the middle of an arc segment:

Add vertex Transform to linear segment Stretch

A multifunctional mode for editing polylines can be applied to several grips located in vertexes.
Two editing variants are available: normal stretching of the polyline and deleting of selected
vertexes. Instead of deleted vertexes, a linear segment is drawn, even if arc segments are
between the deleted vertexes.

Stretch vertexes Delet vertexes

To edit several vertexes of a polyline using multifunctional grips:

1. Press SHIFT.
2. Select the required grips with SHIFT pressed.
3. When you finish selecting grips, release SHIFT.
4. Select a base grip.

284
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Select an editing mode with CTRL.

6. Move the cursor for dynamic display of the polyline shape.
7. Click to fix changes.

Editing viewports of paper space

You can edit any viewports of paper space using multifunctional grips where closed polylines and
splines are used as boundaries. The process of editing the boundaries of the viewport is the same
as editing of a spline or polyline with multifunctional grips.
As viewports consist of two objects (viewport and display border), to edit them in the Selection
dialog box select a polyline or spline, not a viewport:

If display of the Selection dialog box is switched off, select a polyline or spline in the
Properties panel in the Object type field:

Select a viewport with a window or crossing window, if you select with the pickbox in the Object
type field in the Properties panel, Viewport is displayed by default.

Editing hatch and fill

In nanoCAD, using multifunctional grips you can edit the shape of:

associative hatches, which use closed polylines and splines as linked contours;
non-associative hatches.
Changing the shape of an associative hatch using multifunctional grips and a linked contour
does not differ from the editing of a polyline or spline using multifunctional grips.
If you select non-associative hatch, the same multifunctional grips are displayed as in a
polyline, except the round grips are used to move the hatch:

285
nanoCAD Mechanica

The process of editing a non-associative hatch shape is the same as editing of a polyline with
multifunctional grips.

286
nanoCAD Mechanica

Variants of non-associative hatch shape editing with grips in a boundary vertex:

Add boundary vertex Delet boundary vertex Stretch boundary by top

Variants of non-associative hatch shape editing with a grip in the middle of a boundary linear
segment:

Add boundary vertex Transform linear segment of Stretch

boundary into arc segment

Variants of non-associative hatch shape editing with a grip in the middle of a boundary arc
segment:

Add boundary vertex Transform arc segment of Stretch

boundary into linear segment

For non-associative hatch, a multifunctional editing mode can be applied to several grips located
in the boundary vertexes. Two variants of editing are available: normal stretching of boundary
and deleting of selected vertexes. Instead of deleted vertexes a linear segment is drawn, even if
arc segments were between deleted vertexes.

287
nanoCAD Mechanica

Stretch boundary vertexes Delet boundary vertexes

To edit several vertexes of non-associative hatch area using multifunctional grips:

1. Press SHIFT.
2. Select the required grips with SHIFT pressed.
3. When you have selected the grips, release SHIFT.
4. Select a base grip.
5. Select an editing mode with CTRL.
6. Move the cursor for dynamic display of the hatch shape.
7. Click to fix changes.

Commands to edit geometric objects

Lengthen objects
Menu: Modify – Lengthen objects

Command line: LEN, LENGTHEN

Using the Lengthen command you can change the central angle of arcs and the length of lines,
arcs and open polylines. The length or angle of objects is changed on the side closest to the
specified point. The length or angle of an object can be changed several times whilst one
command is being performed. If a value is positive, the arc is lengthened, if a value is negative –
the arc is shortened.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

DElta The value of the object’s length is changed.

The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter delta length or [Angle]:
Option:
Angle-The value of the object’s center angle is changed.

Percent The object’s length as a percentage of the source length.

Total The total length or center angle.

288
nanoCAD Mechanica

The option opens the prompt in the command line:

Enter total length or [Angle]:
Option:
Angle-The value of the object’s center angle is changed.

DYnamic Dynamic change of the selected object’s length by replacing the endpoint
closest to the selection point with the fixed position of another endpoint.

Selection of object Specifying a new length Result

Command prompts:

Select objects Select the DYnamic.

or[?/DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]:
Select an object to change or [?]: Specify an object.

Specify new endpoint: Specify a new length of the object.

Select an object to change or [?]: Specify an object or press ESC to
finish the command.

Trim vectors
Menu: Modify – Trim vectors

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: TR, TRIM, VCTRIMBYEDGECMD

The Trim vectors command allows the trimming of vector objects by their boundaries (or
boundary edges), specified for one or several objects. Objects not intersecting with boundary
edges can be cut at the point of their imaginary intersection. One object can be a boundary edge
and a cut object.
If you press ENTER in the command prompt Select objects or [?]:,, all existing objects are
transformed into boundary edges. When you select object to be cut, nearest objects are selected
as edges.
You can trim objects without closing the command. Press SHIFT when you are selecting objects.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Fence Selection of objects by a crossing line which can consist of several

segments.

289
nanoCAD Mechanica

Crossing Selection of objects with a crossing frame.

Project Mode for cutting objects by intersection of their projections with the
boundary in 3D space.
The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View/] <None>:
Options:
None Only objects that are crossed by the specified boundary in 3D
space are selected.
Ucs Defines the projections of objects in the XY plane of the current
UCS and cuts objects which are not intersected by the boundary in 3D
space.
View Defines the projections of objects in the direction of the specified
view and cuts objects which are not intersected by the edge.

Edge Specifies the cutting mode of objects by imaginary extension of the

edge.
The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter an implied edge extension mode [No extend/ Extend]
<No extend>:
Options:
No extend Switches off the cutting of objects by imaginary extension
of the edge.
Extend Switches on the cutting of objects by imaginary extension of
the edge.

eRase Deletes the selected objects.

Back Cancels the last change executed during performance of the command.

Selection of edge Selection of object Selection of objects Result

with pickbox with crossing frame

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select an object which will be used

as the cutting object.

290
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select object or [?]: Select the next object or press

ENTER to select the objects to be
cut.

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Select an object.

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Select the next object or press
ENTER to finish the command.

Smart trim
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Modify – Smart trim

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: SMARTTRIM

The Smart trim command differs from the Trim vectors in automatically selecting all vector
objects in the document as potential cutting edges. Selected objects are cut to the nearest
cutting edges.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Fence Selection of objects by a crossing line which can consist of several

segments.

Crossing Selection of objects with a crossing frame.

Project Mode of cutting objects by intersection of their projections with the

boundary in 3D space.
The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View/] <None>:
Options:
None Only objects that are crossed by the specified boundary in 3D
space are selected .
Ucs Defines the projections of objects in the XY plane of the current
UCS and cuts objects which are not intersected by the boundary in
3D space.
View Defines the projections of objects in the direction of the
specified view and cuts objects which are not intersected by the
edge.

Edge Specifies the cutting mode of objects by imaginary extension of the

edge.

291
nanoCAD Mechanica

The option opens the prompt in the command line:

Enter an implied edge extension mode [No extend/
Extend] <No extend>:
Options:
No extend Switches off the cutting of objects by imaginary
extension of the edge.
Extend Switches on the cutting of objects by imaginary extension
of the edge.

eRase Deletes the selected objects.

Back Cancels the last change executed during performance of the

command.

Command prompts:

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Select objects to be cut.

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Select eRase.

Select objects to erase or [?]: Select objects and press ENTER to

delete them.

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Select Back to cancel deleting.

Select object to trim or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/eRase/Back]: Press ENTER to finish the
command.

Extend vectors
Menu: Modify – Extend vectors

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: EX, EXTEND, VCEXPANDBYEDGECMD

The Extend command extends open vector objects to their real or imaginary crossing with other
objects, called boundaries or boundary edges. Extended objects are selected by specifying an
extended part.
When several boundaries are specified, the object is extended to the nearest one. The object can
be selected again to extend it to the next boundary edge.
If you press ENTER in the command prompt Select objects or [?]:, all existing objects are
transformed into boundary edges. When you select object to be lengthen, nearest objects are
selected as boundary edges.
You can cut objects without closing the command. Press SHIFT. when you are selecting objects.
Command options:

292
nanoCAD Mechanica

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Fence Selection of objects by a crossing line which can consist of several

segments.

Crossing Selection of objects with a crossing frame.

Project Mode of extending objects by intersection of their projections with the

boundary in 3D space.
The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View/] <None>:
Options:
None Only objects that are crossed by the specified boundary in 3D
space are selected
Ucs Defines the projections of objects in the XY plane of the current
UCS and cuts objects which are not intersected by the boundary in 3D
space.
View Defines the projections of objects in the direction of the
specified view and cuts objects which are not intersected by the edge.

Edge Specifies the extending mode of objects by imaginary extension of

the edge.
The option opens the prompt in the command line:
Enter an implied edge extension mode [No extend/Extend]
<No extend>:
Options:
No extend Switches off the cutting of objects by imaginary extension
of the edge.
Extend Switches on the cutting of objects by imaginary extension of
the edge.

Delete Deletes selected objects.

Back Cancels the last change executed during performance of the

command.

Selection of edge Selection of object Selection of objects Result

with pickbox with crossing frame

Command prompts:

293
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select objects or [?]: Select the object that is to be

used as the edge.

Select objects or [?]: Select next object or press

ENTER to start selecting objects
to extend.

Select object to extend or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/Delete/Back]: Select an object.

Select object to extend or

[?/Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/Delete/Back]: Select Crossing and select other
objects. Press ENTER to finish the
command.

Break vectors
Menu: Modify – Break vectors

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: BREAK, VCBREAKCMD

The Break vectors command breaks lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines and other
vector objects into two parts. A break can be performed by deletion of a part of it (breaking of
the object at two points) or without deletion (breaking of the object at one point). Some closed
objects for example, circle, ellipse, cannot be broken in one point.
To break an object at one point, at the command prompt to enter the second point, enter @0,0:
Specify second break point or [First point]: @0,0
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

First Switches to the mode of first point selection.

point

Break of object in two points

The part of the object between the specified points will be deleted. By default, the selection point
of the object is the first point of the break. To specify another point as the first point, select the
First point option.

Command prompts:

294
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select objects or [?]: Select an object.

Specify second break point or [First Select First point.

point]:

Specify first break point: Specify point 1.

Specify second break point: Specify point 2.

Break of object in one point

Specify the same point as the first and the second points of the break.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select an object.

Specify second break point or [First Select First point.

point]:

Specify first break point: Specify point 1.

Specify second break point: Specify again point 1.

Break vectors at point

Menu: Modify – Break vectors at point

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: VCBREAKATPOINTCMD

The Break vectors at point command breaks lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines and
other vector objects into two parts at one point (without deleting part of the object). Some
closed objects for example, circle, ellipse cannot be broken in one point.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select object.

Specify break point: Specify a point.

295
nanoCAD Mechanica

Break All Vectors at Point Break All Vectors at Point

Menu: Modify – Break All Vectors at Point

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: VCBREAKALLATPOINTCMD

The Break All Verctors at Point command breaks intersection objects (lines, arcs, polylines,
splines and other vector objects) in the intersection point. Some closed objects (ellipse, circle,
etc.) can’t be break at point.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select interseiction object.

Specify break point: Specify an intersection point (s).

Reverse
Menu: Modify – Reverse

Command line: REVERSE, FLIP

This command is used to change the order of the vertexes of segments, polylines and splines.
For example, a segment with 0,0 coordinates for the start point and 100,100 for the end point
will have 100,100 coordinates for the start point and 0,0 for the end point after the direction is
changed.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select object to Select an object.

flip or [?]

Select object to Press ENTER to finish the command.

flip or [?]

Select object to Press ENTER to close the command.

flip or [?]

Join objects
Menu: Modify – Join objects

296
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: JOIN

The Join objects command joins separate segments of objects into one object. The command
can be applied to segments, arcs and open polylines. The command allows to create circles from
arcs (Close option).
Arcs are joined in the counterclockwise direction from the source arc.
Joined objects should be in one plane.
Additional restrictions for joined objects types:

Line Must lie on one infinite line.

segments
There can be gaps between segments.

Polylines Lines, polylines and arcs can be joined to a polyline.

Objects must lie in one plane. Parallel to the XY plane of the UCS.
There must be gaps between objects.

Arcs Objects must lie in one imaginary circle.

There can be gaps between arcs.

Elliptic Objects must lie in one imaginary ellipse.

arcs
There can be gaps between arcs.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Close Transforms an arc to a circle.

it

Selection of first arc Selection of second arc Result

Command prompts:

Select source object or [?]: Specify the first arc.

Select arcs to join to source or [?/Close it]: Specify the second arc.

Select arcs to join to source or [?/Close it]: Press ENTER to finish the
command.

Editing a polyline
Menu: Modify – Object> Polyline

297
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Modify object –

Command line: PE, PEDIT

Double clicking on a polyline starts the editing mode.
Using the Polyline command you can edit polylines and also convert elementary objects,
consisting of arcs and lines, into polylines.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Multiple Selection of several objects mode.

Close Closes (draws a segment from start to end vertex) a polyline.

Open Opens a polyline (deletes a segment from start to end vertex).

Edit Switches to the editing of vertexes mode (edited vertex is marked with
vertex «Х» label).
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter a vertex editing option
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/
Tangent/Width/Exit/] <N>
Next - Goes to the next vertex.
Previous- Goes to the previous vertex.
Break- Breaks a polyline at the selected vertex.
Insert- Adds a vertex in the specified place.
Move- Changes the position of the selected vertex.
Regen- Regenerates a polyline.
Straighten- Changes a line segment to an arc segment.
Tangent- Specifies the direction of the tangent in the selected vertex for
further polyline fitting.
Width- Specifies the first and second width of the segment, going after
the selected vertex.
Exit- Closes the editing of vertexes mode.

Join Joins segments, arcs and polylines into one object – polyline.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Select polyline or [?/End]:
Option:
End- Closes selection of objects.

Width Specifies a new width for all polylines.

Fit Fits the polyline with arcs between polyline vertexes.

298
nanoCAD Mechanica

Spline Transforms a polyline into a spline which is an approximation of the

source polyline between the start and end vertexes and is very similar to
the source polyline.

Decurve Returns a polyline to its original condition, cancels the results of the Fit
or Spline commands.

Ltype gen Specifies a mode of the specified line type generation.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter polyline linetype generator option [ON/OFF/] <Off>:
If Off option is selected, generation of line type starts from dash and
end dash in very vertex.

Undo Cancels the last action of polyline editing.

Command prompts:

Select polyline or [?/Multiple]: Select Multiple.

Select polyline or [?/Multiple]: Select objects.

Do you want to turn it into one? Press ENTER or select No.
[Yes/No] <Y>:
Enter an option [Close/Edit
vertex/Join/Width/Fit/
Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Undo]: Select the required option. Press
ENTER to finish the command.

Editing a spline
Menu: Modify – Object > Spline

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Command line: SPE, SPLINEDIT

Double clicking on a spline starts the editing mode.
This command allows changing of a spline’s shape by adding, deleting or replacing characteristic
points, changing the direction of tangents at the start and end points of the spline. Using this
command you can close or open a spline, change a tolerance value. A tolerance defines the
maximum distance from the real spline to any of its characteristic points. The smaller the value a
tolerance has, the closer the spline is to the characteristic points.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Fit data Switches to the editing of spline data mode, including tolerance
values.
The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter an option [Add/Close/Delete/Move/Purge/Tangents/

299
nanoCAD Mechanica

Tolerance/Exit/] <Exit>:
Options:
Add - Adds characteristic points to the spline
Close/Open - Closes/Opens spline with fitting at a join point.
Delete - Deletes characteristic points from the spline and rebuilds
the spline
Move - Changes the position of the previous point.
Purge - Deletes the spline data from the document database.

Tangents - Edits the start and end points of the spline.

tolerance - Specifies a new tolerance value.
eXit - Returns to the main prompt in the command line.
The Tangents option starts the following option in the command line:
Specify start tangent or [System default]:
Option:
System default - Sets tangents at the spline ends by default

Close Closes an open spline with fitting at a join point.

Open Opens a closed spline.

Move vertex Changes the position of control vertexes and deletion of

characteristic points.

Refine Changes the spline’s shape.

The Refine options starts the following prompt in the command
line:
Enter a refine option [Add control point/Elevate
order/Weight/Exit] <Exit>:
Options:
Add control point - Adds a control point near the point, selected
on spline, between two control points.
Elevate order -Increases the degree of the spline (increases the
number of control points).
Weight - Changes the weight factors at the control points of the
spline (the greater the weight factor is, the closer the spline is to
the control point).
eXit - Returns to the main prompt in the command line.

rEverse Changes the spline direction to the opposite (start and end points
changes their places).

Exit Closes the spline editing mode.

300
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Move vertex and Weight of the SPLINEDIT starts the following prompts in the command
line:
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select point/Exit/] <N>:
and
Specify new weight (current = 1.0000)<N> or [Next/Previous/Select point/Exit]:
Options:

Next Selects the next point.

Previous Selects the previous point.

Select point Selects the control point.

eXit Returns to the previous prompt in the

command line.

Command prompts:

Select spline or [?]: Select a spline.

Enter an option [Fit data/Close/Move

vertex/ Refine/rEverse/Undo/eXit]:
Select the required option. To finish editing,
select Exit option.

Commands to edit objects

Erase
Menu: Modify – Erase

Toolbar: Modify –

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: E, ERASE, DELETE

This command deletes objects from the document.
The Erase command is also available in the context menu.
Selected objects can be deleted by pressing the DEL button on the keyboard.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select Select objects.

objects or
[?]:

301
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select Continue selection of objects or press ENTER to finish the command.

objects or
[?]:

Copy
Menu: Modify – Copy

Toolbar: Modify –

Hotkeys: CTRL+SHIFT+D

Command line: CO, COPY, CP, MOVECOPY

This command can copy selected objects once or several times.
The Displacement option allows copying of objects by specifying a relative distance with
coordinates. The coordinates define a displacement value for the objects being copied.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction with coordinates.

Mode Changes the copy mode.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter a copy mode option [Single/Multiple] <Multiple>:
Options:
Single - Single copy of objects.
Multiple - Multiple copies of objects.

Exit Finishes the command in the multiple copy of objects mode.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER

when the selection is
finished.

Specify base point or [Displacement/Mode] Specify 1 base point.

<Displacement>:

Specify second point or <use first point as Specify second point.

displacement>:

302
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify second point or [Exit] <Exit>: Specify end point. Press

ENTER to finish the
command.

Mirror
Menu: Modify – Mirror

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: MI, MIRROR

This command creates mirror copies of objects along the specified axis.
Using this command you can quickly create symmetrical objects, you just create one part of the
object and the other part of the object is drawn by the command.
Mirrored texts, attributes and their definitions have a mirror view. For a normal view of text, set
0 value (default value) for the MIRRTEXT system variable.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Yes Deletes source objects.

No Source objects are not deleted.

Selection of objects Specifying the first Specifying the Result

by frame point second point

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER when the selection is
finished.

Specify first point of mirror Specify the first point.

line:

Specify second point of mirror Specify the second point.

line:

Erase source objects? [Yes/No] Select the No option.

<N>:

303
nanoCAD Mechanica

Offset
Menu: Modify – Offset

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: O, OFFSET, VCOFFSETCMD

This command allows the creation of a new object similar to the selected one and is placed at the
specified distance from it.
Similarly, arcs and circles have diameters smaller or larger than the source objects, according to
which side the offset was made.
If the Multiple option is selected, all similar objects are created with the current offset.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Erase Erases the source objects after creating similar ones.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Erase source objects after offsetting? [Yes/No] <No>:
Options:
Yes - Deletes the source objects.
No - Source objects are not deleted.

Layer Defines the layer of the source objects.

The option starts the following prompt in the command line:
Enter layer option for offset objects [Source/Current]
<Current>:
Options:
Source - Creates similar objects on the source layer.
Current - Creates similar objects on the current layer.

Multiple Switches on the mode for multiple creation of similar objects.

Exit Finishes the command.

Selection of Offset Selection of Offset Result

object object

Command prompts:

Specify offset distance or Specify distance, entering it from the

304
nanoCAD Mechanica

[Erase/Layer] <10.0000>: keyboard or specify on the screen.

Select objects to offset or [?/Exit]: Select an object.

Specify point on side to offset or Specify a point.

[Exit/Multiple] <Exit>:

Select objects to offset or [?/Exit]: Select an object.

Specify point on side to offset or Specify a point.

[Exit/Multiple] <Exit>:

Select objects to offset or [?/Exit]: Select the Exit option to finish the
command.

Array
Menu: Modify – Array

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: AR, ARRAY

This command is used to create two-dimensional arrays of the selected objects by placing their
copies on the specified circle (polar array) or in the nodes of the specified rectangular grid
(rectangular array).
Array command opens the Array dialog box.

There is the Select objects command in the top corner of the dialog box; it temporarily
closes the dialog box whilst selecting the source objects. There is a line showing the number of
selected objects - Objects selected below the button.
There is a preview window below the line.

305
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rectangular array

Parameters:

Rectangular
array Switches on the rectangular array mode.

Rows: Number of rows.

Columns: Number of columns.

Offset distance and direction

Row offset: Distance between rows.

Column offset: Distance between columns.

Angle of array: Field to enter an angle of array.

Buttons: Button temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the distance or an
angle on the screen.

Specify the distance between rows on the screen.

Specify the distance between columns on the screen.

Specify the distance between rows and columns on the screen.

Specify an angle of array on the screen.

Example of creating stairs using rectangular array:
1. Create one more stair;

306
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select created objects;

3. Specify number of rows - 1;
4. Specify number of columns - 7;
5. Specify distance between columns (specify point 1, after that point 2);
6. Specify angle (specify point 1, after that point 2);

Selection of Distance
Source stair Angle Result
objects between columns

Polar array

The More button opens an additional section of the dialog box to specify the base point of the
X,Y axes.

Parameters:

Polar array Switches on the polar array mode.

Center point: X: Fields to enter the X, Y coordinates of the array center.

307
nanoCAD Mechanica

Y:

Button temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the center of the
array on the screen.

Method and values

Method: A drop-down list to select the method of array creation.

Available options in the drop-down list:

Total number of items & Angle to fill

Total number of items & Angle between items

Angle to fill & Angle between items

Total number Number of elements (with source object).

of items:

Angle to fill: Angle of array fill.

Button temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the fill angle on the
screen.

Angle between Angle between neighbouring array items.

items:

Button temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the angle between
neighbouring array items.

Rotate items as Switches on/off the mode for rotating the elements in the array.
copied

More/Less This button opens/closes an additional part of the dialog box.

Offset distance and direction

Set to object’s Switches on/off the mode for specifying the base point.
default

Base point: X: Fields to enter the X,Y coordinates of the base point.
Y:

Button temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the base point on the
screen.

308
nanoCAD Mechanica

Example of creating polar array:

Source objects Selection of objects Center of array Result

Move
Menu: Modify – Move

Toolbar: Modify –

Hotkeys: CTRL+D

Command line: M, MOVE

This command is used to move the selected objects to a specified distance and in a specified
direction.
The Displacement option allows moving of objects by specifying a relative distance with
coordinates. Coordinates define a value for the displacement of objects.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Displacement Specifies relative distance and direction using coordinates.

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER

when the selection is
finished.

Specify base point or [Displacement]: Specify a 1 base point.

Specify second point or <use first point as Specify a 2 second point.

displacement>:

309
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rotate
Menu: Modify – Rotate

Toolbar: Modify –

Hotkeys: CTRL+E

Command line: RO, ROTATE

The command rotates the selected objects to a specified angle around the specified point.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Copy Rotates a copy of the selected object.

Reference Specifies the angle from the reference angle.

angle

Points Specifies the angle from the reference angle to the line specified by two
points.

Selection of Specifying a reference line by two Specifying

Result
objects points rotation angle

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER when the selection is
finished.

Specify base point: Specify a base point.

Specify rotation angle or Select the Copy option.

[Copy/Reference angle]:

Specify rotation angle or Select the Reference angle option.

[Copy/Reference angle]:

Specify the reference angle: Specify a first point of reference.

Specify second point: Specify a second point of reference.

Specify the new angle or Specify the angle.

[Points]:

310
nanoCAD Mechanica

Scale
Menu: Modify – Scale

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: SC, SCALE

This command is used to decrease or increase the size of the selected objects whilst retaining
their proportions (the scale factors along the X and Y axes are identical). If the scale factor is
more than 1, the objects are increased in size; if it is less than 1, they are decreased.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Copy Scaling copy of the selected objects.

Reference Scaling the selected objects towards the reference line whose length
length is a single scale factor and a new length for the reference line.

Points Scaling the selected objects towards the reference line whose length
is a single scale factor and a new length for the reference line,
specified by two points.

Selection of objects Specifying the base point Specifying the reference line

Specifying a new length for the reference line Result

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER when the selection is
finished.

Specify base point: Specify the base point.

311
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify scale factor or Select the Reference length option.

[Copy/Reference length]:

Specify reference length: Specify the first point.

Specify second point: Specify the second point.

Specify the new length or Select the Points option.

[Points]:

Specify first point: Specify the first point.

Specify second point: Specify the second point.

Stretch
Menu: Modify – Stretch

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: S, STRETCH

This command allows stretching or moving of objects. Objects, intersecting with a secant frame
or polygon are stretched. Objects inside a frame or polygon are moved by the Stretch
commands as they are moved by the Move command.
Lines, arcs and segments are stretched only by moving their end points inside the secant frame
or polygon. The position of endpoints outside the secant frame or polygon remain the same.
Other primitives are moved or not, according to whether or not their characteristic points are
inside the secant frame (polygon).
Characteristic points are the center of a circle, the insertion point of a block, the leftmost point
of a base line for text and to define attributes (it does not depend on the aligning type used for
creation).
If the insertion point of a block is moved by the Stretch command, all its attributes are also
moved.
During the preliminary selection of objects, only objects selected with the ordinary or secant
frame (polygon) are stretched with Stretch command.
The Displacement option allows stretching or moving of objects by specifying a relative distance
with coordinates. Coordinates define a value for the stretching or offset of objects.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Displacement Specifies the relative distance and direction using coordinates.

312
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selection of objects by
Specifying base point Specifying a new point Result
secant frame

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects. Press ENTER when the

selection is finished.

Specify base point or Specify the base point.

[Displacement] <Displacement>:

Specify second point or <use Specify the second point.

first point as displacement>:

Align
Menu: Modify – Align

Command line: ALIGN

This command moves and rotates an object to align it with another object; scaling is also
possible.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Yes Scales object by aligning points.

No Does not scale object by aligning points.

Selection of objects Specifies first point for aligning objects

313
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specifies second point for aligning objects Result with scaling Result without scaling

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select objects for aligning. Press ENTER when objects are
selected.

Specify first source Specify the first point on the object to be aligned.
point:

Specify first destination Specify the first point on the destination object.
point:

Specify second source Specify the second point on the object to be aligned.
point:

Specify second destination Specify the second point on the destination object.
point:

Specify third source Press ENTER.

point:

Scale objects based on

alignment points? <N> or
[Yes/No]: Select the option.

Distributing copies
The Divide and Measure commands distribute points and blocks at the same or specified
distance from each other along an object’s perimeter or length. Objects are not actually divided
into parts. The locations of the divisions are specified. Points located in the places of divisions
can be used as geometric characteristic points for further creations.

Divide
Menu: Draw – Point > Divide

Toolbar: Draw–

Command line: DIVIDE

The Divide command distributes points or blocks at the same distance from each other along an
object’s length or perimeter. Distribution along object points or blocks divides the object into
segments of a specified length.

314
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Block Switches to block insertion mode.

Yes Switches on the object to block aligning mode.

No Switches off the object to block aligning mode.

Block and objects to divide Dividing with block aligning Dividing without block aligning

Command prompts:

Select objects to divide or Select an object.

[?]:

Enter number of segments or Select the Block option.

[Block]:

Enter name of block to insert: Specify the block’s name and press ENTER.

Align block with object? or Specify the option.

[Yes/No]:

Enter number of segments: Specify the number of segments and press

ENTER.

Measure
Menu: Draw – Point> Measure

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: MEASURE

The Measure command distributes points or blocks at the specified distance from each other
along an object’s length or perimeter. Distribution along object points or blocks divides the object
into segments of a specified length. The last segment of the object is always smaller than others.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Block Switches to block insertion mode.

315
nanoCAD Mechanica

Yes Switches on the object to block aligning mode.

No Switches off the object to block aligning mode.

Block and objects to measure Measuring with block

Command prompts:

Select objects or [?]: Select the object.

Specify length of segment or [Block]: Select the Block.

Enter name of block to insert: Enter a name of the block and press
ENTER.

Specify length of segment: Specify a length or specify it on the

screen.

Chamfer
Menu: Modify – Chamfer…

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: CHA, CHAMFER

This command is used to create chamfers at the points of intersection of objects, with automatic
dimensioning ability. The command allows the creation of several chamfers individually.
The Chamfer command can be used for quick trimming or lengthening of selected objects. To do
so, press the SHIFT button when you select objects: a current value of chamfer radius is
temporarily changed to 0 and objects are lengthened or trimmed to intersection point.
After launching the command, the dialog box for specifying the chamfer parameters opens:

316
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

This button switches on the mode for creating a chamfer with similar lengths.
In this mode the Length 2 parameter is unavailable.

This button switches on the mode for creating a chamfer with different lengths.

This button switches on the mode for creating a chamfer by length and angle.
In this mode there is a Corner parameter instead of the Length 2 parameter.

Length 1 The first length of the chamfer. This field is used also to specify chamfers with
similar lengths.

Length 2 The second length of the chamfer.

Angle Angle of the chamfer.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to permit measuring the chamfer
length and angle on the drawing. The Value picker dialog box appears to
perform measurements.

This button switches on the mode for cutting of full contour lines.

This button switches on the mode for cutting of partial contour lines before their

317
nanoCAD Mechanica

intersection.

This button switches on the mode without lines cutting.

This button switches the automatic dimensioning mode on/off.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to permit copying of properties
from created chamfers.

Show at
start When this check box is clear, Chamfer dialog box is not displayed.

This drop list sets Object scale for dimension object.

Double clicking or right clicking in the fields to enter values will open the context menu with a list
of the recently entered values:

Options in the context menu and in the command line are available during the process of
chamfer creation:

Command options:

Properties The Chamfer dialog box opens to change the chamfer parameters.

neW Finishes the creation of one group of chamfers and starts another. The
command is applied when you need to create some chamfers with similar
dimensions on one object and with the same dimensions on another
object:

318
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fillet Switches to the mode for creating fillets. The Fillet dialog box opens to
specify the parameters for the fillet.

polyLine Switches to the mode of making chamfers along a whole selected polyline.
Only segments with lengths which are more than chamfer length are
processed.
It is recommended to specify the same values for both chamfer lengths.
This option is available for symmetrical chamfer.
Auto dimensions and cutting of countor modes are igrored.

Fillet
Menu: Modify – Fillet…

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: F, FILLET

This command is used to create fillets in the intersection points of objects, with automatic
dimensioning ability. The command can create fillets individually.
The Fillet command can be used for quick trimming or lengthening of selected objects. To do it,
press SHIFT button when you select objects: a current value of fillet radius is temporarily
changed to 0 and objects are lengthened or trimmed to intersection point.
It is possible to make a fillet between parallel segments. A current value of fillet radius is
temporarily changed to a value, which equals to half distance between parallel segments. The
dialog box opens after the command is launched:

319
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

This button switches on the lines cutting mode.

This button switches to insert circle instead of fillet.

Radius Radius of fillet.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow measuring of the fillet radius on the
drawing. The Value picker dialog appears to perform measurements.

This button fully cuts lines before their intersection.

This button switches on the mode for cutting of lines before their intersection.

This button switches on the mode without lines cutting.

This button switches on the additional dimensioning mode.

320
nanoCAD Mechanica

This button switches the automatic dimensioning mode on/off.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow copying of properties from created
fillets.

Double-click or right-click in the fields to enter values will open the context menu with the list of
the recently entered values:

Options in the context menu and in the command line are available during the process of fillet
creation:

Command options:

Properties The Fillet dialog box opens to change the chamfer parameters.

neW Finishes the creation of one group of fillets and starts another. The
command is applied when you need to create some fillets with one radius
on one object and with the same radius on another object:

Chamfer Switches to the mode for creating chamfers. The Chamfer dialog box
opens to specify the parameters of the fillet.

polyLine Switches to the mode of making fillets along a whole selected polyline.
If a fillet radius does not equal zero the command creates fillet arcs for
every node, created by crossed line segments, if they have a length
enough for fillet creation.

321
nanoCAD Mechanica

Explode
Menu: Modify – Explode

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: EXPLODE, X

The Explode command divides complex objects, such as polylines, dimensions, hatches and
blocks into separate elements. For example, dividing a polyline causes its separation into lines
and arcs; an associative dimension divides into a set of simple objects; a block is divided into a
set containing its objects; multiline text is divided into lines.
The Explode command is applied only to one nesting level of a complex object, i.e. if it is
required to explode a polyline belonging to a block, firstly you have to explode the block and
after that the polyline.
Command options:

? Opens the additional options to select objects.

Command prompts:

Select Select an object.

objects or
[?]:

Select Select the next object and press ENTER to finish the command.
objects or
[?]:

Explode all objects

Menu: Modify – Explode all objects

Toolbar: Modify –

Command line: EXPLODEALL

The command explodes all nanoCAD objects (notes, tables etc.) into primitives.
It is recommended not to apply the command, unless necessary, because the exploded objects
are not restored. After explosion of objects you cannot apply nanoCAD special functions and
editing commands to them.

322
nanoCAD Mechanica

CREATING AND EDITING COMPLEX OBJECTS

Groups of objects
Menu: Modify – Group…

Command line: GROUP, GROUPCMD

To edit a set of objects they can be grouped in the document. You can select the whole group
and its elements to edit. New objects can be added to a group and existing objects can be
excluded from a group. Objects can belong to several groups at once, and a group can belong to
another group. To restore the configuration of source groups, grouped into one group, you have
to ungroup nested groups.
Groups can be assigned names or use default names. An unnamed group (a group without its
own name) has a default name - An, where n is the number of created groups.
A group name can contain up to 31 symbols and cannot contain spaces; it can contain letters,
figures and special symbols (dollar sign ($), hyphen (-) and the break character (_)).
Groups are saved with a document and can be used in the following working sessions.
Main distinction between groups and blocks:
Objects in a group can be edited without ungrouping, but to edit objects in a block, the
block must be exploded.
A group cannot be transferred to another document; it can be used only in the
document where it was created.
The Group command opens the Object Grouping dialog box where there is a list with the
names of existing groups in the document and descriptions for every group that is selectable:

323
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:
Group Identification

Group Name: Specify a group name.

Description: Displays the description of the group (if it was specified during group
creation).

This button temporarily closes the dialog box for selecting an object
when you need to clarify its group.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box for highlighting a group’s
objects on the screen.

Include Switches on/off the input of unnamed groups in the list in the Object
Unnamed Grouping dialog box.

Create Group

This button temporarily closes the dialog box for selecting the objects of
a group.

Selectable Switches on/off the mode of whole group selection if one object is
selected.

Unnamed Switches on/off the mode for creating unnamed groups.

Change Group

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow selecting objects to

324
nanoCAD Mechanica

delete from the selected group.

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow selecting objects to
add them to the selected group.

This button updates a change of name for a group.

This button opens the Order Group dialog box to change the order of
objects in a group.

This button updates the changed description for the selected group.

This button deletes the selected group. Objects of the group are not
deleted from the document.

This button changes the selectable property of a group in the document.

To create a group:
1. Enter the name for the created group and its description in the Group Name and
Description fields of the Group Identification section. A name can contain letters,
figures and special symbols, but must not contain spaces. The Description field can be
empty.
2. Select the New button to temporarily close the dialog box to select the objects of a
group.
3. Select the objects, press ENTER.
4. Select OK in the opened dialog box.
To identify a group:
1. To define the groups the object belongs to, select the Find Name<.
2. After the dialog box temporarily closes, specify an object on the screen.
3. The Group Member List dialog box opens with all groups the selected object belongs
to:

4. Select OK to get return to the previous dialog box.

5. Select OK to close the dialog box.
The Highlight< button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow highlighting of a group’s
objects on the screen. The Object grouping dialog box is displayed with the highlighted object:

325
nanoCAD Mechanica

To delete objects from a group:

1. Select a group in the list.
2. Deselect the Selectable checkbox.
3. Select Remove<.
4. Select the objects to delete.
5. Select the End option (in the context menu or command line).
6. Select OK to close the dialog box.

NOTE: The description of the group is saved when all the objects are deleted from the group. To delete a
group from a document, select Explode.

NOTE: When a group is deleted from a document, objects of the group are not deleted.

To add objects to a group:

1. Select group in the list.
2. Select Add<.
3. Select the objects to add.
4. Select the End option (in the context menu or command line).
5. Select OK to close the dialog box.

NOTE: When adding objects belonging to other groups to a group, the Selectable checkbox should be
deselected. If it is selected, the groups that the objects belong to will be added to the group.

To rename a group or change a description:

1. Select the group.
2. Make changes in the Group Name and Description fields of the Group Identification
section.
3. Select the Rename or Description.
The messages like Group name has been updated or Group description has been updated and
are shown in the bottom left corner.
4. Select OK to close the dialog box.
To change the order of objects in the group:
1. Select the group.
2. Select Re-Order.
3. Specify the required parameters in the Order Group dialog box:

326
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Group Name List of existing groups.

Description Shows the description of the selected group in the list (if it was
specified when the group was created)

Remove from Field to enter the current position (number) of the object in the
position (0-3) group.

Enter new position Specifies the new position number of objects in a group.
number for the
object (0-3):

Number of objects Specifies the number of objects, whose positions are changed.
(less than 4):

This button changes the positions of objects in the group.

This button opens the Object Grouping dialog box to display the
order of objects in the group.

This button changes the objects into their opposite order.

NOTE: The order of object numbering is the order in which objects were selected when they were added
to the group. Numbering starts from 0.

NOTE: You can change the positions of several objects at once.

327
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Highlight temporarily closes the Order Group dialog box and opens the Object Grouping
dialog box:

Parameters:

The button for the previous object selection.

The button for the next object selection.

Object: 1 Shows the current position of the object in the group.

Total: 4 Shows the number of objects in the group.

NOTE: A selected object is highlighted on the screen.

Blocks
A block is a collection of objects that can be associated together to form a single object. A block
can be created and inserted in a drawing as many times as you need.
Blocks are used to create elements of drawings which are used many times, to simplify and
speed up the drawing process.
Blocks can be used to create user libraries of frequently used parts and components.
Relating all occurrences of a block to the same description of the block in the drawing database
allows you to decrease the file size because every new insertion of the block enable information
about the insertion place, scale factors and rotation angle to be added to the information
available.
Reference to the block means the block definition or the insert block. When you create a block
its definition, which is stored in the blocks table of the document file, is created and is not
displayed on the drawing. A block definition can contain other (nested) blocks. The only
restriction on nested blocks is that you cannot insert blocks that reference themselves.
During an insert block the drawing component of the block is created.
Any block (definition) can have a set of components or not have any. When you change the block
definition (or redefine block), all its components will change automatically.

An existing block can be changed by redefining it. A new block is created with the name of the
existing block. After the block description is changed, all occurrences of this block in the
document are changed automatically.
When a block is created, objects are placed in the block with their current properties; these
values cannot be corrected in the future. For example, if you create a block from red segments,
after it is created you cannot influence the color of these objects. Be sure of your requirements
before you create a block.

328
nanoCAD Mechanica

To define blocks with properties of the layer where they are located, and to set color,
linetype and lineweight of the layer for all objects of the block, create all objects on the
0 layer and set the property - By layer.
To define color, linetype and lineweight of the block’s objects, when you place a block
into a drawing, set color, linetype and lineweight By block. If the current properties are
not actually specified in the drawing, the objects inherit properties of the current layer.

Objects of blocks always have their basic properties, i.e. specified color, linetype and
lineweight if these properties are specified before objects are added to a block’s
description. In this case you must not use color, linetype and lineweight with properties
- By block or By layer.
Users can also set attributes for a block to be created. A block attribute is text included in the
block whose value can be re-defined for each block intersection and be displayed on the screen
or stay invisible (hidden) and be unprintable.
There are several ways to create and use blocks:
Group objects and save them as block in the current drawing (Draw menu – Block >
Make);
Save a block in a separate file to use it in other drawings by specifying in the command
line WBLOCK;

Insert any other drawing as incidental to a drawing with blocks (Insert menu – Block).

Create a file with a set of frequently used blocks to use as a library.

Creation of a block
Menu: Draw – Block > Make…

Toolbar: Draw – Create Block…

Command line: ACADBLOCKDIALOG, B, BLOCK, BMOD, NEWBL, NEWBLOCK

The Block Definition dialog box allows the specifying of the parameters to create a new block
and redefine a definition for existing block:

329
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Name: Type a name for the created block.

To redefine the existing block, choose its name from the drop-down
list.

Base point

Specify On At the block insertion in the drawing, this point will be located at
Screen the center of the cursor after the dialog box is closed.

At the block insertion in the drawing, this point will be located at

Pick Point the center of the cursor after the dialog box is closed temporarily.

X: Y: Z: Specify the point coordinates for the block insertion.

Objects

Specify On Select the objects to be entered into the block after the dialog box
Screen is closed.

Select the objects to be entered into the block after the dialog box
Select is closed temporarily.
Objects

Retain Retains the objects selected for the block in the drawing after
creation of the block definition.

Convert to Creates the block entry at the location of the objects selected for
block the block after creation of the block definition.

Delete Deletes the objects selected for the block from the drawing after

330
nanoCAD Mechanica

creation of the block definition.

Selected The information on the quantity of objects selected for the block.
objects: 3

Settings

Scale Prevents the block entries from using a different scale by X, Y, Z

uniformly axes.

Allow Defines whether the block entries can break into their components
exploding using the Explode.

Block units: Specify the insertion units for the block entry.

Description: Allows the hidden attribute of text description of the block to be

specified.

NOTE: The objects to be added to the block can be selected in advance, before opening the Block
Definition dialog box window.

Block attributes
A block’s attribute is used to link text information or any other data, called an attribute value,
with the block.
It is possible to enter a temporarily attribute’s value, which is saved with the block, when you
insert a block with variable attributes. You can assign a different value to an attribute when you
insert the same block.
Permanent attributes, which values are not changed when they are inserted, can also be used in
blocks.
Information, stored in attributes, can be exported in electronic tables or databases for further
processing and generation of different documents; for example, specifications or bill for
materials. You can link several attributes with different names within one block.
Attributes for a block should be created before block definition.

To create an attribute
Menu: Draw – Block > Define Attributes…

Toolbar: Draw – Define Attributes…

Command line: ATT, ATTDEF

The Attribute Definition dialog box is used to specify an attribute’s parameters:

331
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:
Mode

Invisible The attribute value of the inserted block is not displayed on the
screen and not printed.

Constant Sets the fixed attribute value for all block definitions.

Verify Checks the accuracy of the attribute value during a block insertion.

Present Whether to attribute a default value at a block insertion.

Lock Locks the position at a block insertion.

Position

Multiple Allows entering multiline text for the attribute.

lines

Attribute

Tag: Sets an attribute name.

Prompt: The text containing the current attribute is displayed at the block
intersection. If left empty, the prompt will be the attribute tag.

Default: Value which is applied to the attribute by default. When the Multiple

332
nanoCAD Mechanica

lines checkbox is on, click the button to enter multiline text.

Opens Field dialog box to insert field. Available for single-line attributes.
Insert
field

Insertion point

Specify on Specify the insertion point on the drawing.

screen

X: Y: Z: Coordinates of the insertion point.

Text Settings

Justification: Choice of alignment.

Text style: Sets the text style.

Text height: Sets the text height.

Rotation: Sets the text rotation.

The dialog box temporarily closes and you can specify text height, text
rotation or width of multiline text boundary on the screen.

After an attribute is created, you can add it to a set of objects during the creation of the block.
You should select not only geometric objects but also attributes in answer to the command
prompt for selection of objects during creation of a block. The order of selection of attributes
defines the order of the prompts to enter the values of the attributes during block insertion.
You can link an attribute with a block when redefining a block.
Example of “Table_title” attribute with “Warning!” value (table view and information in
the Properties panel):

333
nanoCAD Mechanica

Before an attribute insertion in the block: After an attribute insertion in the block:

Attributes of inserted blocks can be edited using the Attributes block manager (Modify menu
– Object or Modify Object toolbar) and in the Properties bar.
The Attributes block manager opens the Edit of attributes dialog box where you can change
the values of the block attributes:

Managing visibility of block’s all attributes in the document

The commands to redefine block’s all attributes in the drawing are located in the View-
Display>Attribute Display menu item. Changing of attributes visibility needs regeneration of
the drawing.
The current condition of all attributes visibility in the drawing is stored in the ATTMODE system
variable. 0 value of the system variable means that attribute’s visibility is turned off, 1 – normal
state, 2 – turned on.

334
nanoCAD Mechanica

Menu: View – Display> Attribute Display > Normal

Turns the attributes visibility, specified whilst attributes were created, on: visible attributes are
displayed in the drawing, hidden are not.

Menu: View – Display> Attribute Display > Off

Turns the attributes visibility, even created hidden, off.

Menu: View – Display> Attribute Display > On

Turns the attributes visibility, even created visible, on.

Extracting data from attributes

Command line: ATTEXT
The command allows extracting data from attributes and save them in a text file, which can be
transferred into any database management system. You can easily create different reports and
specifications, using data of drawings. For example, every unit of equipment on a plan is a block
with attributes of name, brand, price and etc. It is easy to create reports with total price of
equipment, number of equipment units and others.
The Attribute Extraction dialog is displayed after the command is started:

Parameters:
File format

Comma Delimited File Switches on the mode of saving extracted data from attributes in
(CDF) *.cdf (Comma Delimited Format) file, containing one record for
every block insertion in a drawing. Record fields are separated by
commas. Symbol fields are put into quotes (apostrophes).
It is required to specify a template file when you extract data from
attributes in *.cdf format. Template file must contain at least one
attribute name.

335
nanoCAD Mechanica

Space Delimited File Switches on the mode of saving extracted data from attributes in
(SDF) *.sdf (Space Exchange Format) file, containing one record for
every block insertion in a drawing. Record fields have fixed length
so you do not need neither separators of records, nor limits of
symbol fields.
It is required to specify a template file when you extract data from
attributes in *.sdf format. Template file must contain at least one
attribute name.
DXF Format Extract File Switches on the mode of saving extracted data from attributes in
(DXX) *.dxx (type of *.dxf standard file format of graphic data
exchange) file, containing only description of block insertions and
attributes values.
File extension - .dxx differs output file from ordinary file - dxf.
It is not required to specify a template file when you extract data
from attributes in *.dxx format.

Buttons

The button temporarily closes the dialog to select blocks with

attributes in a drawing.
When you press the ENTER to finish the selection of objects the
Attribute Extraction dialog opens again.
Number: Shows number of selected objects.

The button opens the standard dialog to select files to specify name
and location of template file, using whose format the data extracted
from attributes is recorded.
Template files have default extension -.txt.
The path and name of selected file are displayed or entered in the field
right to the button.
If DXF Format Extract File (DXX) parameter is selected the
Template File button and field to the right is inactive.
The button opens the standard dialog to select files to specify name
and location of a file, where data extracted from attributes is recorded.
By default .txt extension of file name is added to CDF or SDF files and
to DXF .dxx extension is added.
The path and name of selected file are displayed or entered in the field
right to the button.

Block Insertion
Menu: Insert – Block…

Toolbar: Draw – Insert Block…

Command line: I, INSBL, INSERT

This command inserts blocks or drawings into a current document.
If the rotation angle of the block is specified, the center of rotation is placed at the insertion
point. If the rotation angle of the block is specified on the screen (by point), the slope angle of
an imaginary line starting from a specified point to the insertion point of the block is set as the
rotation angle.

336
nanoCAD Mechanica

After inserting it in the drawing, a block is processed as a one object. To be able to work with
separate objects of a block, it can be exploded during insertion by selecting the Explode
checkbox in the Insert Block dialog box, or after insertion by using the Explode command from
the Modify menu.
To specify the parameters of an inserted block, the command opens the dialog box:

Parameters:

Name: Choose the name of the block definition from the drop-down menu. If
the list is empty, the current document does not contain any block
definitions.

The button opens the standard dialog of files selection, where you can
select a block or file to insert it into a document.

Insertion point

Specify on If this checkbox is on, the appropriate parameter is requested from

screen the user after closing the dialog box window.

X: Y: Z: Coordinates of an insertion point.

Scale

Specify on If this checkbox is on, the appropriate parameter is requested from

screen the user after closing the dialog box window.

X: Y: Z: Scale factors for the X, Y, Z axes.

Uniform The specified scale for the X axis will be applied to the Y and Z axes
Scale automatically.

Rotation

Specify on If this checkbox is on, the rotation angle is requested from the user
screen after closing the dialog box window.

337
nanoCAD Mechanica

Angle: Rotation angle for an inserted block.

Block Unit

Unit: Insertion units, which have been set at the creation of the block
definition.

Factor: The scale factor calculated as a ratio of the block units to the drawing
units.

Explode Allows insertion of the block split into separate objects.

NOTE: If you set a negative scale value along any axis, when the block is inserted, the block will be
mirrored towards this axis.

Redefinition of a block
Definition of blocks in the drawing can be changed. Changing a definition of block (redefinition of
block) influences not only on newly created block insertions, but also on already created, and on
any attributes linked to that block in a current drawing.
As long as there are two ways (from drawing database and from external file) to insert blocks in
a current drawing, there are also two ways to redefine blocks:

Redefinition of a block in a current drawing.

Changing an external file and redefining it in a current drawing.

To redefine a block in a current drawing:
1. Insert a block, previously exploded into consisting objects, select the Explode tag in the
Insert Block dialog or explode a block insertion by Explode command from the Modify
menu.
2. Edit consisting objects.
3. Do all actions to create a new block, but enter a block which you want to redefine.
All block insertions are automatically updated after the block is redefined.
Redefinition of a block from an external file is the same process if you do not need to change an
external file.
Changing of external file does not influence on a current drawing, where it is inserted as a block.
To redefine (update) a current block in a current drawing it is required to insert it again.

Redefinition of block’s attributes

When you redefine a block you can change attributes, which it consists of, i.e. attributes are
linked with block when block is redefined is the same process as when block is created: required
attributes are added to a redefined block when objects to redefine block are selected.
Changing attributes definitions when blocks are redefined influence on already created block
insertions in a current drawing:

There are no new variable attributes in block insertions.

Old variable attributes in existing block insertions remain even if redefined block does
not have any attributes before.
New permanent attributes in existing block insertions are added to the old.

338
nanoCAD Mechanica

Old permanent attributes (having fixed values) are lost, if there is no attributes in a redefined
block, or replaced with new values, specified for a redefined block.

Managing blocks in a current drawing

Menu: Format – Blocks…

Command line: BLOCKSCMD

The Blocks dialog box contains information about all blocks in the document and about their
insertion numbers:

Columns:

Name List of blocks in the document.

Refs Information about the number of block insertions in the current document.

Description Information from the Description field of the Block Definition dialog box.

To rename a block:
1. Click twice on the block’s name.
2. Enter a new name from the keyboard.
To delete the description of a block:
1. Select the block from the list.

2. Select the button or select the Delete command from the context menu.
3. Select the Yes button.
4. Select Close to close the dialog box.

ATTENTION! The Delete command (or DEL button) deletes only the block insertion in the document.
To delete the block description, use the Block Definition dialog.

ATTENTION! Some block descriptions are system. They cannot be deleted.

339
nanoCAD Mechanica

Block editor
Menu: Tools – Edit block definition…

Toolbar: Main - Edit block definition

Double-click on the block insertion

Command line: BEDIT

BEDIT command opens Select Block Definition dialog. Select the desired block to edit.

Options:

Zoom to block Display selected block mode on/off.

Click OK to edit block.

BLOCK EDIT MODE displays only block elements.

NOTE: Click twice on mouse wheel to display all objects for editing.

340
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click Close block edit (BECLOSE command) to close Block Edit Mode.

Exploding block insertion

When a block’s insertions are exploded, a block is divided into its separate objects.

To explode a block, select the Explode command or select the button on the Modify
toolbar. If it was prohibited to explode the block when the description was created, such block
insertions cannot be exploded.

Saving a block in a separate file

Command line: WBLOCK, ACADWBLOCKDIALOG, W
The command allows you saving in a separate file:

A whole drawing with all changes;

A block in the current document;

Separate fragments of the drawing.

The Write Block dialog box appears after the WBLOCK command is launched:

341
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:
Source

Block: Switches on the mode to select a block in the document, from a list, in
order to save it.

Entire Switches on the mode for saving the whole document in a separate file.
drawing

Objects Switches on the mode for saving selected objects in the current
document in a separate file.

Base point

This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow a base point to be
Pick
point specified on the screen.

X: Y: Z: Coordinates of the base point.

Objects

Select
object This button temporarily closes the dialog box to allow objects on the
s screen to be selected.

Retain Switches on the mode to keep the selected objects in the drawing after
saving them in a separate file.

Convert to Switches on the mode for creation of a block insertion instead of

342
nanoCAD Mechanica

block selected objects after they were saved in a separate file.

Delete Switches on the mode for deleting the selected objects after they were
saved in a separate file.

Objects Information about the number of objects selected for saving.

selected: 1

Destination

File name The button opens the Save Document File dialog box to specify the
and path: path, format and name for the file.

Insert
units Drop-down list for selecting the measurement units of the saved file.

Insert External Reference

Menu: Insert – External Reference…

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: XA, XATTACH

External references allow you to add information from other drawings to the current document. It
is possible to insert several external references into one document. Conversely, the same
document can be used as an external reference in several other documents. External references
can contain inserted external references. When you add an external reference, all external
references inserted in it will also be displayed in the current drawing.
External references can only link external documents to the current document. The objects
placed in the drawing file with external references are displayed in the current drawing with other
objects in this drawing, but they are not added into the drawing. The external reference is a kind
of label that indicates the path to an external drawing. When you add the external reference, its
objects are not copied into the current drawing or loaded from the external reference file every
time you open basic drawing or restart the external reference. Anу changes made to the external
reference will be also displayed when you open the basic document or restart an external
reference.
When you insert an external reference into the drawing, the file size of the current drawing is
increased slightly.
Since the external references are always kept in separate files, then the exchange of drawings
should convey not only the basic drawings, but all drawings which are referred to.
You can specify different types of external reference: attachment into the drawing and overlay on
the drawing. When you insert an external reference using an attachment type, then all external
references inserted into the drawing are added to it. If you choose an overlay type when you
insert an external reference, then external references inserted into it are ignored. Overlay
external references are used when the information provided by an external reference in the
current drawing is not needed for later use of this drawing as an external reference.
There are three types of folder path information to save with an attached reference:

Full (absolute) path is a fully specified folders hierarchy that locates the file reference.
This is the most specific but least flexible option.

343
nanoCAD Mechanica

A full path includes a letter symbol of hard drive, URL, web site address or letter symbol
of disk on network server.

Relative path is a partially specified folders hierarchy that is defined relative to the
current drawing (the folder in which it is stored). If you choose this type, it is necessary
to save the current drawing. For the enclosed reference the relative path specifies a
reference location, which can be the current open document. This is the most flexible
option, and enables you to move your current drive to a different drive that uses the
same folder structure. If the file that is being referenced is located on a different local
hard drive or on a network server, the relative path option is not available.
Rules of making relative paths:

\ Root folder of hard drive, where a current drawing is stored.

path A path starting from a folder where a current drawing is stored.
\path A path starting from a root folder.
.\path A path starting from a folder where a current drawing is stored.
..\path A path starting from a folder which is one level up from a folder where a
current drawing is stored.
..\..\path A path starting from a folder which is two levels up from a folder where
a current drawing is stored.

When a drawing containing external references is saved or replaced to other hard drive,
computer or network server it is required to change all relative paths according to a new
location of drawing or change location of external references files.

No path – not specify a path to an external reference. Specifying the No path option is
useful when moving a set of drawings to a different folder hierarchy or to an unknown
folder hierarchy. If a path for an external reference is not specified the program
searches for the external references in a current folder of a main drawing.
To insert an external reference into the drawing, specify the path and file name in the opened
External Reference dialog box:

344
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the necessary external reference and click Open. The External Reference dialog box will
open.

345
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Name: The list of the names of the external references inserted into the drawing.

Opens the Open dialog box to choose files for the insertion of new
references.

Found in: Displays the file path where the external reference is to be found.

Saved path: Displays the saved path of access to the external reference.

Reference Type

Attachment When you attach a drawing file as an external reference, you link that
referenced drawing to the current drawing.

Overlay An overlaid external reference is not included when the drawing is itself
attached or overlaid as an external reference to another drawing.

Path Type Choose the saved path type to the external reference:
Full path
Relative path
No path

Insertion Point

Specify Select the box to set the X,Y,Z coordinates values in the command line or
On-screen specify the position on the screen. The «X» «Y» «Z» fields of this section
are inaccessible.

X: Y: Z: Set the X, Y, Z coordinate values in the corresponding fields of the current

document.

346
nanoCAD Mechanica

Scale

Specify Select the box to set the scale values in the command line or specify the
On-screen position on the screen. The «X» «Y» «Z» fields of this section are
inaccessible.

X: Y: Z: Set the scale values in the corresponding fields of the current document.

Uniform Scale Set the scale factors on the Y and Z axes to the same scale factor as the X
axis.

Rotation

Specify Select the box to set the rotation angle value in the command line or
On-screen specify its position on the screen. The Angle field of this section is
inaccessible.

Angle: Set the angle value on which it is necessary to turn the reference entry in
the current document.

Block unit

Unit: Displays the specified parameter value of the insertion units for the
inserted block.

Factor: Displays the scale factor, which is calculated based on the block insertion
units parameter value and document units.

Auto Zoom Switches on/off the full screen mode of the inserted reference.

Edit references
Menu: Tools – External reference > Edit reference

Command line: REFEDIT

The use of external references allows you to quickly combine multiple drawings in a single
document. To make work with external references more convenient, you can edit the references
directly in the current drawing to which they are added.
To edit a referenced drawing from within the current drawing, you should use the working set to
identify objects that belong to the external reference or block insertion rather than the current
drawing. The working set includes only the objects belonging to the reference selected for
editing.
You can add or remove objects from the working set. If you create a new object while editing a
reference, it is almost always added to the working set automatically. Editing changes in the
working set can be stored in the source file of the external reference or block insertion.
Start the Edit reference command. In the command line you can see:
Select reference or block insertion or [All insertions]:
Select the external reference on the drawing and in the Select insertion dialog box that opens,
choose the objects to edit:

347
nanoCAD Mechanica

If you select the All insertions option in the command line, the Select insertion dialog box
opens immediately and in the Element Name section all references and blocks inserted into the
drawing will be displayed:

Parameters:

Zoom to block Switches on/off the mode to display the selected reference on the screen.

Use uncial names Controls whether layers and other named objects extracted from the
for layers, styles reference are uniquely altered. If selected, named objects in external
and block references are altered (names are prefixed with $#$), similar to the way
they are altered when you bind external references. If cleared, the names
of layers and other named objects remain the same as in the reference

348
nanoCAD Mechanica

drawing. Named objects that are not altered to make them unique assume
the properties of those in the current host drawing that share the same
name.

Select the objects for editing and click OK. The Refedit toolbar will appear automatically.

Use the Refedit toolbar to add or remove objects from a working set and also save and discard
external reference editing.
REFEDIT, separated by a colon, is added to the document name in the tab and “Refedit mode” is
shown in the top left corner of the working area. It means that work with the document occurs in
the external reference editing mode.

ATTENTION! In edit references mode you MUST NOT (!) close neither a document with edited
reference nor nanoCAD till all changes are saved or discarded (Save and Close or Discard and Close
buttons on the Refedit toolbar).

After saving or discarding all changes the Refedit toolbar closes and a document tab returns to
its original view.

Add objects to the working set

Menu: Tools – External reference > Add objects to working set

Toolbar: External Reference –

Command line: REFSET

Use this command to transfer the objects from the current drawing to the working set.

Remove objects from the working set

Menu: Tools – External reference > Remove objects from working set

349
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: External Reference –

Command line: REFSET

Use this command to remove selected objects from the working set.

Save external reference changes

Menu: Tools – External reference > Save and close

Toolbar: External Reference –

Command line: REFCLOSES

Use this command to save external reference changes and close the refedit toolbar. The external
reference editing mode will be completed. The REFEDIT term, separated by a colon, that was
added to the document name in the tab will disappear.

Discard external reference changes

Menu: Tools – External reference > Discard changes

Toolbar: External Reference –

Command line: REFCLOSED

Use this command to discard external reference changes and close the External Reference
toolbar. The external reference editing mode will be completed. The REFEDIT term, separated
by a colon, that was added to the document name in the tab will disappear.

External references control

Menu: Insert – External References…

Command line: EXTERNALREFERENCES, IMAGES, XREF

The command opens the External References dialog box. It displays all external references
contained in the document and manages these references:

350
nanoCAD Mechanica

ATTENTION! In Edit References mode (REFEDIT) opening of External references dialog is blocked.

The dialog box displays information about the references to the inserted drawings as well as for
the raster images.
The dialog box contains the tool buttons and two sections: External References and Details.
Both panes are working in the double data display mode.
The External References pane can display information about references in a list structure (the

Show List button) or in a tree structure (the Show tree button). The list view is set by
default in the window.
The Details pane displays the properties of the references selected in the upper section in the
list view (the Show properties button) or displays the content of the selected reference in a

preview window (the Show preview button).

The options of the External References pane in the Show list:
Columns

Name Displays the name of the external reference file

351
nanoCAD Mechanica

Status Displays the status of the external reference file:

Loaded – the referenced file is attached to the
current drawing.
Unloaded – the referenced file is marked to be
unloaded from the drawing.
Not found – the referenced file no longer exists
in the valid search path.

Unresolved – the referenced file cannot be read.

Orphaned – the referenced file is attached to
another file that has an Unresolved status.

Size Displays the size of the attached referenced file.

Type *.dwg files display the file type of the referenced file:

Attachments

Overlays
Raster images display their file format:

TIFF

BMP

JPG

JPEG

PNG

PCX

Date The date when the referenced file was created or last saved.
Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the
referenced file is attached.

Left double-click on separator of column names changes the width of columns automatically.
Buttons

Unload XRef Unloads the selected file references from the drawing.

Reload XRef Reloads the selected file references to the drawing.

Detach XRef Detaches the selected file references.

Save XRef Changes the selected raster image references. It is possible to
change the reference file name, file type and file format.

Open from Changes the full path to the selected reference. When you click
this button the dialog window opens and you can select another
path or external reference name.
Embed image Embed of raster images to the document. Such image saved in the
document, not in separate file.

Show list Displays the references information in the list view.

Show tree Displays the references information in the tree view.

When the External References pane is set to the list view, it is possible to select several
references:

352
nanoCAD Mechanica

when the SHIFT key is pressed, then all references located between the first and last
click will be selected;

353
nanoCAD Mechanica

when the CTRL key is pressed, you can select any references from the list by clicking.
When the External References pane is set to the tree view, a tree structure of all external
references along with their levels of nesting within the drawing will be displayed.

It is possible to select only one file reference in the tree view of the External References pane.
The options of the Details pane in the list view:
Columns

Name Displays the name of the external reference file.

Status Displays the status of the external reference file:
Loaded – the referenced file is attached to the current
drawing.
Unloaded – the referenced file is marked to be
unloaded from the drawing.
Not Found – the referenced file no longer exists in the
valid search path.

Size Displays the size of the attached referenced file.

The size of the attached referenced file doesn’t display when the
reference has the status:

Unloaded

Not Found

Type *.dwg files display the file type of the referenced file:

Attachment

Overlay
Raster images display their file format:

TIFF

BMP

JPG

JPEG

PNG
PCX

354
nanoCAD Mechanica

Data The date when the referenced file was created or last saved.
The date doesn’t display when referenced file has the status:

Unloaded

Not Found

Saved Path Displays the path of the referenced file.

NOTE! The saved path does not necessarily indicate the present file
location.

Found at Displays the path where the external reference file is located.
This place is the actual file location.

NOTE! The full path and saved path may be different.

Colordepth Color information of raster.

Resolution Resolution of raster (points per inch).
Pixel Width Width of raster, pxl.
Pixel Height Height of raster, pxl.

Buttons

Displays the properties of the selected referenced file in the list view.
Show
properties

Show preview Displays contents of the selected referenced file in the preview
window.

The External references dialog box displays not only information about inserted references, but
also allows you to perform operations with drawing files which are referenced.
These operations are:

Load/unload of the external reference in the current drawing.

Embed external reference to the current drawing.

Reload the external reference to show in the current drawing the last changes in the
external reference file. (without reloading the current drawing).

Delete the entry of the external reference with all data from the current drawing. If you
only delete the reference from the drawing it will not delete the layers of the external
reference. To permanently delete an external reference, use the Detach command
in the External references dialog box.
Changes the selected raster image references. It is possible to change the referenced
file name, file type and file format.

Change of the external reference to the raster image

To change reference to the image:
1. In the External References dialog box, select the reference to the image in the list.

2. Click the Save button.

3. In the opened Save Image File dialog box, specify the file name and file type:

354
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Click the Options button.

5. In the TIFF Options dialog box, set the necessary parameters:

6. Click OK.
7. Click Save.

355
nanoCAD Mechanica

Bind external references

When you bind external reference into a current drawing, the reference becomes the part of
drawing and converts into a standard block description. There are two ways to bind external
reference: binding and insertion.
When external reference binds, descriptions of its named objects (blocks, layers, text and
dimension styles, line types) are changing. For example, before binding the layer named HATCH
from the Ex_ref.dwg displayed in dialog Layers like Ex_ref|HATCH. After binding it displayed as
follows: Ex_ref$n$HATCH (n=0,1,2,3… - the number increases automatically, if the layer with
the same name already exists in the current drawing). Unique names are thus generated in
symbol table of current drawing for all descriptions of named objects binding into external
reference.
Bind external reference mode is equivalent to the removal xref and subsequent insertion of xref
drawing as block to current layer using button Open in Insert block dialog (menu Insert –
Block). Names of dependent xref descriptions of named objects in this case are not converted.
Redefinition of named object not made if the name of description of binding named object
coincides with name of an object that already exists in the drawing. Binded named object inherits
properties of exist in current drawing named object. For example, before binding the layer
named HATCH from the Ex_ref.dwg displayed in dialog Layers like Ex_ref|HATCH. After binding
of external reference it will have name: HATCH.
To bind external reference:
1. Select external reference in dialog box External references.
2. Show popup menu.
3. Select the command Bind…
4. In the box Bind xrefs select the bind type: Bind or Insert.

5. Click OK.
6. Click the button Close to close the dialog External references.

Bind named objects of external references

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Modify – Object > Bind external reference

Command line: XBIND

The command binds into a current drawing descriptions of named objects (blocks, layers, text
and dimension styles, line types), which external reference contains.
An inserted external reference contains not only graphical objects (lines, circles, arcs and etc.)
but also block descriptions, dimension styles, text styles and line types. Descriptions of named
objects of an external reference do not become a part of a current drawing: during every update
of an external reference the objects are loaded again from the drawing of the external reference,

356
nanoCAD Mechanica

because descriptions of named objects can change or even delete when a file of external
reference is edited. The names of blocks, dimension styles and etc. of an external reference are
different from the names of similar objects in a current drawing. A vertical line (|) and a file
name of an external reference are placed before named object name belonging to an external
reference. For example, a layer having HATCH name of Ext_reference.dwg external reference file
name is displayed as Ext_reference|HATCH in the Layers dialog. If the HATCH layer is deleted
from an external reference file, its name disappears in a current drawing. That is why it is
forbidden to use named objects of an external reference in a current drawing. For example, it is
impossible to insert a block in a current drawing, belonging to an external reference or make a
layer, belonging to an external reference, current and create object on it.
To allow using named objects of an external reference in a current drawing it is needed to bind
them into a current drawing using the XBIND command. Named objects depending on an
external reference becomes object of a current drawing after binding, and can be edited and
used as named objects of a drawing.
Names of objects of an external reference are modified during binding – a vertical line (|) is
changed to two dollar signs, and a value (0 – the first binding, 1 – the second binding etc.) is
placed between them. For example, a layer’s name of an external reference
Ext_reference|HATCH becomes Ext_reference$0$HATCH after binding. Binded named objects of
an external reference can be renamed in contrast with objects depending on an external
reference.
Run Bind external reference command

Parameters:

Xrefs The window contains a structure tree of a current file and shows definitions of
named objects, external references and depending definitions of named
objects in a file.

357
nanoCAD Mechanica

Details The window shows information about external references and definitions of
named object in a current drawing and external references.
To view information about external reference:

Select the link in the XBIND dialog:

To view information about definitions of named objects in a current

drawing:
In the XBIND dialog select a required definition of a named
object. Names of windows are changed dynamically:

358
nanoCAD Mechanica

To select definition of a named object in an external reference:

In the XBIND dialog select the required definition of a named

object of an external reference. Names of windows are changed
dynamically:

Copy selected definition of the named object of external reference to Bind

list.
Remove selected definition of the named object of external reference from
Bind list.
To bind definitions of named objects into a current drawing from an external reference:
1. In the XBIND dialog Xrefs field click on «+» sign to the left of the selected link.
Unfolded branch of a tree contains a list of objects definitions (blocks, line types and
text styles).
2. Click the “+” sign to the left of definition name of a named object.
A new branch of a tree contains a list of definitions of a named object.
3. Select a definition of a named object.
4. Click the Add button.
Definiton of the named object is moving to Bind list.
5. Repeat 2, 3 and 4 steps to select other definitions of named objects.
6. You can remove incorrectly added definition from Bind list using Remove button.
7. To bind selected definitions of named object in a current drawing click the OK button.

Working with raster images

nanoCAD contains tools for creating and editing of raster images.
According to used tool you can edit monochrome, color and/or grayscale images saved in internal
or external format (TIFF, BMP, JPG, JPEG, PNG, PCX).

359
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert raster image

Menu: Insert – Image from file…

Menu: Raster – Image from file…

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: ROPEN, INSERTRASTER

You can insert images into the drawing. The list of supported raster formats is displayed in the
Raster file formats section of the Options dialog box (the Tools menu – Options):

Raster images can be referenced and placed in drawing files but, like external references, they
are not actually part of the drawing file. The image is linked to the drawing file through a path
name. Linked image paths can be changed or removed at any time.
Once you've attached an image, you can reattach it multiple times, treating it as if it were a
block. Each insertion has its own clip boundary and its own settings for brightness, contrast,
fade, and transparency.
You can insert in the drawing a number of raster image files with the same name but different
content. In such a case, a sequence number will automatically be added to the names of such
images via an underscore sign “_” starting with 1.
To insert a raster image, specify the necessary options in the opened Insert Raster Image
dialog box.

360
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Name: Includes the list of names of the inserted images.

Opens the Insert Raster Image dialog box.

Path: Displays the path where the raster image file must be located.

Insert Point

Specify Select the box to set the X,Y,Z coordinates values in the command line or specify
On-screen the position on the screen. The «X» «Y» «Z» fields of this section are inaccessible.

X: Y: Z: Enter the X, Y, Z coordinate values for the raster image insertion in the
corresponding fields.

Scale

Specify Select the box to set the scale value of the raster image in the command line or
On-screen specify the position on the screen. The «X» «Y» «Z» fields of this section are
inaccessible.

W: Set the scale factor width.

H: Set the scale factor height.

Uniform Specifies the scale factor for the Width or Height values. A value specified for
Scale Width is also reflected in the Height value.

Rotation

Specify Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted image, using the pointing device.
On-screen

361
nanoCAD Mechanica

Angle: Sets the rotation angle for the inserted image.

Insert image relative to

UCS Sets the insert image mode relative to the User Coordinate System (UCS).

View Sets the insert image mode relative to the World Coordinate System (WCS)

Auto Switches on/off the full screen mode of the inserted reference.
zoom

To insert georeferenced raster image, check Use World of TAF file in Options dialog.

Create new image and rasterize objects

New Image from Selection

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – New Image from Selection

Toolbar: Raster –

Command line: NEWRASTERFROMSELECTION

Selection for new image can contains:

raster images;

vector objects.

Color of rasterized objects depends on color space:

Monocrome images - rasterized objects will have color of monochromу image.

Color Image - rasterized objects will have original color.

362
nanoCAD Mechanica

How to create new image from selection

1. Select objects and run New Image from Selection command;
2. Set options in New Image from Selection dialog.

3. Click ОК.

New Image from Selected dialog settings:

Image Parameters

Option Description
Width Specify width and height for the new image.
Height
By Paper Choose from the list of standard paper sizes.
Color Space: Specify color space – monochrome, grayscale, indexed or TrueColor.

363
nanoCAD Mechanica

DPI Set resolution in DPI (dots per inch).

Portrait Select orientation.
Landscape
Initial color Choose background color for color images.

If your selection contains raster images it’s better to set Resolution and Color Space not lower
than best raster image to avoid quiality reduction. For example, if you have raster grayscale
raster image with 300 dpi, you should set Grayscale or TrueColor, and Resolution not lower
than 300dpi.
Source
Select objects/area for rasterization:

Option Description

Extens All objects.

Selection Selected objects.
Display Visible area.
Window Seleact area by window To redefine use button.

Position, Margins and Scale

Option Description

Fit Image to Selection Select scale to fit all objects to single image.
Nearest Image Scale Select nearest standard scale to fit all objects to single image.
Image Scale Set scale manually or from list

364
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using Image Scale you can create more than one image with specified scale.

In this case files will be created with order number:

Set margins and image position.

Embedd or save as

Option Description

Name Specify name for the image It can be done manually or using
macroses:

Select variable, press button.

You can see preview of result in top part.

Format Select format for raster file: Embedded TIF, TIFF, BMP, JPG, JPEG,

PNG, PCX. For some format additional options are available by

button.
Folder Specify folder for raster image file. If Current document folder is
selected – image wil be saved to the same folder where drawing is
stored.
Not available for <Embedded Image>.

365
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mode Action with selected object after rasterization:

Keep vectors after rasterizing;

Delete vectors after rasterizing.

Insert Image Insert created image to current document.
Always true for <Embedded Image>.

Finish your work

Buttons.

Button Function

ОК Create raster image. All dialog settings will be saved.

Close Close the dialog with saving all dialog settings. Raster will be not
created.
Cancel Close dialog without changes.
Load Load the dialog settings fron the template file .tpl.
Save Save the dialog settings to template file .tpl.
Help Open Help.

Save as raster
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Command line: RASTEROUT

The command exports part of drawing to graphic format.
After start you will see prompt with a list of selectable options in the command line.
When the command runs in Model space:
Specify area to rasterize <Screen> or [Screen/Extents/Window/]:
When the command runs in Layout:
Specify area to rasterize <Screen> or [Screen/Layout/Window/]:
Options:

Screen Export the current view of the screen into graphic format.
Window Select export area by frame..
Specify first window corner: - Specify the first corner of
rectangle frame.
Specify second window corner: - Specify opposite corner of
rectangle frame.

Extents Export of all objects. Option is displayed when the command runs in
Model space.
Layout Export of all layout contents. Option is displayed when the command
runs in Layout.

366
nanoCAD Mechanica

Further inquires of command:

Input file folder Press ENTER to save the file

<C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int in the previous path, or
7.0\Samples> or [Browse/]: browse the path in dialog by
selecting option Browse .
Input file name <Untitled0_Layout1>: Press ENTER to save the file
under the previous name or
enter new name.
Choose file type <EMF> or Press ENTER to save the file
[EMF/WMF/TIF/TIFF/BMP/JPG/JPEG/PNG/PCX/]: in the previous format or
enter other format.
Specify DPI <300> or Press ENTER to save the file
[75/150/200/300/400/600/1000/1200/]: in the previous format or
enter other format.

Create New Raster Image

Menu: Raster – New Image

Toolbars: Raster –

Command line: NEWRASTER

Create new (empty) raste image and insert it to current document.
1. Run New Image command.
2. In New Image dialog set desired options.
3. Click ОК.
4. Specify insertion point.
New Imagedialog options

367
nanoCAD Mechanica

See the New Image from Selection command for options details.

Merge data on raster images

Operations of merge add selected data to raster images by rasterization method.
Selection can consist of:

raster images;

vector data.
When operations Merge (Rasterize) performed, only part of selection transferred which placed
inside raster image. Part of selection placed outside the boundaries of resulting image is
ignored.
Resulting raster image is one or some images, there selection should be added. Commands
Merge (Rasterize) rasterize sample on all visible images placed under selection on non-locked
layers.

Merge
Add selected data to raster image.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – Merge (Rasterize)

Toolbar: Raster –

Command line: MERGE

1. Select data for rasterize.
2. Place it under the resulting image.
3. Run the command Merge.
Source data disappear.

368
nanoCAD Mechanica

Merge a Copy (Rasterize)

Add the copy of data to raster image and save original.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – Merge a Copy (Rasterize)

Панель: Raster –

Command line: DUPLICATE

1. Select data for rasterize.
2. Place it under the resulting image.
3. Run the command Merge a Copy (Rasterize).
Copy of selected data rasterized. Original saved.

Displaying quality of raster images

Image Adjust
Menu: Raster – Image Adjust

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Command line: IMAGEADJUST
You can adjust the brightness, contrast and fade for the display of the raster image without
affecting the original raster image file. The image adjustment is intended for improvement of the
display of raster images (adjust contrast to make poor-quality images easier to read) or special
effects. Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for brightness, contrast or fade.
Raster image is selected by its contour (frame or show border).
To adjust raster image options, use the Image Adjust dialog box. Open the dialog by double
clicking on image boundary.

369
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters:

Raster Image: List of the raster images inserted in the drawing.

Adjustment

Brightness: Controls the brightness of the image.

Contrast: Controls the contrast of the image.

Fade: Controls the fading effect of the image.

Visibility

Show Image Sets the display of the image on the screen. If the box is not selected, only the
contour of the raster image is displayed.

Show Clipped Displays the image area in the show border that has been set.

Transparency Sets the transparency mode of the raster images. When the transparency
mode is set to on, it is possible to show the objects of the raster image
through transparent pixels. For example, in bitonal images, background pixels
are treated as transparent.
You can set the transparency of the raster image in the Properties panel
(General section).

Resets the values for brightness, contrast and fade to the default settings.

Methods for setting the slider:

1. Place the cursor over the slider. When the slider is highlighted, press the left mouse
button and keeping it held down, move the cursor left to decrease or right to increase
the setting value. Choose the required position for the slider and release the mouse
button; the value will be displayed in the box to the right of the scale.
2. Place the cursor at the point on scale to which the slider should be moved. Left click to
set the slider to the selected point.
3. Enter the required value settings in the box to the right of the scale.

370
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. In the box to the right of the scale, click the up arrow to increase or down arrow to
decrease the value settings by one.
It is possible to set a new show boundary for the inserted raster image (the New command from
the Modify menu – Clip).
The show boundary of the raster image can be transparent. The value of transparency 100
makes the contour invisible in the drawing, but a raster image can be selected.
To change the transparency of the raster image contour:
1. Select the raster image.
2. Set the transparency level in the Transparency field of the General section of the
Properties panel.
The IMAGEFRAME system variable allows you to manage the visibility of the clipping contour
and raster counter. If the system variable is set to value 1 (set by default), the counter is
displayed on the screen and you can select it and print it. If system variable is set to value 0, the
counter visibility is turned off and you cannot select it and print it. If system variable is set to
value 2, the counter is displayed on the screen, but you cannot print it.
There are commands in the Raster menu – Object > Image > to make work with
IMAGEFRAME system variable easier:
Frame On - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 1
Frame Off - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 0
Print Off - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 2

Quality of raster images

This function changes quality of raster images from high (by default) to draft, accelerates image
downloading and improves system performance when processing large images.

Menu: Raster – Image Quality

Command line: IMAGEQUALITY

To change the quality of raster image:
1. Run command Image Quality.
2. Select needed option in the command line: IMAGEQUALITY <High>: [High/Draft/] .

Separate Raster Image

Menu: Raster – Separate raster

Command line: SEPARATERASTER

You can separate rasters from original reference and assign new name and path, if rasrer image
was inserted to drawing more then once or its copies were created in a session.
1. Run command Separate raster.
2. Select raster images to create separate references to files.
3. Press ENTER .
Separated raster images marked in External references dialog by adding _clone_N to the
name, N – ordinal number of copy, and by status – Not Found.

371
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can give new name and path for raster image if press button Save.
If separate raster images are not saved, then program prompts you to save it when shutdown.

Embed Raster Image

In nanoCAD there is a mechanism for embedding of raster images. Inserted images saved in
external raster files can be emdedded and saved in drawing file.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

To embed the raster:
1. Open dialog External References (menu Insert – External References).
2. Select reference to a raster image.

3. Click the Embed image button.

Embedded image has no saved path, and type of reference becomes Embeded.

ATTENTION! Embeded raster images increase the file size greatly.

Using Save file dialog command and assigning saved path you can make the image inserted
as reference again.

372
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing of Raster Images

Cropping of raster images

The size of raster image can be reduced to determined area by using Crop operations. This area
can be determined by set clip of image or rectangle. Also raster can be cropped automatically
using procedure that determines empty image fields and crops them.
These operations apply to multiple images at once. For example you can crop pack of images
place one above the other.

Auto crop
Autocrop performs cropping of “empty” image field to the minimum possible size of the
rectangle, exciting all raster data.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – Crop – Auto

Toolbar: Image –

Command line: CROPAUTO

1. Select raster to be processed on the screen. If there was no selected images, then the
command processes all visible images placed in non-locked layers.
2. Run the command.

Original raster image

373
nanoCAD Mechanica

The result of the Autocrop command

Auto crop by frame

If the raster has a frame, then the command automatically changes the size of raster by the
frame.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – Crop – Auto by frame

Toolbar: Image –

Command line: CROPBYFRAME

If the image has deformations, use the Descew command for correct CROPBYFRAME behavior.
1. Select raster to be processed on the screen. If there was no selected images, then the
command processes all visible images placed in non-locked layers.
2. Run the command.
If the raster has no frame, then the result of Auto crop by frame is similary to the Crop → Auto.

Crop by Rectangle
Cropping can reduce an image size to a specified rectangular area size.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Crop by Rectangle

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

Command line: CROPBYRECT

1. Start the command.
2. Specify two opposite corners for the rectangular area in the raster.
Parts of an image outside the specified area are cropped.

Crop by clip

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster – Crop – By Clip

374
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Image –

Command line: CROPBYCLIP

To crop the raster by clip, the clip of the raster image should be predefined (Modify → Clip →
New… command).
1. Select raster to be processed (visible and placed in non-locked layers). If there was no
selected images, then the command processes all visible images placed in non-locked
layers that have the clip.
2. Run the command.
The raster image will be cropped by the clip of the raster image.

Correction by four points

The command is used for correction of scanned images with frame. It is suggested that the
image frame and its content are distorted equally.
To perform this procedure, specify the desired frame size – its height and width, and the
appropriate current position of the frame corner dots on the image. After correction the image is
transformed so that the frame corners are moved to the rectangular frame corners of the
specified size, whose sides are parallel to image sides.
If no image is selected, then this command processes all visible images located on unlocked
layers.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – 4 point correction

Command line: FRAMING

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

To perform four point correction:
1. Select the images to correct by four-point correction. If no image is selected, then this
command processes all visible images located on unlocked layers.
2. Start the command. The 4-point Correction dialog will be displayed:

375
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Click the Find frame button. If the program is able to find the drawing frame,
then you will see a blue polygon over the image close to the raster lines. If a frame is
mot found specify it manually.

4. To specify the frame corners manually, press the button and click the frame corners
on the image. These points can be specified in an arbitrary order because the program
always sorts them so they form the frame without intersections. Watch the red
rubberline to control, press BACKSPACE to go to previous frame corner if necessary.
5. In the Frame size field specify Width and Height.
6. Select orientation – Landscape or Portrait.
7. Press OK.

Find closest format button starts searching closest standard paper format.
Or you can select format manually in Frame Size combo-box.
For standard paper formats you can use Use internal frame option to correct frame size
depending on paper format settings. Internal frame size can be defined in Papers section of the
Options dialog ( Tools - Options).

376
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set the internal page frame size:

1. Select paper format in Paper formats section.
2. Press Modify button.
3. In the Modify paper format dialog - set Internal frame and specify margins in
Frame margins fields.

For paper formats without internal frame specified Use Internal Page Frame option in 4-point
Correction dialog will be disabled.

377
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mirroring
The operation allows mirroring an image about either vertical or horizontal axis crossing the
image centre.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Mirror >

By X Axis

By Y Axis

Command line:
MIRRORX
MIRRORY

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

1. Select images to mirror. If no image is selected, then this command processes all visible
images located on unlocked layers.
2. Start the command Raster Modify – Mirror > select condition:

By X Axis, to mirror about horizontal direction;

By Y Axis, to mirror about vertical direction

Rotation
The operation rotates image around a central point, using three fixed rotation angles (90°, 180°
or 270°) or any angle. When an image is rotated at any angle the image size increases to
inscribe rotated initial image.
To rotate at 90°, 180°, 270° angles:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Rotate >

90 ccw

180

90 cw

Command line:

ROTATEAT90

ROTATEAT180

ROTATEAT270

378
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

379
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the images to rotate. If no image is selected, then this command processes all visible
images located on unlocked layers.
Start the command Raster Modify – Rotate > select rotation condition.

To rotate at custom angle:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Rotate > Custom Angle…

Command line: ROTATEATANGLE

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

1. Select the images to rotate. If no image is selected, then this command processes all
visible images located on unlocked layers.
2. Start the command.
3. Enter rotation angle to Angle field.

Or press Measure and specify line by 2 points. Angle will be measured between this
line and X-axis.
4. Select OK.

Deskewing
This operation enables an image skew resulting from scanning to be corrected. The whole image
is rotated about its central point in order to eliminate either horizontal or vertical skew. When an
image is rotated at any angle the image size increases to inscribe rotated initial image.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Deskew >

Auto

Manual

Command line:

DESKEWAUTO

ROTATEATANGLE

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

380
nanoCAD Mechanica

To deskew an image automatically:

1. Select the images to deskew. If no image is selected, then this command processes all
visible images located on unlocked layers.
2. Start the command Deskew > Auto.
If the program is able to estimate the rotation angle, then raster images will be deskewed.
Otherwise, use the manual deskewing procedure.
To deskew an image manually:
1. Select the images to deskew. If no image is selected, then this command processes all
visible images located on unlocked layers.
2. Start the command Deskew > Manual.
3. Enter agle value to the Angle field.

Or press Measure and specify line for deskew by start and end points.
4. Press OK.

Pixel drawing
Tools for pixel drawing used for drawing and erasing rater data of an image.
To draw on raster image:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Pencil

Command line: PENCIL

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

Command prompts:
Draw or input pencil width: Enter the value.
Draw curve on raster or "Enter" to Draw a line.
finish:
To erase on raster image:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Eraser

Command line: RASTERERASER

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

380
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:
Draw or input eraser size: Enter the value.
Draw curve on raster or "Enter" to Draw a line.
finish:

Floodfilling
The floodfilling tools allows the filling of closed raster outlines with the raster object color
(foreground) and also to erase isolated raster objects by filling them with the raster background
color.
To fill rater contour with flood:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Flood Fill

Command line: WHITEFLOODFILL

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

Specify a point within a closed outline on a monochrome raster image.
To erase with flood:

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Raster Modify – Flood Erase

Command line: BLACKFLOODFILL

Toolbar: Raster Modify –

Specify any point in the isolated raster area to be erased.

Image settings
Menu: Insert – External References…

Command line: EXTERNALREFERENCES, IMAGES, XREF

nanoCAD allows you to convert the inserted images into other supported raster file formats. The
list of supported raster file formats is shown in the Options dialog box (the Tools menu – the
Options command).
For the TIFF format, you can also change settings such as color mode, compression,
organization, byte order; for JPG and JPEG formats – Image Quality.
To save an image to another format or to change the format parameters:
1. In the External References dialog box select raster references and click Save.
2. In the opened Save Image File dialog box, type the new file name, select the file type
from the drop-down list and click the Options button.
3. Depending on the selected file type, the TIFF Options dialog box or the JPEG Options
dialog box will be open.

381
nanoCAD Mechanica

TIFF saving options

The settings of this dialog box also apply to other types of TIFF-formats, including multiple-page
TIFF and TIFF with geodata.
If part of a multiple TIFF-file includes images of different types, such as color and bitonal, then
you can adjust separately for each of these types.
There is a separate tab for each of the color modes. For example, to adjust the saving options for
a 256-color image in TIFF, it is necessary to use the 256 Indexed tab.

382
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Compression: Drop-down list to select the raster degree of compression.

Depending on the selected color mode, the following parameters in the list
are available:

No compression - Raster is saved without compression. In

this case, the file will be of a large size. At the same time the
file can be read by any program that supports working with
TIFF.

CCITT modified Huffman RLE - The compression type,

which combines Huffman and RLE algorithms. It is used to
compress the bitonal rasters.

CCITT Group 3 fax encoding - The compression type, which

uses the Huffman algorithm with a fixed table for compressing
bitonal rasters. The following options are available for this
compression type:

2-D Encoding – The most effective data compression.

Fill To Byte Boundary - Controls the method of

defining the line start. When this option is on, a new
line always starts with the bits number of a multiple
byte.
CCITT Group 4 fax encoding - The compression type that is
optimal for the bitonal rasters. It is supported by most raster
editors and ensures the best compression of bitonal data.

Macintosh RLE (Packbits) - The compression type that is

optimal for color images. It is supported by most raster
editors. At the Striped or Tiled internal organization, the use
of this compression type in some cases can give an increase
of file size compared to the saved file without compression

ZIP (Deflate compression) - The compression type that

uses an algorithm similar to that used in the ZIP archiver. It
can be used with any raster types. Versions of the AutoCAD
2005 and earlier don’t support reading TIFF-files with ZIP-
compression. Versions of the Spotlight 6.0, RasterID 3.0 and

383
nanoCAD Mechanica

earlier also cannot read files of this compression type. In

384
nanoCAD Mechanica

some cases, attempting to open files of this compression type

can lead to fatal errors. Use the slider to control the degree of
compression:

Set the maximum degree of compression to reduce the file

size. But this leads to an increase in the time taken for
reading/saving the raster image.

Lempel-Ziv & Welch - The compression type that uses a

universal compression algorithm without data loss. This
algorithm has a high work speed when compressing and when
decompressing. The inconvenience is the low degree of
compression in comparison with a scheme of two stage
encoding. This compression type is used also in GIF and PDF
formats.

JPEG DCT compression - The compression type that uses a

JPEG algorithm. The same algorithm is used in the similarly-
named JPEG format. It is designed to compress color rasters.
It allows the highest degree of compression to be achieved.
Also, as described above for the ZIP-compression, JPEG-
compression is not supported by all raster editors. JPEG-
compression, unlike any other compressions which are used in
TIFF-format, is performed with some data loss. This
compression type is very useful to create a reduced size file,
for example, for Internet transmission. But it is not
recommended to use it to store important information.
Indeed, whenever you save a TIFF-file to JPEG-compression,
recompression is performed, in which the quality of raster
deteriorates. Use the slider to control the degree of
compression:

Increasing the degree of compression reduces the file size,

but this leads to a reduction of its quality. At the maximum
degree of compression you can get raster that may be
deformed beyond recognition.

Organization: A drop-down list to select the type of internal organization of the TIFF-file.
The following options are available:

Row – All data within the file are written in one block. This
organization type is also called blocked. TIFF-files of this
organization have the highest compatibility with other
programs designed for viewing and editing of rasters.

Striped – All data within the file are written in the form of
individual portions of lines. In this way, in some cases, the
downloading and viewing of images are accelerated. But in
some cases, a combination of the row and striped organization
and one of the compression types, for example, Macintosh
RLE (Packbits) leads to an increase of the file size instead of

385
nanoCAD Mechanica

the expected reduction.

Tiled – All data within the file are written in the form of
fragment, so-called tiles. This organization type is not
supported by all raster editors. The use of the tile organization
can speed up viewing of rasters.

Byte Order: A drop-down list to select the byte order in the word, which is different for
PC and Macintosh.
Two options are available:
Intel (little-endian) - Byte order in which the junior (least
significant) byte is written first.

Motorola (big-endian) - Byte order in which the senior

(most significant) byte is written first.

Save Thumbnail Switching on/off the mode to save a file with a reduced copy of the image
(thumbnail).
Thumbnail is used to quickly view the file content in the file open dialog
box.
It should be remembered that when you switch on the Save Thumbnail
mode, the TIFF-file will be saved as multipage and it cannot be read by all
raster editors.

JPG and JPEG saving options

You can change the degree of compression for JPG and JPEG file formats.
Use the slider to control the degree of compression:

Increasing the degree of compression reduces the file size, but this leads to a reduction in its
quality. At the maximum degree of compression you can get a raster that may be deformed
beyond recognition.

Underlays
nanoCAD supports DWF, DWFX, PDF files insertion as underlays. Editing commands like Copy,
Move, Rotate, Mirror, Scale, and others are available for underlays.
Properties dialog box displays some underlay settings: Contrast, Fade, Adjust colors for
background, monochrome:

386
nanoCAD Mechanica

Underlay in the drawing has one grid in the bottom left corner. Use it to move the underlay.

Underlay has a frame that shows max underlay size. Use PDFFRAME system variable to show
(1) or hide (0) a frame.

Insert Underlay
Menu: Insert – Underlay…

Command line: UATTACH

Insert DWF, DWFX и PDF underlays to the drawing.

387
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Name: List of inserted underlays’ names.

Open Select Underlay file dialog to select and insert new

underlay.
Path type: Information about path of underlay file. Variants:

Full path

Relative path

No path

Insertion point

Specify on-screen Select the insertion point after the dialog box is closed.
X: Y: Z: Specify the point coordinates for the underlay insertion.

Scale

Specify on-screen Specify the scale of underlay after the dialog box is closed.
W: Width scale factor.
H: Height scale factor.
Uniform scale Specifies the scale factor for the Width or Height values. A value
specified for Width is also reflected in the Height value.

Rotation

Specify on-screen Specify the rotation angle for the inserted underlay, using the
pointing device.
Angle: Set the rotation angle for the inserted underlay.

388
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert image relative to

UCS Set the insert underlay mode relative to the User Coordinate
System (UCS).
View Sets the insert underlay mode relative to the World Coordinate
System (WCS).
Auto zoom Switches on/off the full screen mode of the inserted underlay.

Pages

Show/hide underlay page information (type, size, layer).

Zoom and pan buttons in preview dialog.

Selected Numbers of selected pages to insert.

Buttons for transition between pages in underlay.

Show boundary
This option shows a set of raster images, blocks or external references in the enclosed area. (see
“Set show boundary for a viewport” section).
The show boundary defines the visibility of objects in the current document. The original objects
are not changed.
Setting of the clip boundary is achieved using the clipping contour.
Clipped blocks or external references, raster images and viewports can be edited as well as
unclipped ones.

Setting of the show boundary for the block or external

reference
Menu: Modify – Clip > XRef

Command line: XCLIP

The command sets the clipping contour of the show boundary to display the section of the
inserted block or external reference.
When a block or external reference is selected, the command to show boundary becomes
available from the context menu for your convenience:

The command doesn’t change the objects of the block or external reference (the definition of the
block or external reference remains unchanged). Creation of the clipping contour affects only the
display block or an external reference in the current document.

389
nanoCAD Mechanica

If a block or external reference has been inserted more than once, it is possible to specify
different clipping contours for each entry, but each entry can have only one contour.
Clipping of the block or external reference is carried out by a polygonal contour: rectangle,
polygon or closed polyline.
The XCLIPFRAME system variable is designed to set the visibility of the boundary of the clipping
contour. If the system variable is set to a value of 1, the boundary of the clipping contour will be
displayed on the screen. You can select it and print it out. If the system variable is set to a value
of 0, the visibility of the boundary will be turned off (set by default).

Display of the boundary of the clipping Display of the boundary of the clipping
contour is turned on contour is turned off
(system variable XCLIPFRAME =1) (system variable XCLIPFRAME =0)

You can turn off the clipping of the block or external reference to display the full entry and then
turn it on again to display only the clipped area.
A clipped section of the block or external reference can be copied, moved and rotated in the
same way as an entry of the block or external reference that is not clipped. The clipping contour
is copied, moved or rotated with the entry.
The clipping options also extend to attached references: when the main reference is clipped, all
attached references will be clipped too.
The clipping contour can be redefined. Set the new clipping contour to remove the old contour.
After removing the clipping contour, the block or external reference is displayed on the screen in
full.

Option:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

On Mode displays a clipped section of the block or external reference.
Off Mode displays the full entry of the block or external reference.
Clip depth Set near and far clipping planes for the external reference or block.
Objects beyond the limit of the contour set by planes of the space will not be
displayed on the screen.
This option calls the following prompt in the command line:
Specify point for front clipping plane or [Distance/Remove]:
Options:
Distance - Create a clipping plane, passes at a prescribed distance
parallel to the clipping contour.

390
nanoCAD Mechanica

Remove - Delete near and far clipping planes.

Delete Delete the clipping contour for the selected entry of the block or external
reference.
This option deletes the clipping contour and clipping plane.
Generate To automatically create a polyline whose vertices match the vertices of the
Polyline clipping contour.
This option is used to change the current clipping contour: the created
polyline is edited by the PEDIT command (the Modify menu – Object >
Polyline). Then the edited polyline is used to change the existing clipping
contour so that it is based on the new contour.
New Create a new clipping contour.
This option calls the following prompt in the command line:
[Select_polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] < Rectangular >:
Options:
Select polyline - Set the limits contour by the selected closed polyline.
The polyline should be created previously and consist of straight-line
segments.
Polygonal - Set the polygonal contour of the show boundary by
sequenced specifying of the polygonal vertices.
When you set the second and next vertices, you can see the following prompt
in the command line Specify next point or [Undo]:
Undo - Sequenced cancelling of the specified points of the polygonal vertices.
Specified first point cannot be cancelled.
Rectangular - Set the rectangular contour of the show boundary by
sequenced specifying of the opposite rectangular vertices.

External reference before setting of the show External reference after the setting of the
boundary show boundary

The command prompts when you specify a rectangular boundary:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select the block or

reference and press
ENTER.
Enter clipping options Choose New or press
[ON/OFF/Clip_depth/Delete/generate_Polyline/New] ENTER.
<New>: N

391
nanoCAD Mechanica

[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Recrangular] Press ENTER.

<Rectangular>:
Specify first corner: Specify the first corner.
Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite
corner.

The command prompts when you specify a polygonal boundary:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select the block or

reference and press
ENTER.
Enter clipping options Choose New or press
[ON/OFF/Clip_depth/Delete/generate_Polyline/New] ENTER.
<New>: N
[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Recrangular] Choose Polygonal.
<Rectangular>:
Specify first point: Specify the first point.
Specify next point or[Undo]: Specify the second point.
… …
Specify next point or[Undo]: Specify the end point and
press ENTER.

The command prompts when you specify a boundary by polyline:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select the block or

reference and press
ENTER.
Enter clipping options Choose New or press
[ON/OFF/Clip_depth/Delete/generate_Polyline/New] ENTER.
<New>: N
[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Recrangular] Choose Select
<Rectangular>: polyline.
Select_polyline: Select polyline.
To turn on/off clipping of the block or external reference:
1. In the Modify menu click Clip and then On or Off commands.
2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-references or [?]:
Select the entry and press ENTER.
To change the clipping contour of the block or external reference:
1. In the Modify menu click Clip and then the New command.
2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-references or [?]:
Select the entry and press ENTER.
3. In reply to the prompt in the command line Delete old boundary(s)? [Yes/No]
<Yes>: Select Yes or press ENTER.
4. In reply to the prompt in the command line
[Select_polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Select the required
option and set the new clipping contour.

NOTE! It is possible to create a new clipping contour if the old contour is deleted.

To delete the clipping contour:

392
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. In the Modify menu click Clip and then Delete command.

2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-reference or [?]:
Select entry and press ENTER.

Setting of the show boundary for a raster image

Menu: Modify – Clip > New

Command line: NEWCLIP

The command allows you to insert a clip of the raster image into the drawing, to set the display
on the screen and print only the required part of the raster image.
When a raster image is selected the command to show boundary becomes available from the
context menu for your convenience:

Setting of the show boundary of the raster image affects its display in the current document, but
does not change the source image.
Clipping of the raster image is done using a polygonal outline (rectangular, polygonal or closed
polyline), whose vertices are inside the image boundary.
It is possible to specify a different clipping contour for each entry of the same raster image, but
each entry can have only one contour.
The clipping contour can be turned off to display the original image and then back on to show the
clipping image.
The clipping contours can be redefined. When you specify a new clipping contour, the old contour
should be deleted.
After deleting the clipping contour, the raster image is displayed on the screen in its original
boundaries.
The IMAGEFRAME system variable allows you to manage the visibility of the clipping contour
and raster counter. If the system variable is set to value 1 (set by default), the counter is
displayed on the screen and you can select it and print it. If system variable is set to value 0, the
counter visibility is turned off and you cannot select it and print it. If system variable is set to
value 2, the counter is displayed on the screen, but you cannot print it.
There are commands in the Modify menu – Object > Image > to make work with
IMAGEFRAME system variable easier:
Frame On - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 1
Frame Off - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 0
Print Off - Sets IMAGEFRAME = 2
Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Select_polyline Set the limits contour using the selected closed polyline.
The polyline should be created previously and consist of straight-line
segments.
Polygonal Set the polygonal contour of the show boundary by sequenced
specifying of the polygonal vertices.

393
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you set the second and next vertices, you can see the following
prompt in the command line:
Next point or [Undo]:
Option:
Undo - Sequenced cancelling of the specified points of the polygonal
vertices. Specified first point cannot be cancelled.
Rectangular Set the rectangular contour of the show boundary by sequenced
specifying of the opposite rectangular vertices.

Setting the rectangular contour of the show Displaying of the raster image after setting
boundary of the raster image the show boundary

The command prompts when setting the rectangular boundary:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select raster and press

ENTER.
[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Rectangular] Press ENTER.
<Rectangular>:
Specify first corner: Specify the first corner.
Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite
corner.

The command prompts when setting the polygonal boundary:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select raster and press

ENTER.
[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Rectangular] Choose Polygonal.
<Rectangular>:
Specify first point: Specify the first point.
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the second point.
… …
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the end point and
press ENTER.

394
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command prompts when specifying a boundary by a polyline:

Select block or X-references or [?]: Select raster and press

ENTER.
[Select_polyline /Polygonal/Rectangular] Choose Select
<Rectangular>: polyline.
Select_polyline: Select the polyline..
To turn on/off the clipping contour:
1. In the Modify menu, click Clip and then the On or Off commands.
2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-references or [?]:
Select the raster image and press ENTER.
To change the clipping contour:
1. In the Modify menu, click Clip and then the New command.
2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-references or [?]:
Select the raster image and press ENTER.
3. In reply to the prompt in the command line Delete old boundary(s)? [Yes/No]
<Yes>: Select Yes or press ENTER.
4. In reply to the prompt in the command line
[Select_polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Select the required
option and set the new clipping contour.

NOTE! It is possible to create a new clipping contour if the old contour is deleted.

To delete the clipping contour:

1. In the Modify menu, click Clip and then the Delete command.
2. In reply to the prompt in the command line Select block or X-references or [?]:
Select the raster image and press ENTER.

Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are the convenient tool to link graphical objects of the current document with others
(drawings, specifications, etc.) and represent the references to related files. Hyperlinks can point
to files located on your computer, a local network or the Internet as well as to named position in
the current or linked document.
When you place the cursor over an object that is connected to a hyperlink, the hyperlink and
tooltip will display:

Left click on hyperlink with CTRL button pressed to go to the reference. If the named position
was defined for the reference in the current drawing, for example, layout A3, it will be displayed
(recreate) on the screen. If the file was defined for the reference, the corresponding editor (for
example, MS Word for the text file or nanoCAD for *.dwg) will be opened. The hyperlink to the
web-page activates browser and switching it to the specified web site. It some cases it is useful
when the hyperlink opened e-mail client to create the message in it.

394
nanoCAD Mechanica

Hyperlinks can be absolute and relative. Absolute hyperlink contains the full path to the file.
Relative hyperlink contains only part of the path, measured from some URL or from the folder
specified in the HYPERLINKBASE system variable.

Add hyperlinks to the document

Menu: Insert – HyperLink Edit …

Command line: HYPERLINK

The command allows you to select one or several objects in the document to add a hyperlink to
them. After selecting objects and pressing ENTER to confirm the selection, the Hyperlink dialog
box with the following tabs opens: Existing file or Web page, View of This Drawing and E-
mail address.
The Text to display field at the top of the dialog box is common to all of tabs and is used to
enter a hyperlink description in cases when the file name or address, to which reference is made,
do not evidence of the contents of the file or address.

The “Existing file or Web Page” tab

The tab is used to create a hyperlink for an existing file or web page.

395
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Type file or Web page name: Set the file or web-page.

The file name or URL can be entered manually,
inserted from the clipboard or automatically
when you choose from the Or select from
list: section.

Or select from list: The drop-down list to select the recent files,
recently browsed pages and the recent
inserted hyperlinks.
Recent Files The drop-down list of recently used files.
Browsed Pages The drop-down list of recently browsed pages.
Inserted Links The drop-down list of recently inserted
hyperlinks.

Browse for:

The button calls the standard file selection dialog box, where it is possible to
find the file, on which you create a hyperlink.

The button calls the browser to access the web-page for which it is necessary
to set a hyperlink.

The button calls the Select Place in Document dialog box to specify a named
position in the document on which the hyperlink is created.

Path: The field displays the file path for the hyperlink.
When the Use relative path for hyperlink option is on, the file name only
displays.
When the Use relative path for hyperlink option is off, the full path to the
file displays.
Use relative Turns on/off the use of a relative path for hyperlinks.
path for When the option is on, a relative patch to the related file is stored in the
hyperlink hyperlink. The value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable is set
for the relative path. If this variable is not set a value (by default), the relative
path is defined as the path to the current drawing.
When the option is off, the full path to the related file is stored in the
hyperlink.

The “View of This Drawing” tab

The tab is used to create a hyperlink to a named position in the current file or a file for which it is
created.

396
nanoCAD Mechanica

Option:

Select a view of this: Selects a named position in the current drawing for which a
hyperlink is created.

The “E-mail Address” tab

The tab is used to specify an e-mail address of created hyperlink. When you select a hyperlink in
the document, the registered by default e-mail client in which you create new massage opens.

397
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

E-mail address: Enter an e-mail address.

Subject: Enter a subject.
Recently used e-mail addresses: The list of recently used e-mail addresses.

Edit hyperlinks
Menu: Insert – HyperLink Edit…

Command line: HYPERLINK

To edit hyperlinks you should use a slightly different Hyperlink dialog box. It is different from
the dialog box used when you add a link in only one additional option – Remove link button.

398
nanoCAD Mechanica

Option:

Removes a hyperlink from the selected objects.

Description of other options you can see in the «Add hyperlinks to the document» section.

399
nanoCAD Mechanica

EXECUTION OF DRAWINGS COMMANDS

The Filling and Hatch commands

Menu: Draw – Hatch…

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: BHATCH, H, HATCH, HATCHCMD

Hatching in nanoCAD means filling in the selected area with the predefined pattern.
The Hatch pattern is a predefined pattern used to represent different materials such as steel,
concrete, glass and so on. A solid fill can also be used as a hatch pattern.
The hatch can be associative or annotative.
An associative hatch is updated when you change the boundary.
An annotative hatch does not depend upon the boundary.
You can use several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch:
Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects.
or
Select objects that enclose an area.
The Hatch dialog box appears to select the hatch pattern and specify options:

400
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Type and pattern

Type: Drop-down list to select the type of hatch pattern:

The following types are available:

Predefined

User defined

Custom

Pattern: Drop-down list to select the available predefined patterns.

The Pattern option is available only if you set the Type to Predefined.

401
nanoCAD Mechanica

This button opens the Hatch pattern dialog box.

The dialog box contains the tabs:

ANSI – the hatch patterns of the ANSI standad;

ISO – the hatch patterns of the ISO standad

Other Predefined – the hatch patterns that are not related
to the ANSI and ISO standatds;

Custom – the list and patterns of the custom file format

*.pat.

Swatch: Displays a preview of the selected pattern.

Click the swatch to display the Hatch pattern dialog box.

402
nanoCAD Mechanica

Custom pattern: Drop-down list to display the available custom patterns.

The Custom pattern option is only available for Custom type of hatch
pattern.
If you select the Custom option in the drop-down Type list, the Hatch
Pattern dialog box opens on the Custom tab:
The available custom hatch patterns display in the left part of tab. The
selected pattern displays in the right part:

The custom hatch pattern (file with *.pat extension) are placed in the
folder:
C:\ProgramData \Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\SHX.

This button opens the Hatch pattern dialog box.

Angle and scale

Angle: Drop-down list to specify an angle for the hatch pattern

relative to the X axis of the current UCS.
Values can be input from the keyboard.
Scale: Drop-down list to expand or contract a predefined or custom
pattern. Values can be input from the keyboard.
This option is only available if you set the Type to Predefined
or Custom.
Double Turns on/off the mode to draw a second hatch positioned at
90 degrees to the original hatch.
This option is only available if you set the Type to User
Defined.

Hatch origin Setting the start point to create the hatch.

Use current origin
Specified origin
Click to set new origin
Some hatches, such as brick patterns, need to be aligned with
a point on the hatch boundary.
By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS
origin.
Turns on the mode of origin setting stored in the
HPORIGINMODE system variable.
The origin is set to 0,0 by default.
Specifies a new hatch origin.
Specifies the new hatch origin point on the screen using the
cursor.

403
nanoCAD Mechanica

Default boundary extents Turns on/off the mode for calculation of a new origin based on
the rectangular extents of the boundary for the hatch.
From the drop-down list the following options are available:

Bottom left

Bottom right

Top right

Top left

Center
The icon displays the current position of the origin point:

Store as default origin Turns on/off the mode for saving the value of the new hatch
origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.

Boundaries

Add: Pick points Determines a boundary from the existing objects that form an
enclosed area around the specified point. The dialog box
closes temporarily and you are prompted to pick a point.

Add: Select objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an
enclosed area. The dialog box closes temporarily and you are
prompted to select objects.

Remove boundaries Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that
were added previously.
This option is unavailable if you have not specified points or
not selected objects.

Recreate boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch and
optionally associates the hatch object with it.
This option is available when you edit the hatch.

View selection Temporarily closes the Hatch dialog box and displays the
currently defined boundaries with the current hatch settings.
This option is unavailable if you have not specified points or
not selected objects.

Options

Associative Turns the associative hatch mode on/off.

Create separate hatches Turns on/off the mode for changing a single hatch object that
has several separate boundaries into individual hatch objects.
When this mode is turned on, the hatch will be created for
each counter, which representing a separate object.

404
nanoCAD Mechanica

Draw order: Drop-down list to assign the draw order to a hatch or fill.
From the drop-down list the following options are available:

Do not assign
Send to back

Bring to front

Send behind boundary

Bring in front of boundary

Temporarily closes the Hatch dialog box to specify boundaries

Inherit Properties using the hatch properties of a selected hatch object.
Temporarily closes the Hatch dialog box and displays the
currently defined boundaries with the current hatch settings.
Press ESC to return to the dialog box.

, Expands the Hatch dialog box to display more options.

The More Options section of the Hatch dialog box:

405
nanoCAD Mechanica

The More Options section of the Hatch dialog box:

Islands

Island detection Turns on/off the mode to detect internal closed boundaries
(islands).
Island display style Select the island display style.
Hatches inward from the outer boundary.
If the hatch encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching
until it encounters another island within the island.
Normal
Hatches inward from the outer boundary. Hatch turns hatching
off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches only
the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal
structure blank.
Outer

406
nanoCAD Mechanica

Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

Ignore

Boundary retention

Retain boundaries Creates boundary objects from the temporary hatch boundaries
and adds them to the drawing.
Object type: Controls the type of the new boundary object.
The following types are available:

Region

Polyline

Boundary set Defines the set of objects analysed when defining a boundary
from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect
when you use Select Objects to define a boundary.
From the drop-down list the following object sets are available:
Current viewport - Defines the boundary set from
everything within the current viewport.
Existing set - Defines the boundary set from the
objects that you selected with New.

Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when

New objects are used as a hatch boundary.

Gap tolerance

Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when
objects are used as a hatch boundary.
Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the
maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects
serve as a hatch boundary.
Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are
ignored and the boundary is treated as closed.

Inherit options When you use Inherit Properties to create a hatch, these
settings control the location of the hatch origin.
Use current origin Uses the current hatch origin setting.
Using source hatch origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch.
To create hatch:
1. In the Hatch dialog box select the required hatch pattern from the drop-down Pattern
list or in the Hatch pattern dialog box opened after you click icon. The graphic
structure of the selected pattern will be displayed in the Swatch field.
2. Set the required hatch options in the dialog box.
3. Click Add: Pick points icon and specify points inside the areas that need to be hatched.
Or click Add: Select objects icon and select objects that form an enclosed area. The
selected boundaries for the hatch are highlighted by a blue solid line when you pick a
point inside the area and a white dotted line when you select objects. If the results of
highlighting are not satisfactory for any reason, press ESC or click Cancel to cancel the
context menu for the selected boundaries and return to the Hatch dialog box to reset the
selection. The Preview and OK buttons in the opened dialog box will be blocked.

407
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. If the highlighted contour is satisfactory, press ENTER or click the Enter command in
the context menu of the Hatch dialog box.

5. To preview the hatch result, click . To finish the command without

previewing, click OK.
When you preview the hatch result:
1. If the preview of the hatch is satisfactory, click Accept in the command line or click
Enter or Accept in the context menu to finish the command. Pressing ENTER also
finishes the command.
2. If the preview is not satisfactory, select Reject in the command line or click Cancel or
Reject in the context menu to return to the dialog box and change the hatch options.
Pressing ESC also returns to the dialog box.
To create the hatch using the inherited properties of a selected hatch:
1. Click the Inherit properties icon. The Hatch dialog box closes temporarily, to select
the prototype hatch.
2. Select the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit. The Preview
and OK buttons in the opened dialog box will be blocked.
3. After selection, you can right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the
context menu to switch between the Pick Internal Point and Select Objects options
to create boundaries.
4. The order of the rest of the actions corresponds to the order of actions performed when
you create a hatch.

Gradient fill
Gradient filling is sort of filling with effect of smooth transition from one color to another.

Menu: Draw – Gradient…

Панель: Draw –

Command line: GRADIENTCMD, GRADIENT

You can set options of gradient filling in Gradient tab of Hatch dialog.

408
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Color

Color 1 Specifies the first color of gradient filling.

Color 2 Specifies the first color of gradient filling.

Swap colors.

Gradient types

Linear

Cylinder

Spherical

Hemispherical

Curved
Inversed
(inversion of colors)

Orientation

Centered Specifies a symmetrical configuration of gradient.

If this parameter is not set, the gradient filling shifts up and left, making the
illusion of light located to the left from object.

409
nanoCAD Mechanica

Angle Specifies the angle of gradient filling. Angle specified about current UCS and
independently of angle of rotation of hatch.

Fast Hatch
Menu: Draw - Fast Hatch

Toolbar: Draw -
Command line: FASTHATCH, FH
Fast Hatch command creates hatch in selected countors using last parameters of Hatch dialog
box.
To create a fast hatch:
1. Call Fast Hatch command.
2. Specify points inside of countors.
3. Click ENTER to create a hatch.

Fast Gradient
Menu: Draw - Fast Gradient

Toolbar: Draw -

Command line: FASTHGRADIENT, FG

Fast Gradient command creates gradient fill in selected countors using last parameters of
Gradient dialog box.
To create a fast gradient:
1. Call Fast Gradient command.
2. Specify points inside of countors.
3. Click ENTER to create a fradient.

Modify Hatched Areas

Menu: Modify – Object > Hatch …

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Command line: HATCHEDIT

As with any other object, a hatch can be deleted, copied, moved, rotated, etc.
If a hatch is selected, you can change its scale and angle.
You can edit the hatch properties in the Hatch dialog box that is used to create the hatch.
The Edit Hatches command allows you to recreate removed hatch boundaries. When you use
the Edit Hatch command, the Recreate boundary option will be available in the Hatch dialog
box.

410
nanoCAD Mechanica

To recreate a boundary:
1. Start the Hatch command from the Modify – Object

2. In the Hatch dialog box, click the Recreate boundary icon.

3. In the command line or context menu, select the Region or Polyline option to specify
the object type to recreate the boundary.
4. Select Yes or No In the command line prompt Reassociate hatch with new
boundary? [Yes/No] <N>:
5. In the Hatch dialog box click OK.

Shape
Menu: Draw – Shape…

Command line: SHAPE

Shapes represent the objects described in a special format and are saved in text files with SHP
extensions.
Shapes can be part of the description of complex line types (for more information, see the «Line
Types» section).
SHX-fonts are also described and stored in the SHP-files. Each symbol of this font is a special
type of figure.
Shapes are objects that you use like blocks. User-defined shapes are helpful when you need to
insert a simple part many times and when speed is important. Blocks are more versatile and
easier to use and apply than shapes. However, shapes are more efficient to store and draw.
The nanoCAD delivery includes two files (GOST 2.303-68.shx and ltypeshp.shx), containing
forms descriptions. After installation, data files are located in a folder:
C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\SHX.
The GOST 2.303-68.shx file contains the shapes used to describe complex lines types in the
GOST 2.303-68.lin file.
nanoCAD supports shapes created for AutoCAD.
To use the compiled file in nanoCAD, just place it to the folder:
C:\ProgramData\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\SHX.
The Shapes command allows you to insert shapes from (*.SHX) files into the document.
Selection of the file containing the shapes is carried out in the Choose Form dialog box.

411
nanoCAD Mechanica

To insert a shape:
1. In the Shapes section, choose the file. The slides with graphic images of the available
shapes in the file are displayed in the box located in the top right part of the dialog.
2. Select the shape to insert and left click on the shape slide or select the shape name from
the drop-down Shape list.
3. Click OK.
4. After closing the dialog box, perform the appropriate actions from prompts in the
command line:
Specify insertion point: Specify the point.
Specify shape rotation Type the angle of rotation.
<0>:
Specify shape scale Type the scale factor.
<100.0000>:

NOTE: You can set the parameter values of the shape using the cursor on the screen, in which case there
are dynamic changes in the appearance of the inserted shape, depending on the cursor movement.

FillShapes
Menu: Draw – FillShapes…

Command line: FILLSHAPES

FillShapes can be used as an alternative to the Hatch command; for example, to represent solid
woodland or a water-logged area in topographical drawings. Unlike Hatch, the FillShapes
command allows you to set the distance between rows and columns of shapes and also the angle
of rotation of the shape in the filling (do not confuse with angle of rotation of the filling).
FillShape is not associative; that is, when you modify the boundary of the filled area (for
example, using the grips or the Stretch command), the fill is not automatically updated.
After running the command, the Choose Shape dialog box opens to choose the shape which is
required to fill the enclosed area:

412
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: When you choose a shape to fill the area, the same dialog box as when choosing a shape to insert
into the document is used. To choose a shape as a fill, use the same order as when you choose a shape to
insert into the document (for more details, see «Shape» section).

Option:

Yes Create a block from all the shapes that make up the fill. The block can later be broken
into separate shapes by the Explode command
No Create the fill from shapes as separate elements.

Choose the shape for the fill and close the Choose Shape dialog box. Perform the appropriate
actions at the prompts from the command line:

Click point inside contour: Specify a point.

Specify shape rotation <0>: Type the value for
the rotation angle of
the shape.
Specify shape scale <100.0000>: Type the scale
factor.
Specify shape horizontal offset <16.0000>: Type the distance
between the columns
of shapes.
Specify shape vertical offset <16.0000>: Type the distance
between the rows of
shapes.
Specify shape grid angle <0>: Type the shape fill
angle.
Combine shapes to block? <Yes> or [Yes/No/]: Select the necessary
options and press
ENTER to end the
command.

NOTE: You can set the parameter values of the fill using the cursor on the screen, in which case there are
dynamic changes in the appearance of the fill, depending on the cursor movement.

413
nanoCAD Mechanica

Boundary
Menu: Draw – Boundary…

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: BO, BOUNDARY

This command creates a region bounded by a closed polyline (boundary). A boundary can be
created from lines, polylines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptic arcs, and splines. A boundary can be
created from a single closed object or from several intersecting or adjoining end points of the
objects bounded by the closed region.
You can create a square or create a hatch for areas within the boundary.
After starting the command, the Boundary Creation dialog box opens:

To create a region or boundary:

1. From the Object type list select the Polyline or Region.
2. To search for internal closed boundaries (islands), select the Islands detection
checkbox.
3. Click the Pick Points icon.
4. Specify a point on the drawing for each internal closed boundary from which you want to
create a region or a polyline.
5. Click OK.
To limit the number of objects included in boundary determination, you can create a new
set of boundaries:

414
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. In the Boundary Set section, click the New icon.

2. Select the objects on the drawing that define the boundary.
When you select the Current viewport option from the list, the current boundaries set is
cancelled, and a new boundaries set is created of all objects within the boundaries of the current
viewport.

Solid
Menu: Draw – Solid

Command line: SOLID

This command creates filled polygons.
The first two points define one edge of the polygon.
Pressing Cancel or ENTER at the fourth font prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying a fifth
point creates a quadrilateral area.
The last two points form the first edge of the next filled area. The prompts Specify third
point: Specify fourth point or [Exit]: are repeated. Specifying successive third and
fourth points creates further connected triangles and four-sided polygons in a single solid object.
The order of specifying the vertices when you create a quadrilateral area affects the shape:

Options:

Exit Ends the command.

415
nanoCAD Mechanica

The following prompts are displayed:

Specify first point: Specify point 1.

Specify second point: Specify point 2.
Specify third point: Specify point 3.
Specify fourth point or [Exit]: Specify point 4 or press ENTER to create a
triangle or cancel the command.
Specify third point: Press ENTER to end the command.

Wipeout
Menu: Draw – Wipeout

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: WIPEOUT

This command creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current
background color.
The wipeout area is bounded by a frame that you can turn on for editing and turn off for plotting.
You can convert a closed polyline consisting of line segments into a masking object.
Options:

Undo Undo the last specified point.

This option allows you to undo all the specified points except the start point.
Close Closes the boundary and ends the command.
Polyline Create a mask boundary from an existing closed polyline.
Frames Select the visibility of the boundaries.
The following prompt is displayed:
Enter mode <ON> or [ON/OFF]:
Options:
ON - Display the boundaries.
OFF - Hide the boundaries.

Options:

Specify start point or [Frames/Polyline]: Specify the point.

Specify next point <Start tangent>: Specify the next point.
Specify next point <Start tangent> or [Undo]: Specify the next point.
Specify next point <Start tangent> or Specify all subsequent points
[Undo/Close]: defining the boundary inside
which is necessary to hide the
objects.
Specify next point <Start tangent> or Press ENTER or select the
[Undo/Close]: Close option to end the
command.

When you create the boundary from closed polyline, the following prompts are displayed:

Specify start point or [Frames/Polyline]: Select the Polyline option.

416
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select closed polyline: Select the polyline.

Erase polyline? [Yes/No]: Select the necessary option.

When you create the boundary in the frames mode, the following prompts are
displayed:
Specify start point or [Frames/Polyline]: Select the Frames option.
Enter mode <ON> or [ON/OFF]: Select the required option.

NOTE: Selecting the boundary visibility mode affects all mask objects on the drawing.

Revision Cloud
Menu: Draw – Revision Cloud

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: REVCLOUD

Revision clouds are polylines that consist of sequential arcs. The maximum arc length cannot be
set to more than three times the minimum arc length.
Revision Clouds are used to drawing explanatory labels and markings on the drawings.
When you start the command, the current parameters of the revision cloud are displayed in the
command line:
Minimum arc length: 15000.000000 Maximum arc length: 15000.000000 Style: Normal

NOTE! The last specified arc length value is stored into the registry. To ensure consistency when you use
different scale factors, this value is multiplied by the current value of the DIMSCALE system variable,
which corresponds to the current value of the Dimension Scale or Symbol Scale.

Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Arc length Specifies the minimum and maximum length of the arcs in a revision cloud.
Object Specifies a closed object to be converted to a revision cloud or to reverse the
direction of the arcs in the revision cloud.
Style Specifies the style of the revision cloud.
The following prompt is displayed:
Select arc style or [Normal/Calligraphy]:
Options:
Normal - Normal style.
Calligraphy - Calligraphy style.

417
nanoCAD Mechanica

Normal Style Calligraphy Style Revision Сloud

Options:
Specify first point [Arc length Specify the first point.
/Object/Style]<Object>:
Guide crosshairs along cloud path...: Move the cursor to the start point of
required contour. When the cursor
draws near to the start point,
automatic closing of the cloud
contour will happen and the
command will be finished.

When you convert a closed object to a revision cloud and change the direction of the
arcs in the revision cloud to the opposite, the following prompts are displayed:

Specify first point [Arc length Select the Object option.

/Object/Style]<Object>:
Select object or [?]: Select object.
Reverse direction [Yes/No]<NO>: Select the required option.

Work with text

The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information. It may be a complex
specification, title block information, a label, or even part of the drawing.
In nanoCAD you can create and edit single-line text and multi-line text.
For short entries that do not require multiple fonts or lines, create single-line text. Single-line
text is most convenient for titles and labels.
For long, complex entries, such as technical requirements or technical specifications, create
multi-line text.
To input text, the vector fonts with an shx extension are used. These fonts are installed when
you install nanoCAD. In addition, it is possible to use the TrueType fonts which are installed in
the operating system and have a TTF extension.
The nanoCAD tools for text creation allow you to select the typeface, set and edit the text height,
weight and alignment modes.

Text
Menu: Draw – Text > Single-line Text

Toolbar: Draw –

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: TEXT, DTEXT

418
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command allows you to create one or more lines of text. Each text line is an independent
object.
To create multiple lines of text, after each line is inputted press ENTER to move the cursor to
the next line. You can also start a new line, by specifying it with the cursor on the screen.
To input «degree», «plus/minus», «diameter», you can use the special symbols: %%d,
%%p and %%c.
Press ESC to cancel the command and remove the typed text.
To finish text input, press two times ENTER key or the key combination CTRL+ENTER.
By default, when you input text, the text style that is set as current in the Text Style dialog box
is used.
If necessary, you can change the text style in the command line immediately after the start of
the command.
Options:

Style Type the name of the text style in the command line.
? The display of all available text styles in the command line.

The following prompts are displayed:

Input origin of text or [Style]: Select the Style option.

Type the text style or ?: Type the name of the text style
or ? symbol to show the names
of all available text styles in the
command line.
Input origin of text or [Style]: Input the origin of the text on
the drawing.
Specify text height <250.0000>: Type in the command line or set
by cursor on the screen the text
height.
Specify rotation of text <0>: Type in the command line or set
by cursor on the screen the
rotation of the text.
Type the text. Finish input with Type the text. Press
<Ctrl>+<Enter> or cancel it with <Esc>...: CTRL+ENTER to finish input
and end the command.
To create rotated text:
1. Input the origin of the text.
2. Specify the text height.
3. Specify the rotation of the text:

419
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. After specifying the rotation, the text line remains horizontal for convenience during
input. The objects on the drawing will be rotated by the specified angle, but in the
opposite direction:

5. Type the text:

6. Finish input with CTRL + ENTER. The image on the screen returns to its normal view:

Multiline text
Menu: Draw – Text > Multiline Text…

Toolbar: Draw –

420
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: MT, MTEXT, MTEXTCREATE, T

Multiline text consists of any number of text lines or paragraphs that fit within a width you
specify. It can extend vertically to an indefinite length. Multiline text is a single object.
There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line text. For example,
you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height changes to individual characters, words
or phrases within a paragraph.
Draw a rectangular frame by double clicking a point to place multiline text there. Specify the top
left corner first and then the bottom right corner.
In the Text format dialog box that opens, set the parameters of the multiline text:

Options:

Drop-down list to select the text style.

Drop-down list to select the font file that defines the style of
the characters.

Input field for the characters height.

Text formatting modes

Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This
option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Italic Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This
option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Underlined Turns underlining on or off for new or selected text.

Overlined Turns overlining on or off for new or selected text.

Text position modes

Align left
Sets the alignment of the text to the left.

Align center
Sets the alignment of the text to the center.
Align right
Sets the alignment of the text to the right.
Justified
Sets the text mode to justified.
Distributed
Sets the text mode to distributed.

Change the case of selected text

Uppercase Changes the selected text to uppercase (replace the lowercase

characters with uppercase).

Lowercase Changes the selected text to lowercase (replace the uppercase

421
nanoCAD Mechanica
characters with lowercase).

422
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert symbol Inserts symbol from the list. Sybmols… and Other… open tables
with other special symbols.

Line Spacing Sets line spacing between separate lines in the current or selected
paragraph.

Numbering Creates lists with numbers or letters or markers.

Insert field Opens Field dialog box to insert field to the text.

Additional options

Determines the forward or backward slant of the text.

A positive angle slants text to the right. A negative angle slants
text to the left.
Widens or narrows the selected characters.
The 1.0 setting represents the normal width of the letter in this
font.
Set to more than 1.0 to increase the width, and set to less
than 1.0 to decrease the width.
Drop-down list to select the color for the text.

Undo Undoes actions in the text editor.

Redoes actions in the text editor.
Redo
Converts selected text with “/” to stacked text with horizontal
Stack stack.
Click button to close the window.
CTRL+ENTER
To create multiline text:
1. Set the text area by specifying the top left corner first and then the bottom right corner.
2. Set the required options in the Text format dialog box.
3. Click the cursor inside the text area on the drawing.
4. Type the text from the keyboard.
To move to a new line, press ENTER.
To insert «degree», «plus/minus», «diameter» symbols, use the Insert symbol command from
the context menu:

423
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE! Text can be overlooked if the font size in the Text format dialog box is set too small compared to
the scale of the drawing.

5. Set the position of the selected text using the text input window elements:

6. To complete typing the multiline text, press the key combination CTRL + ENTER or
click OK in the Text format dialog box. You can also click outside the text input area on
the drawing to complete the typing of the multiline text. The ESC key also completes
the command, but the following prompt to save the changes appears:

NOTE: Press ESC to cancel the text input and finish the command.

Background Mask
You can use the background mask for multiline text. The background mask allows you to place
text on the non-transparent background.
To create a background mask:

424
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Select the multiline text.

2. Select the mask color from the drop-down Background Mask list (the Text section) of
the Properties panel:

The mask is created for the entire text area. When you resize the text area using grips, the size
of the mask also changes:

Select No to cancel the background mask. Select Background color to assign the background
color to the mask.
The Background Offset option of the Properties panel sets the fields for the text mask.
The factor value is based on the text height:
A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object.

A factor of 1.5 (set by default) extends the background by 0.5 times the text height.
It is possible to set the background for several text objects at one time.

Editing Text
Text objects created in nanoCAD, are selected with grips and they can be edited like other
objects: rotated, removed, copied etc.
The properties of text objects can be changed in the Properties panel.

NOTE: It is only possible to change single-line text properties in the Properties panel.

425
nanoCAD Mechanica

Justification of the text objects

Menu: Modify – Object > Text > Justifytext

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: JUSTIFYTEXT

Start the command and select the text object on the screen. Select the justification method in
the command line or from the context menu.
For single-line text, the JUSTIFYTEXT command changes the type of justification, without
moving the text (the number and location of the grips will be changed).
For multi-line text, the JUSTIFYTEXT command changes the type of text justification relative
to the text boundaries, without moving the text (the number and location of the grips for the text
area and the location of the boundaries of the text area relative to the text will be changed).
To change the type of justification with a simultaneous change of the text object (for single-line
text) and text area (for multiline of text) use the Properties panel.
To do this you should first select the text object and then specify the required type of justification
in the Properties panel:

The differences in the justification of the text objects from the Modify menu – Object > Text >
Justifytext and Properties panel:

Original TEXT, justified to the Left Original MTEXT, justified to the Top left

TEXT view when you choose the Right MTEXT view when you choose the TR
justification type from the Modify justification type from the Modify menu
menu

TEXT view when you set the Right MTEXT view when you set the Top Right
justification type in the Properties justification type in the Properties panel
panel

426
nanoCAD Mechanica

Start the command and select the text object on the drawing. Specify the type of justification in
the command line or the context menu.
Options:

Left - Left-justifies
the text at
the baseline.

Aligned - Inscribes
text between
two points.
The height
and width of
each
character are
calculated
automatically
so that the
text exactly
fits into the
specified
area.
The
character
height is
changed.
Fit - Inscribes
text between
two points.
The width of
each
character is
calculated
automatically
so that the
text exactly
fits into the
specified
area.
The
character
height is not
changed
Center - Aligns text
from the
horizontal
center of the
baseline,
which you
specify with
a point.

427
nanoCAD Mechanica

Middle - Aligns text at

the
horizontal
center of the
baseline and
the vertical
center of the
height you
specify.
Right - Right-
justifies the
text at the
baseline
TL Left-justifies
text at a
point
specified for
the top of
the text.
TC Centres text
at a point
specified for
the top of
the text.
TR Right-
justifies text
at a point
specified for
the top of
the text.
ML Left-justifies
text at a
point
specified for
the middle of
the text.
MC Centres the
text both
horizontally
and
vertically at
the middle of
the text.
MR Right-
justifies text
at a point
specified for
the middle of
the text.
BL Left-justifies
text at a
point
specified for
the baseline.

427
nanoCAD Mechanica

BC Centres text
at a point
specified for
the baseline.

BR Right-
justifies text
at a point
specified for
the baseline.

Editing the content of the text objects

Editing single-line text
Menu: Modify – Object > Text > Edit

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: DDEDIT, ED

You can also start the Edit command from the context menu previously selected the text line in
the document.
The command allows you to edit the content of a single-line text directly on the drawing. The
content of the selected single-line text is selected and highlighted automatically to completely
edit the text. If necessary, you can insert or delete single characters or fragments within the line.
For more convenient editing, use the context menu:

Context menu options:

Select all The entire text line will be highlighted and copied to the clipboard.
Cut Cuts the selected text to the clipboard.
Copy Copy the selected text to the clipboard.
Paste Paste the selected text from the clipboard.
Undo Undo the last action.
Redo Redo the previously undone action.
Insert field Insert a field.

428
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert symbol Inserts a symbol.

Available symbols:

Degrees (%%d)

Plus/Minus (%%p)

Diameter (%%c)

You can also edit the single-line text in the drawing by double-clicking (if No is chosen for the
Regular texts option of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab
of the By double-click section (the Tools menu – Advanced Settings)).

Press CTRL + ENTER or click on the drawing out of the single-line text to confirm changes and
finish the editing.
To finish the editing without saving changes, press ESC.

NOTE: Press ENTER to split the single-line text into two lines, each of which is transformed into a
separate text object after the command end.

You can edit not only text content, but also the options in the Text settings dialog box (if Yes is
chosen for the Regular texts option of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main
options tab of the By double-click section (the Tools menu – Advanced Settings)). The Text
settings dialog box can be opened:

by double-clicking on the text,

by right button clicking with CTRL pressed on the text,

by moving the cursor over the text and clicking the right button,

by the edit and fedit commands.

The Text settings dialog box:

429
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Text Field for display and editing of the text line content.

Insert special symbol This icon opens an additional menu to insert symbols.
Text style Drop-down list to select the text style.
Color Drop-down list to select the color of the text line.
Height Drop-down list to select the height of the characters.
Keyboard input is also possible.
Width factor Sets the character spacing.
Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.
Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Sets the oblique angle of the text.

The fields display/specify the compatibility of the width factor

and oblique of the edited text symbols by the value set in the
text style.
For text in which the width factor and/or oblique of the symbols
correspond to the specified text style, the check boxes are
selected in these fields:

.
If the width factor and/or oblique of the symbols does not
correspond to the specified text style, the check boxes are not
selected:

.
The current values of the editable text are displayed in the
input fields for the width factor and oblique.
To set the width factor and oblique for the editable text to the
values which correspond to those set in the text style, it is
necessary to select the check boxes. Values are changed
automatically:

430
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Insert special symbol icon opens an additional menu that allows you to select and
insert the special symbols into the current text line:

The buttons , , of this menu, in turn, also open

Menus of some Uppercase Greek letters Lowercase Greek letters

mathematical and other menu menu
symbols

NOTE: Special characters are displayed correctly only in texts based on vector fonts. When you insert
characters based on a TrueType font into the text, question marks instead of the special characters appear
on the screen.

To insert symbols:
1. Place the cursor in the required position in the text line.

2. Click the Insert special symbol icon.

3. Select the required symbol.
4. When you click on the symbol, the additional menu will be closed and the symbol will be
inserted automatically at the current position of the cursor in the text line.

Editing multi-line text

Menu: Modify – Object > Text > Edit

Toolbar: Modify Object –

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: DDEDIT, ED, MTEXTEDIT

When you run the command and select a multi-line text for editing, the same dialog box of the
text editor when creating multi-line text opens (for more information, see the «Multi-line text»
section).
The Text format dialog box when No is chosen for the Multi-texts option of the Settings
nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab of the By double-click section (the
Tools menu – Advanced Settings) can be opened:
by double-clicking on the text.

431
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can edit a multi-line text in the Text settings dialog box, which is slightly different from the
same-named dialog box for a single-line text (if Yes is chosen for the Multi-texts option of the
Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab of the By double-click
section (the Tools menu – Advanced Settings)). The Text settings dialog box can be opened:

by double-clicking on the text,

by right button clicking with CTRL pressed on the text,

by moving the cursor over the text and clicking the right button,

by the edit and fedit commands.

The Text settings dialog box:

Options:

Text Field for display and editing of the text line content.

Insert special symbol This icon opens an additional menu that allows you to select
and insert the special symbols into the current text line (for
more information, see the «Editing single-line text» section).
Color Drop-down list to select the color of the text line.
Height Drop-down list to select the height of the characters.
Keyboard input is also possible.

Start the command and select the multiline text. The Text format dialog box opens. You can
also activate the editing mode, by double clicking on the multiline text.
To edit the content and options of multiline text in the Text format dialog box:
1. Select the text fragment in the text box and replace it with new text or type additional
text. When text is selected, the following options are available in the context menu:
Select All, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, Insert symbol.
2. Change the options for the selected text by using the tools of the Text format dialog
box.
3. To end multiline text editing, press CTRL + ENTER or click OK in the Text format
dialog box. You can also click out of the text input area on the drawing to complete text
the typing.

NOTE: Press ESC to cancel the text input and finish the command.

Creating a text style

Menu: Format – Text Style …

432
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Styles –

433
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Text –

Command line: ST, STYLE, TEXTPROPSCMD

The text style is a convenient tool that creates text objects using different fonts, font size,
obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics.
You can create and use several text styles in one drawing. Each text object in the drawing is
created using the current text style. If you want to create text using a different text style, you
can make another text style current.
Except for the default Standard text style, you must create any text style that you want to use.
You can modify an existing text style in the Text Style dialog box by changing the settings.
A text style name can be up to 255 characters long. It can contain letters, numbers, and the
special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_).
By default, the text styles are automatically named Style1, Style2, Style3, etc.
Created text styles are saved with the drawing file.
You can remove unused text styles from your drawing by deleting them from the Text Style
dialog box or with the Purge command (the File menu – Drawing Utilities).

NOTE: The Standard text style cannot be removed.

NOTE! Changing the Upside Down and Backwards options has no effect on multiline text objects.

The Text Style dialog box allows you to set the current text style, create new text styles, and
change the parameters of the existing text styles (imported as a *.dwg or *.dwt files):

Options:

Add new style Creates a new text style.

Delete style Deletes unused text styles.

Sets the selected style as current.

Set current
Name Name of text style.

434
nanoCAD Mechanica

Font name Drop-down list to select the font file that set the character’s
style.
Extra Drop-down list to select the character’s style.
The list is empty for shx-fonts.
For TTF-fonts the following types are available:

Italic
Normal

Bold

Bold Italic

Height Input field for the height of the characters.

Width factor Sets the character spacing.
Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.
Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique angle Sets the oblique angle of the text.
Turn on/off the mode to display the characters upside down.
Upside down
Turn on/off the mode to display the characters backwards.
Backwards
Turn on/off the mode to display the characters aligned
Vertical vertically. Vertical is only available if the selected font supports
dual orientation.

NOTE: The vector fonts (*.SHX) are marked with S in the Font name list, TrueType-fonts with T.

To create a text style:

1. Select the text style, which the new text style should be based on (the Add new style
icon is available).

2. Click the Add new style icon. The new style with Style1 name will be created.
3. To rename the created style, double click on the text style name, type the new name
and press ENTER.
4. From the drop-down list select the font file.
5. Specify the required font options (height, extra, oblique angle, etc.).
6. To set the created text style as the current one, double click in the left field next to the
text style. The flag in this box indicates that the style is set as the current one.
7. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Some commands are also available in the context menu by right clicking in the field of the text
styles list:

435
nanoCAD Mechanica

To delete a text style:

1. Select the text style you want to delete (the Delete style icon is available).

2. Click the Delete style icon or select Delete Style from the context menu (the
selected style must not be the current one).
3. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Spellchecker
Menu: Tools – Spell check

Toolbar: Text –

Menu: View – Toolbars > Functional > Spell check

Command line: SPELL

Check the spelling of all text objects in the drawing. Command opens Spell Check dialog box.

436
nanoCAD Mechanica

Find spelling mistakes:

1. Click Start check spell.
Распознанные тексты с ошибками отображаются в списке диалога.
Work with spell check dialog:

Autopanning Enable/Disable auto navigation on drawing.

Enable autopanning positions selected word in the center of graphic
area of drawing.
Autoselection Enable/disable auto selection of text object in the drawing.
Text objects is selected by dotted highlight. You can edit text in the
Property toolbar.
Underlining Enable/disable underlining of mistakes. Selected mistake is
outlined. Other objects are underlined with a vawe line.
Found mistakes: Number of found mistakes and list of them.

NOTE: Autoselection and Underlining modes are available with enable Autopanning.

Zoom to text Panning text object with selected mistake to the center of drawing
area. Works regardless of Autopanning.

437
nanoCAD Mechanica

Correct mistakes:
1. Select mistake in the list.
2. Select correct variant from the Replace with: list.
3. Or write correct variant manually in New text field.
4. If you need to leave the word unchanged and add it to user dictionary, click Add word
to dictionary.
5. Click Apply to apply changes.
6. Click Apply to all to change all texts with current mistake.

Find and Replace Text

Menu: Edit – Search and Replace …

Toolbar: Text –

Hot keys: CTRL+F Command line: FIND

The Search and Replace command is used to find text in the document.
You can also start the command from the context menu:

Start the command to open the Find and Replace dialog box:

438
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Find what: In the Find what field, type the text to be searched for.
Replace with: In the Replace with field, type the text that is required
to replace the found lines.

Look in Set the Look in parameter.

The following options are available:

In whole document
In current space

In current selection

Click the icon to open the Quick selection dialog box.

Find options

or This icon maximises/minimises the options list.

439
nanoCAD Mechanica

Match case: If this is checked, the search is made to match the case
of the letters.
Match whole word: If this is checked, the search is made for whole words;
that is letter combinations separated by stops or spaces.
Search in found: This option is accessible after the line search has been
made. It restricts the search range.
Use extended options: This option is accessible when searching in the objects
base. Click the icon and in the window that appears,
choose the expanded search spaces:

For guidance on the elements of the list, there is a help

with more detailed explanations.
The expression is selected with a left-click. It is possible
to use some regular expressions.
Multi-line text: Switch on/off the multi-line text search mode.
When the mode is on, the Find what and the Replace
with fields take the form:

Starts the search procedure.

The search result will be shown in the table:

440
nanoCAD Mechanica

Replaces all found fragments with the new value.

Starts the process of consecutive replacement of the

found fragments.
Passes the next found fragment in the list without
replacing it with the new value.
Click this icon to clear the list of found text fragments.
Clear All:
Click this icon to stop the find and replace process.
Stop:

Group results by objects: Click this icon to group results by objects.

Click this icon to show the selected text fragment in the
Show object: table on the drawing or in the database of objects.
Click this icon to open the Text settings dialog box to
Edit object: edit the found text fragment on the drawing.

NOTE: Left-click on the headings of the table columns of the search results to sort the found text
fragments:

To find and edit the text fragment on the drawing:

1. Click the Search and Replace command in the context menu.
2. Type the text, for example, maximum, into the Find what field.

3. Click the button .

4. Select the required line in the table of search results:

5. Double click on the required line, or click the Show object icon, or select the Show
object command from context menu:

441
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. As a result, there is auto-panning of the found fragment that contains the selected text
on the drawing:

7. Click the Edit object icon or select the Edit object command from the context
menu to open the Text settings dialog box:

8. Type the required changes and click OK.

Convert Text to Multiline Text

Menu: Modify – Advanced Tools > Convert text to Multiline Text

Command line: TEXT2MTEXT

The command converts the selected single-line text objects to the multiline text.

442
nanoCAD Mechanica

During conversion, the single-line text objects are removed from the document and inserted into
a single multiline text object.
After conversion, values of the height, color, width factor and oblique of the single-line text
objects are saved in the multiline text:

Before conversion After conversion

Command options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Command prompts:

Select text objects or Select the singleline text objects.

[?]:
Select text objects or Press ENTER to finish the command.
[?]:

Change Text Case

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Modify – Advanced Tools > Change Text Case

Command line: TCASE

The command for editing case of words, sentences and paragraphs of the selected text.
1. Select a part of text.
2. Start Change Text Case command.
3. Choose desired parameter in the dialog that appears and click OK.

443
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Sentence case Capitalize the first letter of sentence and make other letters lowercase.
lower case Make all letters lowercase.
UPPER CASE Capitalize all letters.
Title Case Capitalize the first letter of each word, leaving the remaining letters in
lowercase.
tOGGLE CASE Change case of each letter (For example: cHAnGE to ChaNge).

Quick Text mode

Command line: QTEXT
The Quick Text mode hides the contents of text objects on the screen and print. Only bound
rectangles instead of text objects or attributes are displayed on screen and print. Redrawing and
regeneration of drawings containing a large number of text objects is faster when the Quick
Text mode is on.

Fields
Menu: Insert – Field…

Text format dialog:

Context menu of Text and Multiline text: Insert field

Attribute definition dialog:

Attribute redefinition dialog:

Command line: FIELD

Field is special object that contains properties of other object (primitive, file, document,
etc.). Field can be updated automatically as the field value changes. Field can be
inserted to text, multiline text, block attribute.

NOTE: Field value displays with grey background, but background does not appear in print.

444
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: A field without value display like (----).

FIELD command creates a multiline text object with only one field. Command opens Field dialog
box. Set field type and format at the dialog. Then specify start point to insert the field. Field
assigned the current text style.
Field can be inserted in text and multiline text through Insert field… in context menu and in
attribute definition, in multiline text through the button.

“Field” dialog box

Fields vary in type. Field types are divided into categories. Available field types are shown in
Field names list. Field category is filter for Field names list.
Often field shows the property of any text object. Available formats for text fields: Uppercase,
Lowercase, First capital, Title case, and none if you don’t need to change text format in
field.
Field can show the numeric value of the property. For example, polyline area: select Object field
name from Objects category.

445
nanoCAD Mechanica

Then click button and select needed polyline. Select Area

property format and presition.

Named object field from Objects category displays names of blocks, views, dimension styles,
layers, text styles, linetype styles.

NOTE: ##### symbols show fields of deleted objects.

Some fields can be context-depended, their value depends on context location – bookmark sheet
name, name of plotter for different sheets.
Contextual fields in blocks and external references are not updated when you insert them into a
drawing, the field displays the last cached value. Therefore, if you want to use a contextual field
in a block, you must insert the field as an attribute.

Fields categories and types

All objects are divided into field categories: Date & Time, Document, Plot, Other, Objects.
All category shows fields of all categories.
Date & Time:

Create Date Date and time of the file creation.

Date Current date and time.
Plot Date Date and time of the last print.
Save Date Date and time of the last save.

Document:

Author Author from file properties. Comments

Comments from file properties.
CustomProperty Value of custom property from file properties.
Filename The name of drawing file.
Filesize The size of the last saved version of drawing.
HyperlinkBase Hyperlink base from file properties.
Keywords Keywords from file properties.

446
nanoCAD Mechanica

LastSavedBy Author of the last save.

Subject Subject from file properties.
Title Title from file properties.

Plot:

DeviceName Name of device for layout plot.

Login Login of current user.
PageSetupName Name of page setup for layout.
PaperSize Paper format.
PlotDate The date and time of the last plot.
PlotOrientation Orientation of paper.
PlotScale Plot scale for layout.
PlotStyleTable The name of plot style table.

Other:

DieselExpression Value of Diesel expression.

SystemVariable Value of system variable.

Objects:

NamedObject Name of named object: layer, style, etc.

Object Value of primitive property.

Update Field
Menu: Tools – Update fields

Context menu of Text and Multiline text: Update field

Command line: UPDATEFIELD

Update field manually to see the latest value. Select needed objects and press ENTER , fields in
selected objects will be updated.
Select field and open the context menu in Text or Multiline text, find there Update field. Field
will display the current value.
FIELDEVAL system variable controls how fields are updated.

Edit Field
Context menu of Text and Multiline text: Update field
Find Edit Field in context menu in text editing mode.

NOTE: Attempt to edit field of unknown type, nanoCAD shows the message: Unknown field.

447
nanoCAD Mechanica

Convert Field to Text

Context menu of Text and Multiline text: Convert field to text
Select field in text editing mode, then select Convert field to text in context menu.

Dimensioning
Dimensions display the geometrical attributes of the objects on the drawing, as well as the
distances and angles between them. The dimensions are part and parcel of any drawing.
In general, dimensions can consist of the following items:

The dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular
dimensions, the dimension line is an arc.

The extension line is drawn from the measured object to the dimension line.
Arrows are displayed at the ends of the dimension line. You can use different types of
arrows, including tick marks and points.

The dimension text displays the numerical value of the measured object. The text can
also include prefixes and suffixes, for example, symbols of the radius, diameter, degree,
etc., as well as tolerances.

The leader is the line joining together the dimension text and the dimension line to
which it belongs. Leaders can be created automatically (when the corresponding options
are set), when the text size does not fit between the extension lines or when you
manually drag the dimension text (with grips) to another place.
The four basic types of dimensioning are:

Linear dimensions display the distance between the specified points. This type
includes the following dimensions:

horizontal,
vertical,
aligned,
ordinate,
group dimension,
base dimension and
dimensions chain.
Radial dimensions indicate the radii and diameters of arcs and circles. These include:
diameter,
radius,
big radius.
Angular dimensions are used to indicate the angles between two segments or three
points.

Arc dimensions display the length of an arc or an arc segment of a polyline.

448
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensions can be associative, non-associative or exploded. Associative dimensions adjust to

changes in the geometric objects that they measure.

449
nanoCAD Mechanica

Associative dimensions. Automatically adjust their locations, orientations and

measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them are modified.

Non-associative dimensions. Selected and modified with the geometry they measure.
Non-associative dimensions do not change when the geometric objects they measure
are modified.

Exploded dimensions. Contain a collection of separate objects: lines, arrows, arcs and
text, rather than a single dimension object. Exploded dimensions do not change when
the geometric objects they measure are modified.
To manage the associativity of dimensions, use the Set associativity during insertion of
objects option of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab of the
Edit section (the Tools menu – Advanced Settings)). The option has two values: Yes – for
associative dimensions and No - for non-associative dimensions. To get the exploded
dimensions, you should use the Explode command from the Modify menu.

NOTE! In nanoCAD, the system variable DIMASSOC does not affect to the associativity of dimensions.

NOTE: It is not recommended to disable the associative dimensioning mode which is used by default or to
explode the associative dimensions without a strong reason.

In nanoCAD, the dimensioning commands are available from the Dimensions menu and from
the Utilities toolbar:

If necessary, you can use the Dimensions toolbar:

Some features of nanoCAD’s dimensioning

Set the Scale for Dimensions

You can specify the size of dimensions in your drawing. Set the scale value using the Scale icon
in the status line. Dimension scale affects the size of the dimension geometry relative to the
objects in the drawing. At dimensioning, all size elements (height of the dimension text, size of
the arrows etc.) are automatically scaled corresponding to the current dimension scale.
The Dimension scale is useful to dimension fragments drawn in the model space at the 1:1
scale. Their scale will change at arrangement on the worksheet.
For example, two views are drawn in the model space at the 1:1 scale. The first view will be
placed on the layout at 1:1, the second view (based on its actual size) at 1:10. For dimensioning
in the model space, you must specify the dimension scale as 1:1 for the first view and 1:10 for
the second view. All elements of dimensioning of the first view will have values determined by
the dimension style (for example, the height of the dimension text – 2.5 mm, the length of the
arrows – 2.5 mm, etc.). The value of the second view dimensions will be automatically increased
by 10 times (the height of the dimension text in the model space will be 25 mm, the length of
the arrow – 25 mm), so that the dimensions are displayed correctly (the height of the dimension
text – 2.5 mm, the length of the arrows – 2.5 mm, etc.) when this view is inserted on the layout.

450
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you change the dimension scale, the dimensions are not recalculated automatically.

451
nanoCAD Mechanica

To change any size of dimension scale, it is necessary to select it and select the required scale in
the Measurement scale menu.
To set drawn dimensions to the current dimension scale, it is necessary to select the Set to
selection command in Measurement scale menu and select the required dimensions on the
drawing.
For more information on using scale, see «Symbol scale and measurement scale» section.

Dimensioning with a single command

Menu: Dimensions – Auto

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: D, DIMLINEAR, DLI, DIM

1. You can set all dimensions in nanoCAD using a single command – Auto (the
Dimensions menu) or Dimensions (on the Utilities and the Dimensions toolbars).
It is recommended to turn on the snap mode to maximise the facilities for dimensioning with a
single command; set the required type of snap as a permanent snap. Switch on the To turn the
object snap “Nearest” on automatically during an insert of objects option in the
nanoCAD – Options dialog box on the Main tab of the Edit section (the Tools menu – Settings
parameters).
2. Start the Auto command and select any dimensions from the context menu by right
clicking:

,
or by selecting the appropriate option in the command line:
Insert dimension or [Auto/aLigned/Horizontal/Vertical/Radial/Diametral/Big
radius/ArC/Ordinate/angUlar/cHain/Use database/Properties/Groupped]:
3. You can also set dimensions on the drawing directly after starting the Auto command.
When you move the cursor over any graphic entity (segment, segment of polyline, arc or circle)
it will be highlighted automatically:

452
nanoCAD Mechanica

When the graphic entities are highlighted, nanoCAD displays the secondary symbols near the
cursor that serve as prompts for the user. The secondary symbols indicate what dimension will
be drawn if you left click on the graphic entity:

- Aligned dimension.

- Horizontal dimension.

- Vertical dimension.

- Diameter dimension.

- Radius dimension.

- Angle dimension.

- Base dimension.
This method is used for dimensioning relating to a graphic primitive.
4. To quickly draw the dimensions that relate to a graphic primitive, you can turn off the
object snap mode.
5. When you move the cursor along the highlighted primitive, the corresponding snap
markers are displayed at its characteristic points. You can use it to specify the initial
points of the extension lines:

This method is used for dimensioning the elements of a drawing consisting of several graphic
primitives.
6. nanoCAD allows you to place the dimensions at given distances from each other, not
only in base dimensions, but also at linear dimensioning. The distance by which the new
dimension should be spaced from the existing one, is specified by a base-line spacing
option in the Modify dimension style dialog box on the Lines tab.
To do this, it is necessary to specify the position of the dimension line and slowly move the
cursor from the existing dimension line. When you draw near a specified distance, the new
dimension line will be “attracted” to the required position. The color of the secondary character
displayed near the cursor changes from red ( , or ) to blue ( , or ):

Dimension line is not at the specified distance Dimension line is at the specified distance

7. At dimensioning, you can set the extension line oblique by holding the CTRL key and
moving the cursor in the desired direction.
8. To change the position of the dimension text, hold the SHIFT key and move the cursor
to the first or second extension line (by default, the dimension text is located in the
center of the dimension line).

453
nanoCAD Mechanica

9. During dimensioning, you can use the Edit dimension dialog box to specify the required
properties and options for the executable dimension. To do this, it is necessary to select
the Properties option in the command line or context menu. The dimensioning
command is not interrupted.
10. To finish dimensioning, press ESC or select Cancel from the context menu.
11. You can dimension chamfers and fillets during their creation. Turn on the Measure
chamfer or Measure fillet mode in the Chamfer or Fillet dialog box.

Linear dimensions

Horizontal, vertical and aligned dimensioning

In the following examples, horizontal, vertical and aligned dimensions are created by using the
Auto command.

Menu: Dimensions – Auto

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: D, DIMLINEAR, DIM, DLI

To dimension you can use also the Horizontal, Vertical and Aligned dimension commands.

Menu: Dimensions – Horizontal

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMHOR

Menu: Dimensions – Vertical

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMVER

Menu: Dimensions – Aligned dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DAL, DIMALIGNED

To specify the horizontal dimension of the line:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Place the cursor over the line to show its dynamic highlighting and display the character
. Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

454
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Move the cursor down to change the character to :

4. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

To specify the vertical dimension of the line:

1. Place the cursor over the line to show its dynamic highlighting and display the character
. Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

2. Move the cursor to the right to change the character to :

3. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

To specify the aligned dimension of the line:

1. Place the cursor over the line to show its dynamic highlighting and display the character
. Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

455
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Move the cursor to the left to change the character to :

3. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

For dimensioning the arc length using characteristic points:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Place the cursor over the arc to show its dynamic highlighting:

3. Move the cursor near to the endpoint of the arc. When the snap marker appears, left
click to choose the endpoint of the first extension line of the dimension:

4. Move the cursor to the other endpoint of the arc and left click to choose the endpoint of
the second extension line of the dimension:

5. Move the cursor to the middle of the arc to display the character :

456
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. Move the cursor down and to the left to change the character to :

7. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

For dimensioning between two parallel line segments:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the lower line segment by highlighting it and left click:

3. Select the top line segment by highlighting it and left click when the horizontal character
appears:

4. Move the cursor up and to the left to change the character to :

5. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

To draw the dimension from a point to a line segment:

1. Start the Auto command.

457
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the lower line segment by highlighting it and left click:

458
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Select the endpoint of the second line segment using the snap:

4. Move the cursor up and to the left:

5. Left click to set the position of the dimension line:

Ordinate dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Ordinate

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMORDINATE, DIMORD

To specify the chain of linear ordinate dimensions:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the Ordinate option in the command line or context menu.
3. Specify the first point of the first dimension:

4. Specify the second point of the first dimension:

5. Specify the dimension line location:

459
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. Select the Base option in the command line or context menu and specify the endpoint of
the second ordinate dimension:

7. Specify all the endpoints of the other ordinate dimensions:

8. Press ENTER to finish the command:

To specify the chain of angular ordinate dimensions:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the angUlar option in the command line or context menu
3. Specify the first point of the angular dimension (vertex of angle):

4. Specify the second point of the angular dimension:

5. Specify the third point of the angular dimension:

460
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. Select the Ordinate option in the context menu and specify the dimension line location:

7. Select the CHain option in the command line or context menu and specify the endpoint
of the second dimension:

8. Specify the endpoint of the third dimension:

9. Specify the endpoint of the last dimension:

461
nanoCAD Mechanica

10. Press ENTER to finish the command:

Group dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Group dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: QDIM, DIMGROUP

The Group dimension command is particularly useful for creating a series of vertical or
horizontal dimensions.
To specify the group dimensions:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the Grouped option in the command line or context menu.
3. Select the objects you want to dimension:

4. Press ENTER to end the selection of objects:

Depending on the direction of the cursor movement (vertical or horizontal), the chain of vertical
or horizontal dimensions will be dynamically displayed.
462
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Move the cursor to change the character from red to blue :

6. Left click to specify the location of the dimension lines:

When dimensioning the objects that have a small length

The crossed arrows are automatically replaced by notches or points:

The setting for replacement of intersecting arrows is performed in the nanoCAD – Options
dialog box (The Tools menu - Settings Parameters):

463
nanoCAD Mechanica

Base dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Base dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DBA, DIMBASELINE

Base dimensions are a sequence of dimensions measured from a reference point.
A base dimension creates a linear, angular or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the
previous or selected dimension.
To draw the base dimensions:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the Base option in the command line or context menu
3. Select the extension line of the previous dimension as a base:

464
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Specify the endpoint of the first dimension:

5. Specify the endpoints for all the other dimensions and press ENTER to finish the
command:

The default spacing between the baseline dimensions can be set from the Modify dimension
Style, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing.

Chain dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Dimensions chain

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DCO, DIMCONTINUE, CHAINCONT

The dimensions chain creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously
created dimension.
The dimensions chain can be a linear, angular or ordinate.
To draw the dimensions chain, the object must have at least one linear, angular or ordinate
dimension.
To draw the dimensions chain:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the CHain option in the command line or context menu.
3. Select the previously created dimension as the base:

4. Specify the endpoint of the first dimension:

465
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Specify the endpoints for all the other dimensions and press ENTER to finish the
command:

Radial dimensions

Diameter dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Diameter dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMDIAMETER, DIMDIA

For dimensioning the diameter of a circle:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Place the cursor over the circle to show its dynamic highlighting and display the
character . Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

3. Choose the location of the dimension:

4. Left click to fix the chosen location of the dimension:

For dimensioning the diameter of a circle using characteristic points:

1. Turn on the Quadrant snap.
2. Start the Auto command.
462
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Place the cursor over the circle to show its dynamic highlighting and display the
character . Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

4. Move the cursor to the first characteristic point of the circle and left click to specify the
endpoint of the first extension line of the dimension.

5. Move the cursor to the second characteristic point of the circle and left click to specify
the endpoint of the second extension line of the dimension.

6. Move the cursor up to display the character :

7. Move the cursor up to change the character from red to blue:

8. Left click to set the location of the dimension line:

463
nanoCAD Mechanica

Radial dimensioning
Menu: Dimensions – Radius dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMRADIUS, DIMRAD, DRA

To draw the radius of a circle:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the Radial option in the command line or context menu.
3. Place the cursor over the circle to show its dynamic highlighting. Left click to confirm the
dimensioning:

4. Choose the location of the dimension:

5. Left click to fix the chosen location of the dimension:

To draw the arc radius:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Place the cursor over the arc to show its dynamic highlighting and display the character
. Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

464
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Choose the location of the dimension:

4. Left click to fix the chosen location of the dimension:

Options for dimensioning the arc radius:

Big radius dimensioning

Menu: Dimensions – Big radius

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMJOGGED, DJO

The big radius command creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs.
To draw the big radius:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the BigRadius option in the command line or context menu.
3. Place the cursor over the arc to show its dynamic highlighting. Left click to confirm the
dimensioning:

4. Choose the location of the dimension:

465
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Left click to fix the chosen location of the dimension:

Angular dimensions
Menu: Dimensions – Angle dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DAN, DIMANGULAR, DIMANG

To draw the angle between two segments:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Place the cursor over one of the segments to show its dynamic highlighting and display
the character . Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

3. Place the cursor over the second segment to show its dynamic highlighting and display
the character . Left click to confirm the dimensioning:

4. Choose the location of the dimension:

5. Left click to set the location of the dimension line:

466
nanoCAD Mechanica

For dimensioning the angular dimension using characteristic points:

1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the anGular option in the command line or context menu.
3. Specify the first point of the angular dimension (vertex of angle):

4. Specify the second point of the angular dimension:

5. Specify the third point of the angular dimension:

6. Specify the location of the dimension line:

7. Press ENTER to finish the command

467
nanoCAD Mechanica

Arc length
Menu: Dimensions – Arc

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DAR, DIMARC

This command creates an arc length dimension. Arc length dimensions measure the distance
along an arc or polyline arc segment.
To differentiate between the arc dimensions and the linear or angular dimensions, the arc symbol
is displayed above the dimension text by default.
For dimensioning the arc length dimension:
1. Start the Auto command.
2. Select the arC option in the command line or context menu.
3. Place the cursor over the arc to show its dynamic highlighting. Left click to confirm the
dimensioning:

4. Choose the location of the dimension:

5. Left click to fix the chosen location of the dimension:

Dimensions editing
The Edit dimension dialog box (if Yes is chosen for the Dimensions option of the Settings
nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab of the Editing - By double-click
section (the Tools menu –Advanced Settings)) can be opened:

by double-clicking on the dimension,

by right button clicking with CTRL pressed on the dimension,

by moving the cursor over the dimension and clicking the right button,

468
nanoCAD Mechanica

The edit and fedit commands allow you to open the Edit dimension dialog box, it does not
matter whether Yes is set or not.
You can also open the Edit dimension dialog box:

by placing the cursor over the dimension and selecting Edit in the tooltip:

NOTE: To invoke the dialog this way you should choose Yes for the Show tooltips option (the
nanoCAD – Options dialog box – the Main option tab – the Tooltips section):

Select dimension, press the right button and select the Edit command in the context
menu.
The Edit dimension dialog box:

The structure of the input fields for the dimension text:

Options:

Dimension In this section the dimension type (for example, Linear dimension,
type: Diameter dimension, Angular dimension etc.) and values of the
dimension text are displayed.

469
nanoCAD Mechanica

Prefix: The prefix consists of the text input field and the Symbol button.
If the dimension does not have a special symbol that is set as the default
prefix, the button is displayed without an image: . Click the icon to open
the panel to select a symbol:

If a special symbol from the panel is set by default, it appears on the

button:

A prefix specified in the Edit dimension dialog box has precedence over a
prefix set by default.
Example of dimension text with a prefix consisting of the text and special
symbol:

Nominal value: Field to display and edit the nominal value of the dimension text.
Suffix: This field displays the suffix of the dimension text set by default, such as
the chamfer angle designation:

In the same field, you can set the value of a custom symmetrical fit of the
dimension:

470
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fit The fields display the specified fit values of the dimension.
designation: Depending on the way the fits are written (the Fit view button), the values
in the fields can be displayed in different ways:

Note: The input field for a note for the dimension is used to create the hyperlink to
the item that contains the technical conditions that define the general
requirements for several dimensions. For example, in this field you can type
the star symbol (*) to denote the reference dimension (having the
corresponding item in the technical conditions).
The second An example displaying the dimension text consisting of two lines:
line of the
dimension
text:

Buttons

These buttons are used to change the arrow type.

Click to open the panel and select the required arrow type:

These buttons are used to turn on/off the modes for placing text in the
Square, Round or Pointed brackets.
This button is used to turn on/off the mode for placing the text on the
leader.
Example:
Mode is on Mode is off

471
nanoCAD Mechanica

This button is used to turn on/off the mode for placing the text in a
rectangle.
Use this button to choose the method of writing the fit.
Click to open the following panel:

Opens the Fits dialog box.

Opens the Calculator.

This button opens the Text settings dialog box to change the style, height
and color of the dimension text.
The Match Properties button temporarily closes the Edit dimension
dialog box to select the dimension whose properties should be copied to the
editable dimension.

The Text Settings dialog box:

Options:

Text style The drop-down list to select the text style.

Color The drop-down list to select the text color.
Height The drop-down list to select the height of the symbols.
It is possible to type the values from the keyboard.

Please note that context menus, which include the following commands, are available in the input
fields of the dimension text:

472
nanoCAD Mechanica

These commands are used to collect inputted

information and insert it into the input fields if
necessary.

The functions of the first three commands of this

section are as their names suggest.
The Pick from drawing command temporarily closes
the Edit dimension dialog box and opens the Value
picker dialog box to get different objects properties
from the drawing. You can then insert them into the
Edit dimension dialog box.

The Symbols command allows you to insert various symbols into the input fields, including
characters from the Windows table:

The commands
from this
section allow
you to perform
operations using
the clipboard.

Sets the
precision of the
nominal
dimension.

To set the dimension fit:

1. Click the button .

473
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. In the panel that appears, select the method of writing the tolerances:

3. Click the button .

4. In the opened Fits dialog box, select the required values:

Break and Restore dimensions

If necessary, you can use breaks to improve the readability of the graphical information and
exclude errors in the dimensions on the drawing. The Break dimension command, unlike the
Explode command from the Modify menu, does not break the completeness of the dimension
and does not result in a loss of the association with the object.
Essentially, the Break dimension command does not remove the dimension part, but places a
mask on it.
To break the dimension (or rather, to place the mask), it is necessary to select two points on the
dimension or extension line that define the location and length of the mask.
When you edit the dimension or an object that intersects dimension, the dimension mask (break)
will not be updated automatically. So after moving the dimension or editing an object that
intersects dimension, you should first restore the dimension and then add a dimension mask
(break) again.

Dimension Break
Menu: Dimensions – Break dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –
474
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: DIMBREAK

Creates a break in the dimension. When you create a break, turn on the Nearest snap (or switch
on the To turn the object snap “Nearest” on automatically during an insert of objects
option in the nanoCAD – Options dialog box on the Main tab of the Edit section (the Tools
menu – Settings parameters).
Option:

Unbreak Removes the breaks in the selected dimension.

The following prompts are displayed:

Select dimension to break or [?]: Select the dimension.

Select first point [Unbreak]: Select the first point.
Select second point [Unbreak]: Select the second point.

When you select a dimension, the Break line command will be available from context menu.

Dimension Restore
Menu: Dimensions – Restore dimension

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: DIMUNBREAK

Removes the dimension breaks created by the Break dimension command.
The following prompt is displayed:
Select dimensions to unbreak or [?]: Select the dimensions
and press ENTER.
When you select dimension, the Unbreak lines command will be available from the context
menu.

Explode dimensions
In some cases, it is necessary to explode a dimension into separate parts – lines, arrows, arcs
and dimension text. To perform this operation, use the Explode command from the Modify
menu.
It is strongly recommended not to explode the dimensions unless there is a specific need.

Dimension styles
Menu: Format – Dimensions styles …

475
nanoCAD Mechanica

Menu: Dimensions – Dimensions styles …

Toolbar: Styles –

Command line: DIMSTYLE, DIMSTYLESCMD

A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that control the appearance of
dimensions, such as arrowhead style, text location and lateral tolerances.
Controlling of the dimension styles is carried out in the Dimension Style Manager dialog box:

Options:

Current style: Displays the name of the current dimension style.

Styles: Displays a list of the dimension styles in the drawing.
Preview of: Shows a graphic representation of the style selected in the Styles
list.

Sets the style selected under Styles as the current one.

Displays the Creating style dialog box where you can define a new
dimension style.

Changes the options for the style selected in the list.

Changes the options for the current dimension style.

Compares the properties of two dimension styles.

Deletes the selected dimension style.

To set the current dimension style:
1. Select the required style from the Styles list.
2. Click the Set Current button.
To create a new dimension style:

476
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. In the Styles list, select the style from which you want to create a new one.

477
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Click the New button.

3. In the Creating style dialog box, type a name for the new style:

Options:

New style name: Specifies the new dimension style name.

Start with: Sets the style to use as a basis for the new one.
Use for: Creates a dimension sub style that applies only to specific dimension
types.
The following sub styles are available:

All dimensions

Linear dimensions

Angular dimensions

Diameter dimensions

Radial dimensions

Ordinate dimensions

Leader dimensions

4. Click OK.
5. In the Modify dimension style dialog box that appears, set the required options for
the new dimension style.
To modify a dimension style:
1. In the Styles list, select the required style.
2. Click the Modify button.
3. In the Modify dimension style dialog box that appears, set the new options for the
dimension style to be modified.
To change the options for the current dimension style:
1. In the Styles list, select the current dimension style (if you select any other style, the
Override button will not be available).
2. Click the Override button.
3. In the Modify dimension style dialog box that appears, override the options for the
current dimension style.
To compare two dimension styles:
1. In the Styles list, select the first dimension style which you want to compare.

478
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Click the Compare button.

479
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. In the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, from the With list select the second
dimension style for comparing:

Options:

Compare: Drop-down list to select the first dimension style for comparing.
With: Drop-down list to select the second dimension style for comparing.

Found differences:

Description: List of the properties of the compared dimension styles.

Variable: List of the dimension variables that define the compared properties.

Use this button to copy the comparison results to the clipboard.

The Compare Dimension Styles dialog box can be used to view a list of all the properties of
any dimension style. To do this, select the same dimension style in the Compare and With lists:

480
nanoCAD Mechanica

To delete a dimension style:

1. In the Styles list, select the style that you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete button.

Modify a dimension style

The properties of new dimensions are set and options for existing dimension styles are modified
in the Modify dimension style dialog box.
The name of the dimension style being modified is displayed in the dialog box title:

The Modify dimension style dialog box contains the following tabs:

Lines

Symbols and arrows

Text

481
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fit

482
nanoCAD Mechanica

Primary units

Alternate units

Tolerance
The window in the upper right corner of each tab displays a graphical preview of the properties of
the dimension style being modified.

The “Lines” tab

Sets the properties of dimension lines and extension lines:

Options:
Dimension lines

Color: Displays and sets the color for the dimension line.
LineType: Sets the linetype of the dimension line.
Lineweight: Sets the lineweight of the dimension line.

483
nanoCAD Mechanica

Extend beyond ticks: Specifies the distance to extend the dimension line past the
extension line when you use ticks and no marks for
arrowheads.
Examples:
1. Extend beyond ticks: 2

2. Extend beyond ticks: 0

Baseline spacing: Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline
dimension.

Suppress: Dim line 1, Dim Suppresses the display of dimension lines.

line 2 Examples:
1. Dim Line 1 suppresses the first dimension

2. Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line

Extension lines

Color: Sets the color for the extension lines.

Linetype ext line 1: Sets the linetype of the first extension line.
Linetype ext line 2: Sets the linetype of the second extension line.
Lineweight: Sets the lineweight of the extension line.
Suppress: Ext line 1, Ext Suppresses the display of extension lines.
line 2 Examples:
1. Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line

2. Ext Line 2 suppresses the second extension line

484
nanoCAD Mechanica

Extend beyond dim lines: Specifies the distance to extend the extension lines above the
dimension line.
Examples:
1. Extend beyond dimension line: 1.25

2. Extend beyond dimension line: 0

Offset from origin: Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points
on the drawing (object) that define the dimension.
Examples:
1. Offset from object: 0.625

2. Offset from object: 0

Fixed Length Extension Enables fixed length extension lines.

Lines
Length: Sets the total length of the extension lines.

The “Symbols and arrows” tab

Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols and jogged
radius dimensions:

485
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Arrowheads

First: Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line.

When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead
automatically changes to match it.
Second: Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line.
When you change the second arrowhead type, the first arrowhead does
not automatically change to match it.
Leader: Sets the arrowhead for the leader line.
Arrow size: Displays and sets the size of arrowheads.

Center marks

None: Creates no center mark or centreline.

Mark: Creates a center mark.
Line: Creates a centerline.
Size: Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centreline.

Arc length symbol

Preceding Places arc length symbols before the dimension text.

Dimension Text:

486
nanoCAD Mechanica

Above Dimension Places arc length symbols above the dimension text.
Text:
None: Suppresses the display of arc length symbols.

Radius dimension jog

Jog angle: Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in
a jogged radius dimension.

The “Text” tab

Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text:

Options:
Text appearance

Text style: Lists the available text styles.

Displays the Text styles dialog box where you can create or modify
text styles.
Text color: Sets the color for the dimension text.
Fill color: Sets the color for the text background in dimensions.

487
nanoCAD Mechanica

Text height: Sets the height of the current dimension text style.
If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style
height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set
here.
Fraction height scale: Sets the scale of fractions relative to the dimension text.
This option is available only when Fractional is selected as the Unit
Format on the Primary Units tab. The value entered here is
multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension
fractions relative to dimension text.
Draw frame around When selected, draws a frame around the dimension text.
text

Text placement

Vertical: Controls the vertical placement of the dimension text in relation to

the dimension line:
Centered – Centres the dimension text between the two
parts of the dimension line.

Above - Places the dimension text above the dimension

line. The distance from the dimension line to the
baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap.

Outside - Places the dimension text on the side of the

dimension line farthest away from the first defining
point.

JIS - Places the dimension text to conform to a

Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation.

488
nanoCAD Mechanica

Horizontal: Controls the horizontal placement of the dimension text along the
dimension line in relation to the extension lines:
Centered – Centres the dimension text along the
dimension line between the extension lines.

At Ext Line 1 - Left justifies the text with the first

extension line along the dimension line. The distance
between the extension line and the text is twice the
arrowhead size plus the text gap value.

At Ext Line 2 - Right justifies the text with the second

extension line along the dimension line. The distance
between the extension line and the text is twice the
arrowhead size plus the text gap value.

Over Ext Line 1 - Positions the text over or along the

first extension line.

Over Ext Line 2 - Positions the text over or along the

second extension line.

Offset from dim line: Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the
dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate
the dimension text.
This value is also used as the minimum length required for dimension
line segments.
Text is positioned inside the extension lines only if the resulting
segments are at least as long as the text gap. Text above or below
the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads, dimension
text and a margin leave enough room for the text gap.
Examples:
1. Offset from dim line: 0.625

2. Offset from dim line: 0

Text alignment

Horizontal: Places text in a horizontal position.

489
nanoCAD Mechanica

Aligned with Aligns text with the dimension line.

dimension line:
ISO standard: Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension
lines, but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension
lines.

The “Fit” tab

Controls the placement of the dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines and the dimension line:

Options:

Fit options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the
space available between the extension lines.
Either text or arrows Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension
(best fit): lines based on the best fit.
Arrows: Moves the arrowheads outside the extension lines first, then the
text.

490
nanoCAD Mechanica

Text: Moves the text outside the extension lines first, then the
arrowheads.

Both text and arrows: When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, both
are moved outside the extension lines.

Always keep text Always places the text between the extension lines.
between ext lines:
Suppress arrows if they Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the
don’t fit inside extension lines.
extension lines:

Text placement Sets the placement of the dimension text when it is moved from
the default position; that is, the position defined by the dimension
style.
Beside the dimension If selected, moves the dimension line whenever the dimension
line: text is moved.

Over dimension line, If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. If
with leader: text is moved away from the dimension line, a leader line is
created connecting the text to the dimension line.
The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension
line.

Over dimension line, If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved.
without leader:

Scale dimension features

Use overall scale of: Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size,
distance or spacing, including text and arrowhead sizes.
Scale dimensions to Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the
layout: current model space viewport and the paper space.

Fine tuning

Place text manually: Places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line
Location prompt.
Ignores any horizontal justification settings.
Draw dim line between Draws dimension lines between the measured points, even when
ext lines: the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points.

The “Primary units” tab

Sets the format and precision of the primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for
the dimension text:

491
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Linear dimensions

Unit format: Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular.
Precision: Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text.
Fraction format: Sets the format for fractions.
Options are available if you have set the Fractional or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.
Decimal Sets the separator for decimal formats.
separator: Options are available if you have set the Decimal value in the Unit
format option.
Round off: Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types
except Angular.
For example:
1. If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest
0.25 unit.
2. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension distances are rounded to the
nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the
Precision setting.

492
nanoCAD Mechanica

Prefix: Includes a prefix in the dimension text.

You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols.
For example:
Entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol.
When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those
used in diameter and radius dimensioning.

Suffix: Includes a suffix in the dimension text.

You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols.
When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes.

Measurement scale

Scale factor: Defines the linear scale options.

Scale factor set by default – 1.
For example:
If you enter 2, the dimension for a 100 millimetre line is displayed as 200
millimetres.
The value does not apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to
rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance values.
Apply to layout Applies the measurement scale factor only to dimensions created in layout
dimension only: viewports.
Except when using non-associative dimensions, this setting should remain
unchecked.

Zero suppression

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions.

For example:
0.3000 becomes .3000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.
For example:
30.0000 becomes 30.
0 feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is less than one foot.
For example:
0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.
0 inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is an integral number of feet.
For example:
1'-0" becomes 1'.
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

493
nanoCAD Mechanica

Angular dimensions

Unit format: Sets the angular units format.

Precision: Sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions.

Zero suppression

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal dimensions.

For example:
0.3000 becomes .3000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions.
For example:
30.0000 becomes 30.

The “Alternate units” tab

Specifies the display of alternative units in dimension measurements and sets their format and
precision:

Options:

Display alternate Adds alternative measurement units to the dimension text.

units:

Alternate units

Unit format: Sets the unit format for alternative units.

Precision: Sets the number of decimal places for alternative units.

494
nanoCAD Mechanica

Multiplier for all Specifies the multiplier used as the conversion factor between primary
units: and alternative units.
For example:
To convert inches to millimetres, enter 25.4.
The value has no effect on angular dimensions and it is not applied to the
rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values.
Round distance Sets rounding rules for alternative units for all dimension types except
to: Angular.
For example:
1. If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements are rounded
to the nearest 0.25 unit.
2. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension measurements are rounded
to the nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the
Precision setting.
Prefix: Includes a prefix in the alternative dimension text.
You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols.
For example:
Entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol.
When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those
used in diameter and radius dimensioning.

Suffix: Includes a suffix in the alternative dimension text.

You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols.
When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes.

Zero suppression

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions.

For example:
0.3000 becomes .3000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.
For example:
30.0000 becomes 30.
0 feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is less than 1 foot.
For example:
0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

495
nanoCAD Mechanica

0 inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet and inches dimension when the
distance is an integral number of feet.
For example:
1'-0" becomes 1'.
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

Placement

After primary Places the alternative units after the primary units in the dimension text.
value:
Below primary Places the alternative units below the primary units in the dimension
value: text.

The “Tolerances” tab

Controls the display and format of the dimension text tolerances:

Option:
Tolerance format

Method: Sets the method for calculating the tolerance:

None - Does not add a tolerance.

Symmetrical – Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance

496
nanoCAD Mechanica

in which a single value of variation is applied to the

dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears
after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper
Value.

Deviation – Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. A

plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper
Value, and a minus sign (-) precedes the tolerance value
entered in Lower Value.

NOTE: If you input a minus sign (-) before an upper maximum deviation
value, the value will be displayed with a minus sign (-) on the drawing.

NOTE: If you input a minus sign (-) before a lower maximum deviation
value, the value will be displayed with a plus sign (+) on the drawing.

Limits – Creates a limit dimension. A maximum and a

minimum value are displayed, one over the other. The
maximum value is the dimension value plus the value
entered in Upper Value. The minimum value is the
dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value.

Basic – Creates a basic dimension, which displays a box

around the full extent of the dimension.

Precision: Sets the number of decimal places.

Upper value: Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value.
When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the
tolerance.
Lower value: Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value.
Scaling for height: Sets the current height for the tolerance text.
The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is
calculated.
Vertical position: Controls the text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances:
Bottom - Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the
main dimension text.

Middle - Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the

main dimension text.

497
nanoCAD Mechanica

Top - Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main
dimension text.

Zero suppression

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions.

For example:
0.3000 becomes .3000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.
For example:
30.0000 becomes 30.
0 feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet and inches dimension when the
distance is less than 1 foot.
For example:
0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.
0 inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is an integral number of feet.
For example:
1'-0" becomes 1'.
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

Alternate units tolerance

Precision: Displays and sets the number of decimal places.

Zero suppression

Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions.

For example:
0.3000 becomes .3000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.
For example:
30.0000 becomes 30.
0 feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is less than 1 foot.
For example:
0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

498
nanoCAD Mechanica

0 inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the

distance is an integral number of feet.
For example:
1'-0" becomes 1'.
Options are available if you have set the Engineering or Architectural
values in the Unit format option.

Notes
Mechanical note
Menu: Draw – Notes > Mechanical notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: NOTE

This command opens the Mechanical note dialog box to set the mechanical note options:

Options:
Use the icons to add/remove text input fields and to add a border:

Add string.

Remove string.

Simple note.

Multiline note.
Use the icons to select the style of the extension line:

None.

Arrow.

Point.

Open arrow.

Half-arrow.
Oblique.

499
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Other icons and options:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special symbols, to
select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text input field.

The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the inserted
leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-created leader.

The Add extension line icon is used to insert additional extension lines. The icon is
enabled when you edit a leader inserted into the drawing.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a mechanical note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.

500
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the required leader options.

501
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Click OK.
4. Specify a point on the object to which the leader arrow will be directed.
The following arrow type switching options are available in the command line and context menu:
None – Creates the extension line without an arrow.
Arrow – Creates the extension line with an arrow.
Point – Creates the extension line with a point.
5. Select an option and specify the leader position on the drawing.

Construction note
Menu: Draw – Notes > Construction notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: MLD, MLEADER, NOTEP

This command opens the Construction note dialog box to set the note options:

Options:
Use the icons to select the style of the extension line:

None.

Arrow.

Point.

Open arrow.

Half-arrow.

Oblique.

Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.
By right edge.

502
nanoCAD Mechanica

Other icons and options:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special
symbols, to select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text
input field.
The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the
inserted leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-
created leader.
The Add extension line icon is used to insert additional extension lines. The
icon is enabled when you edit a leader inserted into the drawing.
Inclination Drop-down list to select inclination.
step of In the list the following inclinations are available:
extension
line Custom - the extension line is placed arbitrarily (by default);

15 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 15°;

30 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 30°;

45 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 45°;

90 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 90°.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a construction note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.

499
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the required note options.

500
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Click OK.
4. Specify a point on the object to which the leader arrow will be directed.
5. Specify the shelf position on the drawing.

Comb leader note

Menu: Draw – Notes > Comb leader notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: NOTEC

This command opens the Comb leader note dialog box to set the comb leader note options:

Options:
Use the icons to select the style of the extension line:

None.

Arrow.

Point.

Open arrow.

Half-arrow.

Oblique.

Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Other icons and options:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special
symbols, to select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text
input field.
The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.
501
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the
inserted leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-
created leader.
The Add extension line icon is used to insert additional extension lines. The
icon is enabled when you edit a leader inserted into the drawing.
The Select line icon is used to switch the comb orientation parallel to the
specified line on the drawing. The icon is available when you edit the comb
leader note inserted into the drawing.
Inclination Drop-down list to select inclination.
step of In the list the following inclinations are available:
extension
lines: Custom - the extension line is placed arbitrarily (by default);

15 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 15°;

30 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 30°;

45 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 45°;

90 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 90°.

Comb
orientation Drop-down list to select the comb orientation of the extension line.
of extension The following options are available in the list:
lines:
Custom

Horizontal
Vertical

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

502
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a comb leader note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required leader options.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the leader’s position and press ENTER to end.
5. Specify the leader’s position and angle. In the command line the following prompts are
displayed: [Horizontal /Vertical /Parallel]. The Parallel option allows you to
choose the direction of a comb leader note parallel to any line on the drawing.
6. Specify the shelf position on the drawing.

Section note
Menu: Draw – Notes > Section notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: NOTES

This command opens the Section note dialog box to set the note options:

Options:
Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Use the icons to select the secant type:

Single-stroked line.

Double-stroked line.
Other icons:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special symbols, to
select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text input field.
503
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the inserted
leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-created leader.

The Select line icon is used to override the first and second lines of breaking
construction. The icon is available when you edit the node secant note inserted into the
drawing.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a section note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required note options.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the first line of breaking construction, perpendicular to which the secant line will
be located.
5. Specify the second line of breaking construction.
6. Specify the shelf position on the drawing.

Note for multilayered constructions

Menu: Draw – Notes > Notes for multilayered constructions…

504
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Utilities –

505
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: QLEADER, NOTEM

This command opens the Note for multilayered constructions dialog box to set the note
options:

Options:
Use the icons to add/remove text input fields and to add border:

Add string.

Remove string.

Line on first string.

Use the icons to select the style of the extension line:

None.

Arrow.

Point.

Open arrow.

Half-arrow.

Oblique.

Right angle.

Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Other icons:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special symbols, to
select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text input field.
The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

506
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the inserted
leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-created leader.

The Select line icon is used to switch the comb orientation parallel to the specified line
on the drawing. The icon is available when you edit the comb leader note inserted into
the drawing.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a note for multilayer constructions:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required note options.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify a point on the object to which the leader arrow will be directed.
5. Specify the shelf position on the drawing.

Node note
Menu: Draw – Notes > Node notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: NLD, NLEADER, NOTEK

This command opens the Node note dialog box to set the note options:

507
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Other icons and options:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special
symbols, to select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text
input field.
The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the
inserted leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-
created leader.
Inclination Drop-down list to select the inclination.
step of In the list the following inclinations are available:
extension
lines: Custom - the extension line is placed arbitrarily (by default);

15 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 15°;

30 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 30°;

45 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 45°;

90 - the extension line is placed in step multiples of 90°.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

508
nanoCAD Mechanica

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a node note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required note options.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the oval/circle center.
5. Specify the oval/circle size.
6. Specify the shelf position and/or the leader pitch angle.

Linear aligned note

Menu: Draw – Notes > Linear aligned note…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: LINM

This command opens the Linear aligned note dialog box to set the note options:

509
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By centre.

By right edge.

Other icons:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special symbols, to
select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text input field.

The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the inserted
leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-created leader.

The Select line icon is used to override the insertion place of the extension line. The
icon is available when you edit the marks of linear constructions inserted into the
drawing.

The Auto repeat icon allows you to mark several linear constructions without a
repeated command call. For each new leader, the Linear constructions marking
dialog box will open to set new options for the leader, for example, new text.

The Multiple insert icon allows you to mark several linear constructions without a
repeated command call. All leaders are drawn with same options and with the same text.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

510
nanoCAD Mechanica

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a linear aligned note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required note options.
3. Click OK.
4. Select line of construction, on which the mark will be located.
5. Specify the text position.

Chain note
Menu: Draw – Notes > Chain notes…

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: NOTEH

The command opens the Chain note dialog box to set the note options:

511
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Use the icons to select the style of the extension line:

None.

Arrow.

Point.

Open arrow.

Half-arrow.

Oblique.

Use the icons to select the text alignment method:

By left edge.

By center.

By right edge.

Other icons:

The Insert special symbol icon opens the panel with the table of special symbols, to
select and insert them at the current cursor position in the text input field.

The Notepad icon opens the Notepad dialog box.

The Match properties icon temporarily closes the dialog box to specify the inserted
leader whose properties should be copied and applied to the newly-created leader.

The Add extension line icon is used to insert additional extension lines. The icon is
available when you edit a chain note inserted into the drawing.

Right-click in the text field and choose the required menu item:

512
nanoCAD Mechanica

The History item contains a list of recently input text lines.

The Recent item is a list specified by the user.
The Pick from drawing item opens the Value picker toolbar which allows you to copy values
from the objects on the drawing:

To create a chain note:

1. Type the required text into the text fields.
2. Select the required note options.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the first leader node.
5. Specify the next leader nodes.
6. Specify the last node and press ENTER.
7. Specify the shelf position.
If the first leader node is placed on the line, the extension line will be perpendicular to this line.

Editing the leaders

When editing the leaders, the same dialog box as when creating these leaders will be opened,
but some additional icons that are blocked when creating leaders will be available (for example,
the Add extension line, Select line and others).
The dialog box to edit the leaders (if Yes is chosen for the Program objects option of the
Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main options tab of the Edit - By double-click
section (the Tools menu – Advanced Settings)) can be opened:

by double-clicking on the leader;

by right button clicking with CTRL pressed on the leader.

The edit and fedit commands allow you to open the dialog box to edit the leaders, it does not
matter whether Yes is set or not.
513
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can also open the dialog box to edit the leaders:

by placing the cursor over the leader and selecting Edit in the tooltip:

NOTE: To invoke the dialog this way you should choose Yes for the Show tooltips option (the
nanoCAD – Options dialog box – the Main option tab – the Tooltips section):

by selecting the leader, pressing the right button and choosing the Edit command in the
context menu.
The In-place edit command (ipedit) or left click on the leader with CTRL pressed allow you to
edit the text of leader directly in the drawing, it does not matter what value is chosen for the
Program objects option.
It is very easy to edit leaders with grips (for more information, see “Advanced grips”).
You can also detach, append and edit extension lines with the appropriate commands from the
Draw menu – the Notes item or from the Utilities toolbar.

Detach leader
Menu: Draw – Notes > Detach leader

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: PLDELL

To detach a leader, it is necessary to select it in the drawing. The leader will be detached
immediately after its selection.

Append leader
Menu: Draw – Notes > Append leader

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: PLADD

To append leader:
1. Specify a point on the object.
2. If necessary, specify the number of intermediate points forming a break of leader.
3. Specify a point on the required leader inserted in the drawing, to finish the command.

514
nanoCAD Mechanica

Edit leader
Menu: Draw – Notes > Edit leader

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: PLREC

To edit leader:
1. Select a leader in the drawing.
2. Specify a point on the required leader to fix a new position for the leader.

Advanced grips for design elements

Advanced grips are assigned for editing objects on the screen without using the Edit window.
The advanced grips are different in shape (round, triangular, rhombic, etc.) and, in some cases,
in color from the ordinary grips.
When the advanced grips operating mode is on, selection of design elements is made first and
then they are edited with the mouse.
You can turn the advanced grips operating mode on/off in the Edit item in the Main tab of the
Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box (the Tools menu – the Advanced Settingscommand):

515
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mechanical note

Grips:

Use this grip to select the arrow type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for arrow type selection:

Use this grip to add a leader.

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center
by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a shelf.

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

516
nanoCAD Mechanica

Construction note

Grips:

Use this grip to select the arrow type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for arrow type selection:

Use this grip to add a leader.

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center

by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a shelf.

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

Comb leader note

Grips:

Use this grip to select the arrow type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for arrow type selection:

517
nanoCAD Mechanica

518
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use this grip to add a leader.

Use this grip to align text.
There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center
by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a comb line.

Use this grip to rotate a shelf (located next to the grip).

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

Section note

Grips:

Use this grip to select the stroke type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for stroke type selection:

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center

by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a shelf.

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

Use this grip to move a shelf.

519
nanoCAD Mechanica

Note for multilayered constructions

Grips:

Use this grip to select the arrow type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for arrow type selection:

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center

by right edge

Use this grip to rotate shelves.

Use this grip to change the position of shelves.

520
nanoCAD Mechanica

Node note

Grips:

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center
by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a shelf.

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

Linear aligned note

Grips:

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center

by right edge

Use this grip to change the shelf position.

Use this grip to change the text position.

521
nanoCAD Mechanica

Chain note

Grips:

Use this grip to select the arrow type.

Click on the grip to open the menu for arrow type selection:

Use this grip to add a leader.

Use this grip to align text.

There are 3 alignment types:

by left edge

by center

by right edge

Use this grip to rotate a shelf.

Use this grip to mirror a shelf.

522
nanoCAD Mechanica

Table

Grips:

Use these grips to edit the linear dimensions of columns.

Use these grips to edit the linear dimensions of rows.

Tables
Menu: Draw – Tables > Tables…

Toolbar: Draw –

Command line: TABLE, TB

The command opens the Create table dialog box:

523
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a non-standard table:

1. Click the Custom table item.
2. Use the numeric entry fields to set the parameters for the custom table. The number of
rows or columns and cell sizes can be altered later when the table is first edited.

524
nanoCAD Mechanica

To insert a standard table:

1. Click the Load from base item.
2. A standard table can be inserted from the nanoCAD library:

3. Choose the desired table type in the dialog box. All basic standard tables are present in
the nanoCAD library.
To insert a table from a file:
522
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Click the Load from file item.

2. Click the Browse button and select the table file.

Supported formats:
tbl - tables format;

dat - data file or text file;

mdb - Microsoft Access database;

xls - Microsoft Office Excel table;

xlsx - Microsoft Office Excel 2007 table;

csv - table, cells are divided by commas;

txt - standard text file;

xml - XML document.

When loading the table from an mdb file, the list of base queries is displayed in the drop-down
list:

When loading the table from xlsx or xls files, it is necessary to select the list in the Excel
document:

IT IS IMPORTANT! The list choice can be carried out after loading the table from a file.

Accomplish this:
1. In the Source query line, enter the required list from the document.
523
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: In the table properties, the Source file line displays the path to the initial table file.

2. Then in the Table edit dialog box click the Update table from external source
icon.

NOTE! To import tables from files, it is possible to drag a file from the browser to the Table edit dialog
box.

When dragging a file from the browser into the table field, the imported table is added to the
existing table.
When dragging a file from the browser into the dialog box field, the imported table replaces the
existing table
To generate an object base report:
1. Click the Object based report item.
2. To choose the required objects, click the Select button:

524
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Setting of search conditions is carried out in the Quick Selection dialog box:

4. Which attributes of the chosen objects the report is based on are also set in this dialog
box.
The attributes to be included in the report are switched by tags in the list or switches:

525
nanoCAD Mechanica

Buttons:

All attributes are selected.

The choice is removed from all attributes.
Selection of attributes is inverted.

The report with a template of a view is created in the table:

=Iff(Exist(Object."AttributeName");Object."AttributeName";"")
This expression checks the existence of the given attribute line with the AttributeName name
and uses its value in the cell. Otherwise, it leaves a cell empty:

The number of columns in the table is defined by the number of chosen attributes.
To import table from Excel:
1. Select the Import from Excel item.

NOTE! The document should be opened to make this item active.

526
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Choose the location of the base point:

3. Choose the row numbering method:

If the Bottom to top box is checked, the rows will be numbered in reverse order.
4. Click the OK button and pick the insertion point in the drawing.

NOTE: If the objects group was previously selected on the drawing and the Tables command is
activated, then you will be offered the option to create an object-based report.

Editing Tables on the Drawing

The on-screen table editor is opened by starting the In-place edit (ipedit) command or left-
clicking the table frame while holding down the CTRL key.
To enter the content of a cell:
1. Place the cursor above the cell.
2. Left-click.
The active cell is then highlighted in green. The text entered in a cell is automatically condensed
to fit the cell width.
The Table Edit toolbar is shown when a table is being edited on-screen.

527
nanoCAD Mechanica

Buttons:

Group cells Use this button to merge adjacent cells:

After clicking this icon, the cell located under the cursor is
made active and shown in green.
Hold down the left mouse button and select the cells you
wish to merge.
Left-click again to confirm selection - the selected cells will
be merged together.

Ungroup cells Use this button to restore previously merged cells into single cells:
After clicking the icon, move the cursor to a cell which was
created by merging multiple cells. It is made active and
highlighted in green.

Left-click inside the cell.

The cell breaks up into its original smaller cells.

Split cells This button divides a cell into smaller cells:

After clicking the icon, place the cursor over a cell.

Left-click inside the cell.

The application prompts for two points within the cell -
pick these two points by left-clicking each.
The Regroup dialog box will appear. Enter the desired
division values:

528
nanoCAD Mechanica

Pencil Use this button to split a cell into multiple cells by drawing additional
cell borders:
Draw the division line by picking points on the existing cell
borders (use nanoCAD object snap).

The cell or cells will be split into new cells of arbitrary size.
Each new cell is independent.

Add row Adds a row to the bottom of the table.

Add column Adds a column to the end of the table.

Insert row Adds a row to the table at the cursor position.

Insert column Adds a column to the table at the cursor position.

Delete row Deletes the row containing the active cell.

Deletes the column containing the active cell.

Delete
column
Use to alter the height of the row containing the active cell. A dialog
Row box appears in which the row height, in millimetres, can be specified:
properties

529
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use to alter the width of the column containing the active cell. A dialog
Column
properties: box appears in which the column width, in millimetres, can be
specified:

Opens the Cell Properties dialog box. Use this to set the properties of
Cell the selected cell.
properties:
Use this to set the properties of multiple cells:
Cells
properties: Select the desired cells.
Set the parameters in the corresponding dialog box.

Sum: Use these buttons to automatically add up the values from the selected
cells and display the sum in a blank cell at the end of the selection.
Selective When using these functions, do not enter any sum expressions in the
sum: Cell Properties dialog box.

Notepad: Opens the Notepad dialog box.

Calculator: Opens the Calculator dialog box.

This button allows a special symbol to be inserted from the menu.

Special
symbols:
Exit: Exits the on-screen table editor.

Interface of the Table Editor Dialog

The full table editor (the Table edit dialog box) can be opened:

by double-clicking on the frame inserted into the drawing table,

by right button clicking on the table frame (the full table editor will be opened if you
press CTRL).
Please note that the Table edit dialog box can be opened only if Yes is chosen for the Program
objects option of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box (the Tools menu – Advanced
Settings) on the Main options tab of the Edit - By double-click section.

530
nanoCAD Mechanica

The edit and fedit commands allow you to open the Table edit dialog box, it does not matter
what value is chosen for the Program objects option.
The Table edit dialog box can be also opened:

by placing the cursor over the table and selecting the Edit in the tooltip:

NOTE: To invoke the dialog this way you should choose Yes for the Show tooltips option (the Settings
nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box – the Main option tab – the Tooltips section):

by selecting the table, pressing the right button and choosing the Edit command in the
context menu.
The Table edit dialog box:

531
nanoCAD Mechanica

The dialog box contains:

standard pull-down menus

;
tool palette buttons

rulers with sliders allowing column width or row height to be quickly adjusted
the cell grid with name headers

.
Each table section has a header:

First page header

Header

Last page header

Report header

Report template

Report

Report sum

First page footer

Footer

Last page footer

Click the left mouse button on a row or column name to select it.

532
nanoCAD Mechanica

To select the table, click the rectangle at the intersection of the lines and columns names:

Names (addresses) of table cells are fully equivalent to those used in MS Excel: columns are
marked alphabetically (A, B, C, D, ... , Z; AA, BB etc.) while rows are marked with ordinal
numbers.

Filling of adjacent cells with data

To accelerate the data input in the table, it is possible to use the function of automatic data
filling. The table editor can automatically continue a line of numbers, number combinations and
text with a set pattern. By selecting several cells and dragging the filling marker, it is possible to
quickly fill in the data lines with the different types.

Filling cells with sequences of numbers or combinations of numbers and text with a set
pattern:
For example: Filling cells with sequences of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 numbers.
1. Select the first of the filled cells:

2. Enter the initial value for the values line:

3. Enter a value in the following cell to set the filling pattern:

533
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select the cell or cells containing the initial values:

5. Drag the filling marker over the range with which it is necessary to fill:

6. The cells will be filled with the set sequence of numbers:

Examples:
1. If the sequence 2, 4, 6, 8… is required, enter 2 and 4.
2. If the sequence 2, 2, 2, 2… is required, the second cell can be left empty.
3. The sequence filling proceeds as shown in the table below:

Initial value Line extension

1, 2, 3, ... 4, 5, 6, ...
First period, Second period, … Third period...
Article 1, Article 2, … Article 3...

NOTE! To fill in an increasing order, drag the marker down or to the right. To fill in a decreasing order,
drag the marker up or to the left.

Use the autofilling to continue lists containing the values from collections (main menu/rows/user
sorting).

Cell colors

Cell containing an expression.

Not edited cell, for example, in report.

Cell with a mistake in expression.

Cell containing data of report section.

534
nanoCAD Mechanica

Basic Tools
The files tools:

Open table: Allows a data set from a previously created *.dat file to be
imported, or a standard table template from the nanoCAD
library to be imported.
Clicking the black triangle shows additional buttons which are
used to select the data source:

- Insert a table from the library.

- Insert a table from an external file *.tbl, *.dat, *.mdb,

*.txt, *.csv, *.xml, *.xls, *.xlsx.
If the Excel file is chosen, only the first list will be inserted.

Save to file: Exports the cell data to a special *.dat file format, or saves it in
the nanoCAD library.
Clicking the black triangle shows additional buttons used to
select the desired destination:

- Save table in nanoCAD library.

- Export table to an external file *.dat, *.txt, *.csv, *.xml,

*.xls.

Export to Excel: Exports the table data to MS Excel. Clicking this button creates
a new Excel worksheet containing all the table data with
identical formatting.

Import from Excel: Imports calculated data from an open MS Excel worksheet.

The standard windows clipboard tools:

Cut: Copy the selected data into the clipboard and delete from the
table.

Copy: Copy the selected data into the clipboard.

Paste: Paste data from the clipboard.

Undo and redo last change tools:

Undo last change: Undo last change.

Redo last change: Redo last change.

Formatted cell navigation tools:

Move row down: Moves the selected row one position down.

535
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move row up: Moves the selected row one position up.
Move column left: Moves the selected column one position left.

536
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move column right: Moves the selected column one position right.

Page division: This tool is intended for dividing a table into multiple fragments
without losing its integrity.
Use this function to split a large table in order to place it on a
smaller sheet of paper, while still being able to edit it as a
whole.

Tools used for sorting cells by contents:

Sort ascend: Sorts rows in ascending order of cell values in the current
column (column of the selected cell).

Sort descend: Sorts rows in descending order of cell values in the current
column (column of the selected cell).

Other tools:

Summarises the contents of the chosen cells:

Create summary
function: Select the cell in which it is required to calculate
the sum.

Click the button .

Select the cells which are to be summarised:

Press ENTER :

Open calculator: Opens the Calculator window.

Open Notepad: Opens the Notepad window.

Insert material: Use this tool to insert formatted rows of material into the table.
Click the icon to open the Material dialog box:

537
nanoCAD Mechanica

Special Symbols: Allows a special symbol to be inserted from the menu.

Recalculate Table: This button is used to manually update the calculated cell data
after editing reference cell values or altering expressions.
Operates a mode of automatic recalculation of the values of the
Automatic
calculation: table cells.
By default, the automatic calculation mode is included.
Update reports: Click this button to update the report.

Operates a mode of automatic recalculation of the report.

Automatic report
update: By default, the automatic report update mode is included.

Tools to work with the cells:

Group selection: Merges multiple cells into a single cell.

Restores the original cells from merged cells.

Ungroup selected
cells:
Use to change the count of rows and (or) columns in the
Change count of chosen cells range:
rows and columns:
Select one or several cells.
Click the Change count of rows and columns
button.
In the Regroup dialog box that appears, enter the
required values for breakdown

538
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use to insert new cells by manually drawing new grid lines:

Split table cells with
pencil tool Specify the start and end point of a line which will
divide each cell that is crossed by it into two:

Right-click on a cell border to delete this border:

Click Split table cells with pencil tool button to

finish.

Text alignment tools

Text alignment Use to control the text alignment in the selected cells.
Clicking the black triangle brings up additional buttons:

The remaining tool icons are self-explanatory.

Management tools of cell borders display

Borders: Use to display or hide the borders of the selected cells.

Clicking the black triangle brings up additional buttons
used to toggle border visibility:

- No border lines.

- Display all lines around the selected cells.

- Display all borders - inner and outer.

The remaining tool icons are self-explanatory.
Border Color: To set the border parameters:
It is necessary to select again the color or
Border
lineweight.
Lineweight:
Choose the border (use the Borders
command) to which it is necessary to

539
nanoCAD Mechanica

apply the set parameters.

Cell Properties
The parameters of table cells are set in the Cell properties dialog box:

To edit the properties of a cell:

1. Select the required cell in the Table edit dialog box.
2. Select the Properties command from the right-button menu or use the CTRL + ENTER
key combination or double click on the cell.
3. Set necessary properties in the Cell Properties dialog box.

NOTE: The action of this command is similar to Cell Properties on the Table edit toolbar.

To edit several table cells:

1. Select the required cells.
2. Select the Properties command from the right-button menu or use the CTRL + ENTER
key combination or double click on the cell.
3. Set necessary properties in the Cell Properties dialog box.

NOTE: The effect of this command is similar to Cells Properties on the Table edit toolbar.

540
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing the Size of Rows and Columns

To adjust the height of a row or the width of a column, use the sliders located on the rulers
(horizontal and vertical). Move the slider by clicking it and holding down the left mouse button
whilst dragging it. While adjusting the height or width, their values are highlighted in color for
easy monitoring.

Row height and column width may also be set in the property dialog box that can be opened by
right-clicking the header of a row or column.
1. In this dialog box, enter the desired width/height in millimetres.

2. In the Properties of column dialog box, the Hidden checkbox is available. Using it,
you can hide the display of the selected column on the drawing. It can be displayed in
the editor mode.

It is also possible to hide a column using the column context menu.

541
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Substitute zeros command (in numerical cells with a zero value, the cells should have a
numerical format) replaces the cells contents with the set text.

NOTE! The format of the cell text value is established in the cell properties on the Content tab.

Close the dialog box by clicking OK.

Import, Export from MS Excel

The Import table from Excel button imports calculated data from an open MS Excel
worksheet:
1. In the open Excel list, select the cell data from which it is required to import to the
nanoCAD table.

2. Click the Import table from Excel button in the Table Edit dialog box.
3. The data will be transferred into the table.

The Export table to Excel button exports the table data to MS Excel. Clicking this button
creates a new Excel worksheet containing all the table data with identical formatting.

NOTE! The following data are not exported to Excel from the nanoCAD tables:
- nanoCAD blocks;
- Formatted text;
- Expression mismatched Excel format.

Page Division
Page division divides a table into multiple fragments without losing its integrity. Use this
function to split a large table in order to place it on a smaller sheet of paper, while still being able
to edit it as a whole.
1. Using this command brings up the Page division dialog box.

542
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Check the Single page box to disable page division.

3. Choose the division method:

Custom. The table can be divided into any parts.

The page break before a row is set by the Start new page command from the context menu.

Close the dialog box. In the table edit window the break will be marked by a border, this makes
it possible to change a row height.

543
nanoCAD Mechanica

On the drawing, the table with the break will look as follows:

544
nanoCAD Mechanica

The parts of the divided table can be moved independently of each other within the drawing.
Double click on any part to open the table editor.

By row count enter the desired number of rows in the fragment. Headers do not
count.

In the example, the table will be divided into separable parts, each of them will consist from 5
filled rows:

545
nanoCAD Mechanica

By maximum page height enter the total height of the fragment, in

millimetres, using the current scale.

546
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the example, the table will be divided into separable parts in such way that the total height of the
filled rows of each parts should be less than 35mm:

The parts of the divided table can be moved independently of each other within the drawing.

Convert table
Button – Tables – .

Menu: Draw – Tables > Convert table

Toolbar: Utilities –

Command line: CONVERTTABLE

This command is used to convert AutoCAD tables into nanoCAD tables. Further editing of
AutoCAD tables can be carried out using nanoCAD tools.
To convert a table, launch the Convert table command and select the table.
The actual sizes of the initial graphics are multiplied by the drawing scale. If the table has row
heights with a zero value, it is necessary to change the drawing scale according to the size of the
initial graphics.

547
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you convert nanoCAD tables to an AutoCAD table, all dynamic links will be destroyed.

Cell Properties
The parameters of table cells are set in the Cell properties dialog box.
To edit the properties of a single cell:
1. Select the required cell in the Table edit dialog box.
2. Select the Properties command from the right-button menu or use the CTRL + ENTER
key combination or double click on the cell.

NOTE: The action of this command is similar to Cell Properties on the Table edit toolbar.

To edit several table cells:

1. Select the required cells.
2. Select the Properties command from the right-button menu or use the CTRL + ENTER
key combination or double click on the cell.

NOTE: The effect of this command is similar to Cells Properties on the Table edit toolbar.

There are six tabs:

548
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the Content tab you can specify the data format and formula to calculate a value:

You can specify the data format and enter the value for the cell. Select the Read only checkbox
to prevent cell editing. Such cells are highlighted.

- Opens the Expression builder.

549
nanoCAD Mechanica

- Insert block into the cell.

Select a block in the current drawing. You can select another file using Open menu

After block selection, it is displayed in the cell properties dialog box and in the table cell.

550
nanoCAD Mechanica

To detach a block, select Remove block in the Selection of block dialog box.

551
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the Font tab you can specify text font, symbol color, line weight, indent, text angle
and text scaling.

552
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Vertical checkbox changes the text direction to vertical.

If the Oblique and Horizontal scaling fields are empty, their values are taken from the text
style. If the Horizontal indent field is empty, its value is taken from the table settings.
In the Fit tab you can specify cell width and height and fitting parameters.

553
nanoCAD Mechanica

If text width is more than cell width:

If text height is more than cell height:

Occupy extra rows does not change the row’s number in the table, the required row is made
higher by the required number of times and lined.

554
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the Borders tab you can specify the type, weight and color of the lines of the
selected cell. You can control the display of cell borders. To switch border display on/off,
select one of the buttons:

Or click near the cell border in the preview area. To align text in the cell, click the symbol in
the cell.

To specify the color of the border, click the symbol and select a color from the list.

555
nanoCAD Mechanica

To specify the line weight of the border, select the Line weight field and select the weight from
the list.

The color and weight of cells and their fill color can be specified in the tab.

To apply a new color and weight, click the border or use the buttons.

Comment tab. Field to enter a comment.

556
nanoCAD Mechanica

A cell with a comment is displayed with a green label in the editor and when moving the cursor
over it the comment is shown.

In the Presets tab you can specify the style for a cell.

557
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a style, click on an empty space on the Presets tab and from the context menu select
Create.

To work with style templates, open the context menu of a style.

Snap to cell
In every cell formula you can use other object properties. If automatic table recalculation is
switched on, the object formula is automatically recalculated when the object is changed. You
can attach one or several objects to every cell. Objects have names: Object1, Object2, Object3 …
558
nanoCAD Mechanica

There is continuous numbering in the table. If an object is not used in any formulas, it is
detached from the table during the following recalculations and the object references are
renumbered.
To snap object properties to a specified cell, use Expression from the right-button menu or
press the key combination SHIFT + F2

The Expression builder dialog box opens

Click the Attach object button.

Select the object whose properties you want to snap to the cell. In the properties list you will see
the selected object’s properties. Double-click it and the property will be added to the cell field.
Click OK.

559
nanoCAD Mechanica

After the object is attached to the cell, the cell color is changed (it means that there is a formula
in the cell) and the calculated result will be displayed:

Expression builder interface

With expression builder you can specify parameters, arithmetic expressions and references to
object properties for the selected cell.
You can open expression builder for a table cell and for the Attach object dialog box. Press
SHIFT + F2 to open the dialog box.

In the top part of the dialog box there is a field to enter any arithmetic expressions and use any
constants and object properties.

560
nanoCAD Mechanica

During input, in the list of functions and constants, all items containing input are displayed. If the
input is incorrect, a message about the error or a tooltip will be displayed.

Click in the preview and the expression in the input field will be selected.

Press the button and the entered expression will be saved on the template formula bar.

561
nanoCAD Mechanica

Expressions from the formula template bar are marked with a star in the list of functions and
constraints.

Formula templates
These allow expressions to be saved in templates for further use.

To save an expression, type it in the field and select the button. The expression’s button will
be displayed in the templates list.
There is a tooltip when you move the cursor over the item.

To insert a template, select the button of the saved template.

To delete a template, press the Alt button and drag the template button outside the Expression
builder dialog box

If there are “$” symbols in the template, after insertion they are changed to the selected text.
For example, we create the Iff(Exist($);$;””) template then type the text Object.Name, select
562
nanoCAD Mechanica

it and insert the Iff template and the symbols are changed to the text -
Iff(Exist(Object.Name;Object.Name;””).

Snap to objects
- opens the Attach object dialog box.

Functions in the expression builder

Mathematical operations:

+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
^ Raising to the power
sqrt() Square-root generation

Logical operations:

== equals
> more
< less
! nor
| or
!= not equals
>= not less
<= not more
|| or
&& and

Functions:
Mathematical:

Cos, Sin, Tg - Trigonometric function; argument is specified in degrees.

Acos, Asin, Atg - Arc trigonometric functions, the result received in degrees.
Abs - Modulus.
Int - Rounding of number.
Summ - Returns the sum of the variables values if the cells are grouped

NOTE! When entering a function, pay attention to brackets.

For example:
Summ(Row) - returns the sum of the numbers of grouped rows.
Summ(Detal.L) - returns the sum of the parameter L values of the
“Detail” object in grouped rows.

Data conversion:

Str - Data conversion to string type.

563
nanoCAD Mechanica

Num - Data conversion to numeric type.

Frm - Numerical value conversion to string type according to the parameters of
the table column.
For example:
Frm(0.001230) returns 0.0012 string if zero suppression mode and
0,0000 accuracy are set for the column containing the cell.

Selection and comparing:

FmtText - Addition of formatted strings.

FmtSub - Creation of lower index.
FmtSuper - Creation of upper index.
FmtDigit - Number conversion to typesetting form.
FmtRaw - Not formatted text.
DmtDiv - Creation of fraction.
If/Iff - function of logical decision. Format:
if(Logical_Condition; If_True; If_False,
where:
Logical_Condition – logical condition with logical operations for
comparing;
If_True – returned value, if logical condition is held;
If_False - returning value, if logical condition is not held.
For example:
if(object == Marker; Marker.Position; "Not determined").
If the object type attached to the column cell has a Marker value, the
function returns its Position value.
If the object has another type, the Not determined value is
returned.
Exist Checks the existence of a constant:
=IF(EXIST(Object.Name);Object.Name;0)
Min/Max - Returns the minimum/maximum value listed in the brackets.
For example:
Min(maximum_value; minimum_value) – returns
minimum_value;
Max(maximum_value; minimum_value) - returns
maximum_value.
Count - Returns the number of objects (for grouped rows of a table).
For example:
Count() - returns number of objects attached to the cells of the
grouped rows.
Avg - Calculates arithmetical average of arguments. It can use any
number of arguments of any ranges. Null arguments are not used.
Off - Returns a cell value, specified by a relative index. The index format
is:
Off(row; column)
For example:

563
nanoCAD Mechanica

Off(-1;2) - returns the cell value located one row above and two
columns to the right of the current cell.
Cell - Returns the cell value specified by an absolute index.
Merge - Merges the Cells in a range. If the Expression is not equal to zero, it
(Cells,Expression) returns the Expression value.
For example:
=merge(A5:C5; "Name") – merges cells from А5 to С5 and in the
results cell, the “Name” text is displayed.
SetHeight() – Specifies the column height. Height value is specified in brackets.
Val() - Calculated argument.
For example:
=val("A"+"1") - calculates "A1", and uses it as an expression (value
in A1 cell). If argument is not a row, it is returned. =val(10+2) – is
the same as =10+2.
=val("summ(A"+Str(off(0;-1))+":D"+Str(off(0;-1))+")") - sum
of cells from A to D of row, whose number is in the cell to the left of
the current one. In general, you can do without val. It is needed when
you have to enter a cell address in user form to take the value from it
further. Create the Addr variable, attach it to the input field in the
form and enter in the table: =val(Addr). Function allows recurrence:
=val(val("A"+"1")) - takes its value from the cell whose address is in
cell A1. Number of enclosures is limited to 64.
Geometry(Object) - Works as Attach object . The height of the attached object is fitted
to the cell height. The object is taken from the report and attached to
the cell.
SUMM(Section(-1)) - Sum of the current column’s cells in the section, following after the
current section.
COUNT(Section(A3)) - Number of rows in the section containing cell A3.

Reserved variables:

Pi - Pi character.
Row - Returns the row number for every cell (rows are numbered from 1,
the header row is not numbered).
Col - Returns the column number for every cell (column “A” is number 1).
Object - Returns the object type, attached to row cells.
Object1, Object2, … - Objects attached to the cell.
Title - Table name.
RowCount - General number of rows.
ColCount - General number of columns.

Report creation
Reports are used to arrange information about objects in the drawing.
To create a report, select Insert Report section from the Section menu in the table editor.

564
nanoCAD Mechanica

A report consists of two sections: Report template and Report.

The report template defines how the content is displayed in the report and can contain one or
several lines. A copy of the template rows is created for every object. Formulas are calculated
according to the properties of the selected objects.

The report template contains the variables of the selected objects; the values of the template
variables are displayed in the report.

Using the Select source objects tool you can select inserted objects according to the
required conditions.

565
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the Grouping and merging dialog box you can specify the settings for grouping and
merging table cells.
Report template menu:

Report header adds a report header row to the beginning of the report;

Report footer adds a report summary row to the end of the report;

566
nanoCAD Mechanica

Context menu of the Report summary cells:

567
nanoCAD Mechanica

The action applied to the column fragment in one section.

Vertical grouping
A report template can contain several lines. Cells with identical values can be merged. From the
right-button menu select Insert row or Add row.

When adding a row, it is added after the selected row, but when inserting a row, it is added
before selected row.

568
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting variables for rows. Select A4 and A5 cells and from the right-button menu select Group.

The selected cells will be grouped. The table will be displayed as follows:

569
nanoCAD Mechanica

There are cells in the report highlighted with special colors.

If you edit such cells, changes are applied to the object to which they belong.

Create a table and report template.

Add the parameters: =Object.Name and =Object.L.

Enter a new length, for example 120.

570
nanoCAD Mechanica

The bolt’s length is changed.

Grouping and merging cells

Group and merge button. Report template.
In the Grouping and merging dialog box you can specify settings for grouping and merging
table cells. Grouping and merging are only applied to cells in the report template.

Study the example for how to merge cells.

571
nanoCAD Mechanica

Merging
1. In the Grouping and merging dialog box select Append rule and select Merge.

572
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the column name for the cells you want to merge. Selection is made by double
clicking on the column name or by dragging it into the Select field.

NOTE! To select another column, you should drag it into the column list and then select it. You can s elect
several columns then place them in the required order.

The columns are processed according to the rules of the grouping template.
3. If you want to sort, select and don’t sort and select sort type.

4. Click OK to check the result in the table editor. Cells having identical values in the D
column will be merged.

573
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rows, which have identical values in B and in C columns, are merged. The order of specifying
columns is unimportant.

574
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rows, which have identical values in B are merged, then cells in C and E are merged. The order
of specifying columns is unimportant.

575
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rows, which have identical values in C, are merged, and then cells in E and B are merged. The
order of specifying columns is unimportant.

Grouping
1. In the Grouping and merging dialog box select Append rule and select Group.

576
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the column name of the cells you want to group. Selection is made by double
clicking on the column name or by dragging it into the Select field.

3. If you want to sort, select and don’t sort and select a sort type.
4. Click OK to check the result in the table editor. Cells having identical values in the C
column will be grouped.

577
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert material
Button: Insert material –
Use this tool to insert formatted rows of material in the table. Click the icon to open the Material
dialog box:

Getting inquiry
Distance
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Distance

Toolbar: Main –

Toolbar: Inquiry –

Command line: DI, DIST

Use the Distance command to measure the distance between specified points.

578
nanoCAD Mechanica

The angle in the XY plane is measured from the current X-axis, and the angle of the XY plane is
measured from the current XY plane.
The measured values of the distances and angles are displayed in the command line in the
current units format.
Command prompts:

Specify first Specify the first point.

point:
Specify second Specify the second point.
point:
In the command line the following values are displayed: the distance between specified points;
angle between points in the XY plane; angle between the imaginary line drawn through the
points and XY plane; and delta of coordinates on the X, Y, and Z axes.
Distance = 270.0000, Angle in XY Plane = 35, Angle from XY Plane = 0
Delta X = 221.1711, Delta Y = 154.8656, Delta Z = 0.0000

Point coordinates
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Point Coordinates

Toolbar: Inquiry >

Command line: ID
The Point Coordinates command displays the coordinates of the specified point.
Command prompts:

Specify point: Specify point by the coursor.

The point coordinates in the current UCS will be displayed in the command line:
X = 235 Y = 370 Z = 0

Common Length
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Common Lenght

Toolbar: Inquiry >

Command line: CLENGTH

This command calculates common length of selected objects.
1. Call Common Length command.
2. Select objects.
3. Press ENTER

Common Area
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Common Area

Toolbar: Inquiry >

579
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: CAREA

This command calculates common area of selected objects.
1. Call Common Area command.
2. Select objects.
3. Press ENTER

Inquiry
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Inquiry …

Toolbar: Main –

Toolbar: Inquiry –

Command line: INQUIRY, MEASUREGEOM

Inquire allows you to take properties from a drawing or from standard details. The Value
picker toolbar appears.

Measured value displayed in the same Value picker dialog box:

The imaging precision of measurements and calculations for the commands of the Value picker
dialog box corresponds to the value set for the current dimension style (the Precision options
from the Primary units tab of the Modify dimension style dialog box).
Options:

Measures the distance between specified points, radius or diameter.

Measure You can switch the method of measurement from the context menu or
distance:
the command line.
Measures the angle.
Measure You can switch the method of measurement from the context menu or
angle:
the command line.
Measures the perimeter of the closed area or the length of the closed
Measure polyline or circle.
perimeter: To measure:
Click inside the enclosed area (the measured contour is
highlighted).
Click on the closed polyline or circle.

580
nanoCAD Mechanica

Measures the area of the closed contour.

Measure
area: To measure:
Click inside the enclosed area (the measured area is
indicated by hatching).

Click on the closed polyline or circle.

Measures some areas of the closed contours.

Complex
area: To measure:
Click inside each enclosed area (the measured areas are
indicated by hatching),

Click on all the closed polylines or circles.

Press ENTER to finish selection of the closed areas (of polylines
and circles). The calculated value of the complex area is displayed
in the dialog box.

The command takes the values of any parameter from the selected
Take from nanoCAD objects on the drawing (dimension, leader, table, etc.).
property:
The parameters values of the selected object are displayed in the list
in the new window:

Takes the values of the selected single line or multiline text:

Take from
text:

To select text, place the cursor over it. The selection is highlighted by
a frame.
Calculate Opens the Calculator.
581
nanoCAD Mechanica

Opens the Notepad.

Take from
notes

NOTE: If the Value picker dialog box was called up at the runtime of another command (for example,
from the Position note dialog box of the Pick from drawing command from the context menu), the
measured value is passed to this dialog box.

Set Variable
Menu: Tools – Inquiry > Set Variable

Command line: SETVAR

The command displays a list of system variables and allows modifying their values.
The system variables define the mode of command operations. Use the system variables to turn
on/off various modes, for example SNAP, GRID, ORTHO. The system variables set the modes
of the objects displaying on the screen and their displaying at the print, for example the XCLIP
and IMAGEFRAME variables manage displaying of the show borders of the external references
and raster images. The system variables are used to set the values used by default, for example
the HPSCALE system variable sets the default scale for the hatch patterns. The system variables
are used to store information about program settings as well as information about the drawing to
display information about the current status of the program settings and to change them.
Command prompts:

Enter variable name or ?: Enter the variable name, for example

IMAGEFRAME.
IMAGEFRAME <1>: Enter new value of the variable and press ENTER.

NOTE: You can change the value of the system variables directly in the command line. To do this, type the
variable name and press ENTER. Then type new variable name and press ENTER.

Command: imageframe
Command: SETVAR
SETVAR – Enter variable name or
Enter variable name or ?: IMAGEFRAME
IMAGEFRAME <0>: 1
To display a list of the current variables:
1. Type the ? as an answer to the prompt Enter variable name or ? and press ENTER.
2. Press ESC to finish the command.
3. A list of the system variables and their values displayed in the command line. For larger
display press the F2:

582
nanoCAD Mechanica

Calculator
Button: Calculator
The calculate button is available in the Value picker dialog box, the Edit Dimension dialog box
and the Table edit toolbar.
You can perform simple and more complex mathematical calculations in the table cells using the
calculator functions.

It is possible to connect the calculator to the Notepad tool.

To access the Notepad button, click the button :

583
nanoCAD Mechanica

The drop down list displays the tables from the Notepad. This tool is useful when you frequently
perform standard calculations.
The Insert button is used to insert the result of the calculation from the calculator into the
edited table cell or input field.
You can use the arrow buttons from the bottom left corner to select table cells. The name of the
current cell is also displayed:

You can use the Expression command from the View menu to calculate formulas:

Use the left field to enter the formula to be calculated. The result will be displayed in the right
field.
The Precision option sets the rounding level of the calculation result.

Notepad
Button: Notepad
The Notepad button is available in the Value picker dialog box and in the Table edit toolbar.
Notepad is used to enter temporarily used text (acronyms, symbols etc.). It is a universal tool
for text input.
Notepad permits:
The saving of a set of expressions and their positional structure in a file;
583
nanoCAD Mechanica

Entering and placing of text expressions and small tables;

Searching and editing of previously created notes.

There is a content tree in the left part of Notepad. The user can select partitions, pages and
tables there. There are control buttons in the top part:

Buttons:

Opens the Notepad file saved on the disk.

Load from
file:
Save: Saves changes in the Notepad file.

These buttons control the structure of the Notepad:

Adds partitions.
Add
partition:

Add page: Adds page.

Add table: Adds table.

Deletes tree item.

Delete
tree item:
Edit page: Switches on page and table editing mode.
This button is available if a page or table is selected in the tree.
When editing a page, the tree becomes unavailable and the edit toolbar
buttons show in the right part of the dialog box:

584
nanoCAD Mechanica

or the table:

Transfers the selected text into the edited table cell.

Select/Tra
nsfer If page or table is selected in the tree, its content is displayed in the right
selected part of the dialog box.
text: To transfer selected text:

Select the text.

Select the Select/Transfer selected text button.

Page editing tools:

Clear: Clears the current page.

Load from file: Allows importing of text from an MS Word RTF-file.

Save to file: Allows writing of the page content into an RTF-file for using in
MS Word.
Adds technical condition.
Add technical
condition:
Deletes technical condition.
Delete technical
condition:

Move down: Moves the row down.

Move up: Moves the up down.

585
nanoCAD Mechanica

Superscript: Turn on/off the input mode for upper index.

586
nanoCAD Mechanica

Subscript: Turn on/off the input mode for bottom index.

Insert special symbol: Opens the panel to select and insert special symbols.

Insert fraction: Opens the Insert fraction dialog box to set the numerator
and denominator of the fraction:

The switch controls the display of the fraction line.

Insert tolerance: Opens the Fit dialog box.

Insert material: Opens the Material dialog box.

Calculator: Opens the Calculator dialog box.

Table editing tools:

Insert row Inserts row.

Delete row Deletes row.

Insert column Inserts column.

Delete column Deletes column.

Rename column Opens the Column properties dialog box, in which you can
set the width and name of the selected column:

NOTE: When you use the Notepad for the first time, it is recommended to save the new notepad in a
separate file using the Save button.

The dialog box has a special search tool to search the text line. Right click on any partition or
page of the partition and select the Find command from the context menu. The found links are
placed in the Find result section.
To speed up the search procedure, you can view recently used expressions in the History
section:

587
nanoCAD Mechanica

You can create an unlimited number of sections and subsections, pages and tables in the
Notepad:

You can move the partitions, pages and tables in the structural tree by using drag and drop.
To rename the partitions, pages and tables, use the Rename command from the context menu.
When you want to close the dialog box, it offers to save the changes in the Notepad:

Features of the design elements

Commands for editing nanoCAD’s objects

The Edit command

Icon: Edit

588
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: EDIT

The command allows you to edit nanoCAD’s objects such as tables, notes, dimensions, singleline
and multiline text.
The command opens following dialogs for editing:

a table, a note, a dimension, a singleline and a multiline text (the Text settings dialog
window) - if Yes is chosen for Program objects, Dimensions, Regular text and
Multi-texts options of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main
options tab of the By double-click section (the Tools menu –Advanced Settings),

a table, a note, a dimension – if No is chosen for the Program objects and

Dimensions options of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main
options tab of the By double-click section.
For more information, see the corresponding sections of this guide.

The DDEdit command

Icon: Edit text

Command line: DDEDIT

The command allows you to edit nanoCAD’s objects such as singleline and multiline text.
The command allows you to edit:

singleline text located in the current drawing,

or opens the Text format dialog box to edit multiline text.

For more information, see the «Editing the content of the text objects» section.

The Fedit command

Icon: Edit

Command line: FEDIT

The command allows you to edit nanoCAD’s objects such as tables, notes, dimensions, singleline
and multiline text.
The command opens following dialogs for editing:

a table, a note, a dimension, a singleline and a multiline text (the Text settings dialog
window) - if Yes is chosen for the Program objects, Dimensions, Regular text and
Multi-texts options of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main
options tab of the By double-click section (the Tools menu –Advanced Settings),

a table, a note, a dimension – if No is chosen for the Program objects and

Dimensions options of the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int dialog box on the Main
options tab of the By double-click section.
For more information, see the corresponding sections of this guide.

The In Place Edit command

Icon: In place edit

589
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: IPEDIT

590
nanoCAD Mechanica

This command allows you to edit all nanoCAD’s objects, containing text, directly in the drawing.
To quick-start the command, press and hold down the CTRL key and left click on the object.
After running the command, the cursor appears in the text line of the edited object:

Parameters redefinition
Button: Parameters redefinition

Command line: PR
This command is used to define the variations in the settings of the nanoCAD design objects in
the current drawing. The redefinition is controlled by the parameters set in the settings of the
design elements (the Tools menu – the Advanced Settings command).
The command allows you the check the redefinition status of one, several or all objects in the
drawing.
The Parameters redefinition command opens the nanoCAD Plus Int - Redefine object
parameters dialog box:

The objects are grouped by type in the dialog box. The objects’ parameters are grouped by
name.
589
nanoCAD Mechanica

To set parameters or remove redefinitions, use the Object filter list:

The total number of found objects in the drawing iare displayed in the brackets for each object
type.
When an object type is selected, its properties will be displayed in the parameters table and its
graphical view will be displayed in the right box of the dialog box:

The redefined parameters are highlighted in blue. If, for the selected objects group, only some
parameters have redefinitions, then the redefinition highlighting will be diagonal:

To remove the redefinition, it is necessary to click the icon .

To remove the redefinition from all objects, it is necessary to click the Clear redefinition from
all parameters icon in the left bottom part of the dialog box:

590
nanoCAD Mechanica

It is possible to enter the new value for the selected parameter from the keyboard or select from
the drop-down list:

If the new value aligns with a value specified by default in the Settings nanoCAD Plus Int
dialog box (the Tools menu – the Advanced Settings command), the blue highlighting will not
be displayed.
To change the parameters of one or several design elements, it is necessary to:
1. Select the objects on the drawing.
2. Select the Parameters redefinition command from the context menu.
3. In the opened dialog box set new values for the settings. The changes apply only to the
selected objects.

The Parameters redefinition command is useful to check documents for compliance of

design elements with corporate company standards.
To check the redefinition status of all objects on the drawing:
1. Start the Parameters redefinition command.
2. Press ENTER to select all nanoCAD design elements. They will be highlighted on the
drawing.

3. Click the Clear redefinition from all parameters icon to clear redefinition from all
parameters. As a result, you obtain a document designed according to the settings set
by your company (consisting in part of nanoCAD elements).

Regenerate
Button: Regenerate

Command line: REGENOBJ

This command is used to:

Regenerate the nanoCAD objects,

Regenerate overlapping of the nanoCAD objects,

Regenerate the tables,

Update automatically calculated attribute values.

591
nanoCAD Mechanica

CREATE 3D OBJECTS

Surfaces
nanoCAD allows you to create a polygon or polyface mesh by specifying vertices. The mesh
density controls the number of facets in legacy polygonal and polyface meshes. Density is
defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, like a grid consisting of columns and rows. M
and N specify the column and row position, respectively, of any given vertex.
Mesh objects do not have the mass and volume properties of 3D solids.
In the Draw menu – Meshes item, the commands for the 3D meshes creation in the form of
elementary surfaces are presented – box, wedge, cone, sphere, torus, pyramid, dish, dome.
You can control whether the mesh is displayed as a wireframe, hidden, or conceptual image by
changing the visual style.

Box
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Box

Command line: 3D
The command creates a 3D box.
Options:

Cube Switch to create a cubic box with edges of equal length.

Reference Specify the rotation angle of the box, measured from the reference angle.
Points Specify the rotation angle, measured from the reference angle to the segment,
defined by two points.

Command prompts:

Specify corner point of box: Specify point 1.

Specify length of box:
Specify width of box or [Cube]:
Specify height of box:
Specify rotation angle of box
about the Z axis or [Reference]:
Specify point 2.
Specify point 3 or select the Cube option.
Specify point 4.
Specify the rotation angle or select the
Reference option.
The rotation angle is set relative to the first
corner specified (point 1) and is measured
from the X-axis on the XY plane.

When you select the Reference option, the following prompts are displayed:
592
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify angle or <0>: Specify a point or enter the angle value.

Specify new angle or [Points]: Specify a point or enter the angle value or
select the Points option.

NOTE: The Reference and Points options are useful to define the box orientation relative to an
existing object.

Wedge
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Wedge

Command line: 3D
The command creates a right-angled wedge-shaped polygon.

Command prompts:

Specify corner point of wedge: Specify point 1.

Specify length of wedge: Specify point 2.
Specify width of wedge: Specify point 3.
Specify height of wedge: Specify point 4.
Specify rotation angle of wedge Specify a point or enter an angle value. The
about the Z axis or [Reference]: rotation angle is set relative to the first corner
specified (point 1) and is measured from the
X-axis on the XY plane.

Cone
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Cone

Command line: 3D
The command creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.
Option:

Diameter Switch to specify the diameter.

593
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify center point for base of Specify the center point for the base of
cone: the cone (point 1).
Specify radius for base of cone or Specify the radius for the base of the cone
[Diameter]: (point 2) or select the Diameter option.
Specify radius for top of cone or Specify the radius for the top of the cone
[Diameter]<0>: (point 3) or select the Diameter option. A
value of 0 (set by default) produces a
cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
truncated cone.
Specify height of cone: Specify the height of the cone (point 4).
Enter number of segments for surface Enter the number of segments.
of cone <16>:

Sphere
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Sphere

Command line: 3D
The command creates a spherical polygon mesh.
Options:

Diameter Switch to specify the diameter.

Command prompts:

Specify center point of sphere:
Specify radius of sphere or
[Diameter]:
Enter number of longitudinal segments
for surface of sphere <16>:
Enter number of latitudinal segments
for surface of sphere <16>:
Specify the center point of the sphere
(point 1).
Specify the radius of the sphere (point 2)
or select the Diameter option.
Enter the number of longitudinal
segments for the surface of the sphere.
Enter the number of latitudinal segments
for the surface of the sphere.

594
nanoCAD Mechanica

Torus
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Torus

Command line: 3D
The command creates a toroidal polygon mesh.
Option:

Diameter Switch to specify the diameter.

Command prompts:

Specify center point of torus:
Specify radius of tours or
[Diameter]:
Specify radius of tube or
[Diameter]:
Enter number of segments around
torus circumference <16>:
Enter number of segments around
tube circumference <16>:
Specify the center point of the torus (point 1).
Specify the radius of the torus (point 2) or select
the Diameter option.
Specify the radius of the tube (point 3) or select
the Diameter option.
Enter the number of segments around the torus
circumference.
Enter the number of segments around the tube
circumference.

Pyramid
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Pyramid

Command line: 3D
The command creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.
Options:

Tetrahedron Switch to create the tetrahedron.

Ridge Switch to create a pyramid with a top with a ridge form.
Top Switch to create a truncated pyramid.

595
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you create a pyramid, the following prompts are displayed:

Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 1.

Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 2.
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 3.
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or Specify point 4.
[Tetrahedron]:
Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify point 5.

When you create a truncated pyramid, the following prompts are displayed:

Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 1.

Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 2.
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 3.
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid Specify point 4.
or [Tetrahedron]:
Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Select the Top option.
Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify point 5.
Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify point 6.
Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify point 7.
Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify point 8.

NOTE: To create the top of a pyramid, it is necessary to set the points in the same order as for the base.

When you create a truncated tetrahedron, the following prompts are displayed:

Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 1.

596
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify second corner point for base of Specify point 2.

pyramid:
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 3.
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid Select the Tetrahedron option.
or [Tetrahedron]:
Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Select the Top option.
Specify first corner point for top of Specify point 4.
tetrahedron:
Specify second corner point for top of Specify point 5.
tetrahedron:
Specify third corner point for top of Specify point 6.
tetrahedron:

NOTE: To create the top of a tetrahedron it is necessary to set the points in the same order as for the base.

When you create a pyramid with the top with the ridge form, the following prompts
are displayed:

Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 1.

Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 2.
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify point 3.
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or Specify point 4.
[Tetrahedron]:
Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Select the Ridge option.
Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify point 5.
Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify point 6.

Dish
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Dish

Command line: 3D
The command creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Option:

Diameter Switch to specify the diameter.

597
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Specify center point of dish:
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]:
Enter number of longitudinal segments
for surface of dish <16>:
Enter number of latitudinal segments
for surface of dish <8>:
Specify the center point of the dish (point
1).
Specify the radius of the dish (point 2) or
select the Diameter option.
Enter the number of longitudinal segments
for the surface of the dish.
Enter the number of latitudinal segments
for the surface of the dish.

Dome
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Dome

Command line: 3D
The command creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Option:

Diameter Switch to specify the diameter.

Command prompts:

Specify center point of dome:
Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]:
Enter number of longitudinal segments
for surface of dome <16>:
Enter number of latitudinal segments
for surface of dome <8>:
Specify the center point of the dome
(point 1).
Specify the radius of the dome (point 2)
or select the Diameter option.
Enter the number of longitudinal
segments for the surface of the dome.
Enter the number of latitudinal segments
for the surface of the dome.

Mesh
Menu: Draw – Meshes > Mesh

Command line: 3D

598
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command creates a planar mesh.

Command prompts:

Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify point 1.

Specify second corner point of Specify point 2.
mesh:
Specify third corner point of Specify point 3.
mesh:
Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify point 4.
Enter mesh size in the M Enter a value between 2 and 256.
direction:
Enter mesh size in the n Enter a value between 2 and 256.
direction:

NOTE: The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.

NOTE: M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh.

3D Mesh
Menu: Draw – Meshes > 3D Mesh

Command line: 3DMESH

This command creates polygon meshes.

As you create the mesh, you specify the size of the mesh in the M and N directions.
A pair of m and n (row number and column number) defines the position of each vertex of the
mesh. Specifying of the vertices starts with the vertex (0, 0). The value of n changes first.
The vertices can be located at any distance from each other.
You can close the meshes with PEDIT.
The following example shows the points corresponding to the vertices for a 3D Mesh with N=4
and M=5 sizes.

599
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command prompts:

Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256.

Enter size of mesh in N direction:
Specify location for vertex (0, 0):
Specify location for vertex (0, 1):
...
Specify location for vertex (m, n):
Enter a value between 2 and 256.
Specify the location for the first vertex.
Specify the location for the second vertex.
...
Specify the location for the last vertex.

NOTE: The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.

NOTE: M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh.

3D Face
Menu: Draw – Meshes > 3D Face

Command line: 3DFACE

This command creates three- or four-side surface in 3D space. You can draw a few faces in one
session of command, each face can be oriented arbitrarily.
Option:

Invisible Control the visibility of each face. To make the face invisible, select the option
Invisible before specifying the first point.
Command prompts:

Specify first point or Specify the location of the first point.

[Invisible/]
Specify second point or Specify the location of the second point.
[Invisible/]
Specify third point or Specify the location of the third point.
[Invisible/] <exit>
Specify fourth point or Specify the location of the fourth point or press
[Invisible] <create three- ENTER to create the create three-sides face.
sides face>
Specify third point and Specify fourth point requests will be displayed until the ENTER
button will be pressed. You can continue to create adjacent faces by specifying two points.
Created by the last pair of points edge will be the first edge for new 3D face.

600
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: You can control the visibility of edge of created 3D Face in Geometry in Properties toolbar.

Setting of the orthographic and isometric views

To quickly set the view, select the View – Views and select the required standard orthographic
and isometric views.

Orthographic views

Set Top
Menu: View – Views > Set Top

Command line: VIEW1

Set the top view.

Set Bottom
Menu: View – Views > Set Bottom

Command line: VIEW2

Set the bottom view.

Set Left
Menu: View – Views > Set Left

Command line: VIEW4

Set the left view.

Set Right
Menu: View – Views > Set Right

Command line: VIEW5

Set the right view.

Set Front
Menu: View – Views > Set Front

Command line: VIEW3

Set the front view.

601
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set Back
Menu: View – Views > Set Back

Command line: VIEW6

Set the back view.

Isometric views

SW Isometric
Menu: View – Views > SW Isometric

Command line: SWISO

Set the southwest isometric view.

SE Isometric
Menu: View – Views > SE Isometric

Command line: SEISO

Set the southeast isometric view.

NE Isometric
Menu: View – Views > NE Isometric

Command line: NEISO

Set the northeast isometric view.

NW Isometric
Menu: View – Views > NW Isometric

Command line: NWISO

Set the northwest isometric view.

Visual styles
nanoCAD allows you to choose the methods (styles) to display the three-dimensional objects in
the current viewport.
The basic methods of object display:

602
nanoCAD Mechanica

Wireframe displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the
boundaries. The objects are visible.

Hidden displays the objects using the 3D wireframe representation, but

hides the lines representing the back faces.

Shade assigns a monochrome color to the visible surface of the object

and also makes the background invisible. Each object is shaded by the
current color. In the shaded visual styles, the faces are lit by one distant
light that is located behind the left shoulder of the user. The object view
depends on the selected shading method.

The command control styles are represented in the View menu – Visual Style.

2D Wireframe
Menu: View – Visual Style > 2D Wireframe

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT0, VS0, VS2DW

The objects are represented as transparent. The command displays the objects using lines and
curves to represent the boundaries. Raster and OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are
visible.
Features of 2D Wireframe style
2D Wireframe + Top View + DirectX with disable Force using 3D graphics and spatial
intex combination ignores 3D-coordinates of drawing. It means that incorrect documents with
incorrect Z-coordinates will be displayed and processed fast.

NOTE: Use AUDITGEOMETRY command to repair Z-coordinate in incorrect document.

Point Clouds
Point clouds does’t work in 2D Wireframe style. Select Yes before insert cloud:

603
nanoCAD Mechanica

3D Wireframe
Menu: View – Visual Style > 3D Wireframe

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT1, VS1, VS3DW

The objects are represented as transparent. The command displays the objects using lines and
curves to represent the boundaries. Raster objects are invisible, linetypes, and lineweights are
ignored.

3D Hidden
Menu: View – Visual Style > 3D Hidden

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT2, VS2, VS3DH

The command displays the objects using the 3D wireframe representation and hides the lines
representing the back faces.

Flat Shaded
Menu: View – Visual Style > Flat Shaded

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT3, VS3, VSFS

Fills the surface with the color which is determined by the color of the object or layer. At the
same time, a shadow is superimposed on the surface as if there is a light source in the same
position as the observer. Curved surfaces have a multifaceted view.

Gouraud Shaded
Menu: View – Visual Style > Gouraud Shaded

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT4, VS4, VSGS

The Gouraud method is used. The surface and color transitions are displayed as smooth. If the
object is not assigned a material, it will be shaded in the color of an object or layer.

Flat Shaded with Edges

Menu: View – Visual Style > Flat Shaded with Edges

Toolbar: Visual Style –

604
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: VSCURRENT5, VS5, VSFSE

The object will have simple filling of the faces and selected edges.

Gouraud Shaded with Edges

Menu: View – Visual Style > Gouraud Shaded with Edges

Toolbar: Visual Style –

Command line: VSCURRENT6, VS6, VSGSE

In this case Gouraud shading is applied to objects, but the edges of their surfaces are visible.

605
nanoCAD Mechanica

POINT CLOUDS
Point cloud is a set of data points in some coordinate system. In a three-dimensional coordinate
system, these points are usually defined by X, Y, and Z coordinates, and often are intended to
represent the external surface of an object. Point clouds may be created by 3D scanners. These
devices measure a large number of points on an object's surface, and often output a point cloud
as a data file. The point cloud represents the set of points that the device has measured. Every
point may contain meta data (attributes): intensity, color, time, class, etc.

Import Point Clouds

Menu: Insert > Point cloud

Menu: Point clouds > Import

Toolbar: Point cloud >

Command line: NPC_IMPORT

Insert point clouds to the current drawing from LAS, BIN, PTX, PTS, PCD, XYZ files.
Dialog displays cloud in space and cloud information.

606
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Selected file
Displays the path of file.
Preview
Preview displays all contents of the imported file. You can select areas of cloud to import. All
points of cloud imported by default.

Select created areas for import.

Select area
Delete selected rectangle or polygonal area.
Delete area

Select All Select all of the area.

Select Specify rectangle area (or areas) for import into the drawing.
Rectangle

Select Specify polygonal area (or areas) for import into the drawing. Selection
Polygon ends by right click.

Zoom preview.

File statistics
Displays statistic data of imported file.
607
nanoCAD Mechanica

Filters by meta data

Displays all points attributes to import them with points.

Filters by code
Displays available classes of points. Only points of selected classes will be imported to the
document.

Differentiation
Points can be imported as separate clouds. Division criterions are:

By code Import points as separate clouds. Each cloud contains points with
its code and one cloud with unclassified points.
By reflection Each cloud contains points with its value reflection.
By cloud Divide points on the number of clouds in file.
Do not differentiate Import one cloud regardless of the cloud number in imported file.

Spacing
Modify point cloud density to manage program performance and visual noise by increasing the
number of visible points. Enable Spacing checkbox and specify the ordinal number of the
imported point in Import every <…> field.

NOTE: Special option hides separate points to avoid nanoCAD breaking. This option is enable by
default. Turn on Display all points in Point clouds – Settings menu to see all points of cloud.

Display Point Clouds Settings

Display Settings
Display boundary

Menu: Point clouds – Settings > Display point cloud boundary

Command line: SWITCHPCBOUNDARY

Enable/disable boundary of each point cloud in the drawing. Disable by default.

608
nanoCAD Mechanica

Display all points

Menu: Point clouds – Settings > Display all points

Command line: SWITCHPCDISPLAYTREE

Enable/disable all points displaying. Disable by default. Number of displayed points based on PC
graphic settings.

NOTE: Increase the number of points Enable Spacing checkbox and specify the ordinal number of the
imported point in Import every <…> field.

Zoom extents after import

Menu: Point clouds – Settings > Zoom extents after import

Command line: SWITCHPCIMPORTZOOMEXTENTS

Auto zoom extents mode to the point cloud after import.
Snap point cloud

Menu: Point cloud – Settings >Snap point cloud

Command line: SWITCHPCSNAPON

Snap to separate points in Node Osnap mode

Point Cloud Display Style

Menu: Point clouds > View mode

Toolbar: Point clouds >

609
nanoCAD Mechanica

Functional toolbar Properties – Visualization – Change visualization > button

Command line: NPC_ViewMode

Color point cloud according to available attribute values:

color;

elevation;

intensity;

scan color;

source ID.
Also you can color point cloud by selected color or cloud elevation.

Options:

Point Size: The size of points in cloud in pxls.

Coloring type: The list of available attribute values.
Number of ranges: Number of ranged of one color to divide cloud on. Click Update to
save this number.

Updates the list of colors according to Number of ranges.

Scan Сolor
Color the cloud according to points color in the source file.

610
nanoCAD Mechanica

Elevation
Coloring depends on the Z-coordinate value in each point of cloud.

611
nanoCAD Mechanica

Intensity

Coloring based on the intensity of the reflected pulse.

Click Bounds button to open chart of distribution
intensity. You can exclude the part of low or upper
bound using sliders.

612
nanoCAD Mechanica

Class

Color the cloud according to point classes. Points can

be classified into a number of categories including
bare earth or ground, top of canopy, and water. This
coloring type may color the cloud with the Standard
LAS Classification.

Reflection number

Color cloud according to reflection number of laser

ray obtained as a result of scan.

Color
Coloring all cloud points by selected color.

613
nanoCAD Mechanica

Source ID

Coloring point cloud according to source scan ID.

Program selects color for every source automatically.

614
nanoCAD Mechanica

Clip Point Clouds

Clip area from point cloud in any view. Specify needed viewport to show clipped point cloud.
Other viewports display original cloud.

Clip boundary set in the plane of view in the eye direction. It’s possible to clip the cloud in one
viewport and display clipped cloud in another one.

You may clip the cloud repeatedly. Clip undo realized by special commands: NPC_CLIP_UNDO
to undo the last clip and NPC_CLIP_RESET to undo all clips. Commands are not related with
standard UNDO command.

Clip point clouds by 2 points of rectangle

Menu: Point clouds – Clip > By orthogonal rectangle

Toolbar: Point clouds > By orthogonal rectangle

Command line: NPC_CLIP_RECT

615
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create clip boundary by two opposite points of rectangle. Boundary is perpendicular to the view
plane.
Command options:

Enter first point: Specify the first diagonal point of clip boundary.
Enter opposite corner: Specify the second diagonal point of clip boundary.
Select view: Specify needed view to display the clip.

Command clip only mapping of point cloud in the target view. The cloud remains unchanged.

Clip point clouds by 3 points of rectangle

Menu: Point clouds – Clip > By rectangle

Toolbar: Point clouds > By rectangle

Command line: NPC_CLIP_RECT_ROTATED

Create rectangle clip boundary by angle and two sides. Boundary is perpendicular to the view
plane.
Command options:

Enter first base point: Specify the first point of boundary.

Enter second base point: Specify the length of the first side.
Enter diagonal point: Specify the length of the second side.
Select view: Specify needed view to display the clip.

Command clip only mapping of point cloud in the target view. The cloud remains unchanged.

Clip point clouds by polygon

Menu: Point clouds – Clip > By fence

Toolbar: Point clouds > By fence

Command line: NPC_CLIP_FENCE

Clip the cloud by polygonal boundary. Boundary is perpendicular to the view plane.
Command options:

Specify points of polyline: Specify the first point of polygonal boundary.

or [Undo]: Specify the second and next points of polygonal
boundary. Select Undo to delete the last created
point. Press ENTER to end the command.
Select view: Select needed view to display the clip.

Command clip only mapping of point cloud in the target view. The cloud remains unchanged.

Clip undo
Menu: Point clouds – Clip > Undo

616
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Point clouds > Undo clip

Command line: NPC_CLIP_UNDO

You may clip the cloud repeatedly. Clip Undo cancels the last clip of the point cloud.

Command options:
Select view: Select needed view to cancel the last clip.

NOTE: CLIP UNDO command is not related with standard UNDO command.

Reset all
Menu: Point clouds – Clip > Reset all

Toolbar: Point clouds > Reset all

Command line: NPC_CLIP_RESET

You may clip the cloud repeatedly. Reset all cancels all clips of the point cloud in target view.
Command options:
Select view: Select needed view to cancel all clips.

NOTE: RESET ALL command is not related with standard UNDO command.

Point clouds section

Point clouds section is used to display needed part of the cloud. To create section, first determine
the plane. UCS moves to this plane after section. Section changes only cloud mapping in
specified view. Cloud section made only in one of the orthogonal views depending on the type of
section.

Point clouds vertical section

Menu: Point clouds – Section > Vertical

Toolbar: Point clouds > Vertical section

Command line: NPC_SECT_VERT

Vertical section is performed in Top View.
Vertical section performed by 3 points. First and second points determine the vertical plane of
section. Third point determines depth of section.
Create vertical section:
1. Set Top View and run the NPC_SECT_VERT command.

617
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Specify the first point of section. This point will be located to the left of observer.
3. Specify the second point of vertical section. This point will be located to the right of
observer.
4. Specify the depth of section.
5. Select needed view to display the section.

Point cloud horizontal section

Menu: Point clouds – Section > Horizontal

Toolbar: Point clouds > Horizontal section

Command line: NPC_SECT_HORIZ

Horizontal section is performed in Right, Left, Front and Back views and in the result view of
vertical section.
Horizontal section performed by 2 points. First point determines vertical plane of section (middle
elevation point). Second point determines the section.
Create horizontal section:
1. Set Right, Left, Front or Back view or the result view of vertical section.
2. Run Horizontal section.
3. Specify the middle elevation point of section.
4. Specify the depth of section.
5. Select needed view to display the section.

Point cloud cut section

Menu: Point clouds – Section > Cut

Toolbar: Point clouds > Point cloud cut section

Command line: NPC_SECT_CUT

Cut section is similar to vertical section in Right, Left, Front, Back view or the result view of
vertical section. Section plane is perpendicular to the current view plane.
Cut section performed by 2 points. First point determines vertical plane for section. Second point
determines the section depth.
Create cut section:
1. Set Right, Left, Front, Back view or the result view of vertical section. Section plane
is perpendicular to the current view plane.
2. Run Point cloud cut section command.
3. Specify cut position in section view.
4. Specify section depth. This point determines the observer position in result view.
5. Select needed view to display the section.

618
nanoCAD Mechanica

Information
Get info about selected point cloud or specific point. Properties toolbar shows some info.

Point cloud info

Menu: Point clouds – Information > About cloud

Toolbar: Point clouds > Point cloud info

Properties toolbar – Misc – Point cloud info > button

Command line: NPC_INFO

Displays statistic information about point cloud and exclude/include certain point cloud attributes.

Tree statistics
Displays cloud structures information.

619
nanoCAD Mechanica

Statistics displays the number of points, nodes and levels, their maximum and designation.
Tree levels displays the distribution of nodes (vertical axis) in tree levels of structured cloud
(horizontal axis). Use sliders to trim points of certain hierarchical structures.
Tree nodes displays the distribution of nodes in tree points of point cloud.
An example of point cloud with different levels:

620
nanoCAD Mechanica

621
nanoCAD Mechanica

Meta data statistics

Displays existing attributes of imported point cloud. Marked by flags.

Remove flags to unload attributes from the cloud. All info on these attributes unloads from the
current document. After attribute unloading all operations with these attributes are not available.

NOTE: Attributes unloaded only from the current document. External file with point cloud is unchanged.

Tick flags to create new attributes. Note: new attributes do not contain any values. For example:
Unload Intensity attribute, then load it. Previous values will not be restored.
Meta data statistics displays also point cloud distribution by intensity, class and echo number.
Diagram not displayed if the attribute is not exists.

Point info
Menu: Point clouds – Information > About point

Toolbar: Point clouds > Point info

Command line: NPC_POINT_INFO

Point info displays information about point in the command line. To select point press CTRL and
click the point.

622
nanoCAD Mechanica

X NPC-POINT-INFO - Point Info

q.
point cloud file name: E:\Point Clouds\PointCloud_1999.npc
index: 5 991 331
x: -5.139549
y: 3.389942
"
c z:
:.:; -1.344199
intensity: 17 272
c
source ID: 4
E
E color: (8,13,19)
0
u Command:

623
nanoCAD Mechanica

THE COMPONENT LAYOUT AND PLOT DRAWING

Model space and paper space

There are two distinct working environments, or spaces, in which you can create objects in a
drawing. In nanoCAD they are represented by the Model and Layout tabs.
Typically, a model composed of geometric objects is created in a three-dimensional space called
model space. A final layout with specific views and annotations of this model is created in a
two-dimensional space called paper space. These spaces are accessible on two or more tabs
near the bottom of the drawing area: the Model tab and one or more Layout tabs.
Layout tabs access an area called paper space. In paper space, you place your title block,
create layout viewports to display views, dimension your drawing, and add notes.
You can create a single layout viewport that fits the entire layout or create multiple layout
viewports in the layout. Once you create the viewports, you can change their size, their
properties, and also scale and move them as needed.
It is possible to create multiple layouts in a drawing. Each layout can contain different plot
settings and paper sizes. The layout tabs are located in the bottom part of the document window,
next to the Model tab. To switch between the Model tab and Layouts, click the necessary tab:

To quick switch between the model space and layouts, use the button located at the end of
tabs line. This button also allows you to switch between the named views available in the
document. Left click to open a context menu that displays all the tabs and named views available
in the document:

624
nanoCAD Mechanica

The top part of the menu displays the named views; the bottom part displays the Model and

layouts tabs. The current space is marked with . To switch between tabs or named views, it is
necessary to click on the corresponding name in the menu. When you switch to a named view,
there is auto-panning of the view on the screen.
You can rename, delete and add layout tabs unlike the Model tab.
Another important difference between model space and paper space is that you create non-
overlapping viewports in the model space, i.e. snap-together at the boundaries. In model space
you can print only the current viewport. Viewports in the paper space are floating. They can be
moved to any part of the layout. Their boundaries can be close to each other and overlapped or
be located at some distance from each other. You can print all the viewports located on the
layout at the same time.
To work with a layout, use the command from the Insert menu – Layout item, or from the
Layout toolbar, from the Layouts Manager dialog box, or from the context menu that opens
by right clicking the Model tab or a Layout tab.
To create a new layout, use the Add Layout command. To delete a layout, use the Delete
Layout command. To rename a layout, use the Rename Layout command.
The format of the displayed layout is set in the Page Setup dialog box.

NOTE: The print area of the layout for the current format settings and printer is displayed by a dashed
line.

You can change the layout color in the Options dialog box using the Color settings item –
Layout Paper.
When you prepare a layout, you typically go through the following process:
1. Create a model of your subject on the Model tab.
2. Click a Layout tab and specify layout page settings, such as plotting device, paper size,
plot area, plot scale and drawing orientation.
3. Insert a title block into the layout.
4. Create a new layer to be used for the layout viewports.
5. Create the layout viewports and position them on the layout.
6. Set the orientation, scale and layer visibility of the view in each layout viewport.
7. Add dimensions and annotate in the layout as necessary.

625
nanoCAD Mechanica

8. Turn off the layer containing the layout viewports.

9. Execute the plot setting of the layout.
10. Plot the layout.

Work with Layouts

The commands that work with layouts allows you to create new layouts, change existing layouts
and save selected layouts in the file as a template.
The layout name that was set when you created, copied or renamed the layout, should be
unique up to 255 characters (capitalization does not matter).

NOTE: No more than 31 characters of the layout name are displayed on the layout tab.

It is allowed to create up to 255 layouts in the single document.

To activate a layout (to set it current) just left click on its tab. If there are many of layouts in the
document, to move from one layout to another, use the button. When you click on it, the
context menu with a list of layouts opens:

The current layout in the context menu is

marked with the highlighted checkmark icon.

To create a new layout

Menu: Insert – Layout > New Layout

Layouts Manager dialog: Create new layout

Command line: ADDLAYOUT

At the command prompt - Input layout name <Layout3> , enter the name of the new layout
and press ENTER.
By default, the new layout will have a name LayoutN+1, where N – the total number of layouts
in the document.
The new layout is placed in the end of the layouts list of the document.
The layout name should be unique up to 255 characters (capitalization does not matter).

NOTE: No more than 31 characters of the layout name are displayed on the layout tab.

626
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a layout from a template

Menu: Insert – Layout > Layout from Template…

Layouts Manager dialog: Load layouts from template

Command line: LAYOUTFROMTEMPLATE

The command creates a new layout in the document.
The command allows you to create one or several layouts from an existing template file (*.dwt)
or drawing file (*.dwg) or drawing exchange file (*.dxf).
Start the command to open the Open Document file dialog box:

To select a template in the Open Document File dialog box:

1. Select the *.dwt format from the Files of type list.
2. Select the folder where the template file or drawing file is stored.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open.
5. Select one or several layouts in the Insert Layout(s) dialog box (use SHIFT and CTRL
keys):

627
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. Click OK.
If the name of the inserted layout is the same as the name of a layout in the paper space, then
the new layout will have a name consisting of the name of the existing layout, to which the name
of the inserted layout is joined with an underscore character. For example, when you insert a
layout called A4 into a document already having a layout with same name, a layout called A4_A4
will be created. When you next insert the layout called A4, it will be created with the name
A4_A4_A4 and so on.

Copy layout
Layouts Manager dialog: Copy layout

Command line: COPYLAYOUT

This command copies all parameters and content of layout to the new layout.
The command offeres to copy the last active layout by default:
Enter name of layout to copy <A0>:
Press ENTER to confirm or input the name of another layout to copy and press ENTER. Then
input the name of new layout or press ENTER to name the layout by default:
Input layout name <A0 (2)>:

Copy layout without viewport

Context menu: Copy clean layout

Command line: LAYOUTCLEANCOPY

The command allows you to copy all the content and parameters of layout with the exception of
viewports.

628
nanoCAD Mechanica

By default, the command offers to copy the last active layout:

Enter name of layout to copy <Layout1>:
Press ENTER to confirm or input the name of another layout to copy it and press ENTER. Then
input the name of new layout and press ENTER:
Input layout name:

Save a Layout as a template

Menu: Insert – Layout > Save Layout as…

Layouts Manager dialog: Save layout as template

Command line: LAYOUTTOTEMPLATE

This command saves the created layout as a template with a *.dwt, *.dwg or *.dxf extension.
The command prompts, by default, to save the last active layout:
Enter layout to save <A1>:
Press ENTER to confirm. Enter the name in the command line and press ENTER to save a
different layout.
The command opens the Save Document File dialog box:

629
nanoCAD Mechanica

To save a template in the Save Document File dialog box:

1. Specify the path from the drop-down Save in list;
2. Enter a name into the File name field;
3. Select the Drawing Template (*.dwt) format from the drop-down Save as type list;
4. Click Save

Delete Layout
Menu: Insert – Layout > Delete Layout

Layouts Manager dialog: Delete layout

Command line: DELETECURLAYOUT

This command prompts, by default, to delete the last active layout: Enter layout to delete
<A1>:
Press ENTER to confirm. Enter the name in the command line and press ENTER, to delete a
different layout.
You can delete a layout by right clicking on the layout tab and selecting the Delete Layout
command from the context menu.

NOTE: The last layout in the document and the Model tab can not be deleted.

Rename Layout
Menu: Insert – Layout > Rename Layout

630
nanoCAD Mechanica

Layouts Manager dialog: Rename layout

Command line: RENAMECURLAYOUT

This command prompts, by default, to rename the last active layout.
Press ENTER to confirm. Enter the name in the command line and press ENTER, to rename a
different layout.
You can rename a layout by right clicking on the layout tab and selecting the Rename Layout
command from the context menu.
After renaming the layout, its location in the document is not changed.

Layouts Manager
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: Insert – Layouts

Command line: LAYOUTSMANAGER

The Layouts Manager dialog window allows you to manage the layouts of the document.
The dialog box displays a list of the layouts that contained in the document and information
about their options.
The commands intended for work with layouts are represented by buttons located at the top
right of the dialog box:

To make the current layout, you should double click on the layout.
To choose layout, for example to copy it, you should left ckick on the layout.
To navigate in the layouts list quickly, press (or press and hold) the DOWN ARROW key or UP
ARROW key on the keyboard.
Information in the columns of the dialog box:

State State of layout. The current layout is marked with .

Layout Name of layout.
Plotter The plotter name assigned to the layout.

631
nanoCAD Mechanica

Paper Information about selected paper format for the layout.

Buttons

Create new layout Creates new layout.

Creates a layout from an existing template file.

Load layouts from
template
Saves a layout as template.
Save layout as
template

Rename layout Renames a layout.

Copy layout Copies a layout.

Delete layout Deletes a layout.

Move up Moves the layout up by one. The layout tab moves one position
to the left.

Move down Moves the layout down by one. The layout tab moves one
position to the left.
Page setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box to adjust the plotter settings.

To start the command:

1. Select a layout in the list of the dialog box.
2. Click the button of the necessary command.
3. If the command asks for a new layout name, type its name in a dialog box and click OK.

Managing layouts from the command line

Command line: LAYOUT
The command allows you to manage the layouts from the command line.
After the command is started, the prompt of available options is shown in the command line:
Choose layout option
[Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set]<Set>:
Options:

Copy Create the layout copy.

By default, you will be offered to copy the layout that was current
(active) before the command start.
The layout copy is placed in the end of the layouts list of the document
Delete Delete a layout.
By default, you will be offered to delete the layout that was current
(active) before the command start.
The last layout in the document and the Model tab can not be deleted.
New Create a new layout.
By default, you will be offered to create a layout with a name LayoutN+1,
where N – the total number of layouts in the document.
The new layout is placed in the end of the layouts list of the document.

632
nanoCAD Mechanica

Template Create one or several layouts from an existing template file (*.dwt) or

633
nanoCAD Mechanica

drawing file (*.dwg) or drawing exchange file (*.dxf).

The name and location of the template are selected in the Open
Document File dialog box.
When you select the file, the Insert Layout(s) dialog box that displays
all available layouts will appear.
When you select the layouts, they and all objects located on them will be
inserted in the current document.
If the name of the inserted layout is the same as the name of a layout
in the paper space, then the new layout will have a name consisting of
the name of the existing layout, to which the name of the inserted
layout is joined with an underscore character. For example, when you
insert a layout called A4 into a document already having a layout with
same name, a layout called A4_A4 will be created. When you next
insert the layout called A4, it will be created with the name A4_A4_A4
and so on.

Rename Rename a layout.

By default, you will be offered to rename the layout that was current
(active) before the command start.
When you rename a layout, its location in the document will not change.
SAveas Save a layout as template file (*.dwt) or drawing file (*.dwg) or
drawing exchange file (*.dxf).
By default, you will be offered a name of the layout that was current
(active) before the command start.
When you set the file name, the dialog box, where you should select the
file name and type format as well as the storage location, opens.
Set Specify the layout name to set it as the current (active).
By default, you will be offered to set the name of layout that was active
before the command start for the current layout.

Viewports
nanoCAD allows you to create layout viewports from the model space. You can create multiple
layout viewports in the layout. Once you create the viewports, you can change their size, their
properties and also scale and move them as needed.
It is important to create layout viewports on their own layer. When you are ready to plot, you
can turn off the layer and plot the layout without plotting the boundaries of the layout viewports.

Create Layout Viewports

Create a rectangular viewport

Menu: View – ViewPorts > Rectangular

Menu: Insert – ViewPorts in Layout > Rectangular

Toolbar: Layout –

Command line: ADDRECTANGLEVIEWPORT

634
nanoCAD Mechanica

nanoCAD allows use of this command on the current layout tab in which the viewport should be
located, as well as directly from the model space.

Create a rectangular viewport from the model space

When you create a viewport from the model space, specify, with a frame, the drawing area (in
the model space) that should be displayed in the viewport.
Command prompts:

Specify viewport first corner: Specify the first corner of the

Specify viewport second corner:
Input or choose view scale
<Paper><1.000000>:
Specify Viewport Center Point:
rectangular viewport in the model
space
Specify the opposite corner of the
rectangular viewport in the model
space
Select the name of layout in Select
Layout dialog to insert a viewport and
press OK button.
Active before running of command
layout is highlighted in the layout list.
Input the viewport scale.
Specify the viewport center point.

Create a rectangular viewport from a layout

Options:

Extent Display all objects from the model space in the viewport.
Active<0.000831> Display the current view of the model space in the viewport.
Paper<1.000000> Set the viewport scale corresponding to the layout scale.

Command prompts:

Specify viewport first corner:
Specify viewport second corner:
Input or choose view scale <Paper> or
[Extents/Active<0.000831>/Paper<1.000000>]:
Specify the first corner of the rectangular
viewport in the layout tab.
Specify the opposite corner of the
rectangular viewport in the layout tab.
Input the viewport scale or select the
required option.

Create a polygonal viewport

Menu: View – ViewPorts > Polygonal

Menu: Insert – ViewPorts in Layout > Polygonal

Toolbar: Layout –

Command line: ADDPOLYGONVIEWPORT

nanoCAD allows use of this command on the current layout tab in which the viewport should be
located, as well as directly from the model space.
635
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create a polygonal viewport from the model space

When you create a viewport from the model space, specify the vertex points of the polygonal
area of the drawing (in the model space) that should be displayed in the viewport.
Option:

Undo Consistently undo the specified points of the polygonal area.

The start point cannot be undone.

Command prompts:

Specify start point:
Specify next point or [Undo]:
...
Specify next point or [Undo]:
Specify the start point of the polygonal vertex.
Specify the second point of the polygonal vertex.
...
Specify the end point of the polygonal vertex and
press ENTER.
Select the name of layout in Select Layout dialog
to insert a viewport and press OK button.

Active before running of command layout is

highlighted in the layout list.

Input or choose view scale

<Paper><1.000000>: Input the viewport scale.
Specify Viewport Center Point: Specify the viewport center point.

Create a polygonal viewport from a layout

Options:

Undo Consistently undo the specified points of the polygonal area.

The start point cannot be undone.
Extent Display all objects from the model space in the viewport.
Active<0.000831> Display the current view of the model space in the viewport.
Paper<1.000000> Set the viewport scale corresponding to the layout scale.

Command prompts:

Specify start point: Specify the start point of the polygonal

vertex.
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the second point of the polygonal
vertex.
... ...
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the end point of the polygonal
vertex and press ENTER.
Input or choose view scale <Paper> or Input the viewport scale or select the
[Extents/Active<0.000831>/Paper<1.000000>]: required option.

636
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create a viewport by object

Menu: View – ViewPorts > by Objects

Menu: Insert – ViewPorts in Layout > By Objects

Toolbar: Layout –

Command line: DDOBJECTVIEWPORT

This command allows you to convert a closed polyline, circle or ellipse into a viewport.
nanoCAD allows use of this command on the current layout tab in which the viewport should be
located, as well as directly from the model space.

Create a viewport by object from the model space

Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Extent Display all objects from the model space in the viewport.
Active<0.000831> Display the current view of the model space in the viewport.
Paper<1.000000> Set the viewport scale corresponding to the layout scale.

When you start the command, the Select Layout dialog box opens. Select the layout on which
you want to place the viewport.
By default, you will be offered the layout that was current (active) before the command start.
Command prompts:

Select closed object to create viewport or Select the closed object.

[?]:
Input or choose view scale <Paper> or Input scale of the viewport or
[Extents/Active<0.000831>/Paper<1.000000>]: select necessary option.

Create a viewport by object from a layout

Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Extent Display all objects from the model space in the viewport.
Active<0.000831> Display the current view of the model space in the viewport.
Paper<1.000000> Set the viewport scale corresponding to the layout scale.

Command prompts:
Select closed object to create viewport or [?]: Select the closed object.
Input or choose view scale <Paper> or Input scale of the viewport or
[Extents/Active<0.000831>/Paper<1.000000>]: select necessary option.

637
nanoCAD Mechanica

Edit Layout Viewports

You can redefine the boundary of a layout viewport by using the grips. You can either use the
multi-feature modes for grips editing of viewports which are used as the boundary of the closed
polylines and splines (for more information, see «Editing viewports of paper space». The type
and location of grips depend on the type of viewport or the object from which it is converted:

The following editing commands can be used with the selected viewport: Copy, Move, Scale,
etc.
You can copy and move the viewports to the clipboard and paste them from the clipboard.
The clipboard options can be modified in the Properties panel:

To turn on/off the content display of the viewport, use the Yes or No options from the drop-
down list of the On option (or use the ON/OFF command from the View menu – Viewports
item):

The objects on the turned off viewport are invisible. You cannot set as default the turned off
viewport. A large number of active (with turned on visibility of content) viewports requires
considerable time for regeneration. Turn off the visibility of some unused viewports to improve
the regeneration of the document. You can move and resize the deactivated viewports. The
deactivated viewports are not printed.

638
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Display locked option allows you to block or unblock a viewport (Yes and No options are
available in the drop-down list). A similar function is performed by the Lock/Unlock command
from the View menu – Viewports item. Locking a viewport used to previously set the scale of a
viewport remains unchanged (viewport zoom does not affect the viewport scale).
The Standard Scale and Scale option allows you to set or change the scale of the displayed
view in a viewport. For example, if a drawing fragment is created in 1:1 scale and you want to
specify 1:4 scale for it, it is necessary to enter 0.25 value in the right column of the Scale option
or select 1:4 from the drop-down list of the Standard Scale option:

The view scale of a viewport is not changed when you edit the boundaries of the viewport; for
example, when you modify a boundary by grips. If you set the scale in the layout viewport before
you access the model space, you can lock the scale to prevent changes. When the scale is
locked, you cannot use zoom while you work in model space
You can clip the boundaries of the viewports (the Modify menu – Clip – Viewport).
The viewport allows you to edit the objects of the model space from the layout. If there are
several viewports in model space, use CTRL+R combination to change current viewport. If you
are in paper space, double-click within a layout viewport. You are now in model space. The
selected layout viewport becomes the current viewport, and you can pan the view and change
the layer properties. If you are in model space in a layout viewport, double-click outside the

viewport. To switch quickly from a viewport in layout, use the button in the status bar.

Located next, the button performs switching from the layout back into the viewport.
Set parameters of viewport in a command line:

Button Value/Action

Current space - Model. Click to cross to paper space.

Current space - Paper. No selected viewports. Click to

cross to viewport.
Paper Lock
Current space - Paper. Viewport is selected or active.

Lock viewport Off.

Click the button to lock a viewport.

Lock viewport On.

Click the button to unlock a viewport.
Scale of selected or active viewport.
Click the arrow to select new value.
Several viewports with different scales and lock parameters
are selected.

639
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set show boundary for a viewport

Menu: Modify – Clip > Viewport

Command line: VPCLIP

This command allows you to change the border of the created layout viewport.
When you select a viewport, the Viewport command will be available from the context menu:

Use the command to clip the border of the viewport and objects displayed on the viewport. The
show boundary only defines the objects’ visibility option in the viewport, the objects do not
change on the drawing.
Options:

? Calls additional options to select the objects.

Polygonal Set the polygonal contour of the show boundary by specifying all the
polygon vertices.
Undo Undo the specified points of the polygon vertices.
The start point cannot be undone.
Object Set the boundary contour by specifying the closed object.
The object should already be created.
You can use circles, ellipses, closed polylines and closed splines as
objects,.

Viewport before setting the display boundary Viewport display after setting a polygonal
display boundary

Command prompts when you set polygonal boundary:

Select viewport to apply action or [?]: Select the viewport.

Specify clipping option <Polygonal> or
[Polygonal/Object/Delete]: Select the Polygonal option.
Specify start point: Specify the start point.
640
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the second point.

Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify the end point and press ENTER.

Command prompts when you set boundary by object:

Select viewport to apply action or [?]: Select the viewport.

Specify clipping option <Polygonal> or
[Polygonal/Object/Delete]: Select the Object option.
Select closed object to create viewport: Select the closed object.

Document plot
To print a document:
1. In the Layers dialog box (the Format menu – Layers…), carry out the following for the
layers that should be printed:

turn on the visibility ( ),

turn on the availability to print ( ).

2. If necessary, set the display order of the objects, using the Display Order commands
from the Tools menu.
3. Set the printer settings for each layout:

right-click on the Model tab or corresponding tab in the Layout,

in the opened context menu select the Page Setup… command:

create a new, edit existing or import the parameters set of a page previously
created in another document;

when you create a new or edit an existing parameters set of a page, specify the
required parameters in the Page Setup Manager dialog box. Click the Apply to
layout button to apply the parameters set to the current layout and close the
dialog box.
4. Print out the task (the Plot or Batch plot command).

Page Setup Manager

Menu: File – Page Setup…

Toolbar: Main–

Command line: PAGESETUP

641
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you are preparing a document for printing, it is necessary to save the settings of the plot
options in the named page setups. Use the named page setups to reduce the document
preparation time for the plot by applying previously made plot settings to new documents
layouts.
You can create named page setups, modify existing ones or import page setups from other
drawings. The page setups are assigned to each page of the document and are stored in a
document file.
Start the command and the Page Setup Manager dialog box will be opened. The name of the
current layout is displayed in brackets in the dialog box title bar:

Options:

Existing page setups In the left part of the section, the list of page setups that are
available to apply to the current layout is displayed.
Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are
enclosed in asterisks (for example, *Model*, *Layout1*).
Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout.
Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are
enclosed in asterisks, with the named page setup in parentheses;
for example, *Model(Setup1)*, *Layout(Setup2)*, etc.

NOTE: When the current layout is selected, the Apply to layout

button is not available.

Opens the New Plot Set dialog box, in which you can select a set
created earlier as a template and enter a name for the new page
setup.

Opens the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can edit the
settings for the selected page setup.

Opens the Open Document File dialog box (a standard file

selection dialog box), in which you can select a file from which to
import one or more page setups.

642
nanoCAD Mechanica

Deletes the selected setup from the existing page setups list.

Plot parameters Displays information about the selected page setup.

Device name: Displays the name of the plot device.

Plotter: Displays the type of plot device.
Output: Displays the physical location of the output device.
Paper format: Displays the name, paper size and orientation specified in the
currently selected page setup.
The paper size and orientation are displayed in square brackets [ ].

NOTE: The name of the paper format can include the paper size
that is displayed in round brackets ( ).

NOTE: The page setups created for the layouts are not applied to the model space. Conversely, the page
setups created for the model space are not applied to the layouts.

To create the page setup:

1. Click the New button.
2. In the opened New Plot Set dialog box in the Based on plot set section, select an
already created setup as the template:

3. In the Name field, enter the name of the new setup.

NOTE: By default, the created page setup will be named SetupN, where N is the number of the created
setup. It is recommended to assign a user name to the new setup which will display the name and
orientation, plotter name, etc. For example, A4 (portrait) PDFCreator or А1 (landscape)
CanonLargeFormat W7250.

4. Click OK.
5. Specify the necessary parameters in the Page setup dialog box and click OK.
The newly created setup is displayed in the Existing page setup list of the Page Setup
Manager dialog box.
To edit the page setup:
1. Select the setup to edit from the Existing page setup list.

643
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Click the Edit button.

3. Edit the required parameters in the opened Page Setup dialog box.
4. Click OK.
To import the page setup:
1. Click the Import button.
2. In the opened standard file selection dialog box, select the file or folder in which it is
located.

NOTE: You can import page setups from the drawing format (*.dwg), drawing template (*.dwt) or
drawing interchange format (*.dxf).

3. Select one or more page setups in the Import page setup dialog box (use the SHIFT
and CTRL keys).

4. Click OK.
To delete the page setup:
1. Select the setup to edit from the Existing page setup list, for example
*Model(Setup1)*.
2. Click the Edit button.
3. In the Page Setup dialog box choose the None option in the Printer/plotter drop-
down list.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
5. The name of set setup will be deleted from the page name in the Page Setup Manager
dialog box. For this example it will be *Model*.
6. Select the page setup (Setup1). The Delete button is available.
7. Click Delete.
8. Click Close to finish.

Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog box is displayed when you create a new or edit an existing page setup
(the New and Create button):

644
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Printer/plotter

Name: Drop-down list displays the available plotting devices.

To file Turn on/off the mode of print into the plt-file.
When the To file option is turned (check box is selected), clicking the
Plot button in the Plot dialog box opens the Plot to file dialog box,
where you can store plt-file.

Displays the dialog box, where you can view or modify the current plotter
configuration.
The dialog box view and configuration settings are determined by the
driver of the current plotting device.

Paper size and orientation

Drop-down list to select the paper size for the current plotting device.

645
nanoCAD Mechanica

Portrait: Sets the portrait paper orientation.

646
nanoCAD Mechanica

Landscape: Sets the landscape paper orientation.

Plot upside Turns round the print area.
down:

Plot area

Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted.

From the drop-down list the following options are available:

Display - Plots the view in the current viewport in

the Model tab or in the current paper space view in a
Layout tab.
Extents - Plots the portion of the current space of
the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the
current space is plotted.

Limits - When plotting from the Model tab, plots the entire
drawing area that is defined by the grid limits.
Layout - When plotting a layout, plots everything within the
printable area of the specified paper size.

View - Plots a view that was previously saved with the View
command. You can select a named view from the list:

NOTE: If there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is

unavailable.

Window - Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify.

When you select this option, the Page Setup dialog box will
be temporarily closed and in the command line the prompt
appears: Specify First Corner or [Select]: you can
specify the two corners of the area to be plotted. The paper
size and orientation in this case are defined by the
parameters specified in the Paper size and orientation
section. Click the Window button to use the pointing device
to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter
coordinate values. The Select option allows you to specify
the plot area by selecting one side of the frame that limits
the paper size. When you specify the first plot area,
additional options are displayed in the dialog box:

New window print area - Cancels all plot areas by setting a new
area.

Add window print area - Adds the plot area to those already
specified.

Delete last print area - Removes the specified plot areas in the
reverse order of their assignment.

647
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to

the paper size and printable area.
The tooltips display the paper size and printable area:
Dashed line – defines the plot area for the specified paper size
(numbers indicate the length and width of the plot area).
The blue hatch bounded by the dashed contour – defines the
location of the specified plot area on the paper.
Red line – is a warning that the specified plot area exceeds the plot
boundaries.

Plot offset

X: Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of

the Plot Offset option.
Y: Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of
the Plot Offset option.
Multipage: Turn on/off the multipage plot mode.
The multipage plot is useful to print large formats (A0, A1, etc)
on printers that do not support a plot of these formats.
This option is available when the Fit to paper option is off.
Center the plot: Turn on/off the mode for automatic offset detection in the X and Y
directions so that the drawing is placed in the center of the paper.

Plot scale

Fit to paper: Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size.
Frame width: This option considers the weight of the frame line defining the
drawing boundaries and coinciding with the plot area boundaries.
When you set a parameter value equal to the weight of the frame
lines, the frame prints without reducing its thickness.
For example, if the parameter value is equal to zero, the frame
created by lines of 1 mm, will be printed at 0.5 mm thick. Set the
parameter to a 1 mm value to print the frame at 1 mm thick.

NOTE: The Frame width option is available when the Fit to paper
mode is on.

Scale: Defines the exact scale for the plot. You can create a custom scale
by entering the number of inches (inches or millimetres) equal to the
number of drawing units.

Plot style table (pen assignments)

Drop-down list to select the current plot style.

Color Plot Mode: Manages the display of the drop-down list of the plot styles tables.
When the checkbox is switched on, the color plot styles will display
(*.ctb), when the checkbox is switched off – named plot styles will
display (*.stb).

Opens the Plot Style Table Editor dialog box to edit the plot styles
for the currently assigned plot style table or create new.

648
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shaded viewport options

Shade plot: Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted.
The following options are available:
As displayed - plots objects the way they are displayed
on the screen.
Wireframe - plots objects in wireframe, regardless of
the way they are displayed on the screen.
Hidden - plots objects with hidden lines removed,
regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the
screen.
Rendered - plots objects as rendered, regardless of the
way they are displayed on the screen.

Quality: Specifies the resolution at which shaded and rendered viewports are
plotted.
The following options are available:
Draft – sets rendered and shaded model space views to
be plotted as wireframe.

Preview - sets rendered and shaded model space views

to be plotted at one quarter of the current device
resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi.

Normal - sets rendered and shaded model space views

to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution,
to a maximum of 300 dpi.

Presentation - sets rendered and shaded model space

views to be plotted at the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 600 dpi.

Maximum - Sets rendered and shaded model space

views to be plotted at the current device resolution with
no maximum.
Custom - sets rendered and shaded model space views
to be plotted at the resolution setting that you specify in
the DPI box, up to the current device resolution.

DPI: Specifies the resolution of the current plotting device.

This option is available if you select Custom in the Quality box.

Plot options The options that allows you to switch between ready-configured plot
styles (the *.ctb or *.stb files) and customised properties for the
objects in the current document.
Plot object Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are
lineweights: plotted.
Plot with plot styles: Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are
plotted.
When you select this option, Plot Object Lineweights is
automatically selected also.
Plot paperspace last: Plots model space geometry first.

649
nanoCAD Mechanica

Hide paperspace: Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the paper
objects space viewport.
This option is available only from a layout tab.
The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in
the layout.
Scale lineweights: Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.
Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted objects and are
plotted with the linewidth size, regardless of the plot scale.

Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by

executing the Preview command.

Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout.

The named page setup applied to the layout is displayed in the title
of the Plot dialog box when you print this page.

Set and add the custom paper formats

If necessary, it is possible to set a paper format that is not in the drop-down list of the Paper
size and orientation list in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes. You can set new paper
formats in addition to those available in nanoCAD in the Papers section of the Options dialog
box (the Tools menu – Options).
To edit the list of paper formats:
1. Select the Papers section of the Options dialog box.
2. Set the label of the formats that should be displayed in the list.

To set a new paper format:

1. Select the Papers section of the Options dialog box.
2. Click the Add button.
3. In the opened Add paper format dialog box:

specify the name of the new paper format;

select the units;

enter the width and height of the paper format;
if necessary, set size of the internal frame: set the Internal Frame mark and
specify the values of margins in the Frame margins section:

650
nanoCAD Mechanica

NOTE: The plot area sizes are set according to the plotting device used because these are determined by
the manufacturer of the plotting device.

NOTE: When you set the paper size, the minimum and maximum sizes for the plotting device used should
be considered. They are also determined by the manufacturer of the plotting device.

4. Click OK to close the window.

5. Click OK to close the Options dialog box.
To modify a paper format:
1. Select the Papers section of the Options dialog box.
2. Select a format for modifying.
3. Click the Modify button.
4. In the opened Modify paper format dialog box repeat actions of 3-5 items from the
previous section. You should not change the format paper name.
The specified paper format will be displayed in the Paper size and orientation list in the Plot
and Page Setup dialog boxes after you select a specific plotting device.

ATTENTION! If the paper format for which the sizes given are more or less acceptable for a specific
plotting device, then the paper size and orientation list for this device are not displayed.

Plot Style Editor

Menu: File – Plot Style Manager …

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: PLOTSTYLEMANAGER

651
nanoCAD Mechanica

A plot style controls how an object or layer is plotted by determining the plotted properties such
as lineweight, color, and fill style. Plot style tables collect groups of plot styles. The same
drawing can be printed in different ways, for example, in color or monochrome, by assigning
various plot styles to it.
The Plot Style Manager dialog box is also used to change plot style settings for both named
and color-dependent plot style tables.
Color-dependent plot style tables are stored in the Plot Styles folder and have a *.ctb
extension. By using color-dependent plot styles to control how objects are plotted, you ensure
that all objects that share the same color are plotted the same way.
All named plot style tables have an *.stb extension. You can only create, delete and apply plot
styles in a named plot style table. You can define as many or as few plot styles as you need in a
drawing.
Color-dependent (*.ctb extension) and named (*.stb extension) plot style tables are stored in
the Plot Styles folder by default:
C:\Users\%User_name%\AppData\Roaming\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Plus Int 7.0\PlotStyles
You can add, delete, rename and copy plot styles in a named plot style table using the Plot
Style Manager dialog box:

Click OK to open the Plot Style Table Editor dialog box:

652
nanoCAD Mechanica

The General tab contains a description of the plot style table and general information about the
file.
The Form View tab lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings.

The button opens the Edit Lineweights dialog box:

The plot style editor can be opened by the button from the Page Setup dialog box.

653
nanoCAD Mechanica

Plot Preview
Menu: File – Plot Preview …

Toolbar: Main –

Key combination: CTRL+F2

Command line: PREVIEW

You can preview the drawing from the Plot Preview dialog box:

NOTE: A preview is not available for a layout that does not have an assigned plotter.

Option:

Zoom all : Display the whole plot area in the preview window.

Zoom 1:1: Display the plot area at a scale of 1:1.

Zoom in : Zoom in to the image.

654
nanoCAD Mechanica

Zoom out: Zoom out from the image.

Print: Sends the drawing to the plotter.

Close: Closes the Plot Preview dialog box.

Additional options are displayed in the dialog box for a multipage plot:

First page: Display the first page of a plot set in the preview.

Previous page: Display the previous page of a plot set in the preview.

Next page: Display the next page of a plot set in the preview.

Last page: Display the last page of a plot set in the preview.

Display the number of the page you are viewing in the window, and the
total number of pages of the plot set.

You can zoom and pan an image in the preview window by clicking inside the window:

To zoom an image, rotate the mouse wheel.

To pan an image, move the mouse with the left or right button pressed and also the
mouse wheel.
You can open the Plot Preview dialog box from the Page Setup, Plot and Publish dialog
boxes.
When printing files that have rich graphics, a large number of viewports, etc., the message “ not
enough memory to create preview” can appear in the preview window. In this case it is
necessary to change the Print preview mode settings in the Graphic settings item of the
Options dialog box.
By default, the Metafile parameter is set:

Plot
Menu: File – Plot…

Toolbar: Main –

Key combination: CTRL+P

Command line: DWFOUT, PLOT

This command opens the Plot dialog box that differs from the Page Setup dialog box only in the

655
nanoCAD Mechanica

Page setup section and it has a Plot button instead of OK:

656
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Page setup

Name: Displays a list of available page setups in the drawing.

After the first drawing plot, the <Previous plot> option is
available in the list. It stores the settings of the last plot.

Displays the New Plot Set dialog box, in which you can save the
current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup.

Number of copies: Sets number of the print copies.

Description of other options, see in the «Page Setup» section.

657
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you set the plot area, the following parameters are
displayed on the screen:
size and orientation of the selected plot paper format
as a frame which is displayed by a solid blue line,
real plot area for the specified printer and selected
paper format as a frame which is displayed by a
dashed blue line,
specified plot area of the drawing as a frame which is
displayed by a dashed red line.
You can change the color of the frame specified by default in the
Color settings section of the Options dialog box (the Tools
menu – Options):

To set several plot areas:

1. In the Plot area section, select the Window option from the drop-down menu.
2. Specify the first and second corners of the first plot area on the screen.

3. In the Plot dialog box click the Add window print area button and specify the
second plot area.
4. Repeat the process of specifying plot areas for other plot areas.

5. To cancel the last plot area specified in error, click the Delete last print area
button. When you click this button again, the previous plot area will be deleted and so
on.

ATTENTION! When you click the Delete last print area button, the Plot dialog box is not closed.

NOTE: Click the New window print area button to cancel all specified plot areas and specify a
new plot area.

NOTE: It is recommended to set the print area the same size. For example, if select Portrait A4 paper
size and set several print areas of A4 format, and then select A3 Landscape and also set several print
areas of A3 size, then all specified areas (including A4) will be printed on the A3 Landscape paper.

To set a multipage plot:

1. Select a printer.
2. Specify the paper size and orientation.
3. Turn off the Fit to paper option.
4. Specify the plot scale.

658
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Turn on the Multipage option.

6. Specify the plot area.
7. If necessary, set the plot offset or turn on the Center the plot option.
The multipage plot is useful to print large formats (A0, A1, etc.) on printers that do not support a
plot of these formats.
Example: Plot of the A1 (Landscape) format on A4 papers
The Plot settings:

Display the A1 layout to A4 papers in the model space:

659
nanoCAD Mechanica

Batch Plot
This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

Menu: File – Batch Plot…

Toolbar: Main –

Command line: PUBLISH

This command allows you to create and send to print a drawing set by publishing the sheet set to
a single, multi-sheet file. You can create a paper drawing set by publishing the sheet set to the
plotter named in each sheet's page setup.
You can customise a collection of drawings for a specific user and you can add and remove
sheets from the list. The Multi-sheet job option allows you to place one or more files in the list,
for example, when you create *.pdf-files using a virtual printer. The order of the sheets in the file
corresponds to the order of the sheets in list.
After starting the command, the Publish dialog box opens:

660
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:

Publish lists: Drop-down list containing the named publish lists available to plot.
The two lists are displayed by default:

Last - last layouts lists sent to plot.

Current – list of all layouts available in the opened documents.

Number of Specifies the number of copies to publish.

copies:
Multi-sheet job: Turn on/off the mode to plot sheets in the file, for example, when you print
on a virtual printer.
The sheets plot is carried out in order, as specified in the dialog box.
If you assign the same plotter for all sheets, they will be placed in one file.
If you assign different plotters for different sheets, the plot will be carried
in separates files for each plotter. If you change the plotter, a new file will
be created.

Columns

State: Column displays the plot status:

- Print sheet.
- Don’t print sheet.

- The plot is forbidden (in the case of incorrect plot settings,

for example, do not specify a plotter).
Double-click to switch the status from Plot to Not plot.
File: Displays the file name.
Layout: Displays the name of the layout tab in paper space. Displays the Model for
the model space.
Page setup: Displays the named page setup for the sheet.
If the sheet does not have an assigned page setup, it displays None.
Plotter: Indicates that the output devices given for each drawing sheet in the page
setup will be used.

661
nanoCAD Mechanica

If you don’t assign an output device to a sheet, the None value will be
displayed.
Paper: Displays the paper size and orientation.

Buttons

New Deletes all layouts from the list to create a new publish list.
publish list:
Save Saves publish list.
publish list: Click this button to open the Save publish list as dialog box:

,
The List name is displayed by default.
But you can set the user name list.
Click OK and the named list will be saved in the folder:
С:\Users\%User name%\ AppData\Roaming|Nanosoft\nanoCAD
Plus Int 7.0\PlotConfigs\
The named lists are saved in the files with *.plst extension.
Saves the publish lists with a new name.
Save
publish list Click this button to open the Save publish list as dialog box. The List
as: name is displayed by default.
If a new name of a publish list already exists, after you click OK the
following dialog window appears:

Adds a new page to plot.

Add page It is possible to select page only from the opened documents.
to plot:
Click this button to open the Add page to plot dialog box:

662
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the drop-down lists of the Add page to plot dialog box you can
select:
- document containing page to add to plot (Document:);
- layout from selected document (Layout:);
- a named set of parameters list, if it exists in the document (Page
setup:).
Move up: Moves the selected drawing sheets up one position in the list.

Moves the selected drawing sheets down one position in the list.
Move
down:
Deletes the selected drawing sheets from the list of sheets.
Remove You can use the DEL key to delete the selected drawing sheets from the
from list:
list of sheets.

Opens the Plot preview dialog box.

The preview of plot results is available for the selected sheet in the list.
When you print from the preview mode, only the viewable sheet will be
printed.
Opens the Page Setup dialog box to specify the plot options.
Double-click on any column of the selected sheet, except the State
column, to open the Page Setup dialog box.
Starts the publishing operation. The sheets, with the state allowing printed
output, will be printed.
Closes the dialog box.

To create named publish lists to plot:

1. Open one or more documents, the layouts of which it is necessary to plot.
2. Start the Batch Plot command.
3. When you open the Publish dialog box, the list of the layouts, available in the opened
documents, is formed automatically. The following order of the layouts is set by default:

the first in the list is a document from which you run the Batch Plot command.
This is followed by the documents in order of their tabs in the graphic editor
window (from left to right);

the Model tab is first displayed in the document. Next there are tabs of Layout1,
Layout2, A4, A3, etc.
663
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. To edit list:

to remove unnecessary to plot layouts, select them and click Remove from list
button or press DEL;

to move the layouts, use the Move up and the Move down buttons.
5. To set plot settings for each page, click the Page Setup button (double click on any
selected layout column, except the State column, also opens the Page Setup dialog
box).

NOTE: Use the previously created named sets of page setup, to reduce the time of parameters settings.

6. Click the Save publish list button.

7. Enter a name of the list in the Save publish list as dialog box.
8. Click OK to save list.
9. Click Close button, to close the Publish dialog box.

NOTE: When you save a plot setting for each page, the name and location of the file are stored in the list.
To select a named list of layouts to plot, double click on any column of selected layout, except for the
Status column (or click the Page Setup button). File will be loaded automatically, provided that the path
has not changed.

To edit the publish list to plot:

1. Open the document.
2. Start the Batch Plot command.
3. In the Publish dialog box select the necessary list from the drop-down Publish lists
list.
4. Edit list.
5. Click the Save publish list button.
6. Click Close button, to close the Publish dialog box.
To rename the publish list to plot:
1. Open the document.
2. Start the Batch Plot command.
3. In the Publish dialog box select necessary list from the drop-down Publish lists list.
4. Edit list.
5. Click the Save publish list as button.
6. Enter a new name of list.
7. Click OK to save renamed list.
8. Click Close button, to close the Publish dialog box.

Features of the batch plot from the model space

To run the batch plot from the model space:
1. Start the Page Setup command.
2. In the Page Setup Manager dialog box, click the New button.
3. In the New Plot Set dialog box type the set name, for example Portrait A4.
4. Click OK.

664
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. In the opened Page Setup dialog box select printer, paper size – A4, paper orientation
– Portrait, set plot scale and other options.
6. Set by window the first print area of A4 format, then the second and all the other print

areas of A4 format ( Add window print area button). To delete the last specified

print area use the Delete last print area button. The Preview button allows you
to see preview print result of the selected areas. This option can be used at any stage of
the print areas set.
7. When you set the last print area of A4 format, click OK in the Page Setup dialog box to
finish.

ATTENTION! When you create the named set of setup pages from the model space, it is necessary to
include all areas of corresponding format to be printed.

8. Click the New button to create the next plot set (for example, Landscape A3).
9. Repeat actions to create all the other plot sets (for example, to create the Portrait A2,
Landscape A1, etc.).
10. When you set the last plot set, click the Close button in the Page Setup Manager
dialog box.
When you set all named sets of setup pages of the model space you can start the batch plot.
To run the batch plot of the created named sets of setup pages:
1. Start the Batch Plot command.
2. In the Publish dialog box, click the New publish list button to clear the current list.
3. Click the Add page to plot button.
4. In the opened Add page to plot dialog box:
in the drop-down Document list select document (if you plot multiple documents
at once),
in the drop-down Layout list, select Model (displayed by default when you plot
from model space),

in the drop-down Page setup list, select the A4 Portrait parameters set.
5. Click OK to add selected named set into the layouts to plot list.
6. Click the Add page to plot button, to add next set (for example, A3 Landscape), etc.
7. To start plot, click the Publish button.

Internal PDF-plotter
In the nanoCAD you are able to transform and print the drawings to the PDF file (Adobe®
Portable Document Format) by using the internal PDF plotter. When you are going to print, you
can create a number of single PDF files as well as a multi-page file.

This feature is not available in free version of nanoCAD.

To print in PDF file:
1. Open the Plot dialog box.
2. In the opened list of the Printer/plotter section select Internal PDF Plotter.
3. Click the Setup button.
4. Adjust the necessary settings in the opened Internal PDF Plotter dialog box:

665
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options:
Paper size and orientation

Drop-down list to select the paper size.

Portrait Sets the portrait paper orientation

Landscape Sets the landscape paper orientation.
Modifies the predefined paper format.
The button opens the Modify paper format dialog box.

Adds a new paper format.

The button opens the Add paper format dialog box.
DPI Sets the resolution to save in the PDF file.

Save settings

Show Save file dialog Opens the standard dialog box to specify the name and storage
location of pdf-file after printing.
Use predefined file name Turn on the mode of saving pdf-file with file name (pdf-file name
and the storage path are displayed in the File name field).
Folder: Displays the path to the folder of pdf-file storage.
By default there is the folder that contains the original
document. Turn off the Use document file folder checkbox
and click button to select another folder of the pdf-file
storage.
Use document file folder Turn off the mode of the pdf-file storage in the original
document folder.
Filename mask: Sets the template for the pdf-file name.
In this field to the entered pdf-file name, the name of original
document, layout name, user name, etc. can be automatically

666
nanoCAD Mechanica

added with the variables.

The drop-down list of variables to form the pdf-file template.

The following variables are available:
<Doc Name> – The <DN> variable adds
the name of the original document to the name of
created pdf-file.

<Layout Name> – The <LN> variable adds

the layout name of the original document to the
name of created pdf-file.
<User Name> – The <UN> variable adds the
user name to the name of created pdf-file.
<Time> – The <T> variable adds
the time of file creation to the name of created pdf-
file.
<Date> – The <D> variable
adds the date of file creation to the name of created
pdf-file.

<Counter1> – The <C1> variable

adds the number (index) in the format of 1, 2, 3,
etc. to the name of created pdf-file.
<Counter01> – The <C2> variable
adds the number (index) in the format of 01, 02,
03, etc. to the name of created pdf-file.

<Counter001> – The <C3> variable adds

the number (index) in the format of 001, 002, 003,
etc. to the name of created pdf-file.
<Counter0001> – The <C4> variable
adds the number (index) in the format of 0001,
0002, 0003, etc. to the name of created pdf-file.
<Counter00001> – The <C5> variable
adds the number (index) in the format of 00001,
00002, 00003, etc. to the name of created pdf-file.

<Counter000001> – – The <C6>

variable adds the number (index) in the format of
000001, 000002, 000003, etc. to the name of
created pdf-file.
<Separator> – – The <_> variable adds
the underscore symbol (_) to the name of created
pdf-file.
All variables added to existing file name template are
automatically separated with the underscore symbol (_). If
necessary, the underscore symbol (separator) can be inserted in
the template manually by selecting in the drop-down list.
If file exist: The drop-down list to set options when saving pdf-file with the
name of an existing file.
The following options are available:
Append page to existing file – Appends the PDF
pages of the document to the pages of an existing
pdf-file.

667
nanoCAD Mechanica

Show warning dialog – When this option is set,

668
nanoCAD Mechanica

the Specify action dialog box opens after clicking

the Plot button:

You can choose the following actions in the dialog

box to save pdf-file:

overwrite the existing file (the Overwrite

button);

save in a new file with the name of an

existing file (the Autonumbering button),
The number will be added to the file name
automatically;
add the pages of the document to the pages
of an existing pdf-file (the Add Page button).
Always overwrite existing file – Overwrites the
contents of an existing pdf-file.
Auto numbering file name – Saves a file with new
name consisting of the name of an existing file and
automatically adds to it the index number (index).

File name: Displays the path and specified name of the pdf-file.
Launch default PDF Turn on/off the viewing in the installed software of PDF files
viewer after printing viewing at the end of pdf-file printout.

5. Select OK to close the Internal PDF Plotter dialog box.

6. Set the necessary parameters in the Plot dialog box: plot area, plot scale, etc.
7. To printout the document to the PDF click the Plot button.

669
nanoCAD Mechanica

SOFTWARE EXTENSIONS
nanoCAD allows you to use different software to extend its functionality: add new commands,
entities, tools for editing and document managment, database.
nanoCAD supports the following programming interfaces:

NrxGate - C++ API, is designed to create and transfer applications on C++, allowing
you to create new entities;

.NET API - is designed to create .NET applications;

MultiCAD API - C++ API, is designed to write cross-platform CAD applications, allowing
you to create new entities;

MultiCAD .NET API - .NET API, designed for developing crossplatform CAD-
applications, creating new primitives

COM API - is designed to write automation scripts and create commands in JScript,
VBScript, manage external nanoCAD applications via ActiveX®;

LISP API - is the dialect of LISP, designed to automate work in nanoCAD.

The documentation of nanoCAD’s API, examples of applications and scripts are available for
members of nanoCADDevelopers’Club.

NRX and LISP file loading

Menu: Tools – Application > Load application…

Command line: APPLOAD

The command allows you to load NSF, MultiCAD API, LISP, .NET and NRX-applications to
nanoCAD.
After starting the command the Load/Upload Applications dialog box appears:

670
nanoCAD Mechanica

To load a file, select it in the top of the dialog box and click the Load button. All files loaded in
this nanoCAD session display in the list of the Loaded applications tab.
To record the history of the loading, select the Add to history checkbox. The list of previously
loaded files can be viewed on the History list tab.
It is possibile to automatically load the applications when you start nanoCAD. To do this, click the
Contents button and in the opened dialog box and add the files that should be automatically
loaded for each new nanoCAD session.
After loading of the NSF, NRX, MultiCAD, .NET or LISP application, its commands, that can be
started from the nanoCAD’s command line, are available.

NOTE: Unlike AutoCAD, where a LISP-application is loaded only into the current document, the
commands of LISP-applications loaded in nanoCAD are available during whole working session from any
documents.

.NET application loading

Menu: Tools – Application > Load .NET application

Command line: NETLOAD

To load a NET-apllication, start the command and in the opened dialog box select the necessary
dll-file.

671
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command of loaded NET-apllication are available from the any documents during whole
nanoCAD working session.

JScript loading
Menu: Tools – Scripts > Java Scripts

Command line: JS
After starting the commang, select the necessary file with js extension in the opened dialog
window. Script execution begins immediately after loading.

VBScript loading
Menu: Tools – Scripts > Visual Basic Scripts

Command line: VBS

After starting the command, select the necessary file with vbs extension in the opened dialog
window. Script execution begins immediately after loading.

NSF files loading

Command line: NSF
It is possible to register the scripts as nanoCAD commands. To register js or vbs scripts (both
one and whole packet), a programmer create NSF-file (the defined structure XML-file), which
subsequently is loaded to nanoCAD with NSF command by user.
When the NSF-file is loaded, its command are available.

Work with LISP-applications

Menu: Tools – Scripts > LISP

Command line: LSP

After starting the command, select the necessary option in the command line.
Options:

COmmands Outputs the commands, LISP variables and loaded LISP-applications to the
Functions command line.
Variables
Load Allows to load LISP-file with lsp or mnl extension by entering whole path of the
file and its extension.
Execute Allows to execute one of the functions lsp or mnl file, that was loaded by using
the Load option.
Console Converts nanoCAD command line to the LISP console mode. In this case, the
command promt changes to _>:

672
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the nanoCAD, entered function can be performed in the Console mode.

To exit the LISP-console mode, enter (quit) or (exit).

Basic knowledge
Initial information about the work environment nanoCAD Mechanics

Workspace
Controls features
Jobs in the current scale
Compatibility
Selecting the direction of drawing
Special keys
Geometric constructions
Object-dependent parts
Context menu entry fields

Workspace
Tools nanoCAD Mechanics6 complement the familiar environment nanoCAD Mechanics without
disconnecting or reassigning her team, toolbar and menu items.

After installing nanoCAD Mechanics6 in the main menu nanoCAD Mechanics added to the menu
nanoCAD Mechanics.

Menu
UI
help system

Menu
Drop-down menu nanoCAD Mechanics6 It is a two-level, and is organized into a hierarchy. When
you select a menu item marked with a "black triangle", activated the appropriate drop-down menu.
Thus, you can access all the tools nanoCAD Mechanics6.

User interface

nanoCAD Mechanics6 Main panel - duplex instrumental panel, on which the group of tools to
work with symbols and graphic constructions, certain standards nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Tools are grouped by appointment (group callouts, the group of commands for set benchmarks,
etc.).

By clicking the left mouse button, the user can select the first tool in order of the group (team
"Array of orthogonal axes" or command "Universal Leader").

If you click and hold the mouse button on the corresponding open nested panel containing the other
instruments in the group. Then, without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor to the

673
nanoCAD Mechanica

other team in this group, and then release the button. This will run the selected command ("Array of
polar axes" or "Leader comb")

Since each instrument has its own panel, the user can place the screen are panels that contain the
most frequently used tool group.

Scale
Instrumental single-level panel to change the current scale. Changing the scale only affects newly
created and selected object, and does not affect existing objects. If you switch to paper space scale
is automatically set to 1:1.

Object Manager
Tool palette nanoCAD Mechanics6 database management library objects and design elements of the
drawing.

This palette contains two tabs:

Library - it comprises a minimal set of structural elements and is open to the user;
Objects - it displays all the objects in the drawing by nanoCAD Mechanics6. Directly from the
palette, you can perform a number of actions with objects: edit, delete, hide and search for
them.

Help System
Background information is available to the user at any time. The help system has two modes of
access - and the overall context.

Common mode provides access to the contents of certificates in the absence of the command being
executed.

Contextual mode automatically provides access to reference information, as appropriate for the
team.

Background information is divided into two parts.

The first part - is information on working with the program nanoCAD Mechanics6.

The second part - the basic standards nanoCAD Mechanics6, shown in full.

Accessing Help on how to use the following ways:

Main menu - Help - FAQ on the program ...

Button Help toolbar "MechaniCS Main panel" (general regime)
In the dialog boxes (context mode)

Jobs in the current scale

The nanoCAD Mechanics6 uses the concept of the current scale. The current scale is different from
the current global proportions, expressed in units (units).

Scale objects made depending on the setting of "Use the global scope to design elements" (see.
Customizing the appearance / General settings / Registration)
670
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the value of this setting - "Yes", the dimensions are scaled design elements and standard
elements nanoCAD Mechanics6base data types defined by the appropriate scale lines.

671
nanoCAD Mechanica

This setting is useful when drawing in model space on the scale of 1: 1, followed by design drawings
in paper space viewport on an appropriate scale. In this case, design elements will appear
consistently in viewports with different scales.

If the "apply globally to design elements" is set to "no" to the size of standard parts varies in
accordance with the scale and size of the design elements remain unchanged. In addition, there is a
linear scaling sizes by setting a linear scale factor.

This method is used when plotting the initial scale model other than 1:1.

The scale of the database objects of standard products and design elements can be installed with
the help of the scale.

In the absence of selected objects using the zoom panel zoom button or change the current zoom
scale drawing.

If you have selected objects, the button and the panel scale display their scale. Zooming only affects
the selected items without changing the current scale drawing.

The program features the ability to zoom the selected object nanoCAD Mechanics6 center of the
screen as a display frame around the object (the default frame is disabled). To do this, move the
cursor to the object that appeared "Overall corners", hold down the SHIFT key, click on the right
mouse button - will automatically increase the screen of the selected object.

If you press on an object at the same time the right mouse button and SHIFT key returns to the
previous display with automatic centering of the object on the screen.

Variants of registration projections

What is the model space and paper space?
What is a floating viewport?
672
nanoCAD Mechanica

To what extent the hell?

Example of extended projection drawings

What is model space and paper space?

nanoCAD allows render graphic elements in model space ( model space) and a layout (paper space).

Model space is used to construct two-dimensional projections of three-dimensional drawings or

models.

Paper space is used to design drawings for printing. To go to the "list" is to click on the tab sheet
(Layout) in the lower left corner of the window of nanoCAD. For registration projections drawing in
paper space uses floating viewports.

What is a floating viewport?

Floating viewport - this is an area in paper space bounded by a spline, polyline or circle. It is
displayed with the specified scale objects placed in model space.

To build a floating viewport switch to paper space by clicking on the tab Sheet1 (Layout1) and type
in the command line _vports.

To what extent the hell?

Option 1. Making projections in model space (print formats with their scale)
Option 2. Making projections in model space (print formats at 1:1)
Option 3. Making projections in paper space

Option 1. Making projections in model space

Suppose the principal species in the model space are performed one by one.

Additional types, sections are made with scale factors other than the main species.

Features insert frame

When placing a border with a title stamp in model space given its scale relative to the principal
species. Frame increases or decreases.

Features design drawings

When dimensioning must take into account the scale factor drawing (the value of the dimension
text, the value of the arrow, spacing, etc.) and numerical designations for each species.

Assume frame is increased with respect to the main sight 10 times. In this case the arrowheads,
dimension text height and other text labels should be increased by 10 times. A nominal size of the
text for the main species should be marked on a scale of 1:1.

When applied to the kinds of sizes, made in a different scale (in our example, 1:20), nominal size
must be multiplied by a scaling factor.

673
nanoCAD Mechanica

Example of projection drawing frame, increased 10 times

Especially when printing

In this example, the sheet is printed at 1:10 in order to maintain a standard frame size, title block
text and symbols. Such technology is not supported Construction Site 6.

Option 2. Making projections in model space

Features insert formats

The frame is inserted into the space pattern in the scale of 1:1.

Main types, made a scale of one to one in the model space scale when placed on a frame with a title
block.

Particulars of
The magnitude of arrowheads, dimension text height and other text refer to all types are specified in
a scale of 1:1. When dimensioning must take into account only the scale factor of the form in which
they are applied.

674
nanoCAD Mechanica

Example of drawing. Frame in a 1:1 projection in a given scale

Especially when printing

Under this option, registration in model space frame with projections printed at a scale of 1:1. This
variant of design drawings in model space adopted in Construction Site 6.

Option 3. Making projections in paper space

The most convenient way to design drawings projections. All images of objects executed in one-to-
one scale model space.

Border and title stamp inserted in 1:1 scale in paper space.

Scale for each species, cut or section is given in the floating viewport in paper space. No need to
convert the nominal values of dimensional numbers. Floating viewport - a kind of lens with a
predetermined magnification (scale) of the portion of the drawing.

675
nanoCAD Mechanica

Border and two floating viewports placed in paper space

Particulars of
Scale factor when dimensioning for each species is taken into account automatically.

Especially when printing

Frame with projections printed in 1:1. scale in nanoCAD Mechanics 6 frame and title block inserted
in model space or sheet at a scale of 1:1.

Example of design drawings of extended objects

Especially useful when you make a paper space drawings of extended objects. A small example. In
model space, one to one (in real terms) has been drawn projection with dimensions 500 mm
horizontally.

Projection with dimensions of 500 mm horizontally

Objective: To formalize this projection in paper space on the frame size A3.

676
nanoCAD Mechanica

Result projection design in paper space

We turn to paper space by selecting a bookmark Sheet1 (Layout1). Insert Frame A3 clicking the icon
format in the main toolbar nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

After placing the frame in paper space is created by default floating viewport rectangular shape.
Inside it displays all the objects in the model space. Zoom while arbitrary and requires further
editing.

Resize a floating screen. To do this by clicking on its contour the left mouse button, move the
highlight corner points. Part of the projection will then be hidden loop viewport. We did a kind of
trimming images.

677
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move the corner points of the floating viewport

Result after the transfer of the image projection of the angular points of the contour floating
viewport

Panel Viewports (Viewports)

Once the boundaries of the first viewport defined, define the scale of the image. Distinguish the
border of the viewport. We define the scale of the image using the dashboard Viewports (Viewports)
. To get the image on the right part of the projection make a copy of the floating screen and move it
to the right.

678
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move the copy right of the screen

Changed the boundary of the right floating viewport

With a team of pan define the right side projection view inside the right floating viewport. To do this,
double-click the left mouse button within the contour of the viewport. Sign space layout changes to
mark the user coordinate system (UCS-UCS).

Especially when printing

Before printing frame with the projections need to go out of the floating viewport to paper space. To
do this, double-click the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the viewport. Sign appears in
paper space.

Controls features
Intelligent controls handles
Special symbols and fonts

Smart Grip design elements

Smart pens designed to edit the properties inserted in the drawing design elements without calling
the dialog editing.

Smart pens are included in the settings nanoCAD Mechanics:

General settings - Edit - Show smart pen

679
nanoCAD Mechanica

Designation of cut

1. Grip the reflection direction of the form

2. Grips stretch parallel to the cutting line (for the extreme strokes)

Designation type

1. Grip reflection direction

2. Grip turning sight line

Break

1. Flyout pen type broken

Linear
Two-Linear
Curve
Two-Curve
Tubular
2. Grips stretch

680
nanoCAD Mechanica

Callout positional universal

1. Switch (toggle) text alignment (3 positions)

2. Flyout arrow type Grip
3. Grip adding line-outs
4. Grip reflection shelves callouts in the opposite direction
5. Grip turning shelves

Callout comb

1. Grip switch text alignment

2. Grip adding lines, callouts
3. Knob-type selector arrow
4. Grip turning ridge line
5. Grip turning shelves

681
nanoCAD Mechanica

Designation slope

1. Grip moving base

2. Grip selection bias
3. Grip moving shelves
4. Flyout Grip to the presentation
As is
Ratio
Decimal
Percent
Permile
Degree

Nodal callout

1. Grip align the provisions of the text

2. Grip turning shelves
3. Grip reflection shelves

Nodal transversal callout

682
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Grip switch text alignment

2. Grip moving the shelf position
3. Flyout pen type callouts
Intermittent
Solid
4. Grip position reflection shelves

Chain callout

1. Knob-type selector arrow

2. Grip switch text alignment
3. Grip position reflection shelves
4. Grip adding lines, callouts
5. Grip turning shelves

Leader of multilayer structures

1. Knob-type selector arrow

2. Grip switch text alignment
3. Grip selection row position

683
nanoCAD Mechanica

Marking of linear structures

1. Grip perevstavit
2. Grip align text
3. Grip linear movement provisions of the text

Welding

1. Grip the reflection side of the hatch

2. Flyout pen-type hatching*welding type
3. Hahdle � "Add Host� " in the middle of each section

Welded leg

1. Pen-sized leg

684
nanoCAD Mechanica

Tables

1. Triangular Grip linear dimensions of columns and rows

Formats

1. Flyout Grip type pattern stamp each stamp

2. Flyout pen-sized format
A4 … A0

Stamps

1. Grip type selection stamp

685
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fill holes

1. Grips changing the diameter of the hole

2. Grip change the thread pitch
3. Edit flyout pen display aperture (the state on or off)
Label
Hole
Axes
Threaded hole
Fill first quarter
Fill second quarter
Fill third quarter
Fill fourth quarter

Designation of roughness without leader

1. Turn the Grip

686
nanoCAD Mechanica

Designation of roughness with callouts

1. Grip add a line-Leader

2. Grip moving the position of a shelf signs of roughness
3. Grip reflection shelves
4. Grip type selection arrows

Marking and branding

1. Flyout Grip type designation

Marking
Branding
2. Grip position of text on a line callout
3. Grip type selection arrows(Arrow/ Bot)

Marking position

1. Grip moving arrows

2. Grip moving marker
3. Grip the creation of the position of the following designations
4. Select the type of Grip flyout arrow
None
Arrow
Dot
Oblique
Datum filled
Open arrow

687
nanoCAD Mechanica

Special characters and fonts

The dialogs remote printing and editing tables are buttons insert special characters by which a dialog
box in which you presented the symbols used in architectural design.

For remote printing button "Insert special character".

To the Editor button table "Insert Character".

Select the character you want by clicking on it with the left mouse button, after which it is
automatically inserted at the current cursor editing table.

Buttons opens a list of uppercase and lowercase letters of the Greek alphabet.

Special characters are correctly displayed only text based on the fonts nanoCAD Mechanics (.shx).
Displaying characters when pasting in text based on TrueType-font, the screen looks incorrect
(replaced by question marks, boxes, etc., depending on the settings of TrueType-font).

688
nanoCAD Mechanica

Compatibility
nanoCAD Mechanics6 platform support nanoCAD, as well as vertical solutions nanoCAD versions 2,
3, 4, 5, 6.

If the drawing is created nanoCAD Mechanics6, it opens on a computer that does not have any
one of the modules of the complex, the special objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 converted into so-
called proxy-objects. To preserve the ability to edit them using "handles", as well as view and
change the objects in the dialog box "Properties" on a computer, you must install a freeware
distribution nanoCAD Mechanics6 Enabler, located on the CD with a licensed copy nanoCAD
Mechanics6.

When transferring files to a user or customer drawings that do not have nanoCAD Mechanics6and
not having the ability or desire to use nanoCAD Mechanics6 Enabler, you need to convert all the
objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 in the standard system primitives nanoCAD.

To do this, use a special command "Break all objects" (the toolbar "Edit"). This command will
automatically select all of the objects in the drawing, and divides them into primitives nanoCAD. For
individual subdivision nanoCAD Mechanics6 - objects can use the standard command nanoCAD
"EXPLODE".

In the dialog box nanoCAD Mechanics6 - Setting possible as a random location nanoCAD
Mechanics6 - objects on any current layer and automatic fixing nanoCAD Mechanics6 - objects on
said layer. In the second case, creating nanoCAD Mechanics6 - subject to pre-select the desired
layer in the list and make it current is not required: the program will automatically execute it,
regardless of the current layer.

Selecting the direction of drawing

When drawing some graphics nanoCAD Mechanics6 may require special functions choice of direction
of drawing. For example, when you insert an object from the Object Manager "Library/Architectural
material/Fasteners/Bolts".

Auxiliary toolbar "Destination" is automatically activated when a call instruction nanoCAD

Mechanics6, which is available for control of the direction of drawing.

Automatic activation of the toolbar "Destination" in the settings adjusted

Note: clearance (see. Settings /Main options/Edit/To show the toolbar "Direction"
automatically).

Perpendicular. Construction perpendicular to the selected segment.

Free. The choice is arbitrary direction.

Along. Construction along the selected segment. The direction of the object is aligned to the
segment, and will not indicate the direction of the opposite side.

Parallel. Parallel to the selected segment.

When constructing select the desired command and specify the length of the drawing, to be followed
by leveling (except commands available).

689
nanoCAD Mechanica

Special keys

Key SHIFT
Key Shift used:

When placing the dimension number. To accommodate the size of close to any external
dimension line, move the mouse pointer, hold down the SHIFT key. To complete the team,
click on the left mouse button.

Key Alt
To override entities included in the standard components a combination of Alt + right-
click, which brings up a dialog:

Allowed to override the following properties: color, line thickness, slope and pitch hatch
of hidden objects.

Key Ctrl
Used to set the angle of the extension lines when placing dimensions.

Used in the form editor to select the type of control when you drag a variable in a custom
form.
Editing a table at the place called the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + left click.

Geometric constructions
Tools nanoCAD Mechanics6 for the geometric constructions are specific for mechanical design. All
objects created with their help, made up of primitives nanoCAD, and does not require special tools
for editing.

Editing inserted objects in a drawing can be performed using a universal object editor nanoCAD
Mechanics6, called button Editing. After selecting the object being edited is automatically
recognized by the type and loads the appropriate dialog box.

690
nanoCAD Mechanica

Furthermore, editing objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 it can be made by other means:

clicking the right mouse button and then selecting the command "Edit in the context menu";
double-clicking the left mouse button on the object nanoCAD Mechanics6. Adjust settings
registration (Customizing the appearance / General settings / edit / double click);
through �"pens�";
in window"Properties";
standard command prompt ERASE, MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, STRETCH.

Object-dependent parts
Object-specific details - the details of this database nanoCAD Mechanics6 with the described
properties of behavior when they are placed in the context of the assembly. With the change in the
parameters of one such detail all the related object-specific details are automatically changed in
accordance with their values in the database. Using this technology works, it is important to take
into account the order of application of object-dependent items.

When applying standardized object-dependent parts of the image cursor-pointer signals the
automatic recognition of the insertion point and the direction of the applied rendering details.

Context menu entry fields

In the context menu the following entry is available.

History - recall last entry.

Recent - recall the most frequently used values.

Superscript - insert superscript (a combination of Ctrl+Up).

Subscript - insert a subscript (a combination of Ctrl+ Down ).

Insert division - insert shot.

Pick from drawing - the command allows you to take data from the drawing and the properties of a
standard part. When you select this command, the panel Select the value apperas :

Measure distance (Z) - to take drawing diamensionally linear or geometric size. Command can be
selected by pressing Z.

Measure angle (X) - take the angular size of the drawing. Command can be selected by pressing
X.
691
nanoCAD Mechanica

Measure Perimeter (C) - to take drawing the perimeter of a closed polygonal line or length.
Command can be selected by pressing C.

Measure area (V) - take the value of the drawing area of the closed loop. Command can be called
by pressing V.

Complex area(Shift+V) - take a few drawing value areas closed loop.

Calculator (M) - Calculate the number with built-in calculator in nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Take from notes (,) - insert text information from the notebook.

Take from property (B) - allows you to take command of the sub-parameters database in
Construction Site 6. Parameter is inserted preserving the dynamic link with the object. When you
change a parameter line items are changed in the input field.

Note: To insert static text, hold the Ctrl key while selecting parameter.

Mark text object (N) - to take the text from the drawing.

Cancel - stop the command and return to the Previous menu.

Symbols - inserting special characters

692
nanoCAD Mechanica

Undo - Undo the last command (the combination of Ctrl+Z).

Clipboard operations

Cut (a combination of Ctrl+X).

Copy (combination Ctrl+C).

Paste (a combination of Ctrl+V).

Delete - Delete the entry field.

Select all - highlight the input field.

Settings

Main menu: Tools - Advansed Settings...

Main menu: Mechanica - Settings....

Toolbar: Settings... ( "Mechanica Main").

Command line: MCPARAMS.

Setting the interface parameters and design elements nanoCAD performed in the dialog box
nanoCAD Mechanics:

The title of the dialog displays the path to the configuration file.

693
nanoCAD Mechanica

Main menu
Menu "File"
Munu "File" contains controls:

Save settings - protects changes to the current configuration file;

Save settings as... - saves changes to the settings in the new configuration file;
Load settings - oads the settings from the specified file;
Restore start settings - loads the settings in the nanoCAD Mechanics.

Menu "Organization"
Menu "Organization" controls the settings of the standard enterprise.

Standard enterprise - a single configuration file (parameters, layers, profiles) for the enterprise. All
settings are stored in a single file.

In the settings dialog, table sections and layers settings are highlighted with light gray.

Menu "Organization" contains controls:

Set settings file... - assigned to the configuration file overrides the Custom settings file
AppOptions.xml. New documents will be created in accordance with the values in the
configuration file of the organization;
Flush - team for refusing to use the settings of the organization. This control file becomes the
Custom settings file AppOptions.xml.

Users can not delete layers and profiles of the STP corresponding tables in the
settings dialog.

When you save the settings with the new values are saved only in the current
Important! document.

Configuring file STF and standards within the configuration must strictly comply
with the loaded settings in the application. At discrepancy override the settings
will not work!

Workspace
Contains:

1. The tabs with the settings:

Main options
Standard elements
Symbols
Forms
Special features

2. Graphic display window of adjustable parameters.

3. Container "Explanation" (not edited) with descriptions of the form settings.

4. The container is "Standard" (not editable) is designed to display the default development system
design documentation.

694
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. The container "Save default" - contains the setting items that indicate what will be saved by
default when you click "OK". It contains a selection box "Setting design elements."

Main options
The tab is used to configure the general parameters of the interface nanoCAD Mechanics.

It contains sections:

Общиенастройки
Line types
Edit
Design
Notifications
Hot keys
Database access

Common settings

Current profile
Profiles layers intended for the organization of the various business units on the same drawing file.
Each user then works with his group of layers, controlling their visibility means nanoCAD.

695
nanoCAD Mechanica

Suppose you want to configure nanoCAD so that annotation drawing designers and engineers using
callouts platform was divided. To do this in the settings tab "Symbols" in the "Leaders" - "Universal
Leader" must be selected for "layer" select the table layers.

Since the design of the drawing depends on the settings of the deployment of registration of the
layers and the current profile of the drawing, then for each object type you want to specify in the
settings option to be placed on the appropriate layer (for example, callouts given layer "Leaders")

Depending on the current profile to the layer name prefix will be added.

Thus, it is possible to group layers created by users with similar profiles (for example, the objects
created by the designer - prefix "D_", and technologists - prefix "T_").

Execute command "Regenerate" on opening document

The command "Regenerate" whenever you open a document

696
nanoCAD Mechanica

Line Types

Enable option "Use paper space units fo scaling" automatically

Automatically changes the setting nanoCAD Mechanics "Scale to paper space units" ("Use paper
space units for scaling") for the types of lines.

Change current linetype scale

It enables or disables the scaling of line types in the standard objects when you change their size.

Use table of colors and weights

It enables or disables the use of the table of colors and weights. If enabled, you can use the
standard colors from the table. "Compatibility Mode" - is used when working with documents created
in early versions ofnanoCAD Mechanics.

Standard text weight

It standardizes the value of the weight of the text for all text in the document.

Color and line width

Is to set the standard design elements.

697
nanoCAD Mechanica

Edit

Decimal delimeter correction

Do not correct decimal delimeter

Use "dot" asdecimal delimeter

Use system locale decimal delimeter

Do not correct decimal delimeter - it takes no action with the separator.

Use dot '.' as decimal delimeter - automatically replaces the separator to a point.

Use system locale decimal delimeter - in this case the point is replaced by a character set in the
system settings.

Create an activate standard text and deimension styles in new documents

Manage the creation of standard styles. The default setting of the parameter "Yes." Setting the
parameter to "No" you can create new documents without predefined standard styles.

Explode Block References under drawing design elements

Yes - at overlapping objects are broken blocks.

No - due to the overlapping blocks are masked objects using the wipeout.

Enable enchanced grips

When enabled, the objects are displayed on the additional grips nanoCAD Mechanics, for example:
"Flip", "Insert Line-Leader", etc.

Set associativity during insertion of object

Default is enabled. When you turn off the peg inserted objects to primitives inactive.

698
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use localized abbreviations of command keywords

Abbreviations keyword commands are described in the file with the extension .pgp and located at
the installation site nanoCAD Mechanics

Highlight color
Backlight color primitives that require them to specify. For example if you specify line lights for
dimensioning.

Automatically switch keyboard layout to local language

When you call a dialog with fields nanoCAD Mechanics automatically turns on the layout set in the
system settings.

Show rectangle around objects

The control display of the bounding box around objects nanoCAD Mechanics or blocks nanoCAD.

When this option is disabled scaling Shift + right mouse button.

Automatically turn of snaps: Nearest, Endpoint, Quadrant, Center

Temporarily involves binding when inserting objects nanoCAD Mechanics.

If the option may not work properly toolbar "Direction".

To show the toolbar "Direction" automatically

Control the display of the toolbar "Direction" that appears when you insert the database objects and
a number of other teams.

Scale dimensions
Scale controls sizes nanoCAD using the toolbar "Scale".

Scale texts
Scale controls textsnanoCAD using the toolbar "Scale".

Scale hatches
The control elements scale hatch nanoCAD using the toolbar "Scale".

Ignored layers
It indicates layers nanoCAD, being primitives which are not overlapping objects nanoCAD Mechanics.

Unplotted layer
It indicates on which layer will be placed nanoCAD Mechanics, objects that will not get printed.

Mini-toolbar for viewports

Control the display of the toolbar nanoCAD Mechanics, appears when you right-click inside the
viewport.

699
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the option is disabled, pressing the right mouse button inside the viewport nanoCAD will be called
the standard menu nanoCAD.

Tooltips
Show tooltips

Tool tips display control extended (hyperlinked "Edit") to objects nanoCAD Mechanics and blocks
nanoCAD.

Show delay, ms

Tool speed control the appearance of pop-up prompts.

Hide delay, ms

Management tool length display tooltips.

By double-click
Program objects

Set a rule under which double-clicking the left mouse button on the project, will be called the dialog
for editing the object.

If the option will be caused by the properties of the object.

Dimensions, Regular texts, Multi-texts

When this option is enabled, double-click the left mouse button on the amount of calls the dialog for
editing nanoCAD Mechanics.

When off - Object Properties or edit dialog nanoCAD.

Design

Use symbol scale

By default, this option is disabled .

Enabled. :

design elements are inserted in the scale ;

standard parts are inserted into the database with the current scale of the line types, equal
100;
geometry is inserted with the scale of line types, equal ;
the size of the displayed value is taken as is;

Disabled. :

design elements are inserted in the scale 1:1;

700
nanoCAD Mechanica

standard parts are inserted into the database with the current scale of the line types, equal 1;
geometry is inserted with the scale of line types, equal ;
the size of the displayed value (if they are not in formats not linked associatively with the
application objects) takes the scale factor, the scale of the reverse current (ie, the value of the
scale M2:1 size of the displayed value will be 2 times less than the measured);

Text wipeout offset

Sets the standard indentation marking geometry from the text.

Cut CAD-platform elements

"Wipeout" - closes the primitive.

"Cut" - cut the portion of the primitive. If you delete or move carved primitive returns its status.

"No" - It does not cover the primitive.

Notifications

Enable hints
Tool tips display control.

This option does not apply to messages with the status "Error".

Avoid mouse pointer

When this option is enabled the message will be moved around the screen so as not to obstruct the
selection.

Hot keys
Tool-purpose keyboard shortcuts for fast call setup and dialog window for notification messages.

Databases access
The database includes, in addition to standard elements, patterns and sizes of tables, templates bolt
assemblies, groups and markers as well as examples and other user elements. The particular
database is determined by the path to the data source.

Data Source
nanoCAD provides job as a database of standard products MS Access, and MS SQL. By clicking on

the button in the "Data Source" dialog box appears indicating the source data

701
nanoCAD Mechanica

When using MS SQL database, you must specify in the "server" server name (along with the name
of the database server instance SQL). For example: SERVER, or SERVER\SQLEXPRESS.

In the "base" you must specify the name of the database to which you are connecting.

If you are using the database MS Access, you must select the radio button "data source - local
database", then enter the path to the * .mdf, * .mcs database files. (The path may be a network).

Settings to access the database interface settings are.

Note:
When you use data compression on the disc may have problems connecting to
the local database (for x64 versions).

Standard elements
The tab is used to configure standard elementsnanoCAD Mechanics.

702
nanoCAD Mechanica

Standard
Edit shaft
Beam calculations
Pipes

Standard

Color of cursor, plane...

The control display color selection standard elements when they are selected, the automatic
installation of dependencies.

The color display can be selected from a set and the built-in color picker.

Show invisible lines

Control the display of invisible (hidden) lines of standard graphic elements.

703
nanoCAD Mechanica

Color of invisible lines

The control display color selection invisible (hidden) lines of standard graphic elements.

The color display can be selected from a set and the built-in color picker.

Default layer for parametric objects

The control layer selection, which by default will be placed standard parts database.

A layer can be selected from the existing (previously created) or create a new layer in the same
window.

Default layer for holes

The control layer selection, which by default will be placed holes created by the operation "Bolting".

A layer can be selected from the existing (previously created) or create a new layer in the same
window.

Hatch step
How to set the hatching step, is used by default.

Grid step
The control is used for the step of asking the values of the diameter and length of the shaft sections
created using the "Spindles".

When you insert a section of the shaft the value of its length and diameter will be rounded up to a
multiple grid spacing.

Use grid
Control Using the "spacing".

If the grid is not used, the values of the diameter and length of the shaft portions are not rounded.

Highlight color for working planes

Highlight color for working planes

Beam calculations

704
nanoCAD Mechanica

Curve colors travel, bend, torque, force, tension

Color control diagrams displayed in the calculation of gross.

The selected color is preserved when exporting diagrams in the drawing.

The color display can be selected from a standard set and set of built-in your palette.

Acceleration of gravity OX, OY, OZ

Set design parameters for the respective axes of acceleration of the shaft.

Points number on diagram

Control increments partition diagram plotted in the entire length.

Calculate bearings as a pair

Complementing the strength calculation of shaft reactions bearings.

Show values on plot

Control the display of numerical values on the diagram exported to the drawing.

The values are displayed at the critical points of the shaft.

Equivalient stress theory

Sets the strength of the theory to calculate the equivalent stresses shafts.

Edit shaft

Path to TOOTH-WHEELS group

It specifies the path to the database that contains the elements of the bookmark "Gears" dialogue
"Editing shafts".

Path to USER OBJECTS ...

It specifies the path to the folder Users. After you specify the folder elements of it will be displayed
in the dialog "Edit shafts".

Pipes

Relation of minimum bend radius to diameter of pipe (Rmin/Dn)

705
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set the default value of the bending radius of the pipe.

Relation of length of minimum linear segment to diameter of pipe (Lmin/Dn)

Set the default value of the minimum length of straight pipe.

Highlight color of edited segments

Set the backlight color workplanes valves when connecting the pipe to them.

Symbols
Tab "Symbols". Designed to customize the display of drawing symbols of nanoCAD Mechanics.

Dimensions
Notes
Views, sections, cuts etc
Area
Square
Quarters
Symbols
Welds seams
Bound forms
Distribution range
End marks
Plane elevation marks
Level mark
Stationing
Construction lines
Axes array
Similar, object
Holes
Lines of break

706
nanoCAD Mechanica

Joints

Dimensions
Setting allows you to change the size of the layer, which is automatically updated with new
dimensions and copied settings dialogs, etc.

Layer
Allows you to choose the layer,which by default will include new dimensions and copied.

Apply layer when copying

When this option is copied dimensions will be placed on the drawing layer selected for size. When
off, dimensions placed on the active layer.

Show dialog for new dimension

Control built ordinate dimensions. If the option is used ordinate dimensions standard ISO, built-in
platform nanoCAD. When this option is used ordinate dimensions nanoCAD Mechanics.

707
nanoCAD Mechanica

Open a dialog to automatically

Control automatic opening dialogue sizes.

Arrows in chains
Replaces used in nanoCAD arrows in dimensional chains. There is a possibility to replace the serifs,
or replace point at all.

Spreadsheet template tolerances

Allows you to select a table template tolerances available in the database.

708
nanoCAD Mechanica

Notes
Settings of notes, such as text, arrows, pointers.

Invert oblique arrow

709
nanoCAD Mechanica

Allows you to choose the direction of oblique arrow in leader.

Show dialog before inserting the object

When this option is enabled, the dialogue is displayed before inserting note.

Align text line by current UCS

When this option is on, shelves of leaders are rotated by the User coordinate system.

Save text in dialogs

When this option is enabled on inserting the following notes previously entered text remains in the
input field.

The remaining options allow you to change the size of text, indexes, thickness, layer placement,
color, etc.

710
nanoCAD Mechanica

Views, sections
Settings of views, sections, detail views. It allow you to choose the layout for placing cuts and
sections, color of symbols, text, size of text, lines, arrows.

711
nanoCAD Mechanica

Sort kinds of cuts ...

Settings menu sorting species profiles, detail views, cross sections. It allows you to specify a set of
letters to designate and manage automatic sorting of species.

Hole tables
Settings menu to set the table all sorts of patterns, as well as a way to refer to sets of holes.

712
nanoCAD Mechanica

Holes
Settings of holes that allow you to change the layer for label placement, text style, size and color of
the text, etc.

Marking and branding

Settings menu markers and brands.

Surface texture
Setup menu icon, surface roughness, and allows you to specify the path to the directory roughness.

Tolerances
Settings menu icons tolerances of form and mutual arrangement.

713
nanoCAD Mechanica

Construction lines
Setup Menu display of auxiliary lines.

Line of break
Settings of break lines,that allow you to change the layer for label placement, color, and line sizes,
type of fracture lines, etc.

Fixed Joints
Settings of symbols of permanent connections, that allow you to change the layer, label placement,
color, size, style, text and lines.

714
nanoCAD Mechanica

Gradient
Setup menu icon gradient.

Dimension marker
The setup menu displaying the marker size.

Specification leader
Setup Menu display leader specification (position).

715
nanoCAD Mechanica

Welds
Settings of weld symbols allow you to change the layer for label placement, color, style and size of
lines and text.

Position
Setup Menu icon designation position.

716
nanoCAD Mechanica

Forms
Menu tab "Forms". Designed for setting up the parameters of parts of the text tools to create a
standard layout elements.

It contains the following sections:

Table
Drawing borders
Specification
Technical condition
Notebook

Table
Settings of the tables in nanoCAD Mechanics .

717
nanoCAD Mechanica

Layer
Specifies layer for placing tables.

Color
Sets color of table elements.

Line thickness
Allows you to choose the thickness of the lines of text in the table.

Option "by layer" sets the line width from the layer it is placed (default value).

Option "By block" sets the line width for by the block in which it is included.

Option "By object" sets the line width individually using properties palette.

Selecting "Default" sets the default line thickness for the table.

You can also set the line width of a standard set of values.

Text style
Sets the default text style in the table

Text Height
Allows you to choose the standard text height.

Text Color
Control choice of color of text in tables.

Text weight
Allows you to choose the thickness of the lines of text in the table.

Option "by layer" sets the line width from the layer it is placed (default value).

Option "By block" sets the line width for by the block in which it is included.

Option "By object" sets the line width individually using properties palette.

Selecting "Default" sets the default line thickness for the table.

You can also set the line width of a standard set of values.

Width factor
Sets width factor for text in table cells.

Text Indent
Sets text indent in table cells.

718
nanoCAD Mechanica

Drawing borders
Settings for drawing borders in nanoCAD Mechanics

Layer
Allows you to select the layer for the drawing border.

Text style
Sets the default text style within the drawing border.

Inventory fields of the next sheets

Enables placing of inventory title blocks on drawing border.

Create viewport in paper space

Creates a viewport when drawing border is inserted on the sheet.

Specification
Set of tools for configuring the module specifications nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Default style
Allows you to choose the format specification: a simple, group type A (after the constant data placed
separate sections for each performance), group type B (for each AC-used "tion use a separate column
of the specification).

For more information on setting specifications here.

Technical conditions
It specifies settings of text of the technical requirements of nanoCAD Mechanics.

719
nanoCAD Mechanica

Line spacing default

Sets the default line spacing in the text of the technical requirements.

Font Height
Sets a default text height.

Text oblique
Sets a default value of the slope of the text in degrees.

Text Color
Sets color of text in technical requirements

Text style
Sets the default text style specifications.

Header height
Sets a default value of header height in technical requirements.

Header oblique
Sets a default value of the header oblique angle in degrees.

Header Color
Sets color of header

Header Style
Sets the default header style.

Header align
Aligns the heading of technical requirements for the title block.

720
nanoCAD Mechanica

Default Layer
Sets the standard layer to accommodate the technical requirements.

Designations indicate areas near to the position

Automatically inserts lettering area next to the item number.

Offset from title block(x)

Sets the value of the indentation from the left edge of the title block horizontally.

Offset from title block(y)

Sets the offset value from the main vertical lettering.

Notepad
Settings for notebook in nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Path to the notebook

Specifies the path to the notebook.

Additional information on configuring the notebook here.

Special settings
The tab "Settings" menu. Designed for setting up the parameters of the auxiliary functions
nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

721
nanoCAD Mechanica

It contains the following sections:

Cutting surface
IDF Convert

Cutting surface
Complex tools to customize the display surface to be treated in the drawings nanoCAD Mechanics
6.

Color
Tool selection control line color, indicating the surface.

The color display can be selected from a standard set and set of built-in your palette.

Line thickness
Sets the standard thickness of the line marking the surface. Typically, twice the thickness of the
base line.

Layer
Set the layer to accommodate the line marking the surface.

722
nanoCAD Mechanica

IDF Convert
Set of tools for setting the inserted printed circuit boards in the IDF format nanoCAD Mechanics
6.

Capacitor, Default, Resistor colors

Tool selection control color of individual elements of printed circuit boards.

The color display can be selected from a standard set and set of built-in your palette.

Draw drilled holes

Shows or suppresses the holes in the printed circuit boards.

Convert type
It allows you to choose the type of the inserted printed circuit board that is displayed in the tree
object manager (part, subassembly, assembly).

Database connection
Database of nanoCAD Mechanics 6 includes, in addition to the standard elements, templates, tables
and formats, templates bolted assemblies, groups and markers, as well as examples and other
custom items. Choosing a particular database is determined by the path to the data source.

nanoCAD Mechanics 6 can work with a database of standard products based on MS Access, and MS
SQL. When you click on ... in the "Data Source" dialog appears specify the data source

If you are using MS SQL database must be specified in the "Server" server name (along with the
instance name of the database server SQL). For example: SERVER, or SERVER \ SQLEXPRESS.
723
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the "Base" must specify the name of the database to connect to.

If the MS Access database is used , you must select switch "Data Source - local database", then
enter the path to the *. Mcs database file. (The path can be a network).

By default, when you install a local database is located in the folder

%Programdata%\Nanosoft\nanoCAD Mechanics6\DataRW\std.mcs

Teamwork with a single database must ensure that all users can write to the
Note:
folder where the database resides.

In the same section, we define a data base:

Preview for the picture size of database elements in pixels

Setting up a single object selection or double-click
Filter standards enables or disables the display of database manager objects belonging to
different standards

Filter nomenclature - specify the path to the file filter nomenclature used standard parts and
their sizes.

Note: Your database access is an interface setting.

Setting lists
To limit the selection from the catalog of standard parts and standardized products nanoCAD
Mechanics6 provides the option to automatically filter the database using the nomenclature of filters.

To enable and configure the filter nomenclature you must enable this feature in the settings
nanoCAD Mechanics6.

724
nanoCAD Mechanica

To do this, open the settings nanoCAD Mechanics6 section Database Access tab Main options and
select Nmk Filter . Editor filter is invoked by clicking the ellipsis. The result is a filter setting window
nomenclature:

At the top of the window are buttons to create, load and save files nomenclature filters and switch to
enable / disable filtering database according to the chosen filter. construction site 6 allows you to
switch between different filters and temporarily disable them.

In the left pane displays the structure of the database nanoCAD Mechanics6, the icon that shows the
current status of each item in the database:

- A standard item in the database icon. Shows that all sizes and the element are allowed to use.

- Pictogram prohibition to use. Shows that this element is not allowed to use.

- Pictogram partial use. Indicates that the element is allowed to use a limited set of standard
sizes.

To enable / disable the use of the entire element is used entirely switch Allow details. To disable a
particular size items must uncheck the column row ID of this size in the parameter table details.

Configuration Utility

Call the command

From the Windows Start menu

Start => Programs => Nanosoft=> nanoCAD Mechanics6 => Configuration Utility

Fundamentals

725
nanoCAD Mechanica

The utility is designed to manage a database of parametric objects of nanoCAD Mechanics

Creating and restoring the database.

Restore (Restore) - Creates the database MS SQL Server from a backup created earlier. When you
click Restore a dialog appears "Select Data Source"

In this dialog, specify the machine name and the name of the Instance of SQL Server on this
machine,which is supposed to restore the database. The desired values can be entered manually, or
choose from a list of SQL Server present on the local subnet.

To restore a database, you have access to it and have sufficient rights

Important!
established by the administration of SQL Server

In the "Database" must specify a new database name standard Construction Site 6, and then click
OK. A dialog appears enter the relative path to the database. It must be a local path (UNC is not
supported).
726
nanoCAD Mechanica

Note that when restoring a database on the server (different machine from the one that runs the
configuration utility), database backup file must also reside on the server. This is necessary to
ensure that SQL Server account have the right to recover the database from the specified file.

When you click on OK to start the recovery process (restore) the database.

In the menu of the current database, use the following commands:

You should not use administrative tools SQL Server (Enterprise Management or
Important! SQL Management Studio) to restore the database from a file archive created by
archiving of the configuration utility

The path to the current database.

This field contains the path to the current database in the form of:

SQL:<Server Name \ Name Instance>:<database name>

By clicking on the button "..." opens a dialog "Select Data Source" to specify the server and
database.

Backup - creates a file - a copy of the current SQL Server database for subsequent recovery. By
pressing the button, a dialog appears to specify a relative path to the file archive database.

Clicking on OK will create an archive file.

Repair - Fixes corrupted database;

Users - Allows you to edit user rights, to run, you need to have the appropriate rights;

The following templates are right:

User - sees only system objects and his own. Can edit only their own objects.

Editor - sees all objects. Can edit only his own objects. Has the right to publish (make system) his
objects and take on the editing system objects.

Administrator - see all the objects in the database. Has the right to edit all objects and their
publication.

Filter selects from the list of users on the typed letters contained in the user name. The list can be
sorted by attributes, for this click on the column headings.

View
View - starts window browser base , where you can modify the database structure:

Delete and move folders and objects;

Import and export objects (it is possible to import multiple files at once);
Publication and editing objects;
Create shortcuts;
Renaming, editing notes, setting the preview pictures.

- Pop up a dialog "Database Management".

Synchronize

727
nanoCAD Mechanica

This utility is designed to provide an update target databases from the source. Through it may be,
for example, to update the local database sections or individual users with respect to a single central
database Company (located, for example, on a server).

To synchronize the database to choose:

Target database - this database to be updated;

Source database - this update source.

Synchronization settings

Sync only existing objects - in the target database will be updated only those objects that are
present in the target database.

Sync all - in the target database will be updated all the objects present in the original database (if
the target object does not present, it will be created), object paths are set as in the original
database.

Synchronize preserving ways - in the target database will be updated all the objects present in the
original database (if the target object does not present, it will be created), the path to the objects
that exist in the target database will be stored for no longer exist - will be created.

Then press sync.

When you sync to import the database from the target to the source based on the specified timings.
When you import will be updated only those objects whose modification date later than the date of
the original base modification in the target database.

Configuration Utility (system data)

Tab "Computer" is designed to collect data about the hardware of the computer running the utility.

728
nanoCAD Mechanica

To display information simply click Read configuration.

Layers and profiles

Objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 when you insert can be placed on a special layer. It does not require
pre-create the desired layer or make it current: this program will automatically regardless of the
current layer.

In the setting of design elements has an option layer, and by default it is set to "Current". Each
object when you insert is placed on the current layer nanoCAD.

To change the layer insert an object should select the desired layer in the list or write his name in
the input field drop-down list:

Detail of windows Settings tab Symbols

You can also use the Table of layers, by clicking the drop-down list, select a layer.

Table dialog box lists the layers of layers available for use.

symbol in the column "On the drawing" marked layers that exist in the current drawing.

Button New Layer . Adds a new layer to the table.

729
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button Delete Layer . Removes the selected layer from the table.

Profiles layers are used when sharing drawings. Profiles allow you to automatically add a prefix to
the names of layers that are used to insert objects nanoCAD Mechanics6.

To add or edit profiles use the button in the row parameter current profile dialog box Settings,
tab General settings.

In the dialog table profiles lists the available profiles.

Button to add a profile. Adds a new profile in the table.

Button Delete profile. Removes a selected profile from the table.

Add a profile, select it in the table and close the dialog with OK. Close the dialog box settings.

When inserting objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 on a special layer to the layer name, prefix
corresponding to the current profile:

All changes in the profile table must be saved in the configuration file, otherwise
Important!
the changes will only be displayed in the current work session.

Overriding styles

Command line: MCSETGOST.

This command is required to create (override) dimension style, text style and line types in
accordance with the standards of environmentnanoCAD Mechanics for further work correctly.

Using this command can take in two cases:

1. If the file was not created in the environment nanoCAD Mechanics

2. Dimension styles, text styles, or types of lines have been changed by hand and requires their
recovery.

Parameters Redefinitions

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Parameters Redefinitions

From the command line (Command: spPr ).

730
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the context menu - Select the design element and use the shortcut menu Parameters
Redefinitions

The basic rules

This command is used to define the variations of the wiseMechanical design objects settings in the
current drawing.nanoCAD Mechanics6 The redefinition is controlled by the parameters set in the
setting of design elements.

The objects are grouped by types in the dialog. The objects parameters are grouped by name.

To set the parameters or Redefinition removal filter lists are:

If any type is selected in the parameters table , the parameters list concerning the given type is
displayed.

The standard filter list allows specifying different settings for single objects created by a different
design standard.

731
nanoCAD Mechanica

If you select "All" standards - the changes will be applied to all objects if you select only one of the
standards (eg GOST), the changes will only be used for objects belonging to the chosen standard.

Command Options
If an object type is selected, its properties will be displayed in the parameters table.

Redefined parameters are shown in blue. To remove the overriding need to press the opposite
setting.

In addition, you can manually specify a new value for the selected parameter. If the new value is
the same default, the blue light will not be displayed. If the selected object group only some entries
have the override, the backlight will override the diagonal.

To remove the override all objects need to click on the bottom left of the dialog.

Action sequence
To change the settings of one or more design elements, you must:

Select objects
Choose the parameters redefinition command from the content menu.

Next, in the dialog box to specify the new settings data display objects. Changes apply only to the
selected objects.

Change the parameters of objects can also be by a separate command Parameters

redefinitions.

Checking the settings of design elements

To verify the design elements specify the settings, you must run the Parameters redefinition.
It is proposed to select the objects that will be exposed to the command.

732
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you press the Enter will select all elements of design Construction Site 4. When you press the
Enter will select all elements of design Construction Site 4 . Next, press the button Clear
redefinition from all parameters

The result is a document issued in accordance with the settings specified in the enterprise (in terms
of elements nanoCAD Mechanics6).

Quick options
Keyboard shortcuts fast call setup is defined interface configuration:

Quick Settings dialog contains the following items:

733
nanoCAD Mechanica

Show invisible lines - shows and hides the invisible line of standard parts, hidden using
Alt+right-click
Grid pitch - a pitch change in the diameter and length of the portion of the shaft at its
dynamic rendering
Use grid - or not to use the Snap to Grid in the dynamic rendering section of the shaft
Current profile - allows to select the profile settings
Enable "Nearest" object snap automatically when necessery - when inserting objects
from the database binding "nearest" is triggered automatically.

Working with Database Objects

Parts Library nanoCAD Mechanics6 is a database and stored in a file with the extension * .mcs. By
default, after installing nanoCAD Mechanics6 used base recorded in a file in the folder std.mcs data,
housed in the installation directory of the program nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Select another database possible, specifying the desired file in the "Database access"option in the
settingsnanoCAD Mechanics6 "The path to the local database".

Parts of the database can be exported as individual files, or import from external files into the
current database of standard elements.

The basic tools for working with database objects

The basic tools for working with database objects are:

"Main menu - Mechanica - Standard parts"

or on the toolbar "Standard parts"

Tab manager
Standard parts library
Reinsert object
Markers, Groups
Insert group
Group objects
Add marker
Template wizard
Cover
Move up
Move down
Change hiden mode
Regenerate supression contours
Part trim
2 Point part trim
Add part trim
Remove part trim
Add view
Change representation
Mirrow part
Regenerate Std Parts
User defined object

734
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add constraint
Connect objects

Object Manager
Object Manager nanoCAD Mechanics 6 includes the following tools:

Manager database of standard objects

Objects
Pruning of standard parts
Finding and replacing text
Copying properties

Tab "Library"
Tab "Library" object manager is a universal means of access to the standard database
objectsnanoCAD Mechanics6.

Details in the database are classified according to their design purpose.

Management and structure the database by using the toolbar and the context menu that includes
the ability to add, delete, or rename folders.

Toolbar

Del object. Removes the selected item or folder from the database
Add folder. Adds a folder to the database
Insert object. Performs insert the selected database object in the drawing
View. Includes preview of database objects
Search panel. It includes search bar facilities on base
Refresh. Updates the tree base in the object manager. Press this button after making
changes to the database

Context menu
The context menu has a different structure depending on call.

735
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the palette - the object context menu:

In the palette - the context menu of a folder:

"Add Folder" - adds the folder to a dedicated subsidiary. If the command was run on the
selected object, the folder will be added to the parent folder object.

"Save object in database as dwf block" - This utility allows you to save a single database
of the drawings in format dwg, including standard items nanoCAD Mechanics6, design
elements and primitives nanoCAD.

"Delete object" - This command deletes the selected object.

"Delete folder" - This command deletes the selected folder with all its contents.

"Rename" - The command allows you to rename an object (folder).

"Import object" - Adding to our previously exported file or folder object database DB.

736
nanoCAD Mechanica

To import a database from an external file, use the command "Import object" in the context menu
invoked by a right-click on any folder or object in the section "Library" object manager. This will
bring up a dialog box in which you specify the path to the file.

When importing compares the last modification date of the original (stored in the database) and the
imported object. At concurrence of the imported content from content database objects will be
updated only if they have more recent modification date.

If the command "Import object" was called for a standard lens, the outer fragment is imported to
the folder containing the object.

"Export object" - Save the file to disk or folder object database DB.

To export any portion of the database you should use the command "Export object". In the resulting
dialog box, then you need to specify the path and file name for saving the captured designated
section base.

Import operation into the database or export from the database can be made as
Note:
separate objects, and entire folders with libraries of parts.

"Send by email" - It creates an e-mail with an attachment - Export objects.

737
nanoCAD Mechanica

"Copy" - Stored in a buffer object reference to paste a label on it.

"Paste shortcut" - Inserts a shortcut to a previously copied object

"Open with ScriptMaster" - Opens the object in the Object Wizard to edit.

"Add this folder palette" create a bookmark in the palette manager of the objects of the selected
folder.

"Refresh" - Updating of the database (for example, after editing).

Tab "Objects"
Tab "Objects" object manager is a universal means of reviewing, monitoring, editing facilities
nanoCAD Mechanics6, are on the drawing.

Places on this tab are grouped into sections - for example, standard parts, callout, bolted
connections, etc. In order to navigate in the drawing the selected object is highlighted.

Toolbar

Edit object.It calls the dialog for editing the selected object
Del object. Deletes the selected object

738
nanoCAD Mechanica

Refresh. Updates the list of objects. The button is used when adding or removing objects
from the drawing
sQuick select. Search Tool nanoCAD Mechanics6 objects in the drawing on the set
parameters, run the command "Quick Pick"
Find and Replace. Open dialog boxFind and Replace.

Context menu
In addition to the teams that are in the toolbar, the context menu of a selected object contains the
following items depending on the selected object, and includes a team of repeating the context
menu of the object on the drawing. Thus the tab "Objects" allows you to edit objects without having
to search for them saturated drawing regardless of layer.

For example, for sub-database nanoCAD Mechanics6, further include items "Change representation",
"Bring to Front", "Send to Back", and "Change cover mode".

Option "Hide" makes the selected object invisible in the drawing.

Standard
To insert an object from the database standard elements in Construction Site 6 in the drawing, you
can use the following means:

Single or double-click the left mouse button to select the object you want to insert into the
drawing. Selection method can be specified in the Preferences nanoCAD Mechanics 6 - section
Access Library to databases, parameter -standard objects.
Click Insert object at the top of the object manager.The button becomes active if the list
is selected one of the standard objects.
Click Standard Standard parts library Objects from the database. When selected, a
dialog box Select the details,appears which should specify the object you want to insert in
the database.

739
nanoCAD Mechanica

After selecting an object Select insertion point .

Select direction. The direction vector is not required to specify all the details. A dialog box appears
to select the object parameters:

740
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button Dynamic selection. Enables visual determination of the parameters to be pasted.

Button allows you to choose the scale of the object. When selected, a list of standard
values scale appears.

The description herein refers to the standard dialog options. Some database
Important! objects in nanoCAD Mechanics 6 using a special dialog box. In special dialogs
layout of controls may vary.

On the Properties are located:

Table of values of non-tabular object parameters

Switches associated with the parameters of the object
Image preview
Buttons standard projection display

Button Apply allows you to apply the selected values for the object without closing the dialog box.
This disables the mode Selecting parameters dynamically.

Click OK to exit the dialog box.

If the mode is set to Dynamic selection, then make a visual selection of values.

741
nanoCAD Mechanica

Moving your mouse, watch the changing size of the object. Click the left mouse button to confirm
the choice of the parameter values.

If the object inserted in a drawing, imposed dependence, while editing its parameters in a dialog box
will be available tab in tab Constraints.

In this window,are the available tools to view and edit dependencies.For binding objects constraints,
see. Constraints wizard.

The table settings

On the "table settings" dialog insert standard parts displayed parameters responsible for the
geometry of the object. These parameters correspond GOST'u (OST'u).

742
nanoCAD Mechanica

Properties
Properties of the parts that can be changed and described in the script are displayed on the
"Properties". On this tab located custom and reference parameters, switches species details and
details of performances.

In the process of inserting parts "Glass" automatically set the relationship between the items
"Bearing", "End caps" and "Glass" (with parts falling into the aperture).

For items that have parameters available for manual entry or dynamically change tab "Properties"
presents additional opportunities.

Consider the example of the detail "Glass" features interaction details.

743
nanoCAD Mechanica

The "Bearing diameter" - gray. This says that this option is not available for editing and dependence
associated with the diameter of the bearing.

To enable editing of this option, you must go to the tab "Dependencies" and remove the dependency
between the diameter of the items "Bearing" and an inner diameter of workpiece "glass.".

Remove Dependency pressing the "Delete"

After this option is available for editing.

744
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dependences
The "Dependences" tab allows editing of dependences set automatically during the details allocation
on the drawing, and dependences set with the "Dependences control dialog" .

Types of dependencies:

Parametric - settable parameter object equality arithmetic expression object parameters, which
occurs accession.

Calculations
For rod attachment parts provided estimation during insertion. The result of the calculation is the
recommended thread diameter for given loading conditions and strength class details.

For some types of rolling bearings estimation is also provided. The result of the calculation is the life
of the bearing for the given loading conditions.

Reinsert object

Toolbar: Click the button reinsert the object toolbar Library object .

From the command line command: sppickpoint .

Menu: MechaniCS > Library>> reinsert object

Serves to re-insert the object in the drawing, combines editing commands properties and movement
of item.

1. Click reinsert object .

2. Select the drawing or pasted object from the database.
3. Specify the new position of the object and insertion point.
4. Click OK.

Threaded Fastening

Toolbar: Click the button Threaded Fastening toolbar construction Objects Library object.

From the command line command: spjoint.

Menu: MechaniCS > Objects from the Library object>> Threaded Fastening

Insertion tool bolting parts of the base standard elements nanoCAD Mechanics6.

745
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Specify the start point of the drawing bolt assembly.

2. Specify the endpoint of the bolt assembly. When you insert the available tools of choice
destinations rendering .
3. In the dialog box mounting parts adjust the view of the bolted connection.

On the template in the central part of the dialog box, use the following settings:

Fixing properties.
Package thickness - a package thickness of the parts in mm.
View - Select the default image projection
Small thread pitch - small switch pitch
Simplified view - simplified switch / full image
Details bolt assembly. Here are the order of the components included in the assembly.
Connector
Hole
Counterbore
Washer
Nut

To select an object from the database Construction Site 6 click in the corresponding element of
GOST.

In the dialog box Select the details open the folder with fasteners.

Additional settings assembly components are available when deploying the list:

746
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button in the right column of the table-list clears the selected position.

Button Add part to template adds the item to the assembly after the selected list. The list of
available items to add depends on the currently selected object:

Click an empty field in front of the added object to select the base of GOST.

Button Remove parts from the template removes the selected item from the list of items.

It is possible to save the template bolt assembly to later reuse assemblies with the same set of
items. To work with templates use the buttons at the top of the dialog box, and below is a list of
available templates:

"Editable Template" stores the current bolting . It can not be deleted.

Button Create a new template. Adds a new blank template.

Button Delete template. Deletes the selected template from the list.
In the context menu templates available commands are:

Add Folder
Delete object
Rename
Import from file
Export to file

747
nanoCAD Mechanica

These commands are similar to those used in the Object Manager nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Button Select insertion point. Designed to re-select the insertion point and the length of the
bolt assembly drawing.

Button Manually select the holes lenght and placement. Opens setup package of the parts.

Left-click on one of the cells in the column "type items" to switch the item / gap:

The "Thickness" is set to the thickness of the relevant part (or gap) After configuring the package
connected, close the window by pressing OK.

The right side of the dialog box mounting parts is a list of values of the thread diameter of the bolt.

Icon "light" on the list indicates the ability to use the selected value for the diameter of all
the objects included in the assembly:

Diameter value does not fit into one or more detail. Assembling impossible.

Diameter value applies to all parts in the assembly. Assembling possible.

During template settings tab Preview of the bolt assembly.

748
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button in by Dynamic selection. Enables visual selection of the length of the bolt after closing
the dialog.

When you insert a screw connection there are four (4) methods of display available for the selection.
Choose button Select fastener insert on the bottom of the dialog box toolbar. Drawing on the button
displays the currently selected display method:

Insert Simplified fastener

With local cut Normal

insert type Insert

hidden fastener

Automatic detection of packet connection

When you insert a screw connection for automatically recognizing the boundaries of the parts. If the
line crosses the insertion direction perpendicular to a few segments in the drawing, they are
defined as the boundaries of parts and installs Connection:

749
nanoCAD Mechanica

In pattern bolt assembly three smooth hole are added automatically - the number of recognized
items:

Insertion point and the length of the bolt assembly are determined automatically based on the
thickness of the package details.

750
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing bolting

A dialog box settings bolting apply any of the standard editing tools to the centerline of the group
details.

If the settings nanoCAD Mechanics6 included tooltips, then when you move the cursor to the center
line will show "Bolting".

Rivet joint

Toolbar: Click the button Rivet joint toolbar construction Objects from the database.

From the command line command: sprivet.

Menu: MechaniCS > Objects from the database >> Rivet joint

Insertion tool riveted joint parts of the base standard elements nanoCAD Mechanics6.

1. Specify the starting point for drawing the rivet assembly.

2. Specify the endpoint of the rivet assembly. When you insert the available tools of choice
destinations rendering .
3. In the dialog box mounting parts adjust the view of the rivet connections.

751
nanoCAD Mechanica

To select the type of rivet base nanoCAD Mechanics6 click in the rivet.

To select the type of base openings nanoCAD Mechanics6 click in the hole for rivets.

It is possible to save the template riveted joint for later reuse assemblies with the same set of
items. To work with templates use the buttons at the top of the dialog box, and below is a list of
available templates:

"Editable Template" stores the current settings bolting. It can not be deleted.

Button Create a new template. Adds a new blank template.

Button Delete template. Deletes the selected template from the list.

752
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu templates available commands:

Add Folder
Delete object
Rename
Import from file
Export to file
Send by email
Copy

These commands are similar to those used in in the Object Manager nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Button Select the insertion point and the length of the riveted joint. Designed to re-select
the insertion point and the length of the rivet assembly drawing.

Button Set package connection manually. Opens setup package of the parts.

Left-click on one of the cells in the column "type items" to switch the item / gap:

In the "Thickness" is set to the thickness of the relevant part (or gap) After configuring the package
connected, close the window by pressing OK.

The right side of the dialog box mounting parts is a list of values diameter rivets.

753
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you insert the rivet connections are available 3 ways to display selected button Insert mode
riveted joint at the bottom of the dialog box toolbar. Drawing on the button displays the currently
selected display method:

With a local cutaway

Normal Box
Insert hidden
2 types available (front and side) display riveted joint:

Front view

Left side view

You can choose the type rivet connections:

The number of types depending on the type of rivet.

Automatic detection of packet connection

When you insert the rivet connections made automatically recognize the boundaries of the parts. If
the line crosses the insertion direction perpendicular to a few segments in the drawing, they are
defined as the boundaries of parts and installs Connection:

754
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insertion point and the length of the rivet assembly are determined automatically based on the
thickness of the package details.

Editing riveted joint

A dialog box settings riveted joint, apply any of the standard editing tools to the centerline of the
group details.

If the settings nanoCAD Mechanics6 included tooltips, then when you move the cursor to the center
line will show "Rivet connection".

755
nanoCAD Mechanica

User Groups
Working with groups in Construction 6 is performed using the following commands:

Create custom groups

Inserting User Groups

Create custom groups

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Group objects.

From the command line (Command: spGroupObjects).

Constraints describing the interaction of two or more objects, It is advisable to store these in the
objects database in a related group. Group nanoCAD Mechanics 6 has the following features:

Group is stored in the object database, has a pattern preview before pasting.
Components of the group in addition to objects nanoCAD Mechanics 6 can be primitives and
blocks in nanoCAD.
Group may be transferred as part of the database file to other users.
Group may have additional dependencies with other groups and objects.
Components of the group remain together parametric dependence.
Components in the group can be specified both individually and in groups.

Thus, the group is a powerful way of organizing and structuring graphics data in a separate local file
drawing document.

Jump to text:

Editing Groups
Group dependencies

Create a Group

Button Group objects

Gather and create database objects in the design position in the drawing. On the toolbar, Library
objects,click Group objects.

Select the required objects in the drawing AutoCAD specify the origin of the group.

In the dialog box New group on the left side is a list of objects in the group. Name objects in the
list is taken from the string value for the specifications set in the properties of objects.

Button Highlight group objects highlights and centers on the screen objects in the group.

Button Set parameter table. Opens the editor table settings. Table of parameters used to
select the group attribute values from a predefined list of values.

Button Show form editor. Opens Form Editor to create a special dialog box.

Button save changes to database. Saves the base group Construction Site 6.
In the right part of the window picture preview and a list of attributes for the group.

756
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing attributes produced in the cells of the table.

Adding attributes produced from the parameter list of objects in the group.

Expand the selected entry in the list (with the "+" next to the name of the object) and double click
on the parameter, add an attribute in the table.

You can install a bidirectional relationship between the group and attribute parameter object that is
associated with this attribute. The list of attributes in the column Attribute Properties , click the left
mouse button on the icon . Depending on the mode change bidirectional, it will indicate the icon
. Thus, when the value of the attribute group, and the parameter of the object is changed.

Save the group of objects in the database by pressing the button save changes to database.
Choose a location and name for the group (the default group name matches the specified value
attribute Group Name). Click OK.

Group created and saved to the database. Now you can insert multiple grouped objects in a
drawing, resizing and positioning of objects, while preserving established parametric and geometric
constraints.

Group objects only retains information about dependencies between objects and
Important! attributes set. For insertion to be carried out correctly, you must have a
database of all the objects in this group.

When working with a group of attributes of the various available methods for selecting values. In the
context menu of the column Properties attribute in the attribute list, select:

Add property from object - allows you to set the attribute value by linking it with an
attribute value of another object in the drawing.
Set to unique string - allows you to set the attribute-counter, which will increase its value by
1 for each subsequent inserted marker. In the Value column for the visible attribute counter
must specify a character string - prefix. The drawing will be appended to the prefix value of
the counter.
Set to calculated field - allows you to set the attribute value using a mathematical
expression, using references to other attributes of the marker and mathematical functions. In
reference to another attribute marker use the name of the attribute recorded in braces.
Automatically increment - allows you to set the attribute-counter, which will increase its
value to 1, compared with the same attribute of the previous insertion marker. This attribute
allows the counter-repetition of identical values for several markers that distinguishes it from
the attribute set to a unique value.
757
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set to simple field - sets the attribute type by default.

Insert group
Insert group may be carried out as the object manager , and with a tool insert group.

Button Insert Group toolbar Library objects opens a dialog Box group.

In the list of the group and press OK. If you insert a group of objects , you must specify the
insertion point of the group. If you insert a group of dependencies , you need to select the drawing
objects that you want to associate with the dependencies.

In the dialog box Insert group commands are available:

Create group. Creates a new group.

Delete group. Deletes the selected group from the database.

Select items from the drawing for the group. Used to edit an existing or new group.

Detail groups. Opens a list of groups of items.

Dependence group. Opens a list of groups dependencies.

Switch multiple . Enables insertion of multiple groups in the drawing.

Switch Add group marker. If installed, together with a group of drawing a marker is added to the
group.

Marker group is designed for group editing and data to other objects in the drawing (see Binding
arbitrary graphical and tabular data ).

758
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing a Group
After you insert a group of objects in the drawing, or when the command to edit the marker group
opens the edit dialog group.

Highlight group objects. Highlights and centers on the screen objects in the group.

Edit marker Properties. Includes editing mode, where you can change the set of objects in the
group, add or remove attributes.

Object tree. Enables and disables the object tree in the left pane.

Set parameters table. This button is available if the group contains a table of parameters. In
the dialog box, select the row attribute values, and click OK.

Group dependencies
Group dependencies remain parametric description and assembly relationships between objects.
When you insert such groups they are not added to the drawing objects, but only established the
relationship between existing objects.

Consider creating and maintaining relationships between the two cuffs.

Important! Before you create a group, you must place the drawing objects to be included in
759
nanoCAD Mechanica

the group and set the dependencies between objects.

Insert the base of the two objects Cuff GOST 8752-79. Set between the geometric co-directional
dependence Combining axis and the plane at a distance obj.B (see Constraints between two
objects ) and the parametric dependence of the outer diameter.

Select Insert group.

In the dialog box, click Dependence groups.

Button Creates group. In the groups list, change the name of the new group (eg, "Package
cuffs"). To edit, click the left mouse button on the name of the group.

Click Select group details from drawing and select the drawing both cuffs. Press Enter.

In the dialog box, select the dependent listed in the list established between objects. Click OK.

760
nanoCAD Mechanica

Look at the result of the creation of group dependencies.

In the description of the group under the picture preview Set the selection order when inserting
objects group dependencies.

Group dependencies are stored in the database automatically. Click Cancel to complete the group.

Insert a drawing of the base of the cuff, which must be applied to create a dependency.

761
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select Insert group , click Group Dependency . In the list of dependence " Package cuffs. "
Click OK.

762
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the drawing cuffs to be connected sequentially (in the example need to perform steps 10-11
twice).

Automatically set dependence stored in the description of the group.

Inserting Groups

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Insert group from Library object.

From the command line (Command: spInsertGroup).

Command Options
Insert group Box lets you create a set of objects with superimposed parametric and geometric
constraints.

763
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create group

Deleting Group

Select group details from drawing

Switch between groups of objects and dependencies

The mechanism used in the team group insert , you can insert a group of objects

The "Add marker group" enables the group a graphic element - a marker located at the insertion
point of the group. In marker may include parameters of individual parts group that can help you
when pasting automatically change the geometry of the group of related components.

"Multiple insert" allows you to create multiple copies of the selected group.

If a user group has been maintained by the standard in the folder $\MCS\Groups, then insert it in
the tree by choosing the object manager.

764
nanoCAD Mechanica

If a group is defined form, then insert dialogue is as follows:

The dialog box includes a tree of groups - a list of objects and their parameters group. This
tree can disable button
The preview window group
Form input values group

When you click on you can switch to edit mode group settings.

Creating a marker
Toolbar: Click the button Add marker on the toolbar Construction Library Objects from the
database.

From the command line command: spcreateumarker.

Menu: MechaniCS >Library Object >> Add marker

Command Marker specially designed to create a connection between an arbitrary graphic object
(primitive) nanoCAD and spreadsheet-specification. Universal marker is the translator of data
objects in a drawing table in nanoCAD Mechanics 6 through special funds - the attributes of the
marker.

Attributes marker can be visible and hidden. Visible attribute values displayed in the drawing as text
strings.

Marker as to, as of an object in nanoCAD Mechanics6, can be stored in the library of objects and be
reused. The marker may also belong to the groups of objects in nanoCAD Mechanics6,

Creating a marker

765
nanoCAD Mechanica

Consider the creation of a marker in the form of positional leader.

1. Set to the current scale.

2. Insert in the drawing two lines of text and create a horizontal line between them.

These objects make shelf template-outs with two text labels. To use text strings as
attributes marker, the first character in them should be a "$" sign.

3. Turn the command add a marker on the toolbar markers, marquee or crossing window to
select objects that make up the callout.

4. Specify referenced datum marker

5. Create Message dialog box marker. The following table lists the attributes of the properties
that will be entered in the text boxes callout:

You can specify any value to these attributes in the column value

766
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. In the bottom of the dialog box are the management tools for the located marker.

6.

Marker draw mode. When this button is pressed the dropdown rendering modes
appears:

rendering the marker in the form in which it was created

Draw position line

Linear align

When choosing how to display with the addition of the leader line, additional buttons type
arrows appear to select the type of arrows:

Click on this button and select the type of leader line arrows.

Unploted.Use this button if a marker is placed on a special layer that is not visible when
printing. When you activate this mode click icon button and a marker is displayed in
gray (according to the color of the unprinted layer).

Get new geometry. button allows you to change the

appearance of a universal marker and define the insertion
point.
Export marker source graphics. sell marker geometry file.
Add implementation.adds additional performance, while the
marker can change your view on the condition or the user's
choice.

When adding performance added variable Tag - addImplementation

. This variable defines the name of the current performance of the marker. It can be
installed in a calculated field or link to the list in the form.

An empty value or "Main" are considered the main view.

767
nanoCAD Mechanica

Other versions are given names when creating a new execution.

Save changes to the database. This utton is designed to record the marker in base
elements nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Edit form.Opens the form editor.

Add form. Adds additional forms in this marker so the
appearance of forms can be changed either by condition or user's
choice
By default, the marker has one form.

When you add a form to add variables Tag – spFormName. This variable defines the name
of the form, it can be installed in a calculated field. An empty value or "Main" are
considered the main form.

Set parameters. Table opens the editor parameter table marker.

Apply the changes to all markers of this type. Applies changes to all markers of this type in
the drawing.

7. The user can enter any number of hidden attributes consistently filling lines of the table.
Adding an attribute is made in the bottom row of the table marked by a "star".

Last column attribute property is used to specify the type of the input attribute. There are
various attributes of tags indicating their type.

Add property from object - allows you to set the attribute value by linking it with an
attribute value of another object in the drawing.

Set to unique string - allows you to set the attribute-counter, which will increase its value
by one (1) for each subsequent inserted marker. In the Value column the visible attribute
counter must specify a character string - prefix. The drawing will be appended to the
prefix value of the counter.

Set to calculated field - allows you to set the attribute value using a mathematical
expression, using references to other attributes of the marker and mathematical
functions. In reference to another attribute marker use the name of the attribute recorded
in braces.

768
nanoCAD Mechanica

Automatically increment - allows you to set the attribute-counter, which will increase its
value to 1, compared with the same attribute of the previous insertion marker. This
attribute allows the counter-repetition of identical values for several markers that
distinguishes it from the attribute set to a unique value.

Set to simple field - sets the type of attribute by default.

In the context menu graphs Value auxiliary commands are available:

A list of recent used expressions

History
Command Pick from drawing to copy values from drawing objects
Insert Symbols from a list or a table full of characters
8. To add a list of parameter values use marker button Set the parameters table.

In the list, select the parameters that will be selected from the table. In the right pane, enter the
desired number of rows with values. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
9. The Marker will be stored in the database as a named object.

In the dialog box Create element, specify the path to save the object name, and note (for
details about working with database objects, see Object Manager nanoCAD Mechanics6).

10. Construction site 6 gives the opportunity to immediately apply the established marker. At the
command prompt, you are prompted to install the marker created. Specify the insertion point
in the drawing. From then on the same markers can simply be copied.
11. Insert a marker in the other cases produced directly from the database.

769
nanoCAD Mechanica

12. When you hover over the pop-up list Tooltip -, you can view a list of attributes and their
values, as well as go into edit mode attribute.
This feature is enabled and disabled in the settings of nanoCAD Mechanics6.
Important!
General settings > Edit> Tooltips > Show

Pop-up list of available command Edit, lights up when you hover the mouse cursor on it.

Editing marker
Editing markers in the dialog box whose title matches the name of the marker.For example, when
editing the marker "Callout", the creation of which was described in the preceding paragraph, the
dialog box will look like:

770
nanoCAD Mechanica

At the bottom, there are additional buttons:

Button Highlight into source object. Highlights the drawing object ehich is associated with a
marker (This feature is available if one or more attributes is set to Add a property of the
object and when you insert the marker shown to the object).

Button Edit properties marker. Includes edit mode, where you can change the appearance of the
marker, add or remove attributes.

To select the parameter values of the marker that was previously specified in the list, click Set
Parameters table and select the row of values. Click OK.

Template Wizard
Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Template Wizard

From the command line (Command: spTWiz).

From the context menu - choose a design element and cause the shortcut menu Template
Wizard

Template Wizard is designed to create easy to use tools of commonly used design elements drawing.

Basic rules
When the command will be asked to select an object to create a template. If the object was
preselected, then immediately start dialogue Template Wizard.

771
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command Options
Button Create template - creates a template in the database or applies the changes made in the
editor.

Button From - Starts the form template.

Button Create a new template - Creates a new template in the database based on the selected
graphics and created form.

Button Delete form - deletes the created form template.

Example of creating a template

Consider the example of creating a template signs of roughness. To do this, the drawing shall bear
one designation:

772
nanoCAD Mechanica

After you run the Wizard Templates chosen designation roughness.

To work with the template you must save it in the database that will be invited to do by pressing the

button .

Then click on the Create a form and create a form using the notation tools online forms.

For example, we can take two parameters - the first line designations and direction of irregularities.
Both parameters are added to the form as a combo box (drag while holding Ctrl).

773
nanoCAD Mechanica

>

After editing, we obtain the form of the following form:

774
nanoCAD Mechanica

Close the form editor, click to update in template.

Template will be saved in the database and will be displayed in the object manager.

Now when you insert from the database will be able to also place the designation of roughness on
the shelf line-outs, but when you edit your form will appear:

Editing blocks nanoCAD

If the original graphics selected block nanoCAD, its attributes are also displayed in the form editor as
available variables.

775
nanoCAD Mechanica

>

When creating a form in the database and maintaining such a block is inserted into the drawing as a
block of the same source, only the attributes can be set up via a custom form.

Control overlapping objects

nanoCAD Mechanics6 hides individual graphic elements. Nature of the overlap object database, or
user defined unit special - the level of overlap ZOrder.

ZOrder - a numerical parameter whose value determines the priority of the overlap. An object with
a large value ZOrder object overlaps with a lower value.

Primitives in nanoCAD have the lowest level of overlap and therefore always overlap objects from
the database. An object inserted in nanoCAD Mechanics6 is not overlapped by nanoCAD, it is
necessary to disable the Insert Object dialog box switch Override primitives:

776
nanoCAD Mechanica

Region in the figure, which covers the base object nanoCAD Mechanics6, called Contour
suppression. This circuit acts as an overlap (see "How to create a sketch").

To change the order of overlapping objects the following commands can be used:

Move up Move

down Change hidden

mode

Regenerate suppression contours

Move up
Toolbar: Click the button to Move Up in the toolbar MechaniCS Library object.

From the command line command: spmoveup .

Menu: MechaniCS > Objects from the database>> Overlapping >>> Move Up

Select the objects you want to move up;

777
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the objects that should be carried out comparison;

Once you have selected the objects that need to be moved up, the value will automatically
increase the level of overlap (ZOrder).

Move down
Toolbar: Click the button Move down in the toolbarMechaniCS Library object.

From the command line command: spmovedown .

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object>> Cover >>> Move down

Select the objects you want to move down;

Once you have selected the objects that need to be moved down, the value will automatically
increase the level of overlap (ZOrder).

Change hidden mode

Toolbar: Click the button Change hidden mode on the toolbar Library object.

From the command line command: spchcover.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object>> Cover >>> Change hidden mode

Command toggles the display of hidden lines.

Select the objects for which you want to change the mode of overlap. Press Enter.
In the context menu, select the desired view objects overlapped normal or dotted.

Update overlap

Toolbar: Click the button Regenerate suppression contours MechaniCS Objects from the
database..

From the command line command: spcover .

Menu: MechaniCS > Objects from the database>> Cover >>> Regenerate suppression contours

Regeneration of the drawing and redrawing of the current viewport.

778
nanoCAD Mechanica

Before Update After Update

Part trim

To trim detail, select it, open the context menu and select Crop details

Trim parts (Command: AddModContour ) - as the contour trimming select the polyline.

779
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selecting contour trimming (Figure hexagon) Result of operation

Restore items - delete operation allows for trimming circuit previously cropped details

First item Selection circuit Removal

780
nanoCAD Mechanica

Result of operation

Trimming Part 2 points - the contour trimming selected rectangle with a width equal to the distance
between points and the height is determined by moving the mouse.

Select the first point

781
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selection of the second point

Mouse movement is determined by the height of the rectangle

782
nanoCAD Mechanica

Result of operation

Part trim
Group commands Trimming details are available in the toolbar Library object (on the flyout toolbar

Trimming circuit ) and in a special toolbar .

Commands can also be accessed from the context menu when the object is inserted into the
drawing.

Trimming object is used to disable the visibility of individual parts of the object.

The figure shows the result of trimming two parts - U:

before trimming after trimming

Toolbar Trimming circuit.

2 point part trim.

Add part trim.

783
nanoCAD Mechanica

Remove part trim.

Cropping rectangle outline.

1. Select the 2 point part trim or in the context menu under Trimming details select a way to
specify the contour trimming Trimming detail 2 point.part trim

2. Select the clipped object.

3. Use the left mouse button,to specify two points,it must pass through the crop rectangle side.
Set the dimensions of the rectangle trimming and complete your selection by clicking the left
mouse button.

4. Fragment object bounded rectangle will be hidden.

Add part trim.

1. Use add part trim or in the context menu in select Object for contour trim.
2. Select the clipped object.
3. Select closed polylines. Complete the command.

Remove part trim

1. Select the command Remove part trim or in the context menu under Trimming details select a
way to specify the contour trimming Recovery details.
2. Select cropped objects.
3. Select the contour you want to delete. Complete the command.

784
nanoCAD Mechanica

Each object may have multiple trim contour. When editing an object contours
trim retain their size and relative position:

Important!

After changing the length and rotation sill trim 2 point part trim preserved.

Add part trim

Main menu: Machanica - Standard parts - Part contour trim - Add part trim.

Toolbar: Add part trim ( "Standard parts").

Command line: MCADDMODCONTOUR, ADDMODCONTOUR.

785
nanoCAD Mechanica

Operation.
1. Call the command "Arbitrary trimming circuit" or in the context menu under "Trimming parts"
select loop trimming method of defining "Cutting the details."

2. Select trim object.

3. Specify the polyline persekayuschuyu circuit.

4. A fragment of the object limited polyline, will be hidden.

Important! The command works only for two-dimensional objects

Remove part trim

Main menu: Mechanica - Standard parts - Part contour trim - Remove part trim.

Toolbar: Remove part trim ( "Standard parts").

Command line: MCDELMODCONTOUR, DELMODCONTOUR.

Operation.
1. Call the command "Remove clipping path" or the context menu in the "Trimming parts" select
loop trimming method of defining "Restoring the details."

786
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the restored object.

3. Select the restored path

4. A fragment of the object will be restored.

787
nanoCAD Mechanica

Important! The command works only for two-dimensional objects

Add View

Toolbar: Click the button Add View toolbarMechaniCS Library object.

From the command line command: spaddview.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object >> Add View

Designed to quickly add a new type of projection from the base of the inserted object to the
drawing.

Select the object to copy.

Specify the insertion point of the object. Context menu commands Front / left / right / top
/ bottom standard projection (to insert a particular projection, it is necessary that it be
recognized in the object).
Context menu commands Point, Angle mode selection switch, respectively the insertion point
or selection mode direction.
Complete the cyclic command.

Adding a projection view to the object database can be done using the Add View from the context
menu for the selected object.

Simplified / Full View

Toolbar: Click the button to change the view on the toolbarMechaniCS Library objects.

From the command line command: spchangerepresent.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library objects >> Change representation

Press the button and select the database object in the drawing.
Context menu commands Full, Simplified select the object representation.

Switching presentation can be accomplished by using the Change view from the context menu for
the selected object.

788
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mirror Part

Toolbar: Click the button to Turn on the toolbarMechaniCS Library object.

From the command line command: spmirrowstd.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object >> Mirror Parts

Press the button and select the database object in the drawing.
Press Enter.

Occur along the axis of revolution object X.

Regenerate STD parts

Main menu: Mechanica - Standard parts - Regenerate STD parts.

Toolbar: Regenerate STD parts ( "Standard parts").

Command line: MCREGENSTD, REGENSTD.

The team needed to upgrade the graphics part of the object (s).

Operation

1. Call the command "Regenerate STD parts"

2. Specify the objects that you need to update or Enter, if you need to update all of the objects.
3. These objects will be updated

User defined object

Toolbar: Click the button Custom toolbar MechaniCS Library Objects.

From the command line command: spcustomobj.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object>> User defined object

Tool User object makes it easy to group in objects nanoCAD and nanoCAD Mechanics6 into a single
object. Custom objects support the ability to overlap other objects in the drawing.

1. Select the objects to create a custom object.

2. Specify part origin point.
3. Specify the drawing insertion and direction.
4. In the dialog box, set the value of the level of overlap of the object (for Level Z).

789
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you create a custom object contour suppression, external contour of the object is
automatically detected contour suppression external contour of the object. Subsequently, the control
circuit is used when objects overlap on the drawing..

Custom objects support editing with standard tools nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Managing Dependencies
Button Add constraint

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Add constraint toolbarMechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spconstraint.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library objects >> Mech Wizard >>> Add constraint

In the dialog box Constraints:

790
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the dialog box set parametric and assembly (geometric) dependencies between database objects.

The window is divided into two parts:

Left - The child

Right - The parent object

Use 1-selected object and 2 were selected to the choice made in the drawing, respectively
subsidiary and parent objects. After selecting an object in the corresponding half of the window, a
list of parameters of the object, which includes:

Property name
List surfaces (work surfaces)
The list object's parameters
List of installed parametric relationships
List of installed assembly constraints

On two tabs depending Parametric and Assembly constraints established relationship between
parent and child objects.

791
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parametric dependence connects the parameters of objects.

Assembly dependence binds workplanes objects.

Button New dependency. Allows you to create a new dependency

Button Delete dependency. Deletes the selected list dependence

When adding or editing button is activated depending Save dependence, which allows you to
save your changes.

Installing the parametric dependence

When installing the parametric constraints is associated parameters are recorded in the
corresponding input fields located below the list object's parameters. Selecting the link parameters
by double-clicking on the corresponding parameters in the list.

Installing assembly according

To install the switch assembly according to the tab Assembly constraints.

Choose binding surface by double-clicking on the appropriate working plane from the list.

792
nanoCAD Mechanica

Selecting the plane can also be done visually in the drawing by clicking labelled plane and the linked
marker indicating the working plane of the object.

The choice of method depends overlay using the buttons at the bottom:

Axial and surface alignment

Surface alignment

Combination axis Direction

Choose mutual orientation related planes using the buttons:

Counter-directional

Codirectional

Button Bidirectional constraint. Enables two-way relationship in which a related parameter or

surface of the parent object changes with appropriate changes to the child object.

Compound objects

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon Connect objects.

793
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the command line (Command: mcConnectTo).

This command is used to overlay preset assembly and parametric dependencies on objects in the
drawing.

After running the command must specify.

1. Child object - an object that will be joining.

2. Parent object - the object to which you will attach the child object.

Upon completion of the command will be imposed on the details of parametric and geometric
constraints defined in their script..

Recognition graphics drawings

Using commands recognition of graphic objects will significantly speed up the process of registration
as the projections of old drawings and new, but made by hand without the use of any application.

Character Recognition is offered to carry out automatic or semi-automatic mode.

nanoCAD Mechanics 6 recognizes the following symbols and signs on the drawing:

ymbols, text callouts;

formats;
specification sheets;
table.

Call Team
By default, the toolbar "Character Recognition" is not displayed.

To invoke it, place the cursor pointer on the main toolbar nanoCAD Mechanics 6and click the right
mouse button. In the context menu, click on "Recognition".

You will see an additional toolbar:

Character recognition
Recognition formats
Recognition specifications
Table recognition

Automatic recognition
To perform automatic recognition of characters in the drawing context menu after recognizing any
symbol.

Automatic character recognition requires checking the entire drawing, so it is not recommended for
use in saturated drawings.

o recognize the main frame with the inscription enough to the source drawing contained within the
Standard size, two contour lines and the title block.

Entries in the title block recognizable drawing are automatically entered in the dialog box title block,
add additional fields and zones.

794
nanoCAD Mechanica

Recognition forms specifications

Information in the figure, placed on the forms specifications after recognizing transferred to Excel.

For correct recognition itself form the specification may be a block or drawn objects such as "Line".

The text in the cells of the form specification - an object of type "text".

Design fasteners
Threaded fastening
Riveted joint
Removing fasteners

Threaded fastening

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Threaded fastening .

From the command line (Command: spJoint).

Editing Template

Fundamental rules

Applying fasteners can be completed by clicking on the icon Threaded fastening from the toolbar
nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Indicating the start and end points defined by the center line of fasteners. Intersected by the line
thickness held together constitute the package details.

Result screw placement

795
nanoCAD Mechanica

The result of placing the screw

When placing bolting panel is automatically called "Direction", which allows you to place bolting
along, parallel or perpendicular to the selected object.

Panel appears if configured nanoCAD Mechanics 4 is enabled Automatically display panel "Direction".

After specifying the position and direction rendering bolting dialog appears mounting parts:

Dialog box mounting parts, Template tab.

Dialog box mounting parts, tab view.

Insert dialog bolting automatically saves last selected template and the thread
Note:
diameter.

Command Options

Template Management bolted assemblies

Create a new template

Fasteners can be inserted from the template, or specify an arbitrary composition of the compound.

When creating a new template it is automatically added to the required number of holes according
to the number of crossed lines in the drawing.

Remove template

This command removes the selected template bolting from a database of standard parts in
Construction Site 6.

Management structure template

Add part to template

To add items to the compound, click Add item to a template and select the type from the drop down
list. The number and type of parts specific to each row of the template.

In order to highlight the item in the template you need to click in the "Type" field.

To edit the parameters of the object to open it by clicking on the icon .

To change the available parameters defined in the standard items, such as length, diameter of the
thread, for a number of holes, etc.

796
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the items are already in the figure, they can be individually edited, as well as all the standard DB
in Сonstruction site 6.

To change the standard type of selected items click in the "Standard". This opens a dialog to select
the filtered items from the database.

Remove item from the template

Removes the selected item from the bolting pattern.

Selecting the length and position of the United

When you specify the length of the screw bolt dynamically monitored not only by its length, but the
length of the thread mate - nuts. Thread length is displayed in the status bar (lower left corner of
the working window nanoCAD).

Selecting the insertion point and the length of bolting

When selecting this option prompt appears to specify a new location bolt assembly.

Here you can manually specify the length and type of holes.

Clicking on the icon toggles the display of the hole in the form of a gap or hole.

Selection of parameters dynamically

If the icon is pressed after specifying the insertion point, it is proposed to dynamically select the
length of the screw connector.

Graphical display of the compound

The following types of graphical display bolting:

With cutaway.
Without an incision.
Invisible.

797
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you insert bolting it remembers the last selected template and the thread
Note:
diameter.

Template editing

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon group edit.

From the command line (Command: spEditGroups).

Moreover, the bolt assembly can be edited by editing the object to produce "fastness", or by editing
the individual parts included into the head assembly.

When editing, you can change the composition, Hole of the individual parts which it is composed.

Counter bore addition

A counterbore may be inserted by clicking the Washers, screws and threaded holes fields in the
context menu, The Counterbore depth is assigned along the fastening axis. counterbore may be
assigned on a line at 15 degree angle.

798
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dialog box Fastness. Depth of counterbore setting.

Displaying bevels on holes

To select the display settings of facets in the drawing is necessary to correctly place the mark in the
properties of holes:

Setting hole types

To change the aperture click on it to set connection details and select a different type in the dialog
box Select the details.

Change the display connection

Call team

From toolbar - click on the icon "Simplified / Complete view".

From the command line (Command: mcChangeRepresent).

Fundamental rules

By default, standard connections are drawn with all the details. To draw a standard product in a
simplified view, you can use the command "MchangeRepresent" on the command line, call it a
dashboard nanoCAD Mechanics 6 or select from the popup menu.

Highlight the editable connection, double-click the right mouse button and from the context menu
select line "Sample".

799
nanoCAD Mechanica

Construction of additional types

Call team

From toolbar - click on the icon "Add View".

From the command line (Command: mcAddView).

Team constructing orthogonal kinds of standard compounds are in shortcut menus. Prior to their
application, you must click on the edited mix the left mouse button (the connection is highlighted).
Then click the right mouse button context menu.

Riveted joint
Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Rivet joint.

From the command line (Command: spRivet).

Fundamental rules
The tool is designed to create a graphical representation of riveted joint parts.

The position of the rivet connection is made consistent by specifying two points on its axis.
Intersecting lines are considered as boundary parts connected by a rivet.

800
nanoCAD Mechanica

Connection position can be overridden from the dialog box, or install a package manually with
connectable geometry.

If the option Automatically display panel "Direction" appears, then specify the placement can be
performed with the help of the "Direction".

Command Options
At the top of the dialog buttons are:

Create new template - adds to the database template bolting.

Delete template - removes the selected template database connection.

Selecting insertion point - starts Select mode position and length of the rivet connections.

Manually select holes - Length and placement

Click in the box type items can be set to display the hole or gap between the parts.

By clicking in the package thickness of the part can be set manually (if the distance is not found
automatically matches the projected connection).

In the center of the dialog is a preview connection with the selected parameters.

Below is a selection field STATE connecting rivets and rivet holes.

Click on the button > to select other standards or rivet hole.

There are two types of Rivet Holes:

801
nanoCAD Mechanica

With parameters corresponding to GOST 14802 (diameter 10 mm).

With arbitrary parameters (diameter value is not regulated entity determined by the diameter
rivets).

On the left side of the dialog box template list of riveted joints are present in the database

At the bottom of the dialog box by pressing it the user is given a representation of the connections:

Display type compounds. There are three types of mapping

With cutaway - being completed cutaway and hatching.

Normal - cut without constructing hatch
Hidden - without an incision.

Type of connection. Provides for the establishment of compounds frontal view and top view.

Type of the closing head. Defines a representation of the connection. The following types of
heads:

Round head
Countersunk head
Unriveted
Cone head

802
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the right part of the dialog box is a field diameter of the connection:

Diameter changes are immediately displayed in the preview.

When you build joints, you can choose the desired value by pressing the zoom button:

When you click on OK in the drawing generated graphics rivets and auxiliary constructions.

Remove fasteners

Main menu: Machanica - Design - Delete parts.

Toolbar: Delete parts ( "ESKD Design").

803
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: MCDELSPART.

Operation
The function is intended to remove the fastener bolt or rivet connections. Openings by bolted or
riveted to remain on the drawing and in the object manager.

To remove fasteners bolting need to run the function and choose the item that came bolting.

The remaining holes.

804
nanoCAD Mechanica

Details of rotation
Details of rotation Placing snap
ring groove Placement of the
retaining ring Accommodation
details 'Cover' Accommodation
Details 'Glass' Templates
bearings
Design pinion shafts

Design details of rotation

Editing a shaft segment
Selecting a present segment size in the dialog
Dynamic view of segment presets
Exporting a shaft to a file
Setting the grid pitch
Setting the shaft step parameters
How to edit shaft segment

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon shafts.

From the command line (Command: mcArbor).

Basic rules
After invoking the command, pick an insertion point.

Set the shaft direction by moving the mouse.

Left clicking creates a shaft segment.The command remains active and allows additional segment to
be drawn.

Construction site 6 auto-detects the insertion point of a graphic element which is to be inserted,
and acquires its geometry from a standard database.The auto-dected elements are highlighted in

805
nanoCAD Mechanica

color.After the insertion command has been invoked, elements are highlighted at the mouse
movements.Left-click to confirm.

Dialog box Editg shaft

Show / Hide section Standard fittings and details sections

Add element
Insert Group
Edit Object
Insert design
Add view / section
Scale of details and shaft sections

Shaft section displays methods

Composition tab "Standard fittings and details" is defined folder structure in the system folder
"shafts" Database Construction Site 6.

806
nanoCAD Mechanica

In addition, in the tabs of the Edit shaft dialog are included

Tooth-wheels
Efforts
User folders

Path to these elements are specified in the option Construction Site 6 (Standard Elements >Edit
shaft ).

Editing section of the shaft

Click on the symbol "Plus", a list of components for editing.

When you specify a string in the column names in the drawing selected component is highlighted.

To modify a standard component, double-click the left mouse button on the name of GOST. In
introducing the new values for the editable portion of the shaft all the changes are immediately
displayed in the drawing.

807
nanoCAD Mechanica

Purpose size details in the dialog box

To select the size of the base bearing the dialog window Edit shaft.

Specifying the column name to GOST bearing, check option; bearing the figure should highlight.

Double click the left mouse button on the designation of the bearing or click once on the icon to edit

In the dialog box, this bearing sizes choose. Selection window will size bearing.

Complete the command by pressing OK and close the dialog box.

Similarly edit all items bearing assembly.

Dynamic display sizes details

The quickest way to selecting the size of parts - a dynamic view of all of its dimensions by moving
the mouse pointer to the left-right and up-down.

Specifying the insertion point of the bearing on the shaft, select size bearing.

When you move the pointer of the available bearing sizes select those that meet the internal
diameter of the shaft and the combination of the bearing width and outer diameter correspond to
the current cursor position.

Export shaft to an external file

For detailing received shafts can be exported to an external file. Double clicking the left mouse
button on the shaft axis edited activate dialog Editing shaft.

808
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the dialog box, display the Edit and select from the drop down list of commands string Export to a
file.

Then you want to fill the frame and title block specify the file's location.

Setting step drawing

In the settings select Standard, and set the desired spacing.

Setting the stage shaft

After setting the insertion point of the shaft when rendering, you can use a dialog box to set options
stage:

After clicking on the shaft , you can choose the types of shaft ends.

Determining the size of shaft section in the status bar

When rendering stage shaft in the status bar nanoCAD in the lower left corner of the window
displays its properties::

Determining the size of shaft section in the dialog box

When you specify a dynamic image stage shaft, the right-click context menu and enter the D-line
dialogue.

A dialog box shaft , in which you can enter the exact values of the diameter and length of the shaft
portion.

809
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shaft chamfer
Call team

From Toolbar Design button .

From Command line: mcachamfer

From Menu: Mechanics > Design >> Shafts >>> Shaft chamfer

Operating procedure

To insert a chamfer is necessary to run a command and select the portion of the shaft.

The chamfer is automatically adjusted to the diameter of the shaft portion. Fixing chamfer happens
when you click the mouse, and then open dialogue Bevel-rounding.

After closing the dialog construct chamfer automatically.

810
nanoCAD Mechanica

Shaft fillet
Call team

From Toolbar Design button .

From Command line: mcafilet

From Menu: Mechanics> Design >> Shafts >>> Shaft fillet

Operating procedure

To insert, you must run the command interface and mating portions of the shaft.

Fixing interface brings up a dialog transition.

811
nanoCAD Mechanica

After closing the dialog interface to build automatically.

Designing the internal parts of the shaft

Call team

From ToolbarDesign button .

From Command line: mcarborin

From Menu: Mechanics > Design >> Shafts >>> Inner shaft

Operating procedure

Running the command calls the appropriate dialogue.

The command prompts you to select the start point of rendering of the inner portion of the shaft.

The next step is given by the direction of drawing.

The image of each of the inner portion of the shaft is fixed by clicking the left mouse button. The
command remains active for rendering the following sections of the shaft.

Editing inner shaft sections can be accessed by clicking the mouse twice at the desired location.
Selecting Options dialog appears shaft, where you can change the selected area.

See other editing options.

812
nanoCAD Mechanica

Placing snap ring groove

When placing grooves retaining rings for automatic recognition of the diameter of the shaft and the
insertion point on the shaft must first be placed bearing.

To specify the position of the groove snap ring must be attached to the shaft or to the end of the
bearing. Automatically set the dependence on the position and diameter of the retaining ring \
grooves.

Placement of the retaining ring

When placing the retaining rings for the automatic recognition of their size on the shaft must be pre-
arranged groove.

813
nanoCAD Mechanica

To indicate the position of the ring is enough when you insert attached to the groove (it is
highlighted in the appropriate color).

Accommodation details "cover"

For details of accommodation "cover" is necessary to consistently left-clicking on the bearing, and
then on the shaft portion. Automatically creates a cap with the attached parameters of the situation,
the diameter of the bearing and the shaft diameter.

814
nanoCAD Mechanica

Accommodation details "Glass"

When placing parts "Glass" is necessary to specify the series bearing cap.

Choose from a glass base nanoCAD Mechanics 6 part, direct the cursor on the bearing - he
highlighted. Click with the left mouse button.

815
nanoCAD Mechanica

It is further proposed to select the cover - direct the cursor on the cover, it is highlighted - click the
left mouse button.

816
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the dialog that appears, click OK insertion cup.

817
nanoCAD Mechanica

Templates bearings
In the design of supports shafts are encouraged to use the mechanism of group insert multiple
pieces of bearing select the desired template. If no suitable template support, it can be created. This
technology is similar to technology insertion into a drawing fasteners from the selected template.

The pattern of support may include the following parts: bearings, wear rings, bushings, glass
retaining ring grooves for them, locking cover, parts of gears and other parts of the base of standard
parts.

Having a set of templates with a single command, you can immediately draw the option selected in
the drawing of bearing.

Insert the template bearing support

Double click the left mouse button on the axis of the shaft of the edited call the corresponding dialog

box. At the bottom of the window, click on the icon Insert group .

818
nanoCAD Mechanica

Design pinion shafts

In the dialog box, select the folder Editing shaft gears and select a template cylindrical gear shaft.

After selecting the parts "cylindrical gear shaft" mouse pointer is displayed as a standard cross-hair,
blue arrows and the image of a small green square (standard view). When you hover the pointer on
the shaft, this area will be highlighted in green and contains the insertion point of the ring gear.

In the dialog box, spur gear option

Take the rate you need to click on the drop-down list of the calculations and indicate which item you
want to transfer

render (or gear wheel).

Опция доступна, если расчет был создан. Для вставки объекта в цепь объектов нажмите кнопку
ОК. После нанесения шестерни курсор-указатель принимает стандартный вид. Далее
предлагается продолжить отрисовку следующей детали зацепления.

Drawing on the results of the calculation of gearing

Original drawing:

Double click the left mouse button on the axis of the shaft, call the dialog box Editing shaft.

Tab gears.

Select a template cylindrical gear shaft.

By clicking the left mouse button, set the insertion point on the lower shaft gear.

819
nanoCAD Mechanica

Move the cursor pointer to the wheel on the upper shaft (ring gear is highlighted in green). Left-click
to confirm your choice.

In the drop-down list of the calculations, specify the desired (in our example - calculation with the
name of "Example of calculation") and select what should render the lower portion of the shaft (in
this example - "Gear").

Click the OK button. At the request of the "Insert object in the chain of objects?" Answer "yes".

Press ESC to finish drawing commands engage and close the dialog box.

As a result, the drawing rendered pair of gearing with deposited assembly dependencies.

Design of pipelines for internal and external cone

Call team
Toolbar - click on the icon Pipelines.

Command line (Command: mcPipe).

Two ways to build a pipe path

Sequence of piping design
Fitting incut for connections on external cone

Two ways to build a pipe path

First - automatic connection of two pipe fittings elements.

When joining the program selects the shortest distance: pipe length is calculated from the minimum
values of the linear section and minimum bending radius of the pipe diameter.

The parameters are set in the pipeline nanoCAD Mechanics 6 (team Settings).

To automatically connect the two valve elements specify the connecting member (bushings, elbows,
tees, crosses), hold down SHIFT. nanoCAD Mechanics 6 generate trajectory tubes and displays the

820
nanoCAD Mechanica

dialog box with the geometric size of the segment of the pipeline. If the proposed path will not suit
you, it can be edited in the same window.

Second - step by step construction of the pipeline with a consistent set the direction and length of
the pipe segment.

Step task trajectory pipe begins with the first element of the valve. The insertion point and pipe
diameter are determined automatically.

Next, follow the prompts on the command line, you can create the path of the pipeline, consistently
introducing straight and arched portions.

For automatic connection of the pipe end to an element of reinforcement necessary to open the
context menu.

Select option C bonds and provide an element of reinforcement with which to make the connection.

Call the following context menu again by pressing the right mouse button.

Select it as the pipe sections need render.

The compound can be performed in three or five sections.

By clicking the right mouse button to complete the command.

Sequence of piping design

Apply hole.

Execute command Inserting pipeline fittings .

Choose from a database element "Hole taper thread."

Specify the coordinates of the conical hole.

In the opening taper threaded set nominal thread. On the second tab, Properties , set the length and
diameter of the hole drilling.

Complete the command by pressing ESC.

Place details of the reinforcement.

Assembly according to angles and taper thread throughs applied automatically.

Execute command Inserting pipeline fittings .

Choose from a database element "Prohodnik."

Hover your pointer to the hole and click the left mouse button

Complete the command by pressing ESC.

For pipelines on external cone

Apply pipe .

Upon completion of the construction will be offered automatically add nipples and nuts to the ends of
the pipeline.

821
nanoCAD Mechanica

If nipples and nuts have been added automatically, you need to place them manually.

Select command Inserting pipe fittings .

Choose from a database element "Nipple".

Hover your pointer to the end portion of the pipe and left-click

Select size and click ОК.

Complete the command by pressing ESC.

For pipelines on internal cone

When selecting the pipeline on internal cone selection dialog appears connects equipment
automatically added to the compounds of the inner cone, depending on the type of environment and
the type of nipple (spherical or hemispherical). For a spherical pin structure parts will be as follows:

GOST 16043-70 nipple

GOST 16048-70 lock ring
GOST 16047-70 Bolting

For hemispherical pin composition details:

GOST 16042-70 nipple

GOST 16046-70 Bolting

Thread the other end of the pipeline construction include:

Choose hardware - reappears dialogue "set of equipment."

Building and - at the second end of the conduit parts to be added to set the same parameters
and composition as the first one.
Do not build - further details will not be built.
Example of construction
Collective inserting objects
Set the method of overlapping pipelines
How to make a connection in the context?
Editing trajectory pipeline

Example of construction of the pipeline on external cone

To the connection details automatically recognize your size and were object-dependent, the figure
should be placed initially element reinforcement or opening.

In our example, we will adhere to the following order: Insert pipe nipple and nut.

822
nanoCAD Mechanica

Object "pipe" can draw only pointing out any element of reinforcement.

For applying object-dependent connection details on previously placed component is enough to point
to the workpiece aperture cursor pointer. Base item is highlighted in color.

Automatic determination of size and pipe insertion point

823
nanoCAD Mechanica

Automatic determination of size and the insertion point of the pin

Automatic determination of size and the insertion point nuts

Group inserting objects

For piping design, you can use a tool group insert objects.

824
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dialog box Insert group and organize the group result.

To use her group must first create it. To do this, use the following steps:

Added to the drawing details of the object manager

Through dialogue Dependency Management, or automatically when you insert constrain
standard parts are dependencies between components.
Group is created through dialogue to create groups.

The group must be incomplete, ie does not include fittings or pipe.

Instead, when you insert the missing fittings group will be requested item (items) in the drawing.

Set the method of overlapping pipelines

We indicate the horizontal pipe as an object to which the selected throughs must be higher.

After clicking on the icon Overlapping objects get a new version of the layout.

825
nanoCAD Mechanica

Distinguish compounds and by right-clicking, we show in the context menu line Move Up. Horizontal
pipe is above all the elements.

Creating a cross-section of a connection

826
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the nut and invoke the content menu , choose send to back , Then choose the object behind
which the nut should be placed.

Giving the command overlapping objects, we corrected geometry.

827
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing pipeline trajectory by Grip Editing

Select a pipeline and use the grips to move the nodes.If a midpoint node is edited , the relocated
tube is parallel to its original and its neighbouring segments are adjusted automatically.

Nodes located on the endpoints of linear segments may only be relocate along the axis of the
current segment.

Editing pipeline dialog

Double-clicking on a tube to open the edit pipe dialog:

To edit a trajectory using the step by step connector , first pick a tube segment. The segment will
show in different color.

For linear section given length parameter is set.

828
nanoCAD Mechanica

For arc sections,the bent radious parameter is set.

The following sections of pipelines alignment options:

Vertical alignment.

Horizontal alignment.

Object perpendicular alignment.

Object parallel alignment.

Object parallel alignment by distance.

Undo last alignment

In addition, the following editing options:

Base parameters change.

Editing properties of pipe

Editing tube properties , start the base parameters change command to set the material and
geometry parameters of the tube in the dialog.

On the Properties You can change the display pipeline (filling, cut).

829
nanoCAD Mechanica

NANOCAD

Table parameters IPropetiE;s] Dependences I

Pipe diameter Wall Matetial Mass 1mll
Thickness (kg)

I r- 118H10T [0.114 ]
1.2 20
6 1.4 20A
8 1.5 r2M •
10 M2
-,·
16
18
20
22
25
28
30
32
34
36
38

l I
l
III • Q. Ml :l I OK JI Apply II Cancel I
Table P_!!r ameters J Propeties 1
I Parameter Value 1

t--

Fin
front I
Section view

Common use
-- -
"' Cut C<I.D elements

III I• Q. Ml :l I OK II Apply II Cancel I

IiiSaving the pipe to an external file

After selecting this command, a dialog box title block. When information is entered in the title block,
it is proposed to specify a filename and location.
nanoCAD Mechanica

830
nanoCAD Mechanica

Extend pipe

This function connects the pipe to a fitting or to a free end of another pipe.

Fitting incut for connections on external cone

Command
From the toolbar - click the fitting incut icon.

From the command line (Command: mcinshnode).

Fundamental rules

The sequence of commands

831
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select the port to place an insertion point , and then select the port for the start of the second
pipe , the result will be reconstructed connection.

Import PCB format IDF

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon Import idf (brd) files.

From the command line (Command: mcidfconvert).

After calling the command, the system asks for a file with the extension *.Emn (export file format
from the IDF Orcad) or *.Brd (export file format from the IDF PCAD).

Caution! To import of PCB with components also required a library of components that must be
maintained with the same name and in the same directory as the file of the PCB. PCAD library file
has the extension *. Lib, file libraries Orcad - *. Emp.

832
nanoCAD Mechanica

The system reads the information from the file. It is further assumed that the user can check and
correct it with a dialog box IDF.

If by reference numerals may determine the type of element, the nanoCAD Mechanics 6
automatically assigns the appropriate circuit parameters and fill color (can be changed in settings).

Thickness (height) of the element is taken from the import file, and if it is not defined in it, the item
is automatically assigned to one micron in height.

The user has the possibility to limit the detail card by disabling generation of the individual (or all) of
the elements and hiding holes in the board.

After clicking the Apply or OK button - automatically generated drawing board. It is placed at the
origin, and can thereafter be moved by the handles.

The Apply button allows you to continue editing the appearance and composition of the board with a
graphical preview of the drawing.
833
nanoCAD Mechanica

PCB editing by double-clicking on it and in the same dialog box, change its structure or appearance.

Calculation Manager

Command Call
From the Command Line(Command: mcCalc).

From the toolbar - click the Analysis Wizard icon.

Basic Rules
1. The calculation manager allows the editing of any calculation present in the file, regardless of
the graphics platform. To create a new calculation, choose its type and click the New button.
2. The calculation results can be shown directly in the calculation manager.
3. The user can freely edit the types and the quantities within the parameter dialog. To achieve
this, double-click the right side of the dialog to open the editing window.

The default layout of the dialog is shown below:

Additional options become available when we move the mouse cursor over the name of the
calculation to be performed.

Create

Activates a calculation type based on the selected option in the dialog.

834
nanoCAD Mechanica

Delete

Open

Save

Edit

After activating a report window, the user can enter the desired values or delete unnecessary ones.
Parameters displayed in square brackets must correspond to the ones which are present in the
report template.

Spur gear transmission report templates are located by default in C:\Program Files\CSoft\(Undefined
variable: Primary.ProductName)3.0\Reports Templates folder.

Static Shaft Calculation

Basic Rules Setting
the Load Placing the
Supports Calculation
Calculation Result Analysis
Parameters Value
Calculation Conditions
Report

Command Call
1. From the toolbar - click the Calculation Manager icon
choose Static shaft calculation in the dialog window;

835
nanoCAD Mechanica

click the Create icon.

2. In the Edit Shaft dialog click the Insert design icon

3. From the standard part browser:

Basic Rules
It is most convenient to prepare the initial data and perform the analysis starting from the Edit
Shaftdialog. A tab within the dialog contains the elements used to manipulate load, supports and
balance torque. To activate the shaft analysis, use the corresponding button in the toolbar.

The calculation module will automatically place shaft supports into the bearing insertion points. If
the analysis should only be performed for a single shaft with no environment, a special library object
named Shaft bearing is installed.

If a torque or an eccentric force is added to the shaft, the system becomes statically indeterminable.
In this case, it is required to insert a balance torque.

Setting the Load

1. In the (Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName)library, open the Loads folder, and then select
Concentrated force. After selecting this option, the cursor takes the shape of a standard crosshair, a
green square and an arrow indicating the concentrated force.

Moving the cursor over a shaft segment highlights the segment in green.

836
nanoCAD Mechanica

Left-clicking locks the concentrated force indicator and opens the Load, kN dialog. All the values
shown in the window are measured in kilonewtons.

In this example, we shall assign a radial force equal to 2 kN. Once we have determined the
necessary load intensity, we shall move on to the calculation.

Placing the Supports

The calculation module automatically places shaft supports into bearing insertion points. If the
calculation should be performed for a single shaft with no environment, a special library object
named Shaft bearing is inserted:

837
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting the distance between the end of a shaft segment and

the support point (mm)

Rigid support

Swing support

Flexible support

Movable support

Floating support

Rigid floating support

Calculation
Bring up the Edit Shaft window.

Methods to call up the window:

right-click a shaft segment while holding down CTRL;

double left-click a shaft axis;
right-click a shaft axis.

If these steps are carried out incorrectly, shaft parameters will need to be edited.

In the lower part of the Edit Shaft window, click the Insert design icon. The Calculation Result
window will appear.

A graph type may be selected in the Diagrams section.

Total: display both radial and axial components

Radial: display the radial component

Axial: display the axial components

Hide: do not display the graph

838
nanoCAD Mechanica

In our example, the diagrams for total Deflection and Tension are displayed.

To view all the diagrams, click the Export diagrams button:

839
nanoCAD Mechanica

And the position of the Calculation results table:

Calculation Result Analysis

Unsatisfactory calculation results are followed by the exclamation mark symbol .

840
nanoCAD Mechanica

Double-clicking an exclamation-marked entry will bring up the corresponding editing window.

Save report: save report in HTML format

Calculate value: determine the calculation value for all parameters in the specific point

Apply: apply the calculated values to the model

Export diagrams: place the diagrams into the drawing

Setting the diagram representation in the drawing/model

Double-clicking a bearing parameter or a shaft parameter opens a dialog containing their properties.

After the parameters have been changed, the application switches back to the Calculation result
window.

Changing the properties of a bearing or a shaft results in automatic recalculation of the parameters.
If the parameters are correct, the icon shows as .
To view the results, click the Apply button, and then click OK.

841
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters Value

To determine a value in the specific point, choose the desired parameter in the pull-down menu and
pick a coordinate.

Calculation Conditions
Double-clicking the Shaft weight field in the Calculation result window opens the dialog used to set
the material properties for the calculation.

Choose a material from the pull-down menu, or set the material parameters manually. Choose the
calculation conditions.

Report
A report based on the calculation results (in HTML format) is generated by clicking the Save report

button

Click the Save report button to open the corresponding dialog.

Enter the report name and set the target folder.

842
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click theOK button. The Save reportwindow will close. The application returns to the Calculation
result window.

The generated report contains load, strain and stress diagrams and a table of values of these
parameters, depending on coordinates.

Calculating Gearings
The calculation is carried out based on GOST 21354-87 (further listed as GOST) "Cylindrical evolvent
gears of external engagement. Strength calculation". This standard establishes base calculation
dependencies for determining the contact strength of the active surfaces on gear teeth and the
strength of gear teeth at bending evolvent cylindrical metal gearings with outer gear transmission,
general industrial purpose, start contour compliant with GOST 13755-81, module m more or equal
1mm, oil-lubricated at (angular) circular speeds v less or equal 25 m/s.

The Approach to Gearing Analysis

Strength Check
Editing the Material Library
Analysis Result
Creating Custom Reports
Testing the Strength of a Spur Gear
Setting the Insertion Point of a Gear
Methods Used to Create a Gear
Drawing a Gear (Pinion) without an Analysis
Drawing the Transmission after Completing the Analysis
Work with the Gear Schemes Templates

The Approach to Gearing Analysis

Gearings are treated as independent objects, given the power and kinematical properties of input
and output. A tooth wheel is an element of the designed reducer. Engine type, general transmission
ratio of the reducer, stage transmission ratio of the reducer and power and kinematical properties of
gearings of a certain number of stages must be set prior to analysis.

The GOST requirements in the offered algorithm are completely sustained.

The calculation results can determine the following:

data required for a gearing strength grade (allowed/actual stress at gear contact stamina analysis,
bending stamina analysis and maximum load gear analysis).

geometric properties of a designed gearing;

gear precision control data;
data required for a gearing strength grade (allowed/actual stress at gear contact stamina
analysis, bending stamina analysis and maximum load gear analysis);
degree of load on a tooth-wheel, according to selected stress types.

The Calculator (the dedicated application) allows two types of analysis to be performed:

creating a new gearing by a given load, durability, desired transmission ratio and other
parameters;
check the strength of a given gearing.

In the former case, the calculator first creates a gear (in our case, it starts with the conditions
required for contact strength), i.e. determines all of its geometric properties, including the module
and the distance, and then checks for strength in all types of stressed conditions. In the latter case,
the calculator does not create a gear, but only checks a given gear whose geometric properties have
been defined previously. For these two types of analysis, the Spur gear transmission analysis entry
provides two sub-entries for initial data input:

843
nanoCAD Mechanica

One-stage spur gear transmission analysis for the first type of analysis;
Validation test analysis by strength of one-stage spur gear transmission

The two types of analysis yield two different report types, each containing its own initial data, its
own way of displaying the calculation results and its own templates.

Strength Check

Initial Data Required to Create a Gear

Selecting a Spur Gear Type
The Kinematical Scheme
Selecting the Load Conditions
Selecting Materials for the Gear and the Pinion

Initial Data Required to Create a Gear

Pinion-related parameters and properties will further be indexed 1; gear-related ones will be indexed
2. The following may be used as initial data:

a typical stress mode or a load stress diagram;

the torque on a gear shaft T2, Nm (if the load is variable, the largest long-term torque is
adopted for calculation);
the rotation frequency of a driven gear shaft n2, min. 1;
the transmission ratio of a gear pair u;
the tooth-wheel type (straight teeth, helical teeth, herring bone);

the tooth inclination angle - ;

the coefficients of initial operation contour displacement by gear cutting x1 and x2;
the gear type - reverse or unidirectional. A gear is considered reverse or unidirectional if the
load is bilateral or unilateral;
the required durability (resource) Lh, in hours;
the material type and the method of chemical heat treatment of the pinion and the gear;
the position of the calculated gearing in the drive.

The initial data required to create a gear is entered in the dialog shown below:

844
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click the button labelled More... to open additional entry fields for reverse transmission gears and
methods of mechanical/heat treatment of the tooth root.

Additional entry fields for starting parameters needed for calculation of cylindrical spur gearings

Selecting a Spur Gear Type

The drop-down menu allows you to choose between three types of spur gears: with straight-teeth,
with helical-teeth and herring-bone:

When helical-teeth or herring-bone are used, enter the tooth inclination value (in degrees) into the
Angle of teeth inclination field. Make sure the value is within the recommended range (usually 8 to
22 for helical-teeth and 25 to 40 for herring-bone teeth).

If this entry field is not filled in, the application assumes an inclination angle within the desired
range by default. Most frequently, it is the angle used in the previous analysis. It can be changed
either immediately or at the next calculation correction.

845
nanoCAD Mechanica

The remaining entry fields are filled in according to the technical conditions and properties of the
desired engine

The Kinematical Scheme

Clicking a field displaying a kinematical scheme opens a window containing nine gear reducer types.
Choose the tooth pair scheme that corresponds most closely to the calculated sample. The
calculated sample is displayed in white.

Selecting the Load Conditions

The load type is selected in the drop-down menu.

Selecting Materials for the Gear and the Pinion

The materials used for tooth-wheels and their properties can be selected either in the drop-down
menu or in the library.

Click the button located beside the steel sort drop-down menu to switch to the library.

The dialog section used for selecting materials is shown below:

846
nanoCAD Mechanica

For easier selection, remarks attached to a certain material may be viewed (editing a comment field:
refer to Editing material properties chapter).

If the transitional surface is to be ground, the desired grinding method can be selected using the
corresponding drop-down menu.

Editing the Material Library

The user can edit any of the properties of a chosen material, but must bear in mind that altering one
parameter might change other dependent parameters. Particularly the stamina of gear teeth at

bending, corresponding to the base number of stress cycles for normalized, optimized and
nitrified wheels depends on the tooth hardness. The maximum bend stress base value due to

maximum load .

Changing the hardness of gear teeth with such surface impregnation, it is necessary to change the
hardness indexes. If the user is not sure of the accuracy of modifications, it is better to use the
Filling of material properties dialog (see below).

The parameters contained in the library are labelled as follows:

Half-product creation method.

847
nanoCAD Mechanica

Unit of hardness.

Heat treatment type.

SIGMA_Flimb Tooth stamina at bending, corresponding to the base number of stress cycles, MPa.

Y_g Influence coefficient of transmission surface grinding (GOST, tab. 13, p. 10.4).

Y_d Influence coefficient of deform reinforcement or electro-chemical treatment of tooth

transmission surface (GOST, tab. 13, p. 10.5).

S_F The safety factor, according to bend fatigue analysis (GOST, tab. 13, p.11).

SIGMA_Fst Base value of allowed stress due to maximum load bending (GOST, tab. 18, p. 2).

SIGMA_T Yield stress, MPa.

H_O Tooth surface hardness.

H_K Tooth core hardness.

To fill in or edit the library entries, use the three buttons located in the upper left corner of the
Materials editor window:

Insert a new material into the library

Delete a material from the library

Edit material properties

For example, clicking the New material button opens the Material properties window. Each entry in
this window must be filled, in order to correctly include the new material in the library.

Creating a New Material

By default, the entry fields used for material parameters contain the properties of the previously
selected material. This allows the user to create a library of their own, conforming to a specific
product and the technological abilities of the company.

848
nanoCAD Mechanica

All entries in the material editor may be filled in instantly. However, bear in mind that contact
stamina and bend stamina limits depend on many factors. Therefore, it is convenient to bring up the
next dialog by clicking the Select... button.

The Material dialog

The corresponding dialog, named Filling of material properties, allows selecting among multiple
integrated properties of a material group and its heat treatment or chemical treatment (the upper
left corner of the window).

849
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Filling of material properties dialog

These properties can then be specified with respect to the particular steel types (the lower left
corner), and the calculated values of the corresponding stamina limits can be viewed
(Recommended field).

It has already been mentioned that the strength properties of tooth-wheels depend on teeth
hardness when it comes to normalized, optimized and nitrified steel. That is why the desired
hardness of teeth must be specified in the Material window before switching to the Filling window
when the hardness properties of such types of tooth-wheels are being determined. In this case,

values of and in the Filling of material properties window will correspond to the allowed
hardness.

Auto-filling the Material Properties

If the given results are satisfactory, check the Automatic Filling option.

The calculated parameters are thus transferred into the corresponding entry fields, which then
contain the properties of the specific material. These entries may be filled in manually if desired.

Removing a Material from the Library

850
nanoCAD Mechanica

There is no way to cancel this option if invoked. To restore a material, it must be re-entered and put
into the library again.

Editing Material Properties

When the Edit function is activated in the Materials library window, the Material properties dialog
(previously described) is displayed.

Use the Commentary field to enter a user's descriptive remarks regarding the particular material.

Analysis Result
After all the required entry fields have been filled in, run the Spur gear transmission analysis
program by clicking the Analysis button.

The Analysis Results dialog showing a fragment of a parameter set

All parameters are shown in this window - both the initial data and the results of the analysis.
Clicking the Back button brings back the One-stage spur gear transmission analysis window, where
the initial data can be changed if desired.

Viewing the Analysis Results

Evaluating a Gear with Parameter Adjustment
851
nanoCAD Mechanica

Creating a Report
Report Templates

Viewing the Analysis Results

The application allows the creation of any set of parameters, naming them and bringing them into
the window and considering only the group of parameters which are required for the particular
analysis. To manipulate the result table, use the toolbar shown above it:

The buttons are given in the following order.

Edit

Create

Delete

Change parameter and carry out analysis from this place

Generate a report

Use this pull-down menu to change a set of parameters that you wish to view when evaluating a
completed analysis. Viewing the base set is time-consuming; besides, it is easier to evaluate the
analysis by observing only a few essential parameters (e.g. including only the regulated geometry
and strength indicators of tooth-wheels).

To create a custom set, bring up the corresponding dialog by clicking the Create button.

852
nanoCAD Mechanica

The dialog window used to copy a parameter from one set to another is self-explanatory (see the
picture). Having selected a parameter in the left pane, click the Add button. Double-clicking a
parameter also copies it to the right-side pane.

Once a parameter set has been assigned, enter a name for it into the field in the upper right corner
of the dialog. In the example shown below, the new custom parameter set is named Kinematical
Properties. Click OK to complete the command. The name of the new set will show in the pull-down
menu.

This method can be used to create any number of sets used to evaluate the results. The CTRL and
SHIFT keys can be used to select multiple parameters.

The parameters in the base set (All parameters) are listed in the order of calculation.

Evaluating a Gear with Parameter Adjustment

Some of the parameter symbol fields are greyed out. Parameters shown in this way can be
additionally adjusted.

The need for such an adjustment might arise if the user finds that one or many parameters of the
designated gear should be changed.

853
nanoCAD Mechanica

For example, the axis distance in the analysis is determined by being given a condition to provide
certain contact strength of the teeth. By default, the distance is rounded off to a value divisible by 5
mm.

The user can change the distance to any other value (normally to a standard one) and then
recalculate, taking this change into account. If a letter symbol denoting a parameter is greyed out,
the user can change its value, and the button named Change parameter and carry out analysis from
this place will be available.

All parameters in the common list below the changed parameter will be automatically re-calculated.

Select a parameter you wish to change, then click the Change parameter and carry out analysis
from this place button; or double left-click the parameter name. The Change of parameter dialog will
appear, contextually consistent with the chosen parameter.

The Change of parameterdialog

In the field where there is a value for the parameter which should be changed, the new value is
entered - and the calculation repeats from the position in which this parameter appears for the first
time.

Bear in mind that if a parameter you wish to change is linked to another one, which appears earlier
in the table of results, that earlier parameter must be changed first. For example, attempting to
change the number of teeth on a gear or pinion, the following message shows:

The alarm warning that calculation conditions have been distorted by changing a value

To perform the desired adjustments, the summary number of transmission teeth in the desired
direction has to be set previously, since it is calculated earlier and distributed between the gear and
the pinion according to the given transmission ratio. There are, however, certain limitations
regarding this. To prevent awkward analysis solutions, a limit is imposed on the value that the total
number of teeth can be changed to. Attempting to rapidly change this number will result in a pop-up
warning:

854
nanoCAD Mechanica

Radical change of the number of teeth alarm

The adjustment of the summary number of teeth may be repeated if required, until the desired
value has been obtained.

Creating a Report
The report of calculation results is based on a template file that is located in C:\Program
Files\CSoft\(Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName) 3.0\Reports Templates.

The output file format is RTF.

Report Templates
“Bevel gear with circular teeth calculation.rtf"

“Bevel gear with circular teeth geometry calculation.rtf"

“Bevel gear with straight teeth calculation.rtf"

“Bevel gear with straight teeth geometry calculation.rtf"

“Spur gear calculation.rtf"

“Stress analysis for spur gear.rtf"

The calculation results are exported as a Word-compatible file type. To export the file, start the
Create report command by clicking the corresponding icon in the Analysis results dialog. The Report
Creation dialog will appear. Choose the desired template file in the upper entry field and define the
output file in the lower one. Click Create to complete.

Dialog for choosing the template file

Creating Custom Reports

The user can adjust the layout of the output document by creating a custom template.

The parameter descriptions may be acquired from the RTF template files. The parameter name is
given in square brackets and is entered with a prefix [mcs ...parameter...]. Parameters are
displayed in blue for easier viewing.

Fragments of a template file are shown below, along with the paths of corresponding output files
containing calculation results:

Table 1.1. Initial data

Parameter Pinion Gear

855
nanoCAD Mechanica

Coefficients of initial operating contour displacement by gear [mcs_x1_i] [mcs_x2_i]

cutting

[mcs_c1_i] [mcs_c2_i]
Number of gearings per one revolution of gear

Transitional surface is polished [mcs_Polished1_i] [mcs_Polished2_i]

Conditions of transitional surface teeth-grinding [mcs_Clean1_i] [mcs_Clean2_i]

Heat treatment with tooth base inclusion [mcs_Sweep1_i] [mcs_Sweep2_i]

Spur Gear Calculation.rtf: a section of the template file

Table 1.1. Initial data

Parameter Pinion Gear

Coefficients of initial operating contour displacement by gear 0 0

cutting

1 1
Number of gearings per one revolution of gear

Transitional surface is polished No No

Conditions of transitional surface teeth-grinding Without Without

polishing polishing

Heat treatment with tooth base inclusion No No

A section of the output file

Testing the Strength of a Spur Gear

The other calculation type is used not to create, but only to test the strength of a gear whose
geometry parameters have already been defined.

856
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Validation calculation uses its own report format and initial data input. All other functions
regarding this calculation are used as described in the previous chapter.

Clicking the icon in this window switches to the Analysis Wizard. If an analysis was performed
earlier, use the pull-down menu to use its results.

857
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the entered distance between axes does not match the entered parameters of calculation, at its
change the following message will be shown:

In which the following options will be offered:

Continue analysis by determined distance between axes with angle of teeth inclination
correction
Continue analysis with determined distance between axes correction
Continue analysis with entered data (result of analysis can be incorrect)

Choosing a Reducer Scheme

Determining the Number of Stages

Transmission Ratio Distribution

Setting the Displacement Coefficients

Choosing a Reducer Scheme

Two-stage and three-stage reducers can be designed by an unfolded or coaxial scheme. A simple
unfolded scheme contains only one gear pair. The shortcoming of these schemes is unequal
distribution of load between different pinions. The shaft deformation creates a load concentrated
along the tooth length, so that shafts with higher rigidity must be used in this case. This
shortcoming is overcome by using separate stages. It is recommended to use a high-speed stage in
two-stage reducers, and an auxiliary stage in three-stage reducers. A large width of the low-speed
stage does not cause a large concentration of load along the tooth length, since the tooth-wheels
are positioned symmetrically with respect to the support.

Determining the Number of Stages

The general transmission ratio of the reducer is determined by correlation of input and output shaft

rotation frequencies. The input shaft frequency is determined from the selected engine type;

the output shaft frequency is determined by the parameters of the technological process that
the designed mechanism is about to serve.

858
nanoCAD Mechanica

There are no strict rules for the transmission ratio of these particular reducers. However, there are
numerous useful suggestions based on the continuing practice of gearing transmission design. We
shall further use the universally adopted terms, i.e. pinion for the smaller tooth-wheel, and gear for
the larger one.

One-stage reducers are used for transmission ratios less than or equal to 8 (max 12.5). However,
maximum values of transmission ratios are not recommended for numerous reasons, primarily the
fact that the reducer dimensions would have to be much larger.

Two-stage reducers are used for transmission ratios from 8 to 40 (max 63).

Three-stage reducers are used for ratios that fall within the range between 37 (or 25, according to
some sources) and 250 (max 315).

Transmission Ratio Distribution

There are no seriously recommended values for distributing the reducer transmission ratio between
the stages, since there are no general optimization criteria for reducer constructions.

The transmission ratios for the primary (high-speed) reducer stage can be arbitrarily determined by
the following relations:

two-stage reducer with unfolded scheme

two-stage reducer with unfolded scheme

three-stage reducer with unfolded scheme

- high-speed stage transmission ratio;

- intermediate stage transmission ratio;

- low-speed stage transmission ratio;

- transmission ratio of the reducer.

It is not recommended to adjust the transmission ratio by more than 6.3. If this is a possibility, the
excess transmission should be passed on to the succeeding stages.

Setting the Displacement Coefficients

859
nanoCAD Mechanica

The data table located on the next page can be used when determining the displacement coefficients
for the production contour of straight-teeth gears, cut with a rack type tool (Reshetoff D.N. Machine
parts M.: Mashinostroyeniye, 1989. pg. 496).

Listed in the table are the maximumrecommended displacement coefficients, x1 and x2, used to
fulfil the required the operational capability criteria for the designed gear - contact strength, bend
strength or resistance to jamming and wearing off.

860
nanoCAD Mechanica

,,
,,
,,
12

0-"' 0,61 0,3<

•• o,., 0,25
"
0,64
IS

,, ,, ,,
....
••
0;$ 0,$

' '
0,>9 0,7 o:>
X> ,,
22

"'
,,
28

,,
" - "
-
34

-
c

e
r

0,48"
2
0,46 0 o.s
' -
0,4S 0.35
• • ""
0,, 0,88 0,38 0,7S 0,6 o.s 0,66 0,66 - - - c
22 0 4
0,6;2 0.28 0,73 o,» o• 0,3 0»5 0,;9 - - •
M3 0,38
I
0,5.5 O,S< 0,.& 0,6 01<7
• 0,01 - JN
0 3

,. 0-"' o... 0,26 0,4 I!) 0,$9 .... 0,06 0,0 - - c

..,. •
t "'
0 2
0.10 0,28 0,1.$ 0.35 o,s 0,3 1,0< 0,40 0,4 - e
••
.
2

_,.
3 2
.... ,,. •
0$1 0,48 0,@ 0,03 0,6 0,1 0,71 0,81 O,llS 0,0 - - ""
•••
1,03 .c
0;1-3 ',42 0 O,Ol 1.0 1,01 1,0

J4 •• • I
e
0,76 0,>2 0,03 0,34 o• 0
3,
'·"' 0 ,38 1,30 0,3 1;30 0,3

•
OPJ 0,53 0,$3
3
0,72, 0,6 0,8 0,?.4 ' ... 0.$8 t!) I/1J 1,0
•
JN

' 2 0 0

., o.» 1,30 0,20 1,53 0;2 1,4 0,40

••
1,48 0}2 2,3 0.. 13

•
, c

0.15 .... 0,92 0· 1.0 0,3 1.18 0,;9 1 1,3 1,31 0;2
0
e

0,63 0, 1 0,86
2•
o... 0,6 0,9 0,18
I
1,03 0,08 1,1 1,00 1,1
' JN

.... 8 4
... 2
• c
so
0,» 0,28 1,66 0,3
2
•
0,<3
'·"' 0,64 1,6 0,$0
0 '·'
•
0,58 .a.t.S 0,!¥1 0.31 1!> 0,3 1;22 0,42 1;22 0,2 1.2S 0;2
•
•
0,63 0,77 .... · 0,7 1,1 0.76
0 I
1,t7 0,91
5
1,2 1!1J 1,3

•
0

1
JN

.. 0""

0,53
1,89

.....
0.26-

0,00 0,0<
1fS7 0,4 1,8 0,53
1
1,1 0,4
• 1,t7 .,.
1.80 0,10 1,8 0,89 1,7
4
1.19 0,2 1,23 0;1
•
c

•
0 0 0 5

..
0,84 1,00 0,01 1,22 0,7 1,3 0,76
I
'
1,4A 0,08

.
1.& llPJ

• '·'
s
JN

0-"'
-....
0,73

0,30
.O,tS

2,14
1,1 o.•

0,4 2,0 0,61

1 ,15
0.28

..
1,16

0,7S
0,1

2.0
1,19 0.0

... •••
•
t

0,$4
8
• 8
0
3
2 ,'
0,6S 1,18 O,fil t ... 0,7
••I• 0,76 1J> 0,<1 1,8 0"'
••• ""
0,30 2,90 0,38
1
2,Y.< 0 2,3 o,es 2,19 0,00 2.2 .... I
2,2 c
100 2 1
• 2
e
0,53
"'·"' 0.71 4.22 I!) 0,2 1 ,12 0;22

•
1.1 0!> 1,\ 5 0,0

0.6S 1,42 0,66 I} 0,7

0

••• .... .... ....

8
2.1
I
.,, 2.1 JN
I 2
' c
0.15 2,43 0,03 2,4
""' 2,4

o p ,,.
12$ 1 6
- 1,11 0,21 1,12 OJ)
•
0,76 2);8 '
o .. 2,< 0,92 2,4
• JN

.. ,.,.<:: -¢0-l1Utt ntt b:8-\otJIW h.JW- ...,lJtlo)t(t

0
..... 0
..
861
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting the Insertion Point of a Gear

After a template has been selected, (Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName) suggests that you
pick an insertion point and define the orientation of the chosen gear type.
nanoCAD Mechanica

If a shaft segment meant to hold a gear is already present in the drawing, the insertion point is set
automatically, depending on the shaft segment included in the cursor aperture.

Methods Used to Create a Gear

The steps required to design a gear can be taken in any order. It does not matter whether the
analysis comes before or after drawing. Gearings created without an analysis can always be
adjusted according to calculation results. All geometry is automatically updated. An approach to
designing a gear in (Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName):

1. Draw a tooth-wheel with no analysis, having entered its parameters in the dialog.
2. Calculate the gearing and draw the transmission according to the calculation results.
3. Perform the gearing stage analysis and apply the result to the previously drawn gearing.
4. Use a template file containing the initial data regarding the reducer stage analysis and the
drawn reducer scheme. Having adjusted the initial data, update the geometry of the gearing
stage template.

Drawing a Gear (Pinion) without an Analysis

Select a gear template in the library.

862
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set the insertion point and the drawing orientation.

It is possible to enter the required calculation parameters in the dialog. No calculation is suggested
by default.

System dependency input for a gear transmission pair with a calculated distance.

Drawing the Transmission after Completing the Analysis

1. Choose a gear template in the library.
2. Set the insertion point and the orientation.
3. Since the analysis has already been run, choose the desired one in the pull-down menu.

863
nanoCAD Mechanica

4. Select the transmission element (pinion or gear) to draw according to calculation results and
click OK.

5. After an element is drawn, the command remains active for further operation. To finish, press
ESC.

To join the gear and the pinion at a calculated distance, use the Gearing and Remove
gearing icons.

Calculating the Strength of a Bevel Gear

The bevel gear analysis dialog can be invoked from the Analysis Wizardwindow, or from the spur
pinion insertion dialog.

After selecting a gear type and a kinematical scheme, enter the initial data required for the
calculation.

Analysing Geometry Parameters and Transmission Elements of a Gearing

864
nanoCAD Mechanica

The calculation of geometry parameters and transmission elements of a gearing can be performed
based on data input by the user (strength check of a given gearing).

Or based on an existing strength analysis:

865
nanoCAD Mechanica

Springs Calculation
The methodical calculation basis of springs was made with the Russian Standards: GOST 13764-86,
GOST 13765-86 and GOST 2.401-86. The calculation and selection of the standard compression and
tension springs from a round wire is supported.

To set the calculation, parameters use five schemes:

on loads of previously (F1) and working (F2) deformation and working travel (h) of spring;
on loads of working deformation (F2) and working deflection (S2);
on loads of previously (F1) and working (F2) deformation and corresponding spring lengths
(L1 and L2);
on load of working deformation (F2) and spring length (L2);
on any combination of spring parameters.

The general calculation order

At a spring selection, the designer can set any design or strength constraints - for this remove
blocking (lock) the exact spring characteristic and enter the user value. In this case, calculation is
carried out with one or several fixed parameters. If the user parameter does not match standard
values, to the left of a field there will be a prompting message containing the nearest standard
values.

To set the material performance, use the standard materials reference guide or the information
about strength and fatigue performance which is entered manually. The Density parameter is used
to fill the Mass of the drawing column. The Shear module and the Stress limitparameters are used
to make the strength analysis of the spring.

As a result of this work, the designer achieves a model of a standard spring and its detailed
drawing.

To calculate and select a spring it is necessary:

1. Choose the class and range of a spring. Click on the “light” symbol to the right of the class and
range fields to receive help with selecting values.
2. Set the material characteristics.
3. Choose the input scheme if necessary.
4. Set the design factors for a spring:

866
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parameters which it is necessary to set, according to

the chosen input scheme, are unblocked and displayed
with a black font; other parameters are blocked and
their values shown with a muted colour. Left click on
the field of an active parameter activates the input
window of its value.
If necessary, it is possible to unblock any parameter
and input its new value or, conversely, to block it. The
values of the blocked parameters are recalculated
automatically. The values of the unblocked (user)
parameters change only when a variant of a spring is
chosen from the list.
Also, it is necessary to set the additional design
factors describing the model. For a compression
spring, the quantity of the base and compressed coils,
and for both types of springs - a wire spin.

5. In the bottom left part of the window is displayed the list of suitable springs from the result of
the calculation. The list can be sorted in decreasing or increasing order of the elements in any
columns. The first column sorts the lines by way of the calculation results of the characteristics
of a spring. Right click on the list heading to open the context menu, allowing the changing of
a set of parameters displayed in the list (installation of tags) and their order (dragging).

867
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. When a spring is chosen from the list, the parameters values in the right part of dialog are
updated according to the chosen variant.
7. Now it is possible to use a spring, having chosen one of following variants:
The OK button - automatically forms the spring model for assembly.

The Drawing button - automatically forms the detailed drawing of a spring in (Undefined variable:
Primary.ProductName). The button is accessible only when editing the model of the spring already
inserted into the drawing. The Drawing dialog will open. In it you can define the class of precision of
loads (deflection), a class of geometrical precision, the dimensions set displayed on the drawing, the
text of technical conditions, and presence of a format. All this group of settings represents the
drawing profile. The dialog allows creating, changing and deleting profiles. In technical conditions it is
possible to use expressions which will be calculated on the basis of the parameters of the chosen
spring. To see the result of calculations, it is necessary to clear the focus of input of technical
conditions (for example, click on the dimensions list). Click the Generate dimensions icon to
display the power characteristic with dimensions on the drawing.

Expression - the mathematical expression included in square brackets. It can contain keywords
which at calculation are replaced with the values of corresponding spring parameters. Examples of
admissible expressions: [10*D1], [12], [3*t + 2.5*sin (alpha)].

868
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Report button - automatically creates the report containing the design factors of a spring.
You will be offered the choice of a template for the report and to set a file name in which the
report will be kept. The template of the report is constructed by the same rules as in case of
the spur gears calculations. The names of variables - the same keywords for technical
requirements

The Detailed Drawing of Spring Creation

The Drawing button - automatically forms the detailed drawing of a spring in (Undefined variable:
Primary.ProductName). The button is only available when editing the model of the spring already
inserted in the drawing. The button is only accessible when editing the model already inserted into
the drawing. The Drawingdialog will open. In it you can define the class of precision of loads
(deflection), a class of geometrical precision, the set of dimensions displayed on the drawing, the
text of technical conditions, and presence of a format. All this group of settings represents the
drawing profile. The dialog allows creating, changing and deleting profiles. In technical conditions it
is possible to use expressions which will be calculated on the basis of the parameters of the chosen
spring. To see the result of calculations, it is necessary to clear the focus of input of technical
conditions (for example, click on the dimensions list). Click the Generate dimensions icon to
display the power characteristic with dimensions on the drawing.

Expression - the mathematical expression included in square brackets. It can contain keywords
which at calculation are replaced with the values of corresponding spring parameters. Examples of
admissible expressions: [10*D1], [12], [3*t + 2.5*sin (alpha)].

869
nanoCAD Mechanica

Profile - drop-down list, defining the basic settings of the created drawing.

The buttons on the toolbar operate the settings profiles:

Create copy of current profile - In the profiles list a new profile with the settings of the
current profile will be added.

Delete current profile - The current profile will be deleted from the profiles list.

The buttons on the toolbar operate the current profile:

Generate format - Display or hide the format on the created drawing.

Generate dimensions - Display or hide the spring dimensions and efforts scheme on the
created drawing. The displayed dimensions on the drawing are defined by the list at the left.

Generate Technical Conditions - Display or hide the Technical Conditions on the created
drawing.

The text of Technical Conditions can be edited, adding in the variables values of the calculated
scheme and geometrical dimensions of a spring.

870
nanoCAD Mechanica

The Geometric Section Characteristics Calculation

Command Call

From the toolbar -click the Calculate section characteristics icon.

From the Command Line (Command: mcGcs).

The command is used to calculate the geometric characteristics of composite section.

1. Start the Calculate section characteristics command.

2. Consistently select section areas on the drawing in one of the following ways:
Click inside the closed area. The external contour of the closed area is defined
automatically and the area is added to the set.
Click on a closed polyline or circle. The area limited by the polyline or the circle is added.
Selecting an area again deletes it from the set for section calculation.

871
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. To finish selection,click right button or press Enter.

4. Specify table position on the drawing.

After the calculation has been performed in the drawing, the (Undefined variable:
Primary.ProductName) object is added. It contains the section contour and the conventional design of
the centroidal principal axes. The axes lengths are proportional to the values of the corresponding
axial moment of inertia.

872
nanoCAD Mechanica

Static beam calculation

Command Call

From the toolbar -click the Static beam calculation icon.

From the Command Line (Command: mcStdSelected).

The command is used for calculating the strength of a straight beam of uniform section.

Start the command to open the Beam calculation window.

1. In the left part of the dialog select a beam section.

2. In the right part of the dialog set the section size and beam length L. For a visual choice of
beam length, click the Dynamic input icon in the bottom part of the dialog.
3. Input the Physical characteristics of the material and the Cut rotation.
4. Enter the physical characteristics of the material and the Corner of turn of the section.
5. Set the beam loads and moments.

Set section
There are three ways to set section:

873
nanoCAD Mechanica

Standard geometrical section (for example, a triangle).

Rolled metal products from the (Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName)database

(for example, a double tee GOST 8239-89). To use a database element in beam
calculation, it is necessary to set the Quality 725 for it.

User-defined section.

The section selection is carried out in one of the following ways:

Click inside the closed area. The external contour of the closed area is defined
automatically and the area is added to the set.
Click on the closed polyline or circle. The area limited by the polyline or circle
is added.
Selecting an area again deletes it from the set for section calculation.

After selecting a section on the drawing, the user section will appear in the Beam
calculation dialog :

Change the name of the user section, having selected it in the list and having
pressed the left-button on the name.

To delete the user-section from the list, press the Delete button.

For standard section from the base choose the type size from the drop down list.

874
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set loads
1. Double click to select the necessary type of the loads or support in the dialog.

2. Specify the insertion point of the load or support on the beam. To specify the insertion point,
move the cursor to the beam to establish dependence.

3. Set the load or support parameters in the dialog.

Support

Load setting the distance between the end of a beam segment and the support point (mm)

Concentrated load

875
nanoCAD Mechanica

Position - distance from the start point of a beam up to an insertion point of loading, mm.

Value - value of entry loading in the chosen direction, H.

Point - distance from an insertion point of loading up to a load application point in the chosen
direction, mm.

The scheme in the left part of the dialog window explains the function of the entered parameters.

Tabs in the top part of a window are used to choose the coordinate system in which values are set:

Rectangular

Spherical

Cylindrical

DistributedLoad

Position - distance from the start point of a beam up to an insertion point of loading, mm.

Length - length of the part on which the spread load is enclosed, mm.

In the input fields set the value of entry loading in the chosen direction, H.

The diagram in the left part of the dialog window explains the function of the entered parameters.

Tabs in the top part of the window are used to choose the coordinate system in which the values are
set:

Rectangular

Spherical

Cylindrical

Moment

876
nanoCAD Mechanica

The diagram in the left part of the dialog window explains the function of the entered parameters.

X, Y, Z - components of the moment, N*m.

С - distance from the start point of the beam up to the insertion point of the moment, mm.

Calculation

To execute the calculation click the Calculate beam icon in the bottom part of the dialog.

The table of calculation results contains the calculated maximum values of deflections and loadings,
and also the distance from the start point of the beam up to the point in which the maximum of
each parameter is reached.

To insert the diagrams and forces into the drawing, choose the necessary type of the diagram for
each characteristic:

877
nanoCAD Mechanica

Apply: add diagrams into the drawing.

Save report: save the report in the external file.

Calculate value: determine the value for all parameters at the specific point.

Export diagrams: place the diagrams into the (Undefined variable: Primary.ProductName) table.
Specify the insertion point of the table on the drawing.

Specification

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Part list.

From the command line (Command: mcSpecification).

Set the type of specification

Transferring records between partitions
Sort products
Setting the numbering

Refresh - refreshes numerals affixed, if they were not put down or changed the rules prostanovki
item numbers.

Numbering - replaces characters "x" item numbers.

Export the drawing - creates the drawing table nanoCAD Mechanics 6 to output specifications for
printing means nanoCAD.

878
nanoCAD Mechanica

Editing operation positions Specifications:

Cutting position of editor.

Copying position in the buffer.

Paste position.

Add record.

Deletes the current record.

Move up and move down - changes the position of the selected row specification.

Sort - sort position alphabetically within sections.

Add balloon - balloon to create the BOM item, if has not been set previously.

Properties -Setting Specifications.

Find the drawing - moves the current view and highlights the position of the drawing.

In the upper left corner of the specification contains the fields relating to the weight of the product.

Text field contains the calculated value of the product weight.

When you turn jackdaws Update estimated value product weight is automatically saved to the
"weight" of the title block of the drawing.

Gray shaded box in the column specification section shows that this section does not contain any
information.

Left mouse click on the symbol "Plus" can open (close) the contents of this specification section.

Setting Specifications

Style setting specifications

To edit a template specification in the drop-down menu window Editor specifications tap Tools. In
the drop-down list, select Change type, in the dialog box, select the desired template specification.

879
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the same dialog options are available edit and delete the selected template - through the
configuration dialog specification.

Specifications Configuration Dialog

Settings dialog specification includes the following tabs:

Document tab
Tab document defines the type of document and marking performances.

The following types of specifications:

Simple
Group Type A
Group B Type

When choosing a Type A or Type B list becomes active performances. List of performances can be
edited (by clicking "Add" or "Delete")

880
nanoCAD Mechanica

Double-clicking on performance causes him to edit. In the editing dialog can associate the letter
execution.

Tab Sections
Categories tab allows you to customize the specifications section.

The partition table determines which sections and in what sequence will be present in the
specification, and for which one has a notation of the specification callouts. Double-click on the field
"Has the callout" enables or disables the callout for the corresponding section.

Controlling the placement of sections in the specification is performed using the "Up" and "Down."

881
nanoCAD Mechanica

The "Name Change" Allows you to change the name of the selected partition.

"Add" button brings up a dialog to add a topic specification. Sections are added one by one. You can
add a section with the standard name (if not already present in the specification) or with an
arbitrary name. Galka "Has callout" duplicates the corresponding value in the partition table.

Tab Title
Title tab controls the composition and order of the fields used in the construction specifications.

Table fields specification includes the field name, type, and switches the display position in the editor
and the editor specifications. Use the "Name Change", "Add", "Remove" edited list of fields.

882
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button "Add field" brings up a dialog where you can add fields from a predefined list, or an arbitrary
field, specifying the type and display in the editor position and specification.

Numbering tab
On this tab, adjusted the numbering of positions in the specification.

Export tab
On the Export grouped items export settings in the drawing and specifications in Excel.
883
nanoCAD Mechanica

General settings:

See sections - controls the display section headings in the exported specification.

Skip the line after section - includes extra blank line in the specification table between sections.

Must positions without partitions - if enabled, the position is not related to any section will be
included in the export specification.

Grouped by GOST - one standard parts will be grouped general heading (for example, "nut OST 26-
2041-96").

Skip the line after group - add a blank line after grouped according to GOST positions.

The number of skipped lines between sections - number of blank lines between sections of the
specification.

Migrate to the next line - includes transfer to the next line with a long name products. If this option
is disabled, the item name will be entered into a table cell.

Skip first and last lines - pass includes the first and last row of the table in the template
specification.

Output at the line - each position specifications will be displayed with a space in one line.

Skip the line at break numbering - if the positions do not follow the order, after nonconsecutive lines
added a line under a missing item. If the drop-down list shows a miss "single line" - that regardless
of the number of missing items will be added only one empty line. If the drop-down list select a miss
"depending on the gap," the number of rows to skip will depend on the size of the gap. (For
example, if after 6 position followed by the position 9, then 2 lines will be skipped).

Followed by the output settings of the field "Format" field and "Zone" - show them in the
"Comments", "Format" and "Zone" respectively, or do not show at all.

884
nanoCAD Mechanica

Option Rounding weight controls rounding up masses of parts made to specification. If nobhodimosti
rounding on weight, you should select the required word length.

Drawing tab

Update specification sheets in the drawing - Includes automatic update of tables exported to the
drawing specifications. The update is performed on the export specification drawing. Accommodation
in this specification is not requested again.

Specify the insertion point selection rectangle - when this option is enabled the position of each
sheet exported to the drawing specifications not given an indication of the insertion point, but an
indication of the rectangular boundary of the placing on the drawing sheet.

Export Settings on the drawing table designation include serving template specification for the first
and subsequent sheets.

When you click on the table selection dialog opens.

Relocating the entry between partitions

To transfer the recording details in another section hold down the left mouse on the portable
recording and release it above the title of the desired topic.

885
nanoCAD Mechanica

Transferring records to section Assembly Units

Sort products

To sort items alphabetically specifications press the button .

The same operation is performed within the section when selecting the context menu
optsiiSortirovat.

To replace all rooms unnumbered positions is a button , when you run this command, the
characters "x" in the item number are replaced by numbers, positions are renumbered in the order
they appear in the specification.

To change the number of items in the drawing you must click Update .

Setting the numbering

To change the order of the number of items, click Properties Editor dialog box specification.

886
nanoCAD Mechanica

Numbering Setup can be made for each section individually.

Numbered starting from the position - sets, the page number will start numbering of the entire
specification.

To adjust the specification section is necessary that these sections were defined on the Partition tab.

To set the parameters of each section, you need to select it in the list.

The number of contiguous positions - by continuously following numbers in the section.

Increase position - Specifies increment numerals within a section.

Increase the position after partition on - Specifies increment numerals after the selected section.

Adding assortment (material)

To create the material in the BOM editor uses the same mechanism as when filling the field Material
titleblock drawing.

When you press the Add Material dialog box appears material.

Clicking on the icon from the database a dialog box material database or database TechnologiCS.
Selected assortment appears in the editor window specifications as a simple string delimited prefix,
the numerator and denominator:

Fractional representation of entries is restored when you export the drawing specifications.

Pressing the search by keyword run a full-text search database materials.

887
nanoCAD Mechanica

Recognition specifications
Command line: MCRECSPEC.

Master recognition specification enables automatic search and replace specifications created from
individual primitives nanoCAD, transforming them into an object "Specification" nanoCAD
Mechanics6. Initial primitives are in the drawing.

Balloons

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon position.

From the command line (Command: mcPosition).

Basic rules
Creating A Balloon for a standard detail
Creating A Balloon
Switching to the parts List editor
Blocked Balloon insertion on the Drawing
Creating performance and item positions, brfore inserting into a drawing
Adding construction Indicator to standard parts

Fundamental rules
When you point to elements of attachment parts for nanoCAD Mechanics 6 recognizes the size of
parts mounting connections without additional indication of its components.

When making a specification of the assembly drawing mechanism can be set dynamically related to
the title block of assembly component external DWG-file.

All changes in the linked drawing die subassembly (rooms, mass node) will automatically be
reflected in the general specification.

Notation of the position of the standard item

When selecting compounds for a fastening nanoCAD Mechanics 6 Auto detects the typical preset
sizes of fastening elements with no additional input. The construction indicators-fit , degree of
hardness and the cover for standard parts should be set individually, depending on the specific
conditions of the assembly operation.

Additional lables(Precision , modelling procedure, thread tolerance , degree ogf hardness etc , must
be entered among the truss symbols. In the ballon editor (or in the part list editor) , double click the
entry field to enter additional information on the modelling procedure of a fastening.

888
nanoCAD Mechanica

The information input on performance of standard details.

Creating a Balloon
Pick the start point and the second point , defining the position of the underscore , the position
leader edit dialog appears.

To group balloons according to the type, left click on the partition field.From the drop-down menu
choose the desired option to which the part is referring.

The mark, Name, note and mass fields can be set by the user.

If the item name is too long, you can enable the forced transfer it to the next line. To do this, add a
control character \n.

At the specification export, the posiotion name will be broken onto two lines.If the format is on the
drawing then for the specification table the drawing zone is added automatically.

If a format is present on the drawing for positions on the specifications, the zone of the drawing is
automatically added.

The shape of the balloon can be set in the symbol tabof the construction site 4 option below.

889
nanoCAD Mechanica

To display the quantity of positions connected with given leader, it is necessary to select the mark.

The total of the details of the given position will be displayed on the drawing next to the position
number within brackets.

Going into the editor specifications

Checkboxes for the number of items, click on the icon Specification. This icon is located in the dialog
editor specifications and in the main toolbar nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

890
nanoCAD Mechanica

Blocked Ballon Insertion on the drawing

If the ballon leader is applied to the item that has already been entered in the part list , it is shown
in the figure with a vertical extension line.

Repeated leader

If such repeated ballons are meant to be any reason , double click the red leader.

In the dialog window, double-click on each of x-symbols in the column used to block ballon
insertions.

Close the window by clicking x symbol in the upper right corner the part numbers will appear in the
drawing.

Creating performance and item positions , before inserting into the drawing

Adding Construction Indicators to Standard Parts

891
nanoCAD Mechanica

The information input on performance of standard details

Creating a dynamic connection with the DWG-file

nanoCAD Mechanics 6 allows you to dynamically associate with the drawing of any product external
drawings of its constituent units.

It is necessary to affix the position of the assembly unit formed in a separate DWG-file. A
prerequisite of creating the dynamic link with an external file is to fill the title block (stamp of the
first sheet) to register a file by using the fill commands stamp nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

In the main toolbar, click the "Position". Specify the start point of the callout, and then - the
shelf position. A dialog box "Editor position".

Click on the icon "Link" in the "Editor position".

In the dialog box "Open" DWG-file, specify subassemblies. The fields Name, Designation, Massa
mainly die to be filled.

Position Align

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon Align leader specifications.

From the command line (Command: mcPosAlign).

Command allows you to align the numbers callouts specification. To do this, you must first select
which items will be subject to equalization, then - in the context menu to specify alignment options.

Following options are available:

Vertically.
Horizontally.
Line - an indication of the line along which the rooms are arranged
892
nanoCAD Mechanica

Rectangle - specifies a rectangular area around which aligned numerals.

Custom specifications
Custom specifications
Create a table for a custom specification

Setting up a custom type specification

Go to the drop-down menu Specification type simple.

Go to the tab "Partitions".

893
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click on the Delete button and select the sections that you do not need or you do not use. In
the sections of specifications provided by the State standard, The current setting, can be
removed but removing them from the system is impossible. At any time, you can edit the style
specification and return these sections.
Click on the Add button. At the top of the dialog box, in the "Standard", posted sections that
are removed from the system. Go to "User Partition" and create your profile.

The result can be seen in the figure below.

894
nanoCAD Mechanica

Go to the tab "Header".

Add a new field type.

895
nanoCAD Mechanica

On the "Numbering" it is possible to set a rule for the numbering and skip to the desired
position.

Tab "Export" link provides specifications and user table that allows you to customize the
specification of any complexity.

896
nanoCAD Mechanica

Tab "drawing." On this tab, click the button . In the dialog box, choose from the database
tables for the first and subsequent sheets.

Create a table for a custom specification

Open Table Editor and create a new table.

To create a custom specifications in the table must specify the header field specification and the field
"title block". Export records to be made in the fields below fields defined as "Title".

To set the BOM header must select a table cell and, from the context menu "Properties". In the
"Value" enter the header field specifications with the prefix $TITLE_.

For example $TITLE_Name.

897
nanoCAD Mechanica

To limit the filling column specification adjustment must be at the bottom line allowed to enter in the
"Value" line $END. Otherwise the filling will be made before the end of the table or subtable.

To transfer data from the main drawing caption (for example, the fields of the title block
specification) must be in the "Value" enter the value with the prefix $SHTAMP_. The cell named
$SHTAMP_Name be entered value of the "name" of the title block of the drawing.

After registration table accordingly to save it in a database under the appropriate name for later use.

Working with standard formats

Main menu: Mechanica - Drawing title/borders - Drawing title/borders.

Toolbar: Drawing title/borders ( " Drawing title/borders").

Command line: MCFORMAT, FORMAT.

Filling in the fields of the title block

Drawing title/borders recognition

Fundamental rules
Each format type is an element of the database nanoCAD Mechanics6, which is located in the folder
"Drawing border templates" library nanoCAD Mechanics6.

898
nanoCAD Mechanica

emplates major labels and additional fields are located in the subfolder formats "Title block
templates". Renaming or deleting existing items in the folder "Drawing border templates" would
make it impossible to insert existing formats.

Insert the format by clicking on the icon Drawing title/borders. This dialog box appears Format:

This window is defined by:

Format.
Sheet.
Autonumerate from.
Use zones from.
Center marks.

After selecting the type of document, as well as the size and orientation of the sheet is inserted into
the selected format.

To edit the frame size, double-click the left mouse button on the contour of the frame.
To edit the text in the title block, double-click on the text of the left mouse button.
To edit entries in the title block, double-click the left mouse button on any line of the title
block.

If you remove the first sheet of the scope of its information from the title block is automatically
transferred to the second sheet.

To save the settings template attached stamps and their parameters in the database, click on the
button , then enter the path stored in the database and the template name.

General Principles
To change the line frames the template files, edit the frames and other fields.

"Document Type" - Select the document type from the list format template in section database.
Depending on the document type is changed appearance and availability of individual dialog items
"Format".

"Format" - the choice of the size of the sheet on the basis of standard size and multiplicity (not
available for the types of documents based on the standard ISO, because the multiplicity inherent in
the choice of format).

"Leaf" - the choice of template title block for the first or subsequent sheets.

"Orientation" - select page orientation (vertical or horizontal).

899
nanoCAD Mechanica

"Autonumerate from" - Automatic Numbering sheets. It lets you specify the number of the first
sheet.

"Use zones from" - avtoprostanovka zones. It lets you specify the number of the first zone.

Edit main stamp

After you select the document type and size under the proposed set the insertion point of the frame.
If you press Enter or right mouse button, the lower left corner of the frame is aligned with the
coordinate 0,0.

Set default stamps - restores the template format those stamps which were overwritten while
maintaining format template database.

Filling in the fields of the title block

To fill the title block fields and additional graph, double-click on any line of the title block.

The main inscription is filled directly into the dialog box, "Stamp"

While filling in the title block previously entered information stored in the section "History" menu. To
open the context menu, place the cursor in an editable field and click the right mouse button.

Recent values can be saved in the section "Recent" menu.

Automatically fill fields of the title block

Save as default

The command saves the current filling of the stamp in the memory. In the following fields will be
filled automatically stamp

Load defaults

The command loads the stored filling.

Clear

The team clears stamp field

Change template

900
nanoCAD Mechanica

The command opens a drop-down menu to change the pattern of the stamp.

Drawing title/borders recognition

Main menu: Mechanica - Recognition - Drawing title/borders recognition.

Toolbar: Drawing title/borders recognition ( "Recognition").

Command line: MCRECF.

Master recognition format enables automatic search and replace formats created from individual
primitives nanoCAD, transforming them into an object of the "Format" nanoCAD Mechanics6. Initial
primitives are in the drawing.

Recognition takes place in two phases: the first searches for the formats in their dimensions, the
second selected title block. Selection is made by comparing the serial patterns of stamps from the
library with the existing geometric objects in the drawing. The remaining seals are installed by
default. After the successful recognition format graphs stamps are automatically filled with values
from the drawing, and the format is placed on the current layer.

Creating custom formats and stamps

Before you create a custom size or stamp is necessary to draw a pattern nanoCAD means in
accordance with the required desired view object being created. When drawing templates should
adhere to the following rules:

The template can contain lines, arcs, and circles, text (single-line and multi-line), the objects
of the library of standard parts nanoCAD Mechanics6, blocks nanoCAD;
the thickness of the lines that are assigned to the template thickness is not equal to zero, and
not "layer" to be adopted in accordance with the thickness of the closest standard value;
the color lines and text included in the template will be saved according to the selected values;
multiline text (mtext) is inscribed in the boundaries of the rectangular area of text is selected
when you create it.

You can use overhead lines and graphic objects, which are not drawn when inserting format or
stamp in the drawing.

To install a drawing object as a service, use the button "Set parameter" toolbar MechWizard,
select the object, and in the dialog "Object properties" check the box "Is a working object":

Use the links in the templates

New border wizard
New title wizard
901
nanoCAD Mechanica

Use the links in the templates

Stamps in the format template

Custom format may contain links to templates stamps available in the library. To add a stamp in the
format used by the relevant rules.

Stamp Position and orientation when you insert a drawing format will be determined by the insertion
point and orientation of text links:

the figure shows the format template added referring to stamp basic inscription. When you insert a
drawing format drawn stamp recorded in the library under the specified name.

the format can be added to any number of references to the stamps from the library.

Using text fields

In the pattern of the stamp may be used special signage text fields.

Text added to the template and starting with the single character "$", is recognized as a reference
pointer on the field (the Count) input. In the input field of the dialog box, you can edit the stamp to
record the text (for example, the name of the developer or check). Name field can contain
characters of the Latin alphabet and the national or spaces. Dimensions of the input fields are
defined primitives surrounding the insertion point, the reference index. If you found another symbol
"$", the text after it considered the description field:

$Field_name [$field definitions].

the contents of the text box will be displayed in the list of object properties.

To limit the size of the input field or eliminate overlapping fields in the dialog, you can use the
service line.

To create a stamp based on an existing base in the sample, the sample to be inserted into the
drawing by setting in the dialog box "Stamp" mode "Display field names" . After insertion into
the drawing die can be used as the layout of the new stamp.

Standard fields stamps have a description in Russian (GOST), English (ISO) or German (DIN)
language, the values of the fields available in the list of object properties.

902
nanoCAD Mechanica

Name Description Contact with the properties Note:

of the document Inventor

$Designation Description +

$DrawingName Name +

$Drawing type Drawing View

$Material Material +

$Litera 1 Letter 1

$Litera 2 Letter 2

$Litera 3 Letter 3

$Mass Weight

$DimScale Scale + Sets the size of

generated within the
format

$Sheet Sheet + Changes in the

automatic numbering

$SheetCount Sheets + Changes in the

automatic numbering

$Add.text Position the

additional inspection

$Author Developed +

$Control checked +

$TechControl Technical control +

$Add.subject Last additionally +

checked

$NormControl the Regulatory +

Control

903
nanoCAD Mechanica

Name Description Contact with the properties Note:

of the document Inventor

$Approve Approved +

$Author (sign) Developer Signature

$Control (sign) the signature

checking

$TechControl Signature of the

(sign) technical control

$Add.subject Signature additional

(sign) inspection

$NormControl Text regulatory

(sign) control

$Approve (sign) the signature

approving

$Author (date) the date of +

$Control (date) Date of Inspection +

$TechControl Date engineering +

(date) controls

$Add.subject Date further +

(date) verification

$NormControl Date of regulatory +

(date) control

$Approve (date) Approval Date +

$Original # Part Number script

$Sign & date 1 Signed and dated 1

$Instead # Instead, inventory

number

$Duplicate # Inventory number

904
nanoCAD Mechanica

Name Description Contact with the properties Note:

of the document Inventor
duplicate

$Sign $date 2 Signed and dated 2

$Reference # the reference +

number

$First use the primary use +

$Format Format +

$Enterprise Enterprise +

In the pattern of the stamp can be used table nanoCAD Mechanics6. Included in the stamp table
when you insert a drawing can be edited as regular tables nanoCAD Mechanics6 (except that the die
table can not be modified in the editing mode screen).

Additional features

Converting from previous versions - In file %ProgramData%\Nanosoft\nanoCAD

Mechanics6\DataRO\ru-RU\settings.xml defined fields for name mapping formats of old and new
versions. If an entity applies the custom stamps of previous versions, the names of the fields, you
can add them into the appropriate section of this file.

Integration with other objects nanoCAD Mechanics6

Tables - Format allows you to use tables as stamps. This preserves virtually all the functionality
built-in table.

Universal marker - The values of any fields format can be used in a universal marker.

Dimensions - When you create within the format size, the size takes out set in the title block of the
format.

Legend roughness - The format may be associated with the designation of a roughness surfaces
unspecified. Icon roughness is automatically transferred to the upper right corner of the format.

Property document - The value of the standard field format is synchronized with the attributes of
the file in which it was created.

Technical conditions - Format calculates the coordinates of the columns to accommodate the
technical requirements.

Attribute documents TechnologiCS - Exchange values between the fields and the format of the
document attributes. You can set the matching fields automatically (by the same name), and then
specify manually. Establishing appropriate stored for later use.

Zone format - The format can be calculated, is there any point in it. If so, you can receive the
designation area containing the point.

New border wizard

905
nanoCAD Mechanica

Main menu: Mechanica - Drawing Title/Borders - New border wizard.

Toolbar: New border wizard ( "Drawing Title/Borders").

Command line: MCFORMATWIZ.

To change the existing format, select it from the drop-down list of templates. The field, located in
the center of the panel will be a general view of the selected format.

To add a new format, select the drop down list "Template name" paragraph (new).

Click the left mouse button on the center field, select the drawing created by pre-layout format
template, and confirm the selection click OK.

In the dialog box "Format creation" will be recognized image format.

If you create a new format after closing the dialog box by pressing OK, a dialog "Create element",
which follows the format and select the name of the folder in the library of standard parts, which will
save the created format:

By default the path "DB \ Drawing borders template". If you want to keep the format in another

folder, press and select the folder that appears in your browser.

Creating a template format is similar to creating templates stamps. Embedded tables are not
supported. The texts, starting with the single "#" character, determine the type and position of the
stamp format. When you insert the size of the database will be loaded stamped with the name
specified in the text (the symbol '#' is ignored and the text "main message" will be replaced with the
box on a stamp with the name of "Title Block"), if it is in base. If the name starts with � "0x� " and
contains only hexadecimal digits, it is interpreted as UID template stamp in the database.
Coordinates, direction and alignment of the text will be applied to the stamp.

906
nanoCAD Mechanica

See stamp UID by inserting the drawing title block of the database manager
Note: nanoCAD Mechanics6.At the command prompt displays the hexadecimal object
UID

Predefined templates are stored in the formats "DB \ Drawing borders template". It is recommended
that the new template is stored in the same folder, but when loading the template can be seen the
whole base.

Frame custom format has a fixed size - the one set in the template. There is a special recognition
mode that allows the use of standard scalable framework with their stamps. To enable this mode,
select from the list in the dialog master the standard by which the frame will be built. In this mode,
all of the graphics in the template are ignored, except for text and bounding box. The frame can be
of any size - in the final format it replaced with standard frame. All texts are considered names
stamps. There are two variants of binding stamps:

If the text begins with the "#" symbol, it is stored offset from the insertion point to the
nearest corner of the bounding box.
If the symbol "#" no stored offset from the text insertion point to the bottom left corner of the
bounding box.

Standard sizes have patterns in the database - their patterns are embedded in
Note:
the program code.

New title wizard

Main menu: Mechanica - Drawing Title/Borders- New title wizard.

Toolbar: New title wizard ( "Drawing Title/Borders").

Command line: MCSTAMPWIZ.

To change an existing stamp, select it from the drop-down list of templates.

To add a new format, select the drop down list "Template name (new)".

A template stamp can have up to four different graphical representations: simple and full
(advanced) type, including the form of the first sheet and the view for subsequent sheets.

907
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select one of the tabs: "Simple view" or "Extended view". Click the left mouse button on one of the
fields marked with a stamp type, and select the drawing template you created earlier mock punch.
Confirm the selection click OK.

In the dialog box "Create stamp" will be recognized image of the stamp.

If you create a new stamp, after closing the dialog box by pressing OK, a dialog "Create element",
where you must enter the name of the stamp, and choose a library of standard parts folder in which
to save the template created by the stamp:

New templates stamps recommend that you save to the folder "DB \ Drawing borders template \
Title block templates".

If the layout for the die table to use, it will retain its editing capabilities even being introduced to the
format. For these tables are only supported editing in place.

The pattern die may be up to four types:

the main type of the first sheet,

he main type of follow-up sheets,
an expanded view of the first sheet,
an expanded view of the next sheet.

The texts, starting with the single character "$" are recognized as the names of the fields. The
editing dialog stamp they will be displayed in the form input fields. Name field can contain spaces and
extended characters. Dimensions of the field defined primitives surrounding the point of its insertion.
If you found another symbol "$", the text after it considered the description field. This text will be
displayed in the list of properties:

$<name_field>[$<description_field>]

To limit the size of the field or eliminate overlapping fields in the dialog, you can use the service line.
This is a primitive with zero thickness or line marked as the utility from mcWizParam. Set the
parameter.

If you set daw "Work object", then stamped on tobrazhatsya these primitives will not.

To create a stamp based on an existing base in the sample, the sample to be inserted into the
drawing, and in his dialogue press "Show Field Names". View selected stamp button "View".

After that, the object can be divided (explode), edited and used as the layout.

The dialogue is a choice of the standard, which is taken from a stamp. This standard is used for the
selection of the frame formats in recognition of the primitives.

Tables

908
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Click the button Tables toolbar MechaniCS tables.

909
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the command line command: sptable

Menu: Construction > Table and title blocks>> tables

Causes dialog box to insert a new table.

To create a custom table, select Custom. In input fields specify the dimensions of the created
table, or on the layout, drag the mouse to the right as many rows and cells as required. When
subsequent editing the number of rows, columns, cell sizes can be changed.
To insert a standard table, select load from database. You can insert a standard table of the
base elements Building site . In the dialog box, select the table you want. Database elements
Building site is available for all major types of standard tables.
To insert a table from a file, select Load from file.

Click Browse and select the file table.

Supported formats:

tbl - tables files

dat - data file or a text file
mdb - database Microsoft Access
xls - Spreadsheet Microsoft Office Excel
xlsx - spreadsheet Microsoft Office Excel 2007
csv - table cell separated by commas
txt - standard text file
909
nanoCAD Mechanica

xml - XML document

odf - OpenDocument Format.

When loading a table of xlsx, xls file, you must select the Excel document sheet.

Important! Select the sheet can be made after a table is loaded from the file.

In the properties of a table row source file displays the path to the source file of the table.

Select line Request to enter the desired page of the document. Then in the Table Editor,
click Update Table from an external source.

When loading a table from a file mdb drop-down list displays a list of database query.

Note: To import tables from files, you can drag a file from Explorer to the dialog table .

910
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you drag a file from Windows Explorer in the imported table is added to
the existing table.

When you drag a file from Windows Explorer dialog box replaces the existing
table to be imported.

To generate a report based on a sample of objects, select the objects in the sample report.

To make a selection of items, click Select.

The search conditions are set in the Quick selection dialog.

Further dialogue is given based on what the attributes are and creates a report on the
selected objects.

911
nanoCAD Mechanica

Includ attributes for the report in the list by selecting flags

All- selects all attributes

None - the choice is removed from all the attributes
Invert - inverted selection attributes

The table is created with a template report form

=Iff(Exist(Object."Autoreport");Object."Autoreport";"")

This formula checks whether there is a line for the attribute named Autoreport, and
displays its value in a cell. Otherwise, leave the cell blank.

The number of columns in the table determined by the number of selected attributes.

To import a table from Excel, select Import from Excel. To activate this item, the document
should be opened.
Select the insertion point of the table.

Select the numbering of rows in the table.

912
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the switch rows upside down is enabled, the line numbered in reverse order.When the
checkbox after you insert the table will start a dialogue format.

Click OK and the insertion point on the drawing table.

Note: If the drawing pre-select a group of objects, and then run the tables, you
will be prompted to create a report based on a sample of objects.

Editing a table in the drawing

Button on the drawing table editing

Enables the editing screen.

The table editor can be enabled by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the left mouse button on
the frame of the table. Fill the cell contents by placing the cursor in a cell and clicking the left mouse
button, the active cell is highlighted with a green frame. Introduced into the cell text is automatically
urged.

When the on-screen editing the table toolbar appears table editing

Group cells. Merges adjacent cells into one.

When the power switch (highlighted in green) of the cell that contains the cursor. Hold down the
left mouse button, select the cells to be merged and re-clicking commit the changes - selected cells
unite.

Ungroup cells . Cancels the grouping of cells.

Place the cursor on the cell previously merged from multiple cells. Large cell becomes active,
highlighted with a green frame. Click the left mouse button inside the cell. Large cell split into
smaller cells source.

913
nanoCAD Mechanica

Split cells. Serves to separate the cells into smaller cells.

Place the cursor on any cell. Click the left mouse button inside the cell. On request from the
command line, point the cursor and lock clicks the left mouse button within two points of the
selected cell. A dialog box appears Split Cells

Enter the desired numerical values for the breakdown. You can split multiple cells in the same row
or column.

Pencil. Serves to split into several cells by constructing additional borders.

Place the cursor on any cell. Click the left mouse button inside the cell. building site specify the cell
border control points. Cell (or cells) will be divided on these points into two new cells of arbitrary
size. Each cell is independent.

Add row. Adds one row at the bottom of the table.

Add column. Adds one column to the table.

Insert Row. Adds one row at the current cursor position of the table.

Insert Column. Adds one column at the current cursor position of the table.
Delete Row. Deletes the row that contains the selected cell.

Delete Column. Removes the column containing the selected cell.

Row Properties . Serves to change the height of the row containing the selected cell. A dialog
box appears in which to specify the row height in millimeters.

Column Properties. Serves to change the width of the column containing the selected cell.
Specify dialog box column width in millimeters.

914
nanoCAD Mechanica

Cell Properties. In the dialog box Cell properties, for the configuration properties of the selected
table cell.

Cells Properties . Setting the properties of a group of cells of the table. Select the cells and in the
dialog box Cell Properties set the parameters of the selected table cells.

Sum.
Selective sum.
With these tools, the numerical values ??in the selected cells automatically summarized in the last
(empty) selected cell. In this case, entering Formula summation expressions when you edit the
properties of a single cell is not required.

Notebook

Calculator
Special symbol

Quit. Exits the screen editor table.

Import, export from Excel

Toolbar: Click the button to import table from Excel toolbar MechaniCS tables.
From the command line command: sptableexcelimport

Menu: MechaniCS > Table>> Table Edit >>> import tables from Excel

Transmits data from an open book MS Excel.

In an open Excel worksheet, select the cells whose data you want to import into a table
nanoCAD Mechanics 6.
Go to the nanoCAD, editor of the table, and then click Import tables from Excel.
Data will be transmitted to the table.

Toolbar: Click the button Export Table to Excel toolbar Construction table.
From the command line command: sptableexcelexport

Menu: MechaniCS > Table>> Table Edit>>> Export Table to Excel

Designed to transmit tabular data in MS Excel. After clicking on the button opens a new Excel
workbook and it migrates all the tabular data with formatting cells established in the table.

The tables nanoCAD Mechanics6 not to Excel the following data:

Important! Blocks nanoCAD

Formatted text
Formulas that do not match the format of Excel

915
nanoCAD Mechanica

Table editor
Basic tools
Using Variables
Editing the size of rows and columns
Page division
Conversion tables
Table recognition
Cell Properties
Table Equation Editor
Creating Reports

Dialog box Table edit

The dialog box contains:

top drop-down menu

call buttons of working tools ;

line to quickly change the length and width of each column of the table;
change number of rows and columns.

Each section has its own table header :

First Page Header;

Header;
Header of the last page;
Title of the report;
Report template;
Report;
Outcome of the report;
Footer of the first page;
Footer;
Footer of the last page;

When you click the left mouse button on the name of the row or column it is selected.

916
nanoCAD Mechanica

To select the entire table, click on the box at the intersection of row and column names.

Names (addresses) of rows and columns of the table editor areadopted similar to MS Excel. Vertical
columns from left to right are in after the English letters in alphabetical order (A, B, C, D, ..., Z, AA,
AB, etc.), the horizontal lines are in numerical called the numbers in order.

Filling adjacent cells data.

To speed up data entry in a table, you can use the auto-complete data. Table editor can
automatically continue a series of numbers, combinations of numbers and text for a given sample.
Quickly filling the ranks of different types of data can be achieved by selecting multiple cells and
dragging the fill handle.

Filling cells with a sequence of numbers or combinations of numbers and text is shown belowfor a
given sample.

1. Select the first of the filled cells.

2. Enter the starting value for the series values.

3. Enter a value in the next cell to set the fill pattern.

For example, if you want to specify the sequence 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ..., type in the first two cells
values 1 and 2. If you need the sequence 2, 4, 6, 8 ..., type 2 and 4. If you need a
sequence of 2, 2, 2, 2, ..., the second cell can be left blank.

When filling sequence, it proceeds as shown in the table below.

917
nanoCAD Mechanica

Initial value Line extension

1, 2, 3... 4, 5, 6...
First Period Second Period Third Period
Article Article

4.
Select the cell or cells that contain the starting values.

5. Drag the fill handle over the range you want to fill. cCells are filled with a given sequence of
numbers.

Cells filled with a given sequence of numbers.

To fill in increasing order, drag down or to the right marker. To fill in decreasing order,
drag up or to the left marker.

With AutoComplete can continue lists with same values of collections (main menu / line / custom
sorting).

Cell color

- The cell containing the expression;

- Non-editable cell, for example, in the report;

- Box with an error in the expression;

- The cell containing the data section of the report

Basic tools

Open File. Allows you to import a set of predefined data from a separate file *.dat template or
open a standard table of the library Building site. Click the black triangle to access additional data
source selection buttons.

Insert Table from the library.

Inserting a table from an external file *.tbl, *.dat, *.mdb, *.txt, *.csv, *.xml, *.xls,
*.xlsx. When selecting an Excel file Excel it will insert only the first sheet of the book..

Save to file.Saves the cell data in a separate file format *.dat or as a template to the library
records in Construction Site 4. Click the black triangle to access additional buttons, select the
location to save the table.

Create element in Construction Site 4.

918
nanoCAD Mechanica

Table entry to an external file *.dat, *.txt, *.cvs, *.xml, *.xls.

Export table to Excel. Designed to transmit tabular data in MS Excel. After clicking on the button
opens a new Excel workbook and it migrates all the tabular data with formatting cells established in
the table.

Import table from Excel. Passes from the open MS Excel workbook calculation results of tabular
data. It is the content of the active worksheet or selected range of cells.

Tools Clipboard Windows (Clipboard):

Cut selection

Copy selection Paste

from clipboard

Cancel. Undo last change.

Repeat. Redo last change. Tools
for moving rows / columns:

Move row

Move row Move

column left

Move column right

Page division. tool is designed partition a table into separate parts, without losing its integrity.
With this feature, you can split a large table in order to place a format, while preserving the ability
to edit the table as a single object.

Open. Opens Form Editor.

Tools sorting cells selected rows:

Sort ascend

Sort Descend

Create summary function. Summarizes the contents of the selected cells.

919
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select the cell in which you want to calculate the sum, then , select the cells that need to
summarize the contents, press Enter.

Open Calculator. Causes calculator.

Open Notebook. Opens the notebook .

Insert material.

This tool is designed to be inserted into the table, the technical requirements and specifications of
the formatted string records on material and product mix. By pressing the button, a dialog box
material appears.

Special symbol. Click and select a special character in the list.

Reculate table. Serves to convert the data in the table after editing cell values or correction
formulas.

Automatic calculation of formulas. Controls the automatic recalculation of the values of table
cells. The default mode is enabled Autoconversion.

Update reports. When you press the report is updated.

Automatic report update. Controls the automatic recalculation of the report. The default mode is
enabled.

Group selection. Merges the selected cells in a table.

Ungroup-selected cells. Cancels the grouping for the selected cell.

Change number of rows and columns. Used to change the number of rows and (or) column in
the cell range.

Select one or more cells and then click repartition. In the dialog box repartition enter the required
numerical values for the breakdown.

920
nanoCAD Mechanica

Split table cell with pencil tool. Serves to split into several cells by constructing additional
borders.

Use the mouse to select start and end points of the segment, which will divide them each a junction
box for two. Right-click on the cell border removes this limit.

Text alignment . Used to control the placement of text in the selected cells. Additional buttons
are available by clicking the black triangle.

Border. Borders tool designed to control the display of borders of selected cells. By clicking on
the black triangle become available additional buttons display borders.

No border lines.

No vertical tolerance.

All borders
Assignment of the remaining keys clear pattern on each of them.

921
nanoCAD Mechanica

Drop-down list Border Color:

Combobox border thickness:

To set the parameters border, you must first choose the color or thickness, and then select the
border (in the command borders) to which you want to apply the specified parameters.

Cell Properties. In the Properties dialog box, set the parameters of the cell table cells.

To edit the properties of a single cell in a table full editor, select the desired cell and issue the
Cell Properties from the context menu. The effect of this command is similar Cell Properties screen
table editor .

To edit multiple table cells in the full editor, select the desired cells and issue the Cell Properties
from the context menu, or by pressing Ctrl+Enter. The effect of this command is the same action
team as Cell Properties screen editor table.

922
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using Variables
Important! This function is available only in vertical applications based nanoCAD

Tables BuildIndustry support the use of additional variables defined in a special dialog (form).

Procedure for creating a set of user-defined variables and their use in the table below:

1. In full table editor from the menu Edit invoke the command Form Editor.
2. Create a form with controls and bind each control to a field (variable). More information about
the forms, see Form Editor .

923
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Close the form editor and save the form.

4. To set the variable, call the command form.

5. Open your form. Enter the desired values. Click OK.

6. Linking table cells with custom variables by using formulas.

Cell value will be associated with the variable.

924
nanoCAD Mechanica

Variables can also be used in complex formulations.

Editing the size of rows and columns

To modify the row height or column width, move your mouse to the border of the row or column.
Click the left mouse button and holding the button down drag the border. The move will be
highlighted by the current value of the row height or column width, as well as its new size.

Resize a row or column can also be done in the properties dialog box, selected by pressing the right
mouse button on the header row or column.

1. In the properties dialog box, specify the height (width) in millimeters.

2. In the Properties dialog box of the column switch is available Hidden. With it, you can disable
the display of the selected column in the drawing, however, the Editor will be displayed.

You can also hide a column from the context menu for the column.

925
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command string Replace null values (for numeric cells with the value zero, the cell must
be a numeric format), replaces the contents of the cells specified text.

Important! Format text in a cell value is set in the properties of the cell on the tab Content .

Close the dialog by clicking OK.

Division by page

Division by page. tool is designed to separate the table into separate parts, without losing its
integrity. With this feature, you can split a large table in order to place a format, while preserving
the ability to edit the table as a single object.

When the command a dialog box appears page division.

Switch single page disables table division.

Select the method of dividing the table:
1. Custom- The table can divided into any parts.

Page break before a row is set by start new command from the context menu.

926
nanoCAD Mechanica

Close the dialog. The editor of the table indicate the boundaries of the gap, with the help of it,
you can change the row height.

On the drawing table with a gap will be as follows:

927
nanoCAD Mechanica

NANOCAD
Header
The table without break
•
Header a g n
+
b h 0
a g n
Footer
b h 0

( j /)
Header
d k q
( j p
e ' r
d k q
f {f) s
e I r
Footer
f {f) s
Footer
The table with break -

f.\- The general grip for dragging the table

'-=--.;;::;-------- ---:- ----------------------- --------------
I
•
f' '""'""""'""" '
. • I

:,-------+---------.-;-------------------- --------------
:..... : :"
.
I

• .
I

:
I

L;------ +-------- +t:------------------: ----------------- j

I I I I
t

r:ic -re :t--- ----·:r---------------- -- -------------------

I I

i i
I I I I

; The grip of bpttom

®:22r+ ---····· +··················-· ··············'
.:1
. : I I I

t I I I

:-·------ ---------:----------------------------------i
:- :·;" :. :
I
-;----- -
1 ..,

t
•.
---------:-,-------- -- ---------:------------ -- -----.:
,
I
t•' I
t
• I""7
o (
I
1
I
o
I

;------ +-------- -;----------------- -r ----------------- i

:.. · :\ !" :
1 I I I

-{--------------:-----------------:-----------------
:. :i:, : :
tc. ;r-.+-·-·-·-- -l-·--·-·-···---·- -·- ··!-·-·-·-··--···-···l

·-
1 I I I
t : I

....... .......-.................. .:....................

• Side of the split table can be moved in the drawing independently,double-clicking on any part of
the full table editor opens.

928
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. By row count enter the desired number of rows in a fragment. Headers do not count.

By table height enter the total height of a fragment, in millimeters, using the current scal.

Dividing the table into parts allows each part tobe moved independently:

Cell Properties
In the dialog box Properties parameters are set for table cells.

To edit the properties of a single cell in a table full editor, select the desired cell and issue
Properties from the context menu or by pressing Ctrl + Enter, double click on the cell, as a gesture
to "down" on the cell. The effect of this command is similar Cell Properties screen table editor.

To edit multiple table cells in the full editor, select the desired cells and issue the Properties from
the context menu. The effect of this command is the same action as Properties screen editor table.

929
nanoCAD Mechanica

I c i 1:.1 I E I F I G I H
I
11 1 11 1
11
t
Edit F2
Properties... Ctrt+Enter
Expression... Shift+ F2

Group
Ungroup
Split...

Cut Ctrt+X
Copy Ctri+ C
Paste Ctrt+ V
Clear Del
lns rt table

Content IFont IRt IBorders IComment IPresets I

I
Data format Auto format · I prec1stan I(auto) ·I
[{]Supress trailing zeros
Value

C)Readorly
I Expression... I
I Bloc!<... I

OK II Cancel

There are six tabs:

• Aag Content. This tab specifies the type of data in a cell the user, set the formula for
calcuialing values. In the properties of the cell can format values and enter the contents of a
tabIe cell. Checking unmoditiable disables the abiIity to edit the cell. Such a cell is
930
nanoCAD Mechanica
highlighted in oolor.

931
nanoCAD Mechanica

- Opens the Expression Builder.

- The tool is used to insert the nanoCAD block the cell.

Select the list that appears in the desired unit from the current drawing file. If necessary,
select another file using the menu View.

After selecting a unit, it is displayed in the properties window of the cell, as well as in a
table cell.

932
nanoCAD Mechanica

To disconnect the unit, press the Remove block in the block selection.

932
nanoCAD Mechanica

Bookmark Font. This specifies the text font, color symbols, line thickness, font height, offset
from the cell boundaries, the angle that defines the direction of the text, as well as the aspect
ratio of the text.

Switch Vertical change text direction to vertical.

933
nanoCAD Mechanica

Empty fields oblique Angle and horizontal scaling means that the values are taken from
the text style and horizontal indent - that the value is taken from the table settings.

Bookmark fit

This specifies the cell, cell as well as parameters of inscribing text into the cell.

If the text width exceeds cell bounds

If the text height exceed cell bounds:

934
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mode Occupy extra row does not change the number of rows in the table, the desired row
is made higher by the required number of times and line.

Bookmark borders. Here you specify the type, color, thickness of the boundary line of the
selected cell, you can manage the display of individual cell borders. Enable or disable the
display of individual boundaries, you can use buttons

935
nanoCAD Mechanica

or in the preview by clicking the left mouse button near one of the cell borders. Alignment of
text within a cell preview is set by clicking the left mouse button.

To set the color of individual borders, click the left mouse and select a color from the drop
button on the icon down list

936
nanoCAD Mechanica

To determine the weight of the individual borders, click the left mouse button on the line
(By layer) and choose the thickness of the drop-down list.

Color, line thickness for the cell borders, and cell shading can be set from the menu.

To apply the changes in color and thickness, click on the desired boundary. Can also be selected
by using the display boundaries.

Flag Comment. A field for entering a comment.

937
nanoCAD Mechanica

Cell with the comment is displayed in the editor by a green label, which displays a hint
when you hover the mouse on it.which is displayed a hint.

Bookmark Styles. Here you can set the style for the cell.

938
nanoCAD Mechanica

To create a style, right-click in the blank area of the Style tab, then on the shortcut menu,
select Create.

To work with a style template, open the context menu style.

939
nanoCAD Mechanica

Binding to a table cell

In the formula, you can use any cell values of the properties of another object. If using automatic
recalculation of the table, the formula object is automatically recalculated. Each cell can attach one
or more objects. Objects are named Object1, Object2, and Object3, … sequentially numbered in the
table. If the object is not used in a formula, it will detach from the table at the next calculation, and
the object references are renumbered.

Binding properties for drawing objects to a single cell then use the expression or the keys
Shift+F2. Available in the context menu of the selected cell.

After selecting the command window opens the Expression Builder.

Click Attach it.

Select the object whose data you want to send to the table (eg, Bolt M52). Now the list of
expressions appears in the properties of the selected object. Double-clicking on the property (select
Object.Name), adds it to the text in a cell. Click OK.

940
nanoCAD Mechanica

After connection of the facility to the cell the cell color changes (it says that the formula in the cell)
and it will display the calculated result, in this case the name of the object:

Interface Equation Editor

Equation Editor allows you to set parameters, arithmetic expressions, and references to the object
properties of the selected table cell.

Equation Editor, you can select for a simple table cell, and for dialog box binding objects. Select the
formula editor by pressing fx at the selected cell in the table, as well as by pressing Shift+F2 or
gesture "up" on the cell .

941
nanoCAD Mechanica

At the top of the dialog box is enter a formula, with which you can manually enter any arithmetic
expression, and use the reserved constants and properties.

If you enter in the list of reserved variables, a list of variables that contain the word you also made
syntax checking. When an improper formula is used in the quick view will be an error message or
prompt.

By clickingquick View the expression occurs in the selection of the text input field related to this
expression.

942
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you click on the phrase entered is kept on the panel templates formulas.

Expression patterns are on the panel of the formulas in the list of reserved functions and are marked
with an asterisk.

Templates formulas
Expressions allow you to save the template for later recall.

943
nanoCAD Mechanica

To save the expression, type it in the input field variable, then press the , button the text will
appear in the expression patterns of formulas.

When you hover over the button the saved template will pop up with the contents of this template.

To insert a template, place the cursor in the desired position, press the saved template.
To delete a template expression, hold Alt and the left mouse button, drag the button labelled
template beyond the Expression Builder window.

If your template contains symbols "$", they will be replaced when you insert the selected text. For
example, create a template Iff(Exist($);$;””). Enter the text Object.Name, select it, insert template
Iff. It turns Iff(Exist(Object.Name;Object.Name;””)

Snap to Objects
- Opens a dialog box to bind objects.

Functions in the Formula Editor

Mathematical operations:

Addition
+

- Subtraction
Multiplication
*

/ Division
^ Involution
sqrt() Rootsquaring

Logical comparison and selection:

== equally

944
nanoCAD Mechanica

> more
< less
! not
| or
!= not equal
>= not less
<= no more
|| or
&& and

Functions:
math:

Cos, Sin, Tg - trigonometric functions, the argument given in degrees.

Acos, Asin, Atg - inverse trigonometric functions, the result is given in degrees.

Abs - absolute value of (module).

Int - rounding to whole number.

Summ - returns the sum of the values of the variables in a grouped cells.

When you type a function should pay attention to the opening and closing
brackets.

For example:

Summ(Row) - returns the sum of the numbers of grouped rows..

Summ(Standartnaya_detal.L) - returns the sum of the values ??of the L parameter object "standard
part" in the grouped rows.

data conversion:

Str - Data conversion to a string type.

Num - conversion of data into a numeric type.

Frm - convert a numeric value to a string formatted according to the settings of a table column.

For example:

Frm(0.001230) returns a string 0,0012, if the column containing the cell is set to zero suppression
and accuracy of 0,0000

selection and comparison:

FmtText - Addition formatted strings.

FmtSub - the creation of a subscript.

FmtSuper - create superscript.

FmtDigit - transfer number in hard copy.

FmtRaw - text without formatting.

DmtDiv - creation of fractions.

945
nanoCAD Mechanica

If/Iff - The logical choice. Recording Format:

if (Logich_Uslovie; Esli_Istina; Esli_Lozh)

where:

Logich_Uslovie - logical condition using logical comparisons (see above);

Esli_istina - the return value when the logical condition;

Esli_Lozh - return value at default logical condition.

For example:

if(object == Marker_universalny; Marker_universalny.position; "Undefined") . If an object type,

which is connected with the cell column has Marker_universalny value, the function returns the
position value of the referenced object. Another type of object it returns a string Undefined .

Exist - Checks whether there is a constant: =IF(EXIST(Object.Name);Object.Name;0)

Min/Max - returns the minimum / maximum value listed in parentheses

For example:

Min(maskimalnoe_znachenie; MinValue ) - nourishes MinValue;

Max(maskimalnoe_znachenie; MinValue) - returns maskimalnoe_znachenie.

Count - returns the number of objects (for grouped rows in the table).

For example:

Count() - returns the number of objects associated with cells grouped rows.

Avg - Calculates the arithmetic mean of the arguments. Takes an arbitrary number of arguments
understand ranges. Empty arguments are ignored.

Off - returns the value of the cell, given the relative index. The index is written in the format:

Off(string; column)

For example:

Off(-1;2) - returns the value of cell in the table on one line above (-1) and two columns to the right
(2) of the current

Cell - the cell returns the value specified absolute index.

Merge (Cells,Expression) - brings together a range of Cells, if Expression is not equal to 0.

Returns the value of Expression.

For example:

=merge(A5:C5; "Title") – integrates cell A5 to C5, in the summary displays the text "Title".

SetHeight() – reference line height. In brackets the height value.

Val() - computes the value of the argument.

For example:

946
nanoCAD Mechanica

=val("A"+"1") - calculates the "A1", and then uses it as another expression (obtained by the value
in cell A1). If the argument - not a string, then he comes back, ie =val(10+2) - the same thing
=10+2.

=val("summ(A"+Str(off(0;-1))+":D"+Str(off(0;-1))+")") - the amount of cells from rows A to D, the

number which is introduced into the cell to the left of the current one. In most cases you can do
without val. The classic example, when without it - no way: in a custom form, enter the cell address,
then to take the value out of it. Create a variable Addr, associate it with an input field on a form and
in the table do so: = val (Addr) function allows recursion: = val (val ("A" + "1")) - to take the value
of the cell whose address is recorded in cell A1. Nesting depth is limited to 64.

Geometry(Object) - works as Implement object. Height embedded object shrinks to the line
height. Object is taken from the report, or attached to the cell.

SUMM(Section(-1)) - Sum of cells in the current column of the section next to the current.

COUNT(Section(A3)) - The number of rows in the section containing the cell A3.

Reserved variables:
Pi - pi.

Row - for each cell in the column it returns the number of rows (rows are numbered starting with 1,
excluding the header lines).

Col - for all cells in a column returns the column number of the table (column "A" is number 1).

Object - returns the type of the object, which is associated with the cell line.

Object1, Object2, … - objects attached to the cell.

Title - the name of the table. RowCount

- total number of rows. ColCount - the

total number of columns. Creating

Reports
Reports are required to organize data objects in the drawing.

To create a report in the table editor in the top drop-down menu Sections select Insert section of the
report.

947
nanoCAD Mechanica

Section of the report consists of two sections: The report template and report.

948
nanoCAD Mechanica

A report template defines the content and appearance of the report,it may consist of one or more
rows. Each object creates its own copy of the template lines. Formulas in the report are calculated
using the properties of the sample objects.

A report template contains variables of selected objects, the report displays the values of template
variables.

With the tool Quick Pick selection can be performed in the inserted drawing of objects under
certain conditions.

In the dialog box groupings and parameters are set grouping and merge table cells.

Menu report template provides the following functions:

Title - The report adds to the beginning of the title bar that appears at the beginning of each
part of the table;
Outcome report - appends a string report which summarizes the report that is displayed after
each part of the table;

949
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu cells Subtotal report includes the following features:

Action applied to the column within a section.

Vertical grouping

The report template can consist of several lines. For convenience of a cell with the same values can
be combined. In the context menu on the report template, click Add Row or Insert row.

950
nanoCAD Mechanica

When adding a line it is added after the selected row, and when you insert a row it is added to the
selected row.

Assign variable cells to added row. Select cells A3 and A4, and then on the shortcut menu, click
Merge.

951
nanoCAD Mechanica

The selected cells are merged. The table will look as follows:

The report has a cell marked with a special color.

952
nanoCAD Mechanica

When editing such cells, the changes will be applied to the object to which they relate.

Create the table and report template.

Add parameters: =Object.Name and =Object.L.

Introduce a new length, for example 120.

Bolt length in the drawing has changed.

953
nanoCAD Mechanica

Grouping and merging cells

Button Grouping and merging. Report template.

In the Grouping and merging dialog you can specify settings for grouping and merging table cells.
Grouping and merging are only applied to cells in the report template.

Study the example for how to merge cells.

954
nanoCAD Mechanica

Merging
1. In the Grouping and merging dialog box select Append rule and select Merge.

955
nanoCAD Mechanica

2. Select the column name for the cells you want to merge. Selection is made by double clicking
on the column name or by dragging it into the Select field.

To select another column, you must drag it into the column list and then select
Note:
it.You can select several columns then place them in the required order.

The columns are processed according to the rules of the grouping remplate.

3. If you want to sort, select and don't sortand sorting, and select sort type.

4. Click OK to check the result in the table editor. Cells having identical values in the D column
will be merged.

956
nanoCAD Mechanica

956
nanoCAD Mechanica

Grouping
1. In the dialog box groupings and click Add Rule select Group.

2. Select the name of the column whose cells you want to group. Choice is either by double-
clicking on the column name, or by dragging it into the Select .

957
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. If you want to sort, click on the link and sorting, and select the type of sort.
4. Click OK to view the results in the table editor. Table rows that contain the same values ??in
column C, will be grouped.

Insert material designation to the table

Button material designation.

This tool is designed to be inserted into the table, the technical requirements and specifications of
the formatted string records on material and product mix. By pressing the button, a dialog box
appears called material designation.

Table recognition
Button table recognition

Toolbar: Click the button to the Table recognition toolbar MechaniCS Tables

From the command line command: sprectable

Menu: MechaniCS > Table >> Table recognition

Table recognition enables automatic search and replace tables created from individual primitives
nanoCAD object "Table" nanoCAD Mechanics6. Sources are primitives for drawing.

1. Use the command table recognition.

2. Specify the drawing point at the table.
958
nanoCAD Mechanica

The table is created in the current layer. Dimensions of the recognized table are rounded to integer
values.

Text belongs to the workpiece table is recognized as the values of the respective cells of the table.

Real dimensions of the original graphics are multiplied by the scale design, so if it turns out the table
with zero height lines, you need to change the scale clearance in accordance with the size of the
original graphics.

Convert AutoCAD tables

Command

From the toolbar: click on the icon convert AutoCAD tables.

From the command line (Command: spconverttable).

Menu: MechaniCS > Table >> Table Edit >>> convert AutoCAD table

This command is used to convert tables to nanoCAD tables nanoCAD Mechanics6, with the possibility
of further editing tools nanoCAD Mechanics6 and vice versa.

To convert the table is enough to cause the command convert AutoCAD tables and choose the
table.

Real dimensions of the original graphics are multiplied by the scale design, so if it turns out the table
with zero height lines, you need to change the scale clearance in accordance with the size of the
original graphics.

When the conversion table nanoCAD Mechanics6 in the table nanoCAD all dynamic bonds
are broken

Dimension styles...

Main menu: Format - Dimension styles...

Main menu: Dimensions - Dimension styles...

Toolbar: Dimension styles... ("Styles").

Command line:DIMSTYLE, DIMSTYLESCMD.

The program of the "default" set the dimension style, matches the national industry standard.

Use dimension styles allows you to control the appearance and quick format sizes.

959
nanoCAD Mechanica

The composition of the dialog box "Dimension Style Manager":

Title Current style: ... – information on the current dimension style that is used when
dimensioning.

List Styles – a list of all dimension styles of the document.

Window Preview of: ... – a graphical representation of the style selected in the "Styles".

Buttons:

Set Current – sets the current dimension style selected.

New... – Opens the "Creating style".

Modify... – change the parameters of the selected style in the list. Opens the Modify dimension
style.

Override... – changes in the current dimension style settings. Opens the Override current style.

Compare... - compare two dimension styles or to view a list of all the style properties. The
comparison results can be copied to the clipboard. Opens the Compare dimensions styles.

Delete... – delete the selected dimension style.

Restoring dimension style

Command line: MCSETGOST.

This command is needed to create a (recovery) standard dimension style environmentnanoCAD

Mechanics.

Dimension Style Settings entries are stored in the drawing file. If the file was not created in the
nanoCAD Mechanics, then it may not be necessary for the correct dimension style work environment
nanoCAD Mechanics.

Creating style
Button "New..." in the dialogue Dimension style manager.
960
nanoCAD Mechanica

The new style is created based on an existing one.

The composition of the dialog box:

Field New style name – Enter the name of style.

List Start with – Selected from a list style, based on which to create a new one.

List Use for – Choose from a list of sizes sub-genres (applicable only to certain types of dimensions).

Button OK – open the Modify dimension style.

Modify dimensions style

In the dialog "Modify dimensions style" set the properties for the new style and edit existing
parameters.

This dialog is invoked by pressing the button "Modify..." from Dimension style manager, and also
from window Creating style after clicking OK.

Name the edited style is reflected in the title of the dialog.

961
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dialogue "Modify dimension style" contains tabs:

Lines
Symbols and arrows
Text
Fit
Primary units
Alternate units
Tolerances

Picture of a model on each tab shows the preliminary result of changes in the properties.

Lines

Setting the size and properties of dimension lines, extension lines, arrows, and center marks.

962
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimansion lines
Color – Set the color of dimension lines. Linetype –

Set the type of dimension lines. Lineweight –

Reference weight for dimension lines.

Extend beyond ticks – Using serif as arrowheads, set the distance at which the dimension line must
extend beyond the extension lines.

Baseline spacing - Setting the distance between the dimension lines in size from a common base.

Suppress – Job suppress the dimension lines if they go beyond the extension lines.

Dim line 1 – suppress the first dimension line.

Dim line 2 – suppress the second dimension line.

Extension lines
Color - Set the color of the extension lines

Linetype ext line 1 – Set the type of the first extension line.

Linetype ext line 2 – type setting of the second extension line.

Lineweight – Reference weight for extension lines.

Suppress –Job suppress the extension lines:

Ext line 1 – suppress first extension line.

Ext line 2 – suppress second extension line.

Extend beyond dim lines – Installation distance the extension lines should uphold the dimension.

963
nanoCAD Mechanica

Offset from origin – Installation distance the extension lines depart from points of an object.

Fixed length extension lines - Installing a full-length extension lines from the dimension line to the
starting point size.

Symbols and arrows

Setting the size and position of arrows, center marks, arc length symbols and broken lines the size
of the radius.

Arrowheads
Management views arrowheads

First – Select the type of arrow for the first dimension line. If you change the type of the first arrow
is automatically changed and the type of the second.

Second – Select the type of arrow for the second dimension line.

Leader – Type setting arrows to the leader.

Arrow size – Mapping of existing and installation of the new size of the arrows.

Center marks
Management prostanovkoy center marks and centerlines by applying diameters and radii.

None - not to create a center mark and center lines.

Mark - create a center marker.

Line - create center lines.

Size - mapping of existing and installation of new sizes center mark or centerline.

964
nanoCAD Mechanica

Arc length symbol

Controls the display of the arc symbol in the amount of arc length.

Preceding dimension text - Paste character arc length before the text size.

Above dimension text - Paste character arc length on the text size.

None - Ban the display of symbols of the arc length.

Ragius dimension jog

Controls the display of polylines (zigzag) radius dimensions, where the center is located outside of
the page.

Jog angle - installation angle perpendicular to the line connecting the outrigger dimension lines and
the size of the radius.

Text

Set format, placement and alignment of dimension text.

Text appearance
Text style – Choose from a list of the current style of the dimension text.

Text color – Set the color of the dimension text.

Fill color – Setting the background color of the text in size.

Text height - Set the current height of the dimension text. If the text style of a fixed height (ie the
height in the style is not equal to 0), then the height entered here is ignored.

965
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fraction height scale – Reference scale fractional values relative to the rest of the text. The option is
available if the tab "Primary units" for the parameter values "Unit format" is set "Fractional". Height
fractional texts is determined by multiplying the height of normal text to a specified ratio.

Draw frame around text – Installation display the dimension text in the frame.

Text placement
Vertical – Selecting align dimension text vertically relative to the dimension line:

Centered - the location of the dimension text in the center of the extension lines.
Above - the location of the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the
dimension line to the bottom of the text is equal to the value specified in the option "Offset
from Dim Line."
Outdise - the location of the dimension text with the dimension line next to the side farthest
from the first defining point.
JIS - placement of dimension text as required by Japanese Industrial Standards JIS (Japanese
Industrial Standards).
Below - the location of the dimension text below the dimension line. The distance from the
dimension line to the upper border of the text is equal to the value specified in the option
"Offset from Dim Line."

Horizontal – Selecting the position of the dimension text horizontally along the dimension line with
respect to the extension lines:

Centered - the location of the dimension text in the center of the extension lines along the
dimension line.
At ext line 1 - the location of the text on the left at the first extension line. The distance from
the extension line and the text is equal to the sum of twice the arrowhead (tab "Symbols and
arrows") and the text of the gap (the option "Offset from Dim Line").
At ext line 2 - the location of the text on the right in the second extension line. The distance
from the extension line and the text is equal to the sum of twice the arrowhead (tab "Symbols
and arrows") and the text of the gap (the option "Offset from Dim Line").
Over ext line 1 - the location of the text over or along the first extension line.
Over ext line 2 - the location of the text over or along the second extension line.

Offset from dim line – reference value of the current text gap (width of the empty space around the
text in the gap dimension line) This value is used as the minimum length of the fragments of broken
dimension line.

The text is located between the extension lines only provided that the lengths of these fragments will
not be smaller than the gap of the text. If the text is on the dimension line or below, it is placed
between the extension lines only if there is enough room for arrowheads and dimension text,
separated from each other by a gap of text.

Text alignment
Setting the orientation of the dimension text between the dimension lines and beyond.

Horizontal – place the text horizontally.

Align with dimension line – place text along the dimension line.

ISO Standart - placed along the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, or
horizontally if the text is outside.

Fit

Management position of text, arrows, callouts, and dimension line.

966
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fit options
Installation option arrangement of text and arrows, if the extension lines is not enough space for
them to co-location:

Either text or arrows(optimally) - moving either text or arrows outside dimension lines depending on
which location of the most optimal.

Arrows - moving beyond the extension lines, arrows first, and then the text.

Text - moving beyond the extension lines of the text first, then arrows.

Both text and arrows - If space is insufficient, the text and arrows are arranged outside the
extension lines.

Always keep text between ext lines – always place the text between the extension lines.

Suppress arrows if they don't fit inside extension lines - if the shooter is not enough space between
the extension lines, they are not displayed.

Text placement
Selecting action when you move dimension text to its default position (predetermined dimension
style):

Beside the dimension line – dimension line moves with the test.

Over dimension line, with leader – dimension lines do not move, and the callout is constructed,
connecting them, and text. Leader is not built, if the text is too close to the dimension line.

Over dimension line, without leader – no text links, and the dimension line is not performed.

967
nanoCAD Mechanica

Scale dimension features

Use overall scale off – setting the scale factor for all dimension style settings that specify sizes,
distances and margins, including the height of the text and the size of the arrows.

Scale dimensions to layout - setting a scale factor based on the ratio of the units in the current
viewport in model space and paper space.

Fine tuning
Place text manually – room size to the point specified in response to "the dimension line." All modes
of accommodation horizontally ignored.

draw dim line between ext lines – draw a dimension line between the extension lines even if the
arrowheads are placed outside.

Primary units

Set the format and accuracy of the basic units, as well as prefixes and suffixes dimension text.

Linear dimensions
Unit format - Installation units format for all dimension types except Angular.

Precision – Setting the number of decimal places in dimension text.

Fraction format – Installation format for fractional texts.

Decimal separator – Select the type of separator for size, expressed in decimal units.

round off – Installation rounding values for all types of dimensions except angular. Example: for a
given precision of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest multiple of 0.25. If you enter 1.0 all
distances are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits in the fractional part of the
distance depends on the accuracy specified in the "Precision"

968
nanoCAD Mechanica

Prefix – Definition of the prefix of the dimension text. To display special characters, you can enter
them or use control codes. For example, the control code %% c corresponds to a diameter symbol.
Prefix specified clearly has priority over the default prefix, such as those used in diameter and
radius.

Suffix – Definition of the dimension text suffix. To display special characters, you can enter them or
use control codes. For example, entering a suffix mm leads to adding it to the dimension text.
Introduced here suffix has precedence over the default suffixes.

Measurement scale
Scale factor – Setting a scale factor for linear dimensions. It is recommended that you do not
change the default value of 1.00. Coefficient no influence on the angular dimensions, precision
rounding positive and negative tolerances.

Apply to layout dimension only – Applying a scaling factor only to the size deposited on the sheet
viewports. It is recommended to disable the setting.

Changing the scale of measurements style setting leads to a change in values

Important! has dimensioned the same style. This bug is unavoidable due to technical
reasons.

Zero suppression
Manage suppression leading and trailing zeros and zeros feet and inches

Leading – suppress leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 0.3000 is written as .3000

Trailing – suppress trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 11.5000 represented as 11.5,
and 30.0000 - like 30.

Angular dimensions
Set the current angle format for angular dimensions.

Units format – selection of units for angular dimensions

Precision – setting the number of decimal places in angular size.

Zero suppression
Manage suppression leading and trailing zeros

Leading – suppress leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 0.3000 is written as .3000

Trailing – suppress trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 11.5000 represented as 11.5,
and 30.0000 - like 30.

Alternate units

Set the format and precision for alternate dimension units.

969
nanoCAD Mechanica

Display alternate units – including the possibility of using alternative input units.

Alternate units
Unit format - Installation format alternate units.

Precision – Setting the number of decimal places.

Multiplier for all units - assignment conversion rate of the basic units in the alternative. Example: to
convert inches to millimeters, enter 25.4. The value has no influence on the angular dimensions and
is not applicable to the accuracy of rounding or positive and negative tolerances.

Round distances to – setting rules for rounding values for all types of dimensions except angular.
Example: When setting accuracy 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest multiple of 0.25. If
you enter 1.0 all distances are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits in the fractional
part of the distance depends on the accuracy specified in the "precision".

Prefix – definition of the prefix alternative dimension text. To display special characters, you can
enter them or use control codes. For example, the control code %% c corresponds to a diameter
symbol. Prefix specified clearly has priority over the default prefix, such as those used in diameter
and radius.

Suffix – the definition of an alternative dimension text suffix. To display special characters, you can
enter them or use control codes. For example, entering a suffix mm leads to adding it to text.
Introduced here suffix has precedence over the default suffixes.

Zero suppression
Manage suppression leading and trailing zeros and zeros feet and inches.

Leading – suppress leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 0.3000 is written as .3000

Trailing – suppress trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 11.5000 represented as 11.5,
and 30.0000 - like 30.

970
nanoCAD Mechanica

Placement
Setting the alternate units in dimension text.

After primary value – display the value in alternative units immediately after the value in the main.

Below primary value - display the value in alternative units for the value in the main.

Tolerances

To control the display and format of dimension text tolerances.

Tolerance format
Method – choice of method for determining tolerances

None - Disable display of tolerances.

Symmetrical – Applying two tolerances with which displays the dimension text with the same
upper and lower tolerances. Admission is separated from the size of the characters "±". The

value is entered in the "Upper value".

Deviation – Applying two tolerances. Dimension text is displayed with different upper and lower
tolerances. When applied to the upper size limit deviation put a plus sign (+) and to the bottom

- the minus sign (-).

Limits – The display size of text in the form of limit sizes. The maximum size limit is above the
minimum. The largest size limit is obtained by adding to the nominal amount of the upper limit

971
nanoCAD Mechanica

of deviation; the smallest - by subtracting from the nominal size of the lower limit of deviation.

Basic – The display size of text in the form of nominal size, enclosed in a frame

Precision - Set the number of decimal places.

Upper value - Setting the value of the upper limit of deviation. When the method of "Symmetrical"
deviations both assigned this value.

Lower value - Setting the value of the lower limit of deviation.

scaling for height - Set the current text height for the deviations.

Vertical position - Text alignment deviations:

Bottom - alignment deviations and nominal size on the bottom.

Middle - alignment deviations and nominal size of the middle of the dimension text.

Top - alignment deviations and the nominal size on top.

Zero suppression
Manage suppression leading and trailing zeros.

Leading – suppress leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 0.3000 is written as .3000

Trailing – suppress trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 11.5000 represented as 11.5,
and 30.0000 - like 30.

Alternate units tolerance Formatting

tolerances alternative units. Precision - Set

the number of decimal places.

Zero suppression
Manage suppression leading and trailing zeros.

Leading – suppress leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 0.3000 is written as .3000

Trailing – suppress trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Example: 11.5000 represented as 11.5,
and 30.0000 - like 30.

Compare dimensions styles

Dialogue compare two dimension styles or see a list of all the properties of the style called by
pressing the button "Compare ..." in the dialogue Dimension style manager. The comparison results
can be copied to the clipboard.

972
nanoCAD Mechanica

The dialog box contains:

Field "Compare" – Select the first dimension style for comparing.

Field "With"– Select the second dimension style for comparing.

Table differences -The table presents data on the distinct properties.

Table columns:

Description
Variable, set this property
Column "value of" size compared to the properties sheet.

Button Copy to clipboard

Dimension
Main menu: Dimensions - Dimension.

Toolbar: Dimensions ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Dimension ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIM.

When dimensioning Available menu commands to switch the type size:

A - Dimension
L - aLigned
H - Horizontal
V - Vertical
R - Radial
D - Diametral
J - Big radius

973
nanoCAD Mechanica

N - ArC
U - angUlar
O - Ordinate
M - cHain
Use database
P - Properties (Opens edit size)
G - Groupped

If linear dimensioning when selecting the position of the dimension line to keep
pressing CTRL, it is possible to tilt the size of the extension lines.
Note:
If linear or angular dimensioning when selecting the position of the dimension
line hold down SHIFT, it is possible to move the dimension text along the
dimension line.

Application of the linear dimension

To apply the necessary size:

1. Select a segment

2. Place the dimension value.

Depending on the position of the point size of accommodation may change view of the horizontal,
vertical or parallel

Dimensioning selection characteristic (nodal) points

For dimensioning should:

1. Select the first node

2. Select the second node

3. Place the dimension value.

When selecting the nodal points of the circle diameter will automatically put down a sign.

Dimensioning between two parallel lines

974
nanoCAD Mechanica

For dimensioning, shown above, you must:

1. Select the first segment

2. Select the second segment

3. Place the dimension value.

Dimensioning through the point perpendicular to the selected segment

For dimensioning, shown above, you must:

1. Specify the interval, which is perpendicular to the applied size.

2. Without interrupting the team point to the end point of the segment (around the point should
appear a circle of small diameter).

3. Place the dimension value.

Linear dimensions

Aligned

Main menu: Dimensions - Aligned.

Toolbar: Aligned ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Aligned ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMALI.

Horizontal

Main menu: Dimensions - Horizontal.

Toolbar: Horizontal ("Utilits","Dimensions").

975
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Horizontal ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMHOR.

Vertical

Main menu: Dimensions - Vertical.

Toolbar: Vertical ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Vertical ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMVER.

Application of linear dimensions

For dimensioning should:

1. Choose size

2. Select the first node

3. Select the second node

4. Place the dimension value.

Radius
Main menu: Dimensions - Radius.

Toolbar: Radius ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Radius ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMRAD.

Dimensioning arc section

For the application of radial dimension required:

1. Choose the size of the "Radius"

2. Select the arc (circle) (size snaps to the arc)

3. Specify the insertion point.

Diameter
Main menu: Dimensions - Diameter.

976
nanoCAD Mechanica

Toolbar: Diameter ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Diameter ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMDIA.

Dimensioning circle

For the application of the size of the circle should:

1. Choose the size of the "Diameter"

2. Select the circle (the size snaps to the circle)

3. Specify the insertion point.

Big radius
Main menu: Dimensions - Big radius.

Toolbar: Big radius ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Big radius ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMHRAD.

Dimensioning arc of large radius

977
nanoCAD Mechanica

For dimensioning on the arc of large radius must be:

1. Choose size "Long range"

2. Select the arc (circle) (size snaps to the arc)

3. Specify the insertion point of the arrow.

4. Specify the insertion point of the value of the arrow.

ARC
Main menu: Dimensions - ARC.

Toolbar: ARC ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: ARC ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMARC.

Dimensioning arc

To apply the necessary dimension:

1. Choose the size of the arc

2. Select the arc (arc snap to the size of the arc)

3. Specify the insertion point.

Dimensioning on the circle

978
nanoCAD Mechanica

To apply the necessary dimension:

1. Choose the size of the arc

2. Specify the start point on the circle

3. Specify the end point on the circle

4. Specify the insertion point.

Fill angle
Main menu: Dimensions - Fill angle.

Toolbar: Fill angle ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Fill angle ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMANG.

Application indicating the angular size of the two segments

When angular dimensioning on the first and then on the second leg will be a dynamic image vertical
or horizontal dimension (depending on the direction of the cursor-pointer). Dynamic image of a
linear dimension changes to the angular size. The sequence of applying the angular size is shown
below:

To apply the angular size is necessary to:

1. Select the angular dimension

2. Select the first segment

979
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Select the second segment

4. Specify the insertion point.

Application indicating the angular size of the hole centers

For application with an indication of the angular size of the centers should:

1. Select the angular dimension

2. Specify the center axis of the circle (which are holes)

3. Specify the center of the first hole

4. Specify the center of the second hole

5. Specify the insertion point.

Ordinate dimension
Main menu: Dimensions - Ordinate.

Toolbar: Ordinate ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Ordinate ( ).

Command line: MCDIMORD.

Formation of dimensional chain

Specify the location of the first size ordinate chain

980
nanoCAD Mechanica

For the formation of dimensional chain affixed to specify the size, all subsequent dimensions will be
tied to it. If for some reason it was completed dimensioning (after first checkboxes size), re-select
the size of the ordinate (or autosize) and point dimensioning.

Consistently specify coordinates other sizes

Dimensions Chain
Main menu: Dimensions - Dimensions Chain.

Toolbar: Dimensions Chain ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Dimensions Chain ( "Dimensions").

981
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command line: MCCHAINCONT.

The chain size is a sequence of sizes, measured from the end of the previous size (the start of each
new size coincides with the end of the previous).

Chain size can be linear, ordinate, or angular. Before the construction of the base on the size of the
facility is to be applied at least one linear, ordinate, or angular dimension.

Application circuit sizes

For the application of the circuit sizes is necessary to:

1. Choose the size of the "Dimensions chain"

2. Select as a "starter" affixed to the size (the size of which will begin to bear the size of the chain)

3. Specify the number of nodes on the team points. Complete ENTER.

Base Dimension
Main menu: Dimensions - Base Dimension.

Toolbar: Base Dimension ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Base Dimension ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCCHAINBASE.

Reference measurements are sequence dimensions measured from a base point.

982
nanoCAD Mechanica

Basic dimensions can be linear, ordinate, or angular.

Before the construction of the base on the size of the facility is to be applied at least one linear,
ordinate, or angular dimension.

Dimensions of base
For dimensioning should:

1. Choose the size of the "Base Dimension"

2. Select as a base affixed to the size (the size of which will begin to bear the size of the chain)

3. Specify the number of nodes on the team points. Complete ENTER.

Each new size is put at a distance from the previous one. The value of the parameter specifies the
size of the indent "Step" in the basic amount in the "Lines" dialogue "Dimension Styles".

Edit dimension
Double-click on the size

Context menu: Edit - the selected dimension.

Command line: MCFEDIT.(Specify size)

The dialog box has the general form:

983
nanoCAD Mechanica

The window is divided into the input text field with the name of the form and size of the instruction
set design size.

In the context menu of the text fields of the dialog box are available additional auxiliary command:

History - The list contains the values previously institutions in this field.
Recent - chastoispolzuemye list contains values in filling this type of field
Insert division - allows you to insert a division
Pick from drawing - allows you to copy values from the drawing objects
Symbols - allows you to insert characters from the list or from the symbol table

The presence of a team from the context menu depends on the destination field.

Button to enter the field size value lets you add to the dimension text special characters.

Buttons First arrow and Second arrowallow you to choose arrows.

When you see a list of options with images of arrows.

Button Text on leader. Toggle the display of text on a remote shelf.

Button Text in rectangle. Switches the display size of text in the rectangle.

Button Scale. It provides a list of the scale display znachanie size. Default 1:1

Button Calculate value. It causes calculator to calculate values.

Button Text style. It causes the configuration dialog of the text.

Button Match properties. It allows you to copy the properties of an existing drawing size.

984
nanoCAD Mechanica

Buttons select brackets . Allows you to set the size in parentheses.

Button Fit view. It provides a list of rvariantov display tolerances.

Button Fit table. It provides the ability to adjust the tolerance

Button Technical conditions. It binds the technical requirements to the size of.

985
nanoCAD Mechanica

Group dimension
Main menu: Dimensions - Group dimension.

Toolbar: Group dimension ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Group dimension ( "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMGROUP.

Application of group dimension

For the application of group size must be:

1. Select the group size

2. Select all the objects that will be involved in the creation of group size (confirmation: Enter)

3. Specify the location of the chain sizes

When dimensioning a chain of small numerical size of the intersecting points of

the arrows are automatically replaced.

(If the setting arrows in the chains is set to Point).

Note:

Supporting characters cursor

nanoCAD Mechanics6 often displays near the cursor symbols that serve as hints of possible user
actions:

986
nanoCAD Mechanica

Displayed when applying diametric size.

Selected linear dimension (horizontal or vertical).
Selected angular size.
Selected extension line previously dimensioned.
Selected inclined size.
Selected diametric size.
Selected radial dimension.

Breack and restore dimension

Breack dimension

Main menu: Dimensions - Break dimension.

Main menu: Mechanica - Utilities - Breacks - Breack dimension lines.

Toolbar: Break dimension ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Break dimension line ( "Breacks").

Command line: MCDIMBREAK.

To create a dimension line break is necessary:

Press the button and select the size or the context menu select "Break line" on the selected
size.Select two points, said portion of the dimension line to create a gap

Select first point Select second point

Result

Restore dimension

Main menu: Dimensions - Restore dimension.

987
nanoCAD Mechanica

Main menu: Mechanica - Utilities - Breacks - Restore dimensions line.

Toolbar: Restore dimensions ("Utilits","Dimensions").

Toolbar: Restore dimensions line ( " Breacks").

Command line: MCDIMUNBREAK.

To restore the dimension line, and press the button to select the size or the context menu select
the "Restore the size of" a dedicated amount.

The action of these commands as if the command "Breacks". They are designed
Note:
for quick access to desired designations.

Arrange dimensions
Toolbar: Arrange dimensions (toolbar "Dimensions").

Command line: MCDIMARRANGE.

Procedure
Necessary:

1. Select team

2. Specify the size that you want to align

988
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. Confirm selection (Enter)

4. Specify a new location dimension group

Fits list

Панель инструментов: Fits list(toolbar "Dimensions").

Command line: MCFITLIST.

This command is used to create the table is automatically updated in size, located on the drawing.

Procedure
Run command, specify the position of the table limit deviations in the drawing.

The table is updated automatically when deleting, adding and editing dimensions.

989
nanoCAD Mechanica

By double-clicking, you can edit the table of tolerances. For example, to set an alphanumeric
designation of size tolerance.

990
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensions of pipe sections

On the graphic elements (sites shafts, piping, etc.) allows to put just two sizes.

Specify the first and second elements of the pipeline (left-click on each of the segments).

Right-click context menu and enter the string 2Razmera.

Moving dynamic image in two sizes, ask them to (in this case, you can use the SHIFT key to place
the dimension value).

Designation of surface roughness

Command for making new designations

991
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the toolbar - click on the icon roughness.

From the command line (Command: mcSurf).

Calling commands checkboxes old notation

From the toolbar - click on the icon roughness (Old).

From the command line (Command: mcSurfold).

Fundamental rules
By specifying the location of said line-segment illuminated balloons (as, for example, when the size
deposition). Sign is positioned perpendicular to the surface.
To organize the sign without callouts press the Space key. Roughness value can be set from the
context menu.
This activates the opportunity checkboxes neukaznnoy roughness and conclusion mark in brackets.
roughness values can be set automatically depending on the quality class of the specified size. To
do this, click on the icon depends on the size of the dialog box, and specify the roughness size to
grade-stamped.

Command Options

Copying Properties

Add line-callout

Depends on the size - lets you choose the size according to checkboxes

Arrow type - allows you to specify an arrow callout

992
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you activate this option, and you press OK in the dialog box surface roughness roughness
designation affixed to the current values.

In the input field via the context menu, you can choose from a number of roughness:

Converting old symbol roughness converts old symbol of a new roughness.

Tolerances of feature control frame

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon feature control frame.

From the command line (Command: mcTol).

Auto Sorting
Changing the graphic notation
Link to dimensions

Set additional leader

Specify base

Link to dimensions

993
nanoCAD Mechanica

Insert separator

Datum identifier

Main menu: Mechanics - Symbols - Datum identifier.

Toolbar: Datum identifier (toolbar " Symbols").

Command line: MCDATID.

Operating procedure
For installation refer to the base you want to call and click to select the location designations.

Designation database automatically selects a free letter.

Sections

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon sections.

From the command line (Command: spSect).

Rules for placing the sign

Click on the icon sections, then define the position of the cut line.

Press the ENTER key and using the context menu, select the direction of the arrows with respect to
the cut line.

Command Options
Auto Sort
Browse used letters
Notation of the designation of the external element
Editing the kinds, sizes, sections

Command Options

One of the program options,available when When labelling views , cuts and sections is the support
for quality control function.

994
nanoCAD Mechanica

Lettered labels are placed in alphabetical order and drawing zones and sheets are automatically
labelled.The command used to label views, cuts and sections allows dynamic linking of lebel to a
specific entry.

Auto Sort

If the pointer Auto Sort included primarily designated species then, sections.

When the Autosorting box is checked, the system automatically labels views first and then labels
sections and cuts, using alphabet letters.

To have the application follow the autosorting rules, Select the preferred labelling method for the
inserted mark. The user can turn on the Zone automatically option in the GM Properties window. If
this option is on, moving a label to another position in the drawing or changing the sheet layout will
automatically update the zone label on all sheets.

Viewing previously used letter

When autosorting is off, letter labelling of views, cuts and sections is manual. To check what letters
have already been used for labelling, right click the letter entry field.A dialog will appear showing all
the letters which were entered earlier.

995
nanoCAD Mechanica

For setting the type for sheet numbering open dialog window Setting , Sheet template options \
Forms, sections ...\Template for instructions sheet.

Creating a scaled Fragment Leader

Clicking on the icon the detail requested to indicate the center of the circle outline for subsequent
excision fragment existing drawing.

Further specifies the radius of the circle and placed lettering. If drawing the automatic collation,
callout lettering already has a parameter.

After this, a typical window for filling notation views, sections. Introduce the necessary changes, and
the scale is assigned to press OK.

After selecting the scale fragment view command , the application suggests the centre point for the
contour of a scaled detail.Set the radious of the circle and place the lettered label. If autosorting is
on the letter on the leader note is already defined. After this is done , the standard view, cuts,
sections, dialog appears makes the desired parameter changes and set the scale then click ok.

Placing large species selection

When working in a layout change in the scale type is automatically reflected in the detail view.
Double click the left mouse button on the remote sign the form, set the scale of 2:1 and complete
command - detail view updates automatically.

Editing the kinds, sections

To edit view/cut/section label, double left-click any label elements(or use a single right click).The
views, cuts, sections, dialog appears, in which all the desired parameters can be changed at will.

996
nanoCAD Mechanica

Using native tools to displace these labels may result in loss of integrity within the application used
for zoning and zone distribution in this case, use the rebuild function.

Welding...

Main menu: Mechanics - Weld - Welding....

Toolbar: Welding... (toolbar " Weld" ).

Command line: MCISOWELD.

Setting notes refer to welding.

The dialog box consists of three tabs:

General

On the tab, the graphical display and fill in the drawing note.

For convenient entry process, you can use Process list.

Process list poddrerzhivaet multiple selection processes.

997
nanoCAD Mechanica

Above side

Tab necessary to fill in the values above the side

The type of weld and its parameters.

Below side

Tab necessary to fill in the values below the side

The type of weld and its parameters.

998
nanoCAD Mechanica

Simple welding

Main menu:Mechanica - Symbols - Permanent connection - Simple welding.

Toolbar: Simple welding ( Symbols ).

Command line:MCWLEG.

This command is used to render the weld leg between two intersecting segments.

1. Enter the first rib.

2. Enter the second rib.
3. Press "Enter" or right mouse button to exit the cyclic command.

Weld seam

Main menu:Machanica - Symbols - Permanent Connection- Weld seam.

Toolbar: Weld seam ( Symbols ).

Command line:MCWELD.

1. In the dialog box "Weld seam" press the button corresponding to the desired type of weld.
Click OK.

2. Specify the first point of the circuit (or P - polyline, C - circle M - magnet).
3. Specify the next point of the contour (or L - line A - arc, C - close, U - rollback, M - a method
for constructing the arc).
4. Press Enter or right mouse button to exit the cyclic command.

In the dialog box are available 16 types of welds. Each type of weld corresponds to the button with
his picture. To select the desired type of seam, press the button and confirm with the OK button.

999
nanoCAD Mechanica

Construction of the circuit is made by the following methods:

L - via line: construction of straight segments of the weld points introduced;

A - by arc: construction of the weld arc segments in three points;

C - close: automatic generation of the last segment, closing the main line of the weld;

U - recoil: undo the last segment of the weld;

M - a method for constructing the arc: T - tangentially, S - by three points.

Button Side hatch allows you to select the direction of the hatch.

Change the direction of the hatch, you can select the "handle" the reflection side hatch:

Fixed joint

Main Menu:Mechanica - Symbols - Permanent connection - Fixed joint.

Toolbar: Fixed joint ( ESKD Symbols ).

Command line:MCFIX.

1. Specify where permanent connection.

2. Specify break point line-outs break point line-outs.
3. Specify the end point of the line-outs.
4. In the dialog box "Joints" set the type of connection.

1000
nanoCAD Mechanica

On the "Simple representation" select the type of permanent connection. If you see a tab "Full
representation", switch to it and adjust the designation of permanent connection.

To automatically count the number of identical welds in the drawing, move the cursor to the input
field and click the left mouse button. In the dialog box, enter the number of the weld, and then click
.

After this will be an automatic calculation of all welds with this number in the drawing:

1001
nanoCAD Mechanica

To edit text fields designate permanent link, left-click the relevant part of the full image, the result
will be a dialogue input

In the context menu of the text box of this dialog box is available auxiliary commands:

List of frequently used symbols.

History.
Command "Get with the drawing" allows you to copy values from the drawing objects.
Paste "Symbols" from the list or from the full symbol table.

The editing dialog values are also available buttons to quickly insert special characters designate the
welded joint:

- Soldered leg;

1002
nanoCAD Mechanica

- Remove weld reinforcement;

- Treat seam overflows and unevenness with graded junction to parent metal;

- Discrete double unfaced seam;

- Discrete double unfaced seam;

-Opened contour seam.

Tooltips on buttons illustrate the value of a character.

Button Copy properties allows you to copy the properties of an existing drawing size.

Control buttons dialogue editing:

Close dialog and save changes (Ok)

Close the dialog without saving changes (Cancel)

By clicking the left mouse button in the relevant part of the full image, you can enable or disable the
additional graphic elements in the designation:

On the "Simple representation" dialog permanent connection at the bottom of two additional buttons
are available:

Place spot welds. Designed for checkboxes in the drawing marks the weld points.

Along closed contour. It is intended to add the symbol "closed loop" to indicate compounds.

Simplified weld joint

Main menu:Mechanica - Symbols - Permanent connection - Simplified weld joint.

Toolbar: Simplified weld joint ( ESKD Symbols ).

Command line:MCWJ.

1003
nanoCAD Mechanica

As the rods and plates can be used primitives nanoCAD: circle and polyline (a
special case polylines: rectangles, and polygons).

Important! To use the unit as a plate or an object from the database, you must use when
choosing an instrument Magnet plate for constructing the circuit plate.

Primitives must be tangent to each other.

Type: two rods overlap joints.

To add an overlap joint:

1. Call the command.

2. Select the drawing first rod .
3. Select the second rod.
4. To select the direction of one-way seam weld placement.

Two-way joint.

One-way joint.

Two-way joint.

Type: T-connection between two rods..

To add a T-joints:

1. Call the command.

2. Select the drawing first plate .
3. Select the second plate.
4. To select the direction of one-way seam weld placement.

Two-way joint.

One-way joint.

Two-way joint.

1004
nanoCAD Mechanica

Two-way joint.

Type: two plates overlap joints.

To add an overlap joint:

1. Call the command.

2. Select the drawing first plate.
3. Select the second plate.
4. To select the direction of one-way seam weld placement.

Corner seam-sided.

Corner sided seam.

Type: Butt joint of two plates.

To add a butt joint:

1. Call the command.

2. Select the drawing first plate .
3. Select the second plate.
4. To select the direction of one-way seam weld placement.

One-way butt weld.

Sided butt weld.

One-way butt weld.

Sided butt weld.

Type: Angular connection of two plates.

To add a butt joint:

1. Call the command.

2. Select the drawing first plate.
3. Select the second plate.
4. To select the direction of one-way seam weld placement.

Corner seam-sided.

Corner seam-sided.

1005
nanoCAD Mechanica

Edge preparation

Main menu:Mechanica - Symbols - Permanent connection- Edge preparation.

Toolbar: Edge preparation ( ESKD Symbols ).

Command line:MCEDGEPREPARATION.

Provides cutting edge parts in the drawing.

Elements of the dialogue:

1)The list of standard cutting edges for welding;

2) List of types of connection plates welded: Butt, T-bar, angle;

3) List of connection options;

1006
nanoCAD Mechanica

4) Filter the list by the thickness of the plates;

When you enter a numeric value thickness dialogue filters only those types of cutting edges,
matching the thickness of the part. The filter is made by pressing the "Apply filter", or by
pressing Enter. The value of the thickness in the filter can be measured by the meter to be launched
on the "Measure".

5) Zoom menu created design elements

Menu is disabled if Auto is enabled check box. In this case, the scale created by the size and design
elements set to the current scale decoration.

If you turn off Auto box, it will be possible to create a drawing cutting edges in arbitrary scale is
selected in this dialog.

Operation

For the cutting edges must be vyponit following:

1. Select the type of connection: butt, T-bar or angle;

2. If necessary, filter preparation method edges, depending on their thickness. This can be done
directly by entering the minimum thickness of the edges, or by measuring the drawing;
3. Determine the scope of dimension lines;
4. Double-click method of preparing the edges;
5. Specify the edge of the weld joint. Depending on the method of preparation is required to
select the left and right edges alternately.

1007
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you create a cutting edge bevel one team will cycle to offer select sites for the creation of
such ramps.

When you create a cutting edge bevel two team provides consistently indicate bevel for one, and
then to other parts of the joint.

The plates can be used as primitives nanoCAD, as well as objects nanoCAD

Mechanics.
Turn inserted edge welded connection can hold down Shift. It is necessary to
Important!
include the "Object Snap" mode and "nearest" or in the settings nanoCAD
Mechanics against the item "Connections" Nearest "automatically when you
insert objects" put "Yes".

Sign marking and branding

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Labeling and marking .

From the command line (Command: mcMark).

Binding notation paragraph specifications

Command Options
In addition to applying the graphic sign, nanoCAD Mechanics 6 allows you to automatically add to its
designation number of the item specifications.

If you change the order of the paragraphs of technical requirements "related" item in the graphical
notation sign marking and branding is updated automatically.

1008
nanoCAD Mechanica

Marking. Identification markings on the drawing

Branding. Designation marking the drawing

Arrow type "Arrow"

Arrow type "Point"

Opening editor specifications. In the field next to the button shows the number of specifications
of the selected item

Labelling
Command mcMark prompts you to specify start position callouts:

Command: Specify the location of the marking.

When given the first point, it draws the sign marking. Before you specify the position of the mark, it
can be set in the context menu by clicking the right mouse button.

In the context menu you can set the type of leader line (or arrow point) and type of sign. Choice of
parameters in the context menu is displayed immediately on the screen

Specify the location of the sign. A dialog box appears Labeling and marking for the parameters for
labeling.

Binding notation paragraph specifications

1009
nanoCAD Mechanica

Click on the icon Technical requirements . A dialog box editor specifications.

In the editor of technical requirements type the desired text or select it from the library.

When selecting text from the library, double click the left mouse button - the text will be moved
from the window to the editor base specifications.

Click on the button Close to go into the editor specifications.

Click on the button ОК in the editor window and the main dialog. Text automatically be placed on
the first sheet of a stamp.

Item number in the specifications will be the same number as in the designation of the
drawing, even after changing the order of items in the editor.

Mechanical note

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Mechanical note.

From the command line (Command: spNote).

Fundamental rules

Command Options
Add string Remove string
Simple note Multiline note
Without an arrow Arrow
Point Open arrow
Half arrow Insert special character
Add extension line
Technical condition
Match Properties

In the input field is available context menu

1010
nanoCAD Mechanica

Submenu (in our example - the letter B) is activated in the case of the auto sort
Note:
mode when applying lettering on the drawing.

Surface - marking base surface. (If you use auto-sorting mode during the insertion of
alphabetical denotation).

Dimension - the size designation.

Other - designation of other elements, such as holes.

Dulling dimension - special callout to indicate blunting edges

Menu "History" contains a list of the last input lines.

Menu "Recent" is a list, specified by user.

1011
nanoCAD Mechanica

Typing the desired text notes, you can add it to the list of frequently used for instant reference.

Menu item " pick from drawing" allows you to collect text and numerical data from the drawing.

To insert a text callout graphics nanoCAD Mechanics6 (texture symbols, standard parts) should use
the menu item "to introduce ...".

Such links can be saved as a template (Context Menu | Templates | Append), and the
subsequent insertion of a new leader to use this template.

When you need to save not only the leader text, but all of its parameters, you need to create a
callout, defining it related parameters:

1012
nanoCAD Mechanica

Further, by selecting it from the context menu to specify - save as a template.

Specify a folder in the database and the template name callouts may subsequently embed it on
drawing

Adaptive communication with new objects and their parameters will be saved.

Comb leader note

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Comb leader note.

From the command line (Command: spNoteC).

Command Options

1013
nanoCAD Mechanica

Without an arrow

Arrow

Point

Insert a special character

Add extension line

Match Properties

Select line

Drop-down menu position adjustment line shelves and its context menu

Fundamental rules

When specifying the location of the line-outs specified segment is highlighted (as well as the size of
the substrate).

1014
nanoCAD Mechanica

Leader and setting the necessary angle of inclination, click on the right mouse button and set the
position of the shelves for text.

Shelf position can be controlled from the context menu.

To edit callouts double tap it on the left mouse button and edit the parameters refer to the dialog
box.

Another way to edit - moving graphic elements for nodal points as shown below:

Editing Notes
On the toolbar, Notes are three buttons for editing lines, notes:

Append Leader. Pick a point on the object, if necessary, select the number of intermediate points
forming a line break-out. Pick a point on the desired balloon inserted into a drawing for a
complete command.

From the command line command: sppladd.

Detach Leader. Select the Note Leader, which should be removed.

From the command line command: sppldel.

Edit leader. Select a leader in the drawing to move and specify a point in the required leader to
fix a new position for the leader.

From the command line command: spplrec.

Designation slope

Toolbar: Click the button designation slope toolbar MechaniCS Legend.

From the command line command: spgrad.

1015
nanoCAD Mechanica

Menu: MechaniCS > Legend>> Designation slope

1. Select the drawing line, for which you want to put down the slope.
2. Be the designation slope on the selected line or shelf-balloon.
3. Configuration dialog notation available on command "P-properties" context menu.

In the dialog box slope adjust the view of the notation:

1. Indicate the type designation - slope or taper.

2. If necessary, disable the associative connection, turning off the button (at prostanovkoy
associative mode is switched automatically.) Specify the value in the input field gradient or
taper.
3. Select from the drop-down list way to represent units slope:
as is
attitude
decimal
percentage
ppm
degree
4. Specify the type of bias:
the cut
on the plan

Position

Command
From the toolbar - click on the icon Position

From the command line (Command: spPos).

Fundamental rules
This command draws the drawing reference numerals used in the drawings.

Sequencing
Insert position by specifying the datum marker

1016
nanoCAD Mechanica

Next, mark the position statement of the position:

Inserted into a single command cycle positions are automatically numbered

To specify additional options position must call dialog "Position", where you can specify the text
position display option arrows (switches below the text input field).

1017
nanoCAD Mechanica

Hole group

Command
From the toolbar - hole group.

From the command line (Command: spFill).

Command Options
Command draws holes universally. With it you can render as a new hole with the center lines, and
an indication of the group of holes assign them common properties with filling any sector.

Fill sectors and display elements holes direct indication is given in graphical dialog.

To pre-set parameters of the future holes immediately after clicking on the icon Hole group dialog
window Hole group (click the right mouse button) and set the aperture.

1018
nanoCAD Mechanica

Match Properties

You can use this option if the figure already has holes rendered using commands Hole group.

Select holes

Create holes

The following parameters are used to automatically generate a table of holes:

Number - Specifies the number of holes in the group.

Description - Specifies the field description table holes.
Standard - sets the field of standard hole table
Roughness - allows you to specify roughness holes (shown in Table holes).

Switches section Representation run rendering elements of Holes:

1019
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting the aperture radius

Select the icon in the dialog box Creating hole.

Click the right mouse button. In the context menu select the string radius.

Set the command line necessary radius and press ENTER.

Dialog box reappears Holes. Command can be repeated. To dynamically set the radius on the
screen, hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor.

Editing with Grips

You can use grips to resize the hole, move its mark, turning the hole and toggle the display of the
constituent elements.

1020
nanoCAD Mechanica

Edit a group of holes

In the dialog box holes click on the icon Select holes select a group of holes (you can select holes by
the frame). All changes in the dialog box are immediately reflected in the drawing.

When you click on Apply in the selected group of holes are specified
parameters. When this command is not complete, but resets the current
selection apertures in order to be able to insert an additional group of holes with
Note:
these parameters in the manual mode (button Create hole), or selecting
another set of holes (the button select holes).

Hole chart

Call team
From the toolbar - click on the icon "Hole Table".

From the command line (Command: mcHoleChart).

This command is used to create automatically updated statements of the group of holes.

Sequencing
After the start command is necessary to specify the insertion point of the coordinate system (origin)
and the angle of rotation.

1021
nanoCAD Mechanica

Next you need to specify an existing drawing circles or holes created with the "Fill holes".

In addition, you can create a hole by selecting from the context menu optio N-create.

In the dialog you need to specify the name of the coordinate system and click "List of
coordinates", and then specify the position of the table in the drawing.

The tables will be updated automatically.

Editing designation of the coordinate system

Dialog

In the "Hole Table" you can set the type koordiantnoy system.
1022
nanoCAD Mechanica

Switch the type of coordinate system - Cartesian or polar.

Buttons to create tables of holes:

The list of coordinates - generated automatically updates the table with the coordinates of each
hole.

Hole table - shaped table, grouped by the diameter of the hole. Each group is assigned to the same
holes lettering.

Table notations - shaped table, grouped by graphic symbols holes.

Numbered holes - holes automatically assigns consecutive numbers or letters (according to the
setting "Method designation holes").

Add holes, remove holes - allows you to add to the record or remove it from the hole.
The field value "Name coordinate system" is added to the marking holes in the form of a prefix.

Settings hole table

In the settings hole table set dimensions and color notation system kordinaty.

In the settings you can choose from a database of templates for the list of tables coordinates hole
table and table notation.

Ways of a designation of holes: numbers and letters. Numerical designations are set from 1.

The sequence of the lettering is taken from the "Sort kinds of cuts \ letters sort".

Types of tables
Original drawings:

1023
nanoCAD Mechanica

Table notations:

Table of coordinates (Cartesian):

1024
nanoCAD Mechanica

If it's set way to denote holes - letter, it is possible to form a hole table:

To see the drawing holes associated with this coordinate system, double-click on the anchor.

1025
nanoCAD Mechanica

Universal marker
Tool Universal marker designed specifically to create a link between any graphic object (primitive)
nanoCAD and spreadsheet-specification. Universal marker is the translator of data objects in a
drawing table Construction Site 6 through special funds - the attributes of the marker.

Attributes marker can be visible and hidden. Values visible attributes are displayed in the drawing as
text strings.

Marker as to nanoCAD Mechanics 6 can be stored in the library of objects and reuse. Furthermore, it
may be included in the group of objects nanoCAD Mechanics 6, enabling to specify the entire
functional groups.

Rules for creating a marker

Editing marker
Context menu entry fields

1026
nanoCAD Mechanica

Context menu entry fields

In the context menu the following entry is available.

History - recall last entry.

Recent - recall the most frequently used values.

Superscript - insert superscript (a combination of Ctrl+Up).

Subscript - insert a subscript (a combination of Ctrl+ Down ).

Insert division - insert shot.

Pick from drawing - the command allows you to take data from the drawing and the properties of a
standard part. When you select this command, the panel Select the value apperas :

Measure distance (Z) - to take drawing diamensionally linear or geometric size. Command can be
selected by pressing Z.

Measure angle (X) - take the angular size of the drawing. Command can be selected by pressing
X.

Measure Perimeter (C) - to take drawing the perimeter of a closed polygonal line or length.
Command can be selected by pressing C.

Measure area (V) - take the value of the drawing area of the closed loop. Command can be called
by pressing V.

Complex area(Shift+V) - take a few drawing value areas closed loop.

Calculator (M) - Calculate the number with built-in calculator in nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Take from notes (,) - insert text information from the notebook.

Take from property (B) - allows you to take command of the sub-parameters database in
Construction Site 6. Parameter is inserted preserving the dynamic link with the object. When you
change a parameter line items are changed in the input field.

1027
nanoCAD Mechanica

Note: To insert static text, hold the Ctrl key while selecting parameter.

Mark text object (N) - to take the text from the drawing.

Cancel - stop the command and return to the Previous menu.

Symbols - inserting special characters

Undo - Undo the last command (the combination of Ctrl+Z).

Clipboard operations

Cut (a combination of Ctrl+X).

Copy (combination Ctrl+C).

Paste (a combination of Ctrl+V).

Delete - Delete the entry field.

Select all - highlight the input field.

1028
nanoCAD Mechanica

Legend sizes and surfaces

Dimension Mark size

From the toolbar - click on the icon size marker.

From the command line (Command: mcSk).

Terms and conditions

This function is performed in accordance with GOST 3.1128-93,

п.п.4.3.5.6, 4.3.5.7, 4.3.6.

The marker used to indicate the size of the processed surfaces and
controlled dimensions. In the first case, the checkboxes for all the
marker is indicated on the drawing, the geometrical object.
However, he highlighted. Confirm your selection by clicking the left
mouse button.

Further re-clicking the left mouse button indicates the position of the
detail marker. When checkboxes surface marker extension line ends
pointer - arrow.

For checkboxes marker size as selected dimensional geometry and

extension line size. In this case, the guide line marker has no index
and is an extension of the dimension line.

Numbering markers sequentially through the work of the team and

begins with one. If the command is interrupted and re-starts
notation of the markers, the first marker again stamped with a value
of 1.

To restore Bates markers used command Sorting markers.

Mark Sort
From the toolbar - click on the icon Mark sort.

From the command line (Command: mcSkSort).

1029
nanoCAD Mechanica

After calling the command given by the initial marker number (the default is one), and a selectable
marker sketch.

After selecting all the markers are sorted sequence numbers clockwise from the top left of the
marker. Position of the markers are also adjusted in accordance with the requirements of GOST
3.1128-93. That is, all the markers are located on the bounding box. To indicate the machined
surfaces, use the command Work surface mark.

Command Surface mark

From the toolbar - click on the icon surface mark.

From the command line (Command: mcSkBold).

The purpose of this command to set the line width of machined surfaces. In accordance with the
requirements of the selected lines obtained thickness of twice the thickness of the main line. The
thickness of the base line setup in the nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

1030
nanoCAD Mechanica

Command Refresh marker

From the command line (Command: mcSkrenum).

Puts numbers in order on the non-associative markers.

Technical condition

Toolbar: Click the button Technical condition toolbarMechaniCS text.

From the command line command: sptt

Menu: MechaniCS > Text >> Technical condition

When writing the technical requirements of paragraphs (CT) reference may be made in sentence of
technical requirements for any position or view affixed.

As textual information are tolerances and dimensions, drawing area, the kinds, sections, marking
the symbols, symbols of welded joints positions.

Changing the value of the text information (say, item number details) will automatically cause a
change in the text of the TT. If this item was removed, a warning about the need to check the
requirements of a particular item.

Relationship between CT and marking works in the opposite direction. Reorder points requirements
(numbering) is automatically reflected in the designation of the drawing (with checkboxes, for
example, sign marking, which stands in the designation of the item number of technical
requirements).

Editor window

Editor specifications available all of the context menu.

Clear

This button removes all items in the editor window.

1031
nanoCAD Mechanica

Load from file

In the editor window, you can load an external file format RTF. In Windows Explorer, locate the file
to disk and open it for editing.

Save to file

Information from a window specifications can be saved to an external file with the RTF. Used special
characters in the editor when sending to an external file is lost.

Add technical condition

Checkboxes for automatic item numbers and mining requirements specifications due to the markings
on the drawing use of this command is mandatory. To insert a new item specifications use the
shortcut CTRL + ENTER.

Delete technical condition

To remove an item requirements set cursor anywhere in the paragraph text to delete.

To delete an item specifications use the shortcut CTRL + DEL.

Move down requirements

Place your cursor anywhere in the paragraph and move the text, click the icon down arrow. ENTER
key does not move items down requirements.

Move up requirements

Place your cursor anywhere in the paragraph and move the text, click the icon up arrow.

Superscript/subscript

Inserting fractions

In the dialog box, set the numerator and denominator.

Switch controls the display of the slash.

Insert tolerances

Insert material grade

Calculator

1032
nanoCAD Mechanica

Notebook

Insert view / Profile

Command Implement object allows to insert in the specifications objects nanoCAD Mechanics6
(standard parts, signs of roughness, etc.). When you right-click on the inserted object, there are
additional options

Converting text nanoCAD editor TT

You can convert to TT editor text entries in the drawing. To do this, follow these steps:

Select the text.

Invoke the TT. A dialog box Import text:

Binding designation of the section, section

Similarly, binding points positions are linking text specifications labeled species, cuts and sections.

In the editor, place the cursor on the TT insertion point associated designations and click Insert view
/ Profile.

Note: The associated information is editor TT braces red.

Setting text
To configure text TT (height and tilt font, indentation of the main inscription, etc.) the dialog window
Settings.

Technical characteristics

Toolbar: Click the button technical characteristics toolbar MechaniCS Text.

From the command line command: sptd

Menu: MechaniCS > Text >> technical characteristics

Work with the technical description of the editor is similar to working with the editor of TT. The main
difference is that the typed text can be placed anywhere in the drawing.

1033
nanoCAD Mechanica

When writing numerical values for each item, place the cursor at the end of the line, and then press
Tab.

The size of the tab can be set the same as when operating in MS World.

Value for the selected text line spacing is set using the menu or by pressing

ctrl+1 - single line spacing;

ctrl+2 - double line spacing;
ctrl+5 - half line spacing.

Editor window
Editor specifications all available in the context menu. To do this, click on the right mouse button
with the cursor in the editor.

Clear

This button removes all items in the editor window.

Load from file

In the editor window, you can load an external file format RTF. In Windows Explorer, locate the file
to disk and open it for editing.

Save to file

Information from the editor window can be saved to an external file with the RTF.

Add technical condition

It is necessary to use this command to automatically number items in the TX editor window and run
the routine which cross-references TX items to the drawing denotations. To insert a new TP item,
use the CTRL+ENTER key combination.

1034
nanoCAD Mechanica

Delete technical condition

To remove an item, place the cursor in the characteristics of any place text to delete the paragraph.

Item TX can remove the key combination CTRL + DEL.

Move item features up / down

Place your cursor anywhere in the paragraph and move the text, click the icon.

Insert special symbols,, fractions, calculator and materials

Notebook

Opens notebook

Creating a hatch

Call

Toolbar: Click the button Create a hatch on the toolbar MechaniCS Utilities

From the command line command: spHpattern

Menu: MechaniCS > Utilities >> Create hatching

In nanoCAD Mechanics it is possible to create hatches on a defined pattern - using the sketch tool
Creating hatching. Created using a hatch pattern is recorded as a separate file format *.pat
nanoCAD and can be used in other projects, or other users.

When you create a sample, you must abide by the rules:

Sketch the area you should be at the beginning of the world coordinate system nanoCAD,
dimensions sketch area should not be more than 300x300mm (units nanoCAD). Sketch lines
should be small in size.
Drawing should be performed only by segments (LINES) nanoCAD. Not allowed perform sketch
arcs, circles. Curved objects recommended approximated to polylines without arc segments.
Polyline in the sketch should be partitioned into segments.
In the sketch must be observed apparent periodicity.In the sketch must include at least three
repeating units of future hatching.
Drawing must be performed segments of contrasting colors. For example: red, and black
(white). Hatch creation tool PAT_Shaper recognizes periodicity in a sketch by color lines.
When recognizing automatically identified gaps in the lines of the sketch, if the selected
sample line break is abroad choice - in the fill line will be determined as continuous.

Then follow these steps:

1. Create a rectangle nanoCAD size 300x300 mm, place it in the bottom left corner at the origin
0,0,0
2. Create a sketch of one component of future hatching "conifer group landing." Need to perform
a sketch created within the rectangle. Assign a color to each segment of the sketch.

1035
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. With the tools nanoCAD or nanoCAD Mechanics6 create a 3x3 array of objects within the
rectangle.

4. Locate and turn left mouse button tool Creating Hatch

5. Crossing window nanoCAD select the entire sketch. Bounding rectangle area sketch does not
need to allocate. Press Enter. Going analysis of the selected track, if the sketch does not
satisfy the conditions, a message box appears.
6. In the dialog box Save sample specify the name and path of the hatch pattern.

You cannot use names: "Acad.pat", "Acadiso.pat". It is recommended to create

Important!
file in directory Support of nanoCAD

7. Perform a closed geometric figure contour shading future. Turn the tool Hatch
(Hatch)nanoCAD.
8. In the dialog box, Hatch / Fill contour, switch type hatching User
9. Left-click on the field structure. Dialog box palette hatch patterns. Tab user select *.pat
file you created sample.
10. Hatch created using the tool Create hatch fully accepts all the properties of the hatch
nanoCAD: associativity, the ability to zoom, angle, overlay tolerance closed.

1036
nanoCAD Mechanica

Drawing file *. Dwg, which used a unique shading, when transferring to another
Important! user must be sent together with the file *. Pat hatch pattern. To successfully use
the broadcast team ETransmit (eTransmit) nanoCAD
11. In some cases special treatment specify path to the new file additional resources hatching.
This is done in the Settings dialog / Files nanoCAD.

Measurements

Toolbar: Click the button Measurements toolbar Construction Utilities

From the command line command: spmeasure

Menu: MechaniCS> Utilities >> Measure

Measurements or tool with Mark drawing is designed to extract various properties of objects in the
drawing.

After selecting the command a dialog box value picker opens.

Measure distance. Measures the distance between two points, radius or diameter. Switching
the measurement method is via the context menu.

Measure angle. Measures the angle.

Measure Perimeter. Measure the perimeter of the closed area, the length of a closed polyline
or circle.

Measure area. Measures the area of the closed area. Select an area in two ways: 1 - Click
inside the closed loop, 2 - Click on the closed polyline or circle.
1037
nanoCAD Mechanica

Complex area. Measures the area of several loops. Selecting the area is carried out: 1 - Click to
specify the first closed loop, 2 - Click to specify the second closed loop 3 - Press Enter to complete
the command.

Take from property. Allows you to get the value of the parameter selected in the drawing
object nanoCAD Mechanics6.

Take from text. Returns the value of the selected single-line or multi-line text.

Calculate. Opens calculator.

Take from notes. Opens the notebook.

The measured values are displayed in the dialog box.

If universal measuring time was part of a command (for example, the dialog box nanoCAD
Mechanics6 text context menu command), the measured value is transmitted to the command being
executed.

Fragment Copy

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button Copy fragment toolbar MechaniCS Utilities

From the command line command: spcopy

Menu: MechaniCS > Utilities >> fragment copy

The command is used to create remote views of the drawing.

1. Select the drawing center point for the detail view.

2. Select the area of the drawing. In the context menu, you can choose a certain kind of
marquee - circle or rounded rectangle. Secure selection click.
3. Specify the drawing center remote fragment. available in the context menu command "0-cut"
to remove the original objects from the drawing.

Plate Array

Toolbar: Click the button layout of the tiles on the toolbar construction Utilities
1038
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the command line command: sppltarray

Menu: MechaniCS > Utilities >> plate array

Command to tile layouts for a given circuit.

1. Choose from a base tile pattern and place it on the drawing.

2. Press the plate array.

3. In the opened window, click the plate shema and specify the token group.

4. Select Trim mode extreme tiles .

Trim plates by area border - tiles clipped to the boundary of the layout. Circuit tile
becomes open. This tile is taken into account in property "Cut". This mode is not
available if you enable the check box "Make each tile a separate."
Include trimmed plates - extreme tiles stacked atop circuit layout.
Exclude trimmed plates - tiles, overlapping circuit layouts do not fit.
Seect border type face- if tiles have execution end elements will be selected most
podhodyaeschee. When the layout of the area selected by the execution system names:
Whole, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. When the layout along the border all versions checked
sequentially, regardless of names.

1039
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Create each plate as a separate object.

If the box is checked, the result will be a group of independent layout objects - copies of
the original objects. This mode does not support cutting elements on the boundaries of
the area, but allows more flexibility to edit the result.

When the check box is created off a single object that includes all geometry. In the
properties of this object will be information on the number, weight and costs of each type
of tiles, as well as the total weight (based on the whole tiles) and cost. You can delete
individual tiles by clicking on them with the right. In this case the total amount will be
adjusted, weight and cost.

6. Determine the work area tiles.

auto detect - layout area defined contour, which is located inside the tile pattern. In the
inner islands stacked tiles will not.
magnet - loop selection tool "magnet".
select - area layout is selected in the drawing indicating one or more loops.
border - tiles splits along the perimeter or primitives nanoCAD. Cropping mode in this
case will simulate laying curbs.
7. To complete the command, press OK.

Note: Creating a template tile layouts can be done using Object Wizard.

Creating an array of objects

Toolbar: Click the button Creating an array

Replication called ordered distribution of copies of objects by step and quantity. Duplication of
graphics in the nanoCAD Mechanics6 is performed using a dialog box arrays.

Four tabs in the Arrays dialog box define four (4) different object replications.

Arrays along an arbitrary path

Arrays for arc trajectory
Rectangular array
An array of step
Preview array

For the distribution of objects within a specified area used for an array field .

Arrays

Command

1040
nanoCAD Mechanica

From the toolbar - click on the icon arrays.

From the command line (Command: mcArray).

Command Options
Command Arrays expands the capability of the team nanoCAD.

You can build an array of selected objects in the drawing, as well as objects that are inserted from
the database nanoCAD Mechanics 6, blocks or external files.

The user may generate several types of arrays:

trajectory;
arc

1041
nanoCAD Mechanica

rectangular;

stairs.

1042
nanoCAD Mechanica

Options are available for all of these:

overlap control;
Array object selection;
array preview.
Removal of the source objects;after the creation of the array the source object are removed
from the drawing.

Selecting elements in the array

One can select items by directly drawing. After selecting the number of items displayed in
parentheses.

When you select an array of database dialog opens insert standard parts nanoCAD Mechanics 6
(base section "Links").

When inserting an object from the block invited to indicate DWG-file on disk, and you can select to
block.

Overlapping objects

1043
nanoCAD Mechanica

Preview

Option Preview is available after selecting the object (options Selection, Box of base , insert the
block ) and specify a path or the center of the array.

Arrays along an arbitrary path(Trajectory)

1. Tab Path enter the governing parameters.
2. Follow The selection object (object selection).
3. Specify the base point.
4. Select trajectory.
5. Follow View .
6. Click OK to complete the command.

1044
nanoCAD Mechanica

At the top of the window is a group of controls placement, which allows you to select:

Quantity;
Copy step;
Base point;
Step correction;

In the drop-down list make a choice of Overlap:

Transparent objects;
Next under preceding;
Next Over preceding;
Interleave.

Button pick from drawing step allows you to select copies of the objects in the drawing.

Switch Show hidden line controls the display of hidden lines in the drawing. If the switch is on the
hidden lines are displayed in the drawing.

Switch Rotate copies controls the orientation of the copied object. If the switch is on when copying
objects are rotated so that the vector Y was directed perpendicularly to the path (as shown in the
figure).

Button Selection to select the replication object in the drawing.

Button from the base to select the object from the database replication of
standard elements.

Button Base point lets you choose the base point of duplicated object (normally it should be
expressed in the center or corner of the object).

Button select a trajectory to select a graphic object, along which you will be replicating. As the
trajectory can be used lines, polylines, arcs, circles.

1045
nanoCAD Mechanica

Arrays for arc trajectory

1. Tab Arc enter the governing parameters.
2. Follow The selection object (object selection).
3. Select Center array.
4. Follow Preview .
5. Click OK to complete the command.

At the top of the window is a control group accommodation, which lets you choose placing of
replicated objects:

By number and step;

By number and angle;
By step and corner;

In the input field Number specify the number of replicated objects.

In the entry field Step Angle enter the angle between the replicable elements.

In the input field angle specify the angle required.

1046
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button with Mark drawing step allows you to select the corner or angle with the drawing.

In the drop-down list make a choice of Overlap:

Transparent objects;
Next under preceding;
Next over preceding;
Interleave.

Switch Show hidden line controls the display of hidden lines in the drawing. If the switch is on the
hidden lines are displayed in the drawing.

Button Selection to select the replication object in the drawing.

Button insert from database used for selecting a center point which the objects
will be replicated.

Button array center used for selecting a center point which the objects will be replicated.

Switch Rotate copies controls the orientation of the copied object. If the switch is on the turn when
copying objects are shown in the figure.

Rectangular array
1. Command Rectangle enter key parameters.
2. Follow The selection object (object selection).
3. Follow Preview .
4. Click OK to complete the command.

1047
nanoCAD Mechanica

Enter the number of objects in the array horizontally and vertically, to specify the amount of
horizontal and vertical steps between objects.

Steps of an array
1. Tab steps enter the governing parameters.
2. Follow The selection object (object selection).
3. Follow View .
4. Click OK to complete the command.

Enter the number of objects in the array, specify the amount of horizontal and vertical step between
objects.

1048
nanoCAD Mechanica

Array preview
In the dialog box Arrays preview offers the opportunity to preview the array to create. Once all the
required parameters are selected the button , lights up, when you click on the drawing an
array of objects are shown, and a window control Preview appears.

Button Change returns to the dialog box "Arrays" to change the replication.

Button Exclude designed to specify an array of objects in the drawing, you do not want to display.
Button also has advanced features to select from an array of objects to be excluded:

Button OK to confirm the settings of the array and create it on the drawing.

Button Cancel to create an array without saving it on the drawing.

Array area

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button Area array on the toolbar " Utilities"

From the command line command: spardarray

Menu: MechaniCS > Utilities >> area array

The tool is designed for object replication within a given area.

1049
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Select the objects for replication. Press the object (s) and select the objects in the drawing.
2. Select the method of placing the copied objects by clicking on the button in the dialog box.

3. Specify the Step between objects copies and minimum offset from centre of object to
contour line from the edge of the area.
Step between adjacent copies specified in the input field. To specify the distance on the
screen, press
Minimum clearance is given in the input field. To select a value from the drawing
objects, click Pick from drawing .
4. Set the plot area of the array. Area can be set in three ways:
Create area of the sites. Adding a closed area made by clicking the left mouse
button inside the closed contour in the drawing. Clicking again inside the loop removes
the selected area of the set.
Select contour with the magnet . Contour plot area array is specified by the
instrument magnet.
Paint area. This command allows you to specify an arbitrary placement of copied
objects, providing a fixed spacing between adjacent copies.
This command is available only when you select the source objects to copy.
Construction of the field by moving the mouse cursor over the drawing (construction must begin with
the location of the original objects). When you move the cursor on the screen markers marking
insertions copied objects will appear.

1050
nanoCAD Mechanica

To remove the insert markers, press and hold down the Shift key on the keyboard. When you hover
over a marker, the marker will be removed.
To temporarily disable the placement of markers, press and hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard.
Complete the field by clicking the left mouse button.
5. After setting all the parameters array in the dialog box will display a string with the calculated
number of array elements.

6. Complete the array click OK

Drawing axis

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button to the axis Drawing toolbar MechaniCS Utilities

From the command line command: spaxis

Menu: MechaniCS > Utilities >> Drawing axis

1. Select the first object.

2. Select the second object.
3. Specify the first point of the center line (or Enter).
4. Specify second point of the center line (or Enter).

This command is used for building centerlines. The method depends on the construction of the
selected objects:

Select parallel segments. Axial line will be built between these segments.

Select non-parallel segments. Centerline will be built along the bisector of the angle
between the segments.
Before choosing the first point of the centerline of the available context menu command "0-
turn." You can change the direction of the axial line of construction (only available for
intersecting segments).

1051
nanoCAD Mechanica

Select three misalignment circles. Centers constructed on a circle passing through the centers
of the selected circles. Automatically added to the central axis for all the circles whose centers
coincide with the constructed circle centers.

Select one circle and press the Enter key or click the right mouse button. In this case, the
central axis lines are constructed on a circle selected.

1052
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fillet

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon Fillet.

From the command line (Command: spFillet).

Menu:MechaniCS > Utilities; Fillet

Command Options

Pick from drawing

Mode full trim contour lines

Mode partial trim lines to their intersection

Mode without cutting

Copying properties

Measure fillet. Tabulated fillet radius and the number

1053
nanoCAD Mechanica

Extra measurement. Stamped dimensions of the original geometry. Active only when the button
"dimensioned pairing"

Insert circle as fillet.

Double click the left mouse button or click the right mouse button in the input fields of values, a
context menu will open with a list of the last entry:

When a command from the context menu, the following options::

properties - Open the dialogue to change the chamfer .

new - Completion of a group of facets and the beginning of another. This command is used when
you need to, for example, several facets of the same size on the same site, and then with the same
dimensions - on the other:

Chamfer - Switch to build Circle. After you select the shortcut menu command opens this dialog
Pairing parameter setting interface.

polyline - Switching to chamfering along the selected polyline. This option is available if you have
selected the type of symmetric Circle: one length or two identical length. In operation, the cut-off
modes are ignored and dimensioning.

Features of the Command

Command works in 3D. To execute the command source primitives must lie in one plane

If you select the second object, press and hold SHIFT, then the angle will be formed (at the
intersection of the closure and isolation).

1054
nanoCAD Mechanica

For a pair of ARC-ARC additionally available pairing, combining internal and external touch.

For a pair of ARC-ARC additionally available pairing, combining internal and external touch.

Availability of different types of interfaces depends on the fillet radius. To the outside and combining
the radii need greater magnitude than the inner.

1055
nanoCAD Mechanica

When two parallel lines will be constructed pairing radius equal to half the distance between them
(regardless of the specified length). Automatically aligns the sides to the longest segment. When
two parallel lines will be constructed pairing radius equal to half the distance between them
(regardless of the specified length). Automatically aligns the sides to the longest segment.

Pairing works parallel segments and regions of the same polyline.

Side interface depends on the position of the mouse cursor when the second object

When you insert a polyline retains its integrity.

If the team is formed of two polylines one, it will be object of a single polyline.

If you select one polyline segments separated by other sites, all the intermediate portions are
removed.

1056
nanoCAD Mechanica

Chamfer

Command

From the toolbar - click on the icon chamfer.

From the command line (Command: spChamfer ).

Menu:MechaniCS > Utilities> chamfer

Command Options
This command is used for automatic and semi-automatic placement of face on the details with the
various versions and with the possibility of automatic dimensioning.

After clicking the command, it opens a dialog box settings Circle:

1057
nanoCAD Mechanica

Mode chamfering parts with two different sizes

Mode chamfering parts with two different sizes

Mode Chamfer length and angle in this mode instead of the length 2 displays the setting angle.

Mode full cutting contour lines

Mode partial cutting lines to their intersection

Mode without cutting

Measure Chamfer

Copy properties surrounding face

1058
nanoCAD Mechanica

Pick from drawing

Double click the left mouse button or click the right mouse button in the input fields of values,
context menu will open with a list of the last entry:

When a command from the context menu, the following options:

Propertise - Opening the dialogue to change the chamfer chamfer.

New - Completion of a group of facets and the beginning of another. This command is used when
you need to, for example, several facets of the same size on the same site, and then with the same
dimensions - on the other:

Fillet - Switch to build pairings. After you select the shortcut menu command opens this dialog
Pairing parameter setting interface.

Polyline - Switching to chamfering along the selected polyline. This option is available if you have
selected the type of symmetric Circle: one length or two identical length. In operation, the cut-off
modes are ignored and dimensioning.

Features of the command

The command works in 3D. To execute the command source primitives must lie in one plane.

If you select the second object, press and hold SHIFT, then the angle will be formed (at the
intersection of the closure and isolation).

1059
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you insert a polyline retains its integrity.

If the team is formed of two polylines one, it will be object to a single polyline.

If you select one polyline segments separated by other sites, all the intermediate portions are
removed.

1060
nanoCAD Mechanica

Breaks

Toolbar: Click the button to breaks.

From the command line command: spbreak.

1. Select the First point line break (fracture). In the context menu, select the form break
(fracture) (Linear/Two-linear/Curved/Two-curved/Tubular).
2. Specify the length of the line break (fracture).
3. Specify the width of the break (fracture). In the context menu of available commands by
moving the cursor (F-free movement, on the orthogonal motion).

Button Linear break

From the command line command: spbreak_linear.

1061
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button Two-linear break

From the command line command: spbreak_twolinear.

Button Curved break

From the command line command: spbreak_curved.

Button Two curved break

From the command line command: spbreak_twocurved.

Button Shaft break

From the command line command: spbreak_tubular.

Button Break Dimension line

From the command line command: spdimbreak.

Button Unbreak Dimension line

From the command line command: spdimunbreak.

The effect of these commands is correspondent to the command breaks and dimbreaks.

Construction lines

Auxiliary lines are characterized by a layer in which they are placed by default (MCSCLines), color
(red) and line type (thin solid), that are set in the settings. Additional settings - prostanovki rays or
lines. Settings only apply to newly inserted objects. When you switch the existing objects remain as
it is.

The table below describes which objects need to select and how formed auxiliary line in terms
nanoCAD.

Some commands allow you to specify a sequence of auxiliary lines in the format ХХ|XX|XX, where
ХХ – the amount of displacement of the beam (direct) in degrees or drawing units from the base
position or previous beam, rendered in this command.

Command Name The algorithm works command Objects of

When drawing rays (_ray) When drawing choice
lines (_xline)
Mcconsthor Create a Command is Insertion point
horizontal Command is invoked _ray, in invoked _xline, in
auxiliary line which the user is given the which the user is
insertion point. The second point given the insertion
is determined by the program to point. The second
define the orientation of the beam point is
is strictly horizontal. Point is determined by the
determined by the positive program to define
direction of the X axis. the orientation of
the line is strictly
horizontal.

1062
nanoCAD Mechanica

Option R-Turn-ray-to-180-
degrees allows you to change the
direction of the beam on the
opposite

Mcconstver Creating Command is Insertion point

vertical Command is invoked _ray, in invoked _xline, in
reference line which the user is given the which the user is
insertion point. The second point given the insertion
is determined by the program to point. The second
define the orientation of the beam point is
is strictly vertical. Point is determined by the
determined by the positive program to define
direction of the axis Y. the orientation of
the line is strictly
vertical.

Option Rotate-ray-through-180-
degrees allows you to change the
direction of the beam on the
reverse.

Mcconstz Create an Insertion point

auxiliary line in Command is invoked _ray, in
the direction Z which the user is given the
insertion point. Constructed beam
emerging from this point in the
positive direction OZ.

Option Rotate-ray-through-180-
degrees allows you to change the
direction of the beam on the
reverse.

Mcconstcrs Creating Command is Insertion point

auxiliary lines Command is invoked _ray, in invoked _xline, in
intersecting which the user is given the which the user is
insertion point. Built at the given the insertion
intersection of the rays of the point. Constructed
insertion point in the positive lines intersect at
direction of the axes OX and OY. the insertion point.

Options allow you to select the

quadrant bounded by the rays.

Mcconsthb Create an Command is invoked _ray,in Command is Insertion point,

auxiliary line which the user is given the invoked _xline, in a point which
by two points insertion point. Then to complete which the user is determines the
or corner the command inserted rays at a given the insertion angle (angle) or
predetermined angle with respect point. Then to entering a
to OX (angle determined by the complete the number. The
second point specified by the command inserted command
user) or a number of angles for straight with a completed after

1063
nanoCAD Mechanica

group insert format XX | XX | XX. predetermined entering the

1064
nanoCAD Mechanica

angle with respect series or after

to OX (angle the forced
determined by the shutdown
second point command (Esc
specified by the or right button).
user) or a number
of angles for group
insert format XX |
XX | XX.
Mcconsthw Create an Command is invoked _ray, in Command is Insertion point,
auxiliary line at which the user is given the invoked _xline, in the point
an angle to the insertion point. Specifies the which the user is defining the
segment position of the base angle (line). given the insertion base angle (or
Then to complete the command point. Specifies segment), which
inserted rays at a predetermined the position of the determines the
angle relative to the base angle base angle (line). point angle
or angles for a number of bulk- Then to complete (angle) or
insert format XX | XX | XX. The the command entering a
angle is determined by the user inserted straight number. The
of said second point. with a command
predetermined completed after
angle relative to entering the
the base angle or series or after
angles for a the forced
number of bulk- shutdown
insert format XX | command (Esc
XX | XX. The angle or right button).
is determined by
the user of said
second point.
Mcconstpar Creating an Command is invoked_ray, in Command is Beam line,
auxiliary line which the user selects a segment, invoked _xline, in polyline or line.
parallel at a polyline, line or ray. Further, which the user Reference point
predetermined given the parallel position of the selects a segment, or enter a
distance object as a point through which it polyline, line or number. The
must pass (in the case of a ray. Further, given command
polyline - equidistant) or number the parallel completed after
of copies of an object in the position of the entering the
format XX | XX | XX. object as a point series or after
through which it the forced
must pass (in the shutdown
case of a polyline - command (Esc
equidistant) or or right button).
number of copies
of an object in the
format XX | XX |
XX.
Creation of a Command is invoked _ray, in Command is Beam line,
Mcconstpar2 parallel which the user selects a segment, invoked _xline, in polyline or line.
auxiliary line at polyline, line or ray. Further, which the user Reference point
half the given the parallel position of the selects a segment, or enter a
specified object as a point through which it polyline, line or number. The
distance must pass (in the case of a ray. Further, given command
polyline - equidistant) or number the parallel completed after
of copies of an object in the position of the entering the
format XX | XX | XX. The object as a point series or after
resulting objects are at half of the through which it the forced
distance. must pass (in the shutdown
case of a polyline - command (Esc

1065
nanoCAD Mechanica

equidistant) or or right button).

number of copies
of an object in the
format XX | XX |
XX. The resulting
objects are at half
of the distance.
Mcconstlot2 Establishment Command is _ray, in which the Command is Insertion point,
of a subsidiary user is given the insertion point. invoked _xline, reference point
of the Then, the user specifies the that sets the on the
perpendicular second point (a preview is insertion point. perpendicular to
by two points rendered beam and segment Then, the user the object
coming from the insertion point, specifies the renders.
the second point is tied to the second point (a
cursor) to specify the second preview is
point forms perpendicular to the rendered straight
beam. Ray is drawn perpendicular and cut coming
to the object. from the insertion
point, the second
point is tied to the
cursor) to specify
the second point
forms
perpendicular to
the line. Direct
drawn
perpendicular to
the object.
Mcconstlot Create an Command is invoked _ray, for Command is Beam line,
auxiliary line which the user selected reference invoked _xline, , in polyline or line.
perpendicular object and point to it. Ray is which the user Point on the
to the segment drawn perpendicular to this object selects the object object.
at the selected point. Starting and reference
beam is at a selected point. point on it. Direct
drawn
perpendicular to
this object at the
selected point.
Middle line is the
selected point.
Mcconsthm Create an Command is invoked _ray, for Command is Beam line,
auxiliary line to which the user selects two invoked _xline,in polyline or line.
the corner reference object. Ray is based on which the user
along the the bisector between the two selects two
bisector reference objects. reference object.
Direct built along
the bisector
between the two
reference objects.
Mcconsttan Create two Selected circle or arc that it may Selected circle or Circle or arc.
parallel determine. Constructed two rays arc that it may
auxiliary lines tangent to the circle, it is determine.
tangent to the necessary to ask a series of Constructed two
circle positioning angles or point lines tangent to
specified segment emanating the circle, it is
from the center of the circle and necessary to ask a
parallel rays (link). series of
positioning angles
or point specified

1065
nanoCAD Mechanica

segment
emanating from
the center of the
circle and parallel
lines (link).
Mcconstcc Creating Automatically construct a circle concentric with the Circle or arc.
auxiliary circle selected object and specify the diameter (or the
another circle given number of diameters). The command
concentric completed after entering the series or after the
circle or arc is forced shutdown command (Esc or right button).
selected.
Mcconstc2 Creating Selected reference line object, the user specifies a Beam line,
auxiliary circle point lying on the circle defined by the radius of the polyline or line.
tangent to the circle (the system offers the minimum possible Point belonging
segment radius which is equal to half the distance along the to the circle.
normal from the selected point to the segment, and
controls the maintenance of value (greater or
equal)). We construct a circle at two points of
tangency (one point is given conditional
perpendicular) and radius..
Mcconstkr Creating Selected two reference linear object and specify the Beam line,
auxiliary circle diameter. We construct a circle at two points of polyline or line.
tangent to two tangency and radius.
segments
Mcconstkr Creating Selected two reference linear object. We construct a Beam line,
auxiliary circle circle at three points of tangency.The radius is polyline or line.
tangent to calculated automatically.
three
segments
Creating Selected circle or arc, automatically builds a square, Circle arc.
Mcconstcircli auxiliary a circle is described. The context menu provides
square switching between inscribed and described by the
circumscribing square.
circle
Mcconsttc Create an Selected consecutively two arcs Selected Two arcs or
auxiliary line or circles. Constructed beam consecutively two circles
tangent to two tangent to the two circles, a arcs or circles.
circles definite choice (touch point - Constructed line
coming to a place of choice, the tangent to the two
beginning of the beam - the first circles, a definite
object). choice (touch point
- coming to a
place of choice,
the center line -
the first object).
Creating This is the counterpart nanoCAD assigning properties
Mcconst_circle auxiliary circle auxiliary geometry.
Creating a This is the counterpart nanoCAD assigning properties
Mcconstxray subsidiary of auxiliary geometry.
rays emanating
from a single
point
Creating This is the counterpart nanoCAD assigning properties
Mcconstxline auxiliary lines auxiliary geometry.
passing
through one
point
Auxiliary lines This command displays the settings nanoCAD
Mcconstlines Mechanics 6 with a pointer to the section Auxiliary

1066
nanoCAD Mechanica

lines.
Mcclineo Enable / This command automatically hides all auxiliary lines.
disable the
auxiliary lines
Remove This command automatically removes all auxiliary
Mcconsterase auxiliary lines lines.

Calculator

Button Calculator

Editor features tables and text substantially extended using a powerful functional spreadsheet
calculator. Calculator is designed for doing complex mathematical calculations in a table cell.

It is possible to connect the table editor tool Notebook .

Button Insert designed to insert the result of a calculation from the calculator into an editable cell
or text input field.

Navigation table cells can be done using the arrow buttons in the bottom left corner of the dialog.
There's also displays the name of the current cell being edited.

With a command of Expression menu type is activated mode formula calculations

Left Margin is used to input a mathematical formula with the use of built-in functions and properties.
In the box on the right, with the sign "=", the calculation result is displayed.

Parameter Accuracy sets digit rounding the result of calculation.

1067
nanoCAD Mechanica

Notebook

Button Notebook

To enter recurring standard text expressions (abbreviations, symbols, etc.) used tool Notebook. This
is a versatile tool for some editing tools nanoCAD Mechanics6, which is necessary to enter text.
Notebook combines the functions of: storing a set of expressions and the structure of their placement
in a separate file, input and placement of text expressions, input and placement of small tables,
searching and editing tools introduced earlier records.

Dialog Notebook divided into two parts. On the left side there is a tree structure of the notebook
where the user selects the sections and pages notebook. In the upper part of the window control
buttons notebook.

Load from file. Opens the notebook file stored on disk.

Save. Saves the changes to the file in your notebook.

Recommended that you save a new notebook in a separate file in the first call to
Important!
the tool Notebook using the button Save.

To search for a text string in a notebook has a special search tool, Right-click on any section or page
of the section and in the context menu, call the command Find. Found links are placed in the
section results

To accelerate the search procedure provided for viewing the latest expressions used in section
history.

Management structure for the notebook with the buttons:

Add a partition

1068
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add this page

Add a table

Delete tree item

In the notebook is allowed to create an unlimited number of sections and subsections, pages, and
tables.

Moving sections, pages, and tables for structural wood can produce a drag and drop (drag and
drop).

Rename the selected section or page using the command Rename the shortcut menu.

Select / Copy the selected text. Transmits the selected piece of text pages into editable table
cell. If the tree structure of the selected page or table in your notebook, the contents displayed on
the right side of the dialog. Highlight the desired entry cursor, and turn the Select / Copy the
selected text.

Edit Page. This button is used to activate the edit pages and style notebook. It becomes active
only if the tree structure is selected page element or table. In edit mode, the tree structure becomes
inactive, and the right side activates the Edit toolbar.

Editing tools page

Clear. Clears the current page

Load from file. Allows you to import an existing text file *.RTF MS Word.

Save the file. Allows you to record the content into a file *.RTF for use in MS Word.

Add item.

Remove the item .

Move up.

Move down.

Superscript. Includes character mode superscript.

1069
nanoCAD Mechanica

Subscript. Includes character mode subscript.

Insert fraction. dialog box set the numerator and denominator.

Switch controls the display of the slash.

Insert tolerance. Opens Tolerances.

Insert material. Opens material.

Calculator.

Tools for editing table

Insert Row.

Delete Row.
Insert Column.

Delete Column.

Rename column. Opens Properties column in which you specify the width and title of the
selected column.

After editing, when you exit the notebook dialog appears - prompted to save the changes in a
notebook.

Magnet
The magnet is used to build complex contours based on the available graphics. This command can
be used

1070
nanoCAD Mechanica

from the context menu (Weld , Boundary form )

button in the dialog box (the area array ).

After selecting the command Magnet contouring can be a dot or sequence of instructions related
segments or arcs.

Consider contouring weld on the basis of images inserted into a drawing I-beam.

1. Open the weld seam.

2. Select the type of weld and press OK in the dialog box.
3. In the context menu, select the command magnet.
4. Enter the starting point of the contour. Consistently move the cursor over the endpoints of
linear and arc contour segments I-beam.
5. Deselecting the previous segment is made by repeated positioning the cursor to the start point
of the segment back from the context menu.
6. Use Command close in the context menu, to complete the construction of a closed loop.

Example of team work.

1071
nanoCAD Mechanica

Text editing

If it's set multiline text editing with tools nanoCAD Mechanics 6, then clicks on the test will be called
dialogue editing.

In this dialog may ask, besides the text, its color, and the Height, and add special symbols.

Template
Templates are used to generate similar objects with similar properties. Below is an example of the
use of templates for Construction note.Est arbitrary rectangle area. Assign a positional balloon. To
create a template in any of the fields of the callout, right-click the shortcut menu, choose take from
the drawing.

1072
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the dialog we click "Take from property", select create a rectangle and press "Enter." From
the list that appears, select the properties "Area" and click OK.

The text of the callouts appeared positional reference to a property, in this case - the area of the
figure.

When you right-click on the link properties, you can call the dialog for editing the
Note:
formula:

1073
nanoCAD Mechanica

This dialog allows you to obtain a formula referring to the property of an object.
For Example:

Right click on the field with an area of a rectangle and in the contextual menu, select "Template -
Append".

Click OK and place the Conditions note.

1074
nanoCAD Mechanica

Now we construct another rectangle, a great size and the first to apply to the area of the callout
figures use the template created earlier.

Select "Conditions note". Hit the text input field RMB and in the context menu, select "Template -
Polyline.Area + 25".

Next, choose the figure to calculate the area and insert the callout. Area tallied automatically.

These templates can be used not only for callouts, but for other items, such as:

designation of positions;
describes the node;
the "Note" benchmarks, etc.

Editing
Toolbar Edit

In place edit
Group edit
Regenerate
Explode all objects

1075
nanoCAD Mechanica

Explode all primitives

Export to file
Parameters redefinition
Find and Replace
Quick selection
Scale
Context bar viewport

Button Edit . Causes universal editor nanoCAD Mechanics6 - objects.

Editing Building Ground6 - objects can be made in the following ways:

right-clicking and selecting Edit Edit from the context menu;

double-clicking the left mouse button on the nanoCAD Mechanics6 - object. This method is
specified in the settings;
with "grips";
calling on the Edit tooltip that appears when you hover the cursor over an object:

properties dialog box (properties);

standard commands Erase (ERASE), Move (MOVE), Copy (COPY), Rotate (ROTATE), Stretch
(STRETCH).

Edit in-place

Command

Toolbar: Click the button to in place edit on the toolbar Edit.

From the command line command: spipedit .

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> In-place edit

Command allows you to edit the drawing objects Construction site containing text.

Editing can be done on site by clicking the left mouse button while pressing Ctrl.

1076
nanoCAD Mechanica

Group Edit

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Group edit on the toolbar Edit

From the command line command: speditgroups.

Menu: MechaniCS > Editing Editing group >> editing a Group

The command allows you to edit bolted or riveted connections.

Click on the button Group edit;

Select any item in the drawing either a bolted or riveted joint;

In the window that opens, make the necessary changes.

Furthermore, editing group nanoCAD Mechanics6 - objects can be produced by double-clicking the
left mouse button on the axis of the assembly.

1077
nanoCAD Mechanica

Regenerate

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Regenerate on the toolbar Editing.

From the command line command: spregen .

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Regenerate

Updates the object's nanoCAD Mechanics

Recalculates the table
Updates overlapping objects
Automatically updates the calculated values of the attributes

Explode all

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Explode all selected in the toolbar Editing.

From the command line command: spexplodeall.

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Split objects

Explodes all objects of nanoCAD Mechanics into drawing primitives.

Explode all primitives

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button Split primitives toolbar.

From the command line command: spexplodepseudo.

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Explode all primitives

Dissects Primitives, pseudo Primitives (formed by overlapping schedules nanoCAD objects nanoCAD
Mechanics) primitives drawing.

Rectangle overlapped channel bar nanoCAD Mechanics. Rectangle in this case is a pseudo-polyline.

1078
nanoCAD Mechanica

Therefore, when you open this dwg without the support facilities nanoCAD polyline will be presented
as a proxy graphic.

After using the command to break the rectangle primitives they will be two separate polylines -
native drawing objects.

1079
nanoCAD Mechanica

Export drawing file

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Export to File on the toolbar Editing.

From the command line command: spexporttofile.

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Export to file

Saves selected objects in the drawing file.

1. Click Export to file

2. Select the drawing objects
3. In the dialog box, type the required settings drawing
4. Click OK
5. In the dialog box, specify a name for the drawing, and then click Save

Overrides
Objects nanoCAD Mechanics6, inserted into the base of the drawing objects can be edited using a
special tool to override properties. This command allows you to change the display properties of
the individual elements of the object (lines, hatches, etc.)

To call the command, press the Alt key and right-click on the desired object. If the object supports
override properties dialog box overrides.

1080
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the dialog box, available switches that can be used include the redefinition of certain properties of
the selected item.

Switch to Hide to hide the selected item. Hidden items are not printed. Mode display and printing of
hidden items, as well as their color is set in the Settings dialog box.

Find and Replace

Command

Toolbar: Click the button to the Find and Replace toolbar Editing.

From the command line command: spfind.

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Find and Replace

Command Find and Replace is used to search for string values in objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 in
the drawing or in the database objects.

1081
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the input field Find type a text string to search for. Enter list box Search will run Find all.

In the input field Replace enter the text string you want to replace the found string. Enter list box
Replace will run Replace all.

Set the Search area. Button to the right of the drop-down list allows you to specify a new
search. The button is context-dependent call the Find and Replace commands, if the command is
called from the Object Manager window opens Quick selection, if the command is called from Object
Wizard dialog (Search and Replace command on the database), it opens a window for selecting a
database partition.

Set Search Parameters. Set the switches for additional search and replace. Button expands the
list of parameters.

Match Case. If installed, the search is case sensitive.

Match Whole words. When set, searches for the individual words, that is a combination of
characters separated by spaces or punctuation marks.

Search within found . Switch available after the line has been searched, and the search range
limits.

Use extended options. The switch is available when searching for objects in the database. Click
1082
nanoCAD Mechanica

in the window that appears, click Advanced Search.

Use regular expressions. Includes search mode with additional selection conditions. Click in
the list that appears, select the desired expression. If you hover over a list item will bring up a
detailed presentation.

Choice of the expression produced the left mouse button. You can combine multiple regular
expressions.

Multiline text. Enables multiline text search.

Button Find all . Starts the search procedure. Search results will be displayed in the table.

Click on the column header, you can sort the found fragments.

Clear All. Clears found.

Stop. Interrupts the search or replace.

Group results by objects.

Show object. Shows object corresponding to the selected row. Even if the object is displayed
on the inactive list.

Edit object. Opens the object corresponding to the line were selected.

1083
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button Replace All. Replaces all found fragments of the new value.

Button Replace. Starts the process of sequential replacement fragments found. Mode Replace can
go into automatic mode Replace all, with autocorrect starts from the current position without
affecting the results missed.

Button Next. Skips the next fragment found in the list without replacing it with a new value.

Quick selection

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Quick selection toolbar Construction main

From the CommandLine: spqs .

Menu: MechaniCS > Edit >> Quick Select

With the Quick Select tool selection can be done in drawing objects inserted nanoCAD Mechanics6
under certain conditions.

In the dialog box Quick selection by setting search conditions.

1084
nanoCAD Mechanica

Press the button next to Search and select from the list of the search objects:

In the whole document

In the current space
In the bounding box (in response to a request appeared to highlight the drawing a rectangular
area)
In the current selection (in response to a request appeared select the drawing objects, among
which must be carried out the search and selection)

When you select Search box or in the current set Search button becomes available . With its
help, you can select a new rectangular area, or change the current set of objects.

Button located on the right side of the window is used to select objects found ways to add to the
selected objects in the drawing. Following modes are available:

Set result into a new selection - matching the search condition objects are highlighted in
the figure, but with all the other objects selection will be discontinued
Add the result to the selection - Point of interest will be added to the selected objects in
the drawing
Subtract result from selection - with found objects will be deselected if they have been
allocated.

Add search facilities. In the table, click the left mouse button on the cell Specify the type of object
and> and select the type of object in the list. To deselect, click the bottom element of the list -none-
:

The table displays a list of all parameters of objects of this type in the selected search area:

1085
nanoCAD Mechanica

The column value next to the desired object, select the parameter value to be used for selection:

Select logic condition of selection for the selected parameter value:

1086
nanoCAD Mechanica

= - Power
!= - Not equal
<, > - Less is more
>=, - No less, no more
<=
Like - Substring search. Under this condition all selected objects whose value contains the
substring specified in the Value column.
unLike - Substring search. Under this condition all selected objects, whose value does not contain
the substring specified in the Value column.

For each type of object can set an unlimited number of search terms on one or more parameters.

To add another object type, click the left mouse button on the bottom line on the cell labeled Specify
the type of object >.

1087
nanoCAD Mechanica

At the bottom of the dialog box displays the total number of objects that match the search criteria.

Using a set of tools Templates filter selection made of can be made specified objects and previously
stored conditions:

Load Preset
QS Params

Reset condition

Scale

The current scale

nanoCAD Mechanics6 uses the concept of current scale, which is different from nanoCAD global
scale, expressed in units (units).

Current scale - the configuration parameter, in accordance with the value of objects which is
automatically incremented or decremented in the drawing. In the space of the model allowed the
global scale of 1:1 - i.e 1 mm building object is 1 unit drawing in nanoCAD.

Changing the current zoom level affects the following objects:

1088
nanoCAD Mechanica

Your drawing objects of nanoCAD Mechanics;

1089
nanoCAD Mechanica

linetypes in nanoCAD, containing discontinuities or text;

text size in nanoCAD Mechanics6.

A specific feature of architectural drawings is the use of different scales for individual drawing
fragments in viewports. Therefore, the current paper space scale is automatically set to 1:1, in the
active viewport scale the value of the current is restored.

To change the current scale, use the tool "Zoom", located at the bottom ofnanoCAD, on the status
bar containing buttons used to -switch between drawings .

You can set it out on a selected object, or get the value scale with the selected object:

Get scale

Set scale

List of values established by increasing and decreasing the scale corresponds to GOST 2.302-68
ESKD "scale."

Scale measurements
Objects that perform the measurement of linear distances on a drawing (dimensions, levelmarks)
have scale measurements 1:1. The current scale does not affect the measurement.

The figure shows the result of inserting different levelmarks in the current scale. levelmarks values
do not depend on the current zoom.

1090
nanoCAD Mechanica

In order to control the scale of measurement of design elements, select the command Settings
nanoCAD Mechanics6, section Main option. Set Global scale is draw to no mode .Close the
preferences window.

With the help of the "Zoom" set the scale for measuring objects clearance.

Also the dialog box to insert design elements becomes available choosing the scale of measurement:

The figure shows the effect of changing the scale of measurement for the levelmark. Distance value
is increased 2-fold.

Viewport context toolbar

Context menu viewport appears when you right-click in the space of Layout.

Activate the form. Opens in model space viewport.

Update dimensions. Sets the scale size of the form in accordance with the layout space.

1090
nanoCAD Mechanica

Cut viewport. Overrides viewscreen on existing polyline or build a new one when you select the
context menu option Polygon.

Fix view. Commits scale and position relative to the model space viewport.

Fit all. fits into the viewport model space objects.

Select scale. Opens the context menu to select the viewport scale.

MechWizard
MechWizard implements the following features:

Creating a custom library of parts.

Description of rules of conduct parts in the assembly.
Assignment of output parameters to specify details.

MechWizard supports two types of iParts: static parts and parts with internal intelligence.

Static parts are based on values in the table. When they are inserted the following sequence of
actions:

1. Select the item.

2. Indicate the denomination of the value table.
3. Apply the spare parts drawing.

The dynamic parts (with internal intelligence) in addition to the geometrical parameters, include pre-
assembly constraints. Working with such objects looks:

1. Select an object-dependent part.

2. Bring the item to the mating piece.

Winning such an approach: Automatically detects the denomination detail, the insertion point, the
direction of drawing, assembly constraints.

Call team
Call toolbar MechWizard.

ScriptMaster

Summetry axis

Set parameter

Insert point

Supression contour
Hath contour

1091
nanoCAD Mechanica

Parametric Array

Test model

Object Wizard. Description

Toolbar: Click the button Script Master toolbar MechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spsmaster.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library objects >> Mech Wizard >>> Script Master

Opens the Object Wizard .

1. Menu
2. Toolbar
3. Object tree
4. Editing Panel
5. Message Bar

Menu

Object

New . Opens the dialog for creating a new element base.

1092
nanoCAD Mechanica

Open . Used to select another item from the database.

1093
nanoCAD Mechanica

Save . Saves changes to the current object.

Export. To export the object.
Send by email. To send the object by email
Set the object image preview. Is used to generate images of objects preview nanoCAD.
Import preview picture from the file. To import preview picture from the file.
Exit. Closes the Mechwizard .

Editing

Undo . Brings.
Redo . Repeats the last undone action.
Find, replace, go to. Search, replace and transfer the text of the script.
Search and replace database. Opens the Find and Replace .
Edit Template. For editing the template.

Script
Get script from another object. Replaces the current script to a script with from the
selected database object.
Set script to all objects in the selected folder. Copies the current script for all objects in
the selected folder database objects nanoCAD Mechanics6.
See the script of another object. Opens in new window script of the selected object.
Insert a script template. Removes the current script and creates a new script based on a
template.
Save the script as a template. Saves the script object as a template.
Show localized script. Localization is used in objects that support multiple languages.

Master
Script wizard
Constraints wizard
Part list entry wizard

Object tree
Is a structured list of properties and parameters of a database object.

1. Description
2. Parameters
3. Methods
4. Implementations
5. Forms
6. Table resources
7. Script

During the editing of the object in the tree the latest changes cannot be displayed. To update the
tree, select the command Update object tree from the context menu on any list item.

1094
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Description

On the edit panel is a description of the property:

Title. Name of the object base.

Comment . Brief explanation of the object.
Class. Numeric parameter, use the command nanoCAD Mechanics6 to search for objects
of a particular type in the database.
Part list entry. Fill pattern line specification. Identifier.
Unique identification number of the object. Standard .
Selecting a group of standards for the object.
2. Parameters

In this section we define the object.

Public. The options available for binding to other objects parameters and tables.
Protected. Parameters that are used only within the object.
Tabular. Parameter table.

In the context menu of the tree available commands:

Add Table. Adds a new table setting.

Delete table. Deletes the selected table parameters.
Set the table index. The index is used when there are multiple tables.
The table name as a prefix to the parameters. Enables using table parameters in
the script in the form of links to the following: Name _tablitsy.Parametr
Export . Export table to an external file.
Import . Import table from a file.
Table format to import from Excel:
Name name L massa
Type String integer integer
Comment Designation Length Weight
ID 1 2 3
1 PA 14-8 1360 0,3
2 PA 20-8 1960 0,4
Add option. Adds a parameter to a table.
Add line. Adds a row to the table.
Delete Rows. Deletes the selected rows from the table.
Set the type of the parameter . Sets the type of the parameter:
Real (real number)
String (string value)
Integer (integer)
3. Methods

1095
nanoCAD Mechanica

This section lists the functions of the script object being edited. If you select from the list
on the editing pane a script fragment containing the selected function is displayed.

For standard functions (event handlers) icon next to the name indicates a description of
the function in the script:

function is described in the script

function is not described in the script

To add user-defined functions by right-clicking on the item list Custom Functions to open
the context menu and click Add custom function.

Specify a unique name for the new function.

4. Implementation

This object execution section lists. Each Performance can contain several types
corresponding to different projections of the object.

In the context menu of the tree available commands:

Add Implementation. Adds a new Implementation and creates new species.

Delete Implementation. Deletes the selected design.
Add 2D-view. Adds a kind of execution.
Add 2D-view with geometric constraints. Adds a kind of execution with geometric
figure.
Rename implementation. To edit the name of performance.
Update object's tree. To update the tree.

The edit panel lists the types of objects Masters selected version.

1096
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu in the edit panel the following commands are available:

Recognize view. Adds a new performance and creates new species.

Nonparametric sketch recognition. Recognizes the kind of Undecorated model.
Edit view as text. Opens a text description of the parametric form.
Select preview in the drawing. Generates a preview image for the selected type of
objects nanoCAD.
Import images from an image file. Sets the for the selected type of image preview
from an external file.
Export images to file. Copies the image preview of the selected type of external file on
disk.
5. Forms

This section is used to work with Forms. Adding a form by using the command Add form or
AutoForm Add in the context menu of the object tree, or in the edit panel.

6. Table Resources

Resource table is used to create objects that support multiple languages .

7. Script

Editing panel opens the script object.

1097
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu of the tree command is available:

Parsing. Analyzes the script to detect errors in the program. The analysis results are
displayed on the Message tab script analysis.

In the edit panel made viewing and editing the script. In the context menu of the editing
commands available Clipboard: Cut, Copy, Paste.

In the Status Bar displays the current cursor position (Row, Column) and the state regime Insert /
Overwrite , switchable key Insert.

The menu bar

The menu bar contains folloving items:

Object
Edit
Script
Master

Object

Menu item object allows it to work with database objects in nanoCAD Mechanics 6:

1098
nanoCAD Mechanica

Object - creates a new element base (By pressing keys Ctrl+N or clicking on the icon Create on
the toolbar).

After issuing this command, a dialog box appears to New object

To create a new object, you must specify:

Folder in which to save the new object

Name (will be displayed in the browser)

Comment (will be displayed in the tooltip)

Select a way to create a new object

1099
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create an empty object - creates a table and designs without having one script selected from the
template.

Default template - empty script.

Create as copy of prototype - creates an object by copying the entire prototype object (along with
the script, tables, performances and three-dimensional models.

Use the button to select an object to create a prototype object.

Open - Open an existing part (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+O or icon Open on the toolbar).

After selecting the command, a dialog box appears Select the details allowing you to select or find
the item in the current database in Construction Site 4.

1100
nanoCAD Mechanica

Save - save changes to the current member base (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S or icon Save on
the toolbar).

Set object preview - allows you to set as a preview for the object in the browser database objects
nanoCAD.

Exit - close Master objects

In paragraph object available list of recently used items.

Editing
Menu item Edit allows you to work with the current database nanoCAD Mechanics 6:

Undo - cancel the last action (promptness pressing keys Ctrl+Z or clicking on the icon Undo on
the toolbar).

Redo - undo the last action (promptness pressing keys Ctrl+Y or clicking on the icon Repeat on
the toolbar).

Find - search for a given string on the script of the current element (promptness keys Ctrl+F).

Calling this command opens a dialog box Find

Looking provided an opportunity to take into account only whole words and case search string using
by appropriate switches.

Also have the opportunity to select the search direction.

Go to the next matched string by pressing find Next.

1101
nanoCAD Mechanica

After you click Cancel , you return to the previous menu.

Speas dropdown input field allows you to select the last used values.

Replace - search for a given string with a new one.

After calling this command, a dialog box appears Replace

When replacing provides an opportunity to consider only whole words and case search string using
by appropriate switches. It is also possible to carry out replacement in the selected area or
throughout the text.

Daylight without replacing the matched string to the next by pressing find Next.

When you click Replace matched string is replaced by a new one at the current position.

After you click Replace All all found strings will be replaced.

Button to return to the previous menu, press Cancel.

Go to - command allows you to go to a specific line (promptness keys Ctrl+G).

Find and replace on the database - allows you to search and replace strings in the base.

1102
nanoCAD Mechanica

There are opportunities to search the entire database or in a folder, the search is case sensitive,
whole words, as well as multi-line test, the search for the script, table, table name resources and
facilities (Use advanced options )

Script
Menu script allows you to work with the current script object database nanoCAD Mechanics 6:

Get script from other object - command allows you to copy the script from another object.

1103
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set script to all objects in selected folder - script command sets the current object to all objects in
the selected folder database elements nanoCAD Mechanics 6.

Show script of other object - you can view the script of another object without changing it.

Insert script template - command allows you to take in the script as the current object previously
saved template.

Save script as template - allows you to save the current script object as a template for future use.

Show localized script - command allows you to view localized script based on the data of the
resource table.

Script Master

In general, writing the script for the majority of standard parts is not required. Just open the script
details, like on purpose, and copy it. However, it must be remembered that the parameters in the
model (figure) must strictly match the prototype.

nanoCAD Mechanics 6 is a convenient mechanism for self-compilation step algorithms that control
the behavior of the items in the time of insertion and editing object - Master browser.

Call Master browser via the menu item Master / Script wizard Script Wizard

To create a script to be executed the following steps:

General properties
Parameter Properties
Calculation parameter
Drawing Conditions
working planes
show / Hide parameters
Display conditions
Check boxes
Current script

At any step of the script wizard may move buttons << Back and Next >> .

Button Cancel exits the wizard.

1104
nanoCAD Mechanica

Object description
ObjectDescription (Property Description). This parameter is optional, it describes the common
name of the object. For example, nut, bolt, etc.

Object Name
strTheType (type). This parameter is required, it is advisable to fill it in Latin characters. Serves to
identify the object as belonging to a group. For example, StdArborParts - standard parts shaft,
StdJointParts - fastenings.

Object type
strTheName (Name of facility). This parameter is required, it is advisable to fill it in Latin
characters. Defines elements within the group, given strTheType. For example, a screw bolt - Screw,
for nuts - Nut, for washers - Washer etc.

Object subtype
strTheSubType (subtype). Additional parameter, it is desirable to fill it in Latin characters. Defines
a specific subtype of GOST. For example, if the name of the object - Nut (Nut), then simple nuts
subtype is Simple, from crown - Castle etc.

These parameters set by the user, based on its project object interaction, and can be arbitrary. Hard
list is not, and they can be changed at any time. They will only be used in scripts to automatically
establish dependencies (details - in the description of scripts).

Specification
Description line items for transmission specification.

1105
nanoCAD Mechanica

Not used
All parameters specified in the table, are automatically available for operations over them from the
program during the insert or edit the object. If a variable is used only in the process of creating a
graphic image, then use it in the script is not necessary.

Protected (used internally)

If necessary, display the parameter dialog during insertion.

Public (visible)
Used to transfer parameters during insertion and editing of other objects.

Changeable (available for editing)

Available to change other objects in the editing process. Variable of the property, will pick up from
the table and the necessary parameters on the basis of the obtained values to reconstruct the
details of the model.

1106
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set parameter in the dialogue

Variable for which this flag is set to be available for editing of dialogue insert details.

Dynamic selection
Processed when the position of the cursor relative to the insertion point of the object according to
the formulas in the designated parameter value in the range of "minimum value" - "Maximum".

Calculate after dialouge is shown using dynamic selection by expression

Calculated after the call dialogue and visual selection as expression in the Parameter Value.

Dont calculate parameter

Defines the minimum value. Can be expressed as a function of other parameters. Determination of
the value of the parameter as a function of the cursor or other parameters. Available functions may
be called from the context menu or manually entered into the appropriate input box.

Minimum value
Defines the minimum value. Can be expressed as a function of other parameters.

1107
nanoCAD Mechanica

Context menu is available in the input field.

Maximum
Defines the maximum value. Can be expressed as a function of other parameters. Context menu is
available in the input field.

Add a line in the drawing model, rendering which we will operate from the dialog during the

insertion of parts (for example, they will be highlighted Magenta). Pressing the button will open
a dialog box object properties and assign as a condition of their appearance in the drawing text
parameter. In this case SLICE.

Size "S", necessary for proper recognition, automatically appears in the parameter list, but you must
enter a parameter draw.

1108
nanoCAD Mechanica

Fragment dialog box Properties settings

In the name field switch is set "Cut". The parameter rendering paste from the context menu
variable "SLICE".

After the completion of the script retain the item and exit the editor. Of the database tree select our
item and insert it into the model. In the editing dialog parts we have a switch incision through which
we can control the rendering of relevant lines.

Workplanes determine the position of the items in the time of insertion and editing. Determination of
working planes dialog box to the work plane.

1109
nanoCAD Mechanica

Creating a plane parallel to the plane OYZ

Creating a plane parallel to the plane OXZ

Creating a plane parallel to the plane OXY

In this step, you must identify the available options in the menu items. The selection is made by
setting a checkmark APPLICABLE parameter

1110
nanoCAD Mechanica

In this step, display conditions defined species . The selection is made by setting a checkmark
APPLICABLE parameter and determining the conditions of his hiding

In this step, there are the following settings:

Show dialogue before object is inserted

Show object while inserting
Regenerate object suppression contour after inserting

1111
nanoCAD Mechanica

In this step, you can view and edit the resulting script. Clicking on the button Save and OK to apply
the current script items

This is the final step.

Master dependencies

Creating dependencies for interaction with other items going online.

Call Master dependencies via menu Master / Master Dependency Wizard objects .

Further, following the screen prompts on the command line, place the drawing model details and
select the items with which it must interact.

After placing the parts in the drawing, a dialog box Managing Dependencies. Functionally, the dialog
box is divided into two parts bookmarks. Bookmark this Parametric dependence and Assembly
constraints.

1112
nanoCAD Mechanica

Definition of parametric relationships occurs directly in the dialog box. It's enough to double-click on
the option to specify the details of the child (it will automatically appear in the left-hand side) and
bring it into line with the parameter of the parent object. In the right-hand side can be used
mathematical expressions.

Types of assembly and parametric relationships are defined in the dialog box. Parameters can serve
as table settings objects and definable expression.

Axial and surface alignment

Surface alignment

Axial alignment
1112
nanoCAD Mechanica

Direction

Sets the direction for the dependencies (Counter directional / Co-directional)

Once all the dependencies are installed, you can click OK, successively pass through the dialog
boxes and set the options you want.

Eventually, an automatically generated string specifications necessary to automatically detect

dependencies.

Master of string of specification

Formation data for transmission to the specification can be done in automatic and semi-automatic
modes. Some information can be inserted on the basis of the table of parameters associated with
the geometry of the figure, the part can be entered manually in the editing dialog standard parts.

Call Master BOM line via menu Master / Master BOM line Master of string of specification

In the drop-down list are tabulated parameters involved in drawing details.

1113
nanoCAD Mechanica

For a complete description of information on standard parts must be able to adjust or supplement
information. For example, cover screws or the class thread. In this case, just add a "#".

The editor position will be able to insert text between the two lattices, and then save.

Object tree

Tree object contains the following sections:

Description ;
Parameters;
Methods;
Function; Forms;
Resources table;
Script .
If the open file has been modified, its wood properties can be irrelevant. To actualize the properties
tree to choose the context menu to update the object tree.

Description
When you click on the section Description of the workspace displays the following properties.

1114
nanoCAD Mechanica

Property name - the name of the object to be displayed in the browser database.

Comment is displayed in the tooltip to the object.

Standard product allows you to set the standard (GOST, DIN, ISO, etc.).

Part list entry, is usually not be filled in the properties, and the variable defined in a script.

You can also put a tick:

Object have 3D view.

Cutting in detail

Object for 3D only.

In addition, the properties of the unique identifier for the object.

Parammeters
Section Parameters contains three subsections:

public,
protected,
tabular.

The public section Upcoming shows a table of open (public) parameters along with their comments.

1115
nanoCAD Mechanica

Furthermore, the parameters are displayed in a tree branch.

Section Protected contains a list of protected (protected) parameters, which are also displayed in a
table and drop-down list of branches in the tree object.

Section Table includes a list of tables detail

Table and column of the table in the current workspace synchronized depending on the position of
the cursor in the object tree. Tables in the object may be a few, while the identification is made on
behalf of the table. Popup menu when the cursor position on the table includes the following tools:

1116
nanoCAD Mechanica

When you select table name as a prefix to the parameters of an appeal to the names of variables
are prefixed with the table name. For example,Table0.dr.

You can add / delete rows from a table and add a parameter to a table.

There is also exported to Excel, text format and import from them.

Whenever the context menu on a separate parameter tables are available options remove a single
parameter and set the type (Valid (Real), String (String) or a (Integer).

To rename a table parameter, select it and click on his name left mouse button, or press F2. If the
parameter name has changed, it will automatically run search and replace in the script to a new
name parameter correctly processed by the script.

Methods
Section Methods includes event handlers and custom functions.

1117
nanoCAD Mechanica

When selecting a specific function in the script is its description (synchronized current line).

Red light icon in the function indicates the presence of a function in the script is present,
white - about lack. When you double clicking on the corresponding function in the script created by
its pattern.

Implementation
Section Versions list includes 2D and 3D versions

When selecting the root partition versions are all the performance, and the choice of a particular (for
example, Version 1) - displays the filtered views of this execution. To create a two-dimensional view
of a new version should be specified in the context menu Add performance - automatically create 2D
views.

To create this kind of performance you need to select the required performance and the shortcut
menu - Add 2D view.

2D view - parametric graphic nanoCAD

3D view of the Construction Site 6 - script to create a solid model (opening section of the
shaft, etc.)

Deleted when you delete all kinds of performance of this version.

To set the parameters of the form, select it, and the right side of the workspace to set view
orientation (Front, Left, Top , etc.) and the type of form ( cut, cut C, C size etc.).

1118
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu, you can select types of operations on this performance.

These options add \ remove kinds of current version:

The following context menu options are designed to work with the selected view of the current
execution.

1119
nanoCAD Mechanica

Recognize view - parametric recognition graphics nanoCAD.

Nonparametric recognize view - simple nonparametric reference charts, graphics taken from the
object as it is.

Edit view as text - description of species opens in a text editor.

Set preview from objects - objects selection nanoCAD to create a preview of this species.

Import preview picture from file - creating thumbs on the basis of the previously saved file.

Export preview picture to file - Saves the preview in a file.

Form Editor
Database objects nanoCAD Mechanics6 supports the use of custom dialogs for inserting and editing.
Creating such dialogues (forms) is made in Form Editor, which can be accessed from the dialog
boxes Create Group, Create marker and Object Wizard .

Button Open the form editor.

1120
nanoCAD Mechanica

1. Menu

2. Toolbar

3. Form Panel

4. Variables window

5. Window Properties

Menu

File
Test . Opens the form for viewing and testing.
Output. Closes the form editor.

Correction
Cancel. Cancels the previous execution of operations.

Cut, copy, paste . Command working with the clipboard.

Select all. Selects all the controls on the panel shape.
Remove. Deletes the selected controls from the form.
Group. Group the selected controls.
Ungroup. Cancels the grouping selected controls.

View
By ... edge. Alignment commands selected controls along one edge.
Align dimensions. Aligns the selected controls dimensions.

1121
nanoCAD Mechanica

Above and below. Reverses the order of the tab selected control by moving it up a level or
down
Forward, backward . Changes the tab order of the selected control by moving it to the first
or the last level.
Tab order . Includes display serial numbers tab controls.
To set the tab order to be pressed sequentially controls on the left mouse button. Tab
order will be set according to the sequence control option.
Properties. Enables and disables the additional window Properties.
Variables. Enables and disables the additional window variables.
Grid . Turns on and off the grid and snap to grid.

Indents . Enables or disables the frame shape

Inset
There are commands insert controls

Input field ..

Checkbox ..

Switch.
List.

List from the database.

Combo box.

Combo box from the database .

Text.

Group.

Figure.

Panel.

Button.
Table with filtering.

Table.

Types and performance.

Viewing.

Forms panel

On the forms produced occupancy controls.

In the context menu of the forms are available editing commands: cut, copy, paste, group, ungroup.

To add a control to the form by one of the following ways:

Select the desired control from the menu Insert or toolbar. Specify the insertion point and set
the dimensions of the control panel on the form.

After adding the control you want to bind it to a field in the Properties.

1122
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the open window, Variables , select the variable for which you want to add a control. Left-
click on the variable in the list, and holding down the mouse button, move the cursor to the

1123
nanoCAD Mechanica

panel shape. Release the mouse button. Panel forms added group controls - text and input
field .

If you insert a control from the window variables hold down Control, then it is possible to
select the type of control.

Selection of the control panel forms can be accomplished in several ways:

Single click of the left mouse button. Selected one control.

Single click of the left mouse button while pressing Control . If the control is not selected, it
is added to the current set. If a control is selected, it is removed from the current set.
Choosing a crossing . Click the left mouse button in the space bar form. Holding the button
down and dragging a selection box set. Selected controls that are fully or partially captured by
the selection frame.

Editing the size of the control is done by using the " grips ". When the grid is resized with a certain
step.

Changing the position of the selected controls performed with the left mouse button on one of the
selected items. When the grid movement occurs incrementally.

Align controls

In the menu View available commands align controls on edge and size.

Controls aligned to the left, and then by size .

Grouping controls

Working with multiple controls may need to be fixing their relative position. If grouping is fixed
relative position of the controls, and when you move one of the other grouped elements also move.

Select panel forms controls and issue the Group. Selected controls will be grouped.

Removing Controls made the command Delete.

Test the form

Before completing the form creation is recommended to execute the test to view the form.

Variables window

1124
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the Variables are parameters of the object ( marker , database object , group ).

Icon marked parameters that are associated with controls editable form

Properties window

In the Properties lists the properties of the selected controls on the form. At the bottom there is a
line prompt with a brief description of the selected property

Collection Editor

1125
nanoCAD Mechanica

Used for the rapid creation of lists and their subsequent use in the controls on the form.

- Create a Collection
- Remove Collection

- The collection management tools.

Create a new row in the collection

Delete row from the collection
Remove all elements from the
Move row up
Move the line below
Paste from Clipboard

To create a collection

1. Click New Collection.

2. Enter a name for the collection.
3. Add items in the collection.

4. Click OK in the collection editor.

5. Add in the form of a list of bases or a combo box from the database.

1126
nanoCAD Mechanica

6. In the properties of the control select the newly created collection.

Collections are stored in the database, they can be used in other objects of
Important!
nanoCAD Mechanics

Input field. The input field is used to enter numeric or symbolic expressions for further
processing.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Alignment On the edge
Multiline
Flat
Tip
Linking (None)
Enable
Text None
Formatting
Basic
Name editbox1
Class After entering
Variable
Type Line
Position
Upper limit 56

1127
nanoCAD Mechanica

Height 56

1128
nanoCAD Mechanica

Left boundary 176

Lower limit 112
Right boundary 232
Width 56
Measurements
Meter
Mode Auto
Regime change
Developments
Activation
Deactivation
To change

Checkbox. Allows you to monitor on/off.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Allowed
Text Flag
Basic
Enabled
Name checkbox
Class Flag
Variable
Position
Upper limit 8
Height 16
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 24
Right boundary 72
Width 64
Developments
by clicking

Switch .Switches to monitor the status on/off. Several individual switches interconnected to
form a "group switch" to track more states. Example of use of the group switch.

Description:

Several switches are associated with the same variable script. Each of them set any value. Variable is
set to the included switch. Value is of type string. If set to "-1" value is assigned automatically
starting with 1, in the tab order for TAB. In this case, the value type is numeric. Switches associated
with a single variable group are considered. In the group may be included in only one switch. If a
variable is assigned, grouped switches located inside one of the control. Usually this group or panel.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
enabled
Text Switch
Basic
Included
1127
nanoCAD Mechanica

Value -1
Name radiobutton
Class Switch
Variable
Position
Upper limit 24
Height 24
left boundary 8
Lower limit 48
Right boundary 112
Width 104
Developments
by pressing

Example of using.
Switches allow you to choose between discrete values, the result is displayed in the input field

List. Used to select one value from a specified list.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enable
Text -1
Basic
Data "Element 1"
Name Listbox
Class List
Variable
Current -1
Position
Upper limit 48
Height 40
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 88
Right boundary 104
Width 96
Developments
Activation
Deactivation
To change

List from the database.. Used to select one value from a pre-specified list in the database.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip

1128
nanoCAD Mechanica

Linking (None)
Enable
Text
Basic
Data
Name Listbox1
Class List of base
Variable
Current
Position
Upper limit 96
Height 60
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 156
Right boundary 104
Width 96
Developments
Activation
Deactivation
To change

Combo box. Designed to select from the specified list or enter an arbitrary value.
Properties command

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
enabled
Text Combo box
Basic
Data
Name combobox
Class combobox
Variable
Editable
Position
upper limit 168
Height 76
left boundary 8
Lower limit 244
Right boundary 104
Width 96
Developments
activation
deactivation
to change

Combo box from the database. Designed to select from the specified list or enter an arbitrary
value.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enabled

1129
nanoCAD Mechanica

Text
Basic
Data
Name combobox1
Class combobox
Variable
Editable
Position
Upper limit 208
Height 64
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 272
Right boundary 104
Width 96
Developments
Activation
Deactivation
To change

Text . Static (non-editable) text formatting support. Specify the formatting is applied to the
entire text.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Headset (Info)
Tip
Linking (None)
Transparent
Text Text
Background
Basic
Name static
Class Text
Label
Variable
Position
Upper limit 280
Height 32
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 312
Right boundary 104
Width 96

Group. Decorative element, designed to visually group several controls on the form.
Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enabled
Text
Basic
Name groupbox1
Class Group
Variable

1130
nanoCAD Mechanica

Position
Upper limit 320
Height 38
Left boundary 8
Lower limit 358
Right boundary 104
Width 96
Developments
Activation
Deactivation
To change

Figure. Insert a simple bitmap to the form.

Properties command.:

Basic
Name Image
Class Drawing
Variable
View
Visible
Data (Info)
Tip
Linking (None)
Transparent
Proportionally
Stretch
Position
Upper limit 360
Height 57
Lleft boundary 8
Lower limit 417
Right boundary 105
Width 97

Panel. Designed for grouping and align multiple controls on the form.
Properties command:

Basic
Name panel
Class Panel
View
Linking (None)
Position
Upper limit 16
Height 49
Left boundary 112
Lower limit 65
Right boundary 185
Width 73

Button. Control "button." Response by pressing the left mouse button.

Properties command:

View

1131
nanoCAD Mechanica

Visible
Tooltip
Linking (None)
Allowed
Text Button
Main
Icon -1
Name button
Class Button
Variable
Position
Upper Bound 72
Height 32
Left bound 112
Lower limit 104
Right border 184
Width 72
Developments
by clicking

Table with filtering. Table variables to restrict the number of columns, and automatic filtering
of the list columns.

Properties command:

Basic
Name Control
Class Table with filtering
Variable
View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enable
Position
Upper limit 112
Height 32
Left boundary 112
Lower limit 144
Right boundary 184
Width 72

Table . Table variables with the ability to view and select a row.
Properties command:

Basic
Name Control1
Class Table with filtering
Variable
View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enable
Position
Upper boundary 152
Height 40
Left boundary 112
1132
nanoCAD Mechanica

Lower limit 192

Right boundary 184
Width 72

Views and performance. Table for selection and execution of standard projection of the object
from the database.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enable
Basic
Name Control2
Class Views and performance
Execution
Show performance
Types

Display Types
Shows the type form
Position
Upper limit 200
Height 32
Left boundary 112
Lower limit 232
Right boundary 184
Width 72

Preview. Preview box of the selected object from the database.

Properties command:

View
Visible
Tip
Linking (None)
Enabled
Text PreViewControl
Basic
Name control3
Class Review
Position
Upper limit 240
Height 40
Left boundary 112
Lower limit 280
Right boundary 184
Width 72

1133
nanoCAD Mechanica

Table resources
Section Table of resources designed to create a multilingual resource strings details.

In the context menu section, there are options to add and delete rows.

Each resource can have a name (Label), by which it will be referenced from the script (by writing the
@Resource Name ). The property is selected, the row that corresponds to the name of the resource
(or its ID) and the column corresponding to the application language. Thus, we can ensure the
correct operation of applications of different locations on the same database. Of course, the current
local line must be completed, otherwise for non-Russian locale is selected resource corresponding to
the English language.

Script
When switching to the section script in the workspace displays the script object.

1134
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the context menu of the script contains option parsing script.

While parsing the functions performed consistently script object and passed to the notification
system error messages. By double-clicking on a line in the notification area on the transition line of
the script that contains the error.

Symmetry axis

Select the command

Toolbar: Click the button the symmetry axis of the toolbar MechaniCS Mech Wizard.

From the command line command: spwizsym.

Menu: MechaniCS > Objects from the database >> Mech Wizard >>> symmetry axis

Select the segment to set it as the axis of symmetry. Drawing can contain multiple axes of
symmetry. Symmetrical layout sketch relating to a particular axis is determined automatically by the
recognition of a parametric model.

1135
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set Parameter

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Set Parameter on the toolbar MechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spwizparam.

MenuMechaniCS> Library objects >> Mech Wizard Set parameter >>> Set parameter

Button Set parameter is used for setting targets sketch. Press the button and select the object
(sketch element). This will bring up a dialog box, the form of which depends on which object was
selected.

Setting size

When setting the size of the dialog box will look like:

Enter a parameter expression to control the size. The parameter can be set by a variable name or
expression that is allowed to use the number and names of the variables related to mathematical
and logical functions.

Object parameter names should not coincide with the names of the teams
Important! nanoCAD (for example, can not be assigned to the parameter name HATCH or
LINE)

Expressions can be used the following functions:

arithmetic operators +, -, *, /
trigonometric functions sin(), cos(), tg() (the function argument is given in degrees)
inverse trigonometric functions asin(), acos(), atg()
taking the square root function sqrt()
exponentiation function^ (recording format: x ^ y - x raising y)
absolute value abs()
rounded to an integer value int().

Logical operations:

Min(x,y) - returns the minimum value of the argument;

Max(x,y) - returns the greatest value.
Iff (boolean, x, y) - returns the value of the argument x if the logical expression is true, or
the value of y if the logical expression is false. Example of using the function, the result of
which is similar to the function Min (x, y): Iff(x<y, x, y).

Valid logical conditions: >, <, == (equal), ! = (Not equal), > = (not less than), <= (not
more).

Function within an expression can be nested.

1136
nanoCAD Mechanica

Setting the graphic element

When you set a graphic element sketch (segment, circle arc, circle, spline or shading) dialog box will
look like:

Work items are supporting the construction of a thumbnail and are not displayed when you insert a
model from the database. Performance object can be any graphic sketch element: line, arc of a
circle, etc.

Setting the insertion point

When setting the insertion point, a dialog box will look like:

Distance along the axes OX and OY determines the position of the handle in the object. Distance can
be set expression or numeric value.

Parameter on the x-axis and OX and OY is the name of the script variable whose value will change
when stretching the handle.

Button specify parameter lets take a parameter or drawing away.

Example of creating a handle.

Enter additional values

In the sketch may include additional expressions for calculation of parameters. These expressions
should be written a single line text entry format each line of text as follows:

X = EXPR

where X - the variable name;

EXPR - an expression that contains the names of variables, mathematical or logical functions.

1137
nanoCAD Mechanica

Examples of additional rows of values:

a = b*2 - assigning the result of an arithmetic operation;

alpha = asin(b/c) - the use of trigonometric functions;
k = iff(a>b, 1, 0) - assign a value to the condition;
d = min(m1, 100) - the assignment of the smallest of the two values;
g10 = sin(alpha*2) + sqrt(b^2 - c^3) / min(sin(a), cos(b)) - nested functions.

Sequence computing additional rows values - from left to right and top to bottom. Additional values
values recognizing parametric form must be selected along with other sketch entities.

Insert point

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button insert point on the toolbarMechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spwizins.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library object >> Mech Wizard >>> Insert Point

The insertion point should always be shown on the sketch of the parametric model. Click to choose
its position on the sketch.

If you try to check the model or recognize the form of a sketch in which the insertion point is not
specified on the command line, you are prompted to "Select insert point". Then you need to specify
the sketch position of the insertion point.

In the case of several insertion points in the sketch, recognition will be considered only of the one
that has been specified later, and all others will be ignored.

Suppression contour

Command

Toolbar: Click the button suppression contour toolbar MechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spwizcontour.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library objects >> Mech Wizard >>> suppression contour

Suppression circuit limits the scope of the object overlapping other graphical objects in the drawing.

To create a path of repression, build on the sketch a closed polyline corresponding to the shape and
size of the desired contour suppression, press the button on the "Mech Wizard" and select the
polyline built. Contour is highlighted on the sketch color.

Mandatory condition imposed on the circuit - no self-intersections. To avoid self-intersections in the

compound path, create contour manually, leaving minimal "is gap" between the regions:

1138
nanoCAD Mechanica

wrong correct

If suppression contour is not specified, it is created automatically during recognition model for
external outline details without taking into account service objects.

If automatic suppression circuit cannot be created (external object boundaries do not form a closed
loop), the object is inserted into the drawing and will receive an appropriate warning message.
However, errors in the loop suppression do not affect the applicability of the detected object, and
can be seen only in the wrong overlap of other objects in the drawing.

Hatch contour

Command

Toolbar: Click the button Hatch contour shading toolbar MechaniCS Mech Wizard.

From the command line command: spwizsectcontour.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library Objects >> Mech Wizard >>> Hatch Contour

Hatch boundary limits the shaded area of the object in the drawing.

To create a hatch boundary, construct a closed polyline in the drawing corresponding to the shape
size and desired contour shading, click on the panel Mech Wizard and select the polyline built.
Contour is highlighted on the sketch color.

A mandatory condition is imposed on the circuit - no self-intersections. To avoid self-intersections in

the compound path, create contour manually, leaving minimum distance between the regions:

1139
nanoCAD Mechanica

wrong correct

Array
Button array of objects

Select the Command

Toolbar: Click the button array of objects on the toolbar MechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spwizarr.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library Objects >> Mech Wizard >>> array

1. Create primitives of nanoCAD block and select the required dimensions in the sketch to
determine its size and location.
2. Press the array and selected block in the drawing.
3. In the dialog box, select an array type and parameters that control the construction of the
array. Parameters can be assigned to both numeric and non-numeric values (variable names
and expressions).

Every single unit with a unique name that is inserted into a sketch can be used only in a single
array.

1140
nanoCAD Mechanica

Test Model

Model Verification

Toolbar: Click the button check the model toolbarMechaniCS MechWizard.

From the command line command: spwiz.

Menu: MechaniCS > Library Objects >> Mech Wizard >>> Test model

Checks sketch of a parametric model.

Highlight crossing window thumbnail and press Enter. If the sketch contains no errors, a message
appears

If the sketch is not large enough, a message appears warning of an error.

Testing and join three-dimensional model

Joining the three-dimensional model is made in Inventor.

Construction geometry
Naming predefined working planes for virtual dependency model Mechanics
Naming options
Management of 3D models

Construction geometry
3D-coordinate system is determined when inserting items as follows:

Anchor Point (pntOrigin) - the operating point with the name WPT01, Part.IPT if such is not
available, use the point (0,0,0). OX axis parts (vecDirection) - work axis named WA01, if such does
not exist in the model, automatically uses the axis OX.

The second axis parts OY (vecPlane) - Working with the name of the axis WA02, if such does not
exist in the model, it is automatically created in any perpendicular direction relative WA01.

1141
nanoCAD Mechanica

Naming predefined working planes for virtual dependency model nanoCAD Mechanics
6
The corresponding plane can be described in the script with some name - for example, "WP1". In
order to insert items when it could impose dependence Inventor, the details should be determined at
least two operating elements: Working plane and working axis.

Working plane must be called MCS_CWPL_ImyaPloskostiIzSkripta (for our example

MCS_CWPL_WP1).

Working MCS_CWA_ImyaPloskostiIzSkripta axis must be called (for our example MCS_CWA_WP1).

Such planes can be any number. The basic point for this plane can be specified (the prefix the base
point MCS_CWPT_), or will be determined by the intersection of the respective axes and planes.

1142
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the model is not specified items, the position of the geometry to create dependence Inventor will
be determined on the basis of the nominal position of the base point of the plane defined in the
script.

In order to establish a geometric chosen depending annular rib in the center of the design point.
From this edge is perpendicular to the plane in which the geometric relationship is established.

If the model is not present and these elements, the position of the plane and the axis for installation
is determined according to the search operation axis, edge or axis of the cylindrical surface, passing
through the clearing point.

1143
nanoCAD Mechanica

Naming options
Detail Parameters whose values should be broadcast from the script details in the model parameters
Inventor, should consist of an appropriate name + prefix "u_".

The Inventor model is possible to use the table, indoor and outdoor settings.

Letter case matters!

Management of 3D models
Once the model is created, it must be attached to an object nanoCAD Mechanics 6. Select an item
from the database and specify the location where you will be joining a model.

The following methods:

Take the model file - open the tree where you need to select a model file;
Select from open - you need to select the appropriate model from the dropdown list;
Take the model of element - choose a ready-made model from a database.

Button Minimize - minimizes Management dialog 3D models, watch the model testing.

In the Title of performance enter the name of execution.

Start / Stop Testing - to verify compliance with all the details of standard sizes. listed in the table
element.

1144
nanoCAD Mechanica

Attach a model version of the element 10 - the selected model is attached to the current element
with the given name of execution.

Example of creating a database object

The process of creating an object and writing it to a standard library of standard nanoCAD Mechanics
6 is convenient to study an example. Consider the sequence of object creation building element
"precast pile, type C" with parametric dimensions.

Sketching Create a
script Generate
BOM line

Sketching
Terms and method of creating a sketch of the parametric object described in detail in the section
Rules for creating sketches.

1. Sketch piles. Apply parametric dimensions

Overall dimensions of the parametric

Angular size with its assigned parameter "alpha"

Specify the axis of symmetry

2. Click Object Wizard . In the dialog "Object Wizard" click New. In the window that
appears, enter the name and a brief description of the object, specify the folder in which to
place the object. Click OK.

1145
nanoCAD Mechanica

3. After creating a master browser automatically opens. Click Cancel to exit the wizard.

4. Add parametric table sizes. To do this, in the console tree, right-click on the name of the
section Tabular. In the context menu, call the command Add Table. Added a new table.

Right-click on the table name Table0 tree object to open the context menu and select
the Add option . Specify the name of the parameter "L" and press Enter.
The table in the edit window, click in the row Comment L. Ask comment "length" and
press Enter.

Object parameter names should not coincide with the names of the teams
Important! nanoCAD (for example, can not be assigned to the parameter name HATCH
LINE)
By right-clicking on the name of the table Table0 tree object to open the context menu
and select Export - Excel.
It then creates a new file and open Excel, the first line of table which lists the parameters. Fill in the
required number of rows of values.

1146
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the first column of the table must specify the line numbers in ascending order.
Line with the values to be written without skipping lines must not be left e
Important!
cells, forming gaps in the table.
Once the table to save the Excel file on the disk and import it into an editable object database using
the Import - Excel , called from the context menu on the table in the object tree. To edit and view
the table, you can use built-in editor:

The parameter may be removed at any time from a table or added to it. After adding the
parameters necessary to fill line values for the parameters established in the program or Excel, or
using the built-in editor.
Adding rows by using the command line Add, called from the context menu on the table:

1147
nanoCAD Mechanica

5. Create a parametric form.

In the console tree, right-click on the name of the section Performance . In the context
menu, call the command Add performance - automatically create 2D-view. Add a new
execution.

1148
nanoCAD Mechanica

Each object is allowed to create an unlimited number of parametric types, grouped according
to various embodiments of the construction element. For each performance object, you can
create views corresponding projections display object:

and with additional settings like:

You can not create one with the same kinds of performance projection settings, and advanced
settings.

1149
nanoCAD Mechanica

Recognize the kind of sketch created: Right-click on the type of call from the shortcut menu
Recognize view. Select the thumbnail of the drawing.

Direction vector details in the subsequent insertion of the base depends on the
Important!
starting position of the sketch object.

If the sketch is not enough designated sizes and dependencies to parameterize the object
will get an error message.

At this stage it is possible to determine the type of inspection and rework a sketch of the
object (see. Rules for creating thumbnails).

Successfully defined parametric form entered in section Versions:

6. In the same manner other main type of parameterization. To do this, build on the drawing
sketch objects in the wizard to create a new view for Versions 1 (team Add 2D-view context
menu) and follow the recognition of the species.

1150
nanoCAD Mechanica

7. The next step will be to create a script

Example of creating pens

Button Set parameter

Create an object in the drawing.

Specify the insertion point. Button .

Create and insert an additional point of insertion, which will play the role of the handle.

1151
nanoCAD Mechanica

Set the dial.

In input fields You can specify the formula for calculating the distance from the insertion point

to the handle, or manually set. Button .

Set along the axis OX.
Save the script.

Create a script
Command Master browser is designed to create a script step - a special program that describes
the behavior of a parametric object.

1. Call the command Master browser menu wizard .

In the dialog box Master browser consistently generated script object, prompting the user
to answer a series of questions about the formal nature of the desired behavior of the
parametric object when inserted in the drawing and editing.

2. Step Basic properties. It should determine the values of the internal parameters of the
object: the description, name, type and subtype (values of these parameters are available for
other objects and serve to establish dependencies between database objects).
1152
nanoCAD Mechanica

In the input specification written text expression that will determine the record format
specification string for the object, in this line, you can use any text characters and
reference values. Reference the value recorded in braces. For example:

Pile {L} GOST 19804.1-79

In the specification of the reference to the parameter {L} substitutes the value of the
parameter.

Ranking ZOrder overlap determines the order of the object, and other database objects
nanoCAD Mechanics 6, has a value of 1 ... 1000. An object with a higher level of overlap
close objects with smaller level of overlap.

After setting the parameters, click Next to proceed to the next step of the wizard browser.

3. Step Properties parameter.

Here you can set the properties and initial values for the selected parameters of all
recognized species.

In the right pane is a list of table parameters and the parameters of the recognized
species. Left next to the name of each parameter is set icon indicating the way to use the
parameter in the script. To toggle buttons are used with images corresponding icon:

1153
nanoCAD Mechanica

Icon is not used is the default and indicates that the parameter (variable) is not
used in the script.
Icon is used indicates that the parameter to be used in the script, and at this value
it will not work for the other objects of the standard libraries. Select this icon for all
parameters, specify default values:
L = 100. When you insert this option is selected the closest value from the table
alpha = 30
B = 400
Icon visible for other objects indicates that the parameter (variable) will be used
in the script and its value should be readable by other objects in the library of standard
elements.
Icon editable indicates that the value of the object is available to read and modify
other objects.
Property string parameter should be set to the parameters that must contain a text
value.
In the description of the parameter, you can enter a text description:
If necessary, add additional (arbitrary) parameters click Add Value

You can change the name of any non-table parameter. To do this, select an option from
the list, type the name of the new entry name, and then click Edit parameter name
.
Object parameter names should not coincide with the names of the teams
Important! nanoCAD (for example, can not be assigned to the parameter name HATCH or
LINE)
4. Step Calculation of parameters.

In this step, set method for selecting parameter values used in the script.

Button Setting dialog. This mode allows you to select the parameter value in the
dialog box when inserting or editing an object.

1154
nanoCAD Mechanica

Button Visual selection. This mode allows you to edit the inserted objects in the
dynamic sizing. Right click in the "Parameter" from the context menu, select the desired
option or built-dimensional parameters:
rXcoord - the distance from the insertion point to the cursor, measured along the vector insert an
object (local X-axis of the object)
rYcoord - distance measured in the perpendicular direction (along the local Y axis of the object)

In the formulas, you can use algebraic and trigonometric functions, logical expressions. Refer to
Setting.
When using non-tabular numeric parameter MUST specify a minimum and
Important!
maximum value!

Button resulting expression. This mode allows the calculation of the final value of
the parameter after you have selected all the other parameters, for which a mode
selection dialog or visual selection.
Button Do not calculate parameter. Disables the selected parameter calculations.
The parameter value will be equal to the default value.
5. Step Conditions rendering.

1155
nanoCAD Mechanica

At this stage management conditions display some components of the editing dialog
object, depending on which option either.

Additional components of the dialogue - Single switch (es) and group switches:

A single switch Group switch

Create a group switch

Enter a name here with the first item in the list and press the switch Add Value

In the list of radio buttons will be added to switch 0:

1156
nanoCAD Mechanica

Icon indicates that the switch corresponds to a simple switch-checkbox for which can be set to on
/ off.
Enter a name name of the second item in the list and click Add switch

Icon indicates that a switch is a group.

If necessary, add the required number of items in the list. If you want to change the
name of an item, use the button Edit name of the switch . To delete a list item or
the entire switch as a whole, select the appropriate item in the list and click Remove
switch .
Enter the conditions that will be controlled by varying the values of non-tabular
parameters depending on the group switch.
Scroll to the element "Arm of 0.015" and in the "Enabled" enter the string k=0,015:

Scroll to the element "Arm of 0.02" and in the "Enabled" enter the string k =0,02:
Imposed conditions set the value of the parameter k, depending on the selected dialog object
editing a list item group switch. You can enter multiple conditions for a variety of parameters,
separated by ";". For example:

Creating a single switch

Set out the list switches to switch 0 and type in the name of the name of the first item of
the switch. Click Add Value

1157
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add new switch named Switch 1.

Specify the conditions change the settings depending on the state of the switch:
Action of the switch when inserting an object:

Note the switch "Enabled by default". It sets the initial state of the user switches when inserting
an object in the drawing.
6. Step Workplanes. This step serves to create additional work planes. Work planes are used for
imposing geometric relationships between objects library components.

7. Step Hide / Show options. Allows you to control the display of parameters, parameter
types, and additional elements (switches) in the dialog box and insert editing facility.

1158
nanoCAD Mechanica

Turning off the checkbox of a particular item in the list of objects on the right side, you
can hide it from the dialog box. Left of the list has a pattern which shows a schematic
view of the dialog box. When you select an item in the list, the dialog box in Figure green
frame highlighted area location of this element.

8. Step Conditions display.

In this step, you can disable the display of individual parameters or parameter types of
switches in the dialog box, edit the object at the specified condition. To add a condition
display, follow these steps:

Enter a logical condition and click Add Condition

1159
nanoCAD Mechanica

In line display conditions should use the comparison operators:

1160
nanoCAD Mechanica

== (Equal), != (Not equal), >, <, > =, <=.

In the right-hand side, you can use any of the available functions.
Set the switches for objects dialogue, which should be hidden when the imposed
conditions.

9. Step control switches.

Installed built-in variables that control the behavior of the object when you insert:

Cause when you insert a dialogue - if enabled, the object is inserted into the drawing will be
automatically displayed dialog.

Draw the object when you insert - if enabled, selecting the insertion point and the direction
vector to be drawn on the screen.

Regenerate contour suppression - if enabled, when you insert an object in the drawing loop
suppression is re-created on the external outline details. This mode is useful if the object
used a parametric sketch with complex conditions rendering of geometric elements. If the
sketch was used suppression circuit, this mode must be disabled.

10. Step current script. At the last stage of the master browser displays full text created script.
Can be directly in the window to make the necessary changes to the script.
Be sure to use the command Save, to record the program script. If the object
Important! being edited already had a script, then after you save the current script will be
replaced by the newly created.

1161
nanoCAD Mechanica

Create BOM line

Master BOM line. Command is invoked from the menu wizard.

Line specification defines a table cell padding specification. The string can contain any characters
and references to the assigned parameters. When you hover the cursor over an object, inserted in a
drawing, activated tooltip - tooltip, which shows the value of a string specification.

Button Add Adds a parameter to a string specification.

Button Delete removes the selected parameter from the list.

Buttons are used to change the position of the selected item in the list.

Button type is used to select the type of line item:

If the button is disabled, the selected list item is a reference to the internal variable object and
is accompanied by an icon :

This element references the value of the variable "L".

1162
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the button is enabled, then the element is perceived as a piece of text in the list and is
denoted by an icon :

This element is a text fragment.

Designation list items constituting string specification does not reflect the type of
internal parameters. Reference to a string parameter will be denoted in the list
Important!
as well as a link to a numeric parameter - icon .

Creating a template layout tiles

Example of creating a template layout tiles.

1. Create a sketch of the object. If the size of the tiles will not change, then the sketch is not
required to specify the size.
Terms and method of creating a sketch of the parametric object described in section Rules for
creating sketches .

2. Create an object and save it to the database. In a script, you must set the variable "type"
(strTheType = "Plate")
3. Position the Bone in the drawing, insert the base of the two vectors and create a group. (see.
Creating a group .) These vectors determine the pace and direction of replication of the
original group. The basic point of the vector must coincide with the insertion point of the
object.

1163
nanoCAD Mechanica

If only one vector will create one line layout in any mode selection area.

Functions of the standard objects

The database of the standard details was created to help a constructor to create graphics. Use the
details from the database to create graphics. The standard details behave intelligently in the drawing
so that the number of additional actions in the development environment are decreased.

What can the standard details do

Insertion from the database. The database is organized as a hierarchical structure of objects having
similar functions. (For example, the details of arbors, pipelines etc. are grouped). There are also
different types of objects: the groups and the markers of the objects. You can search for the
required standard in the database. When inserting a detail, specify the insertion point and the
direction of the detail's local X axis (position and orientation of the detail). The details can be fully
displayed or displayed as a representation of the base plane. The position of the detail is specified
by a click, the orientation by a double-click.

1164
nanoCAD Mechanica

If GOST of the detail contains the table of the parameters, it is recommended to limit the dimension
values for the elements of the construction. One detail can have several tables. (For example, if the
parameters of one element of the construction do not depend on the parameters of the other
elements).

If the parameters of the object's graphic are not specified by GOST, the user specifies their values
during insertion. Such parameters are displayed in the second tab of the insertion dialog. Such
property is the length of the I-Profile.

Sometimes it is convenient to specify the parameters in the drawing according to the parameters of
other details. In this case, dynamical selection of the detail's parameters is used. This mode is
selected with the Selecting parameters dynamically button. The parameters are selected towards the
insertion point, after the insertion point is specified. Dynamical selection can be executed from the
table or by using other parameters. The values, selected dynamically, sometimes set additional
constraints (the maximum and minimum values) to provide correct drawing.

The grips are very useful tools to edit objects, and if the object has grips, they add additional
functionality to the object. You can move, rotate and mirror the object, using the grips; you can also
change the standard size of the detail, visually set the detail’s parameters and define the direction of
the drawing.

1165
nanoCAD Mechanica

The standard database of the program behaves intelligently towards the other objects in the
drawing. For example, when the pipe fitting with the internal cone is inserted, the nipple, inserted
after it, will be automatically connected with the fitting.

It is achieved by specifying parametric and geometric dependences between the details. The
dependences for the details should be set according to the standards.

The user can set the dependences for the objects already placed in the drawing (for example, if the
automatic connection is not specified). These dependences are custom and are stored in the
drawing.

1166
nanoCAD Mechanica

The standard databases can also have additional functions that are used in the other tools.

Requirements of the standard details

The required functionality means that the objects can be inserted from the database, their
parameters can be specified, changed, the details can be connected with each other etc.

The details should satisfy the standards (GOST, ISO, etc.) and engineering practice. It is required to
follow not only the table parameters but also ESKD, MechaniCS etc. requirements. The details
should not break the rules of design and product documentation.

Standardization. To make the creation and classification process of the standard details easier, use
similar graphics for the details that have similar functions.

As the database is used in multilingual applications, it can be localized; the names should be
correctly displayed in English or in Russian.

The situation, where several people have developed ONE GOST, is very common. The
standardization helps to transfer the product from the developers to the users. Everybody should
understand how the scripts are created.

1167
nanoCAD Mechanica

Abstract model of the detail

A detail should be a black box for the user.

To specify a nominal size and graphic of the detail, use its parameters. It is necessary to specify
these parameters, and not all parameters should be available for the user, but they should be
known for graphic recognition. There are the public parameters, which the user can see, and the
protected parameters, which define graphic, but the user cannot see them. These parameters can
have values, defined by GOST, or the user can set their values.

When editing the detail with grips, you should define their number and the parameters they specify;
define grips to specify the insertion point and the detail's orientation.

The view of the insertion dialog (or its data form) is also added to the user interface of the detail. Its
view and behaviour is the black box of the detail, the form and the dialog should be convenient for
the user to specify the nominal size and the parameters of the detail.

The geometric dependences are set by the detail's planes, which are a vector and a point together.
The number and the position of these planes should be defined to set the dependences. The planes
can be changed if they specify the detail's position according to the dependence with another detail,
and unchanged (if another detail is linked to this plane); they do not change the insertion point of
the detail according to the dependences.

The planes are defined according to the local coordinate system. The insertion point is its origin
(pntOrigin). The direction vector (vecDirection) and vector in the drawing's plane (vecPlane),
orthogonal to it, are X and Y axes.

The mathematically highlighted plane will be in the b/2 horizontal and in the h vertical distance from
the insertion point. The Vector of the plane will be collinear to the vecDirection direction vector. It is
enough to specify the new position of the detail if the plane is changed according to the dependence.

1168
nanoCAD Mechanica

When changing a detail's parameters (when there are parametric dependences or when specifying
the values of the parameter in the dialog), it is necessary to define new values for the parameters,
select new values from the table, change the planes etc.

To define discrete values of the parameters, select them from the table. The table is organized in
such a way that one row corresponds with one nominal size and the columns of the table contain the
detail's parameters. The parameters can have String, Integer and Real types. The parameters have
a comment, which is used in the insertion dialog. Columns and rows have unique identifiers, saved
during the import and export processes of the table to provide the correspondence of the nominal
sizes and already existing details in the drawing (selected rows and parameters in the table when
editing the object).

Object's graphic
To display the object in the drawing, the orthogonal views are used. The views have different types:
general, views with cuts and simple views with dimensions. The views with dimensions are system
and hidden. Their graphic is realized when the dimensional view is inserted from the context menu.

The local coordinate system in 2D views is set that the X-axis is directed to the right and the Y-axis
is directed up in the frontal view. The direction of the coordinate axes is defined by the projective
dependence in the other views.

The parametric recognition defines the parameters and the relative position (horizontality,
verticality, perpendicularity and parallelism) of the graphic primitives and their interaction with each
other (intersection points, tangents etc.). It is necessary to specify the insertion point of the detail
(origin of the local coordinate system). It is necessary to describe a view as a text (graphic
parameterization).

Recommendations for creating 2D views.

Use the object snap for endpoints and intersections.

Use the polar tracking and ortho modes.
Arc segments and tangent arcs should be dimensioned.
Use the helping geometry for recognition (circles in the centres of the tangent arcs).
Dimension should be clearly set.

1169
nanoCAD Mechanica

Sometimes to create a difficult graphic, the view is separated into parts, and null distance is
set between the parts.

The purpose of the recognition is to define the position of all primitives towards the insertion point.
The parameters and dimensions are set from it.

The requirements to graphic are specified in the particular recommendations.

To make a 2D graphic parametrically controlled, set the detail's geometric parameters as dimensions
instead of the nominal sizes. Some parameters are related to graphics.

Common properties: "Visibility" - is a logic expression or variable, defining whether or not to draw
the primitive.

Linetype:

0 - main.
2 - thin.
4 - dashed.

“Work object” - an object that is used in the recognition, but is not added to the end graphic. It is a
helping drawing.

Parameters of hatch - the angle of slope, hatch space and double hatch feature (logical condition)

Parameters of ellipse - the major axis of the ellipse and the minor axis of the ellipse. The start
angle and end angle of the ellipse - if the elliptic arc is drawn. The sloping angle to the OX axis is an
angle, on which the local coordinate system of the ellipse is relatively rotated to the coordinate
system of the object’s view.

Parameters of spline - the start and end tangent angle. All points of the spline should be
dimensioned.

If the hatch contour does not follow the required contour, a closed polyline is created with the
parameter - hatch contour.

Sometimes it is necessary to set a contour of suppression for the detail (if the automatically
created contour does not follow the requirements of the detail). In this case, the parameter of the
suppression contour is also set for the closed polyline.

Creating the dimensional views of the standard details

The same graphic is used to create the dimensional views of the standard details, as is used to
recognize the main view.

1170
nanoCAD Mechanica

Add only the required elements to the graphic of the dimensional view.

To recognize the dimensions as constructive objects, switch off the Work object checkbox in the
Parameter dialog.

After that, specify the required view of the object and select Hidden view and Dimensional view for
it.

Select the Recognize view from the context menu.

1171
nanoCAD Mechanica

Specify the graphic in the drawing and confirm the selection. Save the object.

To test the dimensional view, insert the object with the created direction of view. From the context
menu of this view, select the Add dimensional view.

Specify the insertion point of the dimensional view.

1172
nanoCAD Mechanica

Dimensional views are inserted with the current dimension style and symbol
Note:
scale.

Three-dimensional graphics object

Three-dimensional graphic objects implemented in Autodesk Inventor. Since Inventor itself a
parametric solid modeling environment, is usually enough in the model in addition to the control
charts to determine the geometry and position of the object plane for the implementation
dependencies of Inventor. Object parameters in the model are described in the section of user
parameters with the prefix "u_" in order to avoid the coincidence of the names of system
parameters and parameters of Inventor nanoCAD Mechanics(Undefined variable: Var.ProductVer ).
Ready-made (part Inventor ipt) attached to an object in the database. When you insert an object
nanoCAD Mechanics6 among Inventor simply transferred the corresponding parameter model, then
the model is updated. Dependencies nanoCAD Mechanics6, superimposed on the converted piece
according Inventor respect to specify the details of the planes. Therefore, to realize all types of
dependencies requires that the Inventor model for each plane, described in the script have been
defined as the plane itself, and the axis (vector plane) and the plane of the base point.
Recommendations for the construction of the model is also presented separately.

In the Inventor environment, there are additional tools to test models - parametric testing (from
the table selects all sizes, which are applied to the current model of the selected object).

In addition, Inventor creates three-dimensional preview for components intended for use in three-
dimensional design environment (usually it's the details that are three-dimensional model).

Details in the database. Dependences

The details can be connected with each other. How does it happen By setting the parametric and
geometric dependences. The parametric dependence - an expression meaning that one parameter of
one object equals one parameter or the arithmetic expression of the parameters of another object.
1173
nanoCAD Mechanica

For example: the diameter of the bolt thread should be equal to the diameter of the screw thread
which it is connected with.

The thread diameter parameter (dr) of the screw is equal to the “thread diameter” parameter
(dr) of the bolt (dr=dr).

When setting the support for the shell, the dependence of the parameters' arithmetic expression is
set: the diameter of the support is equal to the sum of two shell widths and the inner diameter of
the shell. DA=D+2*s.

When setting the dependences there are a child and parent objects, the dependences can be one-
directed and two-directed. The one-directed dependences affect only the child object (change of the
parent object affects the child object, but change of the child object does not affect the parent
object), the two-directed dependences affect two objects, change of one object affects the other
object.

The geometric dependence between the objects is realized by movement and reorientation of the
objects. The new position of the object is calculated according to the new position of the object's
planes.

The views of geometric dependences:

1174
nanoCAD Mechanica

INSERT - the combination of the insertion points and planes' vectors. The function has a parameter -
offset - the distance between planes' points of the detail along the OX axis.

MATE - the collinearity of the direction vectors if the abscissae of the details are relatively equal.
There is a parameter - distance along the OX axis.

AXIS - the combination of the direction vectors with the unfixed coordinates along the OX axis. The
parameter of the dependence - distance along OY axis.

The combination along direction (angular dependence) - the collinearity of the direction vectors with
the unfixed relative coordinates.

The geometric dependences can be codirectional and opposite directional according to the
orientation of the local vector of the OX axis.

There is no need to connect all objects with all objects and that is why it is necessary to set the
dependences automatically. The classification of the objects is set to define what details should
connect with each other. The classification is made according to the number class (used in the
program tools) and the public parameters of the object. These are strTheName, strTheType and
strTheSubType variables. To connect a bolt and a screw there is a check of these variables and, if
they coincide, the dependence is set. Fasteners are connected only with fasteners, not with pipe
fittings, but both types have the “thread diameter” parameter. Every object has a unique
identifier, used for the insertion from the browser.

Suppression contour and display order

Graphics, like the standard details from the database, have a suppression contour - a closed area,
hiding the graphical primitives and other details. (For example, the contour of the screw overlaps a
line of the bolt.).

Display order is set by the rZOrder variable. Details with an rZOrder value greater than the rZOrder
value of other details will overlap them. This property works with the intervals divisible by 2000. The
object from the database can have a suppression contour formed with its outer boundary, a
specified suppression contour or have no contour at all.

Eventive Object's model

Flowchart of the script's functions.

1175
nanoCAD Mechanica

.Adlleadrr I
I I

I ()bT..;o:..t;sab.m

I t
I
I OIICaaaa:t
I
I
I Sc:lGripPoial
I
I
ObDialog
I
I ObDialogCbang.cd II I

I OblniiSeJirt
I
ODSela:tParam
I I

J ObMab:Panmu:tc: L
I I

J
I
Onllaan-an• Ia's 1--

ActHeader- the description of the object's parameters. It includes the description of the public and
protected parameters, specification of the reserved variables and description of the subobjects.

During every activation of the object, the Onlnitialization function is executed. Using set variable the
single setting of the objects parameters needs to be checked.

The OnDialog function is activated after specifying the insertion pdnt and direction from the context
menu during the dynamical selection ofthe parameters.

1175
nanoCAD Mechanica

The OnDialogChanged allows you to add interactivity in the insertion dialog of the object. It is
executed every time the parameters are changed in the dialog. In the function’s body, it is possible
to hide the controls to provide the correct selection of the object's parameters.

The OnInitSelect is executed before the dynamical selection of the parameters. There is a tooltip
string (for example, the current value of the length).

The OnSelectParam is executed during the dynamical selection of the parameters. It defines what
and how parameters should be selected. It usually contains checks of request number for the
selection of the parameters and checks of the current view.

The OnMakeParameters function is final. All final calculations of the parameters are executed and
the classifiers and planes are specified. As this function is executed after all object events, the
constraints for the parameters and the relative selection of implementations are added.

The SetGripPoint function sets grips for the object. Their number and position are set there.

The OnMoveGripPoint function receives the number of the edited the NMovingGrip grip, the relative
position of the grips is processed and the object's parameters are changed according to it.

The BeforeConnect is executed before the dependences are set. The previous dependences are reset
and a tooltip string is specified when selecting the object to connect.

The OnConnect function is executed when one object is connected to another object. It contains a
check of the object's classifiers and operators for setting the dependences according to this check.

As the result of the OnConnect is a new value for the connected object, this is received as a new
object. The OnChangeParameters function is executed when the object's parameters are changed
according to another object's parameters using the parameters toolbar. This function determines the
object's reaction to changing its parameters.

Localization mechanism
The following is a mechanism of localization:

The object's implementations are activated by their system names, which can be changed in the
context menu of the Master of Objects.

Activation of the implementation in the script:

if (strDesignName == "Implementation 1") {

strPartName = @BOLT_M+dr+step+" # x"+L+@ GOST_7798_70;
};

If the use of the string values in the local coding is required in the script, change them with the
resources.

The resource is a reference to the table row containing the list of the string values according to the
current application language.
1176
nanoCAD Mechanica

To use the local resource in the table, call its name (Label) with "@" prefix.

Public(
L, @ROD_LENGTH,
dr, @THREAD_DIAMETER,
WP1, @WORK_PLANE_1,
swTr, @SMALL_THREAD_STEP,
rScrewOk, @BOLT_OK,
s, @BOLT_HEAD_WIDTH,
b, @THREAD_LENGTH,
massa, @MASS
);

When the script is executed in the specified location, the required values will be selected instead of
the @<resource name> references:

Public(
L, "ROD_LENGTH",
dr, "THREAD_DIAMETER",
WP1, "WORK_PLANE_1",
swTr, "SMALL_THREAD_STEP",
rScrewOk, "BOLT_OK",
s, "BOLT_HEAD_WIDTH",
b, "THREAD_LENGTH",
massa, "MASS"
);

Requirements of the objects. List of the requirements. Graphic and script creation of
the objects from the database using MechWizard
The requirements should be applied for the newly created and edited objects from the database.

Object's properties
The name of the object should contain the name and number of its standard (for example, "GOST
7798-70", "ISO 657/16").

1177
nanoCAD Mechanica

The comments attached to the name should contain the object's name according to the standard
(for example, "Hot-Rolled I-Shape with Sloped Flange").

The specification string should be specified by the strPartName variable.

All the comment fields of the table parameters from the DBFLD and DBINF sections of the UniDialog
function should be filled in with the descriptions. All the comment fields of the table should be filled
in.

It is recommended to group the table fields so that they have the main parameters grouped to the
left.

By default, the name of an implementation is "Implementation1" (without space), if another name is

not specified by the standard.

If the Russian standard is used, GOST is set in the properties (if the detail was made by OST, TU or
ATK).

Parameters
When creating the parameter's name you should take into account:

1. Similar parameters of the objects from the database (for example, dr - thread diameter, p -
thread pitch, L- rod length).
2. Names of parameters in the standard (for example, D1 - flange outer diameter, Dy - drift
nominal diameter, b - thread length. The function of the parameter should be specified by the
comment in the table or by description of the public parameter.
3. Rules of the variable’s name for C language.

Rules to define the variables:

Identifier is a sequence of symbols, which are variable’s, function’s or operator’s names.

Identifier can consist of Latin letters, numbers and underscore character.
Identifier should be started from a letter or underscore character.
Identifier, consisting of the same sequences of symbols but in a different case (upper/lower
case), are different identifiers.
Maximum length of the identifier is limited to 50 symbols.

Recommendations for variables names:

Use prefixes for variable types (r - real, i - integer, str - string, b - logic, vec - vector, pnt -
point)
Use descriptive variables’ names (for example, rLength instead of L, bSection instead of sh)
Use different cases of letters in the long names of the variables (for example, rWP2offset,
bUseFlatSeal)

The parameters should be described as public if:

1. It is needed to specify a connect for the object

2. It is needed to specify a nominal size for the object (the parameters are important)

3. It is needed to extract the parameter for further use (by universal marker or to add to the table
fields and etc.)

In any other cases the parameter should not be added to the public section.

You can specify only values of the strTheName, strTheType and strTheSubType variables in English.
The values of these parameters should be specified in a way to provide the maximum
standardization of the connect procedures.

1178
nanoCAD Mechanica

All parameters of the Public type should have descriptions. This also applies to the descriptions of
the working planes. The descriptions of the parameters should be started from the object noun (for
example, "Bolt head width").

It is not recommended to describe the parameters with dimensions in the Public section. The
descriptions of parameters in the table and in VFLD field can have dimensions. In this case, the
dimension is specified in SI units after a comma (for example, "Outer diameter, mm").

All parameters names of the VFLD and BFLD sections should be filled in. It is not allowed to use the
variable name as the description of the variable (e.g. L,”L”).

If the preview is set with the dimensions of the detail, it is allowed to use the comments of any
parameters in the VFLD L, "L, Length".

It is recommended to specify the description for all parameters used in the script (as comments).

If a detail’s mass is specified in the standard, it should be added to the public parameters and in the
UniDialog DBINF section.

The mass of the detail is specified as a "massa" parameter and in kilos per one detail.

If the mass of the implementations is specified in the table, these parameters have names: massa1,
massa2 and etc.

To provide the correct localization of the scripts, all string values should be references to the
resources, except for the implementation’s name strings, strTheName, strTheType, strTheSubType
classifiers, form names etc.

Resource names are specified in English upper case letters without spaces.

For example:

@DIAMETER_OF_THREAD
@WORKING_PLANE_1

The system names should contain only English letters.

Script
It is recommended that the comments are created in English

It is not recommended to place several operators in one line.

When creating the script, follow the order of the functions:

1. ActHeader()
2. OnInitialisation()
3. (Custom functions)
4. OnMakeParameters()
5. SetGripPoint()
6. OnMoveGripPoint()
7. OnDialog()
8. OnDialogChanged()
9. OnChangeParams()
10. OnInitSelect()
11. OnSelectParam()
12. OnMenu()
13. BeforeConnect()
14. OnConnect()

1179
nanoCAD Mechanica

The operators, setting the strPartName and strPartDescription variables, should be placed at the end
of the OnMakeParameters parameters.

The script version and the GOST description should be placed in the first lines of the script. General
comments of the object can be placed after them. For example:

SVersion = 2;
ObjectDescription = "GOST 19425-74";
// Slope of flange should be taken
//between 4 and 10%.
//In particular 8%

It is recommended to use the tabulation to specify an offset for the composite statement and is not
recommended to use spaces.

Composite statements should satisfy the following requirements:

Open bracket is on the same level as the statement

Nested statements are placed in the same level with the 1 Tab offset.
Close bracket is on the same level as the composite statement.

Example:

function OnConnect {
if (rPart == 0) {
if (obj.strTheSubType == "vaBottom") {
setWorkId (0, obj.objectID);
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};
if (obj.strTheSubType == "vaShell") {
setWorkId (1, obj.objectID);
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};
};
…
};

The UniDialog function should satisfy the following requirements:

The Function is formed as a composite statement

Every keyword is started from a new line
Every option of multi-version sections starts from a new line with the offset.

Example:

UniDialog(
DBFLD, seria, h, b,
DBINF, num, mas1,
VFLD,
L,"length of I-Profile, mm",
strRefDataHeader,"Reference data:",
A, "A, sm^2",
Ix, "Ix, sm^4",
ix, "ix, sm",
Wx, "Wx, sm^3",
Sx, "Sx, sm^3",
Iy, "Iy, sm^4",
Wy, "Wy, sm^3",

1180
nanoCAD Mechanica

iy, "iy, sm",

BFLD, bHid, "Show hidden lines",
TVIDS,lViewType,"AnyWBK",
VIEW,"Vids"
);

It is recommended to break difficult arithmetic expressions over several lines, or use several
additional variables.

It is recommended to use the descriptive comments to group lines of the code which have a close
logic structure (for example, block of statements to specify working planes etc.).

Graphics
The drawing should provide recognition of the parametric 2D view of the object from the database
with maximum legibility and contain all required views for the element (including the graphic for
which the preview was created).

The expressions "single parametric element from the database", "detail" and "GOST" (in lower case
so that the letters are not confused with the standards) are set as equivalent.

The drawing of the detail or details should be created in one file. The file name should contain all the
numbers of the standards used to create the detail and, if needed, the description. (for example,
"GOST 7798-70 Hexagon Head Bolts Product Grade A").

General requirements
By default the scale is set 1:1. The scale to draw a graphic is selected by the user, but the drawing
should be legible. It is recommended to draw a detail according to its values from the table.

All objects are drawn in the model space. Default settings are used to create elements.

Layers
By default the line width is set to default for all layers and objects.

Layers, used for the drawings:

Layers Parameter - linetype of Colour Objects

name the object

MAIN 0 or not specified White Objects, which should have this linetype

Insertion point

THIN 2 Red Objects, which should have this linetype

Hatch

DASHED 4 Green Objects, which should have this linetype

AXIS Specified by the command Red Objects, which should have this linetype

1181
nanoCAD Mechanica

WORKING Checkbox "working object" Yellow Objects, which should have this linetype

DIMENSIONS Not specified Blue Dimensions and text formulas

Names of GOSTs, implementations, views and

other comments

The "centre Line" parameter should be set for graphic objects after their replacement on the
specified layer.

Placement of graphic
The separate details and the separate implementations of one GOST should be separated from the
other GOSTs and implementations in the drawing (zonally or with the rectangular frames). If there
is more than one GOST or implementation, the GOST number or implementation name should be
written above of the group of implementation or GOST views.

The views should be in the projective connection in the drawing.

Figure 1. Placement Drawing Views.

The views, which are out of the projective connection, should have clear names to define the
relation.

It is recommended to group the views with cuts, simplified views and views with dimensions near
their projective views.

If one or several views belong to one GOST/implementation, they should have clear names to define
the relation (for example: "Left-side view (all implementation)", "Frontal (GOST 7798,7805,
7806)"). The graphic of the details view should have a name.

The detail should be oriented that the detail's direction (vecDirection of script) should coincide with
the OX axis (to the right for the frontal view).

Dimensions
1182
nanoCAD Mechanica

To set the dimension, take into account:

1. Correct recognition;
2. Legibility of the drawings;
3. Unified system for design documentation requirements.

It is not permitted to place the dimensions inside the hatched area (the hatch is not allowed to flow
over the dimension values).

Hatch
Hatch should be executed by the "User defined" type, slope angle 45 degrees. A hatch step should
be specified parametrically according to the width of the narrowest hatched part (s):

For example:

1. For thin-wall objects: s/2;

2. For massive objects: s/8;

3. Intermediate step: s/4.

A hatch type can be specified in absolute units divisible by 10 (0.1;1;10;100)

You can ignore these rules if you need to hatch in both sides.

Parameters
Using the "Set parameter" tool, set the parameter for the dimensions. It is possible to switch off the
"Work object" checkbox for the dimensional view only.

It is recommended to avoid text formulas in the drawing fields (place the calculations in the script).

Text formulas are allowed to be placed in the drawing, if you need to calculate the parameters of the
implementation's view and it is defined that their use is not needed in the script.

Use of non-English letters is only allowed in the names

When specifying the parameter's name take into account:

1. Similar names existing in the database

2. Parameters names in the GOST
3. Meaningful parameters names, corresponding to the syntax of the C language.

If possible, avoid difficult arithmetic expressions set in the dimension parameters (it is
recommended to use the Protected variables).

Other requirements
The views names should be specified with text of 10mm height. Text formulas should have the text
height of 5 mm. The views names are placed above the view, text formulas are placed below the
view.

Specify meaningful names for the blocks in the array in English (for example, hole, chamfer etc.).
The insertion point of the blocks, used for creating an axial array, should be placed in the centre of
the axial array.

It is possible to add an image of the detail, copied from the GOST, into the drawing field, if it does
not cause difficulties in legibility and overlap other objects.

1183
nanoCAD Mechanica

Making 3D models Inventor

General Requirements
Three-dimensional model should comply with GOST, and, as a rule, two-dimensional drawings.

To create the model should Inventor Russian localization, the lowest of the supported versions.

The material model must be assigned to "Steel Mild" (low carbon steel).

The model should, if possible, be oriented so that vecDirection was the same direction as the vector
OX, vecPlane - with vector OY, and pntOrigin - was located at coordinates (0,0,0).

A similar model (bolts, nuts, flanges, etc.) should be oriented the same way.

Work Items
The model must be set to the origin, in accordance with the requirements of the creation of models
of nanoCAD Mechanics (WPT01, WA01, WA02).

The model must be given all the work items that define the working plane, in accordance with the
requirements MecahniCS. Ie regardless of the model, for each of the working plane, described in the
script must be specified working plane (prefix MCS_CWPL_), the axis (prefix MCS_CWA_) and point
(prefix MCS_CWPT_) Inventor.

set the working elements relative to the origin (instead of relative geometry) is preferred.

It is recommended that the working group members at the end of a tree model building. Ranking:

1. Operating elements of the origin

2. Work items planes (in ascending order or alphabetical order).

Settings
The parameters that are broadcast from a script must be prefixed with u_ (c_ not recommended in
order to avoid mistakes with Russian layout).

The parameters that are broadcast from a script to be included in the custom settings.

It is not allowed to rename sizes in custom settings.

It is not allowed clearance broadcast from the script parameters in the form of tables embedded
Excel.

thread
When you create a thread must specify the type of "ISO metric" (ISO Metric) for cylindrical surfaces
and "ISO conical" (ISO tapered) for the tapered surfaces.

thread lead-in chamfer should follow the build tree after the thread element.

Other requirements
For the model should be off the option to "create a picture preview".

For the model must be assigned to the material (not Default). Unless otherwise indicated, the
material should be used "mild steel" ("Steel Mild").

1184
nanoCAD Mechanica

If the item does not have to dissect the drawing, the settings of the document should be off the
option "Allow participation in sketches" ("Allow sectioning through part")

In the model, all the sketches, work planes, point and axis can be hidden.

In the case of accession to the guests one model should not indicate the name of performance. In
the case of joining two or more models should include the names of three-dimensional designs in
accordance with the parameters specified in the script.

When you create a 3D-preview should use gray.

Do not be permitted in the guest 3D models, in addition to the required (other versions nonexistent
performances, etc.).

Syntax scripting language

Script - is the code in a language similar to SI, which determines the nature of the object database
software parameters, the plane impact on the response object. Automatic installation of
dependencies, etc. A script comprises a series of blocks, which perform defined events from outside
the object.

Identifiers
Identifier is a sequence of characters representing the name of a variable, function, or operator.
Rules describe identifiers MechWizard similar to the rules in C:

Identifier can consist of letters of the alphabet, numbers, and the underscore character.
The identifier must begin with a letter or underscore.
Identifiers consisting of identical sequences of letters, but in a different case (uppercase /
lowercase) are different identifiers.
The maximum identifier length is limited to 50 characters.

Recommendations to the name variable names are listed in the document.

Keywords
Keywords - are reserved identifiers that are endowed with a certain sense. They can be used only in
accordance with the value of the known macro-language interpreter. Keywords cannot act as an
identifier.

List of key words listed in the annex.

Data Types
In the macro language, there are five main types of data:

1. Valid floating-point number (double analogue in C). Range-1.7e308 .. 1.7e308.

2. Line.
3. Three-dimensional point (Point)
4. Three-dimensional vector (Vector)
5. Plane defined by the reference point and a normal vector (Plane).

The script made an agreement to the names of real type variables prefixed r, to add a prefix to a
string variable str or s, to the point type variables prefixed pnt or p, the variables of vector type to
add a prefix or vec v, and the plane denoted WP (WorkPlane).

Initialization of variables is carried out without prior specification as in BASIC. To declare a variable,
you just need to assign it a value. If the variable is not described in the header function in the

1185
nanoCAD Mechanica

sections ActHeader Public or Protected, it will be considered local and will retain its value from the
first moment until the end of the definition, in which it is described.

StrName = "ObjectA";
rPI = 3.1415926;
rA = 2.0;

To initialize the points and vectors used special constructor functions Point (), Point (x, y, z), and
Vector (), Vector (x, y, z) respectively.

pnt2=Point();//handle length
pnt1= Point(1.0, 10.0, 10.0); //This is the point with specific coordinates
vec1 = Vector(); // vector of unit length, which coincides with the axis OX (1,0,0)
vec1 = Vector(1.0, 1.0, 0); //Vector specific coordinates

To separate the coordinate point or vector can be accessed using the qualifier:

pnt1:x = 12.5;//Removing the abscissa of the point

vec1:y = 25.6;//Removing the ordinates of the point

Plane used to initialize a constructor function Plane (pnt, vecNormal).

WP1 = Plane( pntBase, vecNormal );

//pnt- This is the basic point for the plane WP1
//vecNormal- This is the normal vector to the plane of WP1

Eg

WP1 = Plane( pntOrigin, vecDirection);

Indexing variables

If you declare a number of variables of any type with names that differ only by the number in the
end, then these variables can be accessed by index, as an array.

rParam1 = 1.0;
rParam2 = 2.0;
rParam3 = 4.0;
...
rParam[2] = 45.7;
rParam[3] = 9.1223;

Comments
Comments in the script begins with the double slash line and ends at the end of the line.

//First set up a plane in counter-clockwise order

vecNormal=getLocalNormal(vecDirection,vecPlane);

WP1 = Plane( pntOrigin, vecDirection );

WP2 = Plane( pntOrigin-vecPlane*(0), -vecPlane );

//Правые боковые
WP3 = Plane( pntOrigin+vecNormal*(b/2), vecNormal );
WP4 = Plane( pntOrigin+vecNormal*(b/2)+vecPlane*h, vecNormal );

1186
nanoCAD Mechanica

WP5 = Plane( pntOrigin+vecPlane*(h), vecPlane );

Operators
All operators of the macro language can be divided into the following categories:

arithmetic operators
Boolean operators
conditional operator
loop operator
other operators (empty statement, the assignment operator, the operator access to internal
members)

All operators end empty statement - a semicolon ";".

Empty operator
Empty statement consists only of a semicolon. When this statement is executed, nothing happens.
This statement is a delimiter for other operators, functions, and lines in the script.

Composite operator
A compound statement is a few operators and announcements enclosed in curly braces {}.
Execution of the compound is in the sequential execution of its constituent operators. At the end of a
compound statement the semicolon is placed.

The assignment operator

The assignment operator is denoted by the sign of equality.

expression А = В; means that variable А is assigned the value of expression В, and the type of the
variable А type of expression is established В.

Operator access to internal members of the complex data types

To access the internal members of the complex data types, a special qualifier operator ":". For
example, it can be used to access the individual coordinates variables of type Point and Vector.

Arithmetic and logical operators

Syntax of arithmetic and logical operators in macro language script syntax is similar to SI.

Arithmetic Puzzle

А+В Addition A == B A is equal to B

А-В Subtraction A != B A nonequilibrium In

А*В Multiplication A>B A more in

А/D Division A<B And in less than

1187
nanoCAD Mechanica

А && B A and B

A || B A or B

For arguments of type Point subtraction result is a vector. A multiplication of a vector by a new
vector will equal the scalar product of the vector by.

vecDirection = pntEnd - pntStart;

vecScaled = vecDirection * rScale;

The conditional operator

Format statement:

if ( <expression> )
operator_IF1;
else
operator_ELSE1;
//<expression>- it is a logical condition to perform operator

As operatora_IF1 and / or may act _ELSE1 composite operator, ie group of statements enclosed in
braces.

Execution if the operator starts with the evaluation of expression.

Further execution is as follows:

if the expression is true (ie, different from 0), then the operator _IF1.
if the expression is false (ie, equal to 0), then the operator _ELSE1
if the expression is false and there is no operator _ELSE1, then the following if statement in

Block of statements after else may be missing along with the word else. In this case, the conditional
statement is as follows:

if ( <expression> )
operator_IF1;

As an expression can be any logical or arithmetic operator or a sequence of statements separated by

parentheses.

if (A>1)
operator_IF1;
if ((A>1)&&(B<5)&&(C==25))
operator_IF1;

You can use nested conditional statements, ie conditional statement can be included in the design if
the design or else another conditional statement.

if (A > 1){
if (B < 5){
if (C == 25)
operator_IF1;
}

1188
nanoCAD Mechanica

};

Cycle Operator
Format statement:

while (expression)
operator_BODY;

Requirements for the expression, such as in the if statement. _BODY Operator called the loop body.

Executing the cycle begins with the evaluation of the expression. Further execution is as follows:

1. If the expression is true (not 0), the loop body is executed.

2. If the expression is false, then the next while the operator.
3. The cycle is repeated from step 1.

Functions
Function - a set of operators and other function call. Each function has a name. Function declaration
begins with the keyword function. The function body is enclosed in braces. In this version of the
browser functions have no parameters.

Format function:

function Function_Name{
operator_1;
...
operator_N;
}

Allowed to call one of the other functions, but called from funcA functions must be declared above in
the body of the script.

Example:

function user_Function_1{
MessageBox("This is my first feature");
}
function OnInitialization{
user_Function_1(); // The correct call. The called function is declared above!
user_Function_2(); // Wrong call. The called function is declared below!
}
function user_Function_2{
MessageBox("This is my second feature");
}

The interpreter has a number of built-in functions as listed in Appendix 2.

Specifying the object plane

Target abstract object geometry (points vectors planes) may be in coordinate form (almost not
used) or relative to the local coordinate system. Position of the points defined by specifying
operators addition point and plane. In the example, the position of the reference point is defined as
the plane

1189
nanoCAD Mechanica

pntWP4=pntOrigin+vecDirection*(b/2)+vecPlane*h

Normal vector of the plane collinear insert vecDirection

Consequently, she illuminated plane WP4 will be set as

WP4=Plane(pntWP4,vecDirection);

If the surface normal vector is not orthogonal coordinate system, it is often determined by the
operator or RotateBy GetLocalNormal.

For example, for lining the conical bottom, surface normal vector is defined as the WP2

vecNormal=getLocalNormal(vecDirection,vecPlane);
vecFitting = rotateBy(vecDirection,90-ang/2,vecNormal);
//ang - is the angle of the bottom in terms of

1190
nanoCAD Mechanica

Apart from the above identified, operators are used to find the vector normal plane and the base
point:

pntWP1 = Point(WP1);
vecWP1 = Vector(WP1);

To find the distance between the point and the plane used the difference point and plane

rDistance = WP1-pntOrigin;

Vector length (distance between points) define the operator vecLen:

rLength = vecLen(pntWP1 - pntOrigin);

Orthogonal vector operator is getPerp:

vecPlane = getPerp(vecDirection);

Worksheet
To work with the table object used by two operators and LoadInCache SelectInCache.

The operator loads the LoadInCache specifies the parameters in the cache of the table. This operator
in the new versions must be called only when the sample is forced with an expression to evaluate
the parameters of the (..., "+", ...).

SelectInCache operator selects from the table according to the specified criteria (see syntax in the
appendix)

Sampling by "kFirst" selects one first row. Sampling by "kFilter" selects a range of records from a
table that match the specified filter.

Dining sample-specific parameters "~" - the approximate equality parameter selects the value in the
record. "=" - An exact equality, "+" - the sample on the filter. Picks by filter oznachet that if the
logical filter condition is satisfied, then the record is selected from the table (subjected to further
checks on the conditions).

For example, the

SelectInCache("kFirst", "dr", "~", rdr, "L", "+", "L>=rMinLen&& L<=rMaxLen&& (L-b<=rTrLen)");

selects the first record of the table, where the combination of parameters dr, L, b such that dr≈rdr,
rMinLen<=L<=rMaxLen, (L-b)<=rTrLen.

Function SelectInCache important order of the sampling conditions. This means that in the first place
will be selected from the table entry corresponding to the first condition, then - of which selects
records corresponding to the second condition, etc.

If there are multiple items in the tables, then the coincidence parameter names must enable the
checkbox "Use the table name as a prefix to the parameters" in the context menu of the
corresponding table.

In this case, an appeal to the parameter in the script will be as follows:

1191
nanoCAD Mechanica

<Name of the table>.<Parameter name>

For example:

If (Table0.dr==Table1.Thread1) {
...
};

To provide a sample of the first table is not necessary to modify the operator SelectInCache.

For example, if you need to select from the table Table1 parameter dr, equal to 10, then the first
condition in the operator to select from a table must follow the table index (starting from 0):

SelectInCache(1, "kFirst", "dr", "~", 10);

For a table with imenenm Table0 table name can be omitted. Ie it is also true, and another
expression:

SelectInCache ("kFirst", "dr", "~", 10, "L", "~", 50);

SelectInCache ("0","kFirst", "dr", "~", 10, "L", "~", 50);

Dialog object. Making function UniDialog

View Insert Object dialog box is defined by specifying the key features UniDialog.

See the appropriate section of the application.

It should be easy to compare that

DBFLD - the defining table parameters.

DBINF - reference table settings.

VFLD - are arbitrary parameters and reference data.

VIDS - a list of versions of the object (possibly omitted if there is only one execution.

TVIDS - different views of the same design (possible keys - by type, All - those present, AnyWBK -
opposing views generated mirror (for symmetrical objects).

VIEW - thumbs species.

Key OnDglBeforeSelParam in ActHeader determines whether the dialog is called before the dynamic
parameter selection.

Connecting UserForm
If an object is given shape, then in order for it to be called, you need to function in place of the
function OnDialog UniDialog cause concrete form.

For example, if the object is given form named frmMain, you should write the following:

functionOnDialog{
ShowForm("frmMain");
}

1192
nanoCAD Mechanica

Similarly, the terms can cause several different forms of the object, referring to them by name using
the operator ShowForm.

Set dependencies
Operators set up dependencies implement geometric and parametric dependence.

Parametric dependencies

SetParamConstraint(< param >,obj,EXPR,< expression to constrain>,bBidirect);

<param> - name of the parameter object to which the time dependence.

Obj - which object set.

EXPR - so far only the dependence on the expression

<expression to constrain> - arithmetic combination of parameters on which dependence is placed

(must be in quotes).

bBidirect - bidirectional or unidirectional relationship.

Geometric constraints

SetGeomConstraint(rTYPE, rDIRECTION, obj, < WPname >, < WPtoConnect >,offset,bBidirect);

SetGeomConstraint(ANGE,CODIRECT,< obj >,< wpSourcePlane >,< wpObjPlane >,< rAngle >,<
bBiderect >);

Types of dependencies rTYPE = INSERT (inset)) MATE (alignment on the plane) AXIS (alignment
axis) DIRECTION (aka ANGLE) (angular orientation).

Direction rDIRECTION = CODIRECT (co-directed) CONTRDIRECT (opposite directions).

<WPname> - The name of the plane, which are attached.

<WPtoConnect> - The name of the plane, joined.

Offset - numerical or parametric expression that defines:

INSERT - axial distance between the planes.

MATE - the normal distance between the planes. AXIS

- relative displacement in terms of the axes.

DIRECTION - angle relative orientation of the planes.

For dependencies DIRECTION (ANGLE) there are certain conditions:

Syntax:

SetGeomConstraint(ANGE,CODIRECT,< obj >,< wpSourcePlane >,< wpObjPlane >,< rAngle >,<

bBiderect >);

ANGLE - keyword angular dependence.

CODIRECT - always for the angular dependence. It is believed due to the minimal angle.

1193
nanoCAD Mechanica

<obj> - which object set.

<wpSourcePlane> - the plane of the source object to which dependence is placed.

<wpObjPlane> - the plane of the object to which you subscribe.

<rAngle> - numerical value of the angle in degrees, depending.

<bBidirect>=(TRUE,FALSE) - unidirectional or bidirectional relationship. Default FALSE.

Depending on the type ANGLE should be added after the dependency type INSERT, MATE, AXIS.

When the dependency type INSERT, MATE or AXIS rotation is relative to the axes of the planes
dependence.

In the absence of dependency type INSERT, MATE AXIS or move it in the normal to the plane in
which both vectors lie in the direction of the minimum angle of rotation.

If we consider the vectors are collinear, move it about the axis OX.

Example:

SetGеomConstraint(ANGLE,CODIRECT, obj,WPnormal,obj.WPnormal,45);
SetGеomConstraint(ANGLE,CODIRECT, obj,OYPlane,obj.WP2,15,TRUE);

Examples of different types of dependency can be found in the appendix.

Function ShowValue
Using the debugger windows can detect errors in the script and determine the values of parameters
during the execution of the script. Syntax, see Appendix.

Appendix 1. A list of keywords and reserved variables

SVersion=2; The first line of the script, which determines the version of the
interpreter

strTheType Object type

strTheName Object Name

strTheSubType Subtype object

pntOrigin Insertion point

vecDirection Vector insertion direction

VecPlane Orthogonal vector to vecDirection

Scl Object Zoom

rZOrder Ranking (used for overlap)

1194
nanoCAD Mechanica

strDesignName Execution system name

rXсoord Relative abscissa cursor with dynamic selection of the parameters

rYcoord Relative ordinate cursor with dynamic selection of the parameters

VecCoord Mostly available in OnSelectParam

VecCoord: X - X coordinate of the relative

VecCoord: Y - Y coordinate of the relative

pntGrip# (# Number) point pens with the number #

rPart Serial number of the request.

rKbd Flag keyboard input. Equal to 1 if the value is entered from the
keyboard.

strPartName Name of detail in the specification (section name)

strPartDescription Part description in the specification (section designation)

strPromt Help line (in the dynamic selection or when selecting items for a
connection)

NSelect The number of requests when inserting objects.

NPart Number of selectable parameters if 0 or undefined then simply

called dialogue.

BreakCur End the current dynamic parameter selection

BreakAll Complete the entire cycle of selection of dynamic parameters

NoVectorSelect Does not indicate the vector inserts (used at a connection)

Handled Result processing facility

NGrip Number of Handles

NMovingGrip Phone editable pens

1195
nanoCAD Mechanica

lSimpleView Variable specifies the type of species, UniDialog created and

installed automatically.

If == 1 - a simplified view.

If == 2 - sectional view

scaleDisable If this parameter is set to 1 in UniDialog prohibits the changing

Scale

ShowWhenSelPnt If this box is checked, the object will be drawn at the time of
insertion, if not specified, it is enabled by default

ContourOnLine Generation circuit is not drawing from a script, and on the fly after
drawing

IsAHole The object is a hole (Embedded object)

OnDlgBeforeSelectParam Call dialogue before calling OnSelectParam.

IsACalculator Is set equal to 1 for the calculations

No3dViews Disables automatic views

AutoShift Automatic pseudo-pressing of the Shift button

UseOnlyZOrder Used only for crossing rZOrder, do not use Z-coordinate

fUseCommonScale Maintain external control scale

MINPOSSIBLEVALUE The minimum acceptable value for the application

NotStdBody If == 1, then the item is placed in the component catalog

SpecPartition Unit specifications, which gets the item

UnknownVal=nknownValue=- The value assigned to the default variable. If the variable is not
0,12345 defined, it is assigned a value.

Filter List function SelectInCache:

"kAsk" - Ask the user.

"kFirst" - Find the first value in the table that satisfies a specified condition.
"kLast" - Find FOLLOWING value in the table that satisfies a specified condition.
"kFilter" - all the values from the table that satisfy the specified condition.
"kAskIfNeed" - Ask user if the selection was not successful.

1196
nanoCAD Mechanica

Values that the variable can Handled:

OBJ_UNHANDLED - Dependencies are not processed.

OBJ_HANDLED - Dependencies processed
OBJ_WAITMORE - Waiting for Input
OBJ_WAITMORE_M
OBJ_WARNING- Error installing dependencies. When returning this code, the parent object will
seek to establish the same parameters as that of the child, and then update the child object is
repeated.
OBJ_ERROR

Constants for the variable type lViewType

VFRONT - Front view

VLEFT - Top view
VRIGHT - Bottom View
VTOP - Left View
VBOTTOM - Right Side View
VBACK - Rear View

Types depending

INSERT - Insert
MATE - Combination by plane
AXIS - Combining axis
DIRECTION - Combining the direction
ANGLE - The angular dependence

Subtypes depending

СODIRECT - co-directional dependence

СONTRDIRECT - contra dependence

Recurrence dialog codes or function MessageBox:

IDOK
IDCANCEL
IDYES
IDNO

Codes for the function MessageBox:

MB_YESNO
MB_OKCANCEL MB_OK
MB_ICONINFORMATION
MB_ICONQUESTION
MB_ICONERROR
MB_ICONWARNING

Example:

MessageBox("Test");
if(IDYES == MessageBox("Yes or No", MB_YESNO, MB_ICONQUESTION)){
...
}

Mathematic functions to work with the surfaces

1197
nanoCAD Mechanica

Function Comment
sin(alfa) cos(alfa) tg(alfa)
Trigonometric functions.

alfa - angle in degrees

Returns a real number

asin(c) acos(c) atg(c)

Arc-trigonometric functions.

c - number

Returns an angle in degrees.

DegToRad(deg)
Function converts degrees to radians.

deg - angle in degrees

RadToDeg(rad)
Function converts radians to degrees.

rad - angle in radians

int(value)
Function rounds a real value to integer

value - real number

abs(value)
Function gets the modulus of the number

sqrt(value)
Functions returns the square root of the number

min(a,b) max(a,b)
Function returns maximum and minimum numbers
from a and b

iff(expr, a, b)
Function is analogue of the if arithmetic operator.

Returns a, if the result of the expression expr >= 1,

b otherwise.

VecLen(vec)
Function returns the length of the vec vector.

VecUnit(vec)
Function gets the normal vector (of unit length) from
the vec.

VecCodirect(vec1,vec2)
Function checks if the vec1 and the vec2 are
codirectional. Returns 1 if the vec1 and the vec2 are
codirectional, 0 otherwise.

anglePi(vec1, vec2)
Function returns the angle between the vec1 and
vec2 in the interval from0 to PI.

1198
nanoCAD Mechanica

angleTwoPi(vec1,vec2)
Function returns the angle between the vec1 and
vec2 in the interval from0 to 2*PI.

Point() Point(x, y, z) Point(plane)

Function returns a point. Can be used as a point
constructor. If it is without arguments, it returns the
P(0,0,0) point. If the argument is a plane, it returns a
base point.

Vector() Vector(x, y, z) Vector(plane)

Function returns a vector. Can be used as a vector
constructor. If it is without arguments, it returns the
V(1,0,0) vector. If the argument is a plane, it returns
a normal.

Plane(pntBase,vecNormal)
Function is a constructor of the plane. Returns the
plane containing the pntBase point and having the
vecNormal normal.

getPerp(vec)
Function returns a vector, orthogonal to the vec
vector.

rotateBy(vec1,rAngle,vecNormal)
Function rotates the vec1 vector by the rAngle angle
(in degrees) in the plane, having the vecNormal
normal. Returns the result of the operation.

getPerpendicular(pnt1,pnt2,pntFrom,pntBase)
Function returns the length of the perpendicular from
the pntFrom point to the line, specified between the
pnt1 and the pnt2 points. In the pntBase variable,
the point of the perpendicular base on the specified
line is returned.

getMiddle(pnt1, pnt2)
Function returns a point in the middle of the line,
specified by the pnt1 and pnt2 points.

getLinesIntersect(pnt1,vec1,pnt2,vec2)
getLinesIntersect(pnt11,pnt12,pnt21,pnt22) Function returns a point of intersection of the lines,
specified by the pairs of the points: [pnt11, pnt12]
and [pnt21, pnt22] or by a point and a vector:
[pnt1, vec1] and [pnt2, vec2].

if the lines do not intersect, the Z coordinate is -1 in

the returned point.

getLocalNormal(vec1,vec2)
Function returns a vector product of the vec1 vector
and the vec2.vector.

projectOnPlane(pnt,plane2,rDistance)
projectOnPlane(plane1,plane2,rDistance) Function returns a projection of the pnt point in the
plane, placed in the rDistance distance from the
plane2 plane.

If the plane is a first argument, the function returns

the plane through the Point (plane1) point projection

1199
nanoCAD Mechanica

on the plane, placed in the rDistance from the

plane2 plane and having a normal vector, coinciding
with the normal vector of the plane2 plane.

Subtraction of the point from the plane Example:

d = WP - pnt;

Operation returns the distance of pnt point from the

WP plane. If point pnt is on side where normal of WP
plane points, direction is positive, negative otherwise.

Formation of the string by the numbers To the string variable you can add a number. The
result is a string.

Example:

A = 1;
B = 5;
Str = "Type " + A + ". Modification " + B + ".";

The result is a string

"Type 1. Modification 5."

FmtText(text, number, formated_text,...,)

Returns an rtf text, if among the parameters there is
even one formatted, ordinary otherwise.

Various numbers of the parameters can be a result of

the function. Expressions can be used as parameters.

FmtSuper(Text); FmtSub(Text);
FmtSuper() - returns an rtf text, formatted as the
Superscript (upper index) FmtSub() - for the
Subscript (lower index).

Text can be a string or a number.

FmtDiv(Text1, Tex2, Splash)

FmtDiv() - returns a fraction,

if Splash != 0 the fraction will have a divisor.

Example of use:

a = "super"; b= 1; c = 3; strPosition =
FmtText( "beginning of the text", "Upper
index-", FmtSuper(a), "Lower index-",
FmtSub("sub"), " Text", "Frection-
",FmtDiv(b, c, TRUE), "fraction without a divisor-
",FmtDiv(b, c, FALSE) );
FmtDigit(rNumber, rDelimeter)
Returns a string, formatted by a decimal symbol.

rNumber - number or string, containing a number,

1200
nanoCAD Mechanica

if the rDelimeter == 0 the divisor is a point,

if the rDelimeter == 1 the divisor is a comma,

if the rDelimeter == 2 the divisor is taken from the

system local.

Example:

a = 1.5;
Formatted = FmtDigit(a, 1)

As a result the Formatted = "1,5"

Functions to process surfaces

Function Comment

GetNearestPlane(pnt)
Function returns the name of the nearest plane to the pnt
point of the selected object.

pnt - variable of the Point type.

Example:

function OnConnect{
if(obj.strTheType == "StdJointParts"){
// ...
} else {
strName = GetNearestPlane(pntOrigin);
if(strName != UnknownValue){
SetGeomConstraint(INSERT, CODIRECT, obj, WP1,
strName, 0);
NoVectorSelect = 1;
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
}
}
}

//variant 1
findNearest( Returns an index of the nearest point or plane according to
pnt, the parameters types, specified with the Name1, ... NameN
Name1, or arrName names.
Name2,
... , Function supports two types of call:
NameN
) 1) the particular names of the public parameters are
//variant 2 specified as arguments
findNearest(
pnt, arrName, 2) the array of the public parameters with the starting index
arrIndexStart, for searching and calculating a number of the array
arrSize elements, is specified as the arguments
)
pnt - variable of the Point type.

Name1, NameN, arrName - names of the public

1201
nanoCAD Mechanica

parameters of the selected object

arrIndexStart - starting index for searching in the array

arrSize - array size

Example:

//variant 1
rNearest = findNearest(pntOrigin, obj.WP1, obj.WP11,
obj.WP21);
// rNearest takes 0, 1 or 2 values
//variant 2
rNearest = findNearest(pntOrigin, obj.WP, 1, 4);
// rNearest takes 1, 2, 3 or 4 values

//variant 1
nearestPlaneName( Returns an index of the nearest point or plane according to
pnt, the parameters types, specified with the Name1, ... NameN
Name1, or arrName names.
Name2,
... , Function supports two types of activation:
NameN
) 1) the particular names of the public parameters are
//variant 2 specified as arguments
nearestPlaneName(
pnt, arrName, 2) the array of the public parameters with the starting index
arrIndexStart, for searching and calculating a number of the array
arrSize elements, is specified as the arguments
)
pnt - variable of the Point type.

Name1, NameN, arrName - names of the public

parameters of the selected object

arrIndexStart - starting index for searching in the array

arrSize - array size.

Example:

//variant 1
strNearest = nearestPlaneName(pntOrigin, obj.WP1,
obj.WP11, obj.WP21);
// strNearest takes "obj.WP1", "obj.WP11" or "obj.WP21"
values
//variant 2
strNearest = nearestPlaneName(pntOrigin, obj.WP, 1, 4);
// strNearest takes "obj.WP1", "obj.WP2", "obj.WP3" or
"obj.WP4" values

restoreBasis(vecOld, vecNormal,
vecNew); Function converts an old basis according to the new position
of the vector.

Following combinations are applied in the next order:

(x, y, z, newX)

(y, z, x, newY)

1202
nanoCAD Mechanica

(z, x, y, newZ) vRrev - previous vNext in the XYZ

MakeVectorsFromView(lViewType,
vecDirection, vecPlane); Sets the position of the vectors from the view type

Example:

MakeVectorsFromView(VTOP, vecDirection, vecPlane);

setBasePlaneForSelect(planeName,
vecPlane = vecPlane); Sets a plane coordinate system, where the SelectParam will
work, i.e. the rXcoord, rYcoord will depend on this system.

Applying. When selecting non-symmetrical details whose

selection direction depends on the fixed plane and the
distance is calculated from any plane; for example, the
standard ends of the arbors, not from the pntOrigin.

Example:

setBasePlaneForSelect(WP1);

Used for connecting the ends of the arbors.

Functions for working with tables

Loading a table from the database to Cache
LoadInCache(name1, name2, ... , nameN)

Loads the selected fields from the table.

Function has various numbers of arguments.

name1, ... , nameN - names of the table parameters.

Example:

LoadInCache(D);
LoadInCache(dr, dH);

Selection from the table

SelectInCache(strFilterKey, strParamName, strOperation, Value
... ,
strFilterKeyN, strParamNameN, strOperationN, ValueN)

Executes selection from the object's table cache. Various numbers of arguments.

strFilterKey - key of filtration - string, taking the following values:

"kFirst" - select the first from the values, satisfying the filtration condition

"kLast" - select the last from the values, satisfying the filtration condition

"kFilter" - select the range of the values

"kAsk" - ask user (activates the dialog for manual selection of the value)

"kAskIfNeed" - ask user if automatic selection cannot be preformed

1203
nanoCAD Mechanica

strParamName -name of the table parameter - string, containing the name of the table parameter,
on which selection is made.

strOperation - operation of filtration - string that can take values :

"=" - equals

">=" - more or equals

"<=" - less or equals

"~" - approximately equals

">" - more

"<" - less

"+" - calculation of the expression

Example:

LoadInCache(dr, L);
SelectInCache("kFirst", "dr", "~", 14, "L", ">=", 100);

LoadInCache(dr, L, b);
SelectInCache("kFirst", "dr", "~", rdr, "L", "r;+", "L>=rMinLen && L<=rMaxLen && (L-
b<=rTrLen)");

Dialogs of the database objects

UniDialog function
UniDialog (
[DBFLD, D, Dn, ... ,]
[DBINF, Number,Seria,...,]
[VFLD, rA, "A", rB, "B", ... ,]
[BFLD, bKey1, "Key1", bKey2, "Key2",... ,]
[RADIO, rKey1, "Version1", "Version2", ... ,]
[VIDS, strDesignName, "Design1","Design2", ... ,]
[TVIDS, lVidType, {"F", "T", "R", "L", "All"},]
[VIEW, {"Vids", "Hdr", "None"}]
)

The function activates the dialog to edit the standard object from the database. The function returns
the IDOK, if the OK button was pressed, and the IDCANCEL, if the Cancel button was pressed.

[ ] - for optional parameters

DBFLD - keyword, after which the table's parameters are listed.

D,Dn, ... - names of the table parameters.

1204
nanoCAD Mechanica

VFLD- keyword, after which the object's parameters are listed, announced in the Public or
Protected sections.

rA,rB, ... - names of parameters with the comments.

BFLD - keyword, after which the checkboxes are listed - variables, taking only 1 (CHKD) and 0
(UNCHKD).

bKey1, "Key1",bKey2, "Key2" - names of the variables with names of the checkboxes.

1205
nanoCAD Mechanica

A block of the parameters, starting form the BFLD keyword, is a list of the dialog's components,
which are standard CheckBox(es) and has two modes: Checked and Unchecked. The parameter-
variable, going after the BFLD, according to the checkbox mode takes 1 for Checked and 0 for
Unchecked values. Such checkboxes are used for describing the properties of the standard objects in
the application.

RADIO - keyboard, after which the group checkboxes are listed - variables, taking discrete integer
values.

rKey1, "Variant 1", "Variant 2", ... - names of the variables of the group checkboxes with names
of selection variants.

1206
nanoCAD Mechanica

A block of the parameters, starting from the RADIO keywords, is a list of the dialog's components,
which are standard drop-down lists with the permanent number of the unchanged strings. The
parameter-variable, going after the RADIO, takes the index values of the selected string in the
ComboBox. The top string has 0 index, the last is a subtraction of the number of strings and 1. Such
checkboxes are used to select a material for the standard object in the application.

For the described example, the bCommon parameter takes 0 or 1 integer values, and the rd1
parameter takes 0, 1 or 2 values.

Parameters for the BFLD and RADIO can be described in the Public and Protected sections. Before
activating the dialog, such parameters should be initialized (usually in the OnInitialization).

VIDS- keyword, after which all an object's implementations are listed.

strDesignName, "Design1", "Design2" - variable's name, storing the name of the object's
implementation with the available implementations' names.

TVIDS- keyword, after which the object's views are listed.

lViewType- variable, storing the name of the object's view and taking values from the multitude
{VFRONT, VRIGHT, VLEFT, VTOP, VBOTTOM,VBACK}.

"F" - view name "Frontal".

"R" - view name "Right-side view".

"L" - view name "Left-side view".

"T" - view name "Plane view".

"B" - view name "Bottom view".

"All" -names of all views.

VIEW - keyword, after which the slide's type goes from the multitude {"Vids", "Hdr", "None"}.

1207
nanoCAD Mechanica

"Vids" - implementation's slides of the object

"Hdr" - slide of the object's header (Header)

"None" - there are no slides

Examples:

LoadInCache(dr);
UniDialog (
DBFLD, dr,
VFLD,
Lthread, "thread length",
Lhole, "hole length",
d_hole, "hole diameter",
VIDS, strDesignName, "All",
TVIDS, lViewType,"All",
VIEW, "Vids"
);
LoadInCache(Dn);
UniDialog (
DBFLD, Dn,
BFLD, bCommon, "General purpose",
RADIO, rd1, "Aluminium alloy", "45 steel", "Bronze",
VIDS, strDesignName, "All",
TVIDS, lViewType, "All",
VIEW, "Vids"
);

Custom forms
ShowForm("FormName");

Activates the object's form with the FormName name.

MessageBox function
MessageBox(StrMessage[,mb_Buttons = MB_OK, mb_Icons])

The function activates the standard Windows pop-up message.

StrMessage - message string

mb_Buttons - parameter, defining the buttons in the MessageBox.

Can take one of the following values:

MB_OK - only OK button

MB_OKCANCEL - OK/Cancel buttons

MB_YESNO - Yes/No buttons

mb_Icons - parameter, defining the icons in the MessageBox.

Can take one of the following values:

MB_ICONWARNING - warning

MB_ICONINFORMATION - information message

1208
nanoCAD Mechanica

MB_ICONERROR - error

MB_ICONQUESTION - question

The function returns the following values according to which button is pressed:

IDOK - OK button was pressed

IDCANCEL - Cancel button was pressed

IDYES - Yes button was pressed

IDNO - No button was pressed

Example:

MessageBox("Connection error!", MB_OK, MB_ICONERROR);

Message in the notifier

ShowMessage("Text"[, npIcon, objectID]);

Shows the notification message with the specified Text text.

npIcon can take the following values:

npSimple == -1, // without icon

npUsual == 0, // "page"

npWarning == 1, // " exclamation mark "

npCure == 2, // "cross"

npHint == 3, // "lamp"

npError == 4 //error

If the objectID was specified, the message with the button for editing the object is specified as the
objecteID.

Message with the objectID cannot be sent during the insertion process or the
dialog activation.
Note:
The setting "Show pop-up messages" does not affect the messages with the
npError key.

ShowValue function
ShowValue(StrMessage,Value);

The function shows the values of the transferred (value) parameter as an argument, with the
strMessage string to the window of the special debugger - InDebMon.exe. Any parameter or
variable can be used as a value.

Example:

ShowValue("pntOrigin", pntOrigin);
ShowValue("vecDirection", vecDirection);
ShowValue("WorkPlane WP1", WP1);

1209
nanoCAD Mechanica

ShowValue("Dn", Dn);
ShowValue("*****************", 1);
ShowValue("OnConnect Start", 1);

Functions to work with dependences

Function Comment

ResetAllConstraint(idFrom =
NULL) Switches off the dependences, set in the last OnConnect, when the
insertion of the object with the selection of several objects is used.

idFrom - object identifier, from which the dependences should be

switched off. By default it equals NULL; in this case, all dependencies
from all objects are switched off.

SetParamConstraint(
Parameter, Sets the parametric dependence.
idFrom,
TYPE, Parameter - parameter name
expr,
bBidirect = FALSE, idFrom - object identifier from which the dependence starts
idTo = objectID
TYPE - the type of parametric dependence (EXPR is only used)

expr - expression, setting the parameter of the connected object

bBidirect - checkbox, TRUE - two-sided dependence,

FALSE (by default) - one-sided dependence.

idTo - object identifier to which the dependence is set

(By default is objectID - identifier of the current object)

Example:

SetParamConstraint(rDn, obj, EXPR, "obj.rDnE2", TRUE);

SetParamConstraint(LTPlug, obj, EXPR, "obj.rLT");
SetGeomConstraint(
TYPE, Sets the parametric dependence.
SUBTYPE,
IdFrom, TYPE - type of the geometric dependence. Can take the following
PlaneTo, values:
PlaneFrom,
expr, INSERT - Insertion
bBidirect = FALSE,
idTo = objectID ); MATE - Coincidence by plane

AXIS - Coincidence by axis

DIRECTION - Coincidence by direction (angular dependence)

SUBTYPE - Dependence subtype. Can take two values:

CODIRECT - codirectional dependence

CONTRDIRECT - opposite directional dependence

1210
nanoCAD Mechanica

idFrom - object identifier, from which the dependence is set.

PlaneTo - plane of the inserted object.

PlaneFrom - plane of the connected object.

expr - expression, setting the dependence parameter (for insert the

INSERT - distance between planes)

bBidirect - checkbox, TRUE - two-sided dependence,

FALSE (by default) - one-sided dependence.

idTo - object identifier, to which the dependence is set

(by default equals the objectID - the identifier of the current object)

Example:

SetGeomConstraint(INSERT, CODIRECT, obj, WP1, obj.WP2, 0);

IsFixedParam(Parameter,
bOnlyFixed =FALSE) Function as used in the OnChangeParameters event handler.

Checks if the dependence for the parameter was set and if the
parameter was changed, if the bOnlyFixed is TRUE.

Activation by default (from FALSE) is recommended when checking the

parameters of objects with permanent geometry (screw). In this case,
the function returns 1 if the parameter is connected by the
dependence and changed its value; and 0 otherwise. Activation (from
TRUE) is recommended for objects with changing geometry (tubes,
barrels); the function returns 1 if the parameter is connected by the
dependence.

Example:

if (IsFixedParam(WP1, TRUE)) { pntOrigin =

Point(new.WP1); vecDirection = Vector(new.WP1); }

Function - event handlers, activated by the base of the application

Function Comment

ActHeader Description of the object, list of the parameters, setting checkboxes.

Activated every time the object is opened.

OnInitialization Initialization of the object.

Activated every time the object is called up.

BeforeConnect Execution of the previous actions before the selection of the objects during
the insertion.

Activated upon insertion of the object.

1211
nanoCAD Mechanica

OnConnect Setting of the dependences when connecting to other objects.

Activated upon insertion of the object.

OnChangeParameters Setting of new values for the object parameters by another object.

Activated when connected by the dependences, the parameters are

changed.

OnDialog Editing the object parameters.

Activated when the dialog opens.

OnMakeParameters Final preparation of all parameters.

Activated before closing the object.

SetGripPoint Preparing the grip-points.

Activated when the object is selected.

OnMoveGripPoint Reaction to changing the grip-points position.

Activated whengrip-points are moved.

OnAddObject Setting of the inverse dependences to the connected objects.

Activated when insertion with selection of another object is executed.

OnDialogChanged Interactive process of the input values.

Activated every time the object parameters are changed in the dialog.

OnInitSelect Initialization of the prompt string and pop-up menu.

Activated before every step of the dynamical selection cycle of the

parameters.

OnSelectParam Process of the values input from the keyboard or mouse.

Activated in the body of the of dynamical selection cycle of the parameters.

Align values by grid.

OnMenu Menu handler.

Activated after the menu item is selected, created by the SetMenu function.

Function for working with objects’ identifiers

Function Comment

1212
nanoCAD Mechanica

setWorkId(index, id)
Saves the selected identifier in the special storage with the
specified index.

index - integer value (index >= 0).

id - object identifier.

Every object of the application, when created, gets a unique

identifier like GUID in Windows. To get access to the Obj1
identifier of the object in the script use the Obj1.objectID
expression.

Example:

id1 = getWorkId(0);
id2 = getWorkId(1);
If (id1 == id2) MessageBox("Attempt to connect to one object
two times!", MB_OK | MB_ICONWARNING);

getWorkId(index);
Returns the saved identifier.

index - integer value (index >= 0).

Example:

if (obj.strTheName == "MyEnabledObject") {
setWorkId(0,obj.objectID);
}

getObjData(WorkId,ObjName)
Function gets the public-parameters of the object, having the
ididentifier from the database.In the case of successful
execution it returns 1, otherwise 0. To access the received
parameters, use the ObjName.Param1 expression etc.

getObjectConnectedTo(idOut,
objToSerch, strExpression, Searches the objects, connected with the dependence, with
ParamName); the ParamName variable of the objToSerch object, satisfying
the strExpression condition.

Condition can be null.

Other functions
setGlobalParam(var,
val); Sets the global var variable in the val value.

Example:

if(rLen2 <= B/4){

SetGeomConstraint(INSERT, CODIRECT, obj, WP1, obj.WP2, 0);
setGlobalParam(rSubType, CONTRDIRECT);
} else if(abs(rLen1) <= B/4) {
SetGeomConstraint(INSERT, CODIRECT, obj, WP1, obj.WP1, 0);
setGlobalParam(rSubType, CODIRECT);
} else {
SetGeomConstraint(INSERT, rSubType, obj, WP1, obj.WP1, rLen1);

1213
nanoCAD Mechanica

};
GridRound(b)
Align the values by grid. The parameter of the grid is specified in the
parameters or in prompt parameters (Ctrl+Shft+Q by default);

Example:

a = GridRound(b);

If the grid step is 5 and, b ==12.4, the function returns 10; If the b >=
12.5 function returns 15.

rDiameter = GridRound(abs(rYcoord*2));
paramByName(strName)
Returns the parameter value by its name:

Example:

strName = GetNearestPlane(obj); plane = paramByName(strName);

getChildrenCount()
Returns the number of child objects

getChildId(nChild);
Returns the identifier of the nChild child object.

Object - centre holes GOST 14034-74

SVersion = 2; // The first line of the script determines the version of the interpreter
// Description. It will be displayed in the Properties pane
// You can also sort the objects in the field
// Tabular data and mcqs
ObjectDescription = "center hole";

// This is the function description of the object

function ActHeader {
NPart = 2; // The number of requests to a dynamic selection of parameters

// This section contains descriptions of the parameters open object

// Visible to other objects
Public (
// Define the parameter size hole - the diameter
d, "diameter",

// Plane to install, depending on the shaft end

WP1, "the beginning of the plane"

rValType, "Shaft Type" // Type of shaft, which connect the hole

// Set for overlap on
// Kinds and with a cut without cutting

Lhole, "The depth of the holes," // This is the total hole depth
Lthread, "Thread length" parameter // length thread
// Parameters specific performances
DF, "shaft diameter to form F",
DH, "The diameter of the shaft to form H"
);
// Private parameters used to plot
// And calculate the limits of other parameters
Protected (seted, freeLen, bBlind, rSuppressPointHeight);

1214
nanoCAD Mechanica

// This section lists the parameters of the open,

// Which will be accessible from the outside for editing
// This is only classified as specific actions under
// Changing the parameters of external functions defined in
// OnChangeParameters
Changeable (d, WP1, DF, DH, rValType, Lhole, Lthread);

// Show dialog box to insert dynamic selection parameters

OnDlgBeforeSelectParam = 1;
// Do not regenerate suppression circuit after insertion
ContourOnLine = 0;
// This is the part of the shaft member
IsAValPart = 1;
// And a built-in part of the shaft
InsidePart = 1;

// This element - opening (this variable is used to

// Dimensioning in Inventor)
IsAHole = 1;
};

// Initialize the object parameters

function OnInitialization {
// Load the table into the cache
// Parameters table of the current line in the script is always available
// Therefore loaded only one parameter d
LoadInCache (d);
// Variable seted is the default value UnknownValue
// As initialized with this value
// So, if we put the following test, this unit
// Operators will be executed only once:
if (seted == UnknownValue) {
seted = 1; // Set seted 1 to the condition is not fulfilled
// Again

// Set initial values

rValType = 1; // The hole is placed on the shaft portion
rZOrder = 4220; // Ranking - initial value of

// Select from a table initial values

SelectInCache ("kFirst", "Form", "~", "FH", "d", "~", 10);
//T.e. according to the syntax of the operator - selected the first record
// Table where Form parameter is "FH", and a parameter
// Hole diameter d is approximately equal to 10

// Set, pursuant to which the object will be initially

// Displays
strDesignName = "Form F";

// Set the initial value of arbitrary parameters

Lhole = 30; // The length of the hole
Lthread = Lhole-d / 2; // This is the minimum possible length of the thread

// The variable that determines whether the hole deaf.

// Default - blind.
bBlind = TRUE;

// This variable determines the value of the parameter is relative to

// Height of the end point of the cone of suppression. (See the drawing)

1215
nanoCAD Mechanica

rSuppressPointHeight = tg (30) * (d-1.082 * p) / 2;

};
};

// Setting function handles

function SetGripPoint {
NGrip = 3; // Total 3 pens

pntGrip0 = pntOrigin; // The first - at the insertion point

// The second handle - the handle length of the threaded portion

pntGrip1 = pntOrigin + vecDirection * Lthread;

// Third handle - handle is the total length of the hole

pntGrip2 = pntOrigin + vecDirection * Lhole;
};

// This function determines the reaction of the object on the movement of the handles
function OnMoveGripPoint {
// Here comes the variable NMovingGrip, equal to the index with a slide
// Handle the numbering of the array starts from zero.

// When editing the first handle just move the item to

// Where the cursor is with this pen. Ie move the insertion point
// Where is the first pen
if (NMovingGrip == 0) {
pntOrigin = pntGrip0;
};

// This we stretch the length of the (second pen)

// This defines the length of the threaded portion, depending on the current
// Execution of holes
if (NMovingGrip == 1) {

// Determine the distance stretching as vector length,

// Defines a point ruchki1 and ruchki0
rDistance = vecLen (pntGrip1-pntGrip0);

// For the execution (shaped hole) "P"

if (Form == "P") {
// The length of the thread should be limited to reduce the amount of
// (L-d / 2). Obviously, the length parameter thread Lthread
// Will be set to the relative position of the cursor
// If it is greater than (L-d / 2).
Lthread = max (rDistance, L-d / 2);
};

// For the execution of "F H"

if (Form == "F H") {
// The same goes for the execution of the thread length must be
// Size is bounded below by (l + d / 2).
Lthread = max (rDistance, l + d / 2);
};

// Finally, in this condition, we limit the length of the thread

// On, since the length of the thread can not be more
// The length of the hole. Therefore, we will pull out all the hole

1216
nanoCAD Mechanica

// According to the new diameter of the thread.

if (Lthread > Lhole-d / 2) {
//T.e. when you change the length greater than the length of the thread holes
// Set the new length of the holes equal
// Thread length plus half the diameter
Lhole = Lthread + d / 2;
};
};

// This section examines the movement of the third handle.

// The result of editing it is increasing the length of the hole,
// Without affecting the thread.
if (NMovingGrip == 2) {

// In this case, the current distance is defined as

// Length of the vector formed by dots and ruchki0 ruchki2
rDistance = vecLen (pntGrip2-pntGrip0);

// For the execution of "P"

if (Form == "P") {
// The length of the hole is limited below the parameter L
Lhole = max (rDistance, L);
};

// Dlyaispolneniya "F H"

if (Form == "F H") {
// Length of the restricted orifice parameters (l + d)
Lhole = max (rDistance, l + d);
};

// If you change the length of the hole is less than the length of the thread
// Move thread abroad
if (Lhole > Lthread + d / 2) {
// That is, if the length of the opening is smaller than Lthread + d / 2,
// Recalculate the new thread length which is less than
// Current length of the holes in the d / 2
Lthread = Lhole-d / 2;
};
};

};

// Function of the final calculation of parameters

function OnMakeParameters {
// Name, surname and patronymic of the object
strTheName = "CenterHole"; // Centering Hole
strTheType = "ArborParts"; // Refers to detail shafts
strTheSubType = "Simple"; // Type of opening - easy

// Set the position of the plane WP1. It's just a plane

// The base point at the insertion point and a normal vector,
// Coincides with the vector direction of insertion
WP1 = Plane (pntOrigin, vecDirection);

// Realize the overlap for different occasions:

// If the variable rValType, specifying the type section of the shaft, at the
// Set that the hole is equal to 1 (this is a simple
// Portion of the shaft), the order of the overlap is equal to 4220
// (This number is given on the basis of the values of the order of

1217
nanoCAD Mechanica

// Portions of the shaft, so that the hole overlaps the shaft to its
// Loop suppression
if (rValType == 1) rZOrder = 4220;
// For internal shaft portions and other portions where rValType not equal to 1
else rZOrder = 2150;
// The sequence will be different

// This parameter constraints are found, depending on the version

// For the execution of "P", more precisely, for the current record in the table,
// Form that meets the hole "P".
if (Form == "P") {
// Limits the length of the holes parameter L
Lhole = max (Lhole, L);
// Limits the length of the thread parameter (Ld / 2)
Lthread = max (Lthread, L-d / 2);

// Define strDesignName in "Form P"

//t.e. choose what the two-dimensional design, which corresponds to
// The current parameters of the table
strDesignName = "Form P";
};

// The same goes for the form "F H"

if (Form == "F H") {

// Limit the parameters of the holes and the length of the thread length
Lhole = max (Lhole, l + d);
Lthread = max (Lthread, l + d / 2);

// This reassurance, if it does the user chose

// Execution "P" in the two-dimensional forms, since the table
// Exhibited parameter value in Form "FH".
// In general, if you select the wrong version, the set
// First correct.
if (strDesignName == "Form P") {
strDesignName = "Form F";
};
};

// Limiting the length of the thread from the top, depending on the
// Total length of the hole
Lthread = min (Lthread, Lhole-d / 2);

// The holes form P always deaf

if (Form == "P") {bBlind = TRUE;};

// This is to ensure that the correct path is drawn suppression

// The schedule has a contour suppression, the position of one of the points
// Which is specified by rSuppressPointHeight
// So as to whether the user has selected the display
// Blind or through-hole, set the parameter
// RSuppressPointHeight desired value
if (bBlind == TRUE) {// For blind hole
rSuppressPointHeight = tg (30) * (d-1.082 * p) / 2;
} Else {// For the through-hole (ie, not from the cone drill)
rSuppressPointHeight = 0;
};

1218
nanoCAD Mechanica

// This line simply sets specifications

// Depending on the version adds the necessary letter
// To the designated holes.
if (strDesignName == "Form F") {strLetterForm = "F";};
if (strDesignName == "FormaH") {strLetterForm = "H";};
if (strDesignName == "FormaP") {strLetterForm = "P";};

// Parameter strPartName - a string specification holes.

// In addition, he also displayed hinte.
strPartName = "Ed. Center." + strLetterForm + "M" + d + "GOST14034-74";
// Format string automatically, ie
// When adding a string value with
// Numerical value is automatically converted to a string
};

// This function determines the type of dialogue the insertion hole

function OnDialog {
// Load the parameters of the cache work table
LoadInCache (d);
// Call the dialogue with the key
UniDialog (
// This defines the fields of the table hole
// The shape and diameter. Output as a table defining the parameters
DBFLD, Form, d,
// The diameter of the shaft to form F and Form H
// Output only as reference parameters
DBINF, DF, DH,
// Parameters asked randomly (subject to restrictions, of course)
// Display on the Properties tab
VFLD,
Lthread, "thread depth"
Lhole, "The depth of the hole"
// Tag blind or through hole
// Display on the properties tab in the form of a tick
BFLD,
bBlind, "Deaf"
// Choices performances. Displays all performance
VIDS, strDesignName, "All",
// Displays all recognized types
TVIDS, lViewType, "All",
// Displays preview
VIEW, "Vids"
);
};

// This function is performed before the dynamic selection of the parameters

function OnInitSelect {
// This function comes variable rPart - sequence number
// Prompt you to choose the dynamic parameters. counting begins at 0
if (rPart == 0) {
// For the first case indicate the diameter of the thread
// Output a corresponding hint
strPromt = "Enter the depth of the thread";
};
if (rPart == 1) {
// For the second case indicates the depth of the hole (it zhe
// Total length).
strPromt = "Enter the hole depth";
};

1219
nanoCAD Mechanica

};

// This function defines the behavior of the object in the dynamic selection of the parameters
function OnSelectParam {
// For the first cycle of selection parameters. In principle, the limitations
// The same as for the handles.
// These variables come rXcoord and rYcoord - relative
// Abscissa and ordinate of the cursor
if (rPart == 0) {

// Parameter range is determined

// Module relative abscissa
rDistance = Abs (rXcoord);

// Limitations on choice of parameters depending on the version

if (Form == "P") {
Lthread = max (rDistance, L-d / 2);
};
if (Form == "F H") {
Lthread = max (rDistance, l + d / 2);
};
if (Lthread > Lhole-d / 2) {
Lhole = Lthread + d / 2;
};
};

// For the second request

if (rPart == 1) {

// Parameter distance
rDistance = Abs (rXcoord);

// Restrictions.
if (Form == "P") {
Lhole = max (rDistance, L);
};
if (Form == "F H") {
Lhole = max (rDistance, l + d);
};
if (Lhole < Lthread + d / 2) {
Lhole = Lthread + d / 2;
};
};
};

// This function is performed when the parameters in the dialog insert

function OnDialogChanged {
// Function adds interactivity in the form of dialogue.
// In this case we need to hide execution and daw "deaf"

// Operator ShowDesign hides or displays performance.

// Depending on the value of the first parameter (1 - Shows
// 0 - hides.
// Operator ShowBool hides and displays switches (tick)

// For a start, execution and show all daw

ShowDesign (1 "Form F");
ShowDesign (1, "Form H");
ShowDesign (1 "FormaP");

1220
nanoCAD Mechanica

ShowBool (1, "deaf");

// If you choose such a line in the table where d3 is 0,

// It is necessary to hide the performance of "Form H". (As defined in the guest,
// That the performance is not used for such values
// Settings
if (d3 == 0) ShowDesign (0, "Form H");

// If the selected row corresponding to the shape of the hole "P", then
// To hide the other two performance (they can not be selected)
// And daw "blind" because the shape of P is always blind.
if (Form == "P") {
ShowDesign (0, "FormaH");
ShowDesign (0, "FormaF");
ShowBool (0, "deaf");
};

// But for the chosen form of "FH", you need only to hide
// Execution "Form F" if
(Form == "F H") {
ShowDesign (0, "Form P");
};
};

// Function OnChangeParameters performed under external influence

// Object. It is an attempt to establish a dependence or direct
// Change the parameters of the object properties panel
// This function determines the reaction of the object to such a change.
function OnChangeParameters {
// Here comes the object new, representing a
// The same object with the new value of open options.

// Random variable we can immediately assign new values

rValType = new.rValType;
Lhole = new.Lhole;
Lthread = new.Lthread;

// Here consistently given, how to choose a line from the table,

// The new value of the corresponding parameters.
// Check whether the changed parameter d
if (new.d! = d) {// ie. If the new value is not equal to the old
// Table is loaded into the cache
LoadInCache (d);
// And get out of it the first available record with a parameter
// D, approximately equal to the new value.
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "d", "~", new.d);
// Then we check not change any other parameters
} Else if (DH! = New.DH) {// change the diameter of the shaft H performance
// Load
LoadInCache (DH);
// Select the first record
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "DH", "~", new.DH);
} Else if (DF! = New.DF) {// change the diameter of the shaft version F
// Load
LoadInCache (DF);
// Select the first entry with an approximately equal value
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "DF", "~", new.DF);
};

1221
nanoCAD Mechanica

// Default processing completed successfully.

//T.e. send the object to change the parameters that
// Set the necessary parameters.
// To do this, we assign the value of the variable Handled OBJ_HANDLED
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;

// If after selecting from the table the shaft diameter is not established
// The new value, it may require the cyclical update
// Send a variable object variable
// Handled equal OBJ_WARNING
if (d! = new.d) {
Handled = OBJ_WARNING;
};

// In this block operators recalculated the new position of the object

// When you change its work plane

// Variable fix to test the ability to move.

// In general, in this case it could not be used
// Because the hole does not change when you change its geometry
// Planes.
// This block is generated script wizard, so it has
// This unified view

fix = 0;

// Check if the dependency has changed and whether the

// PloskostWP1
if (IsFixedParam (WP1)) {
// Increase the value of the variable fix, for the follow-up audit
fix = fix + 1;
// Save the old value of the vector insertion.
vecXOld = vecDirection;
// Assign new value to the vector inserts match
// To the new position of the plane WP1
vecDirection = Vector (new.WP1);
// And move the insertion point to a new position openings
// PloskostiWP1
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP1);

// Restore the coordinate system on the basis of

// Old and new values of the vectors
restoreBasis (vecXOld, vecPlane, vecDirection);
};
// If all of a sudden hole with fixed geometry
// Objects begin to stretch in different directions, then
// Return an error
if (fix > 1) {
Handled = OBJ_ERROR;
};
};

// This function is performed before each attempt to establish a relationship

function BeforeConnect {
// Here we just reset according to the latest
// The following function to establish new
ResetLastConstraint ();
}

1222
nanoCAD Mechanica

// This function sets dependency. More specifically,

// It determines exactly how to behave when an object
// Accession to another object
function OnConnect {
// Check for the value of the variable rPart, defining
// The sequence number of the request to join the parts.
//T.e. if the relationship is set in two stages,
// Or more, it is possible to install one piece
// Depending on two or more parts.
// But in this particular case, depending on established only
// From one piece, so only one request and verification
// RPart equal to 0
if (rPart == 0) {
// The function comes onConnect object obj - this is a detail,
// To which we are trying to join. We can help qualifier
// Access to the parameters of the parts to check whether
// Automatically install dependencies or not.

// Check whether the part to which are trying to join,

// Shaft:
if (obj.strTheType == "Arbor") {

// Next - will set depending on the current execution

// Holes. Ie different versions is implemented differently depending on the shaft.
if (Form == "F H") {

// Set for the opening of the shaft of the same type as that of the
// Section of the shaft, which join (this is necessary for the implementation of
// Overlap
rValType = obj.rValType;

// Find the nearest plane to the plane of the opening WP1:

strNearestPlane = nearestPlaneName (WP1, obj.WP1, obj.WP2);
// This takes into account only the plane WP1 and WP2 object
//t.e. if these are not the nearest plane, strNearestPlane
// Is uncertain.

// Further - check the shaft type. for common areas (external):

if (obj.rValType! = 1)
// Set the geometric relationship
// Type "insert" codirectional. By the object to which
// Subscribe for planes WP1 details and found
// The nearest plane. The distance between the planes - 0 mm.
// Dependence unidirectional
SetGeomConstraint (INSERT, CODIRECT, obj, WP1, strNearestPlane, 0, FALSE);

// For the internal sections of shafts:

else
// Set the relationship with the same parameters,
// But oppositely.
SetGeomConstraint (INSERT, CONTRDIRECT, obj, WP1, strNearestPlane, 0, FALSE);

// Set the parameter depending on the current execution

// Holes.

// To form the hole F must be equated

// Parameter rDiameter (shaft diameter) to the diameter DF table hole
if (strDesignName == "Form F") {
// So if the test is performed, the

1223
nanoCAD Mechanica

// Set the parametric dependence on expression.

// RDiameter equating to DF
SetParamConstraint (DF, obj, EXPR, "obj.rDiameter");
};

// To form H is the same test, but establishes a relationship

// Already diameter hole DH.
if (strDesignName == "FormaH") {
SetParamConstraint (DH, obj, EXPR, "obj.rDiameter");
};

NoVectorSelect = 1; // setting the variable NoVectorSelect 1

// Disable the selection of the direction vector for details
// Since been joined and established addiction
// Then choose further it is not necessary.

Handled = OBJ_HANDLED; // Set the variable Handled

// Value OBJ_HANDLED, ie saying that according to
// Set successfully.
};

};
};
}

Blind GOST 16076-70

Script:

SVersion = 2;
ObjectDescription = "16076-70";

functionActHeader {
NPart = 0;
Public (
// From outdoor settings need only determine the face
// Diameter of a working surface for attachment
// Material and reference weight.
Dn,NOMINAL_DIAMETER,
massa,MASS,
sw0, @ MATERIAL,
WP1, @ WORKING_PLANE1
);

Protected (seted, d, D, D1, D2, D3, D4, l, l1, L, type, type1);

Changeable (Dn, WP1);
OnDlgBeforeSelectParam = 1;
ShowWhenSelPnt = 1;
ContourOnLine = 0;
};

function OnInitialization {
LoadInCache (Dn, d, D, D1, D2, D3, D4, l, l1, L, massa);
if (seted == UnknownValue) {
seted = 1;
rZOrder = 100;
// In the 6th version of all the titles in English versions
// 1 = Implementation Ispolnenie1
strDesignName = "Implementation 1";

1224
nanoCAD Mechanica

rd0 = 1;
sw0 = 1;

SelectInCache ("kFirst", "Dn", "~", 18);

};
};

function SetGripPoint {
NGrip = 1; // A handle at the insertion point
pntGrip0 = pntOrigin;
};

function OnMakeParameters {
// All localizable strings specified resource links
// Starting with the dog.
// Accordingly, they will be displayed depending on
// The current application language.
//
strTheName = @ BLIND_GOST_16076_70;
strTheType =ON_INTERNAL;
strTheSubType =ON_INTERNAL;
WP1 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecDirection * (0), vecDirection);

if (rd0 == 0) type = "022";

if (rd0 == 1) type = "012";

if (sw0 == 1) type1 = "A"; else type1 = "";

};

function OnDialog {
LoadInCache (Dn, d, D, D1, D2, D3, D4, l, l1, L, massa);
UniDialog (
// Type of dialogue - which determines the nominal diameter
// And reference weight
DBFLD, Dn,
DBINF, massa,
// Jackdaw overall performance
BFLD, sw0,COMMON_IMPLEMENTATION,
// Alternative Material
RADIO, rd0, @ STEEL_45, @ 12X18H9T__X18H9T_,
// These options affect the string specification covers
VIEW, "Vids");
};

function OnDialogChanged {

};

function OnChangeParameters {
if ((Dn! = new.Dn)) {
LoadInCache (Dn, d, D, D1, D2, D3, D4, l, l1, L, massa);
// When you change the diameter of the table, select the new value
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "Dn", "~", new.Dn);
};
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
if ((Dn! = new.Dn)) {
Handled = OBJ_WARNING;

1225
nanoCAD Mechanica

};
fix = 0;
if (IsFixedParam (WP1)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecXOld = vecDirection;
vecDirection = Vector (new.WP1);
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP1) - vecDirection * (0);
restoreBasis (vecXOld, vecPlane, vecDirection);
};
if (fix > 1) {
Handled = OBJ_ERROR;
};
};

function BeforeConnect {
ResetLastConstraint ();
}

strPartName = @ SPHERE_CAP_ + Dn + "-" + type + type1 + @ _ GOST_16076_70;

Steel welded neck GOST 12821-80

Script (only the BeforeConnect and OnConnect procedures)

Other can be seen in the database of the standard details.

// For flange necessary to geometric constraints

// Have been installed on the gasket and parametric -
// The second flange.
function OnConnect {
// When setting dependencies on multiple objects, we first
// Store information about objects,
// And then use it to install, depending

// So, the first stage - the selection of the parameters

// Here rPart is 0 (the serial number of the query begins
// 0.
// If this is the first request, and the selected object = laying GOST 15180,
// Save the parameters of the object (pads) under the number 0
if (rPart == 0 & & obj.strTheName == " GOST 15180-86 ") {
setWorkId (0, obj.objectID);
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};

// For the second request - check further whether this

// Object flange GOST 12821, and, if so, to save the parameters of this
// Flange at number 1.
if (rPart == 1 & & obj.strTheName == " GOST 12821-80 ") {
setWorkId (1, obj.objectID);
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};

// Then consider the stored data objects:

// If something was preserved in the first stage, that is, the data is not equal to 0
if (getWorkId (0) = 0)
{
// Restore the data object variable obj 0
getObjData (getWorkId (0), obj);

1226
nanoCAD Mechanica

// Closest to the insertion point plane

strNearestPlane = GetNearestPlane (pntOrigin);
// If the plane had been found,
if (strNearestPlane! = UnknownValue) {
// We set the geometric constraints of the insert.
SetGeomConstraint (INSERT, CONTRDIRECT, obj, WP1, strNearestPlane, 0, TRUE);
// Do not choose a direction vector
NoVectorSelect = 1;
};
};

// If in the latter case the data has been stored, then:

if (getWorkId (1) = 0)
{
// Restore them back to the variable obj
getObjData (getWorkId (1), obj);

// Set a set of parametric dependencies

// In nominal pressure, nominal size,
// Form with a cut flange Series and a number of performances.
SetParamConstraint (Py, obj, EXPR, " obj.Py ", TRUE);
SetParamConstraint (Dy, obj, EXPR, " obj.Dy ", TRUE);
SetParamConstraint (bSection, obj, EXPR, " obj.bSection ", TRUE);
SetParamConstraint (R, obj, EXPR, " obj.R ", TRUE);
SetParamConstraint (isp_row, obj, EXPR, " obj.isp_row ", TRUE);
NoVectorSelect = 1;
};

// This block is realized when joining the flange to the pipe

// The first request for a check type and subtype
if (rPart == 0 & & obj.strTheType == " Tube " & & obj.strTheSubType == " Round ") {
// Is the nearest plane
strNearestPlane = GetNearestPlane (pntOrigin);
if (strNearestPlane! = UnknownValue) {
// Set geometric
SetGeomConstraint (INSERT, CONTRDIRECT, obj, WP2, strNearestPlane, 0, TRUE);
SetGeomConstraint (DIRECITON, CODIRECT, obj, WPnormal, obj.WPnormal, 0, TRUE);
NoVectorSelect = 1;
};
// And parametric dependence
SetParamConstraint (Dn, obj, EXPR, " obj.B ", TRUE);
Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};
};

1227
nanoCAD Mechanica

I-profiles GOST 19425

I-profile script:

1228
nanoCAD Mechanica

SVersion = 2;
ObjectDescription = @ GOST_19425_74;

function ActHeader {
NPart = 1;
Public (
// Open options- defining the geometry: length, height
// Width of the shelves.
L,LENGTH,
h,I_SHAPE_HEIGHT,
b,FLANGE_WIDTH,
// Reference: weight per meter and the total weight
massa,MASS,
mas1,RUNNING_METER_MASS,
// Standard designation and a series of I-beam
Designation, @ STANDART_DESIGNATION,
seria, @ SERIES,

// Working planes
WP1,CROSS_PLANE,
WP2, @ BOTTOM_PLANE,
WP3, @ SIDE_BOTTOM_RIGHT_PLANE,
WP4, @ SIDE_TOP_RIGHT_PLANE,
WP5, @ TOP_PLANE,
WP6, @ SIDE_TOP_LEFT_PLANE,
WP7, @ SIDE_BOTTOM_LEFT_PLANE,
WP8, @ CROSS_PLANE

);

Protected (seted, massa, bHid, seria);

Changeable (L, b, h, WP1, WP2, WP3, WP4, WP5, WP6, WP7, WP8, Designation);

OnDlgBeforeSelectParam = 1;
ShowWhenSelPnt = 1;
ContourOnLine = 0;
NotStdBody = 1;
};

function OnInitialization {
LoadInCache (seria, Designation, h, b);
if (seted == UnknownValue) {
seted = 1;
rZOrder = 100;
bHid = 0;
L = 50;
strDesignName = "Implementation 1";
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "seria", "~", "C", "h", "~", 100, "b", "~", 10, "Designation", "~", "1") ;
};
};

function SetGripPoint {
// At four I-beam handle
NGrip = 4;
// Handles are situated at the extreme points of the model I-beam
// The insertion point
pntGrip0 = pntOrigin;

1229
nanoCAD Mechanica

// On the opposite end

pntGrip1 = pntOrigin + L * vecDirection;

// At the midpoint of the top shelf

pntGrip2 = pntOrigin + h * vecPlane;

// At the extreme point of the bottom shelf

vecNormal = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);
pntGrip3 = pntOrigin + vecNormal * b / 2;
};

function OnMoveGripPoint {
// The first carrying handle entire I-beam
if (NMovingGrip == 0) {
pntOrigin = pntGrip0;
};

// The second handle stretches the length of the I-beam and determines
// Direction vector insertion I-beam
if (NMovingGrip == 1) {
L = max (vecLen (pntGrip0 - pntGrip1), 1);
vecDirection = pntGrip1 - pntGrip0;
LoadInCache (seria, h, b);
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "seria", "~", "20", "h", "~", h, "b", "~", b);
};

// Handle height of an I-beam

// At its height stretched selected new I-beam,
// Roughly equal relative distance from the cursor point
// Insert parts.
if (NMovingGrip == 2) {
// Auxiliary variable height of the new I-beam.
rNew_h = vecLen (pntGrip0 - pntGrip2);

LoadInCache (seria, h, b);

SelectInCache ("kFirst", "seria", "~", "20", "h", "~", rNew_h, "b", "~", b);
};

// Handle I-beam flange width

// If it is stretched selected new I-beam flange width,
// Approximately equal to twice the relative distance
if (NMovingGrip == 3) {
// A new auxiliary variable distances.
rNew_b = 2 * vecLen (pntGrip0 - pntGrip3);

LoadInCache (b, h);

SelectInCache ("kFirst", "b", "~", rNew_b, "h", "~", h);
};

};

function OnMakeParameters {
strTheName = "19425-74";
strTheType = "Profile";
strTheSubType = "I-Shape";

massa = mas1 * L / 1000;

// Find the right third vector in the workpiece coordinate system,

1230
nanoCAD Mechanica

// As the vector product

vecNormal = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);

// We place the plane in order counterclockwise

// The plane of the first end
WP1 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecDirection * (0), vecDirection);
// The plane of the second end
WP8 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecDirection * L, -vecDirection);
// Plane from the middle of the bottom shelf.
WP2 = Plane (pntOrigin-vecPlane * (0), -vecPlane);

// Right side
WP3 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecNormal * (b / 2), vecNormal);
WP4 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecNormal * (b / 2) + vecPlane * h, vecNormal);

// The plane from the middle of the upper shelf

WP5 = Plane (pntOrigin + vecPlane * (h), vecPlane);

// Left Side
WP6 = Plane (pntOrigin-vecNormal * (b / 2) + vecPlane * h, -vecNormal);
WP7 = Plane (pntOrigin-vecNormal * (b / 2), -vecNormal);
};

function OnDialog {
// For beauty
strRefDataHeader = "------";
LoadInCache (seria, Designation, h, b);
// Type of dialogue
UniDialog (
// Define the parameters of a series of height and width of the shelves
DBFLD, seria, h, b,
// Reference parameters - designation and weight per meter
DBINF, Designation, mas1,
// Arbitrary length parameter I-beam
VFLD, L, @ I_SHAPE_LENGTH MM,

// Making reference block settings page

// Arbitrary properties
strRefDataHeader, @ REFERENCE_DATA_,
A, @ A CM2,
Ix,IX__CM,
ix,IX__CM,
Wx, @ WX__CM3,
Sx, @ SX CM3,
Iy, @ IY CM4,
Wy, @ WY CM3,
iy,IY CM,

// Jackdaw display hidden lines

BFLD, bHid,HIDDEN_LINES,
// Display types AnyWBK generation means
// Mirror species, if they are not overridden performances
TVIDS, lViewType, "AnyWBK",

VIEW, "Vids"
);
};

function OnDialogChanged {

1231
nanoCAD Mechanica

ShowBool (0,HIDDEN_LINES);
// Check the "invisible line" is only required for those species
// For which they have.
if (lViewType == VLEFT || lViewType == VRIGHT)
{ShowBool (1,HIDDEN_LINES)};
};

function OnChangeParameters {
// To change the settings:
// Arbitrary simply assigned new values
L = new.L;

// For table or selected by a combination of the defining parameters

if (new.b! = b || new.h! = h) {
LoadInCache (h, b);
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "h", "~", new.h, "b", "~", new.b);
// Or by defining a standard notation field
} Else if (Designation! = New.Designation) {
LoadInCache (Designation);
SelectInCache ("kFirst", "Designation", "~", new.Designation);
};

Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
fix = 0;

// The response to the change of position of the planes.

// Is to recalculate the new position of the insertion point
// And directions

// Under the conditions IsFixedParam units can be grouped into

// Options direction of the plane.

// Surface normal collinear vecDirection

if (IsFixedParam (WP1)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecXOld = vecDirection;
vecDirection = Vector (new.WP1);
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP1) - vecDirection * (0);
restoreBasis (vecXOld, vecPlane, vecDirection);
};
if (IsFixedParam (WP8)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecXOld = vecDirection;
vecDirection = -Vector (new.WP8);
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP8) - vecDirection * (L);
restoreBasis (vecXOld, vecPlane, vecDirection);
};

// Surface normal collinear vecPlane

if (IsFixedParam (WP2)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecYOld = vecPlane;
vecNormal = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecYOld);
vecPlane = -Vector (new.WP2);
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP2) + vecPlane * (0);
restoreBasis (vecYOld, vecNormal, vecPlane);
vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecPlane, vecNormal);

1232
nanoCAD Mechanica

};
if (IsFixedParam (WP5)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecYOld = vecPlane;
vecNormal = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecYOld);
vecPlane = Vector (new.WP5);
pntOrigin = Point (new.WP5) - vecPlane * (h);
restoreBasis (vecYOld, vecNormal, vecPlane);
vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecPlane, vecNormal);
};

// Surface normal collinear vecNormal

if (IsFixedParam (WP3)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecZOld = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);
vecZNew = Vector (new.WP3);
vecYNew = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecZNew);

restoreBasis (vecZOld, vecPlane, vecZNew);

pntOrigin = Point (new.WP3) - vecZNew * (b / 2);

vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecZOld, vecYNew);
};

if (IsFixedParam (WP4)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecZOld = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);
vecZNew = Vector (new.WP4);
vecYNew = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecZNew);

restoreBasis (vecZOld, vecPlane, vecZNew);

pntOrigin = Point (new.WP4) - vecZNew * (b / 2) + vecYNew * h;

vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecZOld, vecYNew);
};

if (IsFixedParam (WP6)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecZOld = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);
vecZNew = -Vector (new.WP6);
vecYNew = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecZNew);

restoreBasis (vecZOld, vecPlane, vecZNew);

pntOrigin = Point (new.WP6) + vecZNew * (b / 2) + vecYNew * h;

vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecZOld, vecYNew);
};

if (IsFixedParam (WP7)) {
fix = fix + 1;
vecZOld = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecPlane);
vecZNew = -Vector (new.WP7);
vecYNew = getLocalNormal (vecDirection, vecZNew);

restoreBasis (vecZOld, vecPlane, vecZNew);

pntOrigin = Point (new.WP7) + vecZNew * (b / 2);

1233
nanoCAD Mechanica

vecDirection = getLocalNormal (vecZOld, vecYNew);

};

if (fix > 1) {
Handled = OBJ_ERROR;
};
};

function BeforeConnect {
ResetLastConstraint ();
};

function OnSelectParam {
// The dynamic selection of parameters.
if (lViewType == VTOP || lViewType == VBOTTOM)
// Do not choose the parameters for the types of side
{BreakAll = 1;}
else {
// For other species to choose the length of an I-beam in the relative
// Cursor abscissa
L = max (abs (rXcoord), 1);
};
};

// Formation of the line specifications, as the sum of substring

strPartName =I_PROFILE_N_ + Designation + "x" + L + @ _MASS_ + massa + @
_GOST_19425_74;

Panel HB
Script of the detail:

SVersion = 2;
ObjectDescription = @ MCS_STRING6;

function ActHeader {
NPart = 1;
Public (
// Options- exterior length and width of the plate
L,LENGTH,
W,WIDTH,
// Design load and weight plates
P, @ MCS_STRING9,
massa,MASS
);
Protected (seted, obozn, H);
Changeable ();
OnDlgBeforeSelectParam = 1;
ShowWhenSelPnt = 1;
ContourOnLine = 1;
};

function OnInitialization {
LoadInCache (obozn, L, W, H, massa, P);
if (seted == UnknownValue) {
seted = 1;
rZOrder = 100;
// Set the initial values of parameters and execution
SelectInCache (" kFirst ", " L ", " ~ ", 2700, " W ", " ~ ", 1190);

1234
nanoCAD Mechanica

strDesignName = " Implementation 1 ";

};
};

function SetGripPoint {
NGrip = 2;
Two handles // - at the insertion point and with the opposite end
// Panel
pntGrip0 = pntOrigin;
pntGrip1 = pntOrigin + L * vecDirection;
};

function OnMoveGripPoint {
// When editing handles the following behavior:
// Move the entire object when you drag over
// First handle. And stretch the length and change the vector
// Direction when stretching a second handle
if (NMovingGrip == 1) {
// Intermediate variables to define the geometry
rW = W;
rP = P;
// Relative length
rL = vecLen (pntGrip0 - pntGrip1) / rScl;
// The new direction of the vector inserts
vecDirection = pntGrip1 - pntGrip0;

LoadInCache (P, W, L);

// Select the new settings plate.
SelectInCache (" kFirst ", " P ", " ~ ", rP, " W ", " = ", rW, " L ", " ~ ", rL);
} Else {
// If you edit the handle to move the 0 point
// Insert an object
pntOrigin = pntGrip0;
};
};

function OnMakeParameters {
// Classifications plates
strTheName = " Panel NV ";
strTheType = " Plita ";
strTheSubType = " Plita ";
};

function OnDialog {// insert type of dialogue

LoadInCache (obozn, L, W, H, massa, P);
UniDialog (
// The table control fields
DBFLD, L, W, P,
// The table reference field
DBINF, obozn, H, massa,
// Types - front, top, left
TVIDS, lViewType, " F ", " T ", " L ",
VIEW, " Vids ");
};

function OnDialogChanged {
ShowDesign (0, " Preview ");
};

1235
nanoCAD Mechanica

// Parameter changes
function OnChangeParameters {
// Just when controlling parameter changes
// Select from a table those which correspond to the new
// Values
if (new.L! = L || new.W! = W)
{
LoadInCache (L, W);
SelectInCache (" kFirst ", " L ", " ~ ", new.L, " W ", " ~ ", new.W);
}

Handled = OBJ_HANDLED;
};

function OnSelectParam {
// Function of the dynamic selection of parameters
rW = W;
// For type VTOP do not select dynamically
if (lViewType == VTOP) {
BreakAll = 1;
} Else {
// For other species
// Selected variable rL - how
// Abscissa the relative position of the cursor.
rL = abs (vecCoord: x);
// Selected values from the table with the same width,
// But with a new value for the wavelength plate.
SelectInCashe (" kFirst ", " W ", " = ", rW, " L ", " ~ ", rL);
};
};

function BeforeConnect {
ResetLastConstraint ();
}

function OnConnect
{
// Automatic installation of dependencies
// Set only parametric dependence.
// Between the plates along the length and width.
if (rPart == 0)
{
if (obj.strTheType == " Plita ")
{
SetParamConstraint (L, obj, EXPR, " obj.L ");
SetParamConstraint (W, obj, EXPR, " obj.W ");
NoVectorSelect = 1;
seted = 1;
};
};
}
// The name plate is formed on the basis of the table box
// Obozn
strPartName = obozn;

1236
nanoCAD Mechanica

*.dwt, 44 extracting data, 324

3D Face, 587 managing visibility, 324
3D Mesh, 586 redefining, 328
3D Orbit, 155 Audit Geometry, 63
3D-Fly, 157 Auditing of Document, 62
3D-Walk, 159 Autosaving document, 55
Adding objects to the working set, 339 Backup copy, 57
Advanced grips for design elements, 500 Base dimensioning, 447
Align, 303 Batch plot, 645
Aligned dimensioning, 438 features, 649
Aligning UCS to an object, 124 Big radius dimensioning, 452
Angular dimensioning, 452 BLOCK command, 319
API, 654 Block Definition dialog box, 319
Append leader, 499 Blocks, 318
Arc, 236 attributes, 321
by center, angles and radius, 241 creating, 319
by center, start and angle, 240 editing, 330
by center, start and chord length, 240 exploding insertion, 331
by center, start and end, 237 inserting, 326
by continue, 237 managing in a current drawing, 329
by start, center and angle, 238 redefining, 328
by start, center and chord length, 238 saving, 331
by start, center and end, 238 showing boundary, 377
by start, end and angle, 239 Blocks dialog box, 329
by start, end and direction, 239 Blocks editor, 330
by start, end and radius, 240 Blocks manager, 329
by three points, 236 Boundary, 377
editing, 273 creating, 402
length dimensioning, 454 polygonal, 381
Array, 295 rectangular, 379
Attribute Definition dialog box, 321 Box, 579
Attributes of a block, 321 Breaking, 284
creating, 321 dimensions, 461

1237
nanoCAD Mechanica

vectors, 284 new origin for coordinates, 125

vectors at a point, 285 new origin for coordinates and rotation angle,
125
Bring forward, 165
polar coordinates, 120
Bring to front, 165
user coordinate system, 122
Calculator, 569
world coordinate system, 122
Cancellation of commands, 37
Cartesian coordinates, 119 Copy, 268, 292

Cell Properties dialog box, 526, 534 Copy of objects properties, 265

Chain dimensioning, 448 Copying and insertion of objects using clipboard,

267
Chain note, 496
Correct displaying of a large drawings, 86
Chamfer, 306
Create New Raster Image, 357
Change text case, 429
Creating, 221
Changing
3D face, 587
the UCS position from the command line, 123
3D mesh, 586
Changing
arc, 236
external reference to the raster image, 344
block, 319
Checking performance of video subsystem, 82
block attributes, 321, 324
Circle, 242
boundary, 402
by center and diameter, 243
box, 579
by center and radius, 242
circle, 242
by diameter, 243
cone, 580
by three points, 244
construction line, 223
by two tangents and radius, 242
custom properties fields, 178
Closing a document, 51
dimensions, 436
Color schemes, 42
dish, 584
COM, 654
dome, 585
Comb leader note, 487
donut, 244
Command line, 31
ellipse, 246
Cone, 580
ellipses and elliptic arcs with one command,
Configurations of layers, 201 248
Construction line, 223 fill, 389
Construction note, 485 group of layers, 198
Convert to 2D, 66 group of objects, 315
Converting table, 533 hatch, 389
Coordinate systems, 119 helix, 235
cartesian coordinates, 119 layers filters, 199

1238
nanoCAD Mechanica

layout, 614, 615 Options tab, 94

layout viewports, 621 Profiles tab, 96
line, 225 Toolbars tab, 87
mesh, 585 Cut, 267
new document, 43 DDEdit, 575
new line type, 219 Deleting layout, 618
note, 483 Design settings, 99
point, 221 Detach leader, 499
polygon, 232 Diameter dimensioning, 449
polyline, 226 Dimension styles
pyramid, 582 creating, 462
ray, 223 modifying, 466
rectangle, 233 Dimensioning with a single command, 436
reports, 551 Dimensions, 434
revision cloud, 405 aligned, 438
solid, 403 angular, 452
sphere, 581 arc length, 454
spline, 245 base, 447
table, 508 big radius, 452
text, 406, 408 breaking, 461
text style, 420 chain, 448
torus, 582 creating, 436
viewport, 621, 622, 624 diameter, 449
wedge, 580 editing, 455
wipeout, 404 exploding, 462
Crop Raster Auto, 363 group, 445
Crop Raster Auto by Clip, 364 horizontal, 438
Crop Raster Auto by Frame, 364 linear, 438
Crop Raster by Rectangle, 364 ordinate, 442
Cropping of Raster Image, 363 radial, 450
Cursor size, 149 restoring, 462
Custom paper formats, 636 scale, 435
Custom properties fields, 178 styles, 462
Customize dialog box vertical, 438
Commands tab, 90 Dimensions to Front, 166
Keyboard tab, 92 DirectX, 81

1239
nanoCAD Mechanica

manual adjustment, 84 external reference, 337

performance checking, 82 fill, 276
Discarding external reference changes, 340 group of layers, 199
Dish, 584 hatch, 276
Display modes, 152 layers filters, 200
Distance, 564, 565 layout viewports, 625
Distributing leader, 500
copies, 304 line, 273
objects by layers, 188 notes, 498
Divide, 304 objects, 250, 265, 291
Document polyline, 274, 288
audit geometry, 63 spline, 274, 289
auditing, 62 tables, 515, 518
autosaving, 55 text, 412, 416
backup, 57 the size of rows and columns, 527
closing, 51 viewports, 276
convert to 2D, 66 Ellipse
creating, 43 by center and radiuses, 246
drawing properties, 50 by diameter and radius, 246
opening, 45 elliptic arc, 247
plotting, 628 Elliptic arc, 247
purging, 64 Embed Raster Image, 362
recovery, 63 Erase, 291
saving, 51 Exit from nanoCAD, 23
Dome, 585 EXPLODE command, 312
Donut, 244 Exploding
Draw block insertion, 331
multiline, 228 dimensions, 462
Drawing group, 315
limits, 136 objects, 312
units, 107 Exporting, 58 all
Drawing properties, 50 data, 58 selected
Edit, 574 data, 59
Editing arc, 273 table to Excel, 528
dimensions, 455 transmittal package creation, 60
Expression builder

1240
nanoCAD Mechanica

formula templates, 548 Graphics hardware acceleration settings, 81

functions, 549 Grid mode, 134
Expression Builder dialog box, 546 Grips
Extend vectors, 282 advanced, 500
External references multifunctional, 272
adding objects to the working set, 339 ordinary, 270
changing to the raster image, 344 Group dimensioning, 445
controlling, 340 Group of layers, 198
discarding changes, 340 creating, 198
editing, 337 editing, 199
inserting, 333 Grouping and merging cells, 557
removing objects from the working set, 339 Groups of objects, 313
saving changes, 340 adding object, 316
showing boundary, 377 creating, 315
External References dialog box, 340 deleting objects, 316
Extracting data from attributes, 324 renaming, 316
FEdit, 575 Hatch
Field categories and types, 432 creating, 389
Field dialog box, 431 editing, 276
Fields, 430 Hatches to Back, 167
Fill Helix, 235
creating, 389 Help, 23
editing, 276 Hidden display style, 590
gradient, 396 Horizontal dimensioning, 438
Fillet, 309 Hyperlinks, 383
Filling and Hatch commands, 389 add to the document, 384
FillShapes, 400 edit, 387
Finding and replacing text, 424, 428 Image Adjust, 359
Fly, 157 Image Quality, 361
Format Images, 349
Multiline Styles, 229 adjust, 359
Formula templates, 548 cropping, 363
Free Orbit, 156 displaying quality, 361
Functions in the expression builder, 549 embed, 362
Gradient fill, 396 inserting, 350
Graphic subsystem settings, 80 regeneration, 175

1241
nanoCAD Mechanica

separate, 361 filters, 199

showing boundary, 381 groups, 198
Importing, 57 tools, 203
table from Excel, 528 Layers dialog box, 189
Improved compatibility mode, 86 Layers filters
In Place Edit, 575 creating, 199
Inquiry, 566 editing, 200
Inserting Layout, 614
block, 326 copy without viewport, 616
external reference, 333 copying, 616
material, 564 creating, 614
raster image, 350 creating from a template, 615
report section, 551 deleting, 618
Installation of the program, 22 renaming, 618
Interface of nanoCAD saving as a template, 617
command line, 31 Layout viewports
context menu, 29 creating, 621
drawing window, 27 editing, 625
managing elements, 41 Layouts
menu bar, 25 managing from the command line, 620
Properties bar, 30 Leaders
status bar, 39 appending, 499
toolbars, 27 detaching, 499
tuning, 87 editing, 500
Internal PDF-plotter, 650 Lengthen objects, 278
Introduction, 21 Line, 225
Isometric views, 589 creating, 225
Join objects, 287 editing, 273
JPG and JPEG saving options, 374 Line Types, 213
JScript Line weight, 159
loading, 656 settings, 160
Justification of the text objects, 413 Linear aligned note, 494
Launch of nanoCAD, 22 Linear dimensions, 438
Layer manager, 189 Linetype Editor, 216
Layers Linetype Manager, 213
configurations, 201 Lineweight Settings Dialog, 160

1242
nanoCAD Mechanica

LISP, 654 New Image from Selection, 352

command, 656 New layout, 614
commands, 656 New origin for coordinates, 125
loading, 654 New origin for coordinates and rotation angle,
125
Managing
Node note, 492
blocks in a current drawing, 329
Notepad, 570
interface elements, 41
Notes
named viewports, 173
chain, 496
named views, 161
comb leader, 487
transparency of objects, 219
construction, 485
visibility of block attributes, 324
editing, 498
Managing layouts from the command line, 620
for multilayered constructions, 490
Measure, 305
linear aligned, 494
Measurement scale, 114
mechanical, 483
Mechanical note, 483
node, 492
Mesh, 585
section, 489
Mirgation of settings, 70
NRX, 654
Mirror, 293
loading, 654
MLine Styles, 229
Model space, 612 NSF, 656

batch plot, 649 loading, 656

Modifying Object snap mode, 138

dimension style, 466 Object snap tracking mode, 147

hatched areas, 398 Objects

custom properties fields, 178
Move, 299
display order, 164
MultiCAD API, 654
Multiline, 228 editing, 265, 270, 272, 291

styles, 229 exploding, 312

Multiline text, 408 groups, 313

Named UCS, 126 joining, 287

lengthen, 278
Named viewports, 170, 173
Named views, 161 managing transparency, 219

nanoCAD user interface, 25 properties, 176

NET, 654 selecting, 250

loading, 655 Offset, 294

OpenGL, 81
New Image, 357
automatic adjustment, 82

1243
nanoCAD Mechanica

manual adjustment, 84 Precision modes, 132

performance checking, 82 grid, 133
Opening a document, 45 object snap, 138
Options dialog box, 70 object snap tracking, 147
Order of objects, 164 ORTHO, 150
Ordinate dimensioning, 442 polar tracking, 136
ORTHO mode, 150 raster snap, 145
Orthographic views, 588 snap, 133
Page Division dialog box, 528 Program installation, 22
Page Setup Manager dialog box, 628 Properties bar, 176
Pan, 152 PUBLISH command, 645
Paper space, 612 Purge, 64
Parameters redefinition, 576 Pyramid, 582
Paste, 268 Quick selection of objects, 258
PLOT command, 641 Radial dimensioning, 450
Plot Preview dialog box, 640 Raster
Plot Style manager, 637 New, 357
Plotting, 641 new image from selection, 352
custom paper formats, 636 Rasterization, 352
documents, 628 save as raster, 356
Page Setup, 628 Raster images boundary, 381
Plot Preview, 640 Raster snap, 145
Plot Style, 637 Rasterizaion, 352
Point, 221 Ray, 223
creating, 221 Recovery of Document, 63
size and style, 222 Rectangle
Polar array, 297 by three points, 235
Polar coordinates, 120 by two points, 234
Polar tracking mode, 136 Rectangular array, 296
Polygon, 232 Rectangular boundary, 379
creating, 232 Rectangular viewport, 621
Polygonal boundary, 381 Redefining
Polygonal viewport, 622 block, 328
Polyline, 226 block’s attributes, 328
creating, 226 Redefining parameters, 576
editing, 274, 288 Redo, 38

1244
nanoCAD Mechanica

Regenerate, 578 Setting

Removing objects from the working set, 339 custom paper formats, 636
Renaming layout, 618 show boundary for a raster image, 381
Reports creating, 551 show boundary for a viewport, 627
grouping cells, 562 UCS for viewports, 131
merging cells, 558 variable, 568
Restoring dimension, 462 views, 588
Reverse, 286 Settings
Revision cloud, 405 image, 359
Right button settings, 38 layers' profiles, 100
Rotate, 300 right button, 38
Save as Raster, 356 saving and transferring, 106
Saving Settings mirgation, 70
block in a separate file, 54 Shade display style, 590
blocks, 331 Shape, 399
document, 51 Showing boundary, 377
document with another name, 53 Simplify text mode, 86
external reference changes, 340 Size and style of points, 222
layout as a template, 617 Smart trim, 281
Saving and transferring settings to another Snap mode, 134
computer, 106
Software Extensions, 654
Scale, 109, 301
Solid, 403
for dimensions, 435
Sphere, 581
measurement, 114
Spline
symbol, 110
creating, 245
Searching and replacing text, 424 editing, 274, 289
Section note, 489
Status bar, 39
Selection of objects, 250
Stretch, 302
all, 254
Surfaces, 579
quick selection, 258 Symbol scale, 110
superimposed, 255 System requirements, 22
using the command line, 252 Table Edit dialog box, 518
using the Properties bar, 256 Table editor, 518
Send backward, 166 Table of Layers dialog box, 100
Send to back, 165 Tables
Separate Raster Image, 361 cell properties, 526, 534

1245
nanoCAD Mechanica

converting, 533 named, 126

creating, 508 Undo, 37
editing in the dialog box, 518 Utilities, 62
editing on the drawing, 515 Value Picker dialog box, 566
editing the size of rows and columns, 527 VBScript
expression builder, 546 loading, 656
import, export from MS Excel, 528 Vectors breaking,
inserting material, 564 284 extending,
page division, 528 282
reports, 551 smart trimming, 281
Template usage, 44 trimming, 279
Text, 406 Vertical dimensioning, 438
changing case, 429 Video subsystem performance check, 82
editing, 412, 416 Viewports, 621 by
finding and replacing, 428 object, 624
justifying, 413 editing, 276
multiline, 408 named, 170, 173
searching and replacing, 424 of model space, 168
single-line, 406 polygonal, 622
Text styles, 420 rectangular, 621
Texts and Dimensions to Front, 166 setting UCS, 131
Texts to Front, 166 showing boundary, 627
TIFF saving options, 371 Views
Torus, 582 isometric, 589
Trademarks, 20 named, 161
Transmittal Package Creation, 60 orthographic, 588
Trim vectors, 279 Visual styles, 589
Tuning Walk, 159
interface, 87 Ways to edit objects, 265
migration of settings, 70 WBLOCK command, 54
program parameters, 70 Wedge, 580
UCS, 122 Width of lines on the screen, 159
aligning to an object, 124 Windows placing, 41
changing the position from the command line, Wipeout, 404
123 Wireframe display style, 590
for viewports, 131 Working
icon, 126

1246
nanoCAD Mechanica

with commands, 36 Workspace managing, 41

with documents, 43 World coordinate system, 122
with text, 406 Zoom, 152
Working with raster images, 349

1247